ETERNITY NE

System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ETERNITY NE
The Next Generation IP PBX for Small Businesses

System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Documentation Disclaimer
Matrix Comsec reserves the right to make changes in the design or components of the product as engineering and
manufacturing may warrant. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This is a general documentation for all models of the product. The product may not support all the features and
facilities described in the documentation.

Information in this documentation may change from time to time. Matrix Comsec reserves the right to revise
information in this publication for any reason without prior notice. Matrix Comsec makes no warranties with respect
to this documentation and disclaims any implied warranties. While every precaution has been taken in the
preparation of this system manual, Matrix Comsec assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any
liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein.

Neither Matrix Comsec nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for damages,
losses, costs or expenses incurred by the purchaser or third parties as a result of: accident, misuse or abuse of this
product or unauthorized modifications, repairs or alterations to this product or failure to strictly comply with Matrix
Comsec's operating and maintenance instructions.

Copyright
All rights reserved. No part of this system manual may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means
without the prior written consent of Matrix Comsec.

Version 1
Release date: February 24, 2011

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Contents

Introduction..................................................................................................................................................... 1
Welcome ............................................................................................................................................................. 1
About this System Manual .................................................................................................................................. 1

Know Your ETERNITY NE .............................................................................................................................. 5

The Interfaces ..................................................................................................................................................... 7
Configurations of ETERNITY NE ...................................................................................................................... 11
Hardware Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 13
Applications of ETERNITY NE .......................................................................................................................... 15

Installing ETERNITY NE ............................................................................................................................... 17

Preparing for Installation ................................................................................................................................... 17
Getting Started .................................................................................................................................................. 19
Protecting ETERNITY NE and Yourself ............................................................................................................ 20
Connecting CO Trunks ...................................................................................................................................... 23
Connecting to Mobile Networks ........................................................................................................................ 24
Connecting to the VoIP Network ....................................................................................................................... 27
Connecting Single Line Telephones ................................................................................................................. 30
Connecting Digital Key Phones ......................................................................................................................... 31
Connecting SIP Extensions ............................................................................................................................... 37
Connecting Door Phone .................................................................................................................................... 45
Installing the Voice Mail System ....................................................................................................................... 48
Starting Up ETERNITY NE ............................................................................................................................... 49

Configuring ETERNITY NE........................................................................................................................... 51

Configuration Modes ......................................................................................................................................... 51
Configuration Tools ........................................................................................................................................... 52
Configuring using the Web-based GUI: Jeeves ................................................................................................ 53
Configuring using a Telephone ......................................................................................................................... 58
Configuring using FTP ...................................................................................................................................... 61

Basic Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 63

Using the Configuration Wizard ........................................................................................................................ 65
Using Basic Settings Links ................................................................................................................................ 65
Region ............................................................................................................................................................... 67
Pre-requisites .................................................................................................................................................... 68
Extension Numbering Plan ................................................................................................................................ 70
Naming Trunks .................................................................................................................................................. 73
Time Tables ...................................................................................................................................................... 74

Table of Contents i

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operator ............................................................................................................................................................ 76
SLT Extensions ................................................................................................................................................. 79
DKP Extensions .............................................................................................................................................. 100
SIP Extensions ................................................................................................................................................ 130
Door Phone ..................................................................................................................................................... 164
Call Pickup Group ........................................................................................................................................... 168
CO Trunks ....................................................................................................................................................... 170
Mobile Trunks .................................................................................................................................................. 191
VoIP Port ......................................................................................................................................................... 208
SIP Trunks ...................................................................................................................................................... 214
Emergency Numbers ...................................................................................................................................... 240
Network Parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 243

Voice Mail System....................................................................................................................................... 251

VMS General Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 253
Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile .................................................................................................................... 257
Distribution List ................................................................................................................................................ 261
Graphs and Nodes .......................................................................................................................................... 263
SMTP Settings ................................................................................................................................................ 270
Recording Voice Messages ............................................................................................................................ 273
Recording Extension Names ........................................................................................................................... 281

Features and Facilities ............................................................................................................................... 283

Abbreviated Dialing ......................................................................................................................................... 283
Access Codes ................................................................................................................................................. 297
Account Codes ................................................................................................................................................ 303
Alarms ............................................................................................................................................................. 311
Alternate Number Dialing ................................................................................................................................ 325
Auto Answer .................................................................................................................................................... 333
Auto Call Back (ACB) ...................................................................................................................................... 337
Auto Redial ...................................................................................................................................................... 342
Automatic Number Translation ........................................................................................................................ 346
Barge-In .......................................................................................................................................................... 351
BCCH Selection .............................................................................................................................................. 354
Behind the PBX Application ............................................................................................................................ 360
Call Back on Trunk Ports ................................................................................................................................ 365
Call Budget ...................................................................................................................................................... 373
Call Budget on Trunk ...................................................................................................................................... 377
Call Chaining ................................................................................................................................................... 382
Call Cost Calculation (CCC) ............................................................................................................................ 384
Call Cost Display ............................................................................................................................................. 394
Call Duration Control (CDC) ............................................................................................................................ 396
Call Duration Display ....................................................................................................................................... 401
Call Forward .................................................................................................................................................... 402
Call Forward-Scheduled .................................................................................................................................. 406
Call Forward-Remote ...................................................................................................................................... 414
Call Hold .......................................................................................................................................................... 420
Call Logs ......................................................................................................................................................... 423
Call Park .......................................................................................................................................................... 427
Call Pickup ...................................................................................................................................................... 430
Call Progress Tones ........................................................................................................................................ 433
Call Restriction based on IP Address .............................................................................................................. 443
Call Taping ...................................................................................................................................................... 446
Call Toggle ...................................................................................................................................................... 451
Call Transfer .................................................................................................................................................... 455
Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) ......................................................................................... 461

ii Table of Contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) ........................................................................................................... 465
Cancel All Extension Features ........................................................................................................................ 467
Class of Service (COS) ................................................................................................................................... 468
CLI Based Routing .......................................................................................................................................... 473
Closed User Group (CUG) .............................................................................................................................. 476
CO Call Waiting ............................................................................................................................................... 481
Conference Dial-In .......................................................................................................................................... 482
Conference-3 Party ......................................................................................................................................... 489
Conference-Multiparty ..................................................................................................................................... 492
Conflict Dialing ................................................................................................................................................ 496
Conversation Recording .................................................................................................................................. 499
Customer Name .............................................................................................................................................. 502
Day Night Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 504
Daylight Saving Time (DST) ............................................................................................................................ 508
Default Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 514
Department Call .............................................................................................................................................. 521
Dial By Name .................................................................................................................................................. 535
Dial Plan .......................................................................................................................................................... 538
Dialed Number Directory ................................................................................................................................. 541
Digest Authentication ...................................................................................................................................... 543
Digital Key Phone-Operation ........................................................................................................................... 545
Digital Output Port (DOP) ................................................................................................................................ 559
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) ............................................................................................................................. 561
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) .............................................................................................................. 567
Direct Station Selection Console ..................................................................................................................... 574
Distinctive Rings .............................................................................................................................................. 576
Do Not Disturb (DND) ..................................................................................................................................... 581
Door Phone ..................................................................................................................................................... 587
Dynamic Lock .................................................................................................................................................. 592
Emergency Detection and Reporting .............................................................................................................. 600
Emergency Dialing .......................................................................................................................................... 602
Flashing on Trunks .......................................................................................................................................... 604
Follow Me ........................................................................................................................................................ 605
Forced Answer ................................................................................................................................................ 608
Forced Call Disconnection .............................................................................................................................. 610
Help Desk ........................................................................................................................................................ 613
Hot Desking ..................................................................................................................................................... 615
Hotline ............................................................................................................................................................. 617
Incoming CLI Modification ............................................................................................................................... 620
Interrupt Request (IR) ..................................................................................................................................... 623
Last Caller Recall ............................................................................................................................................ 626
Last Number Redial ........................................................................................................................................ 627
Least Cost Routing (LCR) ............................................................................................................................... 628
Least Cost Routing - Carrier Pre-Selection ..................................................................................................... 640
License Management ...................................................................................................................................... 641
Live Call Screening ......................................................................................................................................... 652
Live Call Supervision ....................................................................................................................................... 655
Logical Partition ............................................................................................................................................... 657
Macros ............................................................................................................................................................ 660
Meet Me Paging .............................................................................................................................................. 663
Message Wait ................................................................................................................................................. 665
Mobility Extension ........................................................................................................................................... 670
Music on Hold (MOH) ...................................................................................................................................... 677
Multi-Stage Dialing .......................................................................................................................................... 678
Mute ................................................................................................................................................................ 681
Number Patterns ............................................................................................................................................. 683

Table of Contents iii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OFF-Hook Alert ............................................................................................................................................... 686
Paging ............................................................................................................................................................. 688
Peer-to-Peer Calling ........................................................................................................................................ 692
Presence ......................................................................................................................................................... 696
Priority ............................................................................................................................................................. 704
Privacy ............................................................................................................................................................ 708
Quick Dial ........................................................................................................................................................ 710
Raid ................................................................................................................................................................. 712
RCOC (Return Call to Original Caller) ............................................................................................................ 715
Real Time Clock (RTC) ................................................................................................................................... 719
Reminder ......................................................................................................................................................... 721
Room Monitor .................................................................................................................................................. 729
Selective Port Access ..................................................................................................................................... 731
SIM Card Balance and Recharging ................................................................................................................. 733
Self Ring Test .................................................................................................................................................. 736
Static Routing Table ........................................................................................................................................ 737
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) .................................................................................................... 740
Station Message Detail Recording–Storage ................................................................................................... 741
Station Message Detail Recording–Online ..................................................................................................... 747
Station Message Detail Recording–Report ..................................................................................................... 754
Station Message Detail Recording–Posting .................................................................................................... 769
Station Message Detail Recording–Backup .................................................................................................... 795
System Activity Log ......................................................................................................................................... 798
System Activity Log Display ............................................................................................................................ 803
System Fault Log ............................................................................................................................................ 804
System Fault Log Display ............................................................................................................................... 809
System Parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 810
System Security .............................................................................................................................................. 817
System Timers and Counts ............................................................................................................................. 823
Time Zone Display .......................................................................................................................................... 828
Toll Control ...................................................................................................................................................... 829
Trunk Auto Answer .......................................................................................................................................... 836
Trunk Reservation ........................................................................................................................................... 841
User Absent/Present ....................................................................................................................................... 845
User Password ................................................................................................................................................ 847
Virtual Extension ............................................................................................................................................. 849
Voice Help ....................................................................................................................................................... 853
Voice Message Applications ........................................................................................................................... 854
Walk-In Class of Service ................................................................................................................................. 869

Voice Mail Features .................................................................................................................................... 875

Alarms and Reminders .................................................................................................................................... 875
Broadcast Message ........................................................................................................................................ 881
Call Transfer Types ......................................................................................................................................... 882
Dial by Extension Number ............................................................................................................................... 884
Dial By Name .................................................................................................................................................. 885
Email Based Notification ................................................................................................................................. 887
Forwarding Messages ..................................................................................................................................... 889
General Mailbox .............................................................................................................................................. 891
Leaving a Message ......................................................................................................................................... 892
Listening to Messages .................................................................................................................................... 894
Mailbox Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 895
Message Notification ....................................................................................................................................... 896
Message Verification ....................................................................................................................................... 897
Sending Messages .......................................................................................................................................... 899
Redirecting Messages ..................................................................................................................................... 901

iv Table of Contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance and Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................... 903
Configuration Upload ...................................................................................................................................... 903
Firmware Upgrade .......................................................................................................................................... 909
System Debug ................................................................................................................................................. 914
PCAP Trace .................................................................................................................................................... 918

System Status ............................................................................................................................................. 921

System Details ................................................................................................................................................ 921
Voice Mail Memory Status .............................................................................................................................. 922
Mobile Status .................................................................................................................................................. 924
VoIP Status ..................................................................................................................................................... 927
SIP Trunk Status ............................................................................................................................................. 928
SIP Extension Status ...................................................................................................................................... 929
Network Status ................................................................................................................................................ 930

Appendix ..................................................................................................................................................... 931

Technical Specifications .................................................................................................................................. 931
System Resources .......................................................................................................................................... 934
Prompts ........................................................................................................................................................... 936
Default Area Code Table: USA ....................................................................................................................... 945
Feature List ..................................................................................................................................................... 962
Features at a Glance ....................................................................................................................................... 964
Acronyms ........................................................................................................................................................ 971
Warranty Statement ........................................................................................................................................ 976
Open Source Licensing Terms and Conditions ............................................................................................... 978

Table of Contents v

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 vi Table of Contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 1 Introduction

Welcome
Thank you for choosing the Matrix ETERNITY NE! We hope you will make optimum use of this intelligent,
integrated IP-PBX. Please read this document carefully to get acquainted with the product before installing and
operating it.

About this System Manual

This document provides detailed information and instructions for installing and operating ETERNITY NE.

You may refer to the ETERNITY NE Quick Start and the ETERNITY NE User Card shipped with the system.

You may also refer the User Card for the proprietary digital key phone/Extended IP Phone shipped with the system,
for instructions on using the features of the ETERNITY NE.

This is a common documentation for all configurations of ETERNITY NE.

Intended Audience
This System Manual is aimed at:

• System Engineers, who will install, maintain and support the ETERNITY NE. System Engineers are
persons who customize the system configuration to meet the requirements of the organization/users. It is
assumed that they are experienced in installing PBX, are familiar with telecom wiring technology, how it
works, and the various technical terms and functions associated with it.

No one, other than the System Engineer is permitted to make any alterations to the configuration of the
ETERNITY NE.

• System Administrators, who are persons who will administer the ETERNITY NE. Generally an operator/
receptionist in an organization, or the staff manning the reception or front desk area of the establishment
are selected as System Administrators.

It is assumed that the System Administrators have some previous experience in administering a PBX and
its Terminals and Consoles. The System Administrators are not expected to install and configure the PBX,
but only the routine jobs and features that are specific to them like generating SMDR reports, Setting
report filters, configuring the features, Setting Alarms, reminders, etc.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Users, persons/organizations who will use the resources of the ETERNITY NE. They may be personnel of
small and home businesses, and other commercial and public organizations/institutions.

Organization of this Document

This system manual contains the following chapters:

• Chapter 1: Introduction: gives an overview of this document, its purpose, intended audience,
organization, terms and conventions used to present information and instructions.

• Chapter 2: Know Your ETERNITY NE: describes the system’s hardware, its interfaces, application
scenarios, and the available configurations.

• Chapter 3: Installing ETERNITY NE: gives step-by-step instructions for preparing for and installing the
ETERNITY NE, connecting the cable lines, and powering ON the system. It also recommends safety
measures for protecting the system and persons handling the installation and maintenance.

• Chapter 4: Configuring ETERNITY NE: contains description of the different tools available to configure
ETERNITY.

• Chapter 5: Configuring Basic Settings: describes the basic configuration required for the trunks and
extensions.

• Chapter 6: Voice Mail System: describes the Voice Mail System configuration, when the voice mail
module is installed in the ETERNITY.

• Chapter 7: Features and Facilities: describes in detail each feature and facility offered by the ETERNITY
NE.

The features are arranged alphabetically by Name to make it easy for you to locate the description you
want to look up.

• Chapter 8: Maintenance: provides instructions for back-up, generating system reports, debugging, and
trouble shooting.

• Chapter 9: Voice Mail Features: describes the features and facilities offered by the VMS installed in
ETERNITY NE.

• Chapter 10: System Status: displays status of the System, Network, Mobile ports and SIP Trunks.

How to Read this System Manual

This document is organized in a manner to help you get familiar with ETERNITY NE, help you with system
installation, configuration and use of the features.

This System Manual is presented in a manner that will help you find the information you need easily and quickly.

You may use the table of contents and the Index to navigate through this document to the relevant topic or
information you want to look up.

2 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instructions
The instructions in this document are written in a step-by-step format. Each step, its outcome and indication/
notification, wherever they occur, have been described.

Access Codes
Access codes are strings of digits dialed by an extension to
• call another extension, Department Group.
• grab a trunk line
• use a Feature, e.g. Do Not Disturb, Call Forward

The Access Codes provided in the instructions throughout this document, are default access codes. It is possible to
change the Access Codes according to user requirement and preferences. Verify with the Installer, if the default
Access Codes have been changed, and use the codes configured by the Installer. For more information, read the
topic “Access Codes” in this document.

Notices
The following symbols have been used for notices to draw your attention to important items.

Important: to indicate something that requires your special attention or to remind you of
something you might need to do when you are using the system.

Caution: to indicate an action or condition that is likely to result in malfunction or damage to the
system or your property.

Warning: to indicate a hazard or an action that will cause damage to the system and or cause
bodily harm to the user.

Tip: to indicate a helpful hint giving you an alternative way to operate the system or carry out a
procedure, or use a feature more efficiently.

Terminology used in this System Manual

The technical terms and Acronyms used in this Manual are standard terms, commonly used in the
telecommunications and data communications industry. Considering the broad group of intended users of this
manual, wherever possible, use of jargon has been avoided.

Acronyms have been defined in the text and a list of the same is appended.

Some of the terms specific to this Manual that you will encounter are defined below:

• 'ETERNITY', 'System', 'PBX': These words are used interchangeably and synonymously to mean all
models of ETERNITY NE.

• Called party/Callee: the person to whom the call is made.

• Calling party/Caller: the person who makes a call.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • CO Network: The public telephone exchange.

• CO Lines: The lines subscribed from the CO Network. In this document it refers to Analog, two-wire Trunk
Lines.

• Digital Key Phone (DKP): refers to EON, the proprietary digital key phone of Matrix supplied with the
ETERNITY. The term 'Digital Key Phone' refers to all models of EON.

• Extension: it is a telephone instrument, SLT, DKP, IP-Phone connected to ETERNITY.

• External Calls: calls made by users of ETERNITY to subscribers of PSTN, PLMN, ITSPs, etc.

• External Numbers: numbers of parties/individuals outside the PBX or PBX network. The unique number
string given to subscribers of PSTN, PLMN, ITSP, etc.

• Internal Calls: calls made from and received by one extension to another extension of the ETERNITY.

• Internal numbers: same as extension numbers.

• Mobile Extension: A mobile/landline phone used as a remote extension of ETERNITY. You can access all
the features of an extension of ETERNITY from the mobile/landline phone.

• Port: the physical interfaces on the cards for trunk lines and extension lines.

• Service Provider: the providers of telecom network lines/Internet - POTS, PSTN, GSM, and Internet
Telephony Service Providers (ITSP).

• Single Line Telephone (SLT): any standard two-wire telephone attached as extensions of the ETERNITY.

• Station: same as extension.

• System Administrator Commands/SA Commands: number strings dialed from the System
Administrator access/mode to operate features or set/cancel features for other extensions.

• System Commands/SE Commands: number strings dialed from the System Engineer access/mode to
configure the system features/functions.

• CO trunks: Two-wire trunks, i.e. analog trunk lines from the POTS network.

Using this Manual, you will be able to set up, operate and make optimum use of this feature-packed PBX.

If you encounter any technical problems, please contact your Dealer/reseller or the Matrix Support team.

4 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 2 Know Your ETERNITY NE

Introduction
The Matrix ETERNITY NE is an all integrated IP-PBX with seamless mobility. It caters to the communication
requirements of small businesses.

ETERNITY NE offers connectivity to analog and digital networks: CO, Mobile and VoIP. So, you have access to
multiple telecom networks on a single platform. The system's intelligent Least Cost Routing logic diverts your calls
through the appropriate network, ensuring least possible call cost.

Besides Operator consoles (Digital Key phones, Direct Station Selection consoles) and standard telephones, you
can also connect a Fax machine, a door phone, and a door lock release relay to the ETERNITY NE.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Intelligent features like Auto Attendant, CLI based Routing and Dial by Name ensure efficient call management and
prompt response to callers.

Least Cost Routing and Call Budgeting help reduce communication cost and enhances productivity.

ETERNITY NE can route a VoIP call on to GSM. In the same way, a call can be routed either on VoIP, GSM or CO.
Further, you can select Fixed or Least Cost Routing to route outgoing calls. ETERNITY NE can handle calls on all
ports simultaneously, allowing full traffic on all ports.

ETERNITY NE can work as an adjunct to your existing telephony infrastructure, as a Gateway, saving you the cost
of equipment replacement, wiring and installation, while giving you multiple network connectivity and a host of
intelligent features.

It is a unique convergence of innovative switching technology and intelligent software features.

The system is built on PCM/TDM, 100 percent non-blocking, digital technology, providing high density switching,
and is powered by a 32-bit RISC processor. Ensuring reliable, efficient, and unrestricted simultaneous
communication (incoming and outgoing) by all users.

Key Features
• Auto Attendant
• Call back on Mobile Phone
• Call Budget on Trunks and Extensions
• Call Forking
• CDR Reports
• Conference Dial-in
• Closed User Group (With/without Exchange ID)
• Conversation Recording
• Door Phone with Relay Connectivity
• Fax over IP (FoIP)
• IP Trunks and Extensions
• Mobile Twinning (Dual Ring)
• Multi-Party Conference
• Presence Indication and IM
• Remote Management
• Return Call to Original Caller (RCOC)
• Scheduled Call Forward
• SIP Registrar and Proxy Server
• Voice Mail to Email Notification
• VoIP calls over UMTS (3G)

Also refer “Appendix” for a complete list of Hardware and Software features and technical specifications.

ETERNITY NE is easy to install and operate. The built-in web server Jeeves allows you to configure the system
parameters and features on site and also from a remote location using any Internet browser.

6 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Interfaces

The ETERNITY NE supports the following interfaces for connecting to different telecom networks, digital key
phones, standard telephones and external devices such as a Door Phone and a Door Lock release.

The CO Interface
The CO Interface enables the ETERNITY NE to be connected to the PSTN Network. The PSTN Networks across
the world support various standards and differ in features. For example, some networks support Caller ID
Presentation using DTMF signaling, while some support Caller ID Presentation using FSK signaling; some
networks offer 600 Ohms Impedance, while others offer complex impedance.

The versatile architecture of ETERNITY NE allows it to be connected to such networks differing in their
characteristics.

The CO Interface supports following features:

• Programmable AC Impedance - 600, 900 and various complex impedances.

• Answer Supervision/Polarity Reversal
• Selectable Disconnect Supervision - Polarity Reversal, Open Loop Disconnect
• Selectable Caller ID Presentation - DTMF, FSK
• Programmable Dialing method - Pulse/Tone (with programmable Pulse Ratio/DTMF On-Off period)
• Programmable Speech Tx Gain
• Programmable Speech Rx Gain
• Programmable Disconnect Tone Sensing
• Programmable Flash Timer
• Programmable Loop Current

The Mobile Interface

The Mobile Interface enables the ETERNITY NE to be connected to GSM/UMTS network operators worldwide.
ETERNITY NE's Mobile Interface supports full Quad-Band Operation (GSM850, 900, 1800, 1900MHz) for world-
wide use, for Global, Inter and Intra country roaming.

The Mobile Interface supports the following features:

• GSM 2G, GSM 3G network support.
• Selectable GSM Frequency Bands - 900, 1800, 1900, 850 + 1900, 900+1800 MHz.
• Programmable Network Selection - Manual and Automatic.
• Programmable Network Operator Codes in order of priority (from 1 to 9) in case of Manual Network
Selection.
• Programmable Speech Tx Gain
• Programmable Speech Rx Gain
• Selectable Incoming Call Modes - Allow, Ignore, Reject.
• SIM Card protection with a Personal Identification Number (PIN) and Personal Unlock Keyword (PUK).
• Wireless WAN support over 3G, which can be used to make VoIP calls (if VoIP module is installed).

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The VoIP Interface
The Voice-over-IP (VoIP) Interface routes over the Internet, all the outgoing and incoming calls made or received
by the extensions of the ETERNITY and extensions of other PBXs that are networked with the ETERNITY.

The VoIP Interface supports Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), the industry standard VoIP.

The VoIP Interface supports SIP Trunks and SIP Extensions1.

With SIP Trunks users can make IP calls using the SIP Server of the Internet Telephony Service Providers (ITSPs).

The VoIP Card has an in-built Registrar Server that allows any SIP enabled device like a Wi-Fi mobile handset, a
PDA or an IP-Phone to be registered with it and function as the 'SIP Extension' of the ETERNITY. The SIP
Extension users can make and receive calls to any extension user of the ETERNITY as well as any external
numbers over PSTN, GSM, VoIP. With SIP Extensions, organizations can communicate and stay connected at the
lowest cost without any geographical restrictions.

The VoIP Interface supports adaptive jitter buffer for reducing delay and improving speech quality.

The key features of the VoIP Interface are:

• 4 SIP Trunks - for Proxy as well as Peer-to-Peer (non-Proxy) calls.
• Up to 16 SIP Extensions - Standard IP Phones and Matrix Extended IP Phones.
• 8 Simultaneous Voice Calls.
• Selectable Network Assignment (Connection Type) - Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE.
• Selectable DNS - Automatic and Static.
• Dynamic DNS for client.
• STUN.
• TCP and UDP NAT Keep Alive.
• Symmetric RTP Selection.
• MAC Address Cloning option.
• Fax over IP - T.38 (UDPTL), T.38 (RTP) and Pass Through.
• Send CLI Option for outgoing calls
• Selectable DTMF - RTP (RFC 2833), SIP Info, InBand
• Flash Detection using SIP INFO and RFC2833.
• Broad Voice Codec Selection: G.723, G.729ab, GSM FR, iLBC - 30 ms, iLBC - 20 ms, G. 711 µ-Law, and
G. 711 A-Law.
• Quality of Service - SIP DiffServe/ToS, RTP DiffServe/ToS
• VoIP Silence Detection and Disconnection.
• Voice Mail Subscription on SIP Extensions.
• Busy Lamp Field Subscription on SIP Extensions.
• Upto 10 Call Appearances on Extended IP Phone Extensions.
• Registration of SIP Extensions from 3 different locations.

The Digital Key Phone Interface

The Digital Key Phone Interface of the ETERNITY is for the purpose of connecting the proprietary Digital Key
Phones of Matrix Comsec, namely EON, the PC-based phone EONSOFT and the proprietary Direct Station
Selection (DSS) Consoles with the ETERNITY.

1. License required for SIP Extensions.

8 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Digital Key Phone Interface has the following features:
• Programmable Call Capacity - up to 10 Call Appearances/Call Loops on a single DKP.
• Selectable Headset and Speaker (Hands-free) modes.
• Selectable Auto Answer mode.
• Programmable Headset Speech Tx and Rx Gains.
• Programmable Hands-free (Speaker) Speech Tx and Rx Gains.
• Programmable Key Click Volume levels.
• Programmable Key Maps for Operator, Executive, Hotel Attendant and Guests.
• 4-Level Adjustable Backlight and Contrast Controls
• Selectable Ring Types.
• Ringer Volume Control.
• Programmable Ringer Modes - Ring Immediately, Ring if Idle, Ring after Delay, Ring Off.
• Ring On Speakerphone and Ring on Headset options.

The Single Line Telephone Interface

The Single Line Telephone (SLT) Interface allows any standard, two-wire, analog single line telephone instrument -
rotary, pulse-tone, cordless, feature phones with or without Calling Line Identification - to be connected to the
ETERNITY as extension phone.

The SLT Interface has the following features:

• Selectable Caller ID Presentation - DTMF, FSK

• Programmable Ring Type - Trapezoidal, Sinusoidal, Low Trapezoidal, Low Sinusoidal.
• Programmable AC Impedance - 600, 900, 350 + (100 || 0.21uF), 220+ (820 || 120nF).
• Selectable Answer Signaling.
• Selectable Disconnect Signaling - Polarity Reversal, Open Loop Disconnect.
• Programmable Speech Rx Gain.
• Programmable Speech Tx Gain.
• Programmable Flash Timer.
• Programmable Loop Current.
• Fax machine connectivity.

Voice Mail System (VMS)

ETERNITY NE supports a full-fledged, 'in-skin' Voice Mail System to provide mailbox facility to all its extensions
(DKP, SLT and SIP).

The key auto attendant and voice mail features supported by ETERNITY's Voice Mail System are:
• Programmable Mailbox Size.
• Programmable Message Length.
• Welcome greetings according to the time of the day.
• Different voice greetings for different time zones.
• Special greetings for holidays.
• Five call transfer types: none, blind, wait for ring, wait for answer, and screened.
• Dial by extension.
• Dial by name.
• Personalized greetings for each mailbox.
• Individual mailbox size.
• Call forward to Voice Mail.
• Message forwarding.
• Distribution lists.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Broadcast message.
• Message Wait Notification.
• Voice-guided Alarms and Reminders.
• Redirecting messages.

ETERNITY's Voice Mail System also forms the basis of other features like:
• Conversation Recording
• Call Taping

LAN Interface
ETERNITY NE has a single Ethernet port, to which you can connect a standalone computer or to a LAN Switch.

You will need to connect ETERNITY to a computer to:

• access the web-based programming tool Jeeves.
• capture and download Station Message Detail Records (SMDR): SMDR reports, SMDR Online and SMDR
Posting.
• capture and download System Activity Log and System Fault Log.

WAN Interface
ETERNITY NE supports WAN interface over Ethernet port and Wireless WAN over the UMTS Mobile Port with 3G
SIM.

When you use Wireless WAN over UMTS Mobile port, you can use the Ethernet Port as LAN.

Door Phone
You can connect any standard 4-wire door phone to the Door Phone port of the ETERNITY. The door phone can be
operated in conjunction with a Door Lock connected to the Digital Output Port.

Refer System Capacity and Resources in the Appendix, for an at-a-glance view of the ports available for each of
the aforementioned Interface options on all configurations of ETERNITY NE.

10 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configurations of ETERNITY NE

The Matrix ETERNITY NE is available in four configurations:

ETERNITY NE6

Built-in interfaces Optional interfaces

• 6 CO Trunks • Mobile
• 2 DKP ports • VoIP
• 14 SLT ports • Voice Mail System
• Door Phone

ETERNITY NE4

Built-in interfaces Optional interfaces

• 4 CO Trunks • Mobile
• 2 DKP ports • VoIP
• 10 SLT ports • Voice Mail System
• Door Phone

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ETERNITY NE3

Built-in interfaces Optional interfaces

• 3 CO Trunks • Mobile
• 2 DKP ports • VoIP
• 6 SLT ports • Voice Mail System
• Door Phone

ETERNITY NE2

Built-in interfaces Optional interfaces

• 2 CO Trunks • Mobile
• 2 DKP ports • VoIP
• 4 SLT ports • Voice Mail System
• Door Phone

12 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hardware Overview

Illustrated below are design of the enclosure and the position of connectors on each configuration of ETERNITY
NE.

ETERNITY NE6

ETERNITY NE4

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ETERNITY NE3

ETERNITY NE

14 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications of ETERNITY NE

The Matrix ETERNITY NE is designed for small and home offices, and nascent enterprises.

Illustrated below is an example of how ETERNITY NE can be optimally used by small businesses, taking full
advantage of its enterprise grade features and facilities.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 16 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3 Installing ETERNITY NE

Preparing for Installation

Before you begin the installation of the ETERNITY NE, make sure you have the following items ready:
Have the listed below items ready:

• A suitable location to install the ETERNITY NE.

• Necessary telecom wiring in place, with wall jacks for extension lines at the required locations.

• Standard, good quality, twisted pair telephone cables with 0.5 mm conductor diameter, with RJ11 plug.

• A dedicated Power supply outlet close to the system.

• For the SLT ports, arrange for as many standard analog telephone instruments as required to connect as
SLT extensions. You may select any standard telephone instrument like rotary phone, Pulse/Tone
switchable push-button phone, Feature phone or Cordless phone.

• A fax machine, as required, to connect to SLT port.

• One or two digital key phones (Matrix proprietary phones), as required, to connect as DKP extensions.

• For the CO ports, arrange for one or more active Analog, two-wire trunk lines, as required.

• For the Mobile ports, A SIM card to test mobile network connectivity, if GSM/UMTS module is present.

• SIP Account information to be configured in the system to test SIP calls, if VoIP module is present.

• Any standard SIP Phone or Matrix Extended IP Phone to register as SIP Extension of ETERNITY NE, if
required. The first 8 SIP Extensions you connect are free.

To connect additional 8 SIP Extensions, you would need to purchase the IP8 License.

• If Voice Mail System module (VMS) is present, the Pen Drive and the License Voucher (provided by Matrix
with the VMS package).

• A standalone computer or a computer connected in a LAN to access Jeeves, the web-based configuration
tool of ETERNITY NE.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation Site
The ETERNITY NE maybe be mounted on a table or on the wall. Select an appropriate site to install the ETERNITY
NE taking into consideration the following recommendations and precautions:

• The site of installation should be well-ventilated, moisture and dust free, and not exposed to direct sunlight,
heat or excessive cold.
• The site should not be near any source of electromagnetic noise such as any radio equipment, heavy
transformers, faulty electric chokes of tube-lights, any device having faulty coil, etc.

• The site should be at equidistant from all the extensions to simplify cabling network and reduce cabling
costs.

• The site should allow installation of the system at a clearance of at least 3.5 feet off the ground. Installation
at this height makes preventive or corrective maintenance tasks easy.

• If the system has GSM/UMTS module, the site should have sufficient network coverage available.

For more details, refer “Protecting ETERNITY NE and Yourself”.

Cables
• Select standard, good quality telephone cables with 0.5 mm conductor diameter for the internal as well as
over-head cabling.

• Use twisted pair wires to reduce interference.

• Use separate cable conduits for electrical and telephone cables.

• The length of the cables must not be too long. They must have minimum number of joints. This will help
you detect cable faults easily.

Extension Telephones
Select appropriate telephone instruments to be connected to the SLT ports. You may connect any standard
telephone instrument like rotary phone, Pulse/Tone switchable push-button phone, Feature phone or Cordless
phone. So, you can also use your existing telephone instruments.

Provide Power Supply

• The DC Adapter (24VDC-2 Amp) provided with ETERNITY NE works with input voltage ranging between
100-240VAC.

• Arrange for a separate power point and switch, close to the system.

• Power supply for the system must be separate from other heavy electrical loads like Air-conditioners,
heaters, welding machines, electrical motors, etc.

• The use of a UPS is recommended in case you experience frequent power failures.

18 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Getting Started
• Unpack ETERNITY NE and verify your package contents. In case any of the items is missing or damaged, contact
your Dealer/Distributor.

Package Contents
• ETERNITY NE with side clamps.
• Two self tapping screws (M7x30 PAN PH).
• Screw Grips
• Power Adapter 24VDC, 2Amp
• Ethernet cable
• CD ROM (System Manual, Quick Start, User Card)
• ETERNITY NE User Card
• ETERNITY NE Quick Start
• Mounting Template
• Warranty Card

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Protecting ETERNITY NE and Yourself

The ETERNITY NE is an electronic device. When you handle any electrical or electronic equipment, you are in a
situation that could cause you bodily harm, besides damage to the product. When handling any electronic
equipment, you must be aware of the safety hazards involved in electrical circuitry and the standard practices for
accident prevention.

Take every safety precaution to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons. Read and understand
the precautions, dos and don'ts of handling this product listed below.

These instructions are by no means exhaustive. So, take all the necessary precautions for handling electronic and
electrical appliances. Your safety and that of the others lies in your hands.

Location
• Do not place this product in locations that are close to a water source, on moveable or unstable surfaces,
near high frequency generating devices, and areas where it may be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, heat,
excessive cold or humidity, where shocks or vibration are frequent or strong.

• Do not leave cables exposed on the ground where they may be trampled upon, or get damaged by
entangling with feet or pressure from other heavy objects.

Power Supply
• This product should be operated with proper supply voltage. The DC Adapter (24VDC-2 Amp) provided
with ETERNITY NE works with input voltage ranging between 100-240VAC.

• Protect the system from heavy voltages from the mains.

• ETERNITY NE has trunk and extension interfaces. So there are chances of heavy voltages entering the
system from trunk lines or from overhead extensions due to:

• Heavy voltage line falling on the CO line or on the overhead extensions cable. A dangerous surge can
occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line.

• Lightning/Thunderbolts.

• Heavy voltage on the cable connecting the relay device to the Digital Output Port of the system.

• Heavy voltage on the cable connecting the door phone to the Door Phone Port of the system.

• Protect ETERNITY NE from lightning and electrical surges by installing Primary Protection/Surge
Protectors on the trunk and long-distance or off-premise extension lines. The product warranty does not
cover damages resulting from lack of primary protection on trunk lines.

Battery
• There is a lithium manganese rechargeable battery installed on the mainboard of the system. It is
recommended that the battery be replaced by the authorised dealer/reseller only. End customers are
advised to have the battery replaced by their dealer/reseller.

20 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Telecom Earth (Ground)
• Protect the system from extremely high voltage currents resulting from Lightning strikes by installing a
lightning protector on an outside (CO) line.

• The Earth (Ground) is the most important safety procedure to prevent electrical shocks and fires. It
protects from lightning strikes, electrical transients, static discharges, electromagnetic interference and
electrical hazards.

• Two types of earthing can be done.

• Electrical earthing for the safety of system from mains.
• Telecom earthing provides protection from surges from telephone lines.

Shock and Fire Hazard

• Always wear a properly earthed, electrostatic discharge preventive wrist strap/belt while handling the
system and its components to prevent damage to the system and harm to yourself.

• Do not open the system in power ON condition, to avoid shock hazards.

• The ventilation openings on the sides of the product’s enclosure must not be blocked or covered to prevent
overheating.

• Never insert or push objects of any kind into this product through the openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short out parts which may result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.

• This product is equipped with a plug having a third (ground) pin, which fits only into a grounding-type
outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, ask an electrician to
replace the obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug.

• Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.

• Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during a storm, to prevent electric shock from
lightning.

• Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak so as to prevent the risk of fire.

External Devices
• When you connect external devices like a door phone or a door lock release, telephone instruments,
cables, connectors, etc., ensure that they are of standard make and good quality, so that the functioning of
the system is not affected.

• Matrix does not guarantee the performance of external devices that are not supplied by it.

Cleaning and maintenance

• Switch off power supply, and unplug the product from the power outlet before you clean.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

• Use a dry cloth for cleaning.

Service and Repair

• Do not disassemble this product. Incorrect reassembly may cause electric shock when the product is used.
Take the product to a qualified technician when service or repair work is required.

• This product must be serviced by a qualified technician only. Call your dealer, if:
• the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
• liquid has been spilled into the product.
• the product has been exposed to rain or water.
• the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
• the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.

Disposal
• This product must be disposed according to the national laws and regulations prevailing in the country
where it is installed.

Warning for RF Safety:

The product complies with RF exposure guidelines as per standard FCC 47 CFR part 2. We recommend the
following precautions:

• Make sure that the RF Antenna is installed at least 20cm away from other electronic and radio
transmission devices.

• Make sure that the RF Antenna is installed atleast 20cm away from people's vicinity.

• Do not place magnetic storage media near the product.

• People carrying medical implants like cardiac pacemakers are advised to maintain appropriate distance
from the system. They are also advised to avoid being in the vicinity of the product for a long time.

22 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connecting CO Trunks

The CO ports of ETERNITY NE provides the interface to connect the ETERNITY NE with the CO Network. The CO
interface supports different standards and features of networks across the world.

The number of CO ports supported by the configurations of ETERNITY NE are:

• ETERNITY NE2: 2 CO Ports
• ETERNITY NE3: 3 CO Ports
• ETERNITY NE4: 4 CO Ports
• ETERNITY NE6: 6 CO Ports

• Use standard, good quality, twisted-wire pair telephone cables with RJ11 plugs to connect the CO ports of
ETERNITY NE to the Trunk Lines from your exchange.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connecting to Mobile Networks

The Mobile Port interfaces the ETERNITY NE with GSM/UMTS network. It routes calls made and received over
mobile networks, like a mobile handset2.

The UMTS Mobile Ports of ETERNITY NE also serve as the WAN Interface of ETERNITY NE for VoIP calls, when
used with 3G.


The Mobile Port does not support Fax and network supported services, except CLIR and USSD.

Installing the GSM/UMTS Module

• Unpack the GSM/UMTS Module and verify package contents.

• Make sure power supply is turned off before you begin installation.

• Unscrew and remove the top cover of the enclosure. Keep the screws and the cover aside.

• Select the Mobile port you want to install the GSM/UMTS module.

• Remove the screws on the studs and keep them aside.

• The slots for the GSM/UMTS module are located on the side panel and are covered with a flap. Use your
finger or any blunt object to press the slot cover from the outside of the panel to release the flap.

• Now, grasp the flap from inside the enclosure and pull up the flap.

• Gently seat the GSM/UMTS module on the connector on the mainboard such that the SIM holder and the
antenna connector emerge from the respective slots. The connector pins on the module must make
complete contact with those on the mainboard. Do not apply pressure.

• When the module is seated firmly on the connector on the mainboard, secure the module with the screws
on the studs.

• If you have no other module(s) to install, replace the top cover and secure the cover with the screws.

Personal Identification Number (PIN)

The SIM cards can be protected from unauthorized use with a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the SIM.

• Get the SIM Card from the GSM service provider of your choice ready.

• Protect the SIM card from unauthorized use with a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the SIM (in
consultation with the customer/owner of the SIM).

2. Just like mobile handsets, each Mobile Port has a unique IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) number, pasted on the
mobile engine.

24 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SIM PIN Protection
To enable SIM PIN protection,

• get a mobile handset. Insert the SIM into the mobile handset.

• from the mobile handset, enable PIN Protection.

• change the SIM PIN to 1234 (this is the default PIN for both SIM cards used in the system). You can change this
SIM PIN later from ETERNITY NE when configuring the mobile port.

• remove the SIM from the mobile handset.

If you do not want to use PIN protection, insert the SIM in the mobile handset and disable PIN protection.
Remove the SIM Card from the mobile handset and insert it in the mobile port’s SIM holder tray.

• Insert the SIM card in ETERNITY NE,

• press the SIM holder lock (the small yellow button). You may use a blunt pin to press the lock button.

• the SIM holder tray emerges from its slot.

• pull out SIM holder tray from its slot.

• now, fit the SIM Card on the tray, with its contact side facing up.

• insert the SIM holder tray back into the slot.

• repeat the same steps to insert the other SIM card.

• Connect the antenna. Screw the antenna on to the antenna connector.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The UMTS Mobile Ports of ETERNITY NE also provide Wireless WAN Interface. If you want to use
wireless WAN over the Mobile port, you must have UMTS module installed in the system and Internet
services activated on the SIM.

• Switch On power supply, if you have finished connecting all the required ports.

• At every power up of the system, it takes about 3 minutes for the Mobile ports to get registered with the
network. Once registration with the mobile network is completed, the mobile port can be used.

26 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connecting to the VoIP Network

The VoIP Interface enables the extensions of ETERNITY NE to connect to the IP network and make Proxy as well
as Non-Proxy (Peer-to-Peer) VoIP calls.

The Mobile Ports of ETERNITY NE can also used as the WAN Interface to connect the system to the
Internet.

Voice Channels
ETERNITY NE supports 8 Voice Channels, allowing you to make and receive 8 simultaneous VoIP calls.

Please note that a SIP Extension-to-SIP Extension call will consume 2 channels, while a SIP Extension-to-
SLT/DKP Extension/Trunk will consume a single voice channel only. SIP Extension to SIP Trunk calls
consume 2 channels

SIP Trunks

The ETERNITY NE supports a maximum of 4 SIP Trunks3.

In countries, where the provision and use of Internet telephony services and products is prohibited and or
subject to laws, regulations or licenses, the User is advised to comply with such laws and regulations when
installing and using this product.

Installing the VoIP Module

• Unpack the VoIP module and verify package contents.

• Make sure power supply is turned off before you begin installation.

• Unscrew and remove the top cover of the enclosure. Keep the screws and the cover aside.

• Locate the connector of the VoIP module on the mainboard. Remove the screws on the studs for the
module and keep them aside.

• Gently seat the VoIP module on the connector on the mainboard. The connector pins on the module must
make complete contact with those on the mainboard. Do not apply pressure.

• When the module is seated firmly on the connector on the mainboard, secure the module with the screws
on the studs.

• If you have no other module(s) to install, replace the top cover and secure the cover with the screws.

3. SIP Trunks are the same as SIP Accounts. A SIP Account is an account you would get from your VoIP/Internet Telephony Service
Provider much like you would get an email account from your Internet Service Provider.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Before you connect the system to WAN, we recommend that you first connect a computer to the Network Port of
ETERNITY NE, configure the Basic Settings, and then connect to WAN.

• You can connect ETERNITY NE to WAN either over Ethernet port (Ethernet WAN) or over Mobile Port 1 or Mobile
Port 2 (Wireless WAN).

While several installation scenarios are possible, only three most common and most typical scenarios are depicted
here.

Ethernet WAN
• Use the RJ45 Ethernet cable supplied for the Network port of ETERNITY to connect the system to the IP network,
which may be Public Internet or a LAN.

If connecting to the Public IP Network,

• Plug one end of the RJ45 Ethernet cable into the Network Port of ETERNITY and the other end into the Broadband
Router/Modem.

If connecting to a Private Network (Behind a NAT Router),

• Plug one end of the RJ45 Ethernet cable into the Network Port of ETERNITY and the other end into the LAN
Switch/Hub.

28 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Wireless WAN
• Make sure that
• You have installed a 3G UMTS module.
• a SIM is present in the Mobile port.
• Internet Services are activated on the SIM.

Mobile WAN

UMTS
LAN Switch/Hub

Ethernet
LAN

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connecting Single Line Telephones

The Single Line Telephone (SLT) ports provide the interface to connect as extension phones, any standard, two-
wire, analog single line telephone instrument-rotary, pulse-tone, cordless, feature phones with or without Calling
Line Identification.

A fax machine can also be connected to the SLT port.

The number of SLT ports supported by the configurations of ETERNITY NE are:

• ETERNITY NE2: 4 SLT Ports
• ETERNITY NE3: 6 SLT Ports
• ETERNITY NE4: 10 SLT Ports
• ETERNITY NE6: 14 SLT Ports

When connecting Single Line Telephones as extensions to your ETERNITY NE,

1. Decide the number of SLT extensions required and arrange for as many telephone instruments.

You may also connect a Fax machine, if required.

Use SLTs equipped with a 'Flash' key, as several of the features and facilities of the ETERNITY require you
to press Flash. If any of the SLTs you have selected does not have a Flash key, tap the Hook switch of the
phone to dial Flash.

2. Use standard twisted wire pair the cables of good quality with RJ11 plugs to connect the analog single line
telephone instruments to the SLT ports SLT1 - SLT14 of ETERNITY NE.

3. Place the SLTs, fax machine at the desired location.

4. Terminate the cables from the SLT ports of ETERNITY on the wall jacks.

5. Connect the SLTs, Fax machine to the wall jacks.

30 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connecting Digital Key Phones

ETERNITY NE supports 2 DKP ports, DKP1 and DKP2. You may connect EON48, EONSOFT; or you may connect
EON48 on one port and DSS64, the DSS Console, on the other port.

EONSOFT has two-PC based DSS Consoles that do not consume any physical DKP Port. So, you may use the
DKP ports as follows:
• On DKP 1 connect EONSOFT and use DSS1 and DSS1
• On DKP 2 connect EON48 or another EONSOFT with DSS1 and DSS2.

1. Use standard twisted wire pair cables of good quality with RJ11 plugs to connect the DKP(s).

2. Lead and terminate the telephone cables from the DKP ports of ETERNITY NE to the wall jacks at the
desired locations.

Installing EON48
1. Unpack the box and verify the package contents.

2. Mount the phone on a desk or wall at a convenient location.

• To mount EON48 on a wall, detach the Foot Stand on the bottom of the phone, as illustrated below.

• Fix two screws of appropriate diameter on the wall, ensuring that they are aligned with the Keyhole
Slots 1 and 2 of EON48. The screws should protrude from the wall to fit into the Keyhole Slots.

• Now, mount the phone with the screws fitting into the keyhole slots.

F ri 1 0 Oc t 1 5 :4 0
2 0 1 R e c e pt io n
Foot Stand

Keyhole Keyhole
Slot 1 Slot 2

Retrv. Msg Call Back Cancel Mute Conference Transfer

Line 4P4C Spring
Forward DND Names Redial Release Hold Cord
Press Press down
down to detach
1 2 abc 3 def to detach Foot Stand
4 ghi 5 Foot Stand
jkl 6 mno
Headset
7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz Port
CA04

CA03 * 0 #

CA02

CA01

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • When you mount EON48 on a desk, you can attach the Foot Stand in two ways as illustrated below.

• Connect the handset of the EON48 to the phone body using the spring cord.

• To use a Headset (not supplied with the phone), plug any standard stereo headset with 2.5mm single
connector into the headset jack on the left side panel of the phone.

You can also plug in a headset with RJ11 connector into the Headset port at the bottom of the phone.

3. Connect EON48 to the wall jack. Plug one end of the RJ11 cable into the connector of EON48 labeled as
‘Line’. Plug the other end into the wall jack.

4. When the ETERNITY NE is powered ON, the EON will get reset. The EON communicates with the
ETERNITY. The handshaking lasts for 5-6 seconds. The EON model, version and revision number, along
with the message 'Please wait'… appear on the LCD display.

M AT R I X E O N 4 8 - S V 2 R 2
PLEASE WAI T .. .

5. After successful handshaking and reset cycle, if the DKP Parameters have been configured, the LCD
display of the EON will show the extension number and the extension name in a line. The day, date and
time, time zone in the other line.

202 Reception
M on 2 4 A U G 1 2 : 0 0

32 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. You may adjust the LCD for brightness, contrast and backlight. Refer the topic, “Digital Key Phone-
Operation” for instructions.

Connecting a DSS Console

Once you have installed EON with ETERNITY, installing a DSS Console can be done in a few simple steps, very
much similar to those involved in the installation of EON.

1. Unpack the box and verify the package contents.

2. Place the DSS Console next to the DKP, EON, to which it is to be attached.

3. Plug the RJ11 end of a telephone cable into a DKP port of ETERNITY.
Terminate the other end into a wall jack.

4. Plug the RJ11 end of a second cable into the connector on DSS64. Plug the other end into the wall jack.

Installing EONSOFT
To install EONSOFT, you must have a computer with Windows as the operating system. The EONSOFT is
compatible with the following Operating Systems of Windows:

• Windows 98
• Windows XP
• Windows NT
• Windows 2003
• Windows Vista
1. Unpack the box and verify the package contents.

2. Connect the Handset to the dongle. If using a headset, plug the microphone and the speaker connectors
into the dongle.

3. Connect one end of the Communication cable to the COM port of the dongle. Connect the other end of the
communication cable into the COM port of the computer.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Connect a wire-pair of a DKP port (DKP 1 or DKP 2) of the ETERNITY NE to the RJ11 port marked 'DKP'
on the dongle of EONSOFT.

5. Switch ON the computer to which EONSOFT dongle is connected. The computer must have Windows
Operating System installed on it.

6. Now, insert the EONSOFT CD-ROM into the CD drive of your computer. The EONSOFT has a self-
executing program, which will automatically install itself on your computer.

7. If the software does not perform auto install on your computer, browse to CD-ROM.

8. The software program will appear, with the Matrix Icon and labeled as 'Matrix-EONSOFT'.

9. Click the icon Matrix EONSOFT to execute installation of the program.

10. After the program has been installed and run, a shortcut will be automatically created and appear on your
desktop.

11. Click the shortcut to open the program. The EONSOFT window will open:

34 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 12. Click Options at the top left of the window. A drop down menu will appear.

13. Click the option COM Port.

14. Select the COM Port to which the communication cable is connected.

If you select the wrong COM port, a dialog box will pop up on your screen with the message: “COMx is
invalid or busy, please select another COM Port”. Select the right COM Port.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 15. This dialog box will be displayed:

The default DKP settings will appear, i.e. default DKP extension number, date and time will appear on the
EONSOFT display. However, if you have configured DKP port parameters, Name and extension number,
these will appear on the EONSOFT display.

• If this dialog box does not appear on the screen after you selected the COM Port, you may test the
COM Port for data transfer. It is recommended that you test the functioning of the COM Port of the
computer and the communication cable, before you install the EONSOFT.

36 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connecting SIP Extensions

ETERNITY NE supports up to 16 SIP Extensions. The SIP Extensions function as any normal DKP/SLT extension
of the ETERNITY NE. SIP Extension users can make and receive calls to any extension user of the ETERNITY and
to external numbers over CO, Mobile and VoIP4 networks.

You may register any SIP-enabled device, like an IP-phone, a Soft phone, Analog Phone Adapter, as the 'SIP
Extension' of the ETERNITY NE.

You may also connect the Matrix Extended IP Phone, SETU VP248, as SIP extension of ETERNITY NE. The
Extended IP Phone takes on all the functions of EON48, the proprietary digital key phone of Matrix.

The first 8 SIP extensions are free. To increase the number of SIP extensions, you will require the IP8
License. Make sure you have a valid License Key when connecting more than 8 SIP Extensions. See
“License Management” to know more.

The SIP Extensions may be registered either over Ethernet WAN or over Wireless WAN (Mobile 1/Mobile 2), according
to your preference and your IP network installation scenario.

Ethernet WAN
If ETERNITY NE is connected to a Public Network,

• Connect SETU VP248, the Extended IP Phone, or any Open IP SIP device to the LAN Switch.

• Register any SIP client on the public network as SIP extension.

When you register any SIP device, other than the Extended IP Phone, on the public network as SIP
Extension, you must configure the Registrar Server Address of ETERNITY NE, the Registrar Server Port,
the SIP ID, Authentication ID and Password in the SIP device.

4. VoIP-to-PSTN routing may be subject to Regulation in your country. Read “Logical Partition”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 GSM/UMTS

DSL Modem/
Router
PSTN
CO
IP
IP
Ethernet
WAN

LAN Switch/Hub

If ETERNITY NE is connected to a Private Network (Behind the NAT),

• Connect SETU VP248, the Extended IP Phone, or any standard IP Phone to the LAN Switch.

• You may also register any SIP device (Extended IP Phone or open SIP phone) on the public network as
SIP Extension. In which case, configure Port Forwarding for SIP and RTP on the Router.

GSM/UMTS
LAN Switch/Hub

CO IP
Ethernet DSL Modem/
WAN Router

38 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Wireless WAN

Wireless WAN (Mobile 1)

UMTS
LAN Switch/Hub

CO

Ethernet
LAN

• Connect SETU VP248, the Extended IP Phone, or any standard IP Phone to the LAN Switch.

• You may also register any SIP device on the public network as SIP Extension.

Connecting SETU VP248 as Extended SIP Extension

You are recommended to complete the following steps before connecting the Extended IP Phone to ETERNITY NE:

• Decide the location of the Extended IP Phone—within the same network or outside—according to your
installation scenario.

• Log into the web-browser Jeeves. Read the topic “Configuring using the Web-based GUI: Jeeves” under
Configuring ETERNITY NE for instructions.

• Configure DHCP Server on the “Network Parameters” page under Basic Settings of Jeeves.

• Assign an extension number to the Extended IP Phone on the “Extension Numbering Plan” page under
Basic Settings of Jeeves.

• For the SIP extension number you assigned to the Extended IP Phone, configure these parameters on the
“Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings – Location 1” page of Jeeves:
• Enable Matrix Extended IP Phone Mode.
• Enter the MAC Address of the Extended IP Phone.
• Assign the Registrar Server IP Address, as per you installation scenario.

See the topic “SIP Extensions”, under Basic Settings, for instructions.

Now, follow the steps described below to install the Extended IP Phone. The instructions are common for all models
of the SETU VP248. For the purpose of illustration, the premium model, SETU VP248P, has been used.

1. Unpack the SETU VP248 box and verify package contents.

2. Mount the phone on a desk or wall at a location convenient to you.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • When mounting the phone on the wall, detach the Foot Stand on the bottom of the phone.

Pull out the Foot Stand.

Keyhole Slot 1 Keyhole Slot 2

Press down Press down

to attach/detach to attach/detach
Foot Stand. Foot Stand.

• Fix two screws of appropriate diameter on the wall, ensuring that they are aligned with the Keyhole
Slots 1 and 2.

• Use wall plugs, if required, to fix the screws. Leave the screw heads protruding from the wall to fit
into the Keyholes.

• Now, mount the phone on the wall, with the screws fitting into the Keyhole slots.

• When you mount the phone on a desk, you can attach the Foot Stand in two ways as illustrated below.

Foot Stand attached at 20° Angle

Foot Stand attached at 45° Angle

If you attach the Foot Stand at 45°, the phone will be placed in an almost upright position on your
desk.

• Decide which of these positions would work for you best and accordingly attach the Foot Stand.

40 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Connect the Handset to the Phone body.

• Plug the long straightened end of the phone cord into the handset jack at the bottom of the phone
marked with the handset symbol.

• Plug the other (short straight) end of the phone cord into the jack at the bottom of the handset.

4. If you want to use a Headset (not supplied) with your phone, you may plug a headset with a 2.5 mm single
connector into the headset jack on the left side panel of the phone.

OR

You may plug a headset with an RJ11 connector in to the headset port at the bottom of the phone.

5. Connect the LAN Port of SETU VP248 to the LAN Switch/Hub.

6. To connect your phone to a computer on your desk, use an Ethernet cable (not supplied with this phone) to
connect the PC Port of the phone with LAN Port of the computer.

7. Plug the connector of the Power Adapter in to the power jack at the back of the phone5. Use only the
adapter provided with the phone to prevent any damages that may arise from the use of other adapters.

If you want to use Power over Ethernet (PoE), ensure that your LAN supports PoE. Supply power through
an 802.3af connection on the LAN Port of the phone. Do not connect the Adapter!

8. Plug the Power Adapter into a power outlet.

9. Switch ON power supply.

5. The SETU VP248 does not have a power switch.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When you power the phone, the boot process will be initiated in the following sequence.

• All keys with LED, including the Speaker key and the Ringer LED will glow.

• The LCD display will light up and the following message will appear on it, as the phone boots:

Welcom e to M atrix
B ooting ...

• As soon as the ‘Loading...’ message appears on the phone display, press # key.

W e l c o m e t o M a t ri x
L oad ing ...

• Select the firmware Extended - IP Phone. Move the cursor by pressing the Down navigation key V.

Sel ect the fir mwar e

Standar d S IP
Extended S IP

• When the cursor is placed under the Extended IP Phone, press Enter key.

Sel ect the fir mwar e

Standar d S IP
Extended S IP

42 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The phone will start loading the Extended IP Phone Firmware. It will display current firmware being loaded.

Welcom e to M atrix
L oa ding V05R 01_ExtSI P

• After loading the firmware, the phone will prompt you to change Network settings.

Change Network Settings?

Ye s
No

• Press Enter key to select ‘No’ or wait for three seconds.

If you want to change the Network Settings, you may select ‘Yes’, by moving the cursor to Yes with the Up
key and pressing the Enter key.

• The phone makes DHCP Discovery and fetches its IP Address and Server IP Address from the ETERNITY
NE.

D H C P d i s c o v e r y. . . !

On getting the IP Address, the phone initiates Auto Configuration to download the configuration files from
ETERNITY NE.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • As the phone downloads the configuration files, the file names will appear one by one.

T r y i n g f o r C o n f i g. f i le
L a n g u a ge S t r . x m l

• On successful download of all configuration files, the phone attempts to register with ETERNITY NE.

Attemptin g Regist ration

• On successful registration, the phone will display the current day, date and time, the extension number and
name assigned to the Extended IP Phone.

M on 2 0 D E C 1 6 : 5 8 N A
3 0 3 Re c e p t i o n 2

44 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connecting Door Phone

The Door Phone port is available as an optional module on the ETERNITY NE. The Door Phone module contains a
Door Phone Port and a Digital Output Port, providing the interface for connecting and operating a Door Phone and
a Door Lock Release Device with the ETERNITY NE.

Installing the Door Phone Module

• Unpack the Door Phone module and verify package contents.

• Make sure power supply is turned off before you begin installation.

• Unscrew and remove the top cover of the enclosure. Keep the screws and the cover aside.

• Locate the connector of the Door Phone module on the mainboard. Remove the screws on the studs for
the module and keep them aside.

• The slot for the Door Phone module is located on the back panel and is covered with a flap. Use your
finger to press the slot cover from the outside of the side panel of the enclosure, and release the flap.

• Now, grasp the flap from inside the enclosure and pull up the flap.

• Gently seat the Door Phone module on the connector on the mainboard such that the RJ45 connector of
the module is aligned with the slot, and the connector pins on the module make complete contact with
those on the mainboard. Do not apply pressure.

• When the module is seated firmly on the connector on the mainboard, secure the module with the screws
on the studs.

• If you have no other module(s) to install, replace the top cover and secure the cover with the screws.

Door Phone Port

You can install any standard 4-wire Door Phone at the entrance of the building to the Door Phone port. Calls on the
door phone can be made to land on any of the extensions of the ETERNITY NE or on an external number.

The 4-wire Door Phone is to be connected to the Door Phone port of ETERNITY NE. Matrix does not supply Door
Phones.

Technical Specification of the Door Phone Port

Specification Value

Speaker Output 1.41Vrms(max); Single Ended

Mic Input 1.34Vrms(max); Single Ended

Digital Output Port (DOP)

The DOP can be used to connect a Door Lock release device to work in conjunction with the Door Phone
connected to the Door Phone Port.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Technical Specification of the DOP

Specification Value

Relay Type Power Relay

Contact Arrangement Normally Open; 1-Form-A

Contact Rating(Resistive Load) 1.5Amp; 120VAC/150VDC

Operation Time: 8ms (max.)

Also refer the topic “Digital Output Port (DOP)”.

1. Make sure that the power supply is switched off, before you begin connecting the door phone.

2. Now, plug in the cable supplied with the card into the Door Phone connector. Terminate the free end of the
cables into the main distribution frame.

Refer to the pinout details of the Door Phone port to connect the wires correctly.

Pinout and Cable Details of Door Phone Port

Connector Pin Port Connection Colour

1 Relay A Orange-White
DOP-1
2 Relay B Orange

3 Status Green-White

4 MIC Input Blue

RJ45 Door Phone-1
5 Speaker Output Blue-White

6 Analog Ground Green

3. The wires of the devices, the Door Phone and the Door Lock, which you want to connect to the ETERNITY
NE, should be terminated in to the Distribution Frame. Refer the pinout details of the ports to connect the
cables.

Connecting Door Phone

• You can connect any standard 4-wire door phone. Refer to the pin out details given above to make the
connections.

• Make sure that the door phone you connect conforms with the Technical Specifications of the door
phone port.

Connecting a Door Lock Release Device

• If a Door Lock is to be used in conjunction with the Door Phone, connect the Door Lock to the Digital
Output Port (DOP) of the ETERNITY NE.

46 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Make sure that the device you connect conforms with the Technical Specifications of the DOP.

A typical Installation of the Door Phone is illustrated below.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installing the Voice Mail System

The optional Voice Mail System (VMS) module of the ETERNITY NE provides mailbox facility to all extensions of
ETERNITY NE.

Each Mailbox has the capacity of storing 254 messages. The size of each Mailbox is set by default to 5 minutes.
The maximum message length for each mailbox is set by default to 15 seconds.

The VMS module requires a license. The VMS module is delivered as Pen Drive, containing VMS configuration
files, and voice messages for prompts and greetings. The Pen Drive is also the storage device for mailbox
messages.

The Pen Drive is shipped separately as per the order of individual customers, along with the License Voucher.

Installing the VMS

• The Voice Mail System (VMS) module is supplied as a Pen Drive, with a License Voucher which you must
activate to use the module. Unpack the Voice Mail System module and verify package contents.

• Make sure power supply is turned off before you begin installation.

• Unscrew and remove the top cover of the enclosure. Keep the screws and the cover aside.

• Locate the USB port on the mainboard. Connect the Pen Drive to the upper USB port on the mainboard.

• If you have no other module(s) to install, replace the top cover and secure the cover with the screws.

• Connect a computer to the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE the ethernet cable supplied for the port.

• Open a Web browser on the computer to access the embedded Web server, Jeeves.

• Activate the License Voucher for the VMS. See “License Management” under Advanced Settings for
instructions.

• Configure VMS. To know more, see “Voice Mail System” to for detailed instructions.

48 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Starting Up ETERNITY NE

Power ON
• Connect the power adapter to ETERNITY NE.

• Plug in the power adapter of ETERNITY NE into the power outlet.

• Switch on power supply and wait for the Reset Cycle to complete.

Reset Cycle
• Reset Cycle (Power-ON Self Test) takes about 2 minutes to finish.

• The power LED, PWR, is turned on and remains ON.

• When the system becomes stable after power on, the status LED, STS, blinks Green (1 second ON, 1
second OFF).

• The LEDs of the DSS keys of the Digital Key Phone(s) attached to the system are turned on in a
sequence. The handshaking between DKP and ETERNITY lasts for 5-6 seconds.

• At the end of the Reset Cycle, the default extension numbers loaded by the system, the date and time of
the Real Time Clock of the system will appear on the display of the DKP connected.

• Mobile Ports take about 3 minutes to get registered with the network.

You may now access the web-based programming tool, Jeeves, and configure ETERNITY NE.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 50 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 4 Configuring ETERNITY NE

Configuration Modes
ETERNITY NE can be configured at two levels: System Engineer and System Administrator.

A distinct set of features and facilities can configured at each of these levels.

System Engineer Mode

At the System Engineer level, the entire system configuration, all configurable features and facilities of the
ETERNITY NE can be changed as per end user requirements.

Only the System Engineer, the person who installs, configures and maintains the PBX must be allowed access to
this mode.

Access to the SE mode is protected by means of a password, referred throughout this document as the SE
Password.

SE Password
The SE password is a 4-digit code used to prevent unauthorized access and alterations or misuse of the features
and facilities. As this password is meant for restricting access to the SE mode, it must be kept strictly confidential
with the System Engineer. Default password:1234.

The SE password can be changed. Refer the topic “System Security” for instructions on how to change the SE
password.

If you forget the SE password, you can restore the default SE password. Read the topic “Default Settings” for
instructions on restoring the default SE password.

You are advised to record the SE password at a safe place, where it can be accessed by you (the System
Engineer) to avoid the inconvenience of restoring the default SE password.

System Administrator Mode

At the System Administrator level, the settings of the features for the Extension users can be changed, and various
system activity logs and reports such as fault log reports, Station Message Detail Recording reports, and system
reports, can be captured and printed.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The System Administrator may be the operator or receptionist, or any one responsible for the operation and
maintenance of the system.

SA Password
The access to SA mode may be protected by means of a password, referred to as the SA password in this
document.

The SA password is 4-digit code for preventing unauthorized access to the SA mode. The default, SA Password is
1111.

The SA password can be changed by the System Administrator and the System Engineer. However, if the System
Administrator forgets the password, the default SA password or an entirely new password can be issued only by
the System Engineer.

Refer the topic “System Security” for instructions on how to change the SA password.

Configuration Tools
The ETERNITY NE can be configured using the following tools:

• The web-based graphical user interface (GUI), called Jeeves.

• A telephone (specific parameters only).

Each of these is explained in detail later in this chapter.

ETERNITY NE can be configured both, 'on site' and from a remote location without its functioning being affected.

52 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring using the Web-based GUI: Jeeves

ETERNITY NE provides a Graphic User Interface (GUI), Jeeves, the proprietary Web-based configuration software
of Matrix. It is an HTTP server built into the ETERNITY NE.

To access Jeeves, you will need to connect a computer to ETERNITY NE.

Connecting a computer
You may connect a standalone computer to ETERNITY NE or grab any computer connected in the LAN as
ETERNITY NE.

Connect a standalone computer to ETERNITY NE, when installing the system for the very first time. You
may connect it to a computer on LAN at a later stage, once you have finished installation and configuration
of the system.

To connect a standalone computer,

• Plug one end of the RJ45 cable supplied into the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE. Plug the other end into
the LAN port of the computer.

• Make sure the IP Address of the computer and the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE do not conflict and both
are in the same Subnet.

The default IP Address of the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE is: 192.168.1.101

The default Subnet Mask of the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE is: 255.255.255.0

• Change the Subnet of the computer, if necessary.

• Make sure a web-browser, either Internet Explorer 7 or 8 or Mozilla Firefox, is installed on the computer.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Accessing Jeeves
• Open the browser (Mozilla Firefox) on the computer.

• Enter the default IP address 192.168.1.101 of the Ethernet Port ETERNITY NE in the address bar of the
browser.

• The Welcome page will open.

Set the Appearance Settings of your computer's screen to the resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels for full view
of the pages.

• From the Login as box, select the login mode you want to enter: System Engineer or System
Administrator.

• Enter the SE or SA Password for the Login mode you selected.

• Click Login button.

System Engineer Login

• To enter SE mode, select System Engineer.

• Enter 1234, the default System Engineer Password, in the Password field.
If the password has been changed, use the new password.

• Click the Login button.

54 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • On successful login, the welcome page of the SE mode will appear on your screen.

• On the left pane are the links, Basic Settings, Advanced Settings and Administration.

Basic Settings break down the complexities of configuration and are sufficient to get your system into
operation.

Advanced Settings, enable you to configure the advanced features and facilities of ETERNITY NE.

• To configure Basic Settings, click the link to expand.

The basic settings parameters appear as sub-links.

• Click the link of the desired parameter. The page of the respective parameter opens.

• Change the settings on the page to the desired values, and click Submit button to save.

• To exit the SE configuration mode, click the Logout on the top of the page.

• As many as four System Engineers can simultaneously log in and configure the Basic Settings and
Advanced Settings. However, it is recommended that multiple login be avoided.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Administrator Login
• To enter SA mode, select System Administrator.

• Enter 1111, the default System Administrator Password, in the Password field.
If the password has been changed, use the new password.

• Click the Login button.

• On successful login, the Feature Menu for the SA mode appears on the left pane as links.

From the SA mode, you can

• Click the link of the desired Feature to open the page.

• Configure the feature and click Submit button to save changes.

56 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To exit the SA mode, click Logout on the top of the page.

While four persons can simultaneously log in to the SA mode, it is recommended that you avoid multiple
simultaneous SA login sessions.

It is possible to configure the ETERNITY NE from any location using Jeeves. You can use Jeeves to configure the
system On site (where it is installed) and Off site, from a remote location.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring using a Telephone

A few parameters of ETERNITY NE may be configured by dialing the relevant command strings from a telephone.
The telephone may be any Single Line Telephone (SLT) or the Matrix proprietary Digital Key Phone (DKP), or the
Extended IP Phone, connected as an extension of the ETERNITY NE.

For the ease of operation, you may use a DKP/Extended IP Phone instead of an SLT. Using a DKP/Extended IP
Phone has the advantage that

• you can view the command strings that you have keyed in on the phone’s display;

• you will get prompts and confirmatory messages on the phone's LCD display, in addition to confirmation
tone played to you.

• you dial alphanumeric command strings.

All these facilities will not be available to you on an SLT.

You can enter the System Engineer as well as the System Administrator mode to configure the system using a
telephone.

It is possible to configure the ETERNITY NE from any location using a Telephone. You can use a
Telephone connected as an extension of the ETERNITY NE to configure the system On site (where it is
installed).

You can also configure the system using a Telephone Off site, i.e. from a Remote location, using the
“Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” feature of the ETERNITY NE. You can access both the System
Engineer mode as well as the System Administrator mode from the remote location.

System Engineer Mode

At the System Engineer level, can be done by dialing command strings referred to in this document as SE
Commands or System Commands. SE Commands are unique to the feature/facility being configured.

Entering the SE mode using a Telephone

The telephone that you use to enter the SE mode may be a DKP or an SLT connected as extension phone of the
ETERNITY NE.

To enter the SE mode via a DKP/SLT:

• Dial 1#91-SE Password6
• You get programming tone to indicate entry into the SE mode.
• Now, dial the desired SE Command to configure.
• You get confirmation tone and message on the LCD if using EON.

To exit the SE mode:

• Dial 00.
• You will hear the dial tone of the ETERNITY NE.

6. You may use the default SE password, 1234, if the password has not been changed already. If the password has been changed,
use the new password.

58 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If the SE Password you entered is incorrect, you will be played an Error Tone and an Error Message on
EON.

• The system accepts and executes the command immediately, but it takes approximately 2 minutes to
save a command. So, it is advisable that you do not turn OFF the system for 2 to 3 minutes after
entering the last command.

• There is no restriction on the number of persons who can simultaneously enter SE mode from a
Telephone and configure the system.

System Administrator Mode

At the System Administrator level, you can set/cancel features settings for extensions, capture and print various
system activity logs and reports.

The Operator or Receptionist, who usually administer the system, must enter the System Administrator (SA) mode
by dialing 1#92-SA Password.

After entering SA mode, you may dial command strings referred to as SA Commands from a telephone.

SA Commands
SA commands consist of a prefix string 1072, followed by the Command string. For example: the SA command for
setting Do Not Disturb for an extension is 1072-001-extension number-1, where 1072 is the prefix string and 001
is the command string.

The Prefix string in the SA Command (1072) can be changed by the System Engineer. However, the command
strings of the SA Command (001 in the above example) cannot be changed.

The command for entering SA mode (1#92) is also non-configurable. See the topic “Access Codes” under Features
and Facilities.

To know how to use change feature settings with SA Commands, please refer the description of individual features
under “Features and Facilities”.

For a complete list of SA Commands, refer “SA Commands”.

• You can enter SA mode only from extensions which have the features 'SA mode' and or 'SA Extension'
enabled in their Class of Service.

• When the feature 'SA Extension' is enabled in the Class of Service of an extension, the extension will
always be in SA mode. You do not need to enter SA mode by dialing the SA password. You can enter
the SA mode by dialing the SA command prefix string.

• When the feature 'SA Mode' is enabled in the Class of Service of an extension, dialing of the SA
Password is required to enter the SA mode. SA Commands can be dialed only after successfully
entering the SA Mode.

• There is no restriction on the number of persons who can simultaneously enter and operate from the
SA mode using a telephone.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Entering SA Mode using a Telephone
You may use a DKP/Extended IP Phone or an SLT extension of the ETERNITY to enter the SA Mode.

To enter SA mode from an extension phone,

• Dial 1#92-SA Password7
• You get a confirmation Tone of the ETERNITY to indicate successful entry into the SA mode.
• Dial SA Command strings: 1072-Feature Access Code.
• You get a confirmation tone and text message on the phone display (if using EON).
• Replace handset to exit SA mode.
OR
• Dial 1#92

You can exit from the SA mode automatically or manually. To exit the SA mode automatically, you must
configure the SA Mode Timer. This Timer can be set to a desired duration between 000 and 255 minutes.
On the expiry of the set time, the system disconnects the extension phone from the SA mode. By default,
the SA Mode Timer is set to 003 minutes. The Timer is loaded every time a new SA command is issued.

To configure the SA Mode Timer:

• Dial 1072-016-SA Mode Timer

Where,
SA Mode Timer = 000 to 255 minutes.

• You can also exit the SA mode before the SA Mode Timer expires by dialing this command. If the SA
Mode Timer is set to 000 minutes, you can exit the SA mode only by dialing the command 1#92.

The SA Mode TImer can also be configured from the SA pages of Jeeves.

7. You may use the default SA password, 1111, if the password has not been changed already. If the password has been changed,
use the new password.
When you dial this command, the system will check if the facility 'SA Mode' is enabled in the Class of Service allowed to the exten-
sion from which you have dialed this command. If the SA mode is not allowed, an Error Tone will be played. The Error Tone will be
played also when the SA password is entered incorrectly.
If the facility 'Allow SA Commands' is enabled in the Class of Service of the extension you are using, you can skip this step and
directly dial the SA Command (1072-<Command String>).

60 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring using FTP

File Transfer Protocol (FTP), is a standard network protocol, used to exchange and manipulate files over a TCP
computer network such as the Internet.

FTP is the simplest way to exchange files between computers on the Internet. Like the Hypertext Transfer Protocol
(HTTP), which transfers displayable Web pages and related files, and the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP),
which transfers e-mail, FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols, and is commonly used to transfer Web server for
everyone on the Internet, download program and other files to your computer from other servers.

Using FTP, you can also update (delete, rename, move and copy) files at a server. For this, you need to log on to
an FTP server.

ETERNITY supports an embedded FTP server which can be used for these purposes:

• Upgrading System Software.

• Uploading/Back-up System Configuration files.

• Uploading/Back-up Call Record files (SMDR).

• Uploading/downloading VMS Configuration, voice message audio files.

Configuring ETERNITY using FTP is meant for Installers who want to complete system configuration at their end or
are unable to configure the system on-site at the customer's end.

The advantage of using FTP for configuring the system is that Installers can complete the entire system
configuration as per their customer's requirement at their end, copy these configuration files, and then upload these
configuration files on to the customer's system.

Further, once the configuration file has been created, Installers only need to make the desired changes in the
relevant files and upload the updated files again.

If you are the Installer, before you configure the users’ system using the FTP server, make sure you complete the
following tasks at your end:

• Configure the system as per the customer/user requirements, using Jeeves.

• Now, copy the system configuration you just completed for the user’s system on a CD or a Pen Drive using
the embedded FTP server. To do this, you may use either Windows FTP or FireFTP. See “Configuration
Upload” for step-by-step instructions.

If you have multiple customers and you want configure your customers' systems using FTP, you are
recommended to tag the names of the configuration folders you create for your customers with some
identification, like name and date.

At the customer’s end,

• Open the web browser on the computer connected to the customer’s ETERNITY NE.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Now, copy the system configuration you just completed for the user’s system on a CD or a Pen Drive using
the embedded FTP server. To do this, you may use either Windows FTP or FireFTP. See “Configuration
Upload” for step-by-step instructions.

62 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 5 Basic Settings

Basic Settings help you with the basic configuration of the system in easy steps. The Basic Settings break down the
complexities of configuration and cover as much as 80 per cent of all your basic installation and configuration
requirements.

The country-specific default values assigned to the parameters in Basic Settings are sufficient to set your system in
operation. You may need to change the settings of only those parameters that are peculiar to your installation
requirement.

To configure Basic Settings,

1. Open Jeeves (see “Configuring using the Web-based GUI: Jeeves”). The Login page will open.

2. Log in as System Engineer.

3. Enter the SE password.

On successful login, you reach the Home page.

The links Basic Settings and Advanced Settings appear on the left pane.

4. Click the Basic Settings link to expand.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The sub-links to these basic parameters appear:
• Region
• Pre-requisites
• Extension Numbering Plan
• Naming Trunks
• Time Table
• Number Patterns
• Operator
• SLT Extensions
• DKP Extensions
• SIP Extensions
• Door Phone
• Call Pickup (CPU) Group
• CO Trunks
• Mobile Trunks
• VoIP Port
• SIP Trunks
• Emergency Numbers
• Network Parameters

There are two ways to do the basic system configuration:

• using the Wizard. A special configuration Wizard will lead you logically, step-by-step through the
configuration of the parameters listed above.

Or

• using the Basic Settings links for selective configuration. You can choose the parameters you want to
configure, the order you want, and accordingly select the parameter links and configure the settings.

64 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Using the Configuration Wizard
The configuration Wizard leads you step-by-step, through the configuration of the basic settings.

To use the Wizard,

• Click the Wizard icon on the top right of your screen.

The home page of the Wizard will open.

• To navigate the Wizard pages use the Next and Back buttons.

• When you press the Next button, the changes on the current page are saved and the Wizard takes you to
the next page.

• When you press the Back button, you will be prompted to save changes made on the current page.

• The More button and the Less button on the page allow you to expand and collapse respectively,
the parameters on the page.

• You may exit the Wizard at any time by clicking the Quit button . The changes you made before you
exit will be saved.

Using Basic Settings Links

You can choose the parameters you want to configure, and the order in which you want to configure. To do this,

• Click the Basic Settings link.

• The parameter sub-links appear on the left pane.

• Click the parameter sub-link you wish to configure.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The respective parameter page opens.

• Get familiar with the buttons and icons listed below before you begin to change the settings of the
parameters on each page.

More: displays all the parameter links on the page.

Less: displays the essential parameter links on the page.

Expand: expands a link to display all parameters under the link.

Collapse: collapses a link. Hides all parameters under the link.

Settings: allows you to configure the settings of a parameter further.

More link: displays all additional parameters on the page.

Logout: allows you to exit Jeeves.

• Set the desired values on this page and click Submit button to save.

You may use the Wizard or selectively configure the Basic Settings pages, whichever works best for you.

When configuring the system for the first time, you may use the Wizard. When you want to make changes
after the configuration has been done, you may selectively configure the Basic Settings parameters using
the links and sub-links.

Do not allow simultaneous login and system configuration using the Basic Settings pages. As the system
updates configuration changes last submitted, configuration changes made by one person may be
overwritten by those made by another.

Read on for instructions to configure the Basic Settings using the links.

66 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Region

The ETERNITY NE can operate anywhere in the world. It provides “Default Settings” to match country/region-
specific requirements of users around the world.

The Default Settings are factory-set values for system and feature configuration.The system is designed to work
efficiently in any country with these default settings.

Default Settings also speed up the process of system configuration, as these are sufficient for getting the system
into operation.

To load the country-specific Default Settings, you must select ‘Region’, i.e. the country/region in which the system
is installed.

India is selected as the default ‘Region’. So, if you are installing ETERNITY in a country other than India, change
Region.

To configure.

1. Select the 'Region', i.e. the country where the system is installed, from the list.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Pre-requisites

System resources (number of trunk and extension ports supported) vary by configurations of ETERNITY NE. It is
common for system resources to be used below capacity in a first-time installation.

To make the task of configuring easier and more focussed, ETERNITY allows you to define System Pre-requisites:
the system configuration you are using (NE2, NE3, NE4, NE6), the number of trunk and the number of extension
ports you want to configure. Accordingly, Jeeves will show only as many trunk and extension ports that you have
specified.

To configure,

1. Click the Pre-requisites link.

2. Enter Customer Name. Default: Blank.

Customer Name is the name of the organization/enterprise using ETERNITY NE.

The Customer Name you enter in this field will appear as header on the various System Reports generated
and printed by the ETERNITY NE like SMDR Incoming, Outgoing and Internal Call Reports, Alarm Status
reports, etc.

The Customer Name may consist of a maximum of 80 alphanumeric characters, including punctuation
marks. So, you can enter also the organization's address along with the Customer Name.

3. Enable On-Site Configuration, if you want Basic Settings pages to display only those port types and ports
that are on-board (connected). Default: Disabled.

68 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When On Site Configuration is enabled, ETERNITY detects the different trunk and extension port types
present in the system (at Power-ON/Reset). Accordingly, all pages of Jeeves display only those ports
detected by the system for configuration.
You can then define the number of ports you want to configure out of the existing port types.

Enable the 'On-Site Configuration?' flag when you are configuring the system at the installation site.

4. Select as Model Type, the configuration of ETERNITY NE that you are using: NE2, NE3, NE4, NE6.

When you select the Model Type, Jeeves displays on relevant pages, the port types according to the
system capacity (the maximum number of ports) supported by your model.

For example, if you selected ETERNITY NE6 as Model Type, the page will show maximum CO Ports as 6,
maximum DKP extensions ports as 2, and maximum SLT ports as 14. If you selected ETERNITY NE2 the
page will show maximum number of ports as 2 for CO Ports, 2 for DKP ports, and 4 SLT ports.

5. Define the Number of Ports Used for each Port Type: CO, DKP, SLT, Mobile, SIP from the respective
combo boxes.

For example, if you want 4 CO Trunks, 1 DKP extension, and 8 SLT extensions to be used, select the
same numbers from the combo box.

If you want to use voice mail, or connect a device (Door Lock Release) to the Digital Output port, select
'Yes'.

If you have enabled On-Site Configuration, the fields for 'Number of Ports Used', will be populated with
exactly the number the system has detected. The fields for port types which are not available on-board the
system are displayed as non-editable fields.

6. Click Submit to the save changes.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Extension Numbering Plan

The default Extension Numbers and Feature Access Codes8 appear on this page.

ETERNITY NE assigns default extension numbers to the extension port types:

• 201 to 214 to SLT port number 01 to 14.
• 301 to DKP port 1 and 302 to DKP port 2 respectively.
• 303 to 318 to SIP Extensions 01 to 16.
• 215 to the Door Phone port.

The default Feature Access Codes that appear on this page are country-dependant.

To configure,

1. Click the Extension Numbering Plan link.

2. You may re-assign extension numbers to SLT, DKP, SIP Extensions, and the Door Phone port.

The length of the extension number may be 6 digits. The digits 0 to 9, # and * are allowed.

When you change the extension numbers, make sure that they do not clash with any other Feature Access
Codes in the dialing phase (codes starting with 1, 9, etc.). To know more, refer the topic “Access Codes”
and “Conflict Dialing” to know more.

If you have installed Voice Mail System, do not configure * (star) in the Extension numbers.

8. Feature access codes are short digit codes used invoke a feature or function. See “Access Codes”.

70 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Each time there is a conflict of access codes, you will get an alert to inform you of the conflict and prompts
you to resolve the conflicting numbers.

3. You must resolve the conflict. Jeeves will not allow you to continue if you do not resolve conflict.

If you want to change the Feature Access Code that is conflicting with the extension number you have
assigned, go to Advanced Settings and change the Feature Access Code.

4. Assign names to extensions. The name you assign may be the name of the person who will use the
extension. Extension names may consist of a maximum of 18 characters.

This page displays only those extension ports available in the system and the number of ports you have
defined as Number of Ports Used in the Pre-requisites page.

SIP Extensions are a licensed feature.

In the case of SIP Extensions, the number you configure as Extension Number will be considered as the
SIP ID, the Authentication ID and the Authentication Password.

5. If you have finished assigning numbers and names, click Submit button.

To assign the extension numbers and names all over again, click the Clear Button on this page.

To default all extension numbers, click the Default button on this page.

6. Reassign Feature Access Codes, if required. The new access code may be a single digit or a sequence of
a maximum of 6 digits. Digits 0 to 9,# and * are allowed.

7. Click Submit to save changes.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If you assign the same Access Code to more than one feature, Jeeves will pop up a ‘Total Conflict’
message and ask you to resolve the conflicting codes. It will not allow you to submit until you have
resolved the conflict.

72 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Naming Trunks

You can assign names to trunk ports for easy identification of the trunks. On this page, trunk ports appear with their
default names and port numbers, in ascending order of the port number.

The default trunk name consist of the trunk type (CO Trunk, MOBILE, SIP) and port number. For example, the
name of the Two-wire Trunk connected to port number 1 is displayed as CO-1.

The Wizard will display only those Trunk port types available in the system and the number of Trunk ports
you have defined for each trunk port type earlier on the Pre-requisites page.

To configure,

1. Click the Naming Trunks link.

2. You may assign names to each trunk port type for easy identification. The name be derived from the name
of the Service Provider.

The name may consist of a maximum of 18 alphanumeric characters.

3. Click Submit to save.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Time Tables

Certain features of the ETERNITY NE like Operator, Class of Service, Toll Control, Outgoing Trunk Access, among
others9, require its trunks and extensions to behave differently according to the time of the day: Day (working
hours) and Night (non-working hours).

For example,
• incoming calls are to be routed to the extension of security personnel, instead of the Operator when the
office is closed.
• certain features in the Class of Service are to be allowed during the day (working hours), but not at night
(non-working hours).
• access to outgoing long distance calls is to be denied in the night hours.
• trunks must play a different greeting message to the callers during the day and a different message in the
night hours.

A Time Table is a schedule of Working Days and Day time (working hours) for the entire week. In a Time Table, you
can define the working days and working hours for the entire week.

Time Tables are applied to extensions and trunks defining the working hours and Day time for the entire week, so
that the system can execute the time-dependent features and facilities according to the Time Table.

ETERNITY NE offers 4 different Time Tables: the System Time Table (applied to all trunks and extensions and
Operator by default), and customized Time Tables - 1, 2, and 3 which you can set to your preferences and apply to
trunks and extensions.

You can assign different Time Tables to different trunks and extensions.

Refer the topic “Day Night Mode” to know more.

To configure,
1. Click the Time Table link.

9. Direct Inward Dialing, Direct Inward System Access, Trunk Landing extensions, Door Phone Call Routing.

74 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Decide your working days and working hours (24 hours format).

By default, System Time Table has Monday to Saturday as Working days, and working hours are defined
as: 09:00 to 18:00 for all working days. Sunday is a non-working day, with working hours set to 00:00.

The system considers the time period other than the working hours you define as Night (non-working
hours).

If the System Time Table suits you, retain it. You may redefine the Working days and Working hours. You
can also define different working hours for each day of the week. For example, you may define the
Working hours from Monday to Friday as 09:30 to 18:30, and for Saturday, from 09:30 to 15:00. If your’s is
a 24x7 business, you may select Sunday as working day and set the working hours.

3. To define the working day, select the related check box.

4. To define the working hours, select the Start Time and the End Time from the combo boxes.

5. Click Submit.

6. If you want to use a Customized Time Table, click the tab Customized Time Table-1.

7. Define the working days and the working hours - start time and end time - for each working day.

8. Click Submit.

9. If you want to use the other customized time table, click their tabs and follow the same instructions as
above.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operator

In the context of a PBX, users understand the term 'Operator' as a person who handles multiple simultaneous calls
and functions as the link between callers and called parties.

For the PBX however, an 'Operator' is a Routing Group, i.e. a group of extensions to which calls made by
extensions by dialing '9' are to be landed. This also includes Direct Inward Dialing calls on trunks during which the
caller dials '9'.

Depending on the amount of call traffic to be managed, there may be more than one Operator extension. Also,
different Operator extensions may be assigned according to the time of the day. For instance, during the day
(working hours) call may be landed on the extension of the Receptionists/Front Desk Personnel. During the night
(non-working hours), calls may be landed on the extension of the Security Personnel.

To meet this requirement, ETERNITY allows you to configure the Operator for Day and for the Night.

1. Click the Operator link.

76 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Double click Operator Extension/s for Day. The extensions to be selected in the routing group for
Operator for the Day time appear in a new window.

3. Select the Extensions which are to be used as Operator. These may be SLT, DKP or SIP extensions.

4. For each extension you have selected, set the Ring Timer. This timer defines the time for which the
extension, on which the call lands, should ring. Default: 015 seconds.

5. For each extension you have selected, you may set Continuous Ring, if you want the extension to ring till
the incoming call is answered. Default: Disabled.

When Continuous Ring is selected, the first extension in the Operator group you have created will continue
to ring, even as the system hunts for other extensions in the group to land the call. If the call still remains
unanswered, the system will return the call to the first extension once again. This flag has no relevance, if
there is only one Operator extension.

6. Enable Rotation, if you have selected more than one extension as Operator. Default: Disabled.

When you enable Rotation, each new call lands on the subsequent extension10 in the group next to the
one that received the last call. This ensures equal distribution of incoming calls to all the destination
extensions in the Operator extension group.

Rotation has no relevance if the Operator group has only one member extension.

10. The extension next to the one that received the previous call.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7. Click OK. All the extension numbers you selected will appear in the field Operator Extension/s for the
Day. The extension numbers appear in the sequence you selected, separated by commas.

8. Repeat the same steps to select Operator Extension/s for Night.

9. Click Submit.

For each extension you have selected as Operator for the Day and Night,
• define the Class of Service11 for the Day and for Night.
• set Toll Control12 for the Day and for Night.
• select Outgoing Trunks13 for the Day and for Night.
• set Priority14 for the Operator extension for the Day and for Night.

You can set Class of Service, Toll Control, Outgoing Trunks and Priority for the Operator extension(s)
when you configure the parameters of different extension types: SLT, DKP and SIP Extensions.

11. These are features allowed/denied to the Operator extension.

12. The type of calls to be allowed/denied to the Operator extension during the day and at night: local calls, regional calls, national
calls, international calls, limited calls.
13. The trunks through which outgoing calls are to be routed during the day and night.
14. Each extension of the ETERNITY is assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3, 4...to 9. With 1 being the lowest priority and 9
being the highest priority. The calls from an extension with higher priority has preference in call landing. When an extension with
higher priority calls another with lower priority, a triple ring is placed on the called extension, and the call will land first on the exten-
sion when there are multiple incoming calls on the extension with lower priority.

78 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SLT Extensions

The ETERNITY NE supports a maximum of 14 Single Line Telephone (SLT) extension ports, depending on the
configuration you are using.

The number of SLT extensions available to you for configuration depends on the number of SLT ports supported by
your configuration of ETERNITY and the number of SLT ports you have specified on the “Pre-requisites” page.

If you have enabled 'On-Site Configuration', the system will provide you only those SLT ports that are actually
present in the system for configuration on this page.

On this page,


More: Click this button to view all parameter links on the page.

Less: Click this button to view only the essential parameter links on the page.

Expand: Click to expand a link to display all parameters under the link.

Collapse: Click to collapse a link. Hides all parameters under the link.

Settings: Click to configure the settings of a parameter further.

More link: Click to view all additional parameters on the page.

To configure another SLT extension, click the SLT Extension number tab.

To save settings, click Submit.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To copy the same SLT parameter values to another SLT extension, click Copy button.

Follow the instructions provided below to configure SLT extensions.

Class of Service

1. Click Class of Service to expand options.

Define the Class of Service for the SLT extension for Day time and Night time.

2. To allow a feature, select the check box of the feature.

3. To deny a feature, clear the check box.

See “Class of Service (COS)” to know more.

Toll Control

1. Click Toll Control to expand options. Set the desired Toll Control for the SLT extension for the Day and
Night.

2. Select the type of Calls Allowed during Day: All Calls, No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, and Limited Calls 1, 2, 3. Default: All Calls.

3. Select the type of Calls Allowed during Night: All Calls, No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, and Limited Calls 1, 2, 3. Default: All Calls.

80 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Toll Control levels on this page are based on the allowed and denied number lists of Local, Regional,
National, and Limited Call numbers you configured on the “Number Patterns” page.

4. If you have not configured the allowed and denied number list for the Type of Calls you selected as Toll
Control or if you want to add to the existing list, you may do it now.
• Click the settings icon.
• The Number Patterns page will open in a new window.
• Configure the Allowed and Denied Numbers.
• Click Submit.
• Close the window after you have configured the list.

See “Toll Control” to know more about this feature.

Toll Control for Dynamic Lock

Dynamic Lock allows extension users to change the Toll Control Levels (Calling Permissions) of their extensions on
their own by dialing a code. ETERNITY NE supports Toll Control Levels 0 to 3 for Dynamic Lock.

For each Toll Control Level from 0 to 3, you must assign 'Call Privilege’15. For each Call Privilege, you need to
configure the corresponding numbers strings to be allowed and number strings to be denied. See “Dynamic Lock”
to know more about this feature.

5. Select the call privilege for Calls allowed for Lock Level 1: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, All Calls.

6. Select the call privilege for Calls allowed for Lock Level 2: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, All Calls.

7. Select the call privilege for Calls allowed for Lock Level 3: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, All Calls.

The Lock Levels on this page are based on the allowed and denied number lists of Local, Regional,
National, and Limited Call numbers you configured on the “Number Patterns” page.

8. If you have not configured the allowed and denied number list for the Calls allowed/denied for the selected
Lock Level or if you want to add to the existing lists, you may do it now.
• Click the settings icon.
• The Number Patterns page will open in a new window.
• Configure the Allowed and Denied Numbers for Local, Regional, National, International, and Limited
Calls.
• Click Submit.
• Close the window after you have configured the list.

15. The Call Privilege types are: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National Calls, International Calls and Limited Calls.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Select Trunks for Outgoing Calls

Outgoing calls (to external numbers) are made by dialing Trunk Access Codes (TAC).
• TAC for users worldwide are: 0, 5, 61, 62, 63, 64.
• TAC for users in USA are: 9, 5, 81, 82, 83, 84.

For each TAC, you need to select the Outgoing Trunks. All external calls made by dialing a particular TAC will be
routed through the outgoing trunks you selected for that TAC.

You can also apply Least Cost Routing logic on the selected trunks, so that ETERNITY will route the outgoing call
through the trunk that costs the lowest for the call.

1. Click (+) to expand Select Outgoing Trunks options.

2. Select Trunks allowed for ‘0’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘0’.

• Double-click the field. A multiple selection box opens.

On the left, the trunks appear with their names (if configured in “Naming Trunks”) and port numbers in a
sequence, starting with CO trunks, followed by Mobile trunks and SIP trunks.

If you have not assigned any names to the trunks, they will appear with their default names (CO, MOB,
SIP) and port numbers.

If you have enabled On-Site Configuration, only those trunks that are connected will appear in the box.

• To select a trunk, place your cursor on the desired trunk, and click the Select>> button.
Or
• Press the ctrl key and click the left mouse button to select multiple trunks.

• You may change the sequence of the trunks you selected, if required, using the Up and Down arrow
buttons on the right display box.

• You can also delete trunks from the ones you have selected.

• You may enable Rotation, if you have selected more than one trunk. Default: Disabled.
When you enable Rotation, each new outgoing call is routed through the subsequent trunk in the
group16. This ensures equal distribution of outgoing call traffic on all trunks.

16. The first call through the first trunk, the second through the second, the third through the third trunk, and so forth. Thus each new
call is routed through the trunk next to the one that routed the previous outgoing call.

82 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When Rotation is OFF, calls are routed through the first trunk in the group. If this trunk is busy, the call
is routed to the next trunk in the group.

Rotation has no relevance if only one member trunk is selected.

• Click OK. The multiple selection box closes.

All the trunks appear in the field Trunks allowed for ‘0’ dialing, in the sequence you selected, separated
by commas.

3. To apply Least Cost Routing on the Trunks allowed for 0 dialing, select the desired LCR method from the
combo box:

• Number Based: Choose this option if the service providers of the trunks you selected offers different
tariffs according to area or distance, or phone numbers dialed.

• Time Based: Choose this option if the service providers of the selected trunks offer a different tariff
according to the time of the day.

• Time + Number Based: Choose option if the service providers of the selected trunks offer different
tariffs according to the time of the day as well as area/distance.

• Service Provider Based: Choose this option if the same service providers of the selected trunks offer
different rates for calls made to numbers within their own network and for calls made to numbers of
another Service Provider's network.

If you do not want to apply LCR, select OFF.

Configure LCR method that you selected for the trunk group.

4. To configure Least Cost Routing method you selected, click the link LCR settings. A new window opens.
• Go to the LCR method you selected for Trunks allowed for 0 dialing.
• Configure the LCR method. See Least Cost Routing under Advanced Settings for instructions.
• Click Submit. The window closes.

5. Select Trunks allowed for ‘5’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘5’. Follow the same steps as described above.
• Double-click the field. A multiple selection box opens.
• Select trunks, placing your cursor on the desired trunk, and clicking the Select>> button.
• Change the sequence of the trunks you selected, if required, using the Up and Down arrow buttons on
the right display box. Delete trunks from the ones you have selected, if required.
• Enable Rotation, if you have selected more than one trunk. Default: Disabled.
• Click OK.
All the trunks appear in the field Trunks allowed for ‘5’ dialing, in the sequence you selected, separated
by commas.
• Choose a Least Cost Routing method, if you want to apply it on the trunks. Default: OFF.
• Configure the Least Cost Routing method you selected by clicking LCR Settings link.

6. Select Trunks allowed for ‘61’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘61’.
• Follow the same steps as described above to select the trunks, enable Rotation, and apply Least Cost
Routing.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7. Select Trunks allowed for ‘62’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘62’.
• Follow the same steps as described above to select the trunks, enable Rotation, and apply Least Cost
Routing.

8. Select Trunks allowed for ‘63’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘632’.
• Follow the same steps as described above to select the trunks, enable Rotation, and apply Least Cost
Routing.

9. Select Trunks allowed for ‘64’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘64’.
• Follow the same steps as described above to select the trunks, enable Rotation, and apply Least Cost
Routing.

10. Click Submit.

Voice Mail Settings

1. Click Voice Mail Settings to expand options.

2. Keep the option Assign Personal Mail Box enabled.

3. Keep the option System should ask Password while Accessing Mail Box enabled, if you want
password protection for the mailbox.

By default, access to the mailbox is password protected. The “User Password” is required to access the
mailbox. Whenever the mailbox owner accesses the mailbox, the VMS will ask for the (user) password.

If you want to remove password protection, clear this check box.

Since a Mailbox can be accessed using the default User Password, 1111, extension users who are
assigned a mailbox are recommended to change their User Password to a unique 4 digit number to
prevent unauthorized access to their mailbox.

4. Define the Mail Box Size (minutes) for the extension. You may change the mailbox size to any desired
value from 001 to 999 minutes. Default: 5 minutes.

84 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Define the Maximum Message Length (sec) for the extension. This is the length of each message that
callers are allowed to record in the mailbox of the extension. You can change the message length to any
desired value from 001 to 999 seconds. Default: 15 seconds.

The VMS stops recording the message of the callers if it exceeds the maximum message length, and
stores only that part of the message that was recorded within the maximum message length limit.

6. Select the option for delivery of new messages When Mail Box is Full. You may select any of the
following message delivery options:

• Do not offer to Record a Message: The VMS will not allow the caller to record a message by
declining delivery of the message.

• Deliver New Message in General mailbox: The VMS will record the message in the General
mailbox. A General mailbox is a shared mailbox between extension users.

Only extension users who have General Mailbox in their “Class of Service (COS)” are allowed to
access it.

When you select this option, make sure that General Mailbox is enabled in the Class of Service of
the SLT extension. Refer “Class of Service (COS)” for instructions.

• Overwrite Old messages: The VMS will overwrite the old messages to record the new message in
the mailbox. The VMS starts overwriting the oldest message first.

Default: Deliver New Message in General Mailbox.

7. To play to the SLT extension user (mailbox owner), message details such as Date and Time (when the
message was recorded by the caller), the caller’s number17, the extension number dialed by the caller18,
select Play Message Detail after Delivery of Message.

You may select from the following options for Play message details:
• Never: The VMS will not play message details to the extension user after playing the message.
• Always: The VMS will play message details to the extension user after playing each message.
• On Demand: The VMS will play message details to the extension user only when the user requests
it. On completion of each message, the VMS will prompt the extension user to press a digit for date
and time stamp. When the mailbox owner presses the digit, the VMS will play the message details.

Default: On Demand.

8. Select the Voice Mail/Message Wait Notification Type for the extension. The VMS will notify the
extension user of the new messages in the mailbox and the message wait set by another extension user.

You may select from these Notification options:

• Stuttered Dial Tone/Voice Message: When the extension user goes OFF-Hook, s/he will hear a
voice message, if a pre-recorded Voice Module has been assigned for Message Wait Notification. If
no voice module is recorded and assigned, the extension user will hear a stuttered dial tone
instead.

17. The number of person who left the message in the mailbox.
18. The number of the extension user for whom the message is intended.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If you want voice message to be played as message wait notification, record and assign a Voice
Module. See “Voice Message Applications” for instructions.

ETERNITY can play only 4 Voice Modules simultaneously. The Voice Module for Message Wait Notification
will not be played if there are already 4 being played simultaneously. In which case, Stuttered Dial Tone will
be played for Message Wait Notification, when the extension user goes OFF-Hook.

• LED Lamp: If the SLT has a 'Message Wait' lamp, you may select this option as Message Wait
Indication. The lamp will blink continuously and will be turned off when the extension user has
retrieved all the waiting messages.

• Ring: The extension will ring for the duration of the Message Wait Ring Timer (configurable;
default: 30 seconds), for as many times as the Message Wait Ring Count (configurable; default: 10
times), at the interval set as the Message Wait Ring Timer Interval (configurable; default: 30
minutes).

When the extension user answers the call, the VMS informs the user of the new message and
allows the extension user to access it.

See the feature description “Message Wait” to know more.

Default: LED Lamp.

9. To notify the extension user via e-mail about new messages in the mailbox, select the check box Voice
Mail Notification via E-mail.

• To mail the new voice message to the extension user as attachment, select With Attachment (.wav
file).

• To mail the notification only to the extension user, select Without Attachment.

Default: Without Attachment.

• Type the E-mail Address of the extension user to which the Voice Mail notification is to be sent. The e-
mail ID may consist of up to 64 characters. Default: blank.

10. To assign Department Group mailbox to the SLT extension, select the check box Assign Mail Box of
Department Group. Default: Disabled.

You can assign the Mailbox of a Department Group to SLT extensions, even to those SLT extensions that
are not included in the Department Group. See “Department Call”.

• Select the Department Group whose mailbox you want to assign to the extension from the combo box
Specify Department Group.

86 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hardware Settings

1. Click (+) Hardware Settings to expand options.

2. Set AC Impedance for the SLT port to match the AC impedance of the telephone instrument connected to
it. Default:

However, the ETERNITY allows you to connect instruments with AC impedance other than 600.

3. Set the Flash Timer (msec) as per your requirement.

Flash is generally required to enable the SLT user to use features like Hold, Transfer, etc. Flash can be
dialed using the Flash key (if available) on the SLT or by tapping the hook switch.

Flash is breaking of Loop Current for a specific time period. ETERNITY considers that an extension has
dialed flash, if it detects breaking of the loop current for duration of the Flash Timer. The Flash timer is
configurable. The range of this timer is from 83 (minimum) to 999 (maximum) milliseconds. By default,
Flash Timer is set to 600 milliseconds.

You can program the Flash Timer according to the Flash Timer supported by the SLT instrument. If the
SLT instrument breaks the loop current for more than the programmed Flash Timer, the system will
consider it as a call disconnection.

4. Select the appropriate CLIP Type according to the CLIP Type supported by the telephone instrument
connected to the SLT port.

ETERNITY NE supports 3 signaling protocols for CLI on the SLT port: DTMF, FSK-V.23, and FSK-
BellCore. Default: DTMF.

Select None to disable CLIP on the SLT port.

5. Define the Minimum Caller ID Digits according to number of digits supported by the telephone instrument
connected to the SLT port.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Certain SLT instruments that support CLI require a minimum number of digits in the calling party's number
to be able to identify and display it. The Minimum Caller ID Digits are the number of zeroes to be added to
the calling party's number before displaying it on the called party's instrument.

6. Select the appropriate Ringing Signal to match the type of ringing current expected by the telephone
instrument connected to the SLT port.

You may select from these Ring Types: Sinusoidal, Trapezoidal, Low Sinusoidal, Low Trapezoidal.
Default: Trapezoidal.

7. Increase or decrease the Loop Current (mA) according to the Loop Length19, i.e. the length of the
telephone cable between the wall jack (into which the SLT telephone instrument is plugged) and the SLT
port.

The SLT Port provides the telephone instrument connected to it Loop Current of 25, 30, 35 and 40 mA.
Default: 25mA, which is sufficient to support Loop Length of 1 kilometer.

8. Set the value of the OFF-Hook Current (minimum) according to the current drawn by the SLT instrument
connected to the SLT port.

ETERNITY NE supports OFF-Hook detection for all types and brands of SLT instruments by providing for
configurable values for threshold current for OFF-Hook detection: 10mA, 12mA, 14mA, 16mA and 18mA.
Default: 12mA.

When an SLT instrument draws current equal to or greater than the configured threshold value of current
for OFF-Hook detection, ETERNITY will consider the SLT instrument as OFF-Hook and will offer dial tone
to the SLT.

9. Set the value of ON-Hook Detection (maximum) according to the current drawn by the SLT instrument
connected to the SLT port.

ETERNITY detects ON-Hook state of for all types and brands of SLT instruments by providing for
configurable values for threshold current for ON-Hook detection: 10mA, 12mA, 14mA, 16mA and 18mA.
Default: 10mA.

When an SLT instrument draws current equal to or lower than the configured threshold value of current for
ON-Hook detection, ETERNITY will consider the SLT instrument as ON-Hook and routes calls to this port.

SLT instruments also vary by the level of current they draw during the normal 'idle' state and when Flash is
dialed20 (the simulated idle state). So, when the Flash key of an SLT instrument is pressed, and if the
instrument draws a higher current than the threshold defined for the 'idle' state, the system will not be able
to detect Flash (i.e. ON-Hook state).

Consider this when changing the value of ON-Hook Detection Current. Define the value considering the
current drawn by your SLT instrument in idle state, as well as when Flash key is pressed.

19. The longer the Loop Length of the SLT port, the greater the likelihood of current dissipation, affecting speech quality of the tele-
phone instrument connected to the SLT port. Change the Loop Current according to the Loop Length of the SLT instrument con-
nected to the port.

20. Dialing 'Flash' either with the 'Flash Key' or by pressing the Hook-switch causes the phone to go in ON-Hook state briefly for 600-
800 milliseconds. Thus ON-Hook state is simulated briefly. The SLT may draw a higher current when 'Flash' is dialed.

88 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 10. Select the appropriate Answer Signaling21 option: Polarity Reversal or None. Select Polarity Reversal to
generate Answer Signaling on the SLT port.

Select None if no Answer Signaling is to be generated on the SLT port. Default: None.

11. Select the Disconnect Signaling22 on the SLT port as Polarity Reversal or Open Look as appropriate.
Select None if Disconnect Signaling is not generated on the SLT port. Default: None.

• Polarity Reversal: Call Disconnection is signaled in the form of Polarity Reversal. The Battery polarity
of the SLT port will be reversed. For example, if the battery polarity of the SLT port is '+ve' for TIP and '-
ve' for RING in speech condition then on disconnection on other port, TIP will become '-ve' and Ring
'+ve'. When call is disconnected, user will get Error tone.

• Open Loop: Call Disconnection is signaled in the form of Open Loop Disconnect Pulse, whereby the
Battery voltage on the SLT port is removed for the duration of the Open Loop Disconnect Timer
configured for that SLT port and will be restored on the expiry of this Timer. However, the Polarity of
Battery Voltage on the SLT port is not changed. When call is disconnected, the SLT extension user
gets an Error tone.

12. Set the Open Loop Disconnect Timer (msec), if you selected Open Loop Disconnect as Disconnect
Signaling on the SLT port.

Open Loop Disconnect Timer is the time period for which the system will remove Battery Voltage on the
SLT port and restore Battery Voltage on the expiry of the Timer to signal Call Disconnection. The range of
this timer is: 001 to 999 milliseconds. Default: 500 msec.

13. To increase the volume of the outgoing speech on the SLT, set the Tx Gain. Default: 0dB.

14. To increase the volume of the incoming speech on the SLT, set the Rx Gain. Default: 0dB.

15. To increase incoming speech volume level of calls from SIP Trunks to the SLT extension, set Rx Gain at
SIP Trunk (dB). Default: -9dB.

16. To increase outgoing speech volume level of calls from SIP Trunks to the SLT extension, set Tx Gain at
SIP Trunk (dB). Default: 0dB.

21. Answer Signal is a signal generated on the SLT port to indicate that the called party (remote party) has answered the call and the
call is now mature. Answer Signaling on the SLT port is particularly useful when there is a PCO machine or any Billing equipment
connected to the SLT port. With Answer Signaling enabled on an SLT port, during an outgoing call is made from that SLT port to
any other port - CO/Mobile/SIP- when the called party (remote party) answers, the Public Network provides an Answer Signal to
the trunk port to indicate call maturity. This information can be passed on to the PCO machine billing equipment in the form of
Answer Signaling. On detecting Answer Signaling the PCO machine billing equipment can start billing.

Answer Signaling is generated in the form of Polarity Reversal or Battery Reversal, whereby the Battery polarity of the SLT port
gets reversed. For example, if the battery polarity of the SLT port is +ve for TIP and -ve for RING in speech condition, then on call
maturity, TIP becomes -ve and Ring becomes +ve.

22. A 'Disconnect Signal' is the signal generated on the SLT port to indicate that the called party (remote party has disconnected the
call.

Disconnect Signaling on the SLT port is useful when there is a PCO machine or any Billing equipment connected to the SLT port.
With Disconnect Signaling enabled on an SLT port, during an outgoing call is made from that SLT port to any other port - CO/
Mobile/SIP - when the called party (remote party) disconnects, i.e. goes ON Hook, the Public Network provides a Disconnect Sig-
nal to trunk port indicate call disconnection. This signal can be generated on the SLT port to indicate to the PCO machine/Billing
equipment connected to this port to consider the call as disconnected and stop billing. Thus, Disconnect Signaling on the SLT port
helps prevent excessive billing.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • You can also set the Rx and Tx Gains for SIP to Digital Trunks and Extensions and SIP to CO Trunks.
• To increase Rx and Tx Gain for SIP to CO trunks, go to '“CO Trunks”’.
• To increase Rx and Tx Gain for Digital Trunks/Extensions, go to '“SIP Trunks”’.

Voice Mail Auto Attendant

1. Click (+) to expand Voice Mail Auto Attendant options.

2. Select a Profile from 1 to 4 as Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile for the extension. Default: 1.

The Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile determines the welcome message to be played to mailbox owner
(extension user) when they reach the home node. It also determines whether or not the user should be
taken to the root node directly.

Make sure you also configure the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profiles when you assign them to extensions.
To configure, click the link Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile. See “Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile”.

3. To allow callers to reach the SLT extension using Dial By Name option offered by the VMS Auto Attendant,
abbreviate the extension user’s name to three letters and type it in the Abbreviated Name field.

When the VMS Auto Attendant is used, callers can be prompted to Dial by Name of the desired party
(extension user) instead the extension number.

4. Select the Call Transfer Type for the Day and Call Transfer Type for Night from the following options:

• Transfer when extension answers: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto
Attendant will transfer the call when the extension answers (goes OFF-Hook).

If the extension does not answer23, the VMS Auto Attendant will transfer the call to the mailbox of the
extension, if assigned, or take the caller back to the home node.

• Take caller to Mailbox: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant will
check if the extension number has a mailbox assigned and transfer the call to the mailbox of the
extension.

• Transfer immediately: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant will
transfer the call on the extension without checking whether it is busy or free.

23. The VMS will wait for the duration of the Wait for Answer Timer (default: 15 seconds; the timer is configurable). If the call is not
answered before this timer expires, it is treated as No Reply.

90 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Transfer when extension rings: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant
will wait for the extension to start ringing and then transfer the call.

If the extension is busy the VMS Auto Attendant will transfer the call to the mailbox of the extension, if
assigned, or take the caller back to the home node.

• Transfer when extension permits: The VMS Auto Attendant prompts the caller to record his/her
name. It puts the caller on hold and places the call on the desired extension. If the extension is free and
answers the call, the VMS announces the caller’s name to the extension user and prompts the
extension user to choose whether or not to speak to the caller. If the extension user chooses to talk, the
VMS transfers the call.

If the extension user chooses not to talk, the VMS transfers the call to the mailbox of the extension
user, if assigned, and asks the caller to leave a message.

Default: Transfer when extension answers for Day and Night.

5. Enable Announce Name, if you want the VMS Auto Attendant to announce the extension user’s name to
the caller when transferring the call to the extension. Default: Disabled.

When you enable Announce Name, make sure you record the extension user’s name on the VMS. For
instructions, see “Recording Station Names”.

DDI Routing

1. Click [+] DDI Routing to expand options.

2. In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 1, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this SLT extension
from among the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered SIP Trunk 1.

3. In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 2, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this SLT extension
from among the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered SIP Trunk 2.

4. In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 3, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this SLT extension
from among the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered SIP Trunk 3.

5. In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 4, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this SLT extension
from among the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered SIP Trunk 4.

6. To allow the system to land incoming calls with the same DDI number on this SLT extension, keep Allow
Incoming DDI Calls enabled. Default: Enabled.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Clear check box only if you want to disable.

7. To allow the system to send the DDI number as CLI when outgoing calls are made from this SLT
extension, keep Send DDI Number as CLI enabled. Default: Enabled.

If you clear the check box, the system will send the MSN number as CLI of outgoing calls made from
this extension.

SMDR Storage

The ETERNITY offers Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) that enables you to record the details of Internal,
Incoming (IC) and Outgoing (OG) calls made from/to all its extensions. To obtain SMDR as a report, you must
enable SMDR Storage, and set filters. See “Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)” to know more.
1. Click [+] SMDR Storage to expand options.

2. Select the type of internal calls to be stored from the combo box Store Internal Calls. You can select from
the following options:
• Made by/made to this extension (the system will store all calls made to and from this extension).
• If made by this extension (the system will store outgoing calls made from this extension)
• If made to this extension (the system will store only incoming calls from other extensions)
• Never (the system will not store internal calls)

3. To store details of incoming calls from external numbers, select Store Incoming Calls. Default: selected.

4. To store details of outgoing calls made by the extension user to external numbers, select Store Outgoing
Calls. Default: selected.

Call Budget

The Call Budget feature allot a 'budget' limit for outgoing calls made by the extension. See “Call Budget” for more
information. If you want to enable this feature on this extension,

1. Click [ + ] Call Budget to expand options.

2. Select the check box Apply Call Budget.

92 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Define the calling permission for the extension when it has used up the call budget allotted to it. Select the
desired option for Call Privilege when Call Budget is consumed:
• No Calls
• Local Calls
• Regional Calls
• National Calls
• All Calls
Default: No Calls.

Caller ID on Call Transfer

This parameter is related to the CLIP feature. It allows you to choose whether the system should display the CLI of
the ‘Held Party’ or the CLI of the ‘Transferring Party’ to the transfer destination extension while the call is being
transferred.

See the feature description for “Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)” to know more.

1. Click [ + ] Caller ID on Call Transfer to expand.

2. Select the radio button of the desired option:

• Display Number of Transferring Extension when call is transferred on this extension.

• Display Number of Party kept on Hold when call is transferred on this extension.

Walk-In/Walk-Out

This parameter is related to the feature Walk-In Class of Service. ETERNITY offers two types of Walk-In: i) One-
Call per Walk-In, where the extension user is automatically logged out after a call. ii) Walk-In until Logout, where
the extension user remains logged on until s/he manually walks out or a second user walks into the same
extension. To know more about this feature, see “Walk-In Class of Service”.

1. Click [ + ] Walk-In/Walk-Out to expand.

2. Select the radio button of the type of Walk-Out mode you want to assign to the extension:

• Walk-Out on completion of call automatically: Select this option, if you want to assign One-Call per
Walk-In to the extension.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Walk-Out when user gives command to Walk-Out: Select this option, if you want to assign Walk-In
until Logout to the extension.

Call Forward

1. Click [ + ] Call Forward to expand.

2. Set the Call Forward No Reply Timer (sec) to the desired value, if required. The range of this timer is .
Default: 030 seconds.

Call Forward No Reply Timer signifies the duration for which the system will wait for an extension to
answer an incoming call, before forwarding the call it to the programmed destination phone number as Call
Forward-No Reply. By default the Timer is set to 30 seconds. Refer the feature description for “Call
Forward” to know more.

3. Select the type of calls to be forwarded If Call is forwarded on external number. You may select from the
following options:
• Forward only Internal calls
• Forward only Trunk calls
• Forward all calls (internal as well as trunk calls)
Default: Forward only Trunk calls.

This parameter is relevant for the features “Call Forward” and “Mobility Extension”.

More Features
1. Click More... link to expand.

94 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Taping
To use the “Call Taping” feature on the extension,

1. Click [ +] Call Taping to expand options.

2. Select the type of Call Taping to be applied from the options:

• OFF
• Apply as per profile 1
• Apply as per profile 2
• Apply as per profile 3
• Apply as per profile 4

If you do not want to apply Call Taping, select OFF.

Default: OFF.

3. Now, configure the Call Taping Profile number you selected for the extension. To do this,
• Click the link Call Taping. The page opens in a new window, displaying the parameters of the profile
you selected for the extension.

• In the new window,

• Enable Call Taping for Incoming Calls. Type the numbers of the Incoming Calls that must be
taped. You may type as many as 99 numbers.

• Enable Call Taping for Outgoing Calls. Type the external numbers that you want the system to
tape. You may type as many as 99 numbers.

• Select the check box Tape Calls without CLI? if you want incoming calls without CLI to be taped.
Default: Disabled.

• Select the check box Call Taping for Internal Calls, if you want internal calls made and received
by the extension to be taped.

• Click Submit to save the Profile.

• Close the pop-up window by clicking [x] on the top-right corner of the window.

See “Call Taping” to know more.

Call Duration Control

To enable the “Call Duration Control (CDC)” feature on the extension,

1. Click [+] Call Duration Control to expand options.

2. Select the type of Call Duration Control to be applied from the options:
• OFF
• Apply as per profile 1
• Apply as per profile 2
• Apply as per profile 3
• Apply as per profile 4

If you do not want to apply Call Duration Control, select OFF.

Default: OFF.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Configure the Call Duration Control Profile number you selected for the extension. To do this,

• Click the settings button. The page opens in a new window. The page displays the parameters of the
profile you selected for the extension.

• In the new window,

• Enable Apply CDC to Internal Calls, if CDC is to be applied on internal calls. Default: Disabled.

• Enable Apply CDC for Incoming Calls received from trunks, if CDC is to be applied on incoming
external calls. Default: Disabled.

• Enable Apply CDC for Outgoing Calls, if CDC is to be applied to outgoing external calls. Default:
Disabled.

• If required, change the CDC Timer to the desired duration. The range of the timer is 0001 to 9999
seconds. Default: 160 seconds.

• Enable Disconnect Call after CDC Timer check box if you want calls to be disconnected on the expiry
of the CDC Timer. Default: Disabled.

• In the Apply CDC for calls matching with numbers column, type the external numbers on which you
want to apply CDC. You can enter as many as 99 numbers.

• In the Do Not Apply CDC for calls matching with numbers column, enter the numbers which you
want to be exempt from CDC.

• Click Submit and close the window.

Priority
1. Select a Priority from 1 to 9 for the SLT extension. Default: 5.

Each extension of the ETERNITY is assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3... to 9, with '1' being
lowest Priority and '9' being highest Priority. Whenever an extension (phone) with higher priority calls an
extension with lower priority, a triple ring is placed on the called extension. To know more, read the feature
description “Priority”.

Personal Directory
1. Select a Personal Directory number from 01 to 50 that you want to assign to the SLT extension. Default:
None.

A Personal Directory is a list of 25 frequently dialed numbers, each of which are stored by Index number
(location code), Name and Trunk Access Codes (). The Personal Directory is necessary for using the
features “Abbreviated Dialing” and “Dial By Name”.

When a Personal Directory is assigned to an SLT, it must also be configured first.

The Personal Directory can be configured also by the extension user. Refer the topic “Abbreviated Dialing” for
instructions on configuring the Personal Directory.

96 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Time Table
2. Select a Time Table for the SLT extension. Default: System Time Table.

If you have not configured Time Table, you may do so now, by clicking the Time Table link. Define the
working days, and the start and end time of the working hours for each working day.

See “Time Tables” to know more.

Alarm Notification Type

Configure this parameter for the feature description for “Alarms” to know more.
1. Click [ + ] Alarm to expand.

2. Select the type of alarm notification the system should use When User answers Alarm Call. Your options
are:
• Play Voice Message: The extension user is played a message recorded in the Voice Module on
answering the alarm call.

• Play Music-on-Hold: The extension user is played music-on-hold on answering the alarm call.

• Play VMS Alarm Greeting: The extension user is greeted by the VMS on answering the alarm call.
See

• Route to Operator: The alarm call is routed to the Operator extension, so that the Operator can the
serve the alarm request to the extension user.

Default: Play Voice Message.

Help Desk
Configure this parameter if you want to define the extension as a “Help Desk”.

1. Click [ + ] Help Desk to expand.

2. Select the check box Help Desk Auto set ACB on calling extension, when this extension is busy.
Default: Disabled.

Forced Account Code

Configure this parameter, if you want to apply the feature Forced Account Code on the extension. When Forced
Account code is enabled, the system will allow the extension user to dial an external number only after the user has
entered the Account Code. To know more, see “Account Codes”.

1. Click [ + ] Account Code to expand.

2. Select the check box Do not allow Outgoing Calls without Account Code (Force Account Code).

Now that you have finished configuring the SLT extension. You may configure the next SLT extension.

1. Click the tab of the next SLT extension number.

2. Follow the same steps as described above to configure this extension.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Use the Copy button to apply the same SLT extension settings you configured on this extension.

How to copy Parameter Values to another SLT extension

1. Click the Copy button on the page of the SLT extension you wish to copy.

The Copy dialog box opens. The dialog box displays the number and name of the extension to be copied
in the Copy from: field.

The dialog box also lists the numbers and names of the extensions to which you can copy the values
under Copy To:

2. Select the check boxes of the extension numbers to which you want to Copy To.

98 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Click OK.
The parameter values of the extension you Copy From will be applied on the extension(s) you Copy To.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DKP Extensions

The ETERNITY NE supports two Digital Key Phone (DKP) extension ports.

If you have enabled 'On-Site Configuration', only the DKP port on which a DKP/DSS Console is connected
displayed on this page for configuration.

On this page,


More: Click this button to view all parameter links on the page.

Less: Click this button to view only the essential parameter links on the page.

Expand: Click to expand a link to display all parameters under the link.

Collapse: Click to collapse a link. Hides all parameters under the link.

Settings: Click to configure the settings of a parameter further.

More link: Click to view all additional parameters on the page.

To configure the second DKP extension, click the DKP Extension number (name) tab.

To save settings, click Submit.

To copy the same DKP parameter values to the other DKP, SLT and SIP extensions, use Copy button.

100 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Follow the instructions provided below to configure the DKP extensions.

Class of Service

1. Click [+] to expand Class of Service options.

Define the Class of Service for the DKP extension for Day time and Night time.

2. To allow a feature, select the check box of the feature.

3. To deny a feature, clear the check box.

See “Class of Service (COS)” to know more.

Toll Control

1. Click [+] to expand Toll Control options. Set the desired Toll Control for the DKP extension for the Day
and Night.

2. Select the type of Calls Allowed during Day: All Calls, No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, and Limited Calls 1,2, 3. Default: All Calls.

3. Select the type of Calls Allowed during Night: All Calls, No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, and Limited Calls 1,2, 3. Default: All Calls.

The Toll Control levels on this page are based on the allowed and denied number lists of Local, Regional,
National, International, and Limited Call numbers you configured on the “Number Patterns” page.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. If you have not configured the allowed and denied number list for the Type of Calls you selected as Toll
Control, or if you want to add to the existing list, you may do it now.
• Click the settings icon.
• The Number Patterns page will open in a new window.
• Configure the Allowed and Denied Numbers.
• Click Submit.
• Close the window after you have configured the list.

See “Toll Control” to know more about this feature.

Toll Control for Dynamic Lock

Dynamic Lock allows extension users to change the Toll Control Levels (Calling Permissions) of their extensions on
their own by dialing a code. ETERNITY NE supports Toll Control Levels 0 to 3 for Dynamic Lock.

For each Toll Control Level from 0 to 3, you must assign 'Call Privilege’24. For each Call Privilege, you need to
configure the corresponding number strings to be allowed and number strings to be denied. See “Dynamic Lock” to
know more about this feature.

1. Click [+] to expand Toll Control for Dynamic Lock.

2. Select the call privilege for Calls allowed for Lock Level 1: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, All Calls.

3. Select the call privilege for Calls allowed for Lock Level 2: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, All Calls.

4. Select the call privilege for Calls allowed for Lock Level 3: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, All Calls.

The Lock Levels on this page are based on the allowed and denied number lists of Local, Regional,
National, International, and Limited Call numbers you configured on the “Number Patterns” page.

5. If you have not configured the allowed and denied number list for the Calls allowed/denied for the selected
Lock Level, or if you want to add to the existing lists, you may do it now.
• Click the settings icon.
• The Number Patterns page will open in a new window.
• Configure the Allowed and Denied Numbers for Local, Regional, National, International, and Limited
Calls.
• Click Submit.
• Close the window after you have configured the list.

24. The Call Privilege types are: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National Calls, International Calls and Limited Calls.

102 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Select Trunks for Outgoing Calls

Outgoing calls (to external numbers) are made by dialing Trunk Access Codes (TAC).
• TAC for users worldwide are: 0, 5, 61, 62, 63, 64.
• TAC for users in USA are: 9, 5, 81, 82, 83, 84.

For each TAC, you need to select the Outgoing Trunks. All external calls made by dialing a particular TAC will be
routed through the outgoing trunks you selected for that TAC.

You can also apply Least Cost Routing logic on the selected trunks, so that ETERNITY routes the outgoing call
through the trunk that costs the lowest for the call.

1. Click [+] Select Outgoing Trunks to expand options.

2. Select Trunks allowed for ‘0’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘0’.

• Double-click the field. A multiple selection box opens.

On the left, the trunks appear with their names (if configured in “Naming Trunks”) and port numbers in a
sequence, starting with CO trunks, followed by Mobile trunks and SIP trunks.

If you have not assigned any names to the trunks, they will appear with their default names (CO, MOB,
SIP) and port numbers.

If you have enabled On-Site Configuration, only those trunks that are connected will appear in the box.

• To select a trunk, place your cursor on the desired trunk, and click the Select>> button.
Or
• Press the ctrl key and click the left mouse button to select multiple trunks.

• You may change the sequence of the trunks you selected, if required, using the Up and Down arrow
buttons on the right display box.

• You can also delete trunks from the ones you have selected.

• You may enable Rotation, if you have selected more than one trunk. Default: Disabled.

When you enable Rotation, each new outgoing call is routed through the subsequent trunk in the
group25. This ensures equal distribution of outgoing call traffic on all trunks.

25. The first call through the first trunk, the second through the second, the third through the third trunk, and so forth. Thus each new
call is routed through the trunk next to the one that routed the previous outgoing call.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When Rotation is OFF, calls are routed through the first trunk in the group. If this trunk is busy, the call
is routed to the next trunk in the group.

Rotation has no relevance if only one member trunk is selected.

• Click OK. The multiple selection box closes.

All the trunks appear in the field Trunks allowed for ‘0’ dialing, in the sequence you selected, separated
by commas. For example, BSNL (CO-1), BSNL (CO-3), Reliance (CO-4) and Pulver (SIP1).

3. To apply Least Cost Routing on the Trunks allowed for 0 dialing, select the desired LCR method from the
combo box:

• Number Based: Choose this option if the service providers of the trunks you selected offer different
tariffs according to area or distance, or phone numbers dialed.

• Time Based: Choose this option if the service providers of the selected trunks offer a different tariff
according to the time of the day.

• Time + Number Based: Choose option if the service providers of the selected trunks offer different
tariffs according to the time of the day as well as area/distance/phone number.

• Service Provider Based: Choose this option if the same service providers of the selected trunks offer
different rates for calls made to numbers within their own network and for calls made to numbers of
another Service Provider's network.

• If you do not want to apply LCR, select OFF.

• Configure LCR method that you selected for the trunk group.

4. To configure Least Cost Routing method you selected, click the link LCR settings. A new window opens.
• Go to the LCR method you selected for Trunks allowed for 0 dialing.
• Configure the LCR method. See Least Cost Routing under Advanced Settings for instructions.
• Click Submit.
• Close the window.

5. Select Trunks allowed for ‘5’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘5’. Follow the same steps as described above.
• Double-click the field. A multiple selection box opens.
• Select trunks, placing your cursor on the desired trunk, and clicking the Select>> button.
• Change the sequence of the trunks you selected, if required, using the Up and Down arrow buttons on
the right display box. Delete trunks from the ones you have selected, if required.
• Enable Rotation, if you have selected more than one trunk. Default: Disabled.
• Click OK.
All the trunks appear in the field Trunks allowed for ‘5’ dialing, in the sequence you selected, separated
by commas.
• Choose a Least Cost Routing method, if you want to apply it on the trunks. Default: OFF.
• Configure the Least Cost Routing method you selected by clicking LCR Settings link.

6. Select Trunks allowed for ‘61’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘61’.

104 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Follow the same steps as described above to select the trunks, enable Rotation, and apply Least Cost
Routing.

7. Select Trunks allowed for ‘62’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘62’.
• Follow the same steps as described above to select the trunks, enable Rotation, and apply Least Cost
Routing.

8. Select Trunks allowed for ‘63’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘63’.
• Follow the same steps as described above to select the trunks, enable Rotation, and apply Least Cost
Routing.

9. Select Trunks allowed for ‘64’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘64’.
• Follow the same steps as described above to select the trunks, enable Rotation, and apply Least Cost
Routing.

10. Click Submit.

Phone Settings

1. Click [+] Phone Settings to expand options.

2. Set the number of Call Appearances for the DKP extension. Default: 2

Call Appearances (also referred to as 'call loops') define the capacity of a DKP extension to handle
multiple calls simultaneously. A Call Appearance allows an extension user to attend to more than one
calling party at a time.

A minimum of two Call Appearances must be assigned to a DKP extension - Operator extension or
Executive extension - so that the extension user can put one party on hold while talking to another. A third
Call Appearance allows the extension user to put two calls on hold, make/attend a third call and toggle
between three calls.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The higher the call capacity (i.e. more the number of Call Appearances) assigned to an extension, the
more the number of calls the extension user can handle.

The ETERNITY NE supports a maximum of 10 Call Appearances of the DKP extensions.

DKP extensions for Executives are usually assigned 2 Call Appearances, while the Operator extension is
assigned 6 Call Appearances to handle 6 calls simultaneously.

3. Select the CO CLIP Pattern for the DKP. This is the type of Calling Line Presentation on the DKP for
incoming calls from trunks. You can select any of these options:
• Name Only: only the name of the caller will be displayed.
• Number Only: only the number of the caller will be displayed.
• Number + Name: both the name and the number of the caller will be displayed.
Default: Number + Name.

4. Select the Language for the DKP extension. Default: English.

ETERNITY NE has language support for English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese, and Italian.
When you select any of these languages, all the prompts and command strings will appear in the selected
language.

5. Select a Ringer Mode for the DKP from the four options:
• Ring immediate (it rings immediately as a fresh calls lands on the DKP).
• Ring if idle (rings only if the DKP is idle).
• Ring after a delay (if the call is still not answered).
• Ring OFF (silent mode).

Default: Ring Immediate’.

6. If you selected Ring after a delay as Ringer Mode, set the Ring Delay Timer (sec), if required, to the
desired value.

The Ring Delay Timer is the time in seconds the ETERNITY NE waits on receiving a call to ring on the
DKP. The range of this timer is 0 to 99 seconds. Default: 10 seconds.

7. If you want to enable Ringer Auto Acknowledge mode, set the Acknowledge Timer (sec) to the desired
value.

The Ringer Auto Acknowledge mode determines when to stop the ring on the DKP. There are two options
for Ringer Auto Acknowledge:
• Stop only when the call is answered.
• Stop after a delay.

To stop the ring on the DKP after a delay, the Acknowledge Timer must be configured. The range of this
timer is 01 to 99 seconds. Default: 00 seconds.

To stop the ring only when the Call is answered or manually acknowledged, the Acknowledge Timer must
be set to '00'. By default, Ring Auto Acknowledge is turned OFF.
8. To assign the Ring Destination for the DKP extension, select the desired destination for Play Ring on. You
may choose
• Speakerphone: The ring will be played on the Speakerphone.
• Headset: The ring will be played on the Headset.

106 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default: Speakerphone.

When you select the Headset as the destination, make sure that you enable Connect Headset to the DKP.

The speech path of both, the Headset and the Handset is common. If the Headset is not connected and
you have selected the Headset as the ring destination, the ring will be played on the speaker of the
Handset.

9. Select the desired Ring Tune according to your/DKP user’s preference. Default: 1.

10. Set the Ringer Volume to the desired level according to your preference. Default: 5.

11. To increase/decrease the volume of outgoing speech (Transmit Gain) on the handset of the DKP, set the
Handset Transmit Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 9. Default: 5.

12. To increase/decrease the volume of incoming speech (Receive Gain) on the handset of the DKP, set the
Handset Receive Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 9. Default: 5.

13. To increase/decrease the volume of outgoing speech (Transmit Gain) on the headset port of the DKP, set
the Headset Transmit Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 9. Default: 5.

14. To increase/decrease the volume of outgoing speech (Receive Gain) on the headset port of the DKP, set
the Headset Receive Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 9. Default: 5.

15. To change the Transmit Gain of the Speakerphone MIC Volume, set Hands-free Transmit Volume to the
desired level, from 0 to 9. Default: 5.

16. To change the Receive Gain of the Speakerphone MIC Volume, set Hands-free Receive Volume to the
desired level, from 0 to 9. Default: 5.

17. To change the key DTMF Side Tone of the DKP, set the Key Click Volume to the desired level, from 0 to
9. Default: 5

Key Click Volume is the tone you hear as you press the dial pad keys of EON.

18. To enable DTMF dialing on the DKP, keep the DTMF Generation flag enabled. Default: Enabled.

To disable the flag, clear the check box.

19. Select the desired DTMF Transmit Level from 0 to 9 for DTMF generation from the DKP. Default: 5.

20. To use a Headset with the DKP, set Headset Connected? to Yes. Default: No.

Make sure that you connect a Headset to the DKP, if you select Yes.

21. Select the check box of Auto Answer to enable this feature on the DKP. Default: Disabled.

When you set the “Auto Answer” feature on the DKP, the DKP goes OFF-Hook automatically after a preset
period of time, without the extension user having to pick up the handset or press the speaker or headset
key. When you enable Auto Answer, you must configure the Auto Answer Timer.

22. If you enabled Auto Answer on the DKP, set the Auto Answer Timer (sec) to the desired value.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 This timer defines the time in seconds that the DKP should wait before going OFF-Hook to auto answer a
call. The range of this timer is 1 to 9 seconds. Default: 1 second.

If you set the Auto Answer Timer to 0, Auto Answer feature will be disabled.

23. Change, if required, the Backlight brightness of the DKP LCD display, by setting the LCD Backlight Level
to the desired value.

The intensity of the backlight brightness increases from 0 to 4, where '0' will cause the backlight to be
turned OFF. '1' signifies minimum intensity, '4' signifies maximum intensity. Select a level from 1 to 4 from
the list in the combo box. Default: 3.

24. Set the Back Light Off Timer (sec) to the desired value, if required.

The backlight of the DKP LCD display can be kept switched ON continuously, or can be set to switch Off
automatically after a predefined period of time, by setting the Backlight Off Timer. The range of the
Backlight Off Timer is from 000 to 999 seconds. Default: 60 seconds.

25. Set the LCD Contrast Level to a level from 1 to 4 that is comfortable to you.

The DKP has 4-level contrast control for its LCD display. Level 1 signifies minimum and level 4 is the
maximum. Default: 3.

26. Click Submit to save your phone settings.

In addition to the above listed Phone Settings configured by the Installer, DKP extension users can also change
their phone settings, referred to as ‘DKP Personal Settings’ to match their preferences and requirement. The DKP
Personal Settings include:
• Ringer Volume
• Ringer Tune
• Ringer Mode
• Ringer Acknowledge Mode
• Speech Volume (Transmit/Receive)
• Time Zone (Working Hours/Non-working Hours)
• User Status (Present/Absent)
• Keypad Security (Lock/Open)
• Call Answer Type - Manual/Auto
• Headset/Handset Connectivity option

To be able change the DKP personal settings, the DKP extension user must access and navigate the phone menu.
See “Digital Key Phone-Operation” to know more.

Phone Key Settings

You can customise the DSS keys of EON, to match the requirements of the DKP extension user. For example, if
EON is an Operator's extension, more DSS keys may be required for Trunk Access, Call Appearances, Call
Release, Direct Station (DKP, SLT, SIP extension) Calling, than for accessing features. If EON is an Executive's
extension, more DSS keys may be required for single-touch access to features, and fewer keys for Trunk Access
and Direct Station Calling.

To customise the key map of the DKP connected to this port,

1. Click Phone Key Settings link.

108 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The default key map of the model of EON connected to DKP1 port appears on your screen.

2. Now, let us attempt to configure the feature Trunk to Trunk Transfer on the key that has presently CO3
configured on it.

3. Click the CO3 key. A dialog box opens, with the options for the Functions to be Performed by the key

4. In the dialog box, in the Select Function Type list box, select the function to be performed by the key.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 As Trunk to Trunk transfer is a feature, select the option FEATURE from the Select Function Type list
box.

5. In the Select Offset drop down list, all the features that can be assigned to DSS keys are listed.

6. Select Trunk to Trunk Call Transfer from the list of features in the Select Offset box.

110 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7. Click OK. The box closes.
The Trunk to Trunk Call Transfer feature appears in abbreviated form as T-T Xfer on the key label.

8. To assign Remote DND, click CO2 key. A dialog box opens.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 9. In the Select Function Type list box, select the option SA Command, as Remote DND is a System
Administrator (SA) Command.

112 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 10. In the Select Offset box, select the option Set DND for remote station.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 11. Click OK. The box closes. Remote DND feature appears in abbreviated form as R-DND on the key label.

12. Follow the same instructions to assign features to other DSS keys. Selecting the appropriate Function
Type and the Offset for each feature/function.

For example, DND-Override is a feature, so select FEATURE as the Function Type.

To assign direct access to DKP2, select DKP as Function Type and 2 as Offset.

To assign direct access to Mobile Trunk 1, select MOBILE as Function Type and 1 as Offset.

To assign direct access to SIP Trunk 1, select SIP as Function Type and 1 as Offset.

Repeat the same to assign direct access to Mobile Trunk 2 and SIP Trunk 2.

• Click OK, each time you select a Function Type and Offset in the dialog box.

• You can reinstate default key assignment any time, by clicking the Default button at the bottom of the
window.

• When you complete assigning functions to keys, close the window.

DSS Key Settings

If you have connected the Matrix DSS Console, DSS64, to EON, you may now configure the DSS Console keys.
See “Direct Station Selection Console” to know more.

To customise the key map of the DSS attached to this DKP,

114 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Click DSS Key Settings link.

The default key map of the DSS64 connected to the DKP port appears on your screen.
2. Click the DSS key. A dialog box opens, with the options for the Functions to be Performed by the key

3. In the Select Function Type list box, select the function to be performed by the key. For instance, if you
want to use this key to call a Department Group, select the option Dept. Group as Function Type.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. In the Select Offset list box, select the number of the Department Group from 1 to 5 which is to be called
when this key is pressed.

5. Click OK. The dialog box closes.

116 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. Repeat the same to configure other DSS keys.

You can reinstate default key assignment any time, by clicking the Default button at the bottom of the
window.

7. When you finish configuring the DSS keys, close the DSS Keys Settings window.

Voice Mail Settings

1. Click [+] to expand Voice Mail Settings options.

2. Keep the option Assign Personal Mail Box enabled.

3. Keep the option System should ask Password while Accessing Mail Box enabled, if you want
password protection for the mailbox.

By default, access to the mailbox is password protected. The “User Password” is required to access the
mailbox. Whenever the mailbox owner accesses the mailbox, the VMS will ask for the (user) password.

If you want to remove password protection, clear this check box.

Since a Mailbox can be accessed using the default User Password, 1111, extension users who are
assigned a mailbox are recommended to change their User Password to a unique 4 digit number to
prevent unauthorized access to their mailbox.

4. Define the Mail Box Size (minutes) for the extension. You may change the mailbox size to any desired
value from 001 to 999 minutes. Default: 5 minutes.

5. Define the Maximum Message Length (sec) for the extension. This is the length of each message that
callers are allowed to record in the mailbox of the extension. You can change the message length to any
desired value from 001 to 999 seconds. Default: 15 seconds.

The VMS stops recording the message of the callers if it exceeds the maximum message length, and
stores only that part of the message that was recorded within the maximum message length limit.

6. Select the option for delivery of new messages When Mail Box is Full. You may select any of the
following message delivery options:

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Do not offer to Record a Message: The VMS will not offer the caller the option of Leaving a
Message.

• Deliver New Message in General mailbox: The VMS will not record the message in the General
mailbox. A General mailbox is a shared mailbox between extension users.

Only extension users who have General Mailbox in their “Class of Service (COS)” are allowed to
access it.

When you select this option, make sure that General Mailbox is enabled in the Class of Service of
the DKP extension. Refer “Class of Service (COS)” for instructions.

• Overwrite Old messages: The VMS will overwrite the old messages to record the new message in
the mailbox. The VMS will overwrite the oldest message first.

Default: Deliver New Message in General Mailbox.

7. To play to the DKP extension user (mailbox owner), message details such as Date and Time (when the
message was recorded by the caller), the caller’s number26, the extension number dialed by the caller27,
select Play Message Detail after Delivery of Message.

You may select from the following options for Play message details:
• Never: The VMS will not play message details to the extension user after playing the message.
• Always: The VMS will play message details to the extension user after playing each message.
• On Demand: The VMS will play message details to the extension user only when the user requests
it. On completion of each message, the VMS will prompt the extension user to press a digit for date
and time stamp. When the mailbox owner presses the digit, the VMS will play the message details.

Default: On Demand.

8. Select the Voice Mail/Message Wait Notification Type for the extension. The VMS will notify the
extension user of the new messages in the mailbox and the message wait set by another extension user.

You may select from these Notification options:

• Stuttered Dial Tone/Voice Message: When the extension user goes OFF-Hook, s/he will hear a
voice message, if a pre-recorded Voice Module has been assigned for Message Wait Notification. If
no voice module is recorded and assigned, the extension user will hear a stuttered dial tone
instead.

If you want voice message to be played as message wait notification, record and assign a Voice
Module. See “Voice Message Applications” for instructions.

ETERNITY can play only 4 Voice Modules simultaneously. The Voice Module for Message Wait Notification
will not be played if there are already 4 being played simultaneously. In which case, Stuttered Dial Tone will
be played for Message Wait Notification, when the extension user goes OFF-Hook.

• LED Lamp: If the DKP has a 'Message Wait' lamp, you may select this option as Message Wait
Indication. The lamp will blink continuously and will be turned off when the extension user has
retrieved all the waiting messages.

26. The number of person who left the message in the mailbox.
27. The number of the extension user for whom the message is intended.

118 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Ring: The extension will ring for the duration of the Message Wait Ring Timer (configurable;
default: 30 seconds), for as many times as the Message Wait Ring Count (configurable; default: 10
times), at the interval set as the Message Wait Ring Timer Interval (configurable; default: 30
minutes).

When the extension user answers the call, the VMS informs the user of the new message and
allows the extension user to access it.

See the feature description “Message Wait” to know more.

Default: LED Lamp.

9. To notify the extension user via e-mail about new messages in the mailbox, select the check box Voice
Mail Notification via E-mail.

• To mail the new voice message to the extension user as attachment, select With Attachment (.wav
file).

• To mail the notification only to the extension user, select Without Attachment.

Default: Without Attachment.

• Type the E-mail Address of the extension user to which the voice mail notification is to be sent. The e-
mail ID may consist of 64 characters (maximum). Default: blank.

10. To assign Department Group mailbox to the DKP extension, select the check box Assign Mail Box of
Department Group. Default: Disabled.

You can assign the Mailbox of a Department Group to DKP extensions, even to those DKP extensions that
are not included in the Department Group. See “Department Call”.

• Select the Department Group whose mailbox you want to assign to the extension from the combo box
Specify Department Group.

Voice Mail Auto Attendant

1. Click [+] to expand Voice Mail Auto Attendant options.

2. Select a Profile from 1 to 4 as Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile for the extension. Default: 1.

The Voice Mail Auto profile determines the welcome message to be played to mailbox owner (extension
user) when they reach the home node. It also determines whether or not the user should be taken to the
root node directly.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Make sure you also configure the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profiles when you assign them to extensions.
To configure, click the link Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile. See “Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile”.

3. To allow callers to reach the DKP extension using Dial By Name option offered by the VMS Auto
Attendant, abbreviate the DKP extension user’s name to three letters and type it in the Abbreviated Name
field.

When the VMS Auto Attendant is used, callers can be prompted to Dial by Name of the desired party
(extension user) instead the extension number.

4. Select the Call Transfer Type for the Day and Call Transfer Type for Night from the following options:

• Transfer when extension answers: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto
Attendant will transfer the call when the extension answers (goes OFF-Hook).

If the extension does not answer28, the VMS Auto Attendant will transfer the call to the mailbox of the
extension, if assigned, or take the caller back to the home node.

• Take caller to Mailbox: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant will
check if the extension number has a mailbox assigned and transfer the call to the mailbox of the
extension.

• Transfer immediately: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant will
transfer the call on the extension without checking whether it is busy or free.

• Transfer when extension rings: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant
will wait for the extension to start ringing and then transfer the call.

If the extension is busy the VMS Auto Attendant will transfer the call to the mailbox of the extension, if
assigned, or take the caller back to the home node.

• Transfer when extension permits: The VMS Auto Attendant prompts the caller to record his/her
name. It puts the caller on hold and places the call on the desired extension. If the extension is free and
answers the call, the VMS announces the caller’s name to the extension user and prompts the
extension user to choose whether or not to speak to the caller. If the extension user chooses to talk, the
VMS transfers the call.

If the extension user chooses not to talk, the VMS transfers the call to the mailbox of the extension
user, if assigned, and asks the caller to leave a message.

Default: Transfer when extension answers for Day and Night.

5. Enable Announce Name, if you want the VMS Auto Attendant to announce the extension user’s name to
the caller when transferring the call to the extension. Default: Disabled.

When you enable Announce Name, make sure you record the extension user’s name on the VMS. For
instructions, see “Recording Station Names”.

28. The VMS will wait for the duration of the Wait for Answer Timer (default: 15 seconds; the timer is configurable). If the call is not
answered before this timer expires, it is treated as No Reply.

120 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DDI Routing

1. Click [+] to expand options.

2. In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 1, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this DKP extension
from among the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered SIP Trunk 1.

3. In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 2, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this DKP extension
from among the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered SIP Trunk 2.

4. In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 3, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this DKP extension
from among the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered SIP Trunk 3.

5. In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 4, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this DKP extension
from among the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered SIP Trunk 4.

6. To allow the system to land incoming calls with the same DDI number on this DKP extension, keep Allow
Incoming DDI Calls enabled. Default: Enabled.

Clear check box only if you want to disable.

7. To allow the system to send the DDI number as CLI when outgoing calls are made from this DKP
extension, keep Send DDI Number as CLI enabled. Default: Enabled.

If you clear the check box, the system will send the MSN number as CLI of outgoing calls made from this
extension.

SMDR Storage

The Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) feature of ETERNITY enables you to record the details of Internal,
Incoming (IC) and Outgoing (OG) calls made from/to all its extensions. To obtain SMDR as a report, you must
enable SMDR Storage, and set filters. See “Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)” to know more.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Click [+] SMDR Storage to expand options.

2. Select the type of internal calls to be stored from the combo box Store Internal Calls. You can select from
the following options:
• Made by/made to this extension (the system will store all calls made to and from this extension).
• If made by this extension (the system will store outgoing calls made from this extension)
• If made to this extension (the system will store only incoming calls from other extensions)
• Never (the system will not store internal calls)

3. To store details of incoming calls from external numbers, select Store Incoming Calls. Default: selected.

4. To store details of outgoing calls made by the extension user to external numbers, select Store Outgoing
Calls. Default: selected.

Call Budget

The Call Budget feature allot a 'budget' limit for outgoing calls made by the extension. See “Call Budget” for more
information. If you want to enable this feature on this extension,

1. Click [ + ] Call Budget to expand options.

2. Select the check box Apply Call Budget.

3. Define the calling permission for the extension when it has used up the call budget allotted to it. Select the
desired option for Call Privilege when Call Budget is consumed:
• No Calls
• Local Calls
• Regional Calls
• National Calls
• All Calls
Default: No Calls.

Caller ID on Call Transfer

This parameter is related to the CLIP feature. It allows you to choose whether the system should display the CLI of
the ‘Held Party’ or the CLI of the ‘Transferring Party’ to the transfer destination extension while the call is being
transferred.

See the feature description for “Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)” to know more.

122 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Click [ + ] Caller ID on Call Transfer to expand.

2. Select the radio button of the desired option:

• Display Number of Transferring Extension when call is transferred on this extension.

• Display Number of Party kept on Hold when call is transferred on this extension.

Walk-In/Walk-Out

This parameter is related to the feature Walk-In Class of Service. ETERNITY offers two types of Walk-In: i) One-
Call per Walk-In, where the extension user is automatically logged out after a call. ii) Walk-In until Logout, where
the extension user remains logged on until s/he manually walks out or a second user walks into the same
extension. To know more about this feature, see “Walk-In Class of Service”.

1. Click [ + ] Walk-In/Walk-Out to expand.

2. Select the radio button of the type of Walk-Out mode you want to assign to the extension:

• Walk-Out on completion of call automatically: Select this option, if you want to assign One-Call per
Walk-In to the extension.

• Walk-Out when user gives command to Walk-Out: Select this option, if you want to assign Walk-In
until Logout to the extension.

Call Forward

1. Click [ + ] Call Forward to expand.

2. Set the Call Forward No Reply Timer (sec) to the desired value, if required. The range of this timer is.
Default: 030 seconds.

Call Forward No Reply Timer signifies the duration for which the system will wait for an extension to
answer an incoming call, before forwarding the call it to the programmed destination phone number as Call
Forward-No Reply. By default the Timer is set to 30 seconds. Refer the feature description for “Call
Forward” to know more.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Select the type of calls to be forwarded If Call is forwarded on external number. You may select from the
following options:
• Forward only Internal calls
• Forward only Trunk calls
• Forward all calls (internal as well as trunk calls)
Default: Forward only Trunk calls.

This parameter is relevant for the features “Call Forward” and “Mobility Extension”.

More Features

Call Taping
To use the “Call Taping” feature on the extension,

1. Click [ +] Call Taping to expand options.

2. Select the type of Call Taping to be applied from the options:

• OFF
• Apply as per profile 1
• Apply as per profile 2
• Apply as per profile 3
• Apply as per profile 4

If you do not want to apply Call Taping, select OFF.

Default: OFF.

3. Now, configure the Call Taping Profile number you selected for the extension. To do this,
• Click the link Call Taping. The page opens in a new window, displaying the parameters of the profile
you selected for the extension.

• In the new window,

• Enable Call Taping for Incoming Calls. Type the numbers of the Incoming Calls that must be
taped. You may type as many as 99 numbers.

124 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Enable Call Taping for Outgoing Calls. Type the external numbers that you want the system to
tape. You may type as many as 99 numbers.

• Select the check box Tape Calls without CLI? if you want incoming calls without CLI to be taped.
Default: Disabled.

• Select the check box Call Taping for Internal Calls, if you want internal calls made and received
by the extension to be taped.

• Click Submit to save the Profile.

• Close the window by clicking [x] on the top-right corner of the window.

See “Call Taping” to know more.

Call Duration Control

To enable the “Call Duration Control (CDC)” feature on the extension,

1. Click [+] Call Duration Control to expand options.

2. Select the type of Call Duration Control to be applied from the options:
• OFF
• Apply as per profile 1
• Apply as per profile 2
• Apply as per profile 3
• Apply as per profile 4

If you do not want to apply Call Duration Control, select OFF.

Default: OFF.

3. Configure the Call Duration Control Profile number you selected for the extension. To do this,

• Click the settings button. The page opens in a new window. The page displays the parameters of the
profile you selected for the extension.

• In the new window,

• Enable Apply CDC to Internal Calls, if CDC is to be applied on internal calls. Default: Disabled.

• Enable Apply CDC for Incoming Calls received from trunks, if CDC is to be applied on incoming
external calls. Default: Disabled.

• Enable Apply CDC for Outgoing Calls, if CDC is to be applied to outgoing external calls. Default:
Disabled.

• If required, change the CDC Timer to the desired duration. The range of the timer is 0001 to 9999
seconds. Default: 160 seconds.

• Enable Disconnect Call after CDC Timer check box if you want calls to be disconnected on the expiry
of the CDC Timer. Default: Disabled.

• In the Apply CDC for calls matching with numbers column, type the external numbers on which you
want to apply CDC. You can enter as many as 99 numbers.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • In the Do Not Apply CDC for calls matching with numbers column, enter the numbers which you
want to be exempt from CDC.

• Click Submit and close the window.

Priority
Each extension of the ETERNITY is assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3... to 9, with '1' being lowest
Priority and '9' being highest Priority. Whenever an extension (phone) with higher priority calls an extension with
lower priority, a triple ring is placed on the called extension. To know more, read the feature description “Priority”.
1. Select a Priority from 1 to 9 for the DKP extension. Default: 5.

If this DKP extension is assigned to Operator, you may want to set a higher priority for this extension.

Personal Directory
1. Select a Personal Directory number from 01 to 50 that you want to assign to the DKP extension. Default:
None.

A Personal Directory is a list of 25 frequently dialed numbers, each of which are stored by Index number
(location code), Name and Trunk Access Codes (). The Personal Directory is necessary for using the
features “Abbreviated Dialing” and “Dial By Name”.

When a Personal Directory is assigned to an DKP, it must also be configured. The Personal Directory can be
configured also by the extension user. Refer the topic “Abbreviated Dialing” for instructions on configuring the
Personal Directory.

Time Table
2. Select a Time Table for the DKP extension. Default: System Time Table.

If you have not configured Time Table, you may do so now,

• Click the Time Table link.
• Define the working days of the week.
• Define the start and end time of the working hours for each working day.

See “Time Tables” to know more.

Alarm Notification Type

Configure this parameter for the feature description for “Alarms” to know more.
1. Click [ + ] Alarm to expand.

2. Select the type of alarm notification the system should use When User answers Alarm Call. Your options
are:
• Play Voice Message: The extension user is played a message recorded in the Voice Module on
answering the alarm call.

• Play Music-on-Hold: The extension user is played music-on-hold on answering the alarm call.

• Play VMS Alarm Greeting: The extension user is greeted by the VMS on answering the alarm call.
See

126 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Route to Operator: The alarm call is routed to the Operator extension, so that the Operator can the
serve the alarm request to the extension user.

Default: Play Voice Message.

Help Desk
Configure this parameter if you want to define the extension as a “Help Desk”.

1. Click [ + ] Help Desk to expand.

2. Select the check box Help Desk Auto set ACB on calling extension, when this extension is busy.
Default: Disabled.

Forced Account Code

Configure this parameter, if you want to apply the feature Forced Account Code on the extension. When Forced
Account code is enabled, the system will allow the extension user to dial an external number only after the user has
entered the Account Code. To know more, see “Account Codes”.

1. Click [ + ] Account Code to expand.

2. Select the check box Do not allow Outgoing Calls without Account Code (Force Account Code).

Now that you have finished configuring the DKP extension. You may configure the next DKP extension.

1. Click the tab of the second DKP extension.

2. Follow the same steps as described above to configure this extension.
3. Use the Copy button to apply the same DKP extension settings you configured on this extension.

How to copy Parameter Values to other Extensions

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Click the Copy button on the page of the DKP extension you wish to copy.

The Copy dialog box opens. The dialog box displays the name of the extension and number to be copied
in the Copy from: field.

The dialog box also lists the names and numbers of the extensions to which you can copy the values
under Copy To:

128 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Select the check box of the extension number to which you want to Copy To.

3. Click OK.

The parameter values of the extension you Copy From will be applied on the extension(s) you Copy To.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SIP Extensions

SIP Extensions function like any normal DKP/SLT extension of the ETERNITY, allowing you to make and receive
calls to any extension user of the ETERNITY and to external numbers over PSTN, GSM, and VoIP lines, depending
on the “Logical Partition” configured in the system.

SIP Extensions are a licensed feature. To know more, refer the topic “License Management”.

ETERNITY NE supports up to 16 SIP extensions. You can connect:

• The Extended IP Phone for ETERNITY NE supplied by Matrix. The Matrix Extended IP Phone functions
just like a DKP.

• Any standard SIP phone or SIP enabled device, such as an IP phone, a Soft phone, an Analog phone
adapter.

You can register SIP-enabled devices at three different locations as a single SIP Extension for Call
Forking.

The number of SIP extensions you have specified on the “Pre-requisites” page will be displayed on this page.

On this page,

130 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 
More: Click this button to view all parameter links on the page.

Less: Click this button to view only the essential parameter links on the page.

Expand: Click to expand a link to display all parameters under the link.

Collapse: Click to collapse a link. Hides all parameters under the link.

Settings: Click to configure the settings of a parameter further.

More link: Click to view all additional parameters on the page.

To configure another SIP extension, click the SIP Extension number (name) tab.

To save settings, click Submit.

To copy the same SIP extension parameter values to the other SIP or DKP and SLT extensions, use Copy
button.

The SIP extension numbers and the names (either default or the names you configured) appear on the tabs on this
page, starting with SIP extension 303 to 318.

Follow the instructions provided below to configure the SIP extensions.

1. By default the check box Enable SIP Extension is selected.

If this flag is disabled, you will not be able to use this extension. You may clear the check box, when you
want to deactivate the extension.

2. Enter the SIP ID for this extension.

SIP ID is necessary for registering the SIP Extension with the Registrar of the VoIP module. It is the
number with which you can call the SIP Extension. Any extension user of the ETERNITY NE can call a SIP
Extension by dialing the SIP ID assigned to the SIP extension. SIP ID of each SIP Extension must be a
unique number string of a maximum of 6 digits. Any combination of digits from 0 to 9 and the characters *
and # are allowed.

Each SIP extension must have a unique SIP ID.

By default, SIP Extensions are assigned the following SIP ID (Access Codes):

SIP Extension SIP ID (Access Code)

01 303

02 304

: :

16 318

3. Enter the Authentication ID for this extension. Default: Blank.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 131

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Authentication ID is the number which you want the VoIP module's Registrar Server to use for user
authentication of the SIP messages received from this SIP Extension. The number may be a string of
maximum 6 digits. Any combination of digits from 0 to 9 and the characters * and # are allowed in the
string.

4. Enter the Authentication Password for this extension. Default: Blank.

Authentication Password is the password to be used by the VoIP module’s Registrar Server to
authenticate the SIP messages received from this SIP Extension. You can enter a maximum of 24 digits as
password. The valid digits for the password are 0 to 9, * and #.

Authentication ID is applicable only if any of the SIP message 'Authentication' options, REGISTER or
INVITE or SUBSCRIBE or PUBLISH, is enabled. Else, Authentication ID will not be used.

Class of Service

1. Click [+] to expand Class of Service options.

Define the Class of Service for the SIP extension for Day time and Night time.

2. To allow a feature, select the check box of the feature.

3. To deny a feature, clear the check box.

See “Class of Service (COS)” to know more.

Toll Control

132 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Click [+] to expand Toll Control options. Set the desired Toll Control for the SIP extension for the Day and
Night.

2. Select the type of Calls Allowed during Day: All Calls, No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, and Limited Calls 1, 2, 3. Default: All Calls.

3. Select the type of Calls Allowed during Night: All Calls, No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, and Limited Calls 1, 2, 3. Default: All Calls.

The Toll Control levels on this page are based on the allowed and denied number lists of Local, Regional,
National, International, and Limited Call numbers you configured on the “Number Patterns” page.

4. If you have not configured the allowed and denied number list for the Type of Calls you selected as Toll
Control, or if you want to add to the existing list, you may do it now.
• Click the settings icon.
• The Number Patterns page will open in a new window.
• Configure the Allowed and Denied Numbers.
• Click Submit.
• Close the window after you have configured the list.

See “Toll Control” to know more about this feature.

Toll Control for Dynamic Lock

Dynamic Lock allows extension users to change the Toll Control Levels (Calling Permissions) of their extensions on
their own by dialing a code. ETERNITY NE supports Toll Control Levels 0 to 3 for Dynamic Lock.

For each Toll Control Level from 0 to 3, you must assign 'Call Privilege’29. For each Call Privilege, you need to
configure the corresponding number strings to be allowed and number strings to be denied. See “Dynamic Lock” to
know more about this feature.

1. Click [+] Toll Control for Dynamic Lock to expand.

2. Select the call privilege for Calls allowed for Lock Level 1: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, All Calls.

3. Select the call privilege for Calls allowed for Lock Level 2: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, All Calls.

4. Select the call privilege for Calls allowed for Lock Level 3: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, All Calls.

The Lock Levels on this page are based on the allowed and denied number lists of Local, Regional,
National, International, and Limited Call numbers you configured on the Number Patterns page.

5. If you have not configured the allowed and denied number list for the Calls allowed/denied for the selected
Lock Level, or if you want to add to the existing lists, you may do it now.
• Click the settings icon.
• The Number Patterns page will open in a new window.

29. The Call Privilege types are: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National Calls, International Calls and Limited Calls.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Configure the Allowed and Denied Numbers for Local, Regional, National, International, and Limited
Calls.
• Click Submit.
• Close the window after you have configured the list.

Select Trunks for Outgoing Calls

Outgoing calls (to external numbers) are made by dialing Trunk Access Codes (TAC).
• TAC for users worldwide are: 0, 5, 61, 62, 63, 64.
• TAC for users in USA are: 9, 5, 81, 82, 83, 84.

For each TAC, you need to select the Outgoing Trunks. All external calls made by dialing a particular TAC will be
routed through the outgoing trunks you selected for that TAC.

You can also apply Least Cost Routing logic on the selected trunks, so that ETERNITY routes the outgoing call
through the trunk that costs the lowest for the call.

1. Click [+] Select Outgoing Trunks to expand options.

2. Select Trunks allowed for ‘0’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘0’.

• Double-click the field. A multiple selection box opens.

On the left, the trunks appear with their names (if configured in “Naming Trunks”) and port numbers in a
sequence, starting with CO trunks, followed by Mobile trunks and SIP trunks.

If you have not assigned any names to the trunks, they will appear with their default names (CO, MOB,
SIP) and port numbers.

If you have enabled On-Site Configuration, only those trunks that are connected will appear in the box.

• To select a trunk, place your cursor on the desired trunk, and click the Select>> button.
Or
• Press the ctrl key and click the left mouse button to select multiple trunks.

• You may change the sequence of the trunks you selected, if required, using the Up and Down arrow
buttons on the right display box.

• You can also delete trunks from the ones you have selected.

• You may enable Rotation, if you have selected more than one trunk. Default: Disabled.

134 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When you enable Rotation, each new outgoing call is routed through the subsequent trunk in the
group30. This ensures equal distribution of outgoing call traffic on all trunks.

When Rotation is OFF, calls are routed through the first trunk in the group. If this trunk is busy, the call
is routed to the next trunk in the group.

Rotation has no relevance if only one member trunk is selected.

• Click OK. The multiple selection box closes.

All the trunks appear in the field Trunks allowed for ‘0’ dialing, in the sequence you selected, separated
by commas. For example, BSNL (CO-1), BSNL (CO-3), Reliance (CO-4) and Pulver (SIP1).

3. To apply Least Cost Routing on the Trunks allowed for 0 dialing, select the desired LCR method from the
combo box:

• Number Based: Choose this option if the service providers of the trunks you selected offer different
tariffs according to area or distance, or phone numbers dialed.

• Time Based: Choose this option if the service providers of the selected trunks offer a different tariff
according to the time of the day.

• Time + Number Based: Choose option if the service providers of the selected trunks offer different
tariffs according to the time of the day as well as area/distance/phone number.

• Service Provider Based: Choose this option if the same service providers of the selected trunks offer
different rates for calls made to numbers within their own network and for calls made to numbers of
another Service Provider's network.

• If you do not want to apply LCR, select OFF.

• Configure LCR method that you selected for the trunk group.

4. To configure Least Cost Routing method you selected, click the link LCR settings. A new window opens.
• Go to the LCR method you selected for Trunks allowed for 0 dialing.
• Configure the LCR method. See Least Cost Routing under Advanced Settings for instructions.
• Click Submit.
• Close the window.

5. Select Trunks allowed for ‘5’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘5’. Follow the same steps as described above.
• Double-click the field. A multiple selection box opens.
• Select trunks, placing your cursor on the desired trunk, and clicking the Select>> button.
• Change the sequence of the trunks you selected, if required, using the Up and Down arrow buttons on
the right display box. Delete trunks from the ones you have selected, if required.
• Enable Rotation, if you have selected more than one trunk. Default: Disabled.
• Click OK.
All the trunks appear in the field Trunks allowed for ‘5’ dialing, in the sequence you selected, separated
by commas.
• Choose a Least Cost Routing method, if you want to apply it on the trunks. Default: OFF.
• Configure the Least Cost Routing method you selected by clicking LCR Settings link.

30. The first call through the first trunk, the second through the second, the third through the third trunk, and so forth. Thus each new
call is routed through the trunk next to the one that routed the previous outgoing call.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 135

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. Select Trunks allowed for ‘61’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘61’.
• Follow the same steps as described above to select the trunks, enable Rotation, and apply Least Cost
Routing.

7. Select Trunks allowed for ‘62’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘62’.
• Follow the same steps as described above to select the trunks, enable Rotation, and apply Least Cost
Routing.

8. Select Trunks allowed for ‘63’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘63’.
• Follow the same steps as described above to select the trunks, enable Rotation, and apply Least Cost
Routing.

9. Select Trunks allowed for ‘64’ dialing. The outgoing call will be routed through the selected trunks when
the extension user dials TAC ‘64’.
• Follow the same steps as described above to select the trunks, enable Rotation, and apply Least Cost
Routing.

10. Click Submit.

Voice Mail Settings

1. Click [+] Voice Mail Settings to expand.

2. Keep the option Assign Personal Mail Box enabled.

3. Keep the option System should ask Password while Accessing Mail Box enabled, if you want
password protection for the mailbox.
By default, access to the mailbox is password protected. The “User Password” is required to access the
mailbox. Whenever the mailbox owner accesses the mailbox, the VMS will ask for the (user) password.

If you want to remove password protection, clear this check box.

136 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Since a Mailbox can be accessed using the default User Password, 1111, extension users who are
assigned a mailbox are recommended to change their User Password to a unique 4-digit number to
prevent unauthorized access to their mailbox.

4. Define the Mail Box Size (minutes) for the extension. You may change the mailbox size to any desired
value from 001 to 999 minutes. Default: 5 minutes.

5. Define the Maximum Message Length (sec) for the extension. This is the length of each message that
callers are allowed to record in the mailbox of the extension. You can change the message length to any
desired value from 001 to 999 seconds. Default: 15 seconds.

The VMS stops recording the message of the callers if it exceeds the maximum message length, and
stores only that part of the message that was recorded within the maximum message length limit.

6. Select the option for delivery of new messages When Mail Box is Full. You may select any of the
following message delivery options:

• Do not offer to Record a Message: The VMS will not offer the caller the option of Leaving a Message.

• Deliver New Message in General mailbox: The VMS will not record the message in the General
mailbox. A General mailbox is a shared mailbox between extension users.

Only extension users who have General Mailbox in their “Class of Service (COS)” are allowed to
access it.

When you select this option, make sure that General Mailbox is enabled in the Class of Service of the
SIP extension. Refer “Class of Service (COS)” for instructions.

• Overwrite Old messages: The VMS will overwrite the old messages to record the new message in the
mailbox. The VMS will overwrite the oldest message first.

Default: Deliver New Message in General Mailbox.

7. To play to the SIP extension user (mailbox owner), message details such as Date and Time (when the
message was recorded by the caller), the caller’s number31, the extension number dialed by the caller32,
select Play Message Detail after Delivery of Message.

You may select from the following options for Play message details:
• Never: The VMS will not play message details to the extension user after playing the message.
• Always: The VMS will play message details to the extension user after playing each message.
• On Demand: The VMS will play message details to the extension user only when the user requests
it. On completion of each message, the VMS will prompt the extension user to press a digit for date
and time stamp. When the mailbox owner presses the digit, the VMS will play the message details.

Default: On Demand.

8. Select the Voice Mail/Message Wait Notification Type for the extension. The VMS will notify the
extension user of the new messages in the mailbox and the message wait set by another extension user.

You may select from these Notification options:

31. The number of person who left the message in the mailbox.
32. The number of the extension user for whom the message is intended.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 137

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Stuttered Dial Tone/Voice Message: When the extension user goes OFF-Hook, s/he will hear a voice
message, if a pre-recorded Voice Module has been assigned for Message Wait Notification. If no voice
module is recorded and assigned, the extension user will hear a stuttered dial tone instead.

If you want voice message to be played as message wait notification, record and assign a Voice
Module. See “Voice Message Applications” for instructions.

ETERNITY can play only 4 Voice Modules simultaneously. The Voice Module for Message Wait Notification
will not be played if there are already 4 being played simultaneously. In which case, Stuttered Dial Tone will
be played for Message Wait Notification, when the extension user goes OFF-Hook.

• LED Lamp: If the SIP has a 'Message Wait' lamp, you may select this option as Message Wait
Indication. The lamp will blink continuously and will be turned off when the extension user has retrieved
all the waiting messages.

• Ring: The extension will ring for the duration of the Message Wait Ring Timer (configurable; default: 30
seconds), for as many times as the Message Wait Ring Count (configurable; default: 10 times), at the
interval set as the Message Wait Ring Timer Interval (configurable; default: 30 minutes).

When the extension user answers the call, the VMS informs the user of the new message and allows
the extension user to access it.

See the feature description “Message Wait” to know more.

Default: LED Lamp.

9. To notify the extension user via e-mail about new messages in the mailbox, select the check box Voice
Mail Notification via E-mail.

• To mail the new voice message to the extension user as attachment, select With Attachment (.wav
file).

• To mail the notification only to the extension user, select Without Attachment.

Default: Without Attachment.

• Type the E-mail Address of the extension user to which the voice mail notification is to be sent. The e-
mail ID may consist of 64 characters (maximum). Default: blank.

10. To assign Department Group mailbox to the SIP extension, select the check box Assign Mail Box of
Department Group. Default: Disabled.

You can assign the Mailbox of a Department Group to SIP extensions, even to those SIP extensions that
are not included in the Department Group. See “Department Call”.

• Select the Department Group whose mailbox you want to assign to the extension from the combo box
Specify Department Group.

138 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 VoIP

1. Click [+] VoIP to expand.

2. Keep the check box Authenticate REGISTER enabled for Authentication of REGISTER Request in SIP
Messages. Default: Enabled.

3. Keep the check box Authenticate INVITE enabled for Authentication of INVITE Request in SIP
Messages. Default: Enabled.

4. Keep the check box Authenticate SUBSCRIBE enabled for Authentication of SUBSCRIBE Request in
SIP Messages. Default: Enabled.

Make sure that the Authentication ID for the SIP Extension has been programmed, when the above SIP
Message Options - REGISTER, INVITE, SUBSCRIBE - are enabled.

5. Select the check box Allow Busy Lamp Field (BLF)33 Subscription to enable the SIP extension to
monitor the status of another extension, device or number. Default: Disabled.

6. Select the check box Allow PUBLISH to allow the SIP extension user to choose whether or not to show
their Presence Status to other SIP Extensions. Default: Disabled.

33. BLF, a typical feature supported by PCM/TDM PBX and Key Telephone Systems, is also supported on SIP Extensions.

In PCM/TDM PBX and Key Telephone Systems, this feature is typically used by the Operator to monitor the status of another
extension, i.e. whether it is available, ringing or busy. The status of the other extensions is indicated on the special function keys
configured on the Operator's console. This helps the Operator decide whether to place the call, or transfer the call to that exten-
sion, or pick up the call ringing on that extension.

With BLF Subscription enabled on the SIP Extension, the user can monitor the status of another extension, device or number
within the same Proxy Domain.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 139

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If you allow PUBLISH subscription for a SIP Extension, you must also enable Authentication of PUBLISH.

7. Keep the check box Authenticate PUBLISH enabled, if you enabled Allow Publish. Default: Enabled.

8. Select the check box Allow Presence Subscription to enable the Presence Subscription on the SIP
Extension. Default: Disabled.

When Presence Subscription is enabled on a SIP Extension, the extension user can view the status of
other SIP-enabled Terminals, i.e. whether or not they are available.

The SIP Extension for which you have enabled Presence Subscription will be able to view Presence of
only those SIP Extensions which have PUBLISH enabled.

9. Select Vocoders34 in the order of preference from the drop down box.

The Vocoders supported by ETERNITY in the order of preference, i.e. 1st to 7th, by default are:
• G.723
• G.729 AB
• GSM FR
• iLBC - 30 ms
• iLBC - 20 ms
• G.711  Law
• G.711 A - Law

If you do not want to select any Vocoder, you can select the option 'None'. However, if all Vocoder
Preferences from 1 to 7 are set to 'None', incoming and outgoing calls will be blocked.

10. If you selected G.723 codec as a Preferred Vocoder, select G.723 Bit Rate as: Bit Rate: 5.3 Kbps or 6.3
Kbps. Default: 6.3kpbs.

When G.723 is negotiated, the selected Bit Rate will be applied only when sending the RTP packets.
When receiving RTP packets from the remote end, both Bit Rates of G.723 will be accepted.

11. To suppress ‘Silence’ packets and allow only Voice packets through, select the check box Silence
Suppression. Default: Disabled.

• ETERNITY NE supports Silence Suppression for all Vocoders except GSM FR.
• Silence Suppression must be disabled if you have selected 'Pass Through' as the "Fax Type".

12. Select the appropriate DTMF Option from the three DTMF types supported by ETERNITY: RTP (RFC
2833) or SIP Info, or InBand. Default: RTP (RFC2833).

The DTMF type determines how the DTMF digits will be sent over the IP Network, when a DTMF digit is
pressed.

13. To apply Echo Cancellation for SIP to CO trunk calls, SIP to Digital Trunks (Mobile, SIP) and Extensions
(SIP, SIP).

• Keep the check box Echo Cancellation enabled. Default: Enabled.

34. Vocoders are the various voice codecs used to compress the data in RTP packets for optimum use of bandwidth and for ensuring
voice quality. You can set 7 Vocoder options in the order of preference.

140 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select Echo Cancellation Tail Length (msec) for CO trunks. It may be 32, 64, or 128 milliseconds.
Default: 128. milliseconds.

• Select Echo Cancellation Tail Length (msec) for Extensions and Digital Trunks. It may be 32, 64, or
128 milliseconds. Default: 32 milliseconds.

14. Configure Jitter Buffer35 to cut down on packet delays and improve voice quality.

• Select the Type of Jitter Buffer you want to use: Static or Dynamic. Default: Dynamic.

Static Jitter Buffer's internal delay is static, whereas, the Dynamic Jitter Buffer's internal delay adapts
itself to the jitter in the network.

• If you selected Static Jitter Buffer, configure Minimum Delay36, from 10 to 280 milliseconds. Default 10
milliseconds.

The value configured in the Minimum Delay determines the size of the Static Jitter buffer.

• If you selected Dynamic Jitter Buffer, configure Minimum Delay37 and Optimization Factor, from 1 to
13. Default: 10. By default Minimum Delay is set to 10 milliseconds.

The Optimization Factor determines the rate of adaptation of the Dynamic Jitter Buffer to the jitter in the
network. The minimum size of the Dynamic Jitter buffer depends on the 'Minimum Delay' configured.

In networks with higher jitter, a higher value should be configured as Optimization Factor.

The actual size of the Dynamic Jitter Buffer will be determined by the DSP on the basis of the
Optimization Factor configured and actual network condition. Dynamic Jitter buffer can go up to
maximum 300 milliseconds.

15. If you are using Fax over IP (FoIP)38, select the protocol as Fax Type. You may select:
• T.38 (UDPTL)
• T.38 (RTP)
• Pass-through.
Default: T.38 (UDPTL)

• 'Pass Through' and 'T.38' will work only if the peer devices also support the same option.
• If you select 'Pass through' as Fax type, you must disable 'Silence Suppression'.
• If the fax sent using T.38 is rejected, ETERNITY NE will use Pass Through for sending the Fax.

16. If you selected T.38 as Fax Type, configure T.38 Fax Parameters.

35. The speed at which voice packets travel through a network depends on the condition of the network. All voice packets may not
come at the same speed. This variation in the delay in receiving packets, known as Jitter, affects voice quality. Jitter Buffer helps
overcome the delay in receiving voice packets and improves voice quality. Jitter Buffer receives voice packets, stores them and
sends it to the DSP to process it at evenly spaced intervals, thus improving voice quality.

36. This parameter is to be configured for both Static and Dynamic Jitter Buffer. The Minimum Delay determines the size of the Static
Jitter Buffer and when Jitter Buffer type is Static, the Minimum Delay defines the size of the Static Jitter Buffer. 'Minimum Delay'
can be from 10 to 280 milliseconds. By default Minimum Delay is set to 10 milliseconds. The Static Jitter Buffer will store each
received voice packets for the configured time and then it will send it to DSP for voice processing.

37. When Jitter Buffer type is Dynamic, the Minimum Delay specifies the minimum time for which the Dynamic Jitter Buffer will store
the received voice packet before sending it to the DSP for voice processing.

38. You can send/receive Fax, by connecting a fax machine to the SLT port of ETERNITY NE.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 141

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Receiving good quality Fax over IP depends on high 'Eye Quality Monitor' (EQM). The higher the Eye
Quality Monitor, the better the Fax quality. To improve the quality of T.38 fax reception, do the following:

• Set the Max Rate (kbps) to: 2.4, 4.8, 7.2, 9.6,12, or 14.4.

This parameter controls the Fax image transfer speed. As EQM is inversely proportional to Fax Max
Rate, if you receive poor quality fax, the Fax Max Rate should be reduced. Default: 14.4 kbps.

• Set the Packet Period (msec) to: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, or 40. Default: 40.

This parameter sets the sampling rate of TDM signal. If you cannot improve fax quality by lowering Fax
Max Rate, you may reduce the Fax Packet Period.

When you reduce the Fax Packet Period, the fax image will be sent at lower speed. EQM is inversely
proportional to Fax Packet Period.

Do not change the default settings unless it is required.

• Set Image Redundancy Level to: None, 1, 2, or 3. Default: 1.

The Image Redundancy Level is redundancy level for output Image, which can be from 0 to 3.

Fax Image transfer speed is inversely proportional to this parameter. If this parameter is low then fax is
transferred faster. EQM is directly proportional to this parameter. If this parameter is high, you will
receive good quality fax.

You may increase the Fax Image Level from 1 to 3 if the quality of fax does not improve with Fax Max
Rate and Fax Packet Period.

Level 0 means no redundancy.

• Set Data Redundancy Level to: None, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7. Default: 3.

This is a redundancy level for T.30 control data. Fax Data Level can be set from 0 to 7. Level 0 means
no redundancy. Redundancy level increases from 1 towards 7. The higher the level set, the slower
would be the fax transmission.

EQM is directly proportional to this parameter. The higher the Fax Data Redundancy Level, the better
the EQM.

17. Adjust Gain Settings, if required, to increase or decrease the incoming and outgoing volume level of calls
from SIP Digital Trunks/Extension voice calls.

• Set Rx Gain for SIP to Digital Trunk/DKP Voice call (dB) from -31 to 31 dB, if required, to increase
incoming speech volume level of calls from SIP trunks to Digital Trunks/Extension. Default: 0.

• Set Tx Gain for SIP to Digital Trunk/DKP Voice call (dB) from -31 to 31 dB, if required, to increase
outgoing speech volume level of calls from SIP trunks to Digital Trunks/Extension. Default: 0.

• You can also set the Rx and Tx Gains for SIP to Analog Trunks and Extensions (CO trunks and SLT).
• To increase Rx and Tx Gain for SIP to CO trunks, go to "“CO Trunks”".
• To increase Rx and Tx Gain for SIP to SLT extensions, go to “SLT Extensions”.

142 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 18. To improve the quality of Pass Through Fax reception on a Digital Trunk (Mobile), configure Pass
Through FAX Rx Gain (SIP-Digital Trunk Call).This parameter has relevance when you select 'Pass
Through' as the Fax Type.

• Select dB level for Data Gain, from -31 to 31. Default: -11 dB.

• Select dB level for Bypass Gain, from -31 to 31. Default: -9 dB.

Pass Through Fax packets are transported using RTP protocol. Normally, fax calls require less gain
compared to voice calls. However, to improve fax reception, ETERNITY allows you to configure gain
settings for fax (Data Gain and Bypass Gain).

ETERNITY supports Fax Receive Gain for SIP to Digital Trunk calls as well as SIP to SLT Calls.

19. Configure Pass Through FAX Rx Gain (SIP-SLT Call), if you want to improve quality of Pass Through
Fax received on a fax machine connected to an SLT port. This parameter has relevance only when you
select ‘Pass Through’ as Fax Type.

• Select dB level for Data Gain, from -31 to 31. Default: -11 dB.

• Select dB level for Bypass Gain, from -31 to 31. Default: -9 dB.

20. Click Submit to save VoIP settings.

Voice Mail Auto Attendant

1. Click [+] to expand Voice Mail Auto Attendant options.

2. Select a Profile from 1 to 4 as Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile for the extension. Default: 1.

The profile determines the welcome message to be played to mailbox owner (extension user) when they
reach the home node. It also determines whether or not the user should be taken to the root node directly.

Make sure you also configure the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profiles when you assign them to extensions.
To configure, click the link Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile. See “Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile”.

3. To allow callers to reach the SIP extension using Dial By Name option offered by the VMS Auto Attendant,
abbreviate the SIP extension user’s name to three letters and type it in the Abbreviated Name field.

When the VMS Auto Attendant is used, callers can be prompted to Dial by Name of the desired party
(extension user) instead the extension number.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 143

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Select the Call Transfer Type for the Day and Call Transfer Type for Night from the following options:

• Transfer when extension answers: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto
Attendant will transfer the call when the extension answers (goes OFF-Hook).

If the extension does not answer39, the VMS Auto Attendant will transfer the call to the mailbox of the
extension, if assigned, or take the caller back to the home node.

• Take caller to Mailbox: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant will
check if the extension number has a mailbox assigned and transfer the call to the mailbox of the
extension.

• Transfer immediately: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant will
transfer the call on the extension without checking whether it is busy or free.

• Transfer when extension rings: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant
will wait for the extension to start ringing and then transfer the call.

If the extension is busy the VMS Auto Attendant will transfer the call to the mailbox of the extension, if
assigned, or take the caller back to the home node.

• Transfer when extension permits: The VMS Auto Attendant prompts the caller to record his/her
name. It puts the caller on hold and places the call on the desired extension. If the extension is free and
answers the call, the VMS announces the caller’s name to the extension user and prompts the
extension user to choose whether or not to speak to the caller. If the extension user chooses to talk, the
VMS transfers the call.

If the extension user chooses not to talk, the VMS transfers the call to the mailbox of the extension
user, if assigned, and asks the caller to leave a message.

Default: Transfer when extension answers for Day and Night.

5. Enable Announce Name, if you want the VMS Auto Attendant to announce the extension user’s name to
the caller when transferring the call to the extension. Default: Disabled.

When you enable Announce Name, make sure you record the extension user’s name on the VMS. For
instructions, see “Recording Station Names”.

DDI Routing

39. The VMS will wait for the duration of the Wait for Answer Timer (default: 15 seconds; the timer is configurable). If the call is not
answered before this timer expires, it is treated as No Reply.

144 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Click [+] to expand options.

2. In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 1, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this SIP extension
from among the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered SIP Trunk 1.

3. In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 2, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this SIP extension
from among the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered SIP Trunk 2.

4. In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 3, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this SIP extension
from among the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered SIP Trunk 3.

5. In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 4, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this SIP extension
from among the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered SIP Trunk 4.

6. To allow the system to land incoming calls with the same DDI number on this SIP extension, keep Allow
Incoming DDI Calls enabled. Default: Enabled.

Clear check box only if you want to disable.

7. To allow the system to send the DDI number as CLI when outgoing calls are made from this SIP extension,
keep Send DDI Number as CLI enabled. Default: Enabled.

If you clear the check box, the system will send the MSN number as CLI of outgoing calls made from this
extension.

SMDR Storage

The Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) feature of ETERNITY enables you to record the details of Internal,
Incoming (IC) and Outgoing (OG) calls made from/to all its extensions. To obtain SMDR as a report, you must
enable SMDR Storage, and set filters. See “Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)” to know more.
1. Click [+] SMDR Storage to expand options.

2. Select the type of internal calls to be stored from the combo box Store Internal Calls. You can select from
the following options:
• Made by/made to this extension (the system will store all calls made to and from this extension).
• If made by this extension (the system will store outgoing calls made from this extension)
• If made to this extension (the system will store only incoming calls from other extensions)
• Never (the system will not store internal calls)

3. To store details of incoming calls from external numbers, select Store Incoming Calls. Default: selected.

4. To store details of outgoing calls made by the extension user to external numbers, select Store Outgoing
Calls. Default: selected.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 145

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Budget

The Call Budget feature allot a 'budget' limit for outgoing calls made by the extension. See “Call Budget” for more
information. If you want to enable this feature on this extension,

1. Click [ + ] Call Budget to expand options.

2. Select the check box Apply Call Budget.

3. Define the calling permission for the extension when it has used up the call budget allotted to it. Select the
desired option for Call Privilege when Call Budget is consumed:
• No Calls
• Local Calls
• Regional Calls
• National Calls
• All Calls
Default: No Calls.

Caller ID on Call Transfer

This parameter is related to the CLIP feature. It allows you to choose whether the system should display the CLI of
the ‘Held Party’ or the CLI of the ‘Transferring Party’ to the transfer destination extension while the call is being
transferred.

See the feature description for “Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)” to know more.

1. Click [ + ] Caller ID on Call Transfer to expand.

2. Select the radio button of the desired option:

• Display Number of Transferring Extension when call is transferred on this extension.

• Display Number of Party kept on Hold when call is transferred on this extension.

146 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Walk-In/Walk-Out

This parameter is related to the feature Walk-In Class of Service. ETERNITY offers two types of Walk-In: i) One-
Call per Walk-In, where the extension user is automatically logged out after a call. ii) Walk-In until Logout, where
the extension user remains logged on until s/he manually walks out or a second user walks into the same
extension. To know more about this feature, see “Walk-In Class of Service”.

1. Click [ + ] Walk-In/Walk-Out to expand.

2. Select the radio button of the type of Walk-Out mode you want to assign to the extension:

• Walk-Out on completion of call automatically: Select this option, if you want to assign One-Call per
Walk-In to the extension.

• Walk-Out when user gives command to Walk-Out: Select this option, if you want to assign Walk-In
until Logout to the extension.

Call Forward

1. Click [ + ] Call Forward to expand.

2. Set the Call Forward No Reply Timer (sec) to the desired value, if required. The range of this timer is .
Default: 030 seconds.

Call Forward No Reply Timer signifies the duration for which the system will wait for an extension to
answer an incoming call, before forwarding the call it to the programmed destination phone number as Call
Forward-No Reply. By default the Timer is set to 30 seconds. Refer the feature description for “Call
Forward” to know more.

3. Select the type of calls to be forwarded If Call is forwarded on external number. You may select from the
following options:
• Forward only Internal calls
• Forward only Trunk calls
• Forward all calls (internal as well as trunk calls)
Default: Forward only Trunk calls.
This parameter is relevant for the features “Call Forward” and “Mobility Extension”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 147

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings – Location 1

Configure the settings for the Matrix Extended IP Phones you have registered as SIP Extensions. You can register
three Matrix IP Phones at three different locations as a single SIP Extension.

If you have connected more than one Matrix IP Phone as a SIP Extension, configure their settings as Location 1,
Location 2 and Location 3.

1. Click [+] Matrix IP Phone Settings - Location 1 to expand options.

2. Select the check box Enable Matrix IP Phone Mode. Default: Disabled.

3. Enter the Location Name for the phone to identify the phone. Location name may be the place where the
phone is located (e.g.: Head office, branch, residence). The Location Name may consist of 18 characters
(maximum). Default: Blank.

4. Enter the MAC Address40 of the Matrix Extended IP Phone connected at this location in hexadecimal
format, e.g. 00:50:C2:55:B0:10. Default: blank.

ETERNITY validates the IP-Phone on the basis of the MAC Address, and provides configuration on
validation.

As ETERNITY allows registration of the SIP Extension from three different locations, it identifies the SIP
Extension in each location by the programmed MAC address.

40. MAC address is the address of the electronic hardware devices such as a computer, which is hard-coded into the device during
manufacture and cannot be modified. No two devices can have similar MAC address and thus it uniquely identifies your phone.
MAC address is assigned as per the IANA standard. The MAC Address of the phone will be used as source MAC address on all
Ethernet frames.

148 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Select the appropriate Registrar Server IP Address to register the IP phone with the SIP Registrar of
ETERNITY NE, according to your installation scenario:

• If the Extended IP phone is in the same network (LAN) as ETERNITY NE, select Use Ethernet IP
Address as Registrar Server IP Address.

• If the Extended IP phone is in the Global Network and ETERNITY NE is connected to Internet over
Mobile WAN, select Use Mobile Port IP Address as Registrar Server IP Address.

• If the Extended IP Phone is connected to the Global Network and ETERNITY NE is located behind a
Router, select Use Router/STUN's IP Address as Registrar Server IP Address.

Make sure the Router’s Public IP Address is configured in the Network Parameters.

• If the Extended IP Phone is connected in the Global Network and ETERNITY NE is located behind a
NAT Router, and STUN is programmed, select Use Router/STUN's IP Address as Registrar Server IP
Address.

• If Dynamic DNS is configured in the Network Parameters, select Use Dynamic DNS Host Name as
Registrar Server IP Address.

6. To set the call progress tone generation standards of the country where the Matrix IP Phone is installed,
select the Call Progress Tone - Region. Default: Region 1.

See “Call Progress Tones” to know more.

7. Select the desired Dial Tone Type from the combo box: Type 1 or Type 2. Default: Type 1.

See“Call Progress Tones” to know more.

8. Select the region/country whose Date and Time settings the IP Phone should follow. Default: India.

9. If you want to enable Daylight Saving Time (DST) on the phone, set Apply DST? to Yes. Default: No.

The Daylight Saving Time convention followed in the country/region you selected will be automatically
applied. The IP phone will change its date and time settings according to the DST convention of the
selected country/region.

10. Select the CO CLIP Pattern for the IP phone. This is the type of Calling Line Presentation on the phone for
incoming calls from trunks. You can select any of these options:
• Name Only (only the name of the caller will be displayed).
• Number Only (only the number of the caller will be displayed).
• Number + Name (both the name and the number of the caller will be displayed).

Default: Number + Name.

11. Select the Language for the IP phone. Default: English.

ETERNITY NE provides language support for English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese, and Italian
on the Matrix IP Phone. When you select any of these languages, all the prompts and command strings
will appear in the selected language.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 12. Select a Ringer Mode for the phone from the four options:
• Ring immediate (it rings immediately as a fresh calls lands on the phone).
• Ring if idle (rings only if the phone is idle).
• Ring after a delay (if the call is still not answered).
• Ring OFF (silent mode).
Default: Ring Immediate’.

13. If you selected Ring after a delay as Ringer Mode, set the Ring Delay Timer (sec), if required, to the
desired value.

The Ring Delay Timer is the time in seconds the system waits on receiving a call before ringing on the IP
phone. The range of this timer is 0 to 99 seconds. Default: 10 seconds.

14. If you want to enable Ringer Auto Acknowledge mode, set the Acknowledge Timer (sec) to the desired
value.

The Ringer Auto Acknowledge mode determines when to stop the ring on the IP phone. There are two
options for Ringer Auto Acknowledge:
• Stop only when the call is answered.
• Stop after a delay.

To stop the ring on the IP phone after a delay, the Acknowledge Timer must be configured. The range of
this timer is 01 to 99 seconds. Default: 00 seconds.

To stop the ring only when the Call is answered or manually acknowledged, the Acknowledge Timer must
be set to '00'. By default, Ring Auto Acknowledge is turned OFF.

15. To assign the Ring Destination for the IP phone, select the desired destination for Play Ring on. You may
choose
• Speakerphone: The ring will be played on the Speakerphone.
• Headset: The ring will be played on the Headset.
Default: Speakerphone.

When you select the Headset as the destination, make sure that you set the flag ‘Headset Connected?’ to
Yes, connect a Headset to the IP Phone.

16. Select the desired Ring Tune according to your/IP phone user’s preference. Default: 1.

17. Set the Ringer Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 7, according to your preference. Default: 5.

18. To increase/decrease the volume of outgoing speech (Transmit Gain) on the handset of the IP phone, set
the Handset Transmit Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 7. Default: 4.

19. To increase/decrease the volume of incoming speech (Receive Gain) on the handset of the IP phone, set
the Handset Receive Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 7. Default: 4.

20. To increase/decrease the volume of outgoing speech (Transmit Gain) on the headset of the IP phone, set
the Headset Transmit Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 7. Default: 4.

21. To increase/decrease the volume of outgoing speech (Receive Gain) on the headset of the IP phone, set
the Headset Receive Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 7. Default: 4.

150 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 22. To change the Transmit Gain of the Speakerphone MIC Volume, set Speaker Transmit Volume to the
desired level, from 0 to 7. Default: 4.

23. To change the Receive Gain of the Speakerphone MIC Volume, set Speaker Receive Volume to the
desired level, from 0 to 7. Default: 4.

24. To use a Headset with the IP phone, set Headset Connected? to Yes. Default: No.

Make sure that you connect a Headset to the IP phone, if you select Yes.

25. Select the Auto Answer check box to enable this feature on the IP phone. Default: Disabled.

When you set the “Auto Answer” feature on the IP phone, the phone goes OFF-Hook automatically after a
preset period of time, without the extension user having to pick up the handset or press the speaker or
headset key. When you enable Auto Answer, you must configure the Auto Answer Timer.

26. If you enabled Auto Answer on the phone, set the Auto Answer Timer (sec) to the desired value.

This timer defines the time in seconds that the IP phone should wait before going OFF-Hook to auto
answer a call. The range of this timer is 1 to 9 seconds. Default: 1 second.

27. Adjust the Backlight brightness of the phone’s LCD display, by setting the LCD Backlight Level to the
desired value, from 1 to 4. Default: 3.

28. Set the Back Light Off Timer (sec) to the desired value, if required, from 000 to 999 seconds. Default: 10
seconds.

29. Set the LCD Contrast Level to a level from 1 to 4 that is comfortable to you. Default: 3.

30. Define SIP/RTP Ports:

• SIP Listening Port: This is the port on which the IP phone listens for SIP messages over TCP. This
port is also used as the source port for sending SIP messages to the remote peer. The valid range for
this port is 1024-65534. Default: 5060.

• RTP Listening Port: This is the port on which the IP phone listens for SIP messages over TCP. This
port is also used as the source port for sending RTP packets. This port is also used as the source port
for sending RTP packets to the remote peer. The valid range for this port is 1025-65278. Default: 8000.

31. Set the SIP Quality of Service (QoS) for SIP signaling as:

• SIP DiffServe/ToS. Valid range is 00 to 63. Default: 26.

OR
• RTP DiffServe/ToS. Valid range is 00 to 63. Default: 46.

32. If the IP phone is connected behind a NAT router, configure NAT Keep Alive.

• Select the check box Enable NAT Keep Alive to send Keep Alive messages periodically to refresh the
binding in the NAT router. Default: Disabled.

• Define as Interval (sec), the time period, from 001 to 999 seconds, after which the phone should send
Keep Alive message. Default: 120 seconds.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 151

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The time period you define should be less than the binding timer of the router.

33. Set the following Timers to the desired value, where required:

• SIP INVITE Timer (sec): This is the time in seconds that the phone waits for a response from the
called party after ending INVITE message. This timer starts after sending INVITE message to the
called party and stops on receipt of the provisional response or the final response or when the user
disconnects the call. On expiry of the timer, the phone terminates the call process and gives an error
tone to the user. The range of the SIP INVITE TIMER is 10-180 seconds. Default: 30 seconds.

• SIP Provisional Timer (sec): This is the time in seconds that the phone waits for final response after
receiving the provisional response from the called party. This timer starts on the receipt of the
provisional response from the called party and stops on receipt of the final response from the called
party or when the user disconnects the call. On expiry of the timer, the IP phone terminates the call
process and gives error tone to the user. The range of SIP Provisional Timer is 10-180 seconds.
Default: 60 seconds.

• General Request Timer (sec): This is the time in seconds for which the phone waits for response of a
transaction request. This timer starts on initiating a transaction. This timer stops on receipt of a
response for the request. On expiry of the timer, the phone clears the transaction. This timer is used for
Registration request, etc. The range of the General Request Timer is 10-60 seconds. Default: 20
seconds.

34. To debug using Syslog Client supported by the phone, configure Debug parameters:

• Set Enable Debug? to Yes. Default: No.

When the Debug flag is enabled, the phone will send the debug messages to the Syslog Server IP
address. Debug report can be viewed on the Syslog Server or any other application which can capture
the Syslog messages/debug sent by the phone.

• Enter the IP Address of the remote Syslog Server as Syslog Server Address.

• Enter the Server Port, i.e. the address of the Listening Port of the Syslog Server from 1024-65535.
Default: 514.

Syslog uses the UDP as transport protocol and listens on the port 514 (the default listening port).

• Select Debug Levels from these options, by selecting the respective check box:
• SIP
• System
• Hardware
• Call
• Menu
• User Interface

The phone supports multiple debug levels. You may select any or all of these debug levels. The Syslog
Client will send only the debug messages for the selected level to the remote server on the IP network.
For example, if the debug log of 'Call's is required, you can select this option, and disable all others.

35. Click Submit to save settings.

152 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Matrix Extended IP Phone Key Settings
You can customise the DSS keys of the Extended IP Phone, to match the requirements of the extension user.

To customise the keys of the Extended IP Phone registered at this location,

1. Click Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings link.

The default key map of the Extended IP Phone appears on your screen.

2. Click the key you want to configure. For example, CO3.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 153

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A dialog box opens, with the options for the Functions to be Performed by the key

3. In the Select Function Type list box, select the function to be performed by the key. For example, you
want to use the key to call the Operator.

The Operator function is a Feature, so select the option FEATURE from the Select Function Type list
box.

In the Select Offset drop down list, all the features that can be assigned to keys are listed.

154 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select Operator from the list of features in the Select Offset box.

• Click OK. The box closes.

The Operator feature appears on the key label.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 155

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To take a second example, if you want to assign Remote DND to the key currently assigned CO2 key,
click the key. A dialog box opens.

• In the Select Function Type list box, select the option SACommand, as Remote DND is a System
Administrator (SA) Command.

156 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • In the Select Offset box, select the option Set DND for remote station.

• Click OK. The box closes. Remote DND feature will appear in abbreviated form as R-DND on the key
label.

Follow the same instructions to assign features to other DSS keys. Selecting the appropriate Function Type
and the Offset for each feature/function.

If you want assign a feature, select FEATURE as function type, and select the desired feature as Offset.

If you want to use the key to call a DKP or a SIP extension, select DKP or SIP Extension as Function Type
and select the number of the extension as Offset.

To assign direct access to a mobile trunk, select MOBILE as Function Type and the desired port number 1 or
2 as Offset.

To assign direct access to a SIP Trunk, select SIP as Function Type and the desired trunk number from 1 to 4
as Offset.

• Click OK, each time you select a Function Type and Offset in the dialog box.

• You can reinstate default key assignment any time, by clicking the Default button at the bottom of the
window.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 157

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • When you complete assigning functions to keys, close the window.

If you have completed the configuration of the Matrix IP Phone Settings at location 1, follow the same steps as
described above to configure the Matrix Extended IP Phone at the other two locations.

1. Click [+] Matrix IP Phone Settings – Location 2 to expand.

2. Click [+] Matrix IP Phone Settings – Location 3 to expand.

More Features
Click More... link to expand.

Call Appearance
1. Set the number of Call Appearances for the SIP extension. Default: 2

A Call Appearance allows an extension user to attend to more than one calling party at a time. A minimum
of two Call Appearances must be assigned to a SIP extension - Operator extension or Executive extension
- so that the extension user can put one party on hold while talking to another. A third Call Appearance
allows the extension user to put two calls on hold, make/attend a third call and toggle between three calls.

The more the number of Call Appearances assigned to an extension, the more the number of calls the
extension user can handle simultaneously.

The ETERNITY NE supports a maximum of 8 Call Appearances on SIP extensions.

SIP extensions for Executives are usually assigned 2 Call Appearances, while the Operator extension is
assigned 6 Call Appearances to handle 6 calls simultaneously.

Call Taping
To use the “Call Taping” feature on the extension,

1. Click [ + ] Call Taping to expand options.

158 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Select the type of Call Taping to be applied from the options:
• OFF
• Apply as per profile 1
• Apply as per profile 2
• Apply as per profile 3
• Apply as per profile 4
If you do not want to apply Call Taping, select OFF.
Default: OFF.

3. Now, configure the Call Taping Profile number you selected for the extension. To do this,
• Click the link Call Taping. The page opens in a new window, displaying the parameters of the profile
you selected for the extension.

• In the new window,

• Enable Call Taping for Incoming Calls. Type the numbers of the Incoming Calls that must be
taped. You may type as many as 99 numbers.

• Enable Call Taping for Outgoing Calls. Type the external numbers that you want the system to
tape. You may type as many as 99 numbers.

• Select the check box Tape Calls without CLI? if you want incoming calls without CLI to be taped.
Default: Disabled.

• Select the check box Call Taping for Internal Calls, if you want internal calls made and received
by the extension to be taped.

• Click Submit to save the Profile.

• Close the window by clicking [x] on the top-right corner of the window.

See “Call Taping” to know more.

Call Duration Control

To enable the “Call Duration Control (CDC)” feature on the extension,

1. Click [+] Call Duration Control to expand options.

2. Select the type of Call Duration Control to be applied from the options:
• OFF
• Apply as per profile 1
• Apply as per profile 2
• Apply as per profile 3
• Apply as per profile 4

If you do not want to apply Call Duration Control, select OFF.

Default: OFF.

3. Configure the Call Duration Control Profile number you selected for the extension. To do this,

• Click the settings button. The page opens in a new window. The page displays the parameters of the
profile you selected for the extension.

• In the new window,

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 159

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Enable Apply CDC to Internal Calls, if CDC is to be applied on internal calls. Default: Disabled.

• Enable Apply CDC for Incoming Calls received from trunks, if CDC is to be applied on incoming
external calls. Default: Disabled.

• Enable Apply CDC for Outgoing Calls, if CDC is to be applied to outgoing external calls. Default:
Disabled.

• If required, change the CDC Timer to the desired duration. The range of the timer is 0001 to 9999
seconds. Default: 160 seconds.

• Enable Disconnect Call after CDC Timer check box if you want calls to be disconnected on the expiry
of the CDC Timer. Default: Disabled.

• In the Apply CDC for calls matching with numbers column, type the external numbers on which you
want to apply CDC. You can enter as many as 99 numbers.

• In the Do Not Apply CDC for calls matching with numbers column, enter the numbers which you
want to be exempt from CDC.

• Click Submit and close the window.

Priority
Each extension of the ETERNITY is assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3... to 9, with '1' being lowest
Priority and '9' being highest Priority. Whenever an extension (phone) with higher priority calls an extension with
lower priority, a triple ring is placed on the called extension. To know more, read the feature description “Priority”.
1. Select a Priority from 1 to 9 for the SIP extension. Default: 5.

If this SIP extension is assigned to Operator, you may want to set a higher priority for this extension.

Personal Directory
1. Select a Personal Directory number from 01 to 50 that you want to assign to the SIP extension. Default:
None.

A Personal Directory is a list of 25 frequently dialed numbers, each of which are stored by Index number
(location code), Name and Trunk Access Codes (). The Personal Directory is necessary for using the
features “Abbreviated Dialing” and “Dial By Name”.

When a Personal Directory is assigned to an SIP, it must also be configured. The Personal Directory can
be configured also by the extension user. Refer the topic “Abbreviated Dialing” for instructions on
configuring the Personal Directory.

Time Table
1. Select a Time Table for the SIP extension. Default: System Time Table.
If you have not configured Time Table, you may do so now, by clicking the Time Table link. Define the
working days, and the start and end time of the working hours for each working day.

See “Time Tables” to know more.

160 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Alarm Notification Type
Configure this parameter for the feature description for “Alarms” to know more.
1. Click [ + ] Alarm to expand.

2. Select the type of alarm notification the system should use When User answers Alarm Call. Your options
are:
• Play Voice Message: The extension user is played a message recorded in the Voice Module on
answering the alarm call.

• Play Music-on-Hold: The extension user is played music-on-hold on answering the alarm call.

• Play VMS Alarm Greeting: The extension user is greeted by the VMS on answering the alarm call.
See

• Route to Operator: The alarm call is routed to the Operator extension, so that the Operator can the
serve the alarm request to the extension user.

Default: Play Voice Message.

Help Desk
Configure this parameter if you want to define the extension as a “Help Desk”.

1. Click [ + ] Help Desk to expand.

2. Select the Assign Help Desk function to this Extension check box. Default: Disabled.

Forced Account Code

Configure this parameter, if you want to apply the feature Forced Account Code on the extension. When Forced
Account code is enabled, the system will allow the extension user to dial an external number only after the user has
entered the Account Code. To know more, see “Account Codes”.

1. Click [ + ] Account Code to expand.

2. Select the check box Do not allow Outgoing Calls without Account Code (Force Account Code).

Now that you have finished configuring the SIP extension. You may configure the next SIP extension.

1. Click the tab of the second SIP extension.

2. Follow the same steps as described above to configure this extension.

3. Use the Copy button to apply the same SIP extension settings you configured on this extension.

Copying Parameter Values to other Extensions

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 161

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Click the Copy button on the page of the SIP extension you wish to copy.

The Copy dialog box opens. The dialog box displays the name of the extension and number to be copied
in the Copy from: field.

The dialog box also lists the names and numbers of the extensions to which you can copy the values
under Copy To:

162 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Select the check box of the extension number to which you want to Copy To.

3. Click OK.

The parameter values of the extension you Copy From will be applied on the extension(s) you Copy To.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Door Phone

ETERNITY NE supports Door Phone. See “Door Phone” to know more about this feature and how it works.

• You will reach this page, if

• you have included Door Phone in the Pre-requisites.
• you have enabled On-Site Configuration and connected a Door Phone to the door phone port of the
system.

Configure the following parameters for the Door Phone:

1. Select a Time Table for the SLT extension. Default: System Time Table.

If you have not configured Time Table, you may do so now, by clicking the Time Table hyper link. Define
the working days, and the start and end time of the working hours for each working day.

See “Time Tables” to know more.

2. Select the mode of routing for calls landing on the Door Phone from the combo box Route Door Phone
Calls.

• Select At wish if you want the flexibility to have calls routed to a group of extensions or to an external
number, as and when you desire.

• Select As per Schedule if you want the system to route the Door Phone Calls automatically to a
landing destination phone (extension or external number) according to the time of the day: Day and
Night.
Default: At wish.

164 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. If you selected Route Door Phone Calls – At wish, select the destination you want to Route Door Phone
Calls to as Extensions or External Number. Default: Extensions.

Now, configure the landing destination extensions or external number.

4. Double-click the Extensions field. A new window will open.

• Select the extension numbers as landing destination. These may be SLT, DKP or SIP extensions.

• Enable Continuous Ring41 for each extension, if you want the extension to ring till the incoming call is
answered. Default: Disabled.

• Set the Ring Timer for each extension, if required. This timer defines the time for which the extension,
on which the call lands, should ring. Default: 015 seconds.

• Enable Rotation42, if you have selected more than one extension. Default: Disabled.

41. When Continuous Ring is selected, the first extension in the Door Phone extension group you have created will continue to ring,
even as the system hunts for other extensions in the group to land the call. If the call still remains unanswered, the system will
return the call to the first extension once again. This flag has no relevance, if there is only one destination extension in the group.
42. When you enable Rotation, each new call lands on the next extension to the one that received the last call. This ensures equal dis-
tribution of incoming calls to all the destination extensions. Rotation will have no relevance, if there is only one destination exten-
sion.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 165

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click OK. All the extensions you selected will appear in the Extension field, in the sequence you
selected, separated by commas.

5. To configure external number, enter the desired destination number in the External Number field.

6. If you selected Route Door Phone Calls – As per Schedule, select the destination you want to Route
Door Phone Calls during Day to. The destination may be Extensions or External Number. Default:
Extensions.

• If you selected Extensions as the landing destination for door phone calls during the day, double click
the field Extensions for Day.

Follow the same instructions as above for selecting extensions.

• If you selected External Number, as the landing destination for door phone calls during the night, enter
the destination number in the External Number field.

7. Select the destination you want to Route Door Phone Calls during Night to. You may select Extension
or External Number, as desired. Default: Extensions.

• If you selected Extensions as the landing destination for door phone calls at night, double click the
field Extensions for Night.

• Follow the same instructions as above for selecting extensions.

• If you selected External Number, as the landing destination for door phone calls at night, enter the
destination number in the External Number field.

The External Number is the same for Day time and Night Time, which means, you can have calls routed to
one external number only.

8. For the External number you have entered as landing destination for (At Wish and Scheduled) door phone
call route, define the outgoing trunk in the field To dial External No., Use trunk.

• Double click the field To dial External No., Use trunk

A multiple selection box opens. On the left, the trunks appear with their names (if configured in “Naming
Trunks”) and port numbers in a sequence, starting with CO trunks, followed by Mobile trunks and SIP
trunks43.

• To select a trunk, place your cursor on the desired trunk, and click the Select>> button.
Or
• Press the ctrl key and click the left mouse button to select multiple trunks.

To change the sequence of the trunks you selected, use the Up and Down arrow buttons on the right
display box.

To delete trunks from the ones you have selected use Delete key on your keyboard.

• Enable Rotation if you have selected more than one trunk. Default: Disabled.

43. If you have not assigned any names to the trunks, they will appear with their default names (CO MOB, SIP) and port numbers. If
you have enabled On-Site Configuration, only those trunks that are connected will appear in the box.

166 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When you enable Rotation, each new outgoing call is routed through the subsequent trunk in the
group,44 ensuring equal distribution of outgoing call traffic on all trunks.

When Rotation is OFF, calls are routed through the first trunk in the group. If this trunk is busy, the call
is routed to the next trunk in the group.

Rotation has no relevance if only one trunk is selected.

• Click OK. The window closes.

All the trunks you selected appear in the To dial External No. Use Trunk field, in the sequence you
selected, separated by commas.

9. To apply Least Call Routing (LCR) on the trunks, select the desired LCR method from the combo box:

• Number Based: Choose this option if the service providers of the trunks you selected offer different
tariffs according to area or distance, or phone numbers dialed.

• Time Based: Choose this option if the service providers of the selected trunks offer a different tariff
according to the time of the day.

• Time + Number Based: Choose option if the service providers of the selected trunks offer different
tariffs according to the time of the day as well as area/distance.

• Service Provider Based: Choose this option if the same service providers of the selected trunks offer
different rates for calls made to numbers within their own network and for calls made to numbers of
another Service Provider's network.

If you do not want to apply LCR, select OFF. Default: OFF.

• To configure or to modify the Least Cost Routing method you selected, click LCR Settings link.
A new window opens.
• Go to the LCR method you selected for Trunks.
• Configure the LCR method. See “Least Cost Routing (LCR)”for instructions.
• Click Submit. Close the window.

10. Define how long the Door Phone should ring on the destination extensions by setting Ring Door Phone
Call for to the desired value. Default: 30 seconds.

11. If you are using a Door Lock in conjunction with the Door Phone,
• Select the check box Use Door Lock. Default: Disabled.
• Set the time for which the Door Lock should Open Door for, from 01 to 99 seconds. Default: 5
seconds.

12. Click Submit to save your door phone settings.

44. The first call through the first trunk, the second through the second, the third through the third trunk, and so forth. Thus each new
call is routed through the trunk next to the one that routed the previous outgoing call.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 167

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Pickup Group

The Call Pickup (CPU) feature of ETERNITY NE allows extension users to answer (internal and trunk) calls ringing
on other extensions from their own extension; without physically going to the ringing extensions. For this extensions
must be assigned to CPU Groups.

See “Call Pickup” to know more about this feature.

You can create as many as 8 CPU Groups, and assign the extensions to these groups.

To create a CPU group,

1. Click the Call Pickup Group link.

2. For the desired Call Pickup Group Number, Double click to Select Extensions field.

A multiple selection box opens. The extensions appear on the left, with names and numbers, as
configured. If you have not configured names and numbers, the extensions will appear with their default
access codes and extension numbers.

If you have enabled On-Site Configuration, only those extensions that are connected will appear.

3. Select the extensions which are to be assigned to the CPU Group. These may be SLT, DKP or SIP
extensions.

Place your cursor on the desired extension and click the Select>> button.

Or

Press the ctrl key and click the left mouse button to select multiple extensions.

You can also delete extensions from the ones you have selected using the Delete key of your keyboard.

4. Click OK.
All the extension numbers you selected will appear in the field Select Extensions for the CPU Group
number. The extension numbers appear in the sequence you selected, separated by commas.

5. To create another CPU group, Double click to select field against the desired group number (02 to 08).

168 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. Now, repeat the same steps select extensions for this group.

7. Click Submit to save your CPU Groups.

s
To know more about this feature, refer the topic “Call Pickup”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 169

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CO Trunks

ETERNITY NE supports a maximum of 6 Analog Trunks. The number of trunks available for configuration vary
according to your configuration.

The number of CO Trunks you have specified on the “Pre-requisites” page will be displayed on this page.

If you enabled On-site Configuration on the System Prerequisites page, CO ports that are connected to the
network will appear on this page.

On this page,


More: Click this button to view all parameter links on the page.

Less: Click this button to view only the essential parameter links on the page.

Expand: Click to expand a link to display all parameters under the link.

Collapse: Click to collapse a link. Hides all parameters under the link.

Settings: Click to configure the settings of a parameter further.

More link: Click to view all additional parameters on the page.

To configure another CO trunk, click the CO number (name) tab.

170 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To save settings, click Submit.

To copy the same CO parameter values to the other CO trunks, use the Copy button.

The CO Trunk numbers and the names (either default or the names you configured) appear on the tabs on this
page, starting with CO Trunks CO-1 to CO-6.

If you assigned names to the CO trunks on the “Naming Trunks” page, the same names will appear on the tabs.

To change the name of the CO trunk, you must go back to the “Naming Trunks” page.

Follow the instructions provided below to configure the CO Trunks:

Calling Line Identification Format

1. Click Calling Line Identification format to expand.

2. Define the Calling Line Identification Format for the CO line. Selecting the format supported by your
service provider from the below options. You may consult the service provider this trunk line.
• None
• Any ETSI DTMF format
• Any FSK V.23 format
• Any FSK Bellcore format
• 1st Ring, ETSI DTMF, 2nd Ring Polarity Reversal, ETSI DTMF, 1st Ring
• 1st Ring, FSK, 2nd Ring
• DT-AS, FSK, 1st Ring
• RP-AS, FSK, 1st Ring
• Polarity Reversal, DT-AS, FSK, 1st Ring
• Any DTMF Format (without Start/Stop Code)

Default: Any ETSI DTMF format.

Route Incoming Calls

1. Click [+] Route Incoming Calls to expand options.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 171

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Select the landing destination to Route Calls during Day to. You may select:
• Operator
• Extensions
• Built-in Auto Attendant
• Voice Mail Auto Attendant (if available).

• If you select Extensions as the landing destination, select the landing destination extensions in the
corresponding field.

172 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Double click the Extensions field. A new window opens.

• Select the extension numbers as landing destination. These may be SLT, DKP or SIP extensions.

• Set the Ring Timer for the extensions. This timer defines the time for which the extension, on which
the call lands, should ring. Default: 015 seconds.

• Set Continuous Ring45 for the extensions, if you want the extensions to ring till the incoming call is
answered. Default: Disabled.

• Enable Rotation46, if you have selected more than one extension. Default: Disabled.

• Click OK. All the extensions you selected will appear in the Extension field, in the sequence you
selected, separated by commas.

• To route the incoming call to an auto attendant, if the selected extensions do not answer the call,

45. When Continuous Ring is selected, the first extension in the group you have created will continue to ring, even as the system hunts
for other extensions in the group to land the call. If the call still remains unanswered, the system will return the call to the first exten-
sion once again. This flag has no relevance, if you select only one landing extension.
46. When Rotation is enabled, each new call lands on the extension next to the one that received the call last. This ensures equal dis-
tribution of incoming calls to all the destination extensions in this group.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 173

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select the check box Ring Extension/s and set the ring duration in the for___seconds field.
Default: 10 seconds. This is the time for which the system will ring on the destination extensions
you selected, and wait for an extension to answer. If the call remains unanswered on the expiry
of this timer, ETERNITY will route the call to the auto attendant.

• Select the destination for the unanswered call in the field If not answered, route to. You may
select the Built-In Auto Attendant or the Voice Mail Auto Attendant. Default: Built-In Auto
Attendant.

• If you select Built-in Auto Attendant as the landing destination for calls during the day,

• the Voice Modules 02 to 13 will be played as “DID Greeting Messages” and “DID Guidance
Messages”.

• If you want to play a different message, make sure you record the desired message(s) in the Voice
Modules after completing the installation with Basic Settings. Refer the topic “Voice Message
Applications” to know more.

See “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” to know more.

3. To enable “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” on the CO trunk, select the check box Activate Direct
Inward System Access. Default: Disabled.

• Select the desired DISA option:

• PIN Authentication–Multiple calls: Select this option if you want to enable DISA with PIN
Authentication and allow multiple calls during the DISA login session.

• CLI Authentication–Multiple calls: Select this option if you want to enable DISA login with CLI
Authentication and allow multiple calls to be made during the DISA login session.

• CLI Authentication–One call Answer Signaling: Select this option if you want to enable DISA
session with CLI Authentication, and allow only a single call to be made during the DISA login
session.

This form of DISA may be used when ETERNITY NE is installed in a Gateway application. See
“Gateway Application–Answer Signaling”

Default: PIN Authentication–Multiple calls.

If you select Multiple Calls or CLI Authentication One Call as CLI Authentication, you must configure the
DISA CLI Authentication Table under the Advanced Settings link. See “Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)”

4. To enable “Trunk Auto Answer”47 feature on the trunk, select the type of Trunk Auto Answer you want:
• For all Calls: the system will answer all incoming calls landing on the trunk line.
• When Busy: the system will answer incoming calls on the trunk, if the landing destination is busy.

174 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To disable Trunk Auto Answer, select OFF. Default: OFF.

• Select the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting Message you want the system to play when greeting the
callers, from the following options:
• Play Music on Hold:
• Play Greeting Message1:
• Play Greeting Message2:
• Play Greeting Message3:
• Play Greeting Message4:
Default: Do Not Play.

If you do not want greeting message to be played, select Do Not Play.

When you select a Greeting Message, you must record a Voice Module with the desired Greeting
Message and assign the Voice Module to Trunk Auto Answer Greeting application.

You can record 4 different Greetings Messages for Trunk Auto Answer and assign a different Greeting
message for the Day and Night. See the topic “Voice Message Applications” under Advanced Settings link
for instructions on recording and assigning voice modules to greeting messages.

• Select the Trunk Auto Answer RBT Message you want the system to play to callers from the
following options:
• Play Music on Hold
• Play RBT Message1
• Play RBT Message2
• Play RBT Message3
• Play RBT Message4

• If you do not want RBT message to be played, select Do Not Play. The system will play Ring Back
Tone to the caller.

Default: Do Not Play.

When you select an RBT Message (1–4), you must record a Voice Module with the desired RBT Message
and assign the Voice Module to Trunk Auto Answer RBT Message application

You can record 4 different RBT Messages for Trunk Auto Answer and assign a different RBT message for
the Day and Night. See “Voice Message Applications” under Advanced Settings link for instructions on
recording and assigning voice modules for RBT messages.

• Select the Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye Message you want the system to play to callers when the
landing destination extension is busy, from the following options
• Play Music on Hold
• Play Bye Message1
• Play Bye Message2
• Play Bye Message3
• Play Bye Message4

If you do not want Busy Bye message to be played, select Do Not Play. The system will play Busy
Tone to the caller.

47. Trunk Auto Answer enables calls landing on a trunk to be answered automatically by greeting the caller with a voice message
before the call is actually handled.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 175

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default: Do Not Play.

When you select a Bye Message (1–4), you must record a Voice Module with the desired Bye Message
and assign the Voice Module to Trunk Auto Answer Bye Message application

You can record 4 different Bye Messages for Trunk Auto Answer and assign a different Bye message for
the Day and Night. See “Voice Message Applications” under Advanced Settings link for instructions on
recording and assigning voice modules for Bye messages.

5. Select the landing destination to Route Calls during Night to: Operator, Extensions, Built-In Auto
Attendant, Voice Mail Auto Attendant.

Follow the same instructions as described in the previous step for selecting landing destination for the Day.

Voice Mail Auto Attendant

If you have selected Voice Mail Auto Attendant as the destination for Routing calls during the day or during night,

1. Click [+] Voice Mail Auto Attendant to expand.

2. Select the desired Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile number for the trunk, from 1 to 4. Default: 1.

The Voice Mail System of ETERNITY answers calls and processes them according to the Voice Mail Auto
Attendant Profile assigned to the trunk. So, you must configure Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile number
you have selected for the trunk.

3. To configure the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile, click the settings icon.
A new window opens.

Configure the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile. For detailed instructions, see “Voice Mail Auto Attendant
Profile”. Close the window.

Automatic Number Translation

The feature, Automatic Number Translation of ETERNITY modifies dialed numbers or part thereof to match the
specific route numbering plan understood by the destination network—CO, GSM, VoIP—by adding or stripping
country and area codes.

For example, you can configure Automatic Number Translation such that when an extension user dials a local
landline number, the ETERNITY prefixes the number with the appropriate country-area code when it routes the call

176 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 through the GSM network. To know more about this feature, see the description for “Automatic Number
Translation”.

To apply Automatic Number Translation (ANT) on the trunk,

1. Click [+] Automatic Number Translation to expand.

2. Select the desired ANT Table number, table 1 to 8, which you want to apply on the trunk. Default: OFF.

3. Configure the ANT table number you selected.

4. Click ANT link. A new window opens.

5. Click the Table Number you selected for this trunk.

The selected table appears on your screen.

The table has two columns: one for Dialed Number Strings and the other for the corresponding Substitute
Number strings. The number strings are stored against an Index number, from 1 to 32. You can to enter as
many as 32 number strings.

6. Enter the Dialed Number strings and their corresponding Substitute Number strings in the respective
columns. Enter the Dialed Numbers and their corresponding Substitute Numbers against each Index
number. For example, if '95' is entered as the Dialed Number at Index 01 and its Substitute Number '91'
must be entered at Index 01.

7. Click Submit to save your entries.

8. Close the window.

SMDR Storage

The Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) feature of ETERNITY enables you to record the details of Internal,
Incoming (IC) and Outgoing (OG) calls made from/to all its trunks and extensions. To obtain SMDR as a report, you
must enable SMDR Storage, and set filters. See “Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)” and “Station
Message Detail Recording–Storage” to know more.
1. Click [+] SMDR Storage to expand options.

2. To store details of incoming calls landing on this trunk, select the check box Store Incoming Calls.
Default: selected.

3. To store details of outgoing calls made from this trunk, select the check box Store Outgoing Calls.
Default: selected.

4. Click Submit.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 177

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DSS Key Interface

This parameter determines what the system should do when an external called party in speech on this trunk is put
on Hold by an extension user by pressing a DSS key to dial another port.

For example, the DKP extension user on DKP1 port is in the middle of speech with an external party on a CO2.
If the extension user of DKP1 presses a DSS key to call another extension port, DKP2, two situations are possible,
depending on the DSS Key Interface you configure:

i. The external caller on CO2 will be played music-on-hold, and the user on DKP1 will hear Ring Back
Tone. The call will be placed on DKP2.

ii. The external caller on CO2 will be disconnected. DKP1 user will hear Ring Back Tone. The call will be
placed on DKP2.

1. Click [+] DSS Key Interface to expand options.

2. Select the radio button of the desired DSS Key Interface option:

• Disconnect current call when DKP user presses DSS key of other trunk, while in speech using
this trunk.

• Put current call on Hold, when DKP user presses DSS key of other trunk, while in speech using
this trunk. (Default).

3. Click Submit.

Cost Factor
Cost Factor is used for grading the cost of routing calls from a trunk for the purpose of least cost routing. See “Least
Cost Routing (LCR)”

1. Click Cost Factor to expand.

2. Select a Cost Factor for this trunk from the drop down list, from 01 to 99. Default: 01.

178 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Cost Calculation
If you want to Call Cost Calculation feature on this trunk,

1. Click Call Cost Calculation to expand.

1. Select a Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate Option, from 1 to 4.

Each Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate option contains a Pulse Rate Type, which you must configure.
Some service providers offer discounted rates for holidays. In which case, you can configure the rates for
normal days in the Normal Pulse Rate Table and the rates for holidays in the Holiday Pulse Rate Table.
See “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)”

Configure the Pulse Rate Type according to the billing pattern of the service provider of this trunk.

Trunks following the same billing pattern should be assigned the same Pulse Rate Option.

2. Define the Call Cost Calculation Schedule for the Pulse Rate option you selected.

The Pulse Rates offered by service providers may vary according to the time of the day. In such cases, you
must divide the day into Time Zones, from 1 to 4, as required, to match the time of the pulse rates offered
by your service provider.

Specify the Start Time and the End time (in 24 hours, HH:MM format) for the Time Zone Index in which
the particular Pulse Rate will be applied.

The default Time Schedule (start and end time) for each Time Zone Index is as follows:

Time Zone Index Start Time End Time

T1 00:00 23:59

T2 00:00 23:59

T3 00:00 23:59

T4 00:00 23:59

If your service provider offers the same Pulse Rate for calling a number for the entire day, there is no need
to change the default Time Schedule. The system will follow Time Zone 1.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 179

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 See “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)”

Call Budget
Configure this parameter if you want to control the cost of phone calls made from this trunk. See “Call Budget on
Trunk” to know more.

1. To enable call budget on the trunk, set Use Call Budget? to Yes. Default: No.

2. Define the call budget in terms of number of calls in the field Restrict outgoing calls if total number of
calls exceeds. Default: 9999 (in local currency)

3. Define the call budget in terms of amount in the field Restrict outgoing calls if total cost of the calls
exceeds. Default: 999999 (local currency).

4. Define the call budget in terms of duration in the field Restrict outgoing calls if total call duration
exceeds. Default: 999999 minutes

5. To have the system reset the Number of Calls/Amount/Minutes automatically on a particular date, select
the desired date from the Reset Call Budget on combo box as 1st to 31st of the every month.

The consumed Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Number of Calls can be reset from SE and SA Mode, referred
to as Manual Reset. Refer the feature description “Call Budget on Trunk”.

Call Back

Configure this parameter if you want to enable the ‘Call Back on Trunk Port’ feature on the trunk. See “Call Back on
Trunk Ports” to know more.

1. Select a Call Back Profile, 1 to 4, for the trunk port from the combo box.
Make sure you also configure the Call Back profile you select here.

To configure the profile, click the settings icon.

• A new window opens.

180 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Configure the Profile Number. See “Call Back on Trunk Ports” for instructions.
• Click Submit to save your profile.
• Close the window.

Hardware Features

1. Click [+] Hardware Features to expand.

2. Select your Trunk Type. Three types of CO trunks can be interfaced to a CO port of the ETERNITY NE:
• Normal Dial type: This is the conventional CO available from the PSTN.
• Hotline type: The CO connecting two destinations immediately on grabbing the trunk.
• Hotline Dial type: A special CO available from the PSTN, which works as a normal dial type for some
time and works as a hotline thereafter.
Default: Normal.

3. Select AC Termination Impedance. The AC Termination Impedance of the CO port must match with the
AC Termination Impedance supported by the PSTN network. By default, the AC Termination Impedance is
set as per the “Region” you have selected; however, you may select the impedance supported by your
PSTN network from the following options.
• 600
• 900
• 270+(750 || 150 nF) and 275+(780 || 150 nF)
• 220+(820 || 120 nF) and 220+(820 || 115 nF)
• 370+(620 || 310 nF)
• 320+(1050 || 230 nF)
Default: 600 ohms (for default Region ‘India’)

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 181

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Select Dial Type as Tone or Pulse. Default: Tone.

You can configure the Dialing method as Pulse or Tone (with configurable Pulse Ratio and DTMF ON-OFF
period) according to the Dialing method supported by the CO network to which the CO port is connected.

5. If you selected Pulse as Dial Type, select the appropriate Pulse Dial Ratio from the following options
according to the type of Pulse Dialing Ration supported by your CO Network.
• 10PPS, 1:2
• 10PPS, 2:3
• 10PPS, 1:1
• 20PPS, 1:2
• 20PPS,2:3
• 20PPS, 1:1
Default: 10 PPS 1:2.

6. If required, you may You can increase or decrease the level of Incoming Speech (Receive Gain) on the
Trunk by changing the Rx Gain (dB) to the desired level.

7. To increase or decrease the level of Outgoing Speech (Transmit Gain) on the Trunk, change the Tx Gain
(dB) to the desired level.

8. Select the type of Answer Supervision48 supported by your Network from the following options. Default:
Pseudo Answer.

• Pseudo Answer: It is used when no signaling is available from the PSTN. If this option is selected, the
call will be considered as matured on the expiry of the 'Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer'
(configurable; default 20 seconds), irrespective of whether or not the call actually gets matured. After
this, the Call Duration Timer starts. Finally, the system starts detecting the "Disconnect Supervision"
signal configured for the CO port.

Select this option only if there is no Answer Supervision Signal supported.

• Polarity Reversal: It is used as maturity signal when the answer signaling is given in the form of
Battery Reversal. If the battery polarity of the line is -ve for TIP and +ve for RING, when the called party
has answered the call, the CO network will reverse the battery polarity, i.e. TIP becomes +ve and Ring
-ve. After this, the Call Duration Timer is started. Finally system starts detecting the Disconnect
Supervision signal configured for the CO port.

• 12 KHz/16 KHz Pulse: When called party answers the call, the CO network generates a 12/16 KHz
metering pulse to indicate call maturity. Finally, the system will start detecting Disconnect Supervision
signal configured for the CO port.

48. It is a signal from the CO network to indicate to call maturity. Whenever you make an outgoing call from CO Trunk, the CO network
will give answer signaling when the called party answers the call.

This feature is particularly useful if you want to use “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)” to enable accurate billing. When the signal is
received, the billing will start and in the absence of this signal, the call will not be billed, ensuring that unanswered and unsuccess-
ful call attempts are not billed.

182 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Select the same Answer Supervision signal as provided by your CO Network. If the type of Answer
Supervision signal selected in the system does not match with that of the CO network, the call will not be
stored in the Station Message Detail Record (SMDR) buffer. For example, if the CO network does not
support Answer Supervision, but you have selected Polarity Reversal or 12/16KHz as Answer Supervision
Type, the call will be considered as matured and will not be stored in the Station Message Detail Record
(SMDR) buffer. The same would be the case if you selected 12/16KHz when the CO supports Polarity
Reversal.

9. If you selected Pseudo Answer as Answer Supervision signal, configure the Pseudo Answer
Supervision Timer.

This is the time period for which the system will wait before treating a call as matured (regardless of
whether or not it was answered). The range of this Timer is from 001 to 255 seconds. Default: 20 seconds.

When Pseudo Answer is selected as Answer Supervision signal, the call duration measured by the system
will not accurately reflect the actual call duration because the Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer is not
related to the actual call maturity. For example, if the Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer is set to 15
seconds, the call will be considered as matured after 15 seconds, even if it is answered after 20 seconds.
Similarly, if this Timer is set to 80 seconds, but the call was answered after 20 seconds and disconnected
after 40 seconds, this call will never be considered as matured as it ends before 80 seconds.

10. Select the Disconnect Supervision49 signal type supported by your network from the following options.
Default: None.

• None: When there this no signaling supported. Select this option only if there is no Disconnect
Supervision signal supported.

• Polarity Reversal: Call disconnection is signaled as Polarity Reversal when the call is
disconnected by the remote user. For example, if the battery polarity of the CO port is '+ve' for TIP
and '-ve' for RING in speech condition then on disconnection by the remote user, TIP will become '-
ve' and Ring '+ve'. The user gets an Error tone and the CO port is released.

• Open Loop Disconnect: Call Disconnection is signaled in the form of Open Loop, whereby the
Battery voltage on the CO port is removed for a short duration. Voltage is restored after this short
duration. However, the Polarity of Battery Voltage on the CO port is not changed.

This option is to be selected when call disconnection is signaled in the form of Open Loop
Disconnect pulse by the CO network. System will check Open Loop Disconnect signal for the time
duration set in Open Loop Disconnect Timer for each CO port. If the time of the Open Loop signal
detected is less than the Open Loop Disconnect Timer you have set, it will not be considered as

49. It is a signal from the CO network to indicate call disconnection. Whenever a call (incoming or outgoing) made from the CO Trunk
is disconnected by the remote party, the CO network will send Disconnect signal to the CO port. ETERNITY will detect this signal
and release the CO port.

Disconnect Supervision signal is important when a PCO machine is connected to the (SLT Port) ETERNITY and or when ETER-
NITY NE is deployed in a Gateway application.

In such application scenarios, it is desirable that calls that are disconnected by either end - calling party or called party - is termi-
nated by the system and the port is released. If the called (remote) party has disconnected the call but the calling party (extension
that made the outgoing call from ETERNITY) has not disconnected the call, the call remains live within the system.

So, Disconnect Supervision signal is important, particularly when calls are routed from CO-to-CO ports, to indicate to the system
that it needs to disconnect the call and release the port.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 183

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 valid Open Loop signal for releasing the CO port. But if the Open loop is detected continuously for
at least for the duration of the Open Loop Disconnect timer, it is considered as a valid Disconnect
Supervision signal. The call will be released and caller will get error tone.

• Select the same Answer Supervision and Disconnect Supervision signal type supported by your CO
network for the CO ports. Consider the following case:
• The CO network supports Polarity Reversal signal as Answer and Disconnect Supervision.
• But you have selected 'Pseudo Answer' as Answer Supervision signal and 'Polarity Reversal' as
Disconnect Supervision signal for the CO ports in the system.
• In this case, when a call is made through the CO port, the call will be considered as matured after
the Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer.
• Now, when the called party answers the call, the CO generates 'Polarity Reversal' as answer
supervision signal on the CO port.
• But as 'Polarity Reversal' is also selected as the Disconnect Supervision for the port, the system will
interpret this (Answer Signaling) signal as Disconnect Supervision signal and disconnect the call.

11. If you selected Open Look Disconnect as Disconnect Supervision type, configure the Open Loop
Disconnect Timer. The range of this timer is from 001 to 999 milliseconds. Default: 200 ms.

12. If Call Disconnection is signalled by your CO Network in the form of Disconnect Tone, configure
Disconnect Tone Detection.

To enable the system to detect the Disconnect Tone accurately, you must configure the Cadence (ON-
OFF time) and Frequency of the Disconnect Tone, as supported by the CO network.

• Frequency 1 (Hz): Frequency 1 is from 300 to 1400 Hz.

• Operator: This parameter has 3 options: No operator, Modulation (*), Addition (+)

If No operator is selected, frequency 2 will not be applicable.

If Modulation is selected, frequency 1and frequency 2 will be used as modulation i.e. F1* F2

If Addition is selected, frequency 1 and frequency 2 will be used as addition i.e. F1 + F2.

• Frequency 2 (Hz): Frequency 2 is from 20 to 1400 Hz. Select Frequency 2 if the Disconnect Tone
supported by the CO network consists of Dual Frequency.

• First Cycle Cadence - ON Time 1 (msec), OFF Time 1 (msec): Cadence is configurable from 0040-4000
msec for ON Time 1 and OFF Time 1.

• Subsequent Cycles: ON Time 2 (msec), OFF Time 2 (msec): Cadence is configurable from 0040-4000
msec for ON Time 2 and OFF Time 2.

When disconnect tone is detected on port matches the Frequency and Cadences you have configured, the
call will be disconnected and the CO port will be released.

13. Configure DTMF Out Dial parameters. While dialing out the DTMF digits from the CO port, the following
attributes of DTMF signal50 are critical.

• DTMF Signal ON Time (msec): It is the width of DTMF digit to be dialed out by the CO port. Set the
ON time to the desired value. Default: 102 milliseconds.

184 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • DTMF Inter-Digit pause Timer (msec): When the CO port dials out the DTMF digits on the CO, it
waits for the Inter Digit Pause Timer, while dialing the DTMF digits on the CO. Set the pause timer to
the desired value. Default: 102 milliseconds.

The 'level' of each DTMF digit is fixed, at -6.0 dB, but you may configure these parameters to match the
CO network requirement.

14. Configure the following DTMF Detection parameters, if necessary. The default settings of DTMF
Detection serve the requirements of most of the applications. However, you may fine tune the following
parameters if you face any problems in DTMF detection.

• Minimum Level (dB): This is the minimum level (dB) of the DTMF digit to be considered as valid.
Default: -4.5dB.

• Minimum ON Time (msec): This is the minimum time period for which the DTMF signal should be
present in order to be detected. The valid range of this time is 17 to 204 milliseconds. By default: 34
milliseconds.
• Minimum OFF Time (msec): This is the minimum time period between successive DTMF digits. The
valid range of this time is 17 to 204 milliseconds. Default: 68.

15. Set the following Timers, if necessary.

• Speech Delay Timer: It is the time after which the system gives dial tone to the extension, when the
extension user grabs the CO Trunk.

To understand the significance of this timer, let us consider a situation. Extension 201 does not have
calling permission for long distance numbers. The user of extension 201 grabs a CO Trunk, and dials a
number 1022-6305555. The system dials out this number, as it starts with '1', but since the actual dial tone
from the CO comes after some time, the CO interprets this number as 022-6305555 and establishes
speech. This way an extension user who does not have permission for long distance calling, can dial out a
long distance number. This can be prevented by configuring the Speech Delay Timer to an appropriate
value.

The range of this timer is from 000 to 255 seconds. Default: 1 second.

• Pause Timer: It is the time for which the system waits after grabbing the CO Trunk to dial out an external
number.

When the system automatically dials out the number51, if the CO network is of the old type, it is possible
that the system may dial out the number even before it gets the dial tone. This may result in a wrong
number being dialed out. The Pause Timer helps avoid this.

When features such as Redial or Auto-Redial or Abbreviated Dialing are used, the ETERNITY NE grabs
the trunk line, waits for the Pause Timer before dialing out the number.

The range of this timer is from 0500 to 3000 milliseconds. Default: 1000 milliseconds.

50. These DTMF Out Dial attributes would be used when the features Redial, Auto Redial and Abbreviated Dialing are used to dial out
the numbers from the CO port. These attributes are also applicable when you make a call from a DKP that has DTMF generation
disabled.

51. When features such as Redial or Auto-Redial or Abbreviated Dialing are used, the ETERNITY grabs the trunk line and dials the
number on its own.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 185

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Ring Cadence OFF Timer: Configure this timer to set OFF time for Ring cadence. During an incoming call
on the CO port, if the CO gives ring with a long Ring OFF period, the system will consider that the ring has
been stopped, and it will stop ringing the SLT port, even though the incoming call is still present.

To get correct indication, the ETERNITY NE supports the Ring Cadence OFF timer on the CO port so that
ring can continue, even for incoming calls with long Ring OFF period.

The range of the Ring Cadence OFF timer is from 1 to 6 seconds. Default: 6 seconds.

• Flash Time (msec): This parameter is relevant for dialing out Flash on the CO Trunk to access some of
the features of the CO Network. Configure the desired time of Flash to be generated on the CO Trunk.
Default: 600 milliseconds.

• ON Hook Speed: This parameter allows you to set the duration of time for the line-side device to go on-
hook.

The ON-Hook speed you set here is measured from the time the ON-Hook bit is cleared until the loop
current equals zero. Select the desired ON-Hook Speed from the following options:
• <0.5msec
• 3 msec
• 26 msec
Default: <0.5msec.

• OFF Hook Speed: This parameter defines the time to settle the line transients after which transmission or
reception can occur. Select the desired OFF-Hook Speed from the following options:
• 512 ms
• 128 ms
• 64 ms
• 8 ms
Default: 8 ms.

16. To limit Loop Current, enable Current Limiting. Default: Disabled. When this flag is enabled, the Loop
Current is limited to a maximum of 60mA.

17. Set the Minimum Loop Current at which DAA module of the CO Trunk port can operate. Select the
minimum operational loop current from the following options as per your requirement:
• 10
• 12
• 14
• 16
Default: 10 mA.

18. If required, you may adjust the Tip Ring Voltage on the line side.

In countries where Low voltage is required, you should set lower TIP/RING voltage in ETERNITY. Adjust
the values of the Tip Ring Voltage to match your country requirements from the following options:
• 3.1
• 3.2
• 3.35
• 3.5
Default: 3.5.

186 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 19. Set the Ringer Impedance as High or Synthesized for the CO port according your country-specific
requirement.

'High' signifies 20Mohm Ringer Impedance. This is the default Ringer Impedance provided on the line side
by the DAA module of the CO port. The DAA Module can provide higher impedance when 'Synthesized'
impedance is selected.

Some countries like Poland, South Africa and Slovenia require higher ring impedance which is achieved by
the DAA module, when Ringer Impedance is set to 'Synthesized' impedance.

Default: 'High' (20Mohm).

20. Set the Ringer Threshold (Vrms) level. This parameter defines the level below which the CO port would
not validate the Ring signal, and the level above which it would validate the Ring signal. Set the Ringer
Threshold to the desired value from the following options:
• 13.5 - 16.5
• 19.35 - 23.65
• 40.5 - 49.5
Default: 13.5 - 16.5 Vrms.

If the CO trunk port you are configuring is located in a “Behind the PBX Application”, configure PPDC. 'Pre-
PSTN Digit Count' or PPDC is the number of digits (dialed by an extension) to be ignored by the system
before toll control check is begun. It is the same as the number.

In Behind the PBX Applications, another PBX may be connected to the ETERNITY NE, with some of its
CO Trunks terminating into the Extension ports of the other PBX, and other trunks being directly
connected to the PSTN.

If the CO Trunk port is directly connected to the PSTN, PPDC must be set to '0'.

For Trunk ports connected to extensions of another PBX, PPDC must be configured as per the number of
digits in the Trunk Access Code defined for that PBX.

If the Trunk Access Code is a single digit, select '1'. If the Trunk Access Code is double or triple digit
number, accordingly select '2' or '3' as PPDC.

To know more about this feature, refer “Behind the PBX Application”.

21. To increase the incoming speech volume level of calls from SIP trunks to this CO trunk, set Rx Gain at SIP
Trunk (dB). Default: 0dB.

22. To increase the outgoing speech volume level of calls from SIP trunks to CO trunks, set Tx Gain at SIP
Trunk (dB). Default: 6dB.

23. To improve the quality of Fax over IP52, configure Pass Through Fax–Data Gain at SIP Trunk, if you
selected Pass Through Fax as Type of Fax over IP on SIP trunks, and if Pass Through Fax is to be
received on a CO trunk. Select the dB Level for Data Gain. Default: -11 dB.

24. Select the dB Level for Pass Through Fax–Bypass Gain at SIP Trunk. Default: -9 dB.

52. Normally, fax calls require less gain compared to voice calls. However, to improve fax reception, ETERNITY allows the configuring
of gain settings for fax. Fax gain settings consist of Data Gain and Bypass Gain. ETERNITY supports Fax Receive Gain for SIP to
CO Trunks, SIP to Digital Trunk calls as well as SIP to SLT Calls.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 187

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • You can also set the Rx and Tx Gains for SIP to Digital Trunks and Extensions and SIP to SLT.
• To increase Rx and Tx Gain for SIP to SLT extensions, go to SLT parameters page. To increase Rx
and Tx Gain for Digital Trunks/Extensions, go to “SIP Trunks” parameters page.

25. Click Submit to save your CO port settings.

More Features
Click More... link to expand.

Priority
Each trunk of the ETERNITY NE can be assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3... to 9, with '1' being lowest
Priority and '9' being highest Priority. Whenever there are incoming calls on multiple trunks, the call on the trunk
with higher priority will be answered by the Operator extension first. To know more, see “Priority”.

1. Select a Priority level from 1 to 9 for the trunk. Default: 9.

Time Table

1. Select a Time Table for the CO trunk. Default: System Time Table.

If you have not configured Time Table, you may do so now, by clicking the Time Table link. Define the
working days, and the start and end time of the working hours for each working day.

See “Time Tables” to know more.

Forced Account Code

Configure this parameter if you want to apply the Forced Account Code feature on the trunk. See “Account Codes”
to know more about this feature.

1. Select the check box Do not allow Outgoing Calls without Account Code to enable Forced Account
code on the trunk. Default: Disabled.

When you enable this flag, the system will prompt extension users to dial the Account Code whenever they
grab this trunk to dial out a number. The system will allow extension users to dial out numbers only after
they have dialed the Account Code or Name.

Account Codes feature must also be enabled in the Class of Service of extension users who are to be
allowed this feature.

188 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Now that you have finished configuring the CO trunk. You may configure the next CO trunk.

1. Click the tab of the next CO trunk number.

2. Follow the same steps as described above to configure this trunk.
3. Use the Copy button to apply the same CO trunk settings you configured on this trunk.

How to copy Parameter Values to another CO trunk

1. Click the Copy button on the page of the CO trunk you wish to copy.

The Copy dialog box opens. The dialog box displays the number and name of the trunk to be copied in the
Copy from: field.

The dialog box also lists the numbers and names of the trunks to which you can copy the values under
Copy To:

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 189

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Select the check boxes of the extension numbers to which you want to Copy To.

3. Click OK.
The parameter values of the trunk you Copy From will be applied on the trunk(s) you Copy To.

190 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mobile Trunks

The ETERNITY NE supports 2 Mobile ports.

• On this page, the number of Mobile Trunks you have specified on the “Pre-requisites” page will be
displayed on this page.

• If you enabled On-site Configuration on the Prerequisites page, the Mobile port that has a SIM Card
present will appear on this page.

On this page,


More: Click this button to view all parameter links on the page.

Less: Click this button to view only the essential parameter links on the page.

Expand: Click to expand a link to display all parameters under the link.

Collapse: Click to collapse a link. Hides all parameters under the link.

Settings: Click to configure the settings of a parameter further.

More link: Click to view all additional parameters on the page.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 191

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To configure another mobile trunk, click the Trunk number (name) tab.

To save settings, click Submit.

To copy the same mobile trunk parameter values to the other mobile trunks, use the Copy button.

Click the desired Mobile trunk number/name tab to configure the parameters.

If you assigned names to the mobile trunks on the “Naming Trunks” page, the same names will appear on the tabs.
For example, if you have named Mobile Port 1 as Vodafone, Mobile Port 2 as Airtel, these names will appear in
place of Mobile 1 and Mobile 2.

If you want to change the name of the Mobile port, you must go back to the “Naming Trunks” page.

Follow the instructions provided below to configure the Mobile Ports:

SIM PIN

1. You may change the SIM PIN for the SIM Card inserted in the mobile port.

Recall that you have changed the SIM PIN of the SIM Card using a Handset before installing it in the
system to the default '1234'. Now, you may change it to the desired SIM PIN.

The SIM PIN may be up to 8 digits long. Only the digits from 0 to 9 are allowed.

Incoming Calls

1. Select the route for incoming calls from the following options:

• Route calls as programmed for Day and Night time. Select this option if you want incoming calls to
be routed to specific destinations during the day and night. If you select this option, you must also
configure the landing destinations for incoming calls during the day and the night.
• Ignore all incoming calls53.
• Reject all incoming calls.

53. In this case, the caller will continue to get ring back tone until the call is timed out by the network. No outgoing call can be made
from the mobile port until the incoming call times out and the port is released.

192 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. If you selected Route Calls as programmed for Day and Night time, click [+] Route Incoming Calls to
expand.

• Select the landing destination to Route Calls during Day to. You may select:
• Operator
• Extensions
• Built-in Auto Attendant
• Voice Mail Auto Attendant (if available).

• If you select Extensions as the landing destination, select the landing destination extensions in the
corresponding field.

• Double click the Extensions field. A new window opens.

• Select the extension numbers as landing destination. These may be SLT, DKP or SIP extensions.

• Set the Ring Timer for the extensions. This timer defines the time for which the extension, on which
the call lands, should ring. Default: 015 seconds.

• Set Continuous Ring54 for the extensions, if you want the extensions to ring till the incoming call is
answered. Default: Disabled.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 193

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Enable Rotation55, if you have selected more than one extension. Default: Disabled.

• Click OK. All the extensions you selected will appear in the Extension field, in the sequence you
selected, separated by commas.

• To route the incoming call to an auto attendant, if the selected extensions do not answer the call,

• Select the check box Ring Extension/s and set the ring duration in the for___seconds field.
Default: 10 seconds. This is the time for which the system will ring on the destination extensions
you selected, and wait for an extension to answer. If the call remains unanswered on the expiry
of this timer, ETERNITY will route the call to the auto attendant.

• Select the destination for the unanswered call in the field If not answered, route to. You may
select the Built-In Auto Attendant or the Voice Mail Auto Attendant. Default: Built-In Auto
Attendant.

• If you select Built-in Auto Attendant as the landing destination for calls during the day, the
Voice Modules 02 to 13 will be played to callers as “DID Greeting Messages” and “DID
Guidance Messages”.

• If you want to play a different message, make sure you record the desired message(s) in the
Voice Modules after completing the installation with Basic Settings. Refer the topic “Voice
Message Applications” to know more.

See “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” to know more.

3. To enable “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” on the mobile trunk, select the check box Activate
Direct Inward System Access. Default: Disabled.

• Select the desired DISA option:

• PIN Authentication–Multiple calls: Select this option if you want to enable DISA with PIN
Authentication and allow multiple calls during the DISA login session.

• CLI Authentication–Multiple calls: Select this option if you want to enable DISA login with CLI
Authentication and allow multiple calls to be made during the DISA login session.

• CLI Authentication–One call: Select this option if you want to enable DISA session with CLI
Authentication, and allow only a single call to be made during the DISA login session.

Default: PIN Authentication–Multiple calls.

If you select Multiple Calls or CLI Authentication One Call as CLI Authentication, you must configure the
DISA CLI Authentication Table under Advanced Settings. See “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)”

4. To enable “Trunk Auto Answer”56 feature on the trunk, select the type of Trunk Auto Answer you want:

54. When Continuous Ring is selected, the first extension in the group you have created will continue to ring, even as the system hunts
for other extensions in the group to land the call. If the call still remains unanswered, the system will return the call to the first exten-
sion once again. This flag has no relevance, if you select only one landing extension.
55. When Rotation is enabled, each new call lands on the extension next to the one that received the call last. This ensures equal dis-
tribution of incoming calls to all the destination extensions in this group.

56. Trunk Auto Answer enables calls landing on a trunk to be answered automatically by greeting the caller with a voice message
before the call is actually handled.

194 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • For all Calls: the system will answer all incoming calls landing on the trunk line.

• When Busy: the system will answer incoming calls on the trunk, if the landing destination is busy.

To disable Trunk Auto Answer, select OFF. Default: OFF.

• Select the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting Message you want the system to play when greeting the
callers, from the following options:
• Play Music on Hold:
• Play Greeting Message1:
• Play Greeting Message2:
• Play Greeting Message3:
• Play Greeting Message4:

Default: Do Not Play.

If you do not want greeting message to be played, select Do Not Play.

When you select a Greeting Message, you must record a Voice Module with the desired Greeting
Message and assign the Voice Module to Trunk Auto Answer Greeting application.

You can record 4 different Greetings Messages for Trunk Auto Answer and assign a different Greeting
message for the Day and Night. See the topic “Voice Message Applications” under Advanced Settings link
for instructions on recording and assigning voice modules to greeting messages.

• Select the Trunk Auto Answer RBT Message you want the system to play to callers from the
following options:
• Play Music on Hold
• Play RBT Message1
• Play RBT Message2
• Play RBT Message3
• Play RBT Message4

• If you do not want RBT message to be played, select Do Not Play. The system will play Ring Back
Tone to the caller.

Default: Do Not Play.

When you select an RBT Message (1–4), you must record a Voice Module with the desired RBT Message
and assign the Voice Module to Trunk Auto Answer RBT Message application.

You can record 4 different RBT Messages for Trunk Auto Answer and assign a different RBT message for
the Day and Night. See “Voice Message Applications” under Advanced Settings link for instructions on
recording and assigning voice modules for RBT messages.

• Select the Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye Message you want the system to play to callers when the
landing destination extension is busy, from the following options
• Play Music on Hold
• Play Bye Message1
• Play Bye Message2
• Play Bye Message3

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Play Bye Message4

If you do not want Busy Bye message to be played, select Do Not Play. The system will play Busy
Tone to the caller.

Default: Do Not Play.

When you select a Bye Message (1–4), you must record a Voice Module with the desired Bye Message
and assign the Voice Module to Trunk Auto Answer Bye Message application.

You can record 4 different Bye Messages for Trunk Auto Answer and assign a different Bye message for
the Day and Night. See “Voice Message Applications” under Advanced Settings link for instructions on
recording and assigning voice modules for Bye messages.

5. Select the landing destination to Route Calls during Night to: Operator, Extensions, Built-in Auto
Attendant, Voice Mail Auto Attendant.

Follow the same instructions as described in the previous step for selecting landing destination for the Day.

Return Call to Original Caller

1. To apply the RCOC (Return Call to Original Caller) feature on the mobile trunk, select the check box Set
RCOC for Calling Extension, when Called Number is busy/ switched-off / not responding.
Default: Disabled.

When RCOC is enabled on the Mobile trunk port, the system routes calls returned by remote parties back
to the extensions that originally made the call from this port (i.e. the original callers' extensions). To know
more, refer the feature description for “RCOC (Return Call to Original Caller)”.

196 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Voice Mail Auto Attendant

1. If you have selected Voice Mail Auto Attendant as the destination for Routing calls during the day or during
night,

• Click [+] Voice Mail Auto Attendant to expand.

• Select the desired Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile number for the trunk, from 1 to 4. Default: 1.

The Voice Mail System of ETERNITY answers calls and processes them according to the Multi-level
DID Profile assigned to the trunk. So, you must configure the VMS Auto Attendant Profile number you
have selected for the trunk.

• To configure the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile, click the settings icon.

• Configure the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile. For detailed instructions, see “Voice Mail Auto
Attendant Profile”. Close the window.

Automatic Number Translation

The feature, Automatic Number Translation of ETERNITY modifies dialed numbers or part thereof to match the
specific route numbering plan understood by the destination network—CO, GSM, VoIP—by adding or stripping
country and area codes.

For example, you can configure Automatic Number Translation such that when an extension user dials a local
landline number, the ETERNITY prefixes the number with the appropriate country-area code when it routes the call
through the GSM network. To know more about this feature, see the description for “Automatic Number
Translation”
1. If you want to apply the Automatic Number Translation57 feature on the mobile trunk,

• Click [+] Automatic Number Translation to expand.

• Select the desired ANT Table number, table 1 to 8, which you want to apply on the trunk. Default: OFF.

• Configure the ANT table number you selected.

• Click the arrow icon. The ANT page opens a new window.

57. Automatic Number Translation modifies dialed numbers or part thereof to match the specific route numbering plan understood by
the destination network—CO, GSM, VoIP—by adding or stripping country and area codes.For example, you can configure Auto-
matic Number Translation such that when an extension user dials a local landline number, the ETERNITY prefixes the number with
the appropriate country-area code when it routes the call through the GSM network.To know more about this feature, see the
description for “Automatic Number Translation”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 197

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Table Number you selected for this trunk.

• The selected table appears on your screen.

The table has two columns: one for Dialed Number Strings and the other for the corresponding
Substitute Number strings. The number strings are stored against an Index number, from 1 to 32. You
can to enter as many as 32 number strings.

• Enter the Dialed Number strings and their corresponding Substitute Number strings in the respective
columns. A dialed number and its corresponding substitute number must be stored at the same index.
For example, if '95' is entered as the Dialed Number at Index 01, its Substitute Number '91' must be
entered at Index 01.

• Click Submit to save your entries.

• Close the window.

SMDR Storage

1. To record details and generate reports of Internal, Incoming and Outgoing calls made from/to the mobile
trunk, enable SMDR Storage. See “Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)” and “Station Message
Detail Recording–Storage” to know more.

• Click [+] SMDR Storage to expand options.

• Select the check box Store Incoming Calls to store details of incoming calls landing on this trunk.
Default: selected.

• Select the check box Store Outgoing Calls to store details of outgoing calls made from this trunk.
Default: selected.

198 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Network

1. Click [ + ] Network to expand.

• Set the Network Registration Retry Count from 1 to 255. This is the number of attempts the mobile
port will make to register with the network of the service provider whose SIM you have inserted in the
port. Default: 50 attempts.

The mobile port is configured to automatically locate and register with the Network that supports the
SIM card installed on it. Also, at each power ON, the mobile port (i.e. SIM) will automatically register
with the Network that supports the SIM on it.

However, if the Mobile port fails to register, it will restart the process of network registration on the
expiry of the Network Registration Retry Timer58. On the expiry of this timer, the system will retry
registration for the Count (i.e. number of times) configured and with each re-try attempt, the count will
be decremented by one.

• Select the Frequency Band supported by the service provider network whose SIM card is installed in
the mobile port. Default: 900+1800MHz.

• Frequency Band selection not required if the Mobile Card has SIMCOM 3G module.
• When you change the Frequency Band, the change will be effected after the next system restart or the
next Mobile Port restart.

• Set the Network Selection Mode for the mobile port as Automatic or Manual. Default: Automatic.

58. The Network Registration Retry Timer defines the time for which the Mobile port, which has failed to register with the network,
should wait before attempting to re-register with the network. Network registration retry timer is 2 minutes and is non-configurable.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 199

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 At each power on, the mobile port will automatically locate and register with the Network that supports
the SIM card present in it. If the Mobile port fails to register, it will restart the process of network
selection on the expiry of the Network Registration Retry Timer and will make as many attempts to
register as configured in the Network Registration Retry Count.

Manual Network Selection mode may be enabled when there is more than one network operator in
available in the area59, so as to prevent the SIM card from registering with another available network
and resulting in 'Roaming' charges.

• Select the Network Preferred Mode for the mobile port as Dual, GSM or UMTS. Default: Dual Mode.

• If you have enabled Manual network selection mode, configure the table Priority for Manual Network
Selection.

In this table, enter the Network Operator Codes (MCC-MNC)60 in the order of priority for the Mobile
Port. The codes must not exceed 8 digits. You can store up to 9 Network Operator Codes in the order
of priority.

So, whenever you register with the network manually, the system will select the Network Operator that
matches in order of priority. If the Mobile port fails to register, it will restart the process of network
selection on the expiry of the Network Registration Retry Timer.

If no match is found, the Mobile port (SIM) will not get registered with any of the available network
operators and no calls can be made or received on this port.

• When you change the Network Selection Mode to ‘Manual’ and the Network Operator Code manually,
the change you made will not come into effect until you have restarted the system.

DSS Key Interface

1. Click [+] DSS Key Interface to expand options.

This parameter determines what the system should do when an external called party in speech on this
trunk is put on Hold by a DKP extension user by pressing a DSS key to dial another port.

For example, the DKP extension user on DKP1 port is in the middle of speech with an external party on a
Mobile 1. If the extension user of DKP1 presses a DSS key to call another extension port, DKP2, two
situations are possible, depending on the DSS Key Interface you configure:

59. This may be the case in border areas.

60. The Network Operator Code comprises of the Mobile Country Code (MCC) appended by the Mobile Network Code (MNC). The
MCC is usually a 3-digit code that identifies a country. A single country may be assigned more than one MCC. For example the
MCC assigned to India is 404, but same code applies to all network operators in the country.

The MNC is usually a 2/3-digit code. The MCC-MNC combination uniquely identifies the home network of the mobile terminal or
the mobile user. For example, AirTel, a GSM network operator in India, has different MNC assigned to its networks in various
states. The MNC for AirTel in the state of Maharashtra is 90, while the same for the state of Gujarat is 98.

200 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 a. The external caller on Mobile 2 will be played music-on-hold, and the user on DKP1 will hear Ring Back
Tone. The call will be placed on DKP2.

b. The external caller on Mobile 1 will be disconnected. DKP1 user will hear Ring Back Tone. The call will
be placed on DKP2.

• Select the radio button of the desired DSS Key Interface option:

• Disconnect current call when DKP user presses DSS key of other trunk, while in speech
using this trunk.

• Put current call on Hold, when DKP user presses DSS key of other trunk, while in speech
using this trunk. (Default).

Cost Factor
Cost Factor is used for grading the cost of routing calls from a trunk for the purpose of least cost routing. See “Least
Cost Routing (LCR)”

1. Click Cost Factor to expand.

2. Select a Cost Factor for this trunk from the drop down list, from 01 to 99. Default: 01.

Call Cost Calculation

Configure this parameter if you want to apply Call Cost Calculation feature on the trunk. See “Call Cost Calculation
(CCC)”.

1. Click Call Cost Calculation to expand.

1. Select a Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate Option, from 1 to 4.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 201

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Each Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate option contains a Pulse Rate Type, which you must configure.
Some service providers offer discounted rates for holidays. In which case, you can configure the rates for
normal days in the Normal Pulse Rate Table and the rates for holidays in the Holiday Pulse Rate Table.
See “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)”

Configure the Pulse Rate Type according to the billing pattern of the service provider of this trunk.

Trunks following the same billing pattern should be assigned the same Pulse Rate Option.

2. Define the Call Cost Calculation Schedule for the Pulse Rate option you selected.

The Pulse Rates offered by service providers may vary according to the time of the day. In such cases, you
must divide the day into Time Zones, from 1 to 4, as required, to match the time of the pulse rates offered
by your service provider.

Specify the Start Time and the End time (in 24 hours, HH:MM format) for the Time Zone Index in which
the particular Pulse Rate will be applied.

The default Time Schedule (start and end time) for each Time Zone Index is as follows:

Time Zone Index Start Time End Time

T1 00:00 23:59

T2 00:00 23:59

T3 00:00 23:59

T4 00:00 23:59

If your service provider offers the same Pulse Rate for calling a number for the entire day, there is no need
to change the default Time Schedule. The system will follow Time Zone 1.

See “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)”

Call Budget

1. To enable call budget on the mobile trunk, set Use Call Budget? to Yes. Default: No.

• Define the call budget in terms of number of calls in the field Restrict outgoing calls if total number
of calls exceeds. Default: 9999 (in local currency)

• Define the call budget in terms of amount in the field Restrict outgoing calls if total cost of the calls
exceeds. Default: 999999 (local currency).

202 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Define the call budget in terms of duration in the field Restrict outgoing calls if total call duration
exceeds. Default: 999999 minutes

• To have the system reset the Number of Calls/Amount/Minutes automatically on a particular date,
select the desired date from the Reset Call Budget on combo box as 1st to 31st of the every month.

The consumed Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Number of Calls can be reset from SE and SA Mode, referred
to as Manual Reset. Refer the feature description “Call Budget on Trunk”.

Call Back

1. Click [+] Call Back to enable the ‘Call Back on Trunk Port’ feature on the mobile trunk. See “Call Back on
Trunk Ports” to know more about this feature.

• Select a Call Back Profile, 1 to 4, for the trunk port from the combo box.
Make sure you also configure the Call Back profile you select here.

To configure the profile, click the settings icon.

• A new window opens.
• Configure the Profile Number. See “Call Back on Trunk Ports” for instructions.
• Click Submit to save your profile.
• Close the window.

Gain Settings

1. Click [+] Gain Settings to expand.

• To increase or decrease the Transmit volume level of the mobile port, set the Tx Gain. Default: 3.
• To increase or decrease the Receive volume level of the mobile port, set the Rx Gain. Default: 3.

If you change the Tx or Rx Gain during an active call, the change you made will not apply on the current
call. It will be applied on the next call.

DTMF Out Dial

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 203

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Click [+] DTMF Out Dial to expand.

• Set DTMF ON Time to the desired value. Default: 100ms

DTMF ON Time is the time for which the DTMF digit will remain ON when being dialed out by the
ETERNITY. DTMF ON Time finds its application in the feature “Multi-Stage Dialing”.

• Set the Pause Time between successive DTMF digits. Default: 1 second.
The Pause Time provides the delay in number dialing from the mobile port. The Pause Time will be
applicable when the digit 'P' is configured in the DTMF number string which is to be out dialed as DTMF
digits on the Mobile port.

For example, if PPP2 is to be out dialed and Pause timer is configured as 3 seconds, the ETERNITY
will out dial the digit 2 after 9 seconds, i.e. after a delay of individual P i.e. 3+3+3 =9. The range of this
time is from 1 to 9. The Pause Time is used in the “Multi-Stage Dialing” feature.

More Features
Click More... link to expand.

Priority
1. Select a Priority level from 1 to 9 for the trunk. Default: 9.

Each trunk of the ETERNITY NE can be assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3... to 9, with '1' being
lowest Priority and '9' being highest Priority. Whenever there are incoming calls on multiple trunks, the call
on the trunk with higher priority will be answered by the Operator extension first. To know more, see
“Priority”.

Time Table
1. Select a Time Table for the Mobile trunk. Default: System Time Table.

If you have not configured Time Table, you may do so now,

• Clicking the arrow icon.
• The Time Table page opens.
• Define the working days, and the start and end time of the working hours for each working day.

204 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Submit.
• Close the window.

See “Time Tables” to know more.

Send CLI
1. To hide the subscriber number of the mobile port from being displayed to the called party, select the check
box Do not send CLI for all Outgoing Calls.

This feature will work only if subscribed/supported by your mobile service provider.

Anonymous Calls
1. To allow incoming calls without CLI to land on the mobile port, select the check box Accept Incoming
Calls without CLI.

Debug
1. To initiate debug for the mobile port, select the check box Enable Debug. Default: Disabled.

Forced Account Code

1. To apply the Forced Account Code feature on the mobile trunk, select the check box Do not allow
Outgoing Calls without Account Code (Forced Account Code). Default: Disabled.

When you enable this flag, the system will prompt extension users to dial the Account Code whenever
they grab this trunk to dial out a number. The system will allow extension users to dial out numbers only
after they have dialed the Account Code or Name.

Account Codes feature must also be enabled in the Class of Service of extension users who are to be
allowed this feature. See “Account Codes” to know more about this feature.

Now that you have finished configuring the Mobile trunk. You may configure the next Mobile trunk.

1. Click the tab of the next Mobile trunk number.

2. Follow the same steps as described above to configure this trunk.
3. Use the Copy button to apply the same Mobile trunk settings you configured on this trunk.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 205

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to copy Parameter Values to another Mobile trunk
1. Click the Copy button on the page of the Mobile trunk you wish to copy.

The Copy dialog box opens. The dialog box displays the number and name of the trunk to be copied in the
Copy from: field.

The dialog box also lists the numbers and names of the trunks to which you can copy the values under
Copy To:

2. Select the check boxes of the trunk numbers to which you want to Copy To.

206 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Click OK.
The parameter values of the trunk you Copy From will be applied on the trunk(s) you Copy To.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 207

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 VoIP Port

• If you have enabled On-site Configuration, this page will appear if your system has detected the
presence of the VoIP module.

• If On-site Configuration is disabled, you will reach this page if you have set the flag 'Is VoIP used?’ to
‘Yes’ on the “Pre-requisites” page.

On this page,


More: Click this button to view all parameter links on the page.

Less: Click this button to view only the essential parameter links on the page.

Expand: Click to expand a link to display all parameters under the link.

Collapse: Click to collapse a link. Hides all parameters under the link.

Settings: Click to configure the settings of a parameter further.

More link: Click to view all additional parameters on the page.

VoIP Network

208 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. You may assign a Name to the VoIP network.

Quality of Service

Quality of Service (QoS) refers to priority of IP packets on network layer. QoS is configured for both signaling (SIP)
and media (RTP). ETERNITY sends all the SIP signaling messages and the RTP packets according to the QoS
settings. To configure QoS for SIP (signaling) and RTP (media):

1. Define the priority bits for SIP messages in the field SIP Diffserve/ToS. Valid range is 00 to 63. Default:
26.

2. Define the priority bits for RTP packets in the field RTP DiffServe/ToS. Valid range is 00 to 63. Default: 46.

Disconnection on Silence Detection

You can have any matured incoming or outgoing call to be disconnected automatically, if silence (No RTP Packets)
is detected for more than a specified duration of time. To use this feature,

1. Select the check box Disconnection on Silence Detection. Default: enabled.

2. Define Detection Time (sec). This Timer defines the duration for which silence must be detected
continuously, for the system to consider it as silence detection and disconnect the call. The valid range of
this Timer is from 001 to 999 seconds. By default, it is set to 999 seconds.

3. Define the number of voice channels you would like to reserve for SIP trunk calls in the field Channel
Reservation for SIP Trunks. Default: 0.

ETERNITY NE supports 8 voice channels, which can be used by SIP Extensions and SIP trunks.

It may happen that SIP Extension users use up most of the voice channels, leaving too few or none for
making/receiving SIP Trunk calls.

This can be avoided by reserving some voice channels exclusively for SIP trunk calls.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 209

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SIP100rel

This parameter is to be configured if you want to support reliable transmission of (SIP) provisional responses and to
use PRACK (Provisional Acknowledgement).

1. To enable SIP 100rel, select the check box Use 100rel. Default: disabled.

SIP Over TCP

ETERNITY NE supports transporting of SIP messages over User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as well as Transfer
Control Protocol (TCP) connection. Despite the advantages that SIP over TCP offers, it is more common to use
UDP to transport SIP messages. To receive SIP messages over TCP,

1. Select the check box Enable SIP over TCP. Default: Enabled.

To be able to send SIP messages over TCP, you must configure 'TCP' or 'TCP (Fallback to UDP)'.

SIP/RTP Ports

1. Enter the SIP UDP Port address.

This port defines the port on which the ETERNITY listens for SIP messages transported over UDP. This
port is also used as the source port for sending SIP messages to the remote peer. The valid range for this
port is 1024-65535. Default: 05060.

2. Enter the SIP TCP Port address.

This port defines the port on which the VoIP Port of ETERNITY listens for SIP messages transported over
TCP. This port is also used as the source port for sending SIP messages to the remote peer. The valid
range for this port is 1025-65535. The default SIP TCP Port is 05060.

3. Enter the RTP Listening Port address. This port defines the port on which the VoIP Port of ETERNITY
listens for RTP Packets. This port is also used as the source port for sending RTP packets to the remote
peer. The valid range for this port is 1024-65278. The default RTP Listening Port is 08000.

210 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UDP NAT Keep Alive

This parameter is to be configured when the ETERNITY (Ethernet-WAN) is connected behind a NAT router61 and
SIP messages are transported over UDP. UDP NAT Keep Alive messages must be sent to refresh the UDP binding
in the NAT router.

1. Select the check box Enable UDP NAT Keep Alive to send UDP NAT Keep Alive messages periodically to
refresh the binding in the NAT router. Default: disabled.

2. Define the Interval (sec) for sending the UDP NAT Keep Alive messages. This time period should be less
than the UDP Binding Timer of the router. The valid range is 001-999 seconds. Default:120 seconds.

3. Select the Type of Message to be sent when UDP NAT Keep Alive is enabled. Select either REGISTER or
NOTIFY. Default: NOTIFY.

TCP NAT Keep Alive

This parameter is to configured when ETERNITY (Ethernet-WAN) is connected behind a NAT router and SIP
messages are transported over TCP. TCP NAT Keep Alive messages must be sent to refresh the TCP binding in
the NAT router.

1. Select the check box Enable TCP NAT Keep Alive to send TCP NAT Keep Alive messages periodically to
refresh the binding in the NAT router. Default: disabled.

2. Define the Interval for sending TCP NAT Keep Alive messages. This time period should be less than the
Binding Timer of the router. The valid range is 001-999 seconds. By default it is set to 120 seconds.

61. Network Address Traversal (NAT) allows multiple hosts in the network to share the single public routable IP address. Means all the
hosts in the private network shall be identified by single public IP address in the global IP cloud.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 211

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Timers

Configure the following SIP message related timers:

1. Set the SIP Invite Timer. This is the time in seconds that ETERNITY waits for a response from the called
party after ending the INVITE message. This timer starts after sending INVITE message to the called party
and stops on receipt of the provisional response or the final response or when the user disconnects the
call. On expiry of the timer, the call process is terminated by the ETERNITY and an error tone is played to
the user. The range of the SIP Invite Timer is 10-180 seconds. Default: 30 seconds.

2. Set the SIP Provisional Timer. This is the time in seconds that the ETERNITY waits for the final response
after receiving the provisional response from the called party. This timer starts on the receipt of the
provisional response from the called party and stops on receipt of the final response from the called party
or when the user disconnects the call. On expiry of the timer, ETERNITY terminates the call process and
plays error tone to the user. The range of SIP provisional Timer is 10-180 seconds. Default: 60 seconds.

3. Set the General Request Timer to the desired duration. This is the time in seconds for which ETERNITY
waits for response for a transaction request. This timer starts on the initiation of a transaction. This timer
stops on the receipt of a response for the request. On expiry of the timer, ETERNITY clears the
transaction. This timer is used for Registration request. The range of the General Request Timer is 10-60
seconds. Default: 20 seconds.

General Settings for SIP Extensions

If you are connecting SIP Extensions to ETERNITY NE, configure the following general parameters for SIP
extensions:

1. Use SIP Port fetched using STUN: If ETERNITY is located behind the NAT router and you have not
configured Port Forwarding on the Router for SIP, you must enable this.

2. Select the Source Port IP Address. This parameter specifies the NAT Traversal mechanism for SIP
messages. You can select any of these options:

• Use VoIP Ethernet Port IP Address: Select this parameter if your ETERNITY is directly connected to
the public IP network (not behind a NAT Router).

212 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Use Router's Public IP Address: Select this parameter if your ETERNITY is located behind a NAT
Router, and you have configured 'Router's Public IP Address' in the “Network Parameters”.

• Use IP Address fetched using STUN: Select this parameter if your ETERNITY is located behind a
NAT Router, and you have configured 'Use IP Address fetched using STUN' in the “Network
Parameters”.

3. Set the Maximum Registration Timer (sec) to the desired value. This is the maximum expiry timer, which
ETERNITY will accept in the REGISTER request received. If the system receives more than this value, the
configured value will be sent in the SIP message. The same Timer is used to handle SUBSCRIBE
requests. The valid range of this timer is from10 to 99999 seconds. Default: 180 seconds.

4. Set the Minimum Registration Timer (sec) to the desired value. This is the minimum expiry timer, which
the User Agent should send in its REGISTER request. If the expiry value in the REGISTER message is
less than this value, the request will be rejected. The valid range of this timer is from 10 to 99999 seconds.
Default: 180 seconds.

5. Enter the Private Key. It may consist of a maximum of 24 characters (all ASCII characters allowed).
Default, the field is blank.

Private key is a security mechanism used by ETERNITY NE to authenticate SIP messages. It is the MD5
authentication key used by the system to encrypt/decrypt the SIP messages.

6. Click Submit button to save your VoIP port settings.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 213

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SIP Trunks

The ETERNITY NE supports 6 SIP Trunks, depending on the variant. On this page, the number of SIP Trunks you
have specified on the “Pre-requisites” page will be displayed.

• You will reach this page only if you have specified the Number of SIP Trunks Used on the 'System Pre-
requisites' page.

• SIP Trunks are to be configured only if you are using Internet Telephony Service Providers for VoIP
calls.

• ETERNITY NE supports up to 6 SIP trunks, depending on the variant.

On this page,

More: Click this button to view all parameter links on the page.

Less: Click this button to view only the essential parameter links on the page.

Expand: Click to expand a link to display all parameters under the link.

Collapse: Click to collapse a link. Hides all parameters under the link.

Settings: Click to configure the settings of a parameter further.

214 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 More link: Click to view all additional parameters on the page.

To configure another SIP trunk, click the Trunk number (name) tab.

To save settings, click Submit.

To copy the same SIP trunk parameter values to the other SIP trunks, use the Copy button.

If you assigned names to the SIP trunks on the “Naming Trunks” page, the same names will appear on the tabs.
For example, if you have named SIP 1 as GlobalTalk, SIP 2 as Pulver, these names will appear in place of SIP
Trunk 1 and SIP Trunk 2.

If you want to change the name of the SIP trunk, you must go back to the “Naming Trunks” page.

Click the desired SIP trunk number/name tab to configure the parameters.

SIP

1. Select the check box Enable SIP Trunk to activate the SIP trunk.

2. Set the SIP Trunk Mode as Proxy or Peer-to-Peer, according to your requirement.

If you are using the services of an Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP), select Proxy to register this
SIP trunk with the ITSP.

If you are not using this service, select Peer-to-Peer, and configure the Peer-to-Peer Table. To do this,
• Click the arrow icon.
• The Peer-to-Peer Table page will open in a new window.
• Configure this table.
• Click Submit to save your entries.
• Close the window.

Also see the description for the feature “Peer-to-Peer Calling”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 215

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Enter the SIP ID for the trunk.

This is the ID which remote parties will use to call this SIP Trunk. The SIP ID may be a number or text
consisting of a maximum of 40 characters.

If you have defined the trunk mode as Proxy, enter the User ID provided by your ITSP. For example, if SIP
URI provided by the ITSP is [email protected], enter 12345 in this field.

If you have defined the trunk mode as Peer-to-Peer, enter the desired User ID.

4. If you selected Peer-to-Peer as the SIP trunk mode, you may configure the trunk to Treat Incoming Peer-
to-Peer call as: Trunk or Station.

If you select Trunk, the Route Incoming call routing configured for the SIP trunk will be applied.

If you select Station, the incoming call on the trunk will be routed to the Extension Number received in the
“To:” field in the INVITE message.

If a Trunk Access Code and External Number are received in the ‘To:” field of the INVITE message, the
call will be dialed out using the outgoing trunks you configure in Select Trunks for Outgoing Calls.

If you select Station, you may also configure the parameters Class of Service, Caller ID on Call
Transfer, Toll Control and Select Trunks for Outgoing Calls.

Proxy/Registrar Parameters
If you have defined the SIP trunk mode as Proxy, configure the Proxy/Registrar Server parameters.

1. Enter the Proxy/Registrar Server Address and the Registrar Server Port provided by your ITSP.

The Registrar Server Address can be an IP Address or domain.

The Registrar Server Listening Port ranges from 1024 to 65535. Default: 05060.

2. Enter the authentication ID (user ID) provided by your ITSP in the field Authentication ID.

3. Enter the password provided by your ITSP for the Authentication ID in the field Authentication Password.

Outbound Proxy
If your ITSP (for this SIP trunk) has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls, configure outbound proxy settings.

1. Select the check box Enable Outbound Proxy. Default: disabled.

2. Enter the IP address or domain name of the outbound proxy server and the server port address in the field
Outbound Proxy Server Address: Port. The default server port address is 05060.

3. Set the Re-registration Timer. This is the time period after which the ETERNITY NE will send registration
request to maintain registration binding with the Registrar server62.

62. The Registrar Server deletes an entry of its client from its database on expiry of a fixed timer. This timer is set by the Registrar
Server. The Re-registration Timer of ETERNITY enables it to send a registration request before the Timer of the Registrar Server
expires to remain registered on the Server.

216 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The valid range of this timer is 00001- 65535. Default: 3600 seconds.

4. Define the Registration Retry Time. This Timer stands for the period between retries for registration with
the Registrar Server. If the registration attempt fails, ETERNITY sends the registration request on the
expiry of this Timer again. The system continues to send the registration request till it gets registered with
the Registrar Server. The valid range of this timer is from 00001- 65535. Default: 10 seconds.

Route Incoming Calls

1. Click [+] Route Incoming Calls to expand options.

2. Select the landing destination to Route Calls during Day to. You may select:
• Operator
• Extensions
• Built-in Auto Attendant
• Voice Mail Auto Attendant (if available).

• If you select Extensions as the landing destination, select the landing destination extensions in the
corresponding field.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 217

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Double click the Extensions field. A new window opens.

• Select the extension numbers as landing destination. These may be SLT, DKP or SIP extensions.

• Set the Ring Timer for the extensions. This timer defines the time for which the extension, on which
the call lands, should ring. Default: 015 seconds.

• Set Continuous Ring63 for the extensions, if you want the extensions to ring till the incoming call is
answered. Default: Disabled.

• Enable Rotation64, if you have selected more than one extension. Default: Disabled.

• Click OK. All the extensions you selected will appear in the Extension field, in the sequence you
selected, separated by commas.

• To route the incoming call to an auto attendant, if the selected extensions do not answer the call,

63. When Continuous Ring is selected, the first extension in the group you have created will continue to ring, even as the system hunts
for other extensions in the group to land the call. If the call still remains unanswered, the system will return the call to the first exten-
sion once again. This flag has no relevance, if you select only one landing extension.
64. When Rotation is enabled, each new call lands on the extension next to the one that received the call last. This ensures equal dis-
tribution of incoming calls to all the destination extensions in this group.

218 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select the check box Ring Extension/s and set the ring duration in the for___seconds field.
Default: 10 seconds. This is the time for which the system will ring on the destination extensions
you selected, and wait for an extension to answer. If the call remains unanswered on the expiry
of this timer, ETERNITY NE will route the call to the auto attendant.

• Select the destination for the unanswered call in the field If not answered, route to. You may
select the Built-In Auto Attendant or the Voice Mail Auto Attendant. Default: Built-In Auto
Attendant.

• If you select Built-in Auto Attendant as the landing destination for calls during the day,

• the Voice Modules 02 to 13 will be played as “DID Greeting Messages” and “DID Guidance
Messages”.

• If you want to play a different message, make sure you record the desired message(s) in the Voice
Modules after completing the installation with Basic Settings. Refer the topic “Voice Message
Applications” to know more.

See “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” to know more.

3. To enable “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” on the SIP trunk, select the check box Activate Direct
Inward System Access. Default: Disabled.

• Select the desired DISA option:

• PIN Authentication–Multiple calls: Select this option if you want to enable DISA with PIN
Authentication and allow multiple calls during the DISA login session.

• CLI Authentication–Multiple calls: Select this option if you want to enable DISA login with CLI
Authentication and allow multiple calls to be made during the DISA login session.

• CLI Authentication–One call: Select this option if you want to enable DISA session with CLI
Authentication, and allow only a single call to be made during the DISA login session.

Default: PIN Authentication–Multiple calls.

If you select Multiple Calls or CLI Authentication One Call as CLI Authentication, you must configure the
DISA CLI-Authentication Table under Advanced Settings link. See “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)”

4. To enable “Trunk Auto Answer”65 feature on the trunk, select the type of Trunk Auto Answer you want:

• For all Calls: the system will answer all incoming calls landing on the trunk line.

• When Busy: the system will answer incoming calls on the trunk, if the landing destination is busy.

To disable Trunk Auto Answer, select OFF. Default: OFF.

• Select the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting Message you want the system to play when greeting the
callers, from the following options:
• Play Music on Hold:
• Play Greeting Message1:

65. Trunk Auto Answer enables calls landing on a trunk to be answered automatically by greeting the caller with a voice message
before the call is actually handled.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 219

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Play Greeting Message2:
• Play Greeting Message3:
• Play Greeting Message4:
Default: Do Not Play.

If you do not want greeting message to be played, select Do Not Play.

When you select a Greeting Message, you must record a Voice Module with the desired Greeting
Message and assign the Voice Module to Trunk Auto Answer Greeting application.

You can record 4 different Greetings Messages for Trunk Auto Answer and assign a different Greeting
message for the Day and Night. See the topic “Voice Message Applications” under Advanced Settings link
for instructions on recording and assigning voice modules to greeting messages.

• Select the Trunk Auto Answer RBT Message you want the system to play to callers from the
following options:
• Play Music on Hold
• Play RBT Message1
• Play RBT Message2
• Play RBT Message3
• Play RBT Message4

• If you do not want RBT message to be played, select Do Not Play. The system will play Ring Back
Tone to the caller.

Default: Do Not Play.

When you select an RBT Message (1–4), you must record a Voice Module with the desired RBT Message
and assign the Voice Module to Trunk Auto Answer RBT Message application

You can record 4 different RBT Messages for Trunk Auto Answer and assign a different RBT message for
the Day and Night. See “Voice Message Applications” under Advanced Settings link for instructions on
recording and assigning voice modules for RBT messages.

• Select the Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye Message you want the system to play to callers when the
landing destination extension is busy, from the following options:
• Play Music on Hold
• Play Bye Message1
• Play Bye Message2
• Play Bye Message3
• Play Bye Message4

If you do not want Busy Bye message to be played, select Do Not Play. The system will play Busy
Tone to the caller.

Default: Do Not Play.

When you select a Bye Message (1–4), you must record a Voice Module with the desired Bye Message
and assign the Voice Module to Trunk Auto Answer Bye Message application.

You can record 4 different Bye Messages for Trunk Auto Answer and assign a different Bye message for
the Day and Night. See “Voice Message Applications” under Advanced Settings link for instructions on
recording and assigning voice modules for Bye messages.

220 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Select the landing destination to Route Calls during Night to: Operator, Extensions, Built-In Auto
Attendant, Voice Mail Auto Attendant.

Follow the same instructions as described in the previous step for selecting landing destination for the Day.

RCOC (Return Call to Original Caller)

When RCOC is applied on the SIP trunk, the system routes calls returned by remote parties back to the extensions
that originally made the call from this port (i.e. the original callers' extensions). To know more, refer the feature
description for “RCOC (Return Call to Original Caller)”.

1. To apply the RCOC feature on the SIP trunk, select the check box Set RCOC for Calling Extension, when
Called Number is busy/ switched-off / not responding. Default: Disabled.

Voice Mail Auto Attendant

If you have selected Voice Mail Auto Attendant as the destination for Routing calls during the day or during night,

1. Click [+] Voice Mail Auto Attendant to expand.

2. Select the desired Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile number for the trunk, from 1 to 4. Default: 1.

The Voice Mail System of ETERNITY NE answers calls and processes them according to the Voice Mail
Auto Attendant Profile assigned to the trunk. So, you must configure the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile
number you have selected for the trunk.

3. To configure the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile, click settings icon.
A new window opens.

Configure the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile. For detailed instructions, see “Voice Mail Auto Attendant
Profile”. Close the window.

DDI Routing

1. Enter the DDI Pilot Number provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered this SIP Trunk.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 221

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Number Translation

The Automatic Number Translation feature of ETERNITY modifies dialed numbers or part thereof to match the
specific route numbering plan understood by the destination network—PSTN, GSM, VoIP—by adding or stripping
country and area codes.

For example, you can configure Automatic Number Translation such that when an extension user dials a local
landline number, the ETERNITY prefixes the number with the appropriate country-area code when it routes the call
through the GSM network. To know more about this feature, see the description for “Automatic Number
Translation”.

To apply Automatic Number Translation (ANT) on the trunk,

1. Click [+] Automatic Number Translation to expand.

2. Select the desired ANT Table number, table 1 to 8, which you want to apply on the trunk. Default: OFF.

3. Configure the ANT table number you selected.

4. Click ANT link. A new window opens.

5. Click the Table Number you selected for this trunk.

The selected table appears on your screen.

The table has two columns: one for Dialed Number Strings and the other for the corresponding Substitute
Number strings. The number strings are stored against an Index number, from 1 to 32. You can to enter as
many as 32 number strings.

6. Enter the Dialed Number strings and their corresponding Substitute Number strings in the respective
columns, against the same Index numbers. For example, if '95' is entered as the Dialed Number at Index
01 and its Substitute Number '91' must be entered at Index 01.

7. Click Submit to save your entries.

8. Close the window.

SMDR Storage

The Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) feature of ETERNITY enables you to record the details of Internal,
Incoming (IC) and Outgoing (OG) calls made from/to all its trunks and extensions. To obtain SMDR as a report, you
must enable SMDR Storage, and set filters. See “Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)” and “Station
Message Detail Recording–Storage” to know more.

222 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Click [+] SMDR Storage to expand options.

2. To store details of incoming calls landing on this SIP trunk, select the check box Store Incoming Calls.
Default: selected.

3. To store details of outgoing calls made from this SIP trunk, select the check box Store Outgoing Calls.
Default: selected.

4. Click Submit.

DSS Key Interface

This parameter determines what the system should do when an external called party in speech on this trunk is put
on Hold by an extension user by pressing a DSS key to dial another port.

For example, the DKP extension user on DKP1 port is in the middle of speech with an external party on a CO2.
If the extension user of DKP1 presses a DSS key to call another extension port, DKP2, two situations are possible,
depending on the DSS Key Interface you configure:

i. The external caller on CO2 will be played music-on-hold, and the user on DKP1 will hear Ring Back
Tone. The call will be placed on DKP2.

ii. The external caller on CO2 will be disconnected. DKP1 user will hear Ring Back Tone. The call will be
placed on DKP2.

1. Click [+] DSS Key Interface to expand options.

2. Select the radio button of the desired DSS Key Interface option:

• Disconnect current call when DKP user presses DSS key of other trunk, while in speech using
this trunk.

• Put current call on Hold, when DKP user presses DSS key of other trunk, while in speech using
this trunk. (Default).
3. Click Submit.

Cost Factor
Cost Factor is used for grading the cost of routing calls from a trunk for the purpose of least cost routing. See “Least
Cost Routing (LCR)”

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 223

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Click Cost Factor to expand.

2. Select a Cost Factor for this trunk from the drop down list, from 01 to 99. Default: 01.

Call Cost Calculation

Configure this parameter if you want to apply Call Cost Calculation feature on the trunk. See “Call Cost Calculation
(CCC)”.
1. Click Call Cost Calculation to expand.

1. Select a Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate option, from 1 to 4.

Each Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate option contains a Pulse Rate Type, which you must configure.
Some service providers offer discounted rates for holidays. In which case, you can configure the rates for
normal days in the Normal Pulse Rate Table and the rates for holidays in the Holiday Pulse Rate Table.
See “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)”

Configure the Pulse Rate Type according to the billing pattern of the service provider of this trunk.

Trunks following the same billing pattern should be assigned the same Pulse Rate Option.

2. Define the Call Cost Calculation Schedule for the Pulse Rate option you selected.

The Pulse Rates offered by service providers may vary according to the time of the day. In such cases, you
must divide the day into Time Zones, from 1 to 4, as required, to match the time of the pulse rates offered
by your service provider.

Specify the Start Time and the End time (in 24 hours, HH:MM format) for the Time Zone Index in which
the particular Pulse Rate will be applied.

224 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The default Time Schedule (start and end time) for each Time Zone Index is as follows:

Time Zone Index Start Time End Time

T1 00:00 23:59

T2 00:00 23:59

T3 00:00 23:59

T4 00:00 23:59

If your service provider offers the same Pulse Rate for calling a number for the entire day, there is no need
to change the default Time Schedule. The system will follow Time Zone 1.

See “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)”

Call Budget

Configure this parameter if you want to control the cost of phone calls made from this trunk. See “Call Budget on
Trunk” to know more.

1. To enable call budget on the trunk, set Use Call Budget? to Yes. Default: No.

2. Define the call budget in terms of number of calls in the field Restrict outgoing calls if total number of
calls exceeds. Default: 9999 (in local currency)

3. Define the call budget in terms of amount in the field Restrict outgoing calls if total cost of the calls
exceeds. Default: 999999 (local currency).

4. Define the call budget in terms of duration in the field Restrict outgoing calls if total call duration
exceeds. Default: 999999 minutes

5. To have the system reset the Number of Calls/Amount/Minutes automatically on a particular date, select
the desired date from the Reset Call Budget on combo box as 1st to 31st of the every month.

The consumed Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Number of Calls can be reset from SE and SA Mode, referred
to as Manual Reset. Refer the feature description “Call Budget on Trunk”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 225

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Back

Configure this parameter if you want to enable the ‘Call Back on Trunk Port’ feature on the trunk. See “Call Back on
Trunk Ports” to know more.

1. Select a Call Back Profile, 1 to 4, for the trunk port from the combo box.
Make sure you also configure the Call Back profile you select here.

To configure the profile, click the settings icon.

• A new window opens.
• Configure the Profile Number. See “Call Back on Trunk Ports” for instructions.
• Click Submit to save your profile.
• Close the window.

DTMF Out Dial

This parameter is applicable for the “Multi-Stage Dialing” feature.

1. Set the time for which the DTMF digit should remain ON while being dialed out by the ETERNITY NE as
DTMF ON Time.

The range of this timer is from 051 to 255 milliseconds. Default: 102 msec.

2. Set the time for which ETERNITY should wait before dialing the successive DTMF digits as Inter Digit
Pause Time. The range of this timer is from 051 to 255 milliseconds. Default: 102 msec.

3. Set the time for ----- as Pause Time (sec). The range of this timer is from 1 to 9 seconds. Default: 1
second.

• Pause Timer (sec): This parameter is used for the “Multi-Stage Dialing” feature. This Timer is required for
inserting delay while digits of a number string are out dialed from the SIP trunk. The Pause Timer will be
applicable when the letter 'P' is configured in the DTMF number string which is to be out dialed as DTMF
digits on the SIP trunk. The range of this timer is from 1 to 9 seconds. By default the Timer is set to 3
seconds.

For example, if 'PPP7' is to be out dialed and Pause timer is programmed as 3 seconds, the ETERNITY
will out dial the digit 7 after 9 seconds, i.e. after a delay of individual P (i.e. 3+3+3 =9). The range of this
Timer is from 1 to 9.

226 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Send CLI

1. Define the CLI of the SIP Trunk to be sent to the remote party on outgoing calls made using this SIP trunk.
You may select any of the following Send CLI options as desired:

• CLIR: Select this option if you do not want the CLI to be sent.

• SIP ID: You may select this option if you want the SIP ID programmed on the SIP Trunk to be sent as
CLI.

• Calling Party-wise: Select this option if you want to send the Calling Extension Number (i.e. the
number of the extension making the outgoing call through the SIP trunk) as CLI.

The DDI number assigned to the calling extension will be sent, instead of its extension number.

If the calling extension has disabled the parameter ‘Send DDI as CLI’, then its Pilot number configured
in the DDI Routing on this SIP Trunk will be sent as CLI.

If calling extension has enabled CLIR, no CLI will be sent by this SIP Trunk.

• Fixed Number: Select this option if you want a specific number to be sent as CLI. When you select this
option, you must also define the number to be sent as CLI.

You may select this option you want to send any of your trunk line numbers as CLI on the SIP Trunk so
as to enable the called party to call back the calling party using this CLI.

Since it is not possible to call back a SIP ID, Fixed Number offers you a solution, using which you can
send a trunk line number as CLI on the SIP Trunk. Using this CLI, the called party can call back the
calling party.

The Fixed Number may consist of a maximum of 40 characters, including all ASCII characters.

By default, ‘SIP ID is set as the Send CLI option for all SIP Trunks.

When extension number of the calling extension is blank, and the ‘Send CLI Option’ programmed for the
the SIP Trunk is other than "SIP ID", then also SIP ID will be sent as CLI.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 227

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 VoIP
1. Click VoIP to expand parameters.

Vocoders

2. Select Vocoders66 in the order of preference from the drop down box.

The Vocoders supported by ETERNITY in the order of preference, i.e. 1st to 7th, by default are:
• G.723
• G.729 AB
• GSM FR
• iLBC - 30 ms
• iLBC - 20 ms
• G.711  Law
• G.711 A - Law

If you do not want to select any Vocoder, you can select the option 'None'. However, if all Vocoder
Preferences from 1 to 7 are set to 'None', incoming and outgoing calls will be blocked.

3. If you selected G.723 codec as a Preferred Vocoder, select G.723 Bit Rate as: Bit Rate: 5.3 Kbps or 6.3
Kbps. Default: 6.3kpbs.

When G.723 is negotiated, the selected Bit Rate will be applied only when sending the RTP packets.
When receiving RTP packets from the remote end, both Bit Rates of G.723 will be accepted.

4. Select the check box Silence Suppression to suppress the 'Silence' packets, and to allow only the Voice
packets through. ETERNITY supports Silence Suppression for all Vocoders except GSM FR.

5. Select the DTMF Option.

The DTMF option you select will determine how the DTMF digits will be sent over the IP Network, when a
DTMF digit is pressed.

66. Vocoders are the various voice codecs used to compress the data in RTP packets for optimum use of bandwidth and for ensuring
voice quality. You can set 7 Vocoder options in the order of preference.

228 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ETERNITY NE supports the DTMF options: RTP (RFC 2833), SIP Info, and In-Band. Select the
appropriate option. Default: RTP (RFC 2833).

Echo Cancellation

ETERNITY supports Echo Cancellation for SIP to CO trunk calls and SIP to Digital Trunks (Mobile, SIP) and
Extensions (DKP, SIP). If you want to apply Echo Cancellation,

1. Select the check box Echo Cancellation. Default: enabled.

2. Set the tail length for echo cancellation for SIP to CO trunks as Tail Length (msec) for CO. The echo
cancellation Tail Length for SIP to CO trunks can be 32/64/128 milliseconds. Default: 128 milliseconds.

3. Set the tail length for echo cancellation for SIP to Mobile/SIP trunks and SIP to DKP/SIP extensions as
Tail Length (msec) for Extensions/Digital Trunks (msec). The echo cancellation Tail Length for SIP to
Digital Trunks/Extensions can be 32/64/128 milliseconds. Default: 32 milliseconds.

Jitter Buffer

The speed at which voice packets travel through a network depends on the condition of the network. All voice
packets may not come at the same speed. This variation in the delay in receiving packets, known as Jitter, affects
voice quality. Jitter Buffer helps overcome the delay in receiving voice packets and improves voice quality. Jitter
Buffer receives voice packets, stores them and sends it to the DSP to process it at evenly spaced intervals, thus
improving voice quality.

ETERNITY supports two types of Jitter Buffer: Static and Dynamic. Static Jitter Buffer's internal delay is static,
whereas, the Dynamic Jitter Buffer's internal delay adapts itself to the jitter in the network.

1. Select the Jitter Buffer Type as Static or Dynamic.

If you select Static Jitter Buffer, configure the 'Minimum Delay'. The value configured in the Minimum
Delay determines the size of the Static Jitter buffer.

If you select Dynamic Jitter Buffer, configure the 'Optimization Factor' and 'Minimum Delay'. The
minimum size of the Dynamic Jitter buffer depends on the 'Minimum Delay' configured. The Optimization
Factor determines the rate of adaptation of the Dynamic Jitter Buffer to the jitter in the network.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 229

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Set the Optimization Factor (only if you selected Dynamic Jitter Buffer) to the desired value from 01 to 13.
Default: 10.
In networks with higher jitter, a higher value should be configured as Optimization Factor.

The actual size of the Dynamic Jitter Buffer will be determined by the DSP on the basis of the Optimization
Factor configured and actual network condition. Dynamic Jitter buffer can go up to maximum 300
milliseconds.

3. Set the Minimum Delay (msec) (for both Static and Dynamic Jitter Buffer) to the desired value from 10 to
280 milliseconds. Default: 10.

The Minimum Delay determines the size of the Static Jitter Buffer. When Jitter Buffer type is selected as
Static, the Minimum Delay defines the size of the Static Jitter Buffer. The Static Jitter Buffer will store each
received voice packet for the configured time and then it will send it to DSP for voice processing.

When Jitter Buffer type is Dynamic, the Minimum Delay specifies the minimum time for which the Dynamic
Jitter Buffer will store the received voice packet before sending it to the DSP for voice processing.

4. You can send/receive Fax over IP (FoIP) from a Fax machine connected to the SLT port of the ETERNITY
NE.
• Select as Fax Type, the protocol of Fax over IP.

The ETERNITY NE supports the fax options: T.38 (UDPTL), T.38 (RTP), and Pass Through.

• 'Pass Through' and 'T.38' will work only if the peer devices also support the same option.

• If you select 'Pass through' as Fax type, you must disable 'Silence Suppression'.

• If the fax sent using T.38 is rejected, ETERNITY will use Pass Through for sending the Fax.

T.38 Parameters

If you selected T.38 protocol as Fax Type, you may configure Eye Quality Monitor (EQM) related parameters to
improve quality of Fax. The higher the EQM, the better the Fax quality. To improve the quality of T.38 fax reception,

1. Set the Max Rate (Kbps) to the desired speed. Default: 14.4 kbps.

The Max Rate controls the Fax image transfer speed. As EQM is inversely proportional to fax Max Rate, if
you receive poor quality fax, the Max Rate should be reduced.

2. Set the Packet Period (msec) to the desired value. Default: 40msec.

The packet period sets the sampling rate of TDM signal. If you cannot improve fax quality by lowering Fax
Max Rate, you may reduce the Fax Packet Period.

230 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When you reduce the Fax Packet Period, the fax image will be sent at lower speed. EQM is inversely
proportional to Fax Packet Period.

Do not change the default settings unless it is required.

3. Set the Image Redundancy Level to the desired value. The Fax Image Level is redundancy level for
output Image, which can be from 0 to 3. Default: 1.

Fax Image transfer speed is inversely proportional to this parameter. If this parameter is low then fax is
transferred faster. EQM is directly proportional to this parameter. If this parameter is high, good quality fax
can be achieved.

You may increase the Fax Image Level from 1 to 3 if the quality of fax does not improve with Fax Max Rate
and Fax Packet Period.

Level 0 means no redundancy.

4. Set the Data Redundancy Level to the desired value. Default: 3. This is a redundancy level for T.30
control data. Fax Data Level can be set from 0 to 7. Level 0 means no redundancy. Redundancy level
increases from 1 towards 7. The higher the level set, the slower would be the fax transmission.

EQM is directly proportional to this parameter. The higher the Fax Data Redundancy Level, the better the
EQM.

Gain Settings

• To increase the level of incoming speech volume of calls from this SIP trunk to Mobile trunks/DKP
extensions, set the Rx Gain for SIP to Digital Trunk/DKP Voice call (dB) to the desired level from -31 to
31dB. Default:0.

• To increase the level of outgoing speech volume of calls from this SIP trunk to Mobile trunks/DKP
extensions, set the Tx Gain for SIP to Digital Trunk/DKP Voice call (dB) to the desired level from -31 to
31 dB. Default: 0.

• You can also set the Rx and Tx Gains for SIP to Analog Trunks and Extensions (CO and SLT).

• To increase Rx and Tx Gain for SIP to CO trunks, go to the "CO Trunks” page of Basic Settings.

• To increase Rx and Tx Gain for SIP to SLT extensions, go to “SLT” parameters page of Basic Settings.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 231

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Pass Through Fax Rx Gain (SIP to Digital Trunk Call)

Configure this parameter if you selected Pass Through67 as Fax Type, and the fax is to be received on a digital
trunk.
1. Select the dB level for Data Gain (dB) from-31 to 31 dB. Default: -11 dB.

2. Select the dB Level for Bypass Gain (dB) from -31 to 31 dB. Default: -9 dB.

Pass Through FAX Rx Gain (SIP to SLT Call)

Configure this parameter if Pass Through Fax is to be received on a fax machine connected to an SLT port.

1. Select the dB level for Data Gain (dB) from -31 to 31 dB. Default: -11 dB.

2. Select the dB level for Bypass Gain (dB) from -31 to 31 dB. Default: -9 dB.

Source Port IP Address

1. Select the Source Port IP Address from the combo box according to your VoIP installation scenario.

• Select Use Ethernet Port IP Address if ETERNITY NE is connected directly to the public internet.

• Select Use IP Address Fetched Using STUN if ETERNITY NE is located behind a NAT router
other than Symmetric.

If you select this option, keep the Outbound Proxy disabled.

• Select Use Router's Public IP Address, if ETERNITY NE is located behind a NAT Router (any
type).

If you select this option, keep the Outbound Proxy disabled.

Simultaneous Calls
2. In the field No. of Simultaneous Calls select from the combo box, the number of simultaneous calls you
want to allow on this SIP Trunk. Default: 8.

67. Pass Through Fax packets are transported using RTP protocol. Normally, fax calls require less gain compared to voice calls. How-
ever, to improve fax reception, ETERNITY NE enables you to configure gain settings for fax. Fax gain settings consist of Data Gain
and Bypass Gain. ETERNITY supports Fax Receive Gain for SIP to Digital Trunk calls as well as SIP to SLT Calls.

232 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The number of simultaneous SIP calls depends on the number of simultaneous calls allowed by the ITSP
with whom you have subscribed this SIP Trunk.

The ETERNITY NE supports 8 simultaneous calls. Ask your ITSP about the number of simultaneous SIP
calls supported on this SIP Trunk. Configure this parameter only if the ITSP supports less than 8
simultaneous calls.

Symmetric RTP
3. The use of Symmetric RTP makes it possible for a SIP device to send the RTP on the same connection on
which it is listening for RTP. This is done only on peer-to-peer SIP trunks.

Select the check box Use Symmetric RTP, if the ETERNITY NE is located on a public IP and you want
outgoing calls to the SIP Client located behind the NAT Router. OR if you need to receive incoming calls
from the SIP Client located behind the NAT router.

Digest Authentication
4. The Digest Authentication feature allows incoming calls from callers only after the callers have
authenticated themselves (with their User ID and Password). If a caller enters invalid authentication
information, the system will re-challenge authentication once and reject the call, if the authentication
attempt fails again.

If you want to enable the 'Digest Authentication' feature on the SIP trunk,

• Select the check box Digest Authentication. Default: disabled.

• Configure the Digest Authentication Table. To do this,

• Click the arrow icon.
• The Digest Authentication Table page opens in a new window.
• Enter the User ID to be authenticated along with its corresponding Password against each Index on
the Table.
• The User ID may be a maximum of 40 characters. The User Password may be a maximum of 16
characters.
• If you have finished entering the User IDs and their corresponding User Passwords in this Table,
click Submit.
• Close the window.

Default Transport for Outgoing Messages

1. Select the Default Transport for Outgoing Messages from the following options:

• UDP: Outgoing messages are transported using UDP.

• TCP: Outgoing messages are transported using TCP.

• TCP (Fallback to UDP): TCP is used for outgoing messages. However, if the TCP connection fails, the
system will attempt to send the message again over UDP.

Default: UDP

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 233

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 These options are checked only if you have selected the check box Enable SIP over TCP in the VoIP
parameters page. If the SIP over TCP is disabled, all outgoing SIP messages will be transported over UDP
only.

Send REGISTER Message

1. Select whether or not the system should Send REGISTER Message from the SIP trunk. Default: Send
REGISTER Message is enabled.

Clear the check box if you do not want REGISTER Message to be sent.

Add rinstance in REGISTER

‘rinstance’ is any random value which can be used by the Ethernet Port to fetch its own contact binding, i.e. to know
the Registration Expiry Timer assigned by the server.
1. Select if the system should Add 'rinstance' in REGISTER message. Default: ‘rinstance’ is enabled.

If you want to remove ‘rinstance’ in REGISTER, clear the check box.

Allow OG Calls without Registration

By default, the system does not allow outgoing calls to be made if the status of the SIP trunk is 'not registered'.
1. To allow outgoing calls to be made from the SIP Trunk even when it is not registered, select the check box
Allow OG Calls without Registration.

Caller ID on Call Transfer

If you set the SIP Trunk mode as Peer-to-Peer and selected Treat Incoming Peer-to-Peer Call as Station, you
may configure Caller ID on Call Transfer.

You can choose whether the system should display the CLI of the ‘Held Party’ or the CLI of the ‘Transferring Party’
to the transfer destination extension while the call is being transferred.

Select the radio button of the desired option. See “Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)” to know
more.

234 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Class of Service
If you set the SIP Trunk mode as Peer-to-Peer and selected Treat Incoming Peer-to-Peer Call as Station,
configure class of service.

1. Click Class of Service to expand options.

Define the Class of Service for the SLT extension for Day time and Night time.

2. To allow a feature, select the check box of the feature.

3. To deny a feature, clear the check box.

Toll Control
If you set the SIP Trunk mode as Peer-to-Peer and selected Treat Incoming Peer-to-Peer Call as Station,
configure Toll Control.

1. Click Toll Control to expand options. Set the desired Toll Control for the SIP trunk for the Day and Night.

2. Select the type of Calls Allowed during Day: All Calls, No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, and Limited Calls 1, 2, 3. Default: All Calls.

3. Select the type of Calls Allowed during Night: All Calls, No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National
Calls, and Limited Calls 1, 2, 3. Default: All Calls.

4. Select the call privilege for Calls allowed for Lock Level 1, Lock Level 2 and Lock Level 3.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 235

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Select Trunks for Outgoing Calls

If you set the SIP Trunk mode as Peer-to-Peer and selected Treat Incoming Peer-to-Peer Call as Station, select
the Trunks for Outgoing Calls.

1. Click Select Trunks for Outgoing Calls to expand.

2. Double click the Trunks allowed for dialing field. A multiple selection box opens.

• To select a trunk from the left box, place your cursor on the desired trunk, and click the Select>>
button.

• You may change the sequence of the trunks you selected, if required, using the Up and Down arrow
buttons on the right display box.

• You can also delete trunks from the ones you have selected.

• You may enable Rotation, if you have selected more than one trunk. Default: Disabled. Rotation has
no relevance if only one member trunk is selected.

• Click OK. The multiple selection box closes. All the trunks appear in the field Trunks allowed for ‘0’
dialing, in the sequence you selected, separated by commas.

• To apply Least Cost Routing, if required select the desired LCR method from the combo box, and
configure the settings, as required.

236 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 More Features

Priority
Each trunk of the ETERNITY NE can be assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3... to 9, with '1' being lowest
Priority and '9' being highest Priority. Whenever there are incoming calls on multiple trunks, the call on the trunk
with higher priority will be answered by the Operator extension first. To know more, see “Priority”.

1. Select a Priority level from 1 to 9 for the trunk. Default: 9.

Time Table
Select a Time Table for the SIP trunk. Default: System Time Table.

If you have not configured Time Table, you may do so now,

• Clicking the arrow icon.
• The Time Table page opens.
• Define the working days, and the start and end time of the working hours for each working day.
• Click Submit.
• Close the window.

See “Time Tables” to know more.

Forced Account Code

Configure this parameter if you want to apply the Forced Account Code feature on the SIP trunk. See “Account
Codes” to know more about this feature.

1. Select the check box Do not allow Outgoing Calls without Account Code to enable Forced Account
code on the trunk. Default: Disabled.

When you enable this flag, the system will prompt extension users to dial the Account Code whenever they
grab this trunk to dial out a number. The system will allow extension users to dial out numbers only after
they have dialed the Account Code or Name.

Account Codes feature must also be enabled in the Class of Service of extension users who are to be
allowed this feature.

Now that you have finished configuring the SIP trunk. You may configure the next SIP trunk.

1. Click the tab of the next SIP trunk number.

2. Follow the same steps as described above to configure this trunk.

3. Use the Copy button to apply the same SIP trunk settings you configured on this trunk.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 237

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to copy Parameter Values to another SIP trunk
1. Click the Copy button on the page of the SIP trunk you wish to copy.

The Copy dialog box opens. The dialog box displays the number and name of the trunk to be copied in the
Copy from: field.

The dialog box also lists the numbers and names of the trunks to which you can copy the values under
Copy To:

2. Select the check boxes of the trunk numbers to which you want to Copy To.

238 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Click OK.
The parameter values of the trunk you Copy From will be applied on the trunk(s) you Copy To.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 239

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emergency Numbers

• This page displays the default Emergency Numbers for the 'Region' you selected for the system. In
other words, it displays the Emergency Numbers specific to the country/region where the ETERNITY
NE is installed.

• The default Emergency Numbers that appear on this page are non-editable. All you need to do is to
select the Outgoing Trunks for each default Emergency Number.

For example, '112' is the default Emergency Number for the mobile network. So, you may select the
Mobile Trunk for dialing this number.

• You may add additional Emergency Numbers to the existing default numbers in the edit boxes and
select the Outgoing Trunks for these numbers.

Disclaimer: Matrix Comsec is responsible for incorrect configuration of Emergency Numbers.

1. To add an Emergency Number, Click the Emergency Numbers link below Basic Settings.

2. Enter the desired number in the field Route the Emergency Number.

240 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. To select Outgoing Trunks to route the emergency number double click the Through field.

• A multiple selection box opens. On the left, trunks appear with their names (if configured in “Naming
Trunks”) and port numbers in a sequence, starting with CO trunks, followed by Mobile trunks and SIP
trunks68.

• To select a trunk, place your cursor on the desired trunk, and click the Select>> button.
Or
• Press the ctrl key and click the left mouse button to select multiple trunks.

Make sure that the trunks selected for each Emergency number route the Emergency call to the right
network.

You may select as many as 10 trunks. You will get an alert, if you select more than 10 trunks or select
the same trunk more than once.

To change the sequence of the trunks you selected, use the Up and Down arrow buttons on the right
display box.

To delete trunks from the ones you have selected use Delete key on your keyboard.

• Enable Rotation if you have selected more than one trunk. Default: Disabled.

When you enable Rotation, each new outgoing call is routed through the subsequent trunk in the
group,69 ensuring equal distribution of outgoing call traffic on all trunks.

When Rotation is OFF, calls are routed through the first trunk in the group. If this trunk is busy, the call
is routed to the next trunk in the group.

Rotation has no relevance if only one trunk is selected.

• Click OK. The multiple selection box closes.

68. If you have not assigned any names to the trunks, they will appear with their default names (CO, MOB, SIP) and port numbers. If
you have enabled On-Site Configuration, only those trunks that are connected will appear in the box.

69. The first call through the first trunk, the second through the second, the third through the third trunk, and so forth. Thus each new
call is routed through the trunk next to the one that routed the previous outgoing call.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 241

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 All the trunks you selected appear in Through field, in the sequence you selected, separated by
comma.

• Click Submit to save the values entered on this page.

242 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Network Parameters

1. Click the Network Parameters link.

The network parameters page opens.

Preferred WAN

1. Set the Preferred WAN according to the WAN interface you have used for your VoIP installation, which
may be:
• Ethernet WAN
• Wireless WAN over Mobile Port 1 and Mobile Port 2

Default: Ethernet

If you select Ethernet as Preferred WAN, you must configure the parameters: Network Connection Type,
DNS Connection Type, Dynamic DNS, Router’s Public IP Address, and Simple Traversal of UDP through
NAT (STUN).

If you select Wireless WAN Mobile 1 or Mobile 2, configure Wireless WAN parameters.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 243

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Network Connection Type

1. Select the network connection type, i.e. the IP Addressing Scheme used by your network to assign the
WAN IP address to the Ethernet Port: Static, DHCP, PPPoE. Default: Static.

• Static: If your network uses Static IP addresses, select Static and configure the following parameters.

• IP Address: Enter the IP Address you obtained from your network Administrator for the Ethernet
Port of ETERNITY NE in this field. Make sure that the IP Address does not conflict with that of any
other device on the LAN.

• Subnet Mask: Enter the Subnet Mask you obtained from your network Administrator for the
Ethernet Port in this field.

• Default Gateway: Enter the IP Address of the Router’s LAN Interface as the Default Gateway IP
Address.

• DHCP: If your network uses DHCP addressing, the DHCP server will dynamically assign an IP
Address, the Subnet Mask to the Gateway Address to the Ethernet Port whenever ETERNITY NE is
restarted. You have to configure the Domain Name Server (DNS) Address only, if not already provided
by your Internet Service Provider.

• PPPoE: If your network uses PPPoE addressing, the PPPoE server will automatically assign an IP
Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address to the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE. You need to
configure the following parameters provided by your Internet Service Provider:

• PPPoE User ID: Enter the User Name provided by the Internet Service Provider. The User ID may
be a maximum of 16 characters.

• PPPoE Password: Enter the User Password provided by the Internet Service Provider. The
password may be a maximum of 16 characters.

• PPPoE Service Name: Enter the Service Name, if provided by your Internet Service Provider. The
Service Name may consist of a maximum of 16 characters. If Service Name is not provided, leave
this field blank.

• Domain Name Server: See below for instructions.

244 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DNS Connection Type

Configure the DNS related parameters as provided by your Internet Service Provider. You may consult your LAN
administrator in this regard.

1. Select DNS Connection Type as Static or Auto according to the Connection Type (IP Addressing
scheme) used by the network.

• Select Static if:

• your network uses Static IP Addressing.
• your network uses DHCP or PPPoE, but the DHCP/PPPoE server does not provide DNS
Address automatically.

If your network does not assign DNS Address automatically, set DNS Address Assignment as Static
and enter the DNS Server Address in the DNS IP Address field or the DNS Name provided by your
ISP in the DNS Domain Name field.

Select Automatic if:

• your network uses DHCP or PPPoE IP Addressing.
• the DHCP/PPPoE server of your network assigns the DNS Address automatically.

• DNS IP Address: This field will be editable only if you selected DNS Address Assignment as 'Static'.
Enter the DNS Server IP Address here. The DNS Address can be a maximum of 15 characters.

If you selected DNS Address Assignment as 'Automatic', the DNS Address assigned by the DHCP/
PPPoE server will appear here.

• DNS Domain Name: Enter DNS Domain Name if provided by your ITSP/LAN Administrator.
Otherwise, keep this field blank. The Domain Name may be a maximum of 40 characters.

Wireless WAN

If you selected Wireless WAN as your preferred WAN, configure the Wireless WAN for the Mobile port you are
using as the WAN interface. Make sure you have Internet Services enabled on the SIM present in the Mobile Port.

1. In the field Access Point, enter the access point provided by your Service Provider.

2. Enter the Dial-up Number provided to you for the internet service by your Service Provider.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 245

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Enter the User ID provided to you for accessing the internet service by your Service Provider.

4. In the field, Password, enter the authentication password for the User ID provided by your Service
Provider.

Dynamic DNS

ETERNITY NE supports Dynamic DNS Server client of the Service Provider Dynamic DNS.org. Dynamic DNS
(DDNS) is a service that maps internet domain names to IP addresses. Dynamic DNS may be required if you have
registered SIP extensions with the Registrar Server of ETERNITY NE.

When you register IP extensions with ETERNITY NE and your network uses dynamic IP addressing (DHCP or
PPPoE) to assign the WAN IP Address70, all the SIP clients registered with ETERNITY will need to be updated with
the new WAN IP Address to be able to function. Dynamic DNS resolves this mapping a host name (domain name)
(host name) and the preferred WAN IP Address. Each time a new WAN IP Address is assigned by the network,
ETERNITY updates the mapping on Dynamic DNS server.

You may register with DynamicDNS.org server to use this service. If you have registered with Dynamic DNS.org,
do the following:

1. Select the check box Enable Dynamic DNS. Default: disabled.

The DynamicDNS server stores the mapping between hostname and IP Address, which can be updated
periodically. However, if the ETERNITY frequently sends IP Address update requests to the DDNS server,
the server is likely to block the hostname in its database and terminate the DDNS services provided to
ETERNITY.

So, if you restart the ETERNITY frequently, chances are that DDNS server may block the hostname of
your system. This will in turn affect the ability of the system to receive the calls using DDNS hostname
since the entry (mapping between hostname and IP Address) in the DNS server will be deleted in such
scenarios.

ETERNITY NE updates the WAN IP Address in the DDNS server at each Power ON. You can also update
the WAN IP Address at any time you want, as required.

2. Enter the User ID you created on DynDNS.org in the field User ID. A maximum of 40 characters, including
all ASCII characters are allowed.

70. According to your installation scenario and Preferred WAN you configured.

246 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Enter the password you created for the User ID on DynDNS.org in the Password field. The password may
be not more than 24-characters long.

4. Enter the Host Name you created on DynDNS.org. The host name must be under 40 characters.

5. Define the Retry Trials. This is the number of attempts ETERNITY NE will make to send the WAN IP
Address Update Request to the Dynamic DNS Server. The Retry Count may be set from 1 to 9. By default
the count is set to 1.

6. Whenever you want to update the WAN IP Address on the DDNS server, use the button Click to Update
IP Address.

Router’s Public IP Address

This parameter is of relevance if the Ethernet WAN of ETERNITY NE is located behind a NAT Router and SIP
Messages are to be forwarded to the public internet.

Router's Public IP Address specifies the fixed IP Address of your NAT router required for NAT Traversal in SIP
messages.

1. Enter the Router’s Public IP Address.

You also need to select 'Router's Public IP Address' as the 'Source Port IP Address' in the 'SIP Extension
General Parameters', when you configure SIP Extensions'. Refer the topic "Configuring SIP Extensions".

You can also use STUN as an alternative to the Router's Public IP Address as NAT Traversal mechanism.
Ask your Network Administrator about the NAT Traversal mechanism that suits best for your voice network
and configure this parameter.

Simple Traversal of UDPs through NATs (STUN)

This parameter is to be configured only if the Ethernet-WAN of ETERNITY is located behind a NAT Router and SIP
Messages need to be forwarded to the public internet.

STUN specifies the mechanism required for NAT traversal in SIP messages. The STUN Server facilitates
traversing through most NATs, except symmetric NATs.

If your router has symmetric NAT, do not configure this parameter.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 247

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If your router as asymmetric NAT, configure the following STUN parameters:

1. In the field STUN Server Address: Port,

• Enter the STUN Server Address, a maximum of 40 characters.

• Enter the Listening Port of the STUN Server in the field STUN Port. The valid range for this field is from
1024-65535. The default STUN Port is 03478.

2. To allow the SIP Port number to be fetched using STUN in the SIP message, you must enable Use SIP
Port fetched using STUN. Default: enabled.

If you are using Port-Forwarding in the Router for SIP messages, disable Use SIP Port fetched using
STUN by clearing the check box.

You also need to select 'Use IP Address fetched using STUN’ as the 'Source Port IP Address' in the 'SIP
Extension General Parameters', when you configure SIP Extensions'. Refer the topic "Configuring SIP
Extensions".

Since STUN does not work with symmetric NAT, as an alternative to STUN you can use the Router's Public
IP Address as NAT Traversal mechanism. Ask your Network Administrator about the NAT Traversal
mechanism that suits best for your voice network and configure this parameter.

MAC Address Selection

By default, ETERNITY NE uses the unique MAC Address of its Ethernet Port on all ethernet frames. If you want the
system to use a Clone MAC Address, configure MAC Address Selection.

• Select the MAC Address Selection check box. Default: Disabled.

• In the Clone MAC Address field, enter the Clone MAC Address (in hexadecimal format) to be used on all
ethernet frames.

DHCP Server

ETERNITY NE has an in-built DHCP server for registering the Matrix Extended IP Phones. Configure DHCP Server
settings if you are connecting Extended IP Phones.

248 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To enable the DHCP Server, set Start DHCP Server? to Yes. Default: No.

• In the Start IP Address field, define the starting IP Address to be assigned to DHCP client. ETERNITY will
allocate the first available free IP Address to DHCP clients.

• In the Number of Hosts field, define the maximum number of DHCP Clients to be assigned IP Addresses
by the DHCP server. You can define the Number of Hosts from 2 to 48. Default: 48.

• In the DNS Server Address field, enter the DNS address to be assigned to the DHCP Clients.

• Define the maximum Lease Time (hours) for which the IP Addresses should be allocated to the DHCP
Clients. The Lease Time may be from 1 to 192 hours. Default: 24 hours.

DHCP client should renew its lease within the Lease Timer. If the client does not renew its lease before the
expiry of the configured Lease Time, ETERNITY will free the IP Address. This IP Address may be
assigned to another DHCP client.

Web Server Port

• ETERNITY NE has an embedded web server called Jeeves, for system configuration. You may change
the Web Server Port for accessing Jeeves, as per your requirement. Valid range of the port is: 80, 1024-
65535. Default: 80

Click Submit to save settings.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 249

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 250 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6 Voice Mail System

Before you begin configuration of the VMS related parameters, consider the following points:

• Decide which extension users are to be provided voice mail. Make a list of these extensions by their port
type and port number, access codes.

• If you intend to use the VMS Auto Attendant on trunks,

• make a list of the trunks by their port type (CO Mobile, SIP) and port number.
• configure welcome and greeting messages. You may either use the default, pre-recorded welcome
messages of the VMS, or record in WAV format, the custom welcome messages that meet your
requirements.
• configure “Graphs and Nodes”.
• configure Multi-level Auto Attendant Profile.
• select VMS Auto Attendant for routing incoming calls during the day and the night for the desired trunk
ports.
• configure Voice Mail Auto Attendant parameters for the trunk ports.

• If you want to use custom messages,

• record the desired voice messages in WAV format.
• upload your recorded messages on to the embedded FTP server of ETERNITY NE.

• To upload or download VMS Software, configuration files, mailbox messages, you will need to access the
embedded FTP server of ETERNITY NE.

To configure Voice Mail Settings,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 251

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the VMS Configuration link.

• Configure the VMS Parameters using the different sub-links as required.

252 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 VMS General Parameters

You can change the default settings of certain VMS features and functions, like function codes for nodes in a graph,
access code for General mailbox, call transfer message options, etc.

• Click the General Parameters link under VMS Configuration.

• Check the default values of the parameters described in the following and change them, as required.

General Settings

• Enable Extension Number Validation: The VMS Auto Attendant allows callers to reach directly the
desired party in an organization by, by giving them the option of dialing the extension number of the
desired party.

When the Extension Number Validation flag is enabled, the VMS compares the extension number dialed
by the external caller with the extension numbers configured in the system. If no match is found, the VMS
responds with a message “Invalid Number” (Invalno.wav).

By default, Extension Number Validation is disabled.

• System Alerts through Email: The VMS allows alerts to be sent to the System Engineer via email.
Enable this flag, if you want system alerts to be sent via email to the System Engineer. You must also
specify the email address to which the system alerts are to be sent.

• SE Email ID: Enter the email address on which the System Alerts should be sent to the System Engineer.
The System Engineer must have access to this email ID. The email ID may consist of a maximum of 64
characters.

• Abort All Processes and send Email to Extension Number of Distribution List: For “Sending
Messages” to a group of persons at the same time, the VMS allows you to create Distribution Lists71 to
which voice messages along with email notification can be sent.

Using Distribution Lists, an extension user can send voice message along with email notification to as
many as 120 extensions of the ETERNITY. Distribution Lists take up a sizeable part of the system
resources, and may slow down the process of sending voice messages to Distribution Lists.

71. A Distribution List is a group of extensions which have mailbox.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 253

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The VMS resolves this with the flag Abort All Processes and send Email to Extension Number of
Distribution List.

When you enable this flag, the VMS stops all other processes - drops calls, closes Jeeves, stops sending
and receiving of emails over the SMTP client - and sends the voice message to the Distribution List. Thus,
the process of sending messages to Distribution Lists happens much faster. Once the message is sent,
the VMS resumes the other processes.

By default, this flag is disabled.

• Home Node Code for Graph: By default, 0 is defined as the function code for Home Node in a graph.
Dialing 0 takes the caller to the home position in a graph. If required, you may assign a different function
code for Home Node in this field. Refer the topic “Graphs and Nodes” to know more.

General Mailbox Access Code: By default, 1176 is the access code for the General Mailbox.

A General mailbox is a common mailbox in the VMS, with which more than one extension is associated.
When the personal mailbox of any extension is full, all new messages are diverted to the General Mailbox.

The General Mailbox is also used as the destination for recording messages for features of ETERNITY like
Call Taping and Conversation Recording.

Extension users whose voice mail has been diverted to the General Mailbox, and those who want to listen
to the Call Taping and Conversation Recording messages can access the General Mailbox by dialing the
access code and listening to the messages.

If required, you may assign a different access code to the General Mailbox. The access code must not
exceed 6 digits. Valid digits are: 0 to 9, * and #.

• Code to Stop Message Recording: The VMS requires callers/extension users to signal end of message
recording by dialing a code. By default, # is the programmed as the code to Stop Message Recording. If
required, you may assign a different code.

Home Node

Home Node or Home Position is the point from where the journey of the caller/extension user starts in a graph of
the VMS. The VMS greets the caller/extension user and takes them to the Home Position. At the Home position,
Welcome message is played, the VMS offers different options to the caller, like go to Operator, dial the name of the
extension user, go to Home Position, disconnect the call, leave a message.

254 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The VMS instructs the caller/extension user to dial different digits (function codes) for each option offered in the
Home Position. For each of the Home Node options listed below, you may change the default function codes to
match your requirement.

• Dial by Name: By default, 7 is the function code for Dial by Name. The VMS instructs the caller to dial 7 to
dial by name of the extension user.

• Root Node: By default, 0 is the function code for reaching the Root Node (Home Position). The VMS
instructs the caller to dial 0 to reach the Home Position.

• Mailbox Management: By default, 8 is the function code for Mailbox management. The VMS instructs the
extension users (mailbox owner) to dial 8 to reach their mailbox settings.

• Disconnect: By default, # is the function code for disconnecting the call. The VMS instructs the caller to
dial # to disconnect the call.

• Leave Message: By default, 6 is the function code for leaving messages. The VMS instructs the callers to
dial 6 to leave a message for the extension user.

Home Node option for Caller on No Digit Dialed

When the VMS attends the callers, it plays the voice messages to instruct callers, as programmed. It offers the
callers different options and the digits to be dialed for each option. The VMS waits for the caller/extension user to
dial digit for a certain time period

When the caller/extension user fails to dial the digit, the VMS times out and terminates the call, or it can be
configured to take the caller back to the Home Node.

If you want to allow the VMS to take the caller back to the Home node when the caller does not dial any digit,
specify the Home Node option:

• Select Operator, if you want the VMS to take the caller to the Operator when they do not dial any digit.

• Select Disconnect, if you want the VMS to disconnect the call, when the caller does not dial any digit.

• Select Root Node, if you want the VMS to take the caller back to the Root Node in the graph (from which
they originally entered). When the caller is taken to the root node, they will be able to navigate the graph all
over again.

Message Play Options

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 255

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When the VMS transfers a call, it plays different voice messages, informing the caller about the status of the called
party, asking the caller to leave a message. By default, the VMS plays the following messages to You may choose
whether or not the VMS should play the following messages to the caller:

• Call could not be Attended Message: This message is played to the caller when the called party does
not answer the transferred call.

• Called Party Busy Message: This message is played to the caller with the called party is found to be
busy.

• Called Party Not Available Message: This message is played to the caller when the called party does not

• Leave Message: This message is played to the caller. If you disable this option, the VMS will not offer the
caller the option of leaving a message for the extension user

• Message Verification: This message is played to the caller after they have recorded their message. If you
disable this option, the VMS will not give the caller the option of verifying the recorded message.

• If you have completed configuring the VMS General Parameters, click Submit to save changes.

256 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile

The Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile determines how the calls are answered and processed by the VMS. The calls
answered by the VMS may be incoming trunk calls attended by the VMS Auto Attendant or calls made by extension
users to the VMS to access their mailbox.

A Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile consists of:

• A Graph: It is the logical path that the caller/extension user takes within the VMS to reach the desired
destination (person or mailbox). A graph starts from the Root Node and traverses through different nodes
these may be Menu Node, Information Node, Transfer Node, Message Node. At each node the VMS offers
the caller the choice of performing some action like deciding what option to choose (menu node), leaving a
message (message node), accessing information (information node), or reaching an extension number
(transfer node).

The VMS plays voice messages to prompt callers at every step, and the caller/extension user dials single
digit codes to decide which path to take and reach the desired destination. To know more, refer the topic
“Graphs and Nodes”.

You can create 4 different graphs in the VMS, and assign a different graph to each Voice Mail Auto
Attendant Profile.

• System Greetings: It is played to the caller/extension user when the VMS answers the call. System
Greetings are played according to the time of the day, Morning, Afternoon, Evening. By default, the caller/
extension user is played the messages “Good Morning”, “Good Afternoon”, “Good Evening” according to
the time of the day.

You can also record custom message as System Greetings. Refer the topic “Recording Voice Messages”.

• Welcome Message: It is played to the caller when the VMS answers the incoming call according to the
current Time Zone: Working Hours or Non-Working Hours. By default, the welcome message for each time
zone are:

Working Hours: “Welcome! Please dial the extension number Or to dial by name press 7. To leave a
message press 6. To go to operator, press 9. For more options, press 0. To disconnect, press # (hash/
pound).

Non-Working Hours: “Welcome! We are closed due to holiday. To leave a message, press 6. For
Assistance press 9. To disconnect press # (hash/pound).

You can also record custom messages as welcome messages for Working and Non-Working Hours. Refer
the topic “Recording Voice Messages”.

• Directly Route to Root Node: This option takes the caller/extension user directly to the Root Node in the
graph, without playing the System Greeting or Welcome Message. This option can be selected according
to the Time Zone-Working, Break and Non-working Hours. The caller/extension user is taken to the Root
Node in the graph, if the option Route to Root Node is selected for the current Time Zone.

You can create 4 different Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profiles, by changing the values of the parameters described
above.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 257

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Before you begin configuration of the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile, decide how many different Voice Mail Auto
Attendant Profiles you want to create.

For each Profile you want to create, decide:

• the path and options you want to give to external callers and to extension users, and accordingly create
the graphs. Refer “Graphs and Nodes” for instructions.

• the System Greeting you want to play to callers in the morning, afternoon and evening.

• the Welcome Greeting is to be played for Working Hours and Non-Working hours.

• if you want to customize System Greetings or Welcome Messages or any Graph-Nodes messages, and
record the messages. Upload the new voice message files using the embedded FTP server of the VMS
card. “Recording Voice Messages”.

• whether you want the VMS to take the external callers and extension users directly to the Root Node
(without playing the System Greetings or Welcome Message).

For each Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile that you decide to create, give a number from 1 to 4.

Now, you may configure the profiles.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link to expand.

• Click the VMS Configuration sub-link.

• Click the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile sub-link. The Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile page opens.

• Select a Profile number. You may refer to the number you gave to each profile you created.

258 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • For each Profile number,

• select the desired Graph you want to use for this profile. By default, Graph 1 is assigned to all profiles.

• select the number of the Greeting message to be played for the Morning Time, Afternoon Time and
Evening Time. By default, Greeting message 01 (Good Morning), Greeting Message 02 (Good
Afternoon) and Greeting Message 03 (Good Afternoon) are selected as morning, afternoon and
evening greeting messages respectively.

• select the number of the Welcome Message to be played during Working hours and Non-Working
hours.

By default, Welcome Message 01 and 03 are selected for Working and Non-Working hours
respectively.

Welcome Message 01: “Welcome! Please dial the extension number Or to dial by name press 7. To
leave a message press 6. To go to operator, press 9. For more options, press 0. To disconnect, press #
(hash/pound).

Welcome Message 03: “Welcome! We are closed due to holiday. To leave a message, press 6. For
Assistance press 9. To disconnect press # (hash/pound).

• Select the Directly Route to Root Node check box, if you want the VMS to take the caller/extension
user directly to the Root Node in the graph during Working hours and Non-Working hours. By default,
this parameter is disabled in both time zones.

When Directly Route to Root Node is disabled for a time zone, the VMS will play System and Welcome
Greetings to callers and extension users.

• Click Submit to save your profile.

Assigning Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profiles to Extensions

A Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile must be assigned to all extensions types—SLT, DKP, SIP—and to Department
Groups having a mailbox.

The profile assigned to the extension determines how the VMS will answer and process the call from the extension;
what greetings and welcome message will be played to the extension user; whether or not the extension user
(mailbox owner) will be taken to the root node directly.

When an extension user having a mailbox calls the VMS,

• the VMS answers the call.

• according to the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile assigned to the extension, the VMS greets the caller
with the Greeting relevant to the time of the day, plays the Welcome message programmed for the current
Time Zone (Working hours, Non-working hours), and offers the different options as per the graph
assigned.

• If the Route to Root Node is enabled in the Profile for the current Time Zone, the VMS takes the caller
directly to the root node, without playing the greeting and welcome message.

You can assign different Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profiles to different extensions and to Department Groups.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 259

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To assign Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile to extensions, configure the Voice Mail Auto Attendant parameter on
the extensions and Department Groups.

• For SLT extensions, see “Voice Mail Auto Attendant” under “SLT Extensions” for instructions.

• For DKP extensions, see “Voice Mail Auto Attendant” under “DKP Extensions” for instructions.

• For SIP extensions, see “Voice Mail Auto Attendant” under “SIP Extensions” for instructions.

• For Department groups, see the feature description for “Department Call” for instructions.

Assigning Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profiles to Trunks

A Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile must be assigned to trunks (CO, Mobile, SIP) if you want to use the VMS as
Auto Attendant on the trunk. For this, you must

• first select Voice Mail Auto Attendant as the destination for Routing Incoming Calls during the Day and
Night.
• select a Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile for the trunk.

When Voice Mail Auto Attendant is enabled on a trunk,

• the VMS answers the external incoming call landing on the trunk.

• According to the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile assigned to the trunk, the VMS greets the caller with the
Greeting relevant to the time of the day, plays the Welcome message programmed for the current Time
Zone (working hours, non-working hours), and offers the different options as per the graph assigned in the
Voice Mail Auto Attendant profile.

• If the Directly Route to Root Node is enabled in the Profile for the current Time Zone (working hours, non-
working hours), the VMS takes the caller directly to the root node, without playing the greeting and
welcome message.

You can assign different Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profiles (Graph number, Greetings and Welcome Message,
Directly Route to Root Node option) to different trunks.

To assign Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile to trunks, go to the desired trunk port type, “CO Trunks”, “Mobile
Trunks”, “SIP Trunks”, under Basic Settings.

• Configure the parameter Route Incoming Calls.

• Select Voice Mail Auto Attendant as destination for incoming calls during the Day and or Night, as
desired.

• Configure the Voice Mail Auto Attendant parameter.

• Select the auto attendant profile number as Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile number.

See also “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)”.

260 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Distribution List

A Distribution List enables extension users to send the same message to a group of extensions at the same time.

Any extension with a mailbox can be included in a Distribution List. You can create five Distribution Lists of 24
members each.

How to configure
To configure Distribution Lists, decide which mailbox owners to be included in a list.

Decide how many different distribution lists you wish to create.

It would be more helpful if you also gave a name to the distribution list, for example, sales, marketing, customer
care, etc.

Draw a two-column table on a piece of paper for each Distribution List. On one column, write the number of the
member in serial order from (001 up to 099). You may write the numbers corresponding to the number of members
you wish to include in this list.

Now, in the next column, for each member number, write the extension number (this is the access code you have
assigned to the extension).

Distribution List for Marketing

Distribution
Members
List 1

01

02

03

010

Distribution list for Customer Care

Distribution
Members
List 2

01

02

03

08

Similarly, create as many distribution lists as you desired.

To configure Distribution List

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 261

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link to expand.

• Click the VMS Configuration sub-link.

• Click the Distribution List link.

• Now, refer to the Distribution list(s) you created on paper, and enter the same information in the
appropriate fields on this page.

• Click Submit to save changes.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

262 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Graphs and Nodes

A Graph is a logical road map within the VMS which enables callers to easily navigate through the system and
reach the desired destination (person in an organization) by following voice prompts and dialing appropriate digits.

A Node is a logical stopover point in a graph where some activity like making a decision, leaving a message,
accessing information, etc. is made.

A Graph is thus a logical and meaningful association of different nodes. A graph initiates from the ‘Root Node’ and
traverses through different nodes.

The following figure is a logical representation of a simple graph with 6 nodes:

Six-node Graph
Root Node
1

‘1’
2
‘5’
‘2’
Message ‘4’ 6
Node ‘3’
3 Transfer
5 Node
4
Information Transfer
Node Node
Transfer
Node

Callers must dial appropriate digits while traversing through the graph to reach the desired destination. Single digit
codes are used to navigate within a graph.

While traversing through the graph, the VMS uses voice messages to prompt callers at every step so as to enable
them to reach the desired destination.

Let us take the example of the 6-node graph illustrated above to understand graphs and nodes. In this 6-node
graph, the caller reaches the Root Node by dialing the digit '0'. The Root Node is the entry point of the graph.

At the Root Node, the VMS offers the caller different options like leaving a message, accessing Company
information, have the call transferred to a mailbox, or a particular extension, operator, or department.

For each option, the VMS prompts the caller to dial a particular digit. Each option takes the caller to a particular
node.
• Dialing '1' at the Root Node takes the caller to the Message Node.
• Dialing '2' at the Root Node takes the caller to the Information Node.
• Dialing '3', '4' or '5' at the Root Node will take the caller to the Transfer Node.

The caller decides which path to take and dials the single digit code for the desired path announced by the VMS in
the voice prompt.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 263

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The VMS offers four types of nodes:
• Menu Node
• Transfer Node
• Message Node
• Information Node

Each node has a specific function, as described below.

Each node has a voice file (a prompt of maximum 60 seconds) attached to it. When the caller traverses through the
graph, at each node the VMS plays the prompt attached to it. The VMS also provides you the flexibility to program
a prompt of your choice at each node. You can also change the digit to be dialed to traverse from one node to the
other.

Menu Node
This node is the point in the graph, at which the VMS presents the callers with different Options in the voice prompt.
The caller is given a menu to select from, hence the name ‘Menu Node’. The caller must choose an option offered
in the voice prompt to navigate through the graph further.

There may be several menu nodes in a graph. In this sense, the Root Node is the first Menu node in a graph (see
6-node graph).

A different voice prompt can be recorded and played to the caller for each Menu node.

At a menu node, a caller can be offered 9 different options. The digits 1 to 9 can be programmed for the selecting
the options. The caller dials the digit for the desired option to traverse from one node to another.

Transfer Node
This node is a point in the graph from where the VMS takes the caller to a specific extension. Each transfer node is
linked to an extension. When a caller reaches the transfer node, the VMS transfers the call to the destination
extension which is assigned to the transfer node.

Thus, the transfer node can be used for allowing callers to reach an extension of a department group, a help line,
an information desk, etc.

No voice prompt is played to the caller at the Transfer node. The VMS simply transfers the call to the extension
linked to the node.

Transfer node can be reached only from a Menu node. A graph may terminate at the Transfer node.

Message Node
This is a point in the graph at which the VMS allows the caller to leave a message. Each message node is linked to
a mailbox. When the caller reaches the Message node, the VMS offers the caller the options: i) leave (i.e. record) a
message, ii) go to Home Position (root node), or iii) disconnect the call.

When the caller chooses the option to leave a message, the VMS transfers the call to the mailbox linked to the
Message node, where the caller can leave the message. The message node is useful to businesses that want to
use interactive voice response for taking orders, registering complaints, feedback, etc. Customers can place
orders, have their complaint registered, leave special request messages.

A different voice prompt can be recorded and played to the caller for each Message node.

264 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Message node can be reached only from a Menu node. Graph may be terminated at the message node.

Information Node
The Information node is a point in the graph at which the VMS delivers information to the caller. When the caller
reaches the Information node, the VMS plays the

The Information node is a useful when you want to provide information related to the company/organization,
company profile, products, new launches, distribution network, etc.

At information node, the caller has two options: i) to go to Home Position (Root Node), or ii) to disconnect.

The Information node can be reached only from a Menu node. A graph can be terminated at the Information node.

A different voice prompt can be recorded for each information node.

Illustrated below is an example of a more complex graph, with 22 nodes.

Twenty-two-node Graph:
1 Root
Node

‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’

Menu Menu
Node Node
2 4

‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’

5
11
Information 6 7 Information 13 Message
Node Node Message 12
Node
Information Node
Node Menu Message
Node Node
3

‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’

Menu Menu
Node Node Menu
8 9 Node
10

‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’

14
16 20
15 17
Transfer Transfer 18
19
22
21
Node Transfer Node Transfer Transfer
Transfer Transfer Transfer
Node Node Transfer Node
Node Node Node
Node

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 265

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A graph initiates from the ‘Root Node’ and traverses through many menu nodes. It may terminate at an information
node or a message node or a transfer node, but never at a menu node.

Configuring Graphs using Jeeves

You can create up to 4 different graphs in the VMS. Each graph can have maximum of 64 nodes.

Each node has an audio file (containing a voice message of a maximum of 60 seconds) attached to it.

The voice message is played to the When the caller traverses through the graph, at each node the VMS plays the
prompt attached to it. For example, at menu node VMS plays the prompt related to menu options. At information
node, the VMS plays the information prompt. At transfer node since no prompt is required, the VMS simply
transfers the call to the designated destination. You can program the prompt of your choice at each node.

A graph forms the basis of the “Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile”. The Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile
determines how calls to the VMS72 will be answered and processed by the VMS, on the basis of the type of graph
assigned to it, and the greeting and welcome messages programmed in it.

When creating a Graph, consider the following points:

• Graph should be very simple to understand and easy to traverse.

• Your graph should have optimum number of nodes, neither too few nor too many.

• While you can offer up to nine different options to the callers at each menu node, we recommend that you
offer not more than 4 options at the menu node, because the callers might forget the first option by the
time they have finished listening to the entire prompt.

• Make sure your graph does not confuse the callers or makes them lose their patience.

• Decide the Graph for extension users having mailbox and the graph for external callers who will be
answered by the VMS.

Decide a simple and easy flow to access the maximum number of extensions—persons and services—in your
organization, and draw a graph.

Example: Here is an example to help you understand how to create a graph:

Prudent Investment is a wealth management company, offering individual investors financial solutions:
• stock broking
• insurance
• mutual fund advisory

The company wants to reinforce its brand promise, Your Interest First.

It wants to use Voice Mail to enhance customer experience and project its image as a company that puts the clients
best interest first. The company wants to use Voice Mail to:
• respond to existing and potential clients 24x7.
• provide information about the Company, service offerings, new retirement plans, hot stock tips, and mutual
funds.

72. These may be incoming trunk calls answered by the VMS Auto Attendant, or calls made by extension users to the VMS to access
their mailbox.

266 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • respond to existing and new (potential clients) separately.
• provide direct access to order booking and complaint registration.

The graph for Prudent Investment would be as shown below:

Welcom
Message (MN)

Existing New
Customer Customer
(MN) (MN)

Representative Insurance
for Complaints (IN)
(TN) Information on
Services Provided
Stock Mutual (IN)
Market Funds
(IN) (IN)
Representative
(IN)

Information
on Insurance
Representative (TN)
for Insurance
Representative (TN)
for Stock booking Information
on Shares Information
(TN) Representative
(TN) on Mutual Funds
for Mutual Funds
(TN)
(TN)

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 267

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To configure Graphs,

• Click the Graphs link under VMS Configuration.

• The page of Graph 1 opens. To select a graph number, you may click the tab.

• A graph has maximum 64 nodes. For each Node Number, select the Node Type.

• Select Menu as Node Type if you want to give more options to the caller/extension user at this point in
the graph. Doing so, the field 'Extension Number' will become un-editable. The fields 'Destination Node
for the Digits' will become editable.

In the Destination Node for the Digits fields, assign destination nodes to which you want the VMS to
take the caller/extension user on pressing the digits 1 to 9 from the Menu node.

By default, the destination node number is '00' for all the digits at menu node. To de-assign a
destination node for a particular digit at menu node, enter '00' for that digit.

• Select Information as Node Type, if you want to give some information to the caller/extension user.
Doing so, all 'Extension number' and 'Destination Node for the Digits' will become un-editable.

• Select Message as Node Type, if you want to give the caller/extension user the option of leaving a
message at this point in the graph. Doing so, the fields 'Destination Node for the Digits' will become un-
editable.

268 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 In the Extension Number field, enter the number of the extension whose mailbox is to be assigned to
the Message node.

• Select Transfer as Node Type, if you want give the caller/extension user the option of reaching the
desired extension of ETERNITY. Doing so, the fields 'Destination Node for the Digits' will become un-
editable.

In the Extension Number field, enter the number of the extension to which the call is to be transferred
from this node.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 269

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SMTP Settings
You can use the VMS to send emails for the following functions:
• notification to the extension users about the arrival of new messages (Refer Email based Notification).
• System Alerts to the System Engineer (USB memory full).

For email transmission, the VMS uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). If you intend to use Email Based
Notification and send System Alerts to the System Engineer, you must:
• configure the parameter Message Wait Notification via Email73 in the VMS settings of the extension.
• configure the parameter System Alerts through Email and SE Email ID in the VMS General Parameters.
• configure the SMTP Settings.

To configure SMTP Settings,

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Enter Full Programming Access mode.

• Click the link VMS Configuration.

• Click the link SMTP Settings to open the page.

• Configure the SMTP parameters:

73. You can also have the new voice message mailed as an attachment with the message wait notification.

270 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Outgoing Mail Configuration (SMTP)

• Requires Authentication?: Select 'Yes' if SMTP server requires authentication for the e-mail service.
By default, it is set to 'No'.

If you enable Requires Authentication, you must also enter the User ID and Password.

• Enable Secure Socket Layer (SSL)?: Select 'Yes' to enable SSL, if all data to the SMTP server are to
be transmitted over secure layer. By default, it is set to 'No'.

• Display Name: Enter the name to be displayed to the mail recipient in this field. The Display Name
may consist of up to 24 characters (maximum). By default, this field is blank.

• E-mail ID: Enter the Email ID provided by your SMTP server in this field. This e-mail ID will appear to
recipients as the originator of the e-mail. The e-mail ID may consist of 64 characters (maximum). By
default, it is blank.

• User ID: Enter the User ID provided the SMTP server. User ID is required if you have enabled
Requires Authentication? The User ID may consist of a maximum 40 characters. By default, the field is
blank.

• Password: Enter the Password provided by the SMTP server. The User Password can be of maximum
24 characters. By default, it is blank.

• SMTP Server Address: Enter the SMTP Server Address here. The SMTP Server Address may have a
maximum of 46 characters. By default, this field is blank.

• SMTP Server Port: Enter the SMTP Server Port Service Provider in this field. The valid Port values
are: 25, 587, 465 or in the range of 1024 to 65535. By default, SMTP Server Port is 25.

Timers

• Connection Timeout Interval: This is the time duration for which the VMS will wait for a response
from the SMTP server. You may change the Connection Timeout Interval timer, if required. The range
of Connection Timeout Interval timer is 01 to 99 seconds. By default, it is set to 60 seconds.

• Reconnection Interval: This is the time duration for which the VMS will wait before attempting to
reconnect with the SMTP server. You may change the Reconnection Interval timer, if required. Range
of Reconnection Interval timer is 01 to 10 seconds. By default, it is set to 10 seconds.

• Click Submit to save SMTP settings.

Test SMTP Settings

• Click the button 'Click to Test SMTP’ to check if the SMTP Parameters have been configured
correctly.

When you click this button, the alert message will appear: "Testing SMTP can take up to 99 seconds.
Would you like to continue?" Click 'OK' button.

The message "Please refresh the web browser after few seconds to check the test mail status" will
appear. Click 'OK' button.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 271

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Refresh the web browser after a few seconds. The Test Result will be displayed in 'Test Status' field.

• Test Status: Any one of the results listed below may appear in this field:
Test Status Message Description
"SMTP Server Connection Not Established" When connection to SMTP server fails due to any
reason.
"Login to SMTP Server Failed" When connection to SMTP server is established
but login to SMTP server fails due to any reason.
"Sending Test Mail Failed" When connection to SMTP has been established
successfully but there is no acknowledgement for
the test mail sent.
"Test Mail Sent Successfully" When acknowledgement for the test mail sent to
SMTP server received successfully.

272 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Recording Voice Messages

The VMS of ETERNITY NE supports voice messages for different functions, which are broadly classified as:

• System Greetings: These are voice messages played when a new call lands on the VMS. Callers are
greeted according to the time of the day - morning, afternoon, evening (Time Zone). A different System
Greeting can also be played to callers on holidays.

System Greetings are played to callers when the VMS Auto Attendant feature is enabled on trunks.

• Mailbox Greetings: These messages are played to callers when they are diverted to the extension user’s
mailbox to leave a message. Extension users can record personal mailbox greeting messages of their
choice.

• Welcome Messages: These are voice guidance messages played to the callers who call the VMS.
Welcome messages help the callers navigate through the VMS (graph and its nodes). Welcome messages
are played according to the time of the day, i.e. the Time Zone programmed in the system.

Welcome Messages are played to callers when the VMS Auto Attendant feature is enabled on trunks.

• Graph-Node Messages: These are voice guidance messages that are played to help the caller take some
action once they have entered the VMS (graph). Refer the topic “Graphs and Nodes” to know more.

• Prompts/Responses: These are voice guidance messages that are played to the caller in response to the
action taken (i.e. when the caller dials a digit).

For all of these message types, audio files containing the appropriate recorded voice guidance messages are
loaded in the configuration of the VMS Card. The VMS plays the messages related to the function it is performing.

For example, if Multi-stage DID (the VMS Auto Attendant feature) is enabled on a trunk, the VMS plays messages
relevant to the Multi-level DID profile programmed for the current Time Zone. This helps the caller navigate through
the graph and nodes assigned to the Multi-level DID Profile for the Time Zone. At each node, the VMS plays the
related message, as explained below:

• The VMS plays the default System Greeting and Welcome message to the caller according to the time of
the day, e.g.: “Good Morning”. “Welcome. Please dial the extension number or to dial by name, press 7. To
leave a message, press 6. To go to Operator, press 9. For more options, press 0. To disconnect, press #”.

• As the caller navigates, the VMS plays the pre-recorded voice messages related to the particular node the
caller has reached. If the caller dials 6 to leave a message, the VMS takes the caller to the message node,
and plays voice message for this node, e.g.: “Dial 1 to leave a message, ‘2’ to disconnect, ‘0’ to go to
Home Position”.

• If the caller dials 1 to leave a message, the VMS plays the prompt: “Record your Message after the beep
and press any digit to end”.

• After the caller has recorded the message and dialed a digit, the VMS plays back the recorded message:
“The message you recorded is....”

• The VMS responds with the option of message verification: “To re-record the message, press 1, to confirm
press 2.”

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 273

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If the caller dials 2 to confirm the recorded message, the VMS prompts the caller: “Dial 1 to disconnect, ‘0’
to go to Home Position’.

• If the caller fails to dial any digit, and the call is timed out, the VMS ends the call with the response: “Thank
you your call”.

In the same way, when you set a voice guided alarm, the VMS plays the alarm-related voice prompts, like: “Enter
the time, HH MM in twenty four hour format”. Thus, for every voice mail related function or feature, the VMS plays
the appropriate voice message.

The VMS gives you the option of either using the default voice guidance messages loaded in the VMS Card
configuration, or recording custom messages that better suit your purpose.

All VMS default voice messages are in English only. If you want, you may record voice messages in your local
language.

No special programming is required for using the default voice messages. However, if you want to use custom
messages, you must first:
• record the message (Greetings, Welcome Messages, Graph Node messages, Voice Guidance prompt).
• upload the new recorded message file in the VMS configuration.

Recording Voice Messages

When you record messages of your choice, consider these important points:

• Each voice message file has a unique file name, e.g.: ‘Thankyou.wav’ containing the message “Thank you
for your call”; ‘Extbusy.wav’ containing the message “The person you called is busy”.

• The voice message file is tagged with a unique number, referred to a Prompt Number, e.g. ‘Thankyou.wav’
is tagged with the prompt number 108, ‘Extbusy.wav’ is tagged with the prompt number 100.

The complete list of voice messages by their prompt numbers and file names is provided at the end of this
topic.

• There are two ways to record custom voice messages. You may either:

1. record voice messages using a Telephone connected to ETERNITY NE,

or
2. record voice messages from any other source, and upload the audio files of the Voice messages on to
the VMS configuration files, from a computer.

You may upload the files using the embedded FTP server of the VMS Card.

• Voice messages are in WAV format, so the custom messages must also be in the same format.

• When you record voice messages from a Telephone, the VMS stores the message you record in the
required file format, with its unique file name and prompt number. All you need to do is define the
Prompt Number when you record your message.

• When you record voice messages from any other source and upload the them in the VMS configuration
files, make sure that the audio files are recorded in .wav file format, with the attributes listed below:
• Bit Rate: 128 kbps
• Audio Sample Size: 16 bit

274 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Channels: 1 (mono)
• Audio Sample Rate: 8 KHz
• Audio Format: PCM

The audio file of the custom message you have recorded must have the same unique file name as the
existing default audio file.

• Voice Messages can be recorded and played back from the System Administrator mode.

• Extension users can record their personal mailbox greetings on their own. Refer the topic “Mailbox
Settings” to know more.

Recording Voice Messages using a Telephone

• Lift the receiver of any SLT or DKP extension phone connected to the ETERNITY.

• Enter SA mode.

Recording System Greeting Message

To record custom System Greeting Message, dial:

• 1072-304-System Greeting Number

Where,
System Greeting Number is 01 to 12
The default System Greeting file names and numbers are:

System Greeting
Filename Prompts/ Response
Number
01 SysGrt01.wav "Good Morning"
02 SysGrt02.wav "Good Afternoon"
03 SysGrt03.wav "Good Evening"
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12

Only three System Greeting files are programmed. Greeting number 04 to 12 are blank. You may record
your custom greetings on any of these files.

• The VMS will prompt you to start recording your messages after the beep and press # (hash/pound) sign
to indicate end of message.
• Follow VMS prompt to record your message.

To check the System Greeting Message you recorded, dial:

• 1072-305-System Greeting Number
• The VMS will playback your message.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 275

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Recording Welcome Message
To record custom Welcome Message, dial:
• 1072-306-Welcome Message Number
Welcome Message Number is 01 to 12
The default Welcome Message file names and numbers are:

Number Filename Prompts/ Response

Welcome! Please dial the extension number Or to dial by name press 7.
01 Welmsg01.wav To leave message, press 6. To go to operator, press 9. For more options,
press 0. To disconnect, press # (hash).
Welcome! We are closed at this moment. To leave message, press 6. For
02 Welmsg02.wav
Assistance, press 9. To disconnect, press # (hash).
Welcome! We are closed due to holiday. To leave message, press 6. For
03 Welmsg03.wav
Assistance, press 9. To disconnect, press # (hash).
Welmsg04.wav Welcome! Please dial the room number. To leave message for the guest,
04
(Hotel) press 6. To go to operator, press 9. To disconnect, press # (hash).
Welcome! We are closed at this moment. Please press 9 for assistance or
05 Welmsg05.wav
press # (hash) to disconnect.
Welcome! We are closed due to holiday. Please press 9 for assistance or
06 Welmsg06.wav
press # (hash) to disconnect.
Welcome! Please dial the extension number Or to dial by name press 7.
07 Welmsg07.wav To leave message, press 6. To go to operator, press 0. For more options,
press 9. To disconnect, press # (pound).
Welcome! We are closed at this moment. To leave message, press 6. For
08 Welmsg08.wav
assistance, press 0. To disconnect, # (pound).
Welcome! We are closed due to holiday. To leave message, press 6. For
09 Welmsg09.wav
assistance, press 0. To disconnect, # (pound).
Welmsg10.wav Welcome! Please dial the room number. To leave message for the guest,
10
(Hotel) press 6. To go to operator, press 0. To disconnect, # (pound).
Welcome! We are closed at this moment. Please press 0 for assistance or
11 Welmsg11.wav
press # (pound) to disconnect.
Welcome! We are closed due to holiday. Please press 0 for assistance or
12 Welmsg12.wav
press # (pound) to disconnect.

• The VMS will prompt you to start recording your messages after the beep and press # (hash/pound sign)
to indicate end of message.

• Follow VMS prompt to record your message.

To check the recorded Welcome Message, dial:

• 1072-307-Welcome Message Number
• The VMS will playback the message you recorded.

Recording Mailbox Greeting for an Extension

To record Mailbox Greeting for a time zone for an extension’s mailbox, dial:
• 1072-308-Extension-Timezone Index
Where,
Extension is the number of the extension
Time zone Index is
1 for Working Hours

276 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2 for Break Hours
3 for Non-Working Hours
• The VMS will prompt you to start recording your messages after the beep and press # (hash/pound sign)
to indicate end of message.
Follow VMS prompt to record your message.

To check Mailbox Greeting you recorded for a time zone for an extension’s mailbox, dial:
• 1072-309-Extension-Timezone Index
• The VMS will playback the message you recorded.

Recording Graph-Node Messages

To record custom Voice Prompt for a node in a graph, dial:
• 1072-302-Graph-node
Where,
Graph is the number of the graph in which the Voice Prompt is to be played, from 1 to 4.
Node is the number of the node to which the Voice Prompt is to be attached, from 01 to 64.

• The VMS will prompt you to start recording your messages after the beep and press # (hash/pound sign)
to indicate end of message.

• Follow VMS prompt to record your message.

To check the Voice Prompt you recorded for a node in a graph, dial:
• 1072-303-Graph-node
• The VMS will playback the message you recorded.

Recording Voice Guidance Messages

To record Voice Guidance messages, dial:

• 1072-312-Prompt Number
Where,
Prompt Number is 001 to 230. Refer the table below for a complete list of Voice Guidance Message by
their numbers and file names.

• The VMS will prompt you to start recording your messages after the beep and press # (hash/pound sign)
to indicate end of message.
• Follow VMS prompt to record your message.

To playback the recorded messages, dial:

• 1072-313-Prompt Number
• The VMS will playback the message you recorded.

• If you have finished recording, exit SA mode.

Uploading Custom Voice Messages

As mentioned earlier, when you record voice messages from an external source, make sure that

• The audio file is recorded in the prescribed format (.wav) and attributes.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 277

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The audio file of the custom message you have recorded has the same unique file name as the existing
default audio file.

You may recall that each voice message file has a unique file name, and is tagged with a unique Prompt
Number. For example: You have customized the thank you messages as: “Thank you for calling” (default
message: Thank you for your call). Make sure that the new message is saved with the same unique file
name ‘Thankyou.wav’.

• The ETERNITY is connected to a computer (standalone or LAN).

You can upload Custom Voice Messages using Windows FTP or FireFTP. Make sure FireFTP Add-on is installed
in your browser.

Uploading Custom Voice Messages using Windows FTP

1. Click My Computer.

2. Type the current IP Address of the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE in the Address bar as ftp://
192.168.1.101

3. Click Go or Press Enter key on your keyboard.

278 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. The Log on as window of the FTP server opens.

5. In the Password field, enter the SE password (default 1234) and click the Log On button.

6. On successful login, the FTP window will open. You will see the different Configuration folders in this
window.

• Click the VMS folder.

• Click the VMSCard folder.

• Now click the System_Data sub-folder in the VMSCard folder.

The following folders appear in this window.

• Mailbox_Messages
• Station_Names
• System_Configuration
• System_Greetings
• System_Prompts_Responses
• System_Welcome_Messages

• Click the desired folder.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 279

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For example, to upload greeting messages, click System Greetings folder; to upload prompts/responses,
open System Prompts and Responses folder.

• The existing audio files, with their unique names and .wav extension appear.

• Go to the location (CD, Pen Drive or Local disk) where you have stored the custom voice message(s).

• Copy the custom message file, e.g. click to copy ‘Thankyou.wav’.

• Return to the FTP window.

• Click the desired folder. The Thank you message is a response, so open the System Prompts and
Responses folder.
Right click, and paste the file you copied in the System Prompts and Responses folder.

As you are pasting a file with the same file name, you will be prompted if you want to replace the existing
file. Click OK.

The progress of file transfer will appear on your screen.

• Follow the same procedure to copy other audio files.

• Close the FTP window after the files are transferred.

For instructions on uploading voice messages using FireFTP, see “Configuration Upload”.

280 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Recording Extension Names

The VMS can be configured to announce the extension user’s name to caller when transferring the call to the
extension. To do this, you must

• enable Announce Name on the extension.

• record the extension user’s name as Station Name.

Announce Name can be enabled on all extension types, SLT, DKP, SIP extensions, under the Voice Mail Auto
Attendant parameters of extensions. For instructions see “SLT Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”, “SIP Extensions”
under Basic Settings.

Station Names can be recorded by the System Administrator as well as by the extension users. The instructions
provided here are for the System Administrator only. Instructions for extension users may be found under the topic
“Mailbox Settings”.

Recording Station Names using a Telephone

• Lift the receiver of any SLT extension or DKP/Extended IP Phone connected to the ETERNITY NE.

• Enter SA mode.

• 1072-310-Extension Access Code

Where,
Extension Access Code is the extension number assigned to the SLT, DKP, SIP extension, Department
Group on which you have enabled Announce Name.

• The VMS will prompt you to start recording the Station Name after the beep and press # (hash/pound) sign
to indicate end of message.

• Follow VMS prompt to record your message.

To check the Station Name you recorded, dial:

• 1072-311-Extension Access Code

• The VMS will playback the name you recorded.

As you record the names of each extension, the VMS will create audio files with unique file names, ‘stn001.wav’,
‘stn002.wav’, etc. These files are stored in the Station_Names sub-folder in the VMSCard configuration folder.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 281

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 282 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 7 Features and Facilities

Abbreviated Dialing

What's this?
Abbreviated Dialing is the use of Short Codes (abbreviated numbers), typically 2-3 digits, to dial out long-digit
numbers. It is also referred to as Memory Dialing.

Abbreviated Dialing allows you to quickly and easily dial frequently called, long-digit numbers.

This feature requires you to store the frequently called, long-digit numbers74 and their corresponding short codes in
special lists, known as 'directories'. These directories may be 'personal' or 'global'.

ETERNITY NE supports two types of Abbreviated Dialing based on the type of directory used: Personal
Abbreviated Dialing and Global Abbreviated Dialing.

Personal Abbreviated Dialing

This variation of Abbreviated Dialing makes use of the Personal Directory.

Personal Directories can be configured and assigned to groups of extensions. The use of Personal Directories is
limited to the extensions to which they are assigned.

A single personal directory accommodates 25 numbers. Each number may be up to 16 digits long. A personal
directory has Index numbers from 01 to 25 against which the frequently dialed telephone numbers are stored along
with their corresponding names and Trunk Access Code (TAC).

As many as 50 different personal directories, numbered from 01 to 50 can be created and assigned to SLT and
DKP extensions and Extended IP phone extensions.

With a personal directory assigned to an extension, the extension user simply dials out the Feature Access Code
for Abbreviated Dialing and the Index Number at which the number to be dialed is stored in the personal directory of
the extension.

For example: personal directory number 02 is assigned to extension 201. The number 02652630555 is stored at
Index number 16 of this directory. The user of extension 201 can call this number by simply dialing '8' (feature
access code) followed by '16' (the index number).

74. These may be numbers of your branch offices, your clients, as also numbers of emergency services such as fire, police.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 283

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ETERNITY NE will automatically dial out the number using the Trunk Access Code (TAC) specified for this number
in the personal directory.


Each extension can access only the personal directory assigned to it.

Global Abbreviated Dialing

This variation of Abbreviated Dialing makes use of a system-wide list of numbers stored in the memory of the
ETERNITY NE, referred to as the Global Directory.

Being a system-wide list, the Global Directory can be accessed by any extension connected to the ETERNITY NE.

The Global Directory has the capacity to store up to 900 numbers of a maximum of 16 digits each. The Global
Directory is divided into three parts:

• Part 1 - contains Memory Location codes 100 to 799.

• Part 2 - contains Memory Location codes 800 to 899.

• Part 3 - contains Memory Location codes 900 to 999.

The Global Directory has Memory Location codes starting from 100 to 999. The telephone numbers along with their
corresponding names are stored against Memory Location codes.

Whenever an extension user of ETERNITY NE wants to use Global Abbreviated Dialing, all that the user needs to
do is dial the feature access code ('8' or '6') and the Memory Location code at which the desired number is stored.

For example: the number 02652630566 is stored at Memory Location 102 of the Global Directory. Now, extension
users of ETERNITY can call this number by simply dialing the '8' or '6' (feature access code for Abbreviated
Dialing) followed by '102' (Memory Location code at which the desired number, 02652630566, is stored).

The ETERNITY NE will dial out the number using any of the trunks selected for Routing Global Directory’s
numbers.

• Extensions can use Global Abbreviated Dialing only if this feature is included in the “Class of Service
(COS)” allowed to them.

• Further, an extension can access only that part of the Global Directory which is allowed to it in the CoS.
For instance, if extension 201 is allowed Global Directory Part 1 in its CoS, the user of extension 201
can dial out only those numbers contained in Global Directory Part 1.

• Extensions must be assigned all three parts of the directory in their Class of Service to be able to
access the entire Global Directory. By default, only Global Directory Part 1 is included in the CoS of all
extensions. Therefore, all extension users can dial numbers stored in Global Directory Part 1.

• When an extension user dials a number stored in Global Directory Part 2 or Part 3, the system checks
for Class of Service and Call Budget.

• When an extension user dials an abbreviated number from the Personal Directory, the system first
checks the outgoing trunk and Toll Control Level (Call Privilege) of that extension and then dials out the
number.

284 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Abbreviated Dialing forms the basis of two other features of the ETERNITY NE: “Dialed Number
Directory” and “Quick Dial”.

How to configure
For both Personal and Global Abbreviated Dialing to work, the System Engineer must:

1. Configure the Personal Directories and the Global Directory.

2. Assign Personal Directory to the desired extensions, which may be SLT, DKP, and SIP extensions.

3. Enable Global Directory Part 1, Part 2, or Part 3 as desired in the Class of Service allowed to the
extensions.

It is possible for extension users to configure their Personal Directories using their own phones.

It is also possible for DKP and Extended IP Phone users to add, delete and edit contacts in Global Directory Part 1
from their extension phones. For this, Global Directory Part 1 must be allowed in their CoS by the System Engineer.

Preparing Numbers Lists for Personal and Global Directories

In consultation with the Extension Users, the System Engineer may:

• Determine the number of personal directories that need to be configured.

• Make a list of numbers frequently dialed by the extension.

• Ask the extension users the numbers they would like to be included in the personal directory of their
extension.

• Make separate lists of numbers along with their corresponding names and trunk access codes, for each
personal directory. You may draw four-column tables on paper and enter the Numbers and corresponding
names and trunk access codes against each Index number. For example:

Personal Directory 01

Index No. Number Name TAC

: : : :

: : : :

25

Personal Directory 02

Index No. Number Name TAC

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 285

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index No. Number Name TAC

: : : :

: : : :

25

• Compile the numbers to be included in the Global Directory. Numbers that are commonly dialed by all
extensions can be included in the Global Directory.

• Draw a four-column table on paper and enter the telephone numbers along with their names, and the
outgoing trunks to route the call. For example:

Global Directory

Memory Location Number Name

100

101

: : :

: : :

999

• Prepare the Global Directory keeping in mind that is divided into three parts: Part 1 (100 to 799), Part 2
(800 to 899), and Part 3 (900 to 999). As Part 1 is allowed to all extensions in their default CoS, ensure that
numbers to be allowed to all extensions are included in this part of the directory.

You may assign the same personal directory to more than one extension.

Configuring Personal Directory

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the Abbreviated Dialing link.

286 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Personal Directory link the under Abbreviated Dialing to open the page.

Personal Directory 1 appears on this page. Against each Index Number from 01 to 25,

• Enter the contact’s Number you wish to store. The number may consist of 16 digits (maximum).

• Enter the contact Name against the Number. The Name may contain up to 12 characters (maximum).

• Select the trunk access code TAC, as required. Default: 0.

• Click Submit to save the entries.

• To configure another Directory, click the personal directory number tab 02 to 25.

• Follow the same steps as described above to configure each Personal Directory.

Keep a print out of each personal directory for your records. This will also help you take care of overlaps
and include some of the numbers that are dialed by all users in the Global Directory instead of the
Personal Directory.

After you have configured the Personal Directories, assign a personal directory to each extension. The extension
may be an SLT or DKP or SIP extension.

To assign Personal Directory to SLT extensions,

• Click the Basic Settings link.

• Click the link SLT Extensions to open the page.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 287

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the more ... link to expand options.

288 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select the Personal Directory number to be assigned to the SLT extension from the list box. For example,
to assign Personal Directory 02 to SLT 201, select '02'.

• Click Submit to save changes.

• To assign Personal Directory to another SLT, click the tab of the desired SLT and follow the same steps as
described above to assign the Personal Directory.

To assign Personal Directory to a DKP extension,

• Click the link DKP Extensions under Basic Settings.

• Click the more .... link to expand options.

• Select the Personal Directory number to be assigned to the DKP from the list box.

• Click Submit to save changes.

To assign Personal Directory to a SIP extension,

• Click the link SIP Extensions under Basic Settings.

• Click the more .... link to expand options.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 289

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select the Personal Directory number to be assigned to the SIP Extension from the list box.

• Click Submit to save.

Configuring Global Directory

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

290 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Global Directory link under Abbreviated Dialing.

The table for the entries 100 to 199 appear on this page. Against each Index number,

• Enter the contact’s Number you wish to store. The number may consist of 16 digits (maximum).

• Enter the contact Name against the Number. The Name may contain up to 12 characters (maximum).

• To configure more numbers, click the next tabs 200-299, 300-399, 400-499, 500-99, and so on. Follow the
same steps as described above.

• Select the trunks to be used for routing the numbers of the Global Directory dialed out by extensions.

Double click the Route Global Directory’s numbers using Trunks field.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 291

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A multiple selection box appears.

• To select trunks, place your cursor on the desired trunk listed on the left box and click the Select>> button.
listed on the left box.

• You may change the sequence of the trunks using the Up and Down buttons on the right display box.

• You may enable Rotation, if you have selected more than one trunk.

• Click the OK button.

• If you want to apply the Least Cost Routing logic on the trunks, select the desired LCR type from the list
box: Time based, Number based, Time+Number based, Service Provider based. See “Least Cost Routing
(LCR)” to know more.

• Click Submit to save your entries in the Global Directory.

• Now, enable Global Directory in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the extensions. To do this,

• Click the Basic Settings link.

• Click the link of the extension type:

• “SLT Extensions”
• “DKP Extensions”
• “SIP Extensions”

• On the respective extension page, click “Class of Service (COS)” to expand options.

Enable the part of the Global Directory you want to assign to the extension in its Class of Service.

By default, Global Directory Part 1 is allowed to all extensions in their CoS.

• Click Submit to save changes.

292 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration of Personal Directory by Extension Users
Extension users can configure their own Personal Directories using their extension phones. The personal directory
may be configured using EON, the Matrix Extended IP Phone.

You may also configure the Personal Directory using an SLT, but you will not be able to enter Names of contacts in
the Directory.

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Press DSS Key assigned to Personal Directory (if programmed).

OR

• Dial 1071.
• Enter Personal Memory Index (001 to 025)
• Enter Number of the contact (max. 16 digits).
• Press 'Enter' key.
• Enter Name of the contact.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• Enter Trunk Access Code.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get confirmation tone and the message on your phone's display.

For SLT Users

• Pick up handset.
• Dial 1071.
• Dial Personal Memory Index (001 to 025).
• Dial Number of the contact (max. 16 digits).
• Press #*.
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset

Configuration of Global Directory by Extension Users

Extension users can add, delete and edit contacts in Global Directory Part 1 using their extension phones, if:
• their phone is a digital key phone or the Matrix Extended IP Phone;
• Global Directory Part 1 is allowed to them in their Class of Service.

• Extension users can only add, delete and edit names and numbers of contacts in Global Directory Part
1. However, they cannot select the outgoing trunks for the contact numbers in the directory.

• When an extension user configures Global Directory Part 1, the system will automatically assign the
number and name to a free Memory Location. The system will use the trunks selected by the System
Engineer to dial out the number added by the extension user.

To configure Global Directory Part 1 from the DKP or Matrix Extended IP Phone, follow these steps:

• Press Enter key to enter Phone Menu.

• Scroll to ‘Contacts’ and press Enter Key.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 293

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • You will get the following options:
• Add
• Edit
• Delete

Adding a contact
To add a contact, select ‘Add’ and press Enter key.
• Enter your contact’s name on the prompt.
A maximum of 12 characters are allowed.
• Dial #* or Press Enter key to terminate command.
• Enter your contact’s number on the prompt.
A maximum of 16 digits are allowed.
• Dial #* or Press Enter key to terminate command.
• You will get the confirmation tone and the confirmatory message: “Stored at Index xxxx”.

Editing a contact
To edit a contact,
• Scroll to ‘Contacts’ in the phone menu and press Enter key.
• Select ‘Edit’ and press Enter key.
• You get the prompt: 'Name:'
• Enter the initial letters of the contact's name.
• The number of matching entries that will appear at a time on your phone's display will vary according to
your phone's LCD display capacity.
• Scroll with the Up/Down navigation keys to reach the desired contact's name on the list.
• Press 'Enter' key to select the name.
• The system displays the name you selected.
• To delete a character, use the Back/Forward navigation key to place the cursor under the character you
want to delete.
• Press the ‘Transfer’ key to delete the character you selected with the cursor.
• To enter a character, use the Back/Forward navigation key to place the cursor in the position you want to
enter the character.
• Enter the desired character by pressing the relevant digit pad keys in quick succession.
• After you have finished editing the name, press Enter key.
• The number of the contact whose name you edited will be displayed.
• Repeat the same steps as you did for editing the name.
• After you have finished editing the name, press Enter key.
• You will get the confirmation tone and the confirmatory message: “Stored at Index xxxx”.

Deleting a contact
To delete a contact,
• Scroll to ‘Contacts’ in the phone menu and press Enter key.
• Select ‘Delete’ and press Enter key.
• You get the prompt: 'Enter Name to select and Press Enter Key to delete.'
• Enter the initial letters of the contact's name.
• The number of matching entries that will appear at a time on your phone's display will vary according to
your phone's LCD display capacity.
• Scroll with the Up/Down navigation keys to reach the desired contact's name on the list.
• Press 'Enter' key to delete the name.
• You will get the confirmation tone and the confirmatory message: “Done”.

294 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use

Personal Abbreviated Dialing

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Press DSS Key assigned 'Abbreviated Dialing' function (if programmed).

OR

• Dial 8 (users world wide)

OR

• Dial 6 (users in USA)

• You get the message 'Give Index'
• Enter Personal Directory Index number: 001 to 025.
• The desired number will be dialed out.

For SLT Users

• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 8 (users world wide)

OR

• Dial 6 (users in USA)

• Dial Personal Directory Index number: 001 to 025.
• The desired number will be dialed out.

Global Abbreviated Dialing

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Press DSS Key assigned 'Abbreviated Dialing' function (if programmed).

OR

• Dial 8 (users world wide)

OR

• Dial 6 (users in USA)

• You get the message 'Give Index'
• Enter Global Directory Index number: 100 to 999.
• The desired number will be dialed out.

For SLT Users

• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 8 (users world wide)

OR

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 295

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dial 6 (users in USA)
• Dial Global Directory Index number: 100 to 999.
• The desired number will be dialed out.

296 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Access Codes

What's this?
Access codes are short digit sequences dialed from an extension phone to instruct the PBX to perform a function
such as:

• Calling an extension.

• Calling a group of extensions (“Department Call”).

• Grabbing a trunk line or any trunk line from a group of trunks.

• Turning on/off Digital Output Port.

• Invoking a feature. Activating or deactivating a feature.

Accordingly Access Codes are classified into:

• Station Codes: Codes used for calling DKP, SLT, SIP extensions, Digital Output Port, Door Phone. These
codes are also commonly referred to as Extension numbers.

Default station codes are:

• SLT extensions: 201 to 214
• DKP extensions: 301 and 302
• SIP extensions: 303 to 318
• Door Phone: 215

• Logical Group Codes: codes used for calling a group of extensions as in a Department group, a group of
trunks.

Default logical group codes:

• Department groups: 391 to 395
• Trunks access codes: 0, 5, 61, 62, 63, 64

• Feature Codes: codes used for invoking a feature.

Default feature codes: there are different feature codes for every feature and function of the ETERNITY
NE. For example, '2' for Auto Call Back, '5' for Raid, '13' for Call Forward.

Access codes may consist of single digits or a sequence of a maximum of 6 digits.

You can change the default access codes to the codes of your choice. For example: the default Operator
code '9' can be changed to '0'.

How it works
Whenever an access code is dialed from an extension, the system matches each digit in the code with the access
codes configured within the system to determine the instruction, like whether it is an extension it must call, or a
trunk line it must grab, a port it has to activate. The system processes the instruction when a match is found.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 297

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For example:

• An extension user dials 131 to set Call Forward.

• When the first digit '1' is dialed, the system finds a match. As several default access codes begin with '1'
the system waits for the next digit to be dialed.

• When the second digit '3' is dialed, the system finds a match for '13'.

• As '13' is common for all Call Forward options75, the system waits for the next digit to be dialed

• When the user dials the third digit '1', the system finds a match for '131'.

• If there is more than one access codes matching with '131', e.g. '1311', '1314', '1315' the system will wait
for the next digit to be dialed.

• If no further digit is dialed on expiry of the Inter Digit Wait Timer, the system understands the instruction as
'Call Forward - Unconditional' and waits for the destination phone number to be dialed.

Access Codes are related to various phases of a call. When a call is processed by a PBX, it goes through a number
of pre-defined phases.

The different phases that a call typically passes through are:

Idle Dial Routing Blocked Placed Matured Matured Denied

2-Way 3-Way

No Digits are The system The dialed The dialed Connected Connected No reply
activity. pressed on is processing extension extension is with the with two from dialed
the phone the call. The is busy. ringing. dialed extensions. extension.
keypad/dialed call is neither extension.
from the placed nor
rotary. blocked.

Dial tone is Beeps are Busy tone Ring Back Two-way Three-way Error Tone
played. played. is played. Tone is speech. speech. is played.
played.

Different access codes are dialed at different call phases. Station Codes and Logical Group Codes are dialed in the
'Dial' phase.

As different features are invoked in each call phase, Feature Access Codes are dialed at different call phases. For
example:

• Call Forward code is dialed at the 'Dial' phase.

• DND Override code is dialed at the 'Routing' phase.

• Auto Call Back code is dialed at the 'Blocked' phase as well as 'Placed' phase.

• Three-party Conference code is dialed at the 'Matured 2-way' phase, with one held party.

75. Call forwarding options: Unconditional, When Busy, When No Reply, When Busy or No Reply.

298 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 'Idle' phase is when no code is dialed. In the 'Denied Phase' no code, other than emergency numbers, is allowed to
be dialed.

Each access code in a single call phase may be of different lengths, but must be unique. For example, the same
access code cannot be used for two different features like Call Forward and Redial, since both these features are
invoked in the 'Dial' phase.

However, the same access code can be used for features in different call phases. For example, '4' is the default
feature access code for DND Override (Routing Phase), Call Pick-Up-Group (Dial Phase) and Barge-In (Blocked
Phase).

Similarly, Station and Logical Group Codes too must be unique and should not match with any of the features
invoked in the 'Dial' phase.

How to configure
ETERNITY NE provides default Access Codes for extensions, logical groups—department and trunk groups—and
features.

It also provides country-specific default Access Codes which are applied automatically when you select the
'Region' to configure the system.

The default Access Codes for India are presented in the table below. The default Access Code tables also indicate
the call phase in which each feature is invoked.

Call Phases
Access
Feature Matured Matured
Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-Way

Enter SE Mode 1#91 Y Y

Enter SA Mode 1#92 Y Y

Call Pickup - Group 4 Y Y

Call Pick Up-Selective 12 Y Y

Auto Call Back Set 2 Y Y

Auto Call Back Cancel 102 Y Y

Redial 7 Y Y

Auto Redial Set 17 Y Y

Auto Redial Cancel 1070 Y Y

Personal Directory Program 1071 Y Y

Abbreviated Dialing 8 Y Y

Operator 9 Y Y Y

Call Forward 13 Y Y

Dynamic Lock 14 Y Y

Hot Line 15 Y Y

Alarm 161 Y Y

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 299

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Phases
Access
Feature Matured Matured
Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-Way

DND 18 Y Y

Interrupt Request 3 Y

Barge-In 4 Y

Raid 5 Y

Trunk Reservation 6 Y

Call Toggle 1 Y

Conference- 3 Party 0 Y

Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer # Y

Conference-Multi Party 19 Y Y

Call Park 115 Y

Call Park Retrieve 116 Y Y

Room Monitor 1073 Y Y

Last Caller Recall 1092 Y Y

Voice Help 1090 Y Y

Walk-In Class Of Service 111 Y Y

Change User Password 114 Y Y

Paging 1074 Y Y

DISA Login 1079 Y

Cancel All Features 1051 Y Y

Selective Port Access 69 Y Y

Flashing on Trunk * Y Y

User Absent/Present 104 Y Y

Account Code by Number 1058 Y Y

Account Code by Name 1059 Y Y

Meet Me Paging 1093 Y Y

Hot Desk 1091 Y

DND Override 4 Y

Presence 1097 Y

Live Call Screening 1094 Y Y

Conversation Recording 1095 Y

Forced Call Release #* Y

Hold Flash Y

Live Call Supervision 1098 Y Y

Forced Call Answer 5 Y

300 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Phases
Access
Feature Matured Matured
Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-Way

Mute 1052 Y Y

Department Group Call Forward 57 Y Y

Self Ring Test 1057 Y

Set Call Chaining 1050

SA Mode 1072 Y Y

Second Trunk Access # Y

Keypad Lock - Y

CLI Restriction 103 Y

Call Cost Display 1075 Y

Reminder 162 Y Y

Alarm Voice-guided 163

Reminder Voice-guided 164

Blind Transfer to Voicemail 1078 Y

Message Wait Set/Cancel 1076 Y Y

Retrieve New Message 1077 Y Y

Door Phone - Mode Selection 1171

Door Phone - Manual Mode 1172 Y Y

Door Phone - Open Door 1173 Y

Invoke RCOC ** Y

Scheduled Call Forward 1175 Y Y

Voicemail 3931 Y Y

391 to
Dept. Group Y Y
395

Trunk Access Code (TAC) 1 0 Y Y

Trunk Access Code (TAC) 2 5 Y Y

Trunk Access Code (TAC) 3 61 Y Y

Trunk Access Code (TAC) 4 62 Y Y

Trunk Access Code (TAC) 5 63 Y Y

Trunk Access Code (TAC) 6 64 Y Y

You can either use the default Access Codes or change them to suit your preferences.

• The following Access Codes are cannot be changed:

• Enter SE Mode (1#91)

• Enter SA Mode (1#92)

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 301

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • However, you can change, the Prefix of SA Commands '1072'. See above Table.

To change Access Codes, see “Extension Numbering Plan” under Basic Settings for instructions.

302 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Account Codes

What's this?
Account Codes are a very useful feature for business consultants, law firms, advertising and media agencies, and
the like, which interact with third parties on behalf of their clients. Such organizations need to keep track of calls
made to and on behalf of each client.

An 'Account Code' is a unique three-digit number that an organization can assign to each of its clients. Each
Account Code may be given a name, which is entered in the Account Name List.

With an Account Code and Name assigned, whenever calls are made to the client or to a third party on behalf of the
client,

• The extension user dials the Account Code or Name assigned to the client.

• The extension user may dial the Account Code before dialing the external number,
Or
when in speech with the client/third party (by putting the party on hold).

• Call details for these calls are recorded in the Station Message Detail Recording Report (SMDR) for
Outgoing Calls.

• The SMDR report can be printed using the Account Code as filter.

This way, the organization can know the details of calls made to and on behalf of each client.

To illustrate this with an example: An advertising media agency makes nearly 100 calls every day to and
on behalf of its clients that include 'Midas Business Solutions', 'Jet-Set Holidays', 'Bacchus Vineyard',
among several others.

Now, the agency can assign a three-digit account code to Midas Business Solutions, e.g. '001' and the
enter the name code 'Midas Biz' in the Account Name List. The same can be done for all other clients.
Each time someone in the agency makes a call to Midas, they may dial either the account code '001' or the
account name 'Midas Biz'. The account code/account name can be dialed either before dialing out the
number or when in speech with the client.

The ETERNITY NE supports as many as 999 Account Codes.

Forced Account Code

The ETERNITY NE can be configured to prompt extension users to dial the Account Code whenever they grab a
trunk to dial out a number. The system will allow extension users to dial out numbers only when after they have
dialed the Account Code or Name. Hence the name Forced Account Code for this feature.

The Forced Account Code works in the following manner:

• an extension user dials out the number or the Trunk Access Code to grab a trunk.

• ETERNITY NE displays the Account Name List on the DKP of the extension user.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 303

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • this List contains the names of clients along with their corresponding account codes, arranged
alphabetically.

• the extension user scrolls through the list to make a selection.

• the number is dialed out.

• Account Codes are applicable for external calls only.

• To use Account Codes, extensions must be allowed this feature in their Class of Service (CoS).

• If you want to use Account Names, you must configure the Account Name List.

• When the Forced Account Code is enabled on a trunk, the system will ask the extension user to enter
the account code irrespective of the method of dialing, whether Global Abbreviated dialing, Personal
abbreviated dialing, Least Cost Routing, or Selective Trunk Access.

• However, if Forced Account Code is enabled on the selected trunk, and the number is dialed using
Selective Trunk Access, the system will dial out the number using Store and Forward dialing.

In the case of Abbreviated Dialing or Direct Dialing, if the extension user fails to dial the Account Code,
an error message will be displayed on the extension user's DKP.

How to configure
For Account Code to work, the System Engineer must:

1. Enable 'Account Codes' feature in the Class of Service (CoS) of the extension(s) to which this feature is to
be allowed.

2. Prepare and configure the Account Name List, if you are going to assign names to the account codes.

3. If Forced Account Code is to be used, enable 'Forced Account Code' flag on the trunks through which calls
using account codes are to be made.

Preparing Account Name List

In consultation with the User, the System Engineer may

• Draw a two-column table on a paper.

• Write Account Codes on one column. Account codes may be any three-digit number between 001 and
999.

• Write the Account Names, i.e., names of the clients on the second column, against their respective
Account Codes.

304 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The names must not exceed 12 characters. For example:

Account Code Client Account Name

001 Midas Biz

002 Jet Set

010 Bacchus

You need not follow a cardinal numbering sequence when assigning Account Codes.

You may assign any code to any client. For instance, you can assign code '111' to Midas Business
Solutions, '222' to Jet-Set Holidays, '333' to Bacchus Vineyard.

Configuring Account Codes

To configure Account Name list,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link to expand.

• Click the Account Name link.

• Enter the Names of the clients against the account codes you have assigned to them. Refer the paper with
the two-column table you created.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 305

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Submit to save your entries.

To enable Account Code on extensions,

• Click the Basic Settings link.

• Click the link of the extension type—SLT, DKP, SIP—to which you want to allow this feature.

• Select the extension number to which you want to allow this feature.

• Click Class of Service to expand.

• Enable Account Code in the Class of Service for the Day and Night.

• Click Submit.

306 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To enable Forced Account Code on the extension,

• Click the More... link to expand.

• Select the Do not allow outgoing calls without Account Code check box to enable this feature on the
extension.

• Click Submit.

To enable Forced Account Code on trunks,

• Click the link of the trunk type—CO, Mobile, SIP—to which you want to allow this feature.

• Select the trunk you on which you want to assign this feature.

• On the respective trunk port page, click the More... link.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 307

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Forced Account Code on the trunk.

• Select the Do not allow outgoing calls without Account Code check box to enable this feature on the
trunk.

• Click Submit.

How to use
Account Codes can be dialed in two ways: by Number and by Names.

Account codes, i.e. number and names, can be dialed:

• before making the call,

• during the call,

• when grabbing a trunk (if Forced Account Code flag is enabled).

Print and hand out copies of the Account Code List to everyone in the organization for reference while
making calls.

308 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dialing Account Code by Number
To enter Account Code Number before making the call:

• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Account Code by Number'.

OR

• Dial 1058
• Enter Account Code
• Dial Trunk Access Code
• Dial the number of the client.

To enter Account Code Number during the call:

• Press Flash to put called party on hold.

• Press DSS Key assigned to Account Code by Number.

OR

• Dial 1058
• Enter Account Code
• Speech will be resumed.

To enter Account Code Number when Forced Account Code Flag is enabled:

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Dial Trunk Access Code to grab a trunk.
• Enter the Account Code Number on the prompt.
• You get dial tone.
• Dial the number of the client.

For SLT Users

• Dial Trunk Access Code to grab a trunk.
• You get beeps.
• Dial Account Code Number.
• The number of the client will be dialed out.

Dialing Account Code by Name

Dialing Account Code by Names is possible only if your phone is a DKP.

To enter Account Code Name before making the call:

• Press DSS Key assigned to Account Code by Name.

OR

• Dial 1059.
• Enter the initial letter of the client's name.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 309

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Account Name List will be displayed on your DKP, alphabetically with the corresponding account
codes.
• Scroll to select the desired client name and press Enter key.
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• Dial the client's number.

To enter Account Code Name during the call:

• Press Flash to put the called party on hold.

• Press DSS Key assigned to Account Code by Name.

OR

• Dial 1059.
• Dial the initial letter of the client's name.
The Account Name List will be displayed on your DKP, alphabetically with the corresponding account
codes.
• Scroll to select the desired client name and press Enter key.
Speech will be resumed with the called party.

Dialed the wrong account code or name?

If you have dialed the wrong account code or name while in the middle of a call, you can correct it by
dialing 'flash' again and following the steps described above. The system will override the previously dialed
account code or name.

Printing Call Reports of Clients

You can print the call details of your clients using their account codes as filter.

See “Station Message Detail Recording–Report”, for more detailed instructions on printing reports using filters.

310 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Alarms

What's this?
ETERNITY offers Alarm feature on all extensions.

Alarms can be set and canceled

• by the Operator for extension users.

• by the extension users for themselves.

Alarms can be set as:

• Once Only - A one-time call, where the extension phone rings at the set time.

• Daily - A repeat call, where the extension phone rings at the set time everyday.

Alarms can be served as:

• Personalized - The Operator greets the extension user to serve the alarm request.

• Automated - The system serves the alarm request by playing a voice message or music.

Alarms can be voice-guided, if your ETERNITY NE has the Voice Mail System (VMS) module.

How it works

Personalized Alarm
When the Alarm serving mechanism is configured as 'Personalized',

• The Operator phone rings first1, displaying the number of the extension to which the alarm is to be served.

• When the Operator answers this call, a call is placed on the extension on which the alarm is set.

• The extension rings for the duration of the Alarm Ring Timer.

• When the extension user answers the call, the Operator greets the extension user with the time and alarm
message.

• If the extension user does not answer the call till the Alarm Ring Timer has elapsed, the Operator phone
will display a text message notifying 'No Reply' from the extension. The Alarm is now considered as
served.
• If the extension is busy2, the Operator phone will display a text message notifying that the extension
number is 'Busy'.

1. The Operator phone rings for the duration of the Alarm Ring Timer. If the Operator does not answer the call, the ETERNITY NE will
make two more Alarm Attempts at an Alarm Attempt Interval of 5 minutes to call the Operator.
2. An improperly placed receiver may also be the cause for the busy tone on the extension phone. In that case, the system will notify
the Operator Phone with the 'OFF-Hook Alert'.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 311

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The Operator can now choose to

• inform the extension user about the alarm in person or send someone to do it.

OR

• try the busy extension again.

OR

• set “Auto Call Back (ACB)”.


Personal Alarms will work even if the extension user has set DND or Call Forward.

Automated Alarm
When the Alarm serving mechanism is configured as 'Automated',

• The extension phone rings at the set time till the end of the Alarm Ring Timer. If the extension phone is a
DKP or the Matrix Extended IP Phone, an Alarm message will appear on its display.

• When the extension user answers the call, s/he may be played music-on-hold, or a pre-recorded voice
message, or be connected to the Voice Mail, or routed to the Operator, depending upon the Alarm
Notification Type configured by the System Engineer.

The System Engineer may consult with the Enterprise to decide which of these options is to be configured
as the Alarm Notification Type.

• If the extension user does not answer the alarm call, the ETERNITY NE makes two more attempts (in all, 3
attempts) at an interval of 5 minutes between each attempt, to call the extension.

• If all Alarm attempts go unanswered, the ETERNITY NE places the call on the Operator phone. The
Operator phone rings till the end of the Alarm Ring Timer. The Operator phone displays the extension
number with the message 'No Reply'. The Alarm is now considered as served.

• If the extension phone is busy ETERNITY NE will continue to make Alarm Attempts at the Alarm Interval
configured. When all Alarm Attempts go unanswered, the ETERNITY NE will place a call on the Operator
phone. The Operator phone will display the number of the extension phone with the message 'Busy'.

Snooze
The Snooze function can be added to Automated-Alarms to ensure that the extension user answers the call.
Snooze is a system-wide feature; when set, this function will be added to all Automated Alarms.

When Snooze is activated,

• The extension phone rings for the Number of Alarm Attempts configured, at set Alarm Attempt Intervals.

• The extension stops ringing, when the extension user answers the call and dials the Code '0' to
acknowledge the Alarm. The Alarm Acknowledgement Code is not configurable.

312 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Alarm Status Report
The Operator can know the status of Alarms—details of Alarms that have not been served—on the WakeUp
Alarms Report page of Jeeves, from the System Administrator (SA) mode. The WakeUp Alarms Report is useful
when Operators change shifts.

The status of Alarms set by Operator as well as extension users appears on this report, with details of time (hours
and minutes), type (once only, daily), and serving mechanism (personalized, automated).

The Operator can view the Alarm report whenever required and can also print this report.

• ETERNITY NE can register as many as 60 Alarm requests set by the Operator and extension users.

• Multiple Alarms can be set for an extension by the Operator and/or by the extension user. For example,
Daily Alarm at 09:00am is set for an extension. The extension user wants to change the alarm time to
08:30am for a day. The extension user/Operator can set another alarm, i.e. a Once Only Alarm, at
08:30am without disturbing the daily alarm. Both the Alarms will ring at the set time.

• When multiple alarm requests have been set on an extension, if the Operator or the extension user
attempts to cancel alarms from the phone, the system will cancel all the alarms set for the extension.
Multiple alarm requests set for an extension can be canceled selectively only from the System
Administrator pages of Jeeves.

• It is not possible to modify an alarm request. Instead, the alarm request should be canceled and a new
one should be made.

• The duration of Alarm Ring Timer, the Number of Alarm Attempts and the Alarm Attempt Interval are
configurable.

• Alarms can be set for all extensions of the ETERNITY NE, including the Operator phone also.

• Alarm settings will be retained in the system during power down and system upgrades.

How to configure
The following parameters are important for the functioning of the Alarm feature. Read their description before
configuring this feature.

Alarm Ring Timer

This is the duration for which the system rings the extension to serve an Alarm call. By default, the Alarm Ring
Timer is set to 45 seconds. The range of this timer is 001 to 255 seconds. This timer also signifies the duration for
which the Operator phone rings to notify that an Alarm call has not been answered or the extension phone is busy.

Number of Alarm Attempts

This is the number of attempts the system makes to place an Alarm call on the extension phone before notifying the
Operator that the call is not answered or the phone is busy. By default, the Number of Alarm Attempts is set to '3'.
The Number of Alarm Attempts can be set between 1 and 9.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 313

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Alarm Attempt Interval
This is the time period between each Alarm Call attempt. By default, the Alarm Attempt Interval is set to 5 minutes.
The range of this interval is from 1 to 9.

Snooze Function
Snooze forces the extension user to acknowledge the Alarm call. With snooze functionality enabled, the system
expects the user to answer the Alarm call by going OFF-Hook and to dial Acknowledgement code '0'.

When snooze is disabled, the system considers the Alarm as answered when the extension user simply answers
the alarm call by going OFF-Hook (dialing acknowledgement code is not mandatory). You may choose whether or
not to enable snooze. By default, snooze is disabled.

Configurable Alarm Type

When the Operator and extension user set an Alarm call request, the system gives them the choice of setting 'Once
Only' or 'Daily' Alarm calls.

User experience however, shows that 'Once Only' Alarm call requests are more common than 'Daily' Alarm
requests. So, ETERNITY NE allows you the flexibility of setting 'Once Only' as the default Alarm Type, by disabling
the 'Configuring Alarm Type' flag.

When this flag is disabled, the system will prompt the Operator/Extension user to enter the Time of the Alarm call
and consider the Alarm Type as 'Once Only'.

By default, this flag is disabled.

Configurable Alarm Category

When the Operator sets an Alarm call for an extension, the system prompts the Operator to select an Alarm Type
(Once Only or Daily) and to select the alarm serving mechanism - 'Automated or Personalized'.

If you want to offer only 'Automated' Alarms to extension users, ETERNITY NE allows the flexibility to set
'Automated' as the default Alarm call serving mechanism. This can be done by disabling the 'Configurable Alarm
Category' flag.

When this flag is disabled, the system will consider the Alarm call serving mechanism as 'Automated' and will
prompt the Operator only for the Time of the Alarm call.

By default, this flag is disabled.

314 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • When both flags 'Configurable Alarm Type' and 'Configurable Alarm Category' are disabled, the system
will set and serve 'Once Only - Automated' alarms only.

• If the 'Configurable Alarm Type' flag is disabled, but the 'Configurable Alarm Category' flag is enabled,
the system will set 'Once Only' alarm calls, but will give the option of selecting 'Automated' or
'Personalized' as the serving mechanism.

• Similarly, if 'Configurable Alarm Type' is enabled, but the 'Configurable Alarm Category' flag is disabled,
the system will allow both 'Once Only' and 'Daily' alarms to be set, but the serving mechanism will be
'Automated'.

• The flags ‘Configurable Alarm Type’ and ‘Configurable Alarm Category’ are not applicable for Voice-
guided Alarms. In the case of Voice-guided Alarms, the Operator/Extension user will be prompted to
select the Alarm type and serving mechanism, each time, even when both aforementioned flags are
disabled.

Alarm Notification Type

This is the means of notifying the extension user about the Alarm call. ETERNITY NE supports the following types
Alarm Notifications:

• Voice Mail: The extension user is connected to the Voice Mail System.

• Voice Message: The extension user is played the message recorded in the Voice Module assigned to
Alarm.

• Music-On-Hold: The extension user is played music on hold.

• Route to Operator: The extension user is connected to the Operator.

Macros
These are short codes for simulating the Alarm call. These are used for SLTs which have special function keys to
send a fixed string to the ETERNITY NE, when each function key is pressed. The system interprets this string and
translates it into a string that can be understood by the ETERNITY NE. For example, an SLT has a special function
key for Alarm calls which sends the string 53 to the system. The system can be configured to translate 53 received
from the SLT in to the feature access code for Voice-guided Alarm calls, 163.

To configure the Alarms feature, do the following:

• Select the Alarm Notification Type for the extensions.

• Configure, as required, the Alarm Call related parameters: Number of Attempts, Attempt Interval,
Configurable Alarm Type and Category, and Snooze.

• Configure Macros, if the SLT extension has special function keys, and you want to a function key for the
Alarm feature.

Now,
• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 315

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To configure Alarm Notification Type for the extension,

• Click the Basic Settings link.

• Click the link of the extension type:

• “SLT Extensions”
• “DKP Extensions”
• “SIP Extensions”

The page of the selected extension type opens.

• To select an extension number on the page, select the Extension Number tab.

• Click More button to expand parameter options for the selected Extension number.

316 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click More... link to expand.

• In the Alarm Notification Type box, select the desired notification type for the extension: Music-on-Hold,
Voice Message, Voice Mail, Route to Operator.
If you select Voice Message as notification type, make sure that you also assign a Voice Module to the
Alarm application. See “Voice Message Applications” for more details.

Select Voice Mail only if you have the Voice Mail System installed in your ETERNITY NE.

• Click Submit to save.

• Repeat the same steps to configure another extension type and extension number.

To configure Alarm Call parameters,

• Click Advanced Settings link.

• Click the link System Parameters to open the page.

• Click Alarm to expand.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 317

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Configure the following alarm call parameters:

• Use Alarm with Snooze: Select this check box if you want to use the Snooze function for the Alarm
Call.

• Configurable Alarm Type (Once Only/Daily): Disable this flag, by clearing the check box, if you do
not what the system to provide the Operator and the extension users the option of setting 'Once Only'
or 'Daily' Alarms. When this flag is disabled, the system will allow only 'Once Only' alarms to be set.

• Configurable Alarm Category (Personalized/Automated): Disable this flag, by clearing the check
box if you do not want the system to provide the Operator the option of setting 'Personalized' or
'Automated' Alarm calls. When this flag is disabled, the system will follow the 'Automated' Alarm call
serving mechanism. The Operator will not be prompted to choose between 'Automated' and
'Personalized' Alarm calls when setting Alarm calls for an extension phone.

• Alarm Ring Timer (sec.): Change, if required, the time for which the Alarm Call will ring on the
extension phone and the time for which the Operator phone will ring to notify an unanswered Alarm
Call.

• Number of Alarm Attempts: Increase or decrease, as required, the number of attempts the system
should make to serve an Alarm call.

• Alarm Attempt Interval (minutes): Increase or decrease, as required, the time gap between each
attempt the system makes to serve an Alarm call.

• Click Submit to save settings.

318 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Now, to configure SLTs with special Alarm function key,

• Click the Macros link under Advanced Settings.

The Macros page opens. Each macro is stored against an index number.

• In the Number String field, enter the strings to be replaced with on receiving the strings from the SLT.

• In the Access Codes field, enter the strings sent by the SLT on pressing the special function key for
'Alarms'.
For example, if the SLT sends the string ‘53’ to the ETERNITY NE when the function key for Alarms is
pressed, enter the string 163 (the feature access code for Voice-guided Alarms) in the Number String
field, and enter the string 53 in the corresponding Access code field.

• Click Submit to save.

How to use
Alarms can be set by the extension users by themselves. The extension users can also ask the Operator to set the
alarm for them.

If the Voice Mail System (VMS) is installed in the ETERNITY NE, it can offer voice-guided Alarms to extension
users and the Operator.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 319

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Voice-guided alarms lead users through a menu, helping them set the alarm in a step-by-step manner. When a
voice-guided alarm is served, the extension user gets a voice message announcing the alarm with the time.

Voice-Guided Alarm set/canceled by Operator

The Operator can set voice-guided Alarms for extension users

For EON & Extended IP Phone

• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Remote Voice-Guided Alarm' function.
OR
• Dial 1072-034
• Follow Voice Mail System Prompts to set/cancel alarm.

For SLT
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1072-034
• Follow Voice Mail System Prompts to set/cancel alarm.
• Replace Handset.

Voice-Guided Alarm set/canceled by Extension Users

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Press the key assigned to Voice-guided 'Alarm' function.
OR
• Dial 163
• Follow Voice Mail System prompts.

For SLT Users

• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 163
• Follow Voice Mail System Prompts.
• Replace handset.

If the SLT of the extension user has a special Alarm function key, s/he can set the alarm using this key.

For SLT with 'Alarms' Key

• Press 'Alarms' key. (The label on the SLT key may differ from model to model)
• Follow the Voice Mail System prompts to set/cancel alarm.

• SLTs with special function keys will work only if the corresponding Macros are programmed by the
System Engineer.

• Without the Voice Mail System installed, the extension user having SLT with the special Alarm function
key will not be able to set/cancel alarm. This extension user can set/cancel alarm only by dialing the
feature access code for voice-guided alarms.

320 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Non-Voice Guided Alarms set/canceled by Operator

For EON & Extended IP Phones

To set Alarm for the extension user,

• Press the key assigned the 'Remote Alarm' function.

OR
• Dial 1072-003
• Enter the Extension Number.
• Enter Time in HH:MM
• Select 'Once Only' or 'Daily'.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• Select 'Personalized' or 'Automated'.
• Press 'Enter' key to set Alarm.
• You get a confirmation tone and a text message with the phone number for which the alarm is set.
• Go Idle.

To cancel Alarms,

• Press key assigned the 'Remote Alarm' function.

OR
• Dial 1072-003
• Enter Extension Number.
• Select 'Cancel All'.
• Press 'Enter' Key.

For SLT

To set Alarm for an extension,

• Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-003
• Dial Extension Number.
• Dial Time in HHMM format
• Dial 1 for Personalized, Dial 2 for Automated.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

To cancel Alarm set for an extension,

• Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-003
• Dial Extension Number.
• Dial #
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 321

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Non-Voice Guided Alarms set/cancel by Extension Users

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set Alarm,

• Press the key assigned the 'Alarm' function.

OR
• Dial 161
• Enter Time in HH:MM(24-hours format)
• Select 'Once Only' or 'Daily'.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get a confirmation message and confirmation tone.
• Go Idle.

To cancel Alarms,

• Press the key assigned the 'Alarm' function.

OR
• Select 'Cancel All'.
• Press 'Enter' Key.

For SLT Users

To set Alarms,
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 161
• Dial HH:MM
• Dial 1 for ‘Once Only’ or Dial 2 for ‘Daily’.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.

To cancel Alarms,
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 161.
• Dial #.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.

• Extension users can set only automated alarms from their phones. For personalized alarms, they must
request the Operator.

• If there are multiple alarms set, alarms cannot be canceled selectively. Only the Operator can cancel
alarms selectively from the SA mode.

• Alarm(s) set on an extension will be served, even if DND is also set on the same extension.

322 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Viewing and Printing Alarm Status
The Operator can view the status of Alarms that are yet to be served from the System Administrator pages of
Jeeves.

To view Alarm Status,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Administrator.

• Click the Reports link.

• Click the Wakeup Alarms link under Reports.

The unserved Alarm calls appear on the page.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 323

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To cancel any of the unserved Alarm calls,

• select the Cancel Alarm check box of the extension number for which you want to cancel the alarm.

• click the Cancel Selected Alarms button at the bottom of the page.

• To print this page, click the Print button.

• Click Logout to exit SA mode.

324 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Alternate Number Dialing

What's this?
Alternate Number Dialing allows you to dial different phone numbers in an attempt to reach a person whose line is
busy.

Alternate Number Dialing is useful when the person or organization you are trying to reach has more than one
number, where they may be reached. The system dials out different phone numbers of the same party, saving you
time and effort of dialing each of these numbers manually.

How it works
This feature works as an extension of the features “Last Number Redial” and “Auto Redial”. It requires you to
configure first, the Alternate Number Groups in the Global Directory. With the alternate numbers configured in the
Global Directory, all you need to do is to use Last Number Redial or Auto Redial, every time you want the system to
try Alternate Number Dialing.

For example: Midas Business Solutions has four telephone numbers: 2640459, 2631235, 2635589 and 2565590.
To be able to use Alternate Number Dialing, you must first configure all four numbers as Alternate Number Group in
the Global Directory.

Now, when you dial one of these numbers, '2640459', and get a busy tone, you can either initiate Last Number
Redial or set an Auto Redial request.

When you initiate Last Number Redial,

• The system will dial an alternative number for the dialed number.

• If the redialed number is busy, you can set Last Number Redial again.

• The system will dial a second alternative number.

• If the second alternative number is also busy, you can set Last Number Redial again.

• The system will dial a third alternative number.

• This process will be repeated each time you set Last Number Redial, until the call gets through.

When you set an Auto Redial request on busy tone,

• The system will dial an alternative number.

• If the alternative number is busy, the system will redial another alternative number.

• The system will dial a different (alternative) number on each auto redial attempt3, until the call gets
through.

3. The number of auto redial attempts depends on the Auto Redial Count configured in the system. By default, the system will make
5 redial attempts if Auto Redial 'normal' is set. If Auto Redial 'Priority' is set, the system will make 20 redial attempts.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 325

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • (for the number of redial attempts configured), until the call gets through.

• when any of the alternate numbers gets through, the system will give a ring on your extension.

This process is illustrated in the graphic below:

(Busy) 2630555

( Bu
Calling Party sy)
2630556

2630557

ETERNITY

• Alternate Number Dialing will work only on extensions that are allowed the features Last Number
Redial in their “Class of Service (COS)”

• Also, Alternate Number Dialing will work only for those numbers that exist in the Global Directory
assigned to each extension. The Global Directory is divided into three parts, 100-399 (Part 1), 400-699
(Part 2), and 700-999 (Part 3). If an extension is assigned only Global Directory Part 2, Alternate
Number Dialing will work only for those numbers grouped as Alternate Number Groups in Global
Directory Part 2.

• Alternate Number Dialing will work also with “Abbreviated Dialing”. For example, an extension user
dials the abbreviated code 8100, and the dialed out number is busy. When the extension user sets
Redial or Auto Redial, the ETERNITY will try the alternate numbers related to 8100.

How to configure
To use Alternate Number Dialing, you must do the following:

1. Make a List of Alternate Numbers.

2. Create Alternate Number Groups.

3. Configure Alternate Number Groups in the Global Directory.

4. Enable the features 'Last Number Redial', 'Global Directory', in the Class of Service (CoS) group of the
extensions to which Alternate Number Dialing facility is to be provided. If desired, 'Auto Redial', 'Auto
Redial Priority' may also be enabled in the CoS of these extensions.

• To create Alternate Number Groups, the alternate numbers must exist in the Global Directory. If any of
the alternate numbers do not exist in the Global Directory, first configure the numbers in the directory,
before you begin creating Alternate Number Groups. Refer the topic “Abbreviated Dialing” for
instructions on configuring the Global Directory.

326 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • As Alternate Number Dialing works only for the Alternate Number Groups in the Global Directory
assigned to each extension, ensure that the relevant Global Directory with the Alternate Number
Groups is allowed in the COS of the extensions.

Preparing Alternate Number List

In consultation with the extension users, you may:

• Draw a two-column table on a paper.

• Write the name of the contact on one column and the Alternate Numbers for the contact on the other
column.

• Make a list of the numbers which need to be grouped as alternate numbers. For example:

Name of the Contact Alternate Numbers

Midas Business Solutions 2640459, 2631235, 2635589, 2565590

Jet Set Holidays 022281110001, 022281110002

Bacchus Vineyard 2640075, 2640076

GoodLife Inn 2788856, 2788896

You may include as many alternate numbers as required by the User.

Creating Alternate Number Groups

• Assign the alternate numbers of each of contacts to an 'Alternate Number Group'.

• Each group must be assigned a number between 000 to 255.

• Taking the above example further, the Alternate Number Groups on the list may be numbered as follows:

Name of the Contact Alternate Numbers Alternate Number Group (No.)

Midas Business Solutions 2640459, 2631235, 2635589, 2565590 001

Jet Set Holidays 022281110001, 022281110002 002

Bacchus Vineyard 2640075, 2640076 003

GoodLife Inn 2788856, 2788896 004

Configuring Alternate Number Groups in Global Directory

Make sure that the numbers on the list are also configured in the Global Directory. If any of these numbers do not
exist in the Global directory already, configure them in the Global Directory first. Refer the topic “Abbreviated
Dialing” for instructions on configuring the Global Directory.

To create Alternate Number Groups and configure them in the Global Directory,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 327

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the Abbreviated Dialing link.

• Click the Global Directory link under Abbreviated Dialing to open the page.

• Click the Advance button on this page.

328 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If you have not configured the Global Directory already, you may do so now.

• Double click the Route Global Directory’s numbers using Trunks field, and select the trunks to be used
for routing the numbers of the Global Directory dialed out by extensions.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 329

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • You may enable LCR on the selected trunks.

• Enter the contact’s Number you wish to store. The number may consist of 16 digits (maximum).

• Enter the contact Name against the Number. The Name may contain up to 12 characters (maximum).

• In the Alternate Number Group column, enter the number of the Alternate Number Group you assigned
to the numbers of you con.

For example, you have assigned Alternate Number Group '001' to all the numbers of the contact Midas
Business Solutions, enter this number against each number belonging to this contact.

Similarly, enter Alternate Group number '004' against the numbers belonging to the 'GoodLife Inn' to which
it is assigned.

Memory Alternate
Number Name
Location Number Group

100 2640459 Midas Biz 001

101 2631235 Midas Biz 001

102 2635589 Midas Biz 001

103 2565590 Midas Biz 001

104 2788856 GoodLife Inn 004

105 022281110001 Jet Set 002

106 022281110002 Jet Set 002

330 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Memory Alternate
Number Name
Location Number Group

107 033298765432 R. Mendez 000

108 2640075 Bacchus 003

109 2640076 Bacchus 003

: : : :

129 2788896 GoodLife Inn 004

The numbers of the contacts may not necessarily appear alphabetically or in a sequence. It is possible that
the numbers of the same contact may be configured at different memory locations in the Global Directory.

In the above example, one number of the GoodLife Inn is entered at memory location Index 104 and the
other on Index 129. Since these two numbers are grouped and assigned the number alternate group
number '004', this number must be entered against the GoodLife Inn numbers at the respective memory
location Index.

• After assigning Alternate Number Groups, click Submit button to save entries.

• Enable the features 'Last Number Redial' and 'Global Directory', in the Class of Service of the extensions
to which Alternate Number Dialing facility is to be provided. If desired, 'Auto Redial', 'Auto Redial Priority'
may also be enabled in the COS of these extensions.

By default, all extensions are allowed Last Number Redial in their Class of Service. However, only Global
Directory Part 1 is enabled by default in their COS.

Alternate Number Dialing will work only for those numbers that exist in the Global Directory assigned to
each extension. So, the Global Directory Part containing the Alternate Number Groups must be allowed to

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 331

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 the extension(s) in their Class of Service. For example, if Alternate Number Groups are configured in
Global Directory Part 2, extensions must have Global Directory Part 2 in their Class of Service.

Refer the topic “Class of Service (COS)” for instructions on configuring COS of extensions.

How to use
Confirm with your System Engineer that

• Alternate Number Groups are configured in the Global Directory allowed to your extension.

• 'Basic Features' (these include Redial) are enabled in the Class of Service allowed to your extension.

Now, follow the instructions for using the feature “Last Number Redial”.

332 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Auto Answer

What's this?
Auto Answer allows incoming calls to be answered without any manual interventions by the extension users.

This feature is particularly useful for Operators in high call traffic settings, as it saves them the effort of picking up
the handset or pressing the speaker key repeatedly.

This feature works only on digital key phones (DKP).

How it works
With Auto Answer set on an extension DKP, whenever a call lands on the DKP extension,

• the extension rings for the duration of the Auto Answer Timer4. This timer is configured, and by default it is
set to 1 second.

• on the expiry of the Auto Answer Timer5, the system plays a beep to the user.

• the DKP goes OFF-Hook to answer the call, without any intervention by the extension user such as picking
up the handset or pressing the speaker or the headset key.

• If a headset is connected, and headset connectivity is enabled on the DKP, the incoming speech audio will
be diverted to the headset automatically.

• the extension user can talk to the caller.

Auto Answer works only if the DKP is in idle state; the phone must not be busy with an active call or using a feature.

How to configure
For Auto Answer to work, you are required to do the following:

• Enable Auto Answer in the DKP Extensions.

• Change Auto Answer Timer, if required. The range of this timer is 1 to 9 seconds. By default, the Auto
Answer Timer is set to 1 second.

• Enable Headset Connectivity flag on the DKP, if headset is to be used for Auto Answer.

You can do the above configuration using Jeeves, or DKP extension users can also configure the above
parameters using the Phone Menu of EON. See “How to use” Auto Answer later in this topic.

4. This timer defines the time in seconds that the DKP should wait before going OFF-Hook to answer incoming calls.
5. This timer defines the time in seconds that the DKP should wait before going OFF-Hook to answer incoming calls.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 333

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring Auto Answer using Jeeves
• Open Jeeves.

• Login as System Engineer.

• Click the Basic Settings link.

• Click the DKP Extensions link.

• The DKP Extension page opens.

• On this page, click the Phone Settings option to expand.

334 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Enable the Auto Answer check box.

• Now, set the Auto Answer Timer to the desired duration. By default the Timer is set to 3 seconds.

• If Headset is to be used by the DKP, set Headset Connected? to Yes.

• Click Submit to save settings.

• To configure Auto Answer on the second DKP, click the DKP extension tab and repeat the above steps.

• Click Submit to save changes.

How to use
Extension users can set/cancel Auto Answer and enable Headset connectivity from their DKP/Extended IP Phone
by navigating the Menu of the phone.

To set Auto Answer:

• Press the DSS Key assigned to Auto Answer function6.

OR

• Press 'Enter' Key.

6. This function must have been on a DSS Key of the phone.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 335

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Scroll down to select 'Phone Settings'; press Enter Key.
• Enter Your User Password (default: 1111).
• Scroll down to select 'Call Answer Type'; press Enter Key.
• You get the options:
Manual Call Answer
Auto Call Answer
• Scroll to select Auto Answer and press Enter key.
• Now select the Timer for Auto Answer from any of the options:
Answer After 1 sec (default)
Answer After 2 sec
:
Answer After 9 sec
• Press Enter Key.

To cancel Auto Answer:

• Repeat the above steps.

• Select 'Manual Answer' as the Call Answer Type.


It is recommended that Auto Answer Timer be set to at least 2 seconds.

To enable Headset Connectivity:

• Press the DSS Key assigned to Headset function7.

OR

• Press 'Enter' Key.

• Scroll down to select 'Phone Settings'; press Enter Key.
• Enter Your User Password (default: 1111).
• Scroll down to select 'Headset Connectivity'; press Enter Key.
• You get the options:
Headset Not Connected
Headset Connected
• Scroll to select 'Headset Connected' and press Enter key.

7. See “Phone Key Settings” under “DKP Extensions” for instructions.

336 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Auto Call Back (ACB)

What's this?
If the extension number you have dialed is busy or is not responding, you may use the Auto Call Back feature,
instead of repeatedly dialing the number. Similarly, when you dial a code to access a trunk and the trunk is busy,
you may set Auto Call Back.

How it works
When you set Auto Call Back,

• the ETERNITY will queue your call attempt.

• As soon as both extensions, yours and the remote extension, are available, the system will ring first on
your extension for the duration of the Auto Call Back Ring Timer. This timer is set by default to 30 seconds
and is configurable.

• When you go OFF-Hook, the system will ring on the remote extension (provided it is also available at that
moment) for the duration of the Auto Call Back Ring Timer.

• When the remote extension user goes OFF-Hook, your call will get connected.

However, if the remote extension gets busy before the system can ring on it, the system will continue to try
again.

Auto Call Back set for a busy trunk works the same way. As soon as the busy trunk port you are trying to
access is available, the system will ring your extension. When you go OFF-Hook you will be connected to
the trunk port.

• Each extension of the ETERNITY can set only one Auto Call Back request at a time. If you set another
Auto Call Back request, before the first one has been served, the system will override the first request
and serve the second.

• The ETERNITY NE has the capacity to serve 50 Auto Call Back requests from its extensions at a time.
The service duration for each request is 60 minutes. Requests that are not served within 60 minutes
are automatically cancelled by the system. Also, the system will not serve any more requests if all the
50 requests are pending. In such a case, the system will play an error tone, when an extension
attempts to make a request.

Auto Call Back request set by you will be cleared by the system, if:

• it was successfully served, i.e. your extension was connected to the remote extension or the trunk you
were trying to reach.

• you do not answer the Auto Call Back ring, before the expiry of the Ring Timer, i.e. within 30 seconds
(default setting).

• the remote extension does not answer the Auto Call Back ring before the expiry of the Ring Timer.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 337

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • it has not been served within 60 minutes.

• Auto Call Back works for internal calls and for accessing trunk ports only.

How to configure
Auto Call Back is a “Class of Service (COS)” dependant feature. An extension user can set/cancel Auto Call Back
only if it is enabled in the extension's Class of Service.

The only configuration involved in this feature is enabling/disabling Auto Call Back in the Class of Service and
changing the duration of the Auto Call Back Ring Timer, if required.

By default, all extensions of ETERNITY NE are allowed Auto Call Back feature for the day and night in their Class
of Service. So, all extensions of the ETERNITY can set/cancel Auto Call Back if the called number is busy or does
not reply.

However, if Auto Call Back Busy/No Reply is to be denied to any of the extensions, you may this feature in the class
of service of these extensions. For instructions on enabling/disabling this feature on the different extension types,
refer the topics “SLT Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”, “SIP Extensions”under Basic Settings.

If you want to increase or decrease the duration of the of the Auto Call Back ring on both extensions, i.e. the
extension requesting Auto Call Back and the destination extension, configure the 'Auto Call Back Ring Timer'.

• Open Jives.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the System Timers and Counts link to open the page.

338 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Scroll to reach 'Other Features'

• Change the value to the desired duration.

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save your setting.

How to use
Extension users can set two types of Auto Call Back:

• Auto Call Back on Busy - when the extension/trunk they are trying is Busy.

• Auto Call Back on No Reply - when there is no reply from the extension they are trying.

Auto Call Back on Busy

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set Auto Call Back on Busy:

• Press the 'Call Back' Key on Busy Tone.

OR
• Dial 2 on Busy Tone.
• You get confirmatory message "Auto Call Back Set" on the phone's display. The LED of the DSS Key will
be turned on.
• Go idle.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 339

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To cancel Auto Call Back on Busy:

• Press the 'Call Back' Key.

OR
• Dial 102
• You get confirmatory message "Auto Call Back Canceled" on the phone's display. The LED of the DSS
Key will be turned off.
• Go idle.

For SLT Users

To set Auto Call Back on Busy:

• On Busy Tone.
• Dial 2.
• You get confirmatory tone
• Replace handset.

To cancel Auto Call Back:

• Pick up the handset.

• Dial 102.
• You get confirmatory tone.
• Replace handset.

Auto Call Back on No Reply

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set Auto Call Back on No Reply:

• Press the 'Call Back' Key on Ring Back Tone.

OR
• Dial 2 on Ring Back Tone.
• You get confirmatory message "Auto Call Back Set" on the phone's display. The LED of the DSS Key will
be turned on.
• Go idle.

To cancel Auto Call Back on No Reply:

• Press the 'Call Back' Key again.

OR
• Dial 102.
• You get confirmatory message "Auto Call Back Canceled" on the phone's display. The LED of the DSS
Key will be turned off.
• Go idle.

For SLT Users

To set Auto Call Back on No Reply:

• On Ring Back Tone

• Dial 2.

340 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • You get confirmatory tone
• Replace handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.

To cancel Auto Call Back on No Reply:

• Pick up the handset.

• Dial 102.
• You get confirmatory tone.
• Replace handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.

If you hear an error tone while setting an Auto Call Back request, it is likely that the system already has 50
pending requests and is unable to accept yours.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 341

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Auto Redial

What's this?
The Auto Redial feature retries a call automatically if the dialed number is busy. It repeatedly checks the busy line
till it is free. When the called number is no longer busy, the extension of the caller rings.

Auto Redial saves time and the effort of repeatedly dialing the entire phone number over and over until the called
party gets off the phone.

The Auto Redial feature is supported for external numbers only.

How it works
When an extension user dials a number and gets a busy tone, the user may set Auto Redial. When Auto Redial is
set,

• the ETERNITY NE keeps trying the dialed number.

• It waits for the 'Dial Tone Wait Timer8' to expire to begin sensing the dial tone from the CO Network. This
timer is configurable, and is set to 3 seconds as default.

• On sensing the dial tone the ETERNITY NE will dial out the requested number and will wait until the 'Ring
Back Tone Wait Timer9' expires to sense the Ring Back Tone from the requested number. This timer is
configurable and is set to 60 seconds as default.

• If the system does not detect Ring Back Tone for 60 seconds, it releases the trunk and tries again after
some time. If the system detects a busy tone, it releases the trunk and redials the number automatically
after some time. This process is repeated until the system detects the Ring Back Tone.

• When the ETERNITY NE detects the Ring Back Tone instead of the Busy Tone, it will ring on the
extension that set Auto Redial. The extension will ring for the duration of the 'Redial Ring Timer10'. This
timer is configurable and is set to 45 seconds as default.

• The extension must go OFF-Hook to get connected to the remote party.

• If the extension is in the middle of any activity such as dialing, ringing or speech, the ETERNITY NE will
suspend Auto Redial until the extension becomes idle again. After which it dials the requested number
again.

Two types of Auto Redial are supported by the ETERNITY NE - Auto Redial (normal) and Auto Redial 'Priority' -
that differ from each other in terms of the number of redial attempts and the interval between attempts.

8. Time for which ETERNITY waits to sense the dial tone from the PSTN/CO Network. Valid range of the timer: 000 to 255 seconds.
Default: 003 seconds.
9. Time for which ETERNITY waits to sense the RBT from the PSTN/CO Network after dialing the requested number. This timer is
particularly relevant to CO ports. Valid range of the timer: 000 to 255 seconds. Default: 060 seconds.
10. Time for which the extension that has requested Auto Redial should ring. The valid range of the timer: 000 to 255 seconds. Default:
045 seconds.

342 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Auto Redial (normal): The system is configured by default to make 5 attempts to redial at an interval of 45
seconds (default) between each attempt. Both, the number of attempts as well as the duration of the
interval can be changed match User preference, e.g.: decreasing the number of attempts to 3 and
increasing the interval to 60 seconds.

• Auto Redial 'Priority': the system makes a greater number of attempts to redial and the duration of the
interval between each attempt is less. By default, the system is configured to make 20 redial attempts at
intervals of 20 seconds. The number of attempts as well as duration of the interval are configurable, e.g.:
number of attempts can be set to 30 and the interval to 15 seconds.

To change the number of redial attempts and the interval between them, you must configure the Auto Redial Count
and the Auto Redial Timer respectively. In addition to these, the system has three other related timers, which can
be configured to match User preference:

• Auto Redial Dial Tone Wait Timer

• Auto Redial Ring Back Tone (RBT) Wait Timer

• Auto Redial Ring Timer

• An extension user can request Auto Redial for multiple numbers at a time from the same extension and
more than one extension can attempt auto redial simultaneously.

• The system uses the same trunk access code you used for dialing the number. If you dialed ‘0’, the
system grabs one of the free trunks selected for dialing ‘0’.

• If the number was dialed the first time using selective trunk access, the system will use the same trunk
for Auto Redial.

• If the extension has 'Dynamic Lock', and you have set the 'Auto Redial', the system will check the Toll
control as per dynamic lock level.

Auto Redial may not work well on CO trunks, as its functioning greatly depends on line condition. Unlike
Mobile and SIP trunks, the line condition of Analog trunks may not always measure up to the standard
requirement for Auto Redial to function.

How to configure
For Auto Redial to work, the you must:

• Enable the features 'Auto Redial' and 'Auto Redial Priority' in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the
extensions to which this feature is to be allowed.

By default, none of the extensions of ETERNITY NE are allowed Auto Redial and Auto Redial Priority in
their Class of Service. You must enable it to allow these features to the extensions.

For instructions on enabling/disabling this feature on the different extension types, refer the topics “SLT
Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”, “SIP Extensions”under Basic Settings.

• Change the 'Auto Redial Normal/Priority Count' and the 'Auto Redial Normal/Priority Timer' to match User
preference. This will change the number of redial attempts made by the system and the interval between
them.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 343

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If required, also change other related Timers such as Auto Redial Dial Tone Wait Timer, Auto Redial Ring
Back Tone (RBT) Wait Timer, Auto Redial Ring Timer.

To change Auto Redial Counts and Timers:

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the link System Timers and Counts on the left side panel to open the page.

• Change the Count and Timer of the type of Auto Redial - Normal or Priority - you have set.

• You may change any of the related timers - Auto Redial Dial Tone Wait Timer, Auto Redial Ring Back Tone
(RBT) Wait Timer, Auto Redial Ring Timer - as per your preferences on this page.

• Click Submit button to save changes.

• If the ETERNITY NE is installed in Australia, please ensure that:

i. The Timer for Auto Redial Normal as well as Priority must be set to more than 5 seconds.
ii. The Auto Redial Priority Count should be set to less than 15.

344 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set Auto Redial:

• When the external number you are trying is busy,

• Go ON-Hook on Busy Tone.
• Press the DSS Key assigned to 'Auto Redial' function.
OR
• Dial 17.
• Go Idle.

To cancel Auto Redial:

• Press DSS Key assigned to Cancel Auto Redial function.

OR
• Dial 1070.

For SLT Users

To set Auto Redial

• When the external number you are trying is busy,

• Go ON-Hook on Busy Tone.
• Dial 17.
• Replace handset.

To cancel Auto Redial:

• Pick up the handset.

• Dial 1070.
• Replace handset.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 345

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Number Translation

What's this?
ETERNITY NE offers connectivity to different networks—CO, GSM/UMTS, VoIP—each having a different
numbering plan. For example, the GSM/UMTS network requires area codes to be dialed also for local numbers,
whereas CO requires dialing of area codes for long distance calls.

When ETERNITY NE is connected to more than one network, outgoing calls may be routed through any of these
networks, depending on the outgoing call routing configured in the system. However, as extension users do not
know through which telecom network their calls will be routed, they cannot be expected to dial numbers according
to the numbering plan of the destination networks.

The feature, Automatic Number Translation of ETERNITY NE takes care of this. It modifies the dialed numbers or
part thereof to match with the specific route numbering plan understood by the destination network (CO, GSM/
UMTS VoIP). This includes adding or stripping of country codes and area codes.

For example, when an extension user dials a local landline number, Automatic Number Translation can be
configured such that the ETERNITY prefixes the number with the appropriate country-area code when it routes the
call through the GSM/UMTS network.

How it works
Automatic Number Translation makes use of the Automatic Number Translation Table which comprises:

• Dialed Number Strings - the numbers dialed by the extension users

• Substitute Number Strings - the corresponding numbers for the Dialed Numbers that the system will dial
out as the destination numbers instead of the dialed numbers.

The Dialed and Substitute Number strings must be configured, and the Table must be applied to the trunk ports,
through which calls are routed to the destination networks. The trunk ports may be CO Trunks, Mobile, SIP,
depending on system configuration.

You can configure different 8 Automatic Number Translation Tables; each table accommodates 32 Dialed Number
strings and their corresponding Substitute number strings. A trunk port can be assigned only 1 Table.

For example:

• Automatic Number Translation (ANT) Table-1 has '95' stored as Dialed Number string in Index-1 and '91'
as the corresponding Substitute Number string at Index-1.

• The ANT Table-1 is assigned to Mobile port 1.

• When extension user A dials '952652630555', the system

• detects the outgoing trunks assigned to Extension A.

• checks if Automatic Number Translation feature is enabled on the outgoing trunks selected for
Extension A.

346 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • matches the dialed number '952652630555' with those in the Dialed Number List applied to the
outgoing trunks of Extension A. As a match is found, the system
• checks for the corresponding Substitute Number strings.
• substitutes '95' with '91'
• dials out the number as '912652630555' from the Mobile port 1.

Automatic Number Translation also forms the basis of “Multi-Stage Dialing”.

How to configure
The working of the Automatic Number Translation feature is controlled by two parameters: 'Automatic Number
Translation Table' and 'Automatic Number Translation flag' in the outgoing trunks.

You must first configure the Dialed Number strings and the Substitute Number strings in the Automatic Number
Translation Table, and assign the configured Table to the trunks, on which you want to enable this feature.

Decide the number of ANT tables you need to configure. You can configure 8 different ANT Tables, with a
maximum of 32 number strings in each.

For your convenience, draw three-column tables on paper. In each table, enter the Index numbers 1 to 32 in the
first column, Dialed Number in the second column, and Substitute Number in the third column.

Enter the Dialed Numbers and their corresponding Substitute Numbers against each Index number. For instance, if
you entered '95' as the Dialed Number at Index 1 and its Substitute Number string '91' must be entered at Index 1.

Decide which of the trunks are to be assigned the Automatic Number Translation feature and configure Automatic
Number Translation on those trunks.

To configure Automatic Number Translation,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 347

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Automatic Number Translation link under Advanced Settings.

• The Automatic Number Table 1 appears on this page.

348 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • In the Table, enter the Dialed Number strings and their corresponding Substitute Number strings.

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save settings.

• To configure another table, click the Table Number tab and enter the dialed and substitute number strings.

• To enable Automatic Number Translation on a trunk, click Basic Settings link.

• Click the desired Trunk type: CO, Mobile, SIP.

• Select the trunk port number by clicking the tab.

• On the trunk page, click the Automatic Number Translation (ANT) option to expand.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 349

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Assign the ANT Table number you configured for this trunk from the list box.

Select OFF if you want to disable ANT on this trunk. Default: OFF

You can also configure the ANT Table number you select for this trunk from this page by clicking the arrow
icon. This will open the ANT Table Number you selected for this trunk.

• Click Submit to save settings.

• You may log out of Jives.

350 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Barge-In

What's this?
Barge-In allows you to break into an on-going conversation between two extension users, between an extension
user and an external caller as well.

Barge-In can be used by Operators to transfer Incoming calls to busy extensions. The Operator can put the caller
on hold, barge into the busy extension to inform about the call, and then transfer the call.

Barge-In can be used by a Boss to interrupt the secretary's busy extension.

ETERNITY offers flexibility to allow/deny Barge-In feature to an extension user, i.e. allow the extension user to
barge into on-going conversations. It also provides the flexibility to prevent conversations of extension users from
being barged in, referred to as Privacy against Barge-In.

How it works
• A, B and C are users of the system.

• A and B are talking to each other.

• C calls A.

• C gets busy tone.

• C dials Barge-In feature code.

• C gets RBT and A gets beeps for Barge-in timer. (By default, 10 seconds)

• During the beeps, A may press 'Flash' to answer the call.

• If A does not respond till the end of the Barge-In Timer (set to 10 seconds, by default), A gets connected to
C. B is put on hold and is given hold-on music.

• If B disconnects while A and C are in speech, the held call between A and B is cleared.

• If B keeps holding the call and C disconnects, the call between A and C is cleared and A will be in speech
with B.

• If B keeps holding the call and A disconnects. B and C will be in speech.

• After Raid, if A goes ON-hook, before the expiry of the Barge-In Timer, C gets RBT and A gets a ring.

Feature Interactions
• Call States:

• Barge-In works only if the dialed extension is busy. The dialed extension may be busy with another
extension or trunk (external number).

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 351

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Barge-In works only if the user about to be barged in is in a two-way normal speech with another user
or external party.

• It will not work if the busy signal is due to the user being OFF-Hook, or in the middle of dialing, or
accessing a feature of the PBX.

• “Call Toggle”: Once A and C comes in speech with each other, A can toggle between B and C using Call
Toggle feature.

• Privacy against Barge-In: If the feature 'Privacy against Barge-in is enabled for an extension, it cannot be
barged into.

• “Priority”: No Interaction with Barge-In. If 'A' has lower priority than 'B' but has Barge-In enabled; A can
barge in B.

• “Do Not Disturb (DND)”: Barge-In will not work if the called user has set DND. If 'A' has set DND. A is
busy with C. B calls A. B cannot barge in A.

How to configure
The functioning of this feature is controlled by three parameters, 'Barge-In', 'Privacy against Barge-In' and 'Barge-In
Timer'.

Barge-In and Privacy against Barge-In

First decide which of the extensions are to be allowed Barge-In and the extension that are to be protected against
Barge-In.

By default, all extension port types have Barge-In and Privacy from Barge-In disabled in their Class of Service.

While it makes sense to offer all extensions Barge-In, providing Privacy from Barge-In also to all extensions will not
serve the purpose of Barge-In.

Decide which extensions are to be allowed 'Barge-In', and which are to be allowed 'Privacy from Barge-In' and
enable these features in their Class of Service for the Day and Night.

Refer the topic “Class of Service (COS)” for instructions.

Barge-In Timer
Barge-In Timer is the time after which the caller gets connected to the called party. By default the Timer is set to 10
seconds. To configure the Barge-In Timer, see Other Features under “System Timers and Counts”.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

When dialed extension is busy,
• Press DSS Key assigned to Barge-In
OR
• Dial 411 on busy tone

352 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For SLT Users
When dialed extension is busy,
• Dial 4 on busy tone

11. This default feature access code can be changed to suit your preference. Refer the topic “Access Codes”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 353

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 BCCH Selection

What's this?
BCCH Selection feature enables you to lock the Mobile Port of ETERNITY to a particular cell or channel or BTS
(Base Transceiver Station) to ensure better network availability, and minimize call drops due to bad signal/ network
failure, etc.

This feature is supported when SIMCOM-2G engine (SIM340-B01 or higher) or SIMCOM-3G engine is
installed in ETERNITY’s Mobile Card.

How it works
In the GSM network, each BTS is assigned one particular channel called as ARFCN (Absolute Radio Frequency
Channel Number), which is transmitted by BTS in BCCH (Broadcast Control Channel).

Now, when ETERNITY is switched on, the Mobile Port gets registered with the network on a particular BTS which
has the highest signal strength. However, the signal strength is not consistent. It keeps fluctuating, resulting in call
drop or poor voice quality.

Therefore, to avoid this, ETERNITY enables you to lock the Mobile Port to a particular cell or channel manually
after checking Signal Strength and Signal Quality of each cell.

How to configure
You can lock Mobile Port to a cell or a channel only through Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click Advanced Settings.

• Click the link Mobile Trunks.

354 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click BCCH Locking under Mobile Trunk to open the page.

• The page displays the following parameters:

• Mobile Port Number: This is number of the Mobile port for which BCCH Selection status is displayed.
You can choose another Mobile Port number from the box. The page will display the BCCH Selection
related parameters for the selected mobile port.

• Mobile Port Name: This is the name you have assigned to the Mobile port in the Mobile port
parameters.

• Mobile Port Status: The current state of the Mobile Port is displayed in this field. Given below is the
description of the various status indication messages that will appear in this field.

STATUS DESCRIPTION

Disabled Displayed when Mobile Port is disabled.

GSM Displayed when GSM module is in initialization state i.e. before SIM
Initialization detection.

SIM Absent Displayed when SIM Card is not detected by the system.

SIM PIN wrong Displayed when wrong SIM PIN is issued.

SIM PUK Displayed when SIM PUK is required.

required

Registering Displayed when the Mobile Port is in registration process with the Network.

Idle Displayed when the Mobile Port is registered with the Network and it is
free.

Busy Displayed when any active call is present on the Mobile Port.

• BCCH Locking Status: The current BCCH Locking status of the mobile port is displayed in this field.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 355

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Given below is a description of the various BCCH Locking status indication messages that will appear
in this field.

STATUS DESCRIPTION

Trying to Lock Displayed when user selects Manual BCCH Locking as 'No' from 'Yes' and
module is in initialization process after system or module restart.

Trying to lock on Displayed when BCCH Locking is selected as Manual and the Mobile Port is in
BCCH xxxxx the registration process with the Network. xxxxx is the BCCH selected by the
user for locking the cell.

Manually Locked Displayed when BCCH Locking is selected as Manual and Mobile Port is
on BCCH xxxxx successfully registered with the Network. xxxxx is the BCCH selected by the user
for locking the cell.

Auto Locked on Displayed when BCCH Locking is selected as Auto and Mobile Port is
BCCH xxxxx successfully registered with the Network. xxxxx is the BCCH of the Main Cell.
xxxxx is updated as per the changes in the Main Cell's BCCH.

• Main Cell- Bit Error Rate (%): Bit Error Rate of the Main Cell is displayed in this field. Bit Error Rate
(BER) is the percentage of received bits on a digital link that are in error relative to the number of bits
received. Bit Error Rate is calculated from the received signal quality.

• Manual BCCH Locking: This parameter allows you to lock the Mobile Port to a particular cell of your
preference. By default, manual BCCH locking is set to 'No'. When manual BCCH locking is set to 'No',
Mobile Port gets locked to the cell as per the highest signal strength. Select 'Yes' if you want to lock the
Mobile Port to the particular cell selected by you.

• Auto Refresh: By clicking this button, BCCH Selection page is refreshed automatically and all its
parameters are downloaded automatically after every 15 seconds. By default, Auto Refresh button is
enabled.

• Stop Auto Refresh: By clicking this button, you can stop the system from automatically refreshing the
BCCH Selection page every 15 seconds. When you stop Auto Refresh, you must click the link 'Refresh' at
the bottom of this page to refresh the page whenever you want

• Cells: Indicates the cells with which the Mobile Port can be locked. You can decide to lock the Mobile Port
with a particular cell after considering the following cell related parameters, which appear on the page:

• MCC-MNC: In this field, MCC-MNC of a cell is displayed. Mobile Country Code (MCC) is a three digit
number uniquely identifying a country and Mobile Network Code (MNC) is either a two or three digit
number used to identify a given network from within a specific country.

• LAC (Location Area Code): In this field, LAC (Location Area Code) is displayed. LAC uniquely
identifies a location area within a GSM PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network). The maximum length of
LAC is 16 bits ranging from 0 to 65535. LAC is displayed in hexadecimal characters for SIMCOM-2G.
For SIMCOM-3G engine, LAC is displayed in decimal digits which ranges from 00000 to 65535.

• Cell ID: In this field, Cell ID is displayed. It is a 16-bit identifier that identifies the cell. Cell ID is
displayed in hexadecimal characters for SIMCOM-2G engines which ranges from 0000 to FFFF. For
SIMCOM-3G engine, Cell ID is displayed in decimal digits which ranges from 00000 to 65535.

356 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • BSIC (Base Station Identification Code): In this field, BSIC (Base Station Identification Code) is
displayed. BSIC allows a mobile extension to distinguish between different neighboring base stations.
BSIC is a three-digit value ranging from 0 to 255.

• BCCH (Broadcast Control Channel): In this field, the BCCH value of the cell is displayed. BCCH
defines the frequency channel number.

• Receive Level: In this field, the Receive Signal Strength level of the cell is displayed. It is the average
Receive Signal Strength of the cell. Its value ranges from -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

• Manual Cell Locking: This radio button is for locking a Mobile Port to a selected cell manually.

Now, to lock a Mobile Port to a particular cell,

• Select the desired Mobile Port Number (if your system has two Mobile Ports).
• Set the parameter Manual BCCH Locking to 'Yes'.

• Go to the Cell to which you want to lock the Mobile Port you selected.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 357

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select the radio button Manual Cell Locking of that Cell.

• Click Submit button.

• The BCCH Locking for the selected Mobile Port will appear on this page, if Auto Refresh is enabled.

• If you have stopped Auto Refresh, click Refresh at the bottom of the page to refresh the page and view the
current BCCH Locking settings of the selected Mobile port.

• You may now log out of Jeeves.

Example:
Consider the following example when using this feature:

Problem:
• ETERNITY is installed in roaming area, where more than one network is available, network A and network
B.

• Mobile Network Selection is set to 'Manual' mode, network A is selected as the first priority and network B
is selected as the second priority.

• The Mobile Port gets registered with network A. After registration, the user locks the Mobile Port to one of
the cells of network A.

• After registration, if the module or the system restarts or gets de-registered from the network, module
starts registration process again.

• While re-registering, ETERNITY tries to lock the Mobile Port to the last selected cell of network A.

358 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If network A is unavailable then the Mobile Port will not get registered with the network.

Solution:
• In this situation, user should set Manual BCCH locking mode to 'No' to register Mobile Port with the
suitable network automatically.

• Later, the user can set the Manual BCCH locking mode to 'Yes' and lock the Mobile Port to the desired cell
after assessing the cell information.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 359

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Behind the PBX Application

What's this?
It is common for small and medium PBXs to be connected to larger PBX systems, where the trunks of the larger
PBX are connected to the extension ports of the smaller system. This is usually done for the purpose of expanding
the capacity of the large PBX already in use.

Such configurations are referred to as 'Behind the PBX Application'.

How it works
Consider the following illustration.

PBX-A is connected behind ETERNITY NE. In this 'Behind the PBX' configuration, the Trunk Lines T4, T5, T6 of
ETERNITY NE are connected to the Extensions (SLT) S4, S5, S6 of PBX-A.

However, Trunk lines T1 and T2 of PBX-A are connected directly to the CO.

In such application scenarios, implementing toll control restrictions for the trunks becomes difficult for ETERNITY
NE.

For example: Extension Number 21 of ETERNITY NE in the above illustration is not allowed the facility of long
distance dialing. It has access to all the CO trunks.

When the user of Extension 21 wants to access T1, T2 or T3 (which are direct trunks from the CO to ETERNITY
NE) the user dials '0' (or the Trunk Access Code assigned) and gets CO dial tone. When the user dials the number,
ETERNITY NE applies Toll Control.

Similarly, when the user of Extension 21 tries to grab a trunk T4, T5 or T6 (which are connected to extensions of
PBX-A) by dialing Trunk Access Code '0', the user gets the dial tone of PBX-A. This means, the user of Extension
21 must dial '0' again to grab CO dial tone of the T1 or T2 connected to PBX-A.

However, when the user dials '0' again, ETERNITY NE applies Toll Control. It detects the dialed number as ‘00’ and
interprets this as an attempt to dial a long distance number. Since Extension 21 is not allowed long distance dialing
in its Toll Control, ETERNITY NE rejects dialing on the trunk and plays an error tone to Extension 21.

360 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To resolve this, ETERNITY NE provides a configurable Pre-PSTN Digit Count (PPDC) for each CO trunk.

The PPDC defines the number of digits to be dialed by the extensions to reach the CO. The system applies Toll
Control check on extensions only after checking the PPDC configured for the CO.

On trunks that are connected to another PBX, in this case, T4, T5, and T6, PPDC must be configured with the
same number of digits as the Trunk Access Codes assigned for PBX-A. For example, if the Trunk Access Code is
a single digit number '0', the PPDC on must be configured as '1'. If the Trunk Access Code is a two-digit number,
61, the PPDC should be configured as '2'.

On trunks directly connected to the CO, i.e. T1, T2, T3 of ETERNITY NE, the PPDC must be configured as ‘0’.

To take the above example further, when PPDC is configured as ‘1’ on T4, T5 and T6, when the user of Extension
21 dials ‘0’ followed by another ‘0’ to grab T1 or T2 trunk of PBX-A, the system will check the PPDC configured on
the trunk. On finding ‘1’ the system will ignore the first 0 dialed by the extension, and let the extension user grab T1
or T2 by considering the second ‘0’. The Extension user will get the CO dial tone from T1 or T2 of PBX-A.

How to configure
The PPDC should be configured only for 'Behind the PBX Applications'. For all normal applications, this
count must be set to '0' for all the trunks. Otherwise, external number dialing may be hampered. Features
like Least Cost Routing and Station Message Detail Recording will also be affected.

For CO Trunks that are directly connected to the CO, PPDC must be configured as ‘0’.

For CO Trunks that are connected to the extensions of another PBX, PPDC must be configured as per the number
of digits in the Trunk Access Codes defined for the second PBX.

To configure, PPDC on a CO Trunk port,

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click Basic Settings link.

• Click CO Trunks link.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 361

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the More button to view all parameters on this page.

• Click the number of the CO trunk you want to assign PPDC ‘0’ (i.e. trunk connected directly to the CO) by
clicking on the CO trunk number tab.

• The parameters of the CO trunk tab you selected appear.

362 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Hardware to expand options.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 363

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • For the option, Pre PSTN Digit Count (PPDC), select 0.

• Click Submit to save.

• Similarly, click the tab of the CO trunks you want to assign PPDC count from 1 to 6 (i.e. trunks connected
to the extensions of another PBX, and assign the appropriate PPDC count to the trunk. This would depend
on the number digits in the Trunk Access Code defined for the trunks in the other PBX. If the TAC is single
digit, select '1'. If TAC is double or triple digit, select '2' or '3' as applicable as the PPDC.

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save your settings.

• To log off, click Logout.

364 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Back on Trunk Ports

What's this?
The feature Call Back on Trunk Ports is used to respond to missed calls from particular numbers on the different
trunk ports of ETERNITY: Two-wire Trunks, Mobile trunks and SIP Trunks.

When the Call Back feature is enabled on a trunk port, and there is a missed call on that trunk port, the ETERNITY
determines if the calling number is eligible for a call back or not. It calls back the same number or an alternative
number configured for that number, either from the port on which it was received or from a different port, depending
on the configuration. ETERNITY can be configured to choose the most cost effective line to call back the missed
call numbers.

Employees at remote locations can use this feature to have the ETERNITY installed in their office call them back,
thereby saving on charges (e.g. roaming charges on mobile calls), where applicable.

How it works
For this feature to work:

• Call Back must be enabled on the desired Trunk Port(s).

• The ‘Call Back Timer’ may be configured. When the caller disconnects within the Call Back Timer, the Call
Back will be applied for that number.

• You must define ‘Call Back to’, i.e. you must select whether the number which must be called back should
be the same CLI number as on the received call or an alternative number.

• The CLI of those callers whom the system should call back as well must be configured in a List. Also, if you
want the call back to be made to an alternative number, the alternative number must also be configured in
a list.

• You must select the trunks through which the call back should be made. If necessary, you may enable
Least Cost Routing on the outgoing trunks you selected for call back.

• Select a ‘Call Back Mode’, i.e. how the call should be routed when the call back is answered by the remote
party; whether it should be routed as Operator, DID, or DISA.

Following is an example of a Call Back on a mobile port, when the above parameters are configured.

• Caller A calls mobile port 1.

• The system checks if the Call Back is enabled on mobile port 1.

• The flag is enabled.

• The system matches the CLI of A with the Call Back profile assigned to the mobile port 1 to determine if
the calling number is eligible for a call back.

• A match is found in the list configured in the Call Back profile.12

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 365

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The system waits for the period of the Call Back Timer (configurable, default: 10 seconds).

• A must disconnect before the expiry of the Call Back Timer so that the system can treat it as a Missed Call.

• If A disconnects within the Call Back Timer, the system applies Call Back for A’s number.

• The system checks the ‘Call Back to’ parameter in the Call Back profile, to determine whether it has to call
back the same number or an alternative number.

• If alternative number is configured as ‘Call Back to’, the system checks the list of alternative numbers. As
the CLI of A matches with the number in the list, the corresponding alternative number configured for A’s
CLI number.

• The system checks if the number is to be called from the same trunk port or a different group of trunks.

• If the same trunk port is configured as outgoing route, the system will make a call to the number using
mobile port 1.

• If a different group of trunks has been assigned, the system will check if Least Cost Routing is enabled on
these trunks and accordingly make the call back accordingly.

• When A answers the call,

• The system checks the type of Call Back Mode enabled in the Call Back Profile assigned to mobile port 1
(the port on which the call back request was made).

Four scenarios are possible:

1. “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” is enabled as Call Back Mode on mobile port 1.

• A gets dial tone of ETERNITY.

• A can now use DID feature.

2. 'Pin Authentication - Multiple Calls' or 'CLI Authentication - Multiple Calls' is enabled as Call Back Mode
on mobile port 1.

• A gets dial tone of ETERNITY.

• A can now reach any extension or trunk of ETERNITY from DISA Mode.

3. 'CLI Authentication - Single Call Answer Signaling' is enabled as Call Back Mode on mobile port 1.

• A gets dial tone of another trunk of ETERNITY.

• A can make calls from the trunk.

4. ‘Operator’ is enabled as Call Back Mode on mobile port 1.

• A gets Ring Back Tone.

12. If the system does not find a match for the CLI of the caller in the list, the 'Call Back' feature will not be appli-
cable and the call will be processed according to the normal incoming call logic.

366 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The system lands the call on the Operator extension assigned to mobile port 1.

Read the topics “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)”, “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” and “Configuring
'Operator'” to know more about the call respective call logic.

• Since this feature is essentially for callers, they must be aware of its functioning to be able to use it, i.e.
disconnect the call within the Call Back Timer. If the caller does not disconnect within the Call Back
Timer, the call will be processed according to the normal incoming call logic.

• ETERNITY NE supports only one call back request at a time, for one trunk port. The second incoming
call on that trunk port will be processed by the system as per normal incoming call routing.

• For call back requests made from a group of trunks, when any of these trunks is busy, ETERNITY will
support only the last call back request in the group. Previous requests will be processed as per the
normal incoming call management logic.

How to configure
For this feature to function, you must configure the Call Back Profiles and assign them to each Trunk port type (CO,
Mobile, SIP) on which you want to use this feature.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click Basic Settings link to expand.

• Select the desired Trunk port type. For example CO Trunks.

• The CO trunk page opens. Select the number of the CO trunk you want to configure by clicking the trunk
number tab.

• Click the Call Back link to expand.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 367

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select the Call Back Profile you want to apply to this trunk.

• Now, configure the Call Back Profile you selected by clicking the settings icon.

• The Call Back Profile opens in a new window.

368 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Configure the profile parameters in this window.

• Set the Call Back Timer to the desired duration. This is the duration for which the system waits for the
caller to disconnect the call after the system has found a matching number for the caller’s CLI in the list
you configured.

When the caller disconnects within Call Back Timer, the system applies Call Back on the port. If the caller
does not disconnect within the Call Back Timer, the incoming call management logic is applied for the call
on the trunk port.

The range of this timer is from 01 to 99 seconds. By default, it is set to 10 seconds.

• Select the number which the system must Call Back To. You may select:

• Call Back on same number from which missed call is received. If you select this option, you must
configure the numbers eligible for call back in the list Program the numbers for which call back is to
be provided.

• Call back on alternative number if programmed. If you select this option, for each number you
configured as eligible for call back, you must configure an alternative number in the list Program
alternate number in respective row.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 369

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When a missed call is eligible for call back (matches with list you configured), the 'Call Back to'
parameter determines the number on which the call back is to be made, i.e. whether on the same
number from which the missed call is received or on a different number.

In countries where CLI received on trunks can be dialed out without any modification, you may select
‘CLI Number’ as ‘Call Back to’ option.

In countries where CLI received on trunks cannot be dialed without modification, you may select
“Alternate Number’ as the ‘Call Back to’ option. You may also select ‘Alternate Number’ as Call Back
on when you want the call back to be made to a different number.

• Configure Trunk Selection on Call Back. This parameter determines the trunk port to be used to make
call back.The call back can be made using the same port or a group of trunks.

• Select Call Back from same port from which missed call is received, to use the same port to make
the call back.

• To make the call back using a group of trunks, select Call Back from trunks, and double click this field
to select the trunks.

A multiple selection box opens.

On the left, the trunks appear with their names (if configured in “Naming Trunks”) and port numbers in a
sequence, starting with CO trunks, followed by Mobile trunks and SIP trunks.

• To select a trunk, place your cursor on the desired trunk, and click the Select>> button.
Or
• Press the ctrl key and click the left mouse button to select multiple trunks.

• You may change the sequence of the trunks you selected, if required, using the Up and Down arrow
buttons on the right display box.

• You can also delete trunks from the ones you have selected.

• You may enable Rotation, if you have selected more than one trunk. Default: Disabled.

Rotation has no relevance if only one member trunk is selected.

370 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click OK. The multiple selection box closes.

• To apply Least Cost Routing on the trunks, select desired LCR method from the combo box: Number-
based, Time-based, Time+Number based, Serivce Provider based. Configure LCR method that you
selected for the trunk group, if not already done.

• Select the Call Back Mode, from the options; how a ‘Call Back’ call answered by the remote party should
be routed:

• Operator: When the remote party answers the Call Back call, the system will route the call to the
Operator13.

• DID: The system will process the call as per the DID call logic - give a dial tone to the remote party, who
can now call any extension. Refer the feature description for “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)”.

• PIN Authentication-Multiple Calls: The system will process the call as per DISA call logic - allow
remote party to enter DISA mode with PIN-Authentication. On successful authentication (DISA Login)
the user is allowed to make calls or use features as allowed to him/her.

• CLI Authentication-Multiple Calls: The system will process the call as per DISA call logic, allowing
the remote party to enter DISA mode with CLI Authentication-Multiple calls as authentication method
and level of access.

• CLI Authentication-Single Call-Answer Signaling: The system will process the call as per DISA call
logic, allowing the remote party to enter DISA mode with CLI Authentication-Single call as
authentication method and level of access. Refer the feature description for “Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)”.

By default, Operator is selected as the Call Back Mode.

• Configure the call back number lists.

• In the column Program the numbers for which call back is to be provided, enter the numbers that
are eligible for call back. The system checks the CLI of the caller with this list to determine if the caller
is eligible for a call back.

Number strings configured in this list are compared with the actual received CLI.

The number string configured in this list may be shorter than the number string received as CLI, but
only if the configured number string completely matches with the received CLI from the right towards
left, the system will consider it as a complete match.

For example, if the configured string is 263055 and the number string received in the CLI is
2652630555, the system will consider it a complete match. If the received CLI 912652630555, the
system will consider this caller too as eligible for a call back. Thus any CLI received with 263055 as the
last 7 digits will be considered as match found.

• In the column Program alternate number in respective rows, enter the numbers that the system
must call back. When the system finds a missed call eligible for a call back, it will make the call back on
the basis of the ‘Call Back to’ option you selected and the alternate number list.

13. 'Operator' is the extension which is assigned to the Mobile port.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 371

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For each number string you entered in the previous list, enter a corresponding alternative number, if:

• you have selected ‘Call back on same CLI number on which missed call is received’ as the ‘Call
Back to’ option, BUT the CLI received cannot be dialed out without modification. In such a case,
modify the CLI received and enter the string in the alternate number List.14

OR

• you have selected ‘Call Back on alternate number’ as ‘Call Back to’ option. In this case, configure
the alternative number for the CLI received in the alternate number list.

The modified CLI or the Alternate number should be entered in the same row as the corresponding
received CLI number. For example, for the received CLI number string entered in row 2, enter the
corresponding modified CLI/Alternate number string in row 2.

When the CLI received matches with the number string entered in row 2 of the alternate number list,
the call back will be made using the (modified/Alternate) number stored at row 2 of this List.

If you have selected ‘Alternate Number’ as ‘Call Back to’ option, but do not want to provide alternative
numbers to call back particular callers (i.e. CLI received), configure the CLI of these callers in the first list but
keep the corresponding rows in the alternative number list blank.

• Click Submit to save Call Back on Trunk.

• To configure Call Back on other trunk port types, go to “Mobile Trunks” and “SIP Trunks” under Basic
Settings, and follow the same instructions as above.

14. Where the CLI received can be dialed out without any modification, you do not need to configure any number string in the Alternate
number List.

372 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Budget

What's this?
Call Budget is a cost control feature that allows you to keep a tab on the total cost of phone call made by extension
users.

With this feature, each extension can be allotted a 'budget' limit for outgoing calls, which is automatically reloaded
at the start of every month.

Long distance calls form a major part of the increased cost of telephone calls. Though excessive use or misuse of
long distance dialing can be restricted using Toll Control, there may be extension users whose nature of work
requires them to make long distance calls. Instead of denying them the facility, their telephone bill can be limited to
a certain amount using Call Budget.

With a Call Budget allotted to the extension, the user is free to make calls as long as s/he does not cross the budget
limit. Once the user exceeds the budget limit, the extension can be denied access to long distance dialing.

The extension user can be assigned a fresh budget, after which s/he can resume making long distance calls.

Call Budget can be enabled on all the extensions as well as on selected extensions. Each extension can be
assigned a different amount depending on user requirement.

How it works
When an extension allotted Call Budget makes a call,

• The system checks the current call budget amount of the extension.

• If the consumed amount is within the budget limit allotted to the extension,

• The system allows the extension to make the call as per the “Toll Control Levels” assigned to it.

• After the call ends, the system calculates and adds the call amount to the extension's account. Thus it
calculates and updates the total cost of calls made from the phone.

• If the consumed amount exceeds the budget limit allotted to the extension,

• The system considers this as Call Budget exhausted.

• The system allows the extension to make the call as per the Toll Control-Call Budget Consumed
assigned to the extension.

• After the call ends, the system calculates and adds the call amount to the extension's account.

• Until a new Call Budget is allocated to the extension user, the extension user can make calls only as per
Toll Control assigned for the Call Budget Consumed state.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 373

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Once a new Call Budget is allocated, the extension user can make calls as per the “Toll Control” assigned
to the extension.

• If the budget exceeds anytime during the month, and if no fresh budget amount is allotted, the system
allows calls to be made as per the Toll Control for Calls Allowed When Call Budget is Consumed till the
end of the month. From the 1st day of the following month, the system automatically reloads the budget
amount. The extension can now make calls.

• The Call Budget allotted to extension is valid for one month. The system automatically reloads the budget
at the start of every month.

• The budget amount can be changed or allotted afresh to extensions from the System Administrator (SA)
mode, at any time. The Call Budget allotted by the System Administrator will be reloaded in the following
month.

• Call Budget is not based on real time (online) call cost calculation. The ETERNITY calculates the call
cost only after the call has ended.

• So, if the Call Budget allotted to an extension user gets exhausted in the middle of a call, the call will
not be disconnected, though the budget is exceeded. To prevent this from occurring, you may
configure the “Call Duration Control (CDC)” feature.

• Call Budget is dependent on precise Call Cost Calculation. So, SMDR parameters and long distance
codes must be configured correctly to prevent errors in calculation.

• This feature works independent of any Call Accounting Software (CAS) installed with the ETERNITY.

• The ETERNITY will calculate cost of phone calls made by extension phones even when no call budget
is allocated15.

How to configure
To be able to use this feature, you must do the following configuration:

• Apply Call Budget on the Extensions on which you want to use this feature. For instructions see “SLT
Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”, “SIP Extensions” under Basic Settings.

• Define the Toll Control, i.e. Types of calls to be allowed when Call Budget is consumed by the
extension.To do this, select the

How to use
Call Budget amount can be allotted to extensions from the System Administrator mode, using Jeeves or by dialing
SA commands from an extension phone.

Assigning Call Budget to Extensions using Jeeves

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Administrator.

15. Based on the feature 'Call Cost Calculation'.

374 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Extension link.

• The Extension numbers appear on the tabs on the right pane, starting with SLT extensions.

• To select a particular extension number or type, click on the tab.To select a particular extension number or
type, click on the tab.

• In the Call Budget Allotted field, enter the Call Budget Amount you want to allot to this extension.

• Click Submit button to save.

• To allot call budget to another extension, click the extension number tab, and follow the same instructions
as above.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 375

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Assigning Call Budget to Extensions using a Telephone

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To assign Call Budget to an Extension:

• Enter System Administrator mode.

• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Assign Call Budget' function.

OR

• Dial 1072-004.
• Enter Extension Number
• Enter Call Budget Amount.
Use leading zero if amount is fewer than 6 digits.
• You get confirmatory message and confirmation tone.
• Exit System Administrator mode.

To view Call Budget assigned to an Extension:

• Enter System Administrator mode.

• Press DSS Key assigned to the Call Budget function.

OR

• Dial 1072-011 (from SA mode).

• Enter Extension Number
• Enter Call Budget Amount.
Use leading zero if amount is less than 6 digits
• You get confirmatory message and confirmation tone.
• Exit System Administrator mode.

For SLT Users

• Lift the handset.
• Enter System Administrator mode.
• Dial 1072-004.
• Dial Extension Number.
• Dial Call Budget Amount.
Use leading zero if amount is less than 6 digits.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Exit System Administrator mode.
• Replace handset.

Call Budget cannot be viewed on SLT.

376 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Budget on Trunk

What's this?
Call Budget on Trunks is an expense control feature of ETERNITY NE that enables you to keep track of the cost of
phone calls made from the different Trunks of ETERNITY NE.

With this feature, each trunk can be allotted a 'budget' limit for outgoing calls. This budget limit can be configured to
be reloaded manually each time it is exceeded or on a scheduled date, which may be either daily or a particular
date of the month.

There are three types of Call Budget limits that can be set on the trunks:

• Amount: In this type of Call Budget, a fixed amount is assigned to the trunk. By default the amount of
999999 (to be considered in the local currency) is set as Call Budget Amount on trunks. With Amount-
based Call Budget you can control the actual expense incurred on making calls from a trunk.

• Minutes: In this type of Call Budget, a fixed number of Minutes are assigned to the trunk. By default,
999999 minutes are assigned as Call Budget Minutes on trunks. This type of Call Budget is useful when
the Service Provider offers 'Free' minutes. For example, the Service Provider allows the customer to make
calls for the first 1000 minutes every month. The customer can avail of this offer using Minutes-based Call
Budget on the trunk port.

• Number of Calls: In this type of Call Budget, you can define the maximum number of calls that can be
made from a trunk. By default, the maximum number of Call Budget - Calls is set to 9999 calls on the
trunks. This type of Call Budget is useful when the Service Provider offers a certain number of free calls or
a certain number of free calls for a fixed period. For instance, the Service Provider offers 150 free calls per
month.

With a Call Budget allotted to a trunk, the users can make calls from the trunk as long as the budget limit set for the
trunk (i.e. the Amount or Minutes or the maximum number of Calls) is not crossed. Once the budget limit is
exceeded, the trunk gets disabled automatically and no outgoing calls are allowed to be made from the trunk.

The consumed Budget can be reset, after which it becomes functional again and allows outgoing calls to be made.
The consumed Call Budget can be reset manually, i.e. anytime, as required/desired, or on a scheduled date either
daily or on a particular date of the month.

How it works
Call Budget can be enabled on all trunk port types - CO, Mobile, SIP. Each trunk can be assigned a different Call
Budget, depending on the requirement of the users.

When Call Budget is enabled on a trunk port, for each outgoing call,

• The system checks the type of Call Budget set on the trunk - Amount, Minutes or Number of Calls.

• It checks the Call Budget consumed.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 377

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Budget- Amount
• When Amount-based Call Budget is selected, the Amount should be assigned to the trunk.

• At the end of each outgoing call made from the trunk, the system will calculate the cost of the call on the
basis of the Pulse Rate Type configured. The system will thus calculate the total amount consumed after
the end of each call. Refer the topic “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)” to know more.

Call Budget - Minutes

• When Minutes-based Call Budget is set, the total minutes for which calls will be allowed from the trunk port
must be defined.

• With the number of Minutes defined, at the end of each call, the system will calculate the duration of the
call on the basis of the units configured in the Pulse Rate. The system will calculate the consumed minute
on the basis of the duration of the call. Refer the topic “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)” to know more.

Call Budget - Number of Calls

• When the Call Budget is based on 'Number of Calls', the maximum number of calls to be allowed from the
trunk port is to be defined.

• With the number of calls configured, the system will maintain a count for the number of matured outgoing
calls made from that trunk port.

• Thus for each matured call, the Number of Calls-Count increments, irrespective of the actual duration of
the matured call.

• When the assigned 'cost' or 'minutes' or 'number of calls' assigned to trunk is exhausted, ETERNITY will:

• print 'system activity log'.

• bar outgoing calls from such trunks.
• play an Error Tone to the extension users who attempt to access such trunks using Selective Trunk
Access.
• However, incoming calls will remain unaffected, and will be allowed on these trunks.

• The consumed Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Calls can be reset manually at any time from the System
Administrator mode or the System Engineer mode or can be configured to be automatically reset either
daily or on a particular date of the month.

• The current Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Calls limit can be changed from the System Administrator (SA)
mode, at any time. If scheduled reset of consumed Call Budget is configured, then the Call Budget allotted
by the SA will be reloaded on the scheduled date.

• Once a new Call Budget is allocated to the trunk, outgoing call facility is resumed on the trunk.

• Call Budget on Trunks is not based on real time (online) call cost calculation. The ETERNITY NE
calculates the call cost only after the call has ended.

• If the Call Budget allotted to a Trunk Port gets exhausted in the middle of a call, the call will not
disconnected, though the budget is exceeded.

• Call Budget on Trunks is dependent on precise Call Cost Calculation. So, SMDR parameters and long
distance codes must be configured properly to prevent errors in calculation.

378 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • This feature works independent of any Call Accounting Software (CAS) installed with the ETERNITY.

• The ETERNITY will calculate cost of phone calls made by the trunks even when no call budget is
allocated16.

How to configure
Call Budget on Trunks is to be programmed in the Trunk Parameters of the trunk type on which you want to enable
this feature. For instructions, see “CO Trunks”, “Mobile Trunks” and “SIP Trunks” under Basic Settings.

• The consumed Call Budget on trunk can be reset from the System Engineer mode as well as the
System Administrator mode manually at any time, referred to as Manual Reset.

Resetting Call Budget on Trunks

The consumed Call Budget can be reset manually, i.e. anytime, as required/desired, or on a scheduled date either
daily or on a particular date of the month.

To reset the Call Budget on trunks, from the System Engineer mode,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Administration link.

• Click the Status link under Administration.

• To reset Call Budget on CO Trunks, click CO Status link to open the page.

If you have set Call Budget to reset on a scheduled date, the date will appear in the Budget Reset
Schedule (Date) field.

16. Based on the feature 'Call Cost Calculation'.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 379

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To reset Call Budget manually, any time, click the Reset button assigned to Reset Consumed Budget.

• To reset call Budget, click Mobile Status link to open the page.

If you have set Call Budget to be reset on a scheduled date, the date will appear in the Budget Reset
Schedule (Date) field.

• To reset Call Budget manually, any time, click the Reset button assigned to Reset Consumed Budget.

• To reset Call Budget on SIP Trunks, click the SIP Trunk Status link.

380 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If you have set Call Budget to be reset on a scheduled date, the date will appear in the Budget Reset
Schedule (Date) field.

• To reset Call Budget manually, any time, click the Reset button assigned to Reset Consumed Budget.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 381

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Chaining

What's this?
Call Chaining is when an external/internal call transferred by the Operator to another extension or external number
is made to return to the Operator's extension when the conversation between the caller and the extension/external
number to which it is transferred has ended.

Call Chaining is useful situations where the Operator intervention is required after the transferred call has ended.
For instance:

• The caller needs to take an appointment or requires some information from the Operator after talking to the
desired extension.

• A marketing executive who calls his supervisor to consult on a technical problem needs to be informed
about his travel itinerary and ticket booking by the Operator. The Operator can transfer the call to the
supervisor, and use Call Chaining to retrieve the call once the conversation has ended to give the
information to the executive.

• Call Chaining is possible only from DKP and Extended IP Phones.

• A Direct Station Selection (DSS) Key must be programmed for this function.

• Call Chaining can be set for multiple calls.

• Any DKP extension can use Call Chaining, provided it has a DSS Key for this function.

Also refer “Call Transfer”, “Call Park”.

How it works
• A is an External Caller
• B is an extension.

• A calls a Trunk of ETERNITY.

• The Operator answers the call.
• The Operator transfers the call to B and sets Call Chaining.
• B disconnects the call with A, but A is still connected.
• The call comes back to the Operator, if the Operator is free.
• Now A is in speech with the Operator.

• If A disconnects the call with C, the call will be released. It will not return to the Operator.

• If the Operator is busy, A will be played music on hold for the duration of the Call Park Release Timer.
• If the Operator is busy and the Timer elapses, the call will be released.

Call Chaining can be performed when call is transferred from a DKP to DKP, SLT or Trunk.
The process of Call Chaining would be the same if A were an internal caller and B were an external number,
or if both were external numbers or both were internal numbers.

382 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
The only configuration involved in the functioning of this feature is assigning this feature to a DSS key which has
LED and changing, if necessary, the Call Park Release Timer.

For instructions on assigning a feature to DSS keys, see “Phone Key Settings” under “DKP Extensions”.

To change the Call Park Release Timer, see “System Timers and Counts”

How to use
Call Chaining is possible from DKP or Extended IP Phone only, though the destination to which the chained call is
transferred may be an SLT or Trunk (external number).

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users only

• Go OFF-Hook to answer the incoming call.
• The caller requests for an extension/trunk.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Call Chaining function.

OR

• Press Hold-1050.
• Caller gets on-hold music.
• You get feature tone and the message 'Called Party in Chaining' on your phone's display. If DSS Key is
used, the LED of the key will glow.
• Dial the requested extension/external number.
• You get Ring Back Tone.
• The called party answers.
• Perform Call Transfer17 to the requested extension/trunk.
• When extension/trunk disconnects, your extension rings.
• Go OFF Hook. You get connected with the caller.
• Go Idle after the conversation ends.

17. Refer the EON48/Extended IP Phone User Card for instructions on various options for Call Transfer of internal and external calls.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 383

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Cost Calculation (CCC)

What’s this?
The ETERNITY NE can calculate the cost in amount, for external calls made by extensions. The cost calculation is
done at the time of printing reports.

How it works
The cost of a call depends on:

• Trunk Port (CO, Mobile, SIP) used for making the outgoing call.

• Number dialed, whether local, long distance or international.

• Time and day when the call was made, whether daytime, nighttime, or on a holiday.

• Duration of the call.

ETERNITY NE calculates the cost of a call as follows:

• When the call is made from a trunk, the system checks the Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate Option, 1 to
4 assigned to the trunk, on the basis of the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule configured for the
outgoing call.

Each Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate option contains a Pulse Rate Type, which you must assign.

• The system matches the Number dialed by the extension user with the Area Code Table configured in the
system. When the area code matches with an entry in the table, the system obtains the Pulse rate type
configured for the Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate option assigned to the trunk.

• This Pulse Rate type obtained from the Area Code Table is checked in the Pulse Rate table. to obtain
the corresponding duration and cost to be applied for the call duration. The Pulse Rate Table may be for
'Normal' or 'Holiday', depending on the day of the call.

• The Pulse Rate Type applied (duration and cost) is divided into two parts for each time zone:
• First unit.
• Additional units.

The duration of the call is interpreted in terms of number of units, and the number of units depends on the
pulse rate.

• If the duration of the call is less than or equal to one unit,

Cost of Call = Cost of First Unit + Service Charge is applied.

• If the duration of the call is more than one unit,

Cost of Call = [Cost of First Unit + (Number of Additional units x Cost for Additional units)] + Service
Charge is applied.

384 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Number of Units is derived from the pulse rate at the time of the call and duration of the call. System
acquires the pulse rate type and call duration with the help of in-built RTC.

Total Units = First Unit + Additional Unit.

• If the call duration is less than the pulse rate of the first unit then additional unit is zero and total units. Call
units when call answer supervision type is 12/16KHz metering.

Call Units = (Call duration in seconds)/(Pulse rate in seconds).

ETERNITY uses the Cost of the Call for SMDR and also to deduct it from the Call Budget (Amount), if allotted to
the trunk.

The logic for call cost calculation is explained by following example:

• A Outgoing Call is made on trunk, CO-1.

• On CO-1, Call Cost Calculation is configured as follows:

• Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate option = 1

• Call Cost Calculation Schedule
• Time Zone 1 = Start Time: 00:00, End Time: 22:00
• Time Zone 2 = Start Time: 22:01, End Time: 23:59

• Area Code Table is configured as:

Pulse Rate Pulse Rate Pulse Rate Pulse Rate

Ignore
Area Type for Type for Type for Type for
Index Name Digit
Code Pulse Rate Pulse Rate Pulse Rate Pulse Rate
Count
Option - 1 Option - 2 Option - 3 Option - 4

001 26 Local 03 06 09 10

002 09 Mobile 05 03 07 08

• The Pulse Rate Table is configured as:

Time Zone T1 Time Zone T2 Time Zone T3 Time Zone T4

Pulse Rate Type First Add. First Add. First Add. First Add.
Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit

Duration (sec) 180 180 60 30 90 30 120 60

01
Cost 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00

Duration (sec) 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
02
Cost 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00

Durations) 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
03
Cost 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00

Duration (sec) 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
04
Cost 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 385

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Time Zone T1 Time Zone T2 Time Zone T3 Time Zone T4
Pulse Rate Type First Add. First Add. First Add. First Add.
Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit

Duration (sec) 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180
05
Cost 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00

Durations) : : : : : : : :
:
Cost : : : : : : : :

Duration (sec)
32
Cost

• With this configuration, ETERNITY will calculate the call cost as follows:

• An Outgoing Call is made by an extension user, to the number ‘2630555’ through the trunk, CO-1 at
20:10 hours. The ETERNITY will check the Call Cost Calculation parameters singed on the trunk
and determine the Time Zone as per time of the call.The system will also check the corresponding
Pulse Rate Option configured on the trunk.

In this example, Time Zone for CO-1 at 20:10 Hours would be Time Zone 1, and the Pulse Rate
Option for CO-1 is ‘1’.

• The ETERNITY will match the dialed number ‘2630555’ in the Area Code table. A best match is
found with the entry configured at index 001 in the Area Code Table.

As per the Area Code Table, the Pulse Rate Type ‘03’ is programmed in ‘Pulse Rate Option 1’ for
the matching entry (at Index 001).

(However, if CO-1 would have been assigned Pulse Rate Option ‘2’, the Pulse Rate type ‘06’ would
have been selected as shown in Area Code Table)

• Finally, for Pulse Rate Type ‘03’, ETERNITY will consider the Cost for the First Unit as 1.00 (As. or
$as per applicable currency) for the duration of 30 seconds and for the additional unit also, the cost
will be considered as 1.00 for the duration of 30 seconds. (See Pulse Rate Table). This data will be
used for calculating the total cost of call based on the total duration of the call.

How to configure
To be able to use Call Cost Calculation, you must do the following:

• Define the Unit and Service Charge on the basis of which call cost is to be calculated.

• Assign Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate Option and the Call Cost Calculation Schedule on the trunks on
which you want to apply this feature.

• Configure the Pulse Rate Types for the Pulse Rate Option you assign to the trunk.

• You may configure different Pulse Rate Types of Normal Days and for Holidays, as required. If configuring
Holiday Pulse Rate, you must also configure the Holiday schedule.

386 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Configure the Area Code Table.

To configure call cost calculation parameters,

• Open Jives.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the Call Cost Calculation link to expand.

Service Charge
By default, no Service Charge is applied on call cost by the system. Service Charge on call cost is generally applied
in Hotels and other organization which charge users for the calls made by them.

If you want to apply Service Charge,

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 387

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click General Parameters to open the page.

• In the Service Charge Type field, select the type of service charge you want to apply from the options:

• Fixed for a call: A fixed amount is added as service charge to every call regardless of the cost of that
call.

If you select this option, you must define the Amount to be added as service charge in the Specify
Service Charge field.

• per Unit: service charge is added to each unit of the call. For example, if a call worth 10 units was
made, the service charge will be applied on each of the 10 units, instead of the one time service
charge as in the case of Fixed service charge.
If you select this option, you must define the amount to be added as service charge on each unit in the
Specify Service Charge field.

• Percentage of call cost: A percentage of the cost of the call is added as a service charge for that call.

If you select this option, you must define the percentage in the Specify Service Charge in % field
which appears.

• Click Submit to save changes.

388 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applying Call Cost Calculation on Trunks

• To assign Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate Option and configure the Call Cost Calculation Schedule
on the trunks, go to Basic Settings, and configure these on the different trunk port types. See “CO Trunks”,
“Mobile Trunks”, and “SIP Trunks” under Basic Settings for instructions.

Configuring Pulse Rate Types

Generally service providers offer discounted call rates for holidays. To take care of this, ETERNITY provides two
types of Pulse Rate Tables: Normal and Holiday.

If your service providers do not offer any special rates for holidays, you may skip configuring the Holiday Pulse
Rate table.

To configure the Normal Pulse Rate table,

• Click the Normal Pulse Rate link.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 389

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 .
• Configure the Pulse Rate Type with rates for the First Unit and the Additional Unit.

Generally service providers offer different call rates for different types of calls, for example: local, national,
international. You can configure different Pulse Rate Types for different types of calls. Thus, each Pulse
Rate Type can have different rates for the First and the Additional unit.

The Pulse Rates offered by service providers may vary according to the time of the day. In such cases, you
will need to configure the Call Cost Calculation Schedule for the trunk, by dividing the day into Time
Zones, from 1 to 4, as required, to match the time of the pulse rates offered by your service provider.

If you have configured Time Zones for the Call Cost Schedule on a trunk, you may define the different
Pulse Rate Types for each Time Zone.

• Click Submit to save changes.

To configure the Holiday Pulse Rate table,

• Click the Holiday Pulse Rate link.

390 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Configure the Holiday Pulse Rate Type with rates for the First Unit and the Additional Unit, as required.

• Click Submit to save changes.

• Click the Holiday Schedule link.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 391

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Define Weekly and Yearly Holidays on this page.

• Click Submit to save.

Configuring Area Code Table

The pulse rate of a call depends on the destination number dialed. Generally, pulse rate varies according to the
type of the call: Local, national, international. ETERNITY enables you to configure Pulse Rates according to Area
codes.

392 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To configure Pulse Rates for Area Codes,

• Click the Area Code link.

• In the Area Code column, enter the number strings (prefix) of the Area Codes, country codes, local
numbers. You can configure as many as 999 area codes in the table.

• You may enter a Name to tag each Area Code.

• Do not configure the Ignore Digit Count. This parameter is relevant only for Service Provider Based Least
Cost Routing.

• Different service providers offer different pulse rates for the same type of calls. To take care of this,
ETERNITY allows you to assign different Pulse Rate Options for each area code.

• For each area code, configure the Pulse Rate to be followed for the desired Pulse Rate Options in the
Pulse Rate Type for Pulse Rate (Option 1 to 4) column.

• Click Submit to save changes.

For “Default Area Code Table: USA” see Appendix.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 393

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Cost Display

What’s this?
If your extension is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone, you can use the Call Cost Display feature to view the cost of
the last 10 external calls made from your extension.

The system will display the dialed numbers and the call cost for each number that it has calculated on the LCD of
your phone.

How to configure
For this feature to work, it must be enabled on the extension by the System Administrator (SA). You may enable
Call Cost Display on an extension from Jeeves or from a telephone.

To enable Call Cost Display on an extension using Gee

To enable 'Call Cost Display' for an extension:

• Enter SA mode.

• Dial command 1072-181-Extension-Flag

Where,
Extension is the Number of the DKP/Extended IP Phone
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
By default Call Cost Display is enabled.

• Exit SA mode.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users Only

• Press the DSS Key assigned to Call Cost Display feature.

OR

• Dial 1075.
• Scroll with the up/down navigation keys to view the cost of the last 10 calls.
• The display shows the last 10 dialed numbers and their corresponding call cost.

394 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For example: If the call charge is for the dialed number 0014034545247 is $2 and 80 cents, the display will
show the number as:

001403454 5247 2.8 0

F ri 22 JAN 12:19

• Go Idle

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 395

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Duration Control (CDC)

What's this?
Call Duration Control (CDC) allows a maximum time limit to be set on internal and external (both incoming and
outgoing) telephone calls. When the maximum call duration is reached, the calls are disconnected, after a warning
tone indicating to the user that the calls in progress will be disconnected.

By limiting the duration of the conversations, CDC helps increase availability of trunks for making outgoing calls
and for receiving incoming calls, which is important in high call traffic situations. Besides increasing trunk
availability, CDC curbs unrelated and unproductive conversations.

At a time, ETERNITY NE can control the duration of 64 calls.

How it works
• A is an extension user. B is an external number.

External-Outgoing Calls
• A dials B's number.

• The system checks the CDC Profile applied to A.

• It checks whether the flag, Apply CDC to Outgoing Calls made from Trunks, is enabled. It matches B's
number with the entries on the Apply CDC for calls matching with numbers list and the Do Not Apply
CDC for calls matching with numbers list in the CDC profile. Three results are possible:

• The flag is enabled and a match is found for the number in the Apply CDC for calls matching with
numbers List. So, CDC is applied on the call.

• The flag is enabled and a match is found in the Do Not Apply CDC for calls matching with numbers
list in the CDC profile. So, CDC is not applied on the call.

• The flag is enabled and a match is found in both these lists. The system gives precedence to the Do
Not Apply CDC for calls matching with numbers list. So, CDC is not applied to the call.

• When CDC is applied on the call (see point a above), the CDC Timer starts as soon as B has answered
the call. This timer is set to 160 seconds as default, but can be configured for the desired time limit.

• At the end of the CDC Timer, the CDC Goodbye Timer starts. This timer provides a grace period of 20
seconds for the user to finish the call. This Timer is fixed.

• At the end of the Goodbye Timer, the call is disconnected, if the Disconnect CDC after Timer flag is
enabled.

• If this flag is disabled, the call will not be disconnected.

• Instead, the CDC Warn Timer will be loaded again. The user can know how long s/he has been talking.

396 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • A is played Warning Beeps. B cannot hear the beeps. This continues until either party disconnects.

External-Incoming Calls
CDC works similarly for incoming calls.

• B calls A.

• The system checks whether the flag, Apply CDC for incoming calls received from trunks, is enabled
and matches B's number with the entries on the Apply CDC for calls matching with numbers list in the CDC
Profile assigned to A. If the flag is enabled and a match is found for the number, CDC is applied on the call.

• A will get beeps.

Internal Calls
A and B are extension users.

• A calls B.

• The system checks whether the flag, Apply CDC to Internal Calls, is enabled in the CDC profile assigned
to B.

• If the flag is enabled, CDC is applied on the call.

• Warning beeps are played to A, who made the call.

Warning Beep

Default: 160 secs. Default: 20 secs.

Total time after which call will be disconnected

Feature Interactions:
• Call Transfer: In case of transferred call, the CDC timer gets reset and starts again afresh on the
transferred extension.

• Conference: CDC is treated as turned OFF.

• Call Park: CDC is treated as turned OFF.

• Interrupt Request, Barge-In and Raid: CDC is treated as turned 'ON'.

• Emergency Number Dialing: Emergency calls are not affected by this feature, i.e. CDC will not be
applied on the dialing of Emergency Numbers.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 397

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
To use this feature on extensions,

• Configure Call Duration Control Profiles. You may configure up to 4 different Profiles.

• Enable Call Duration Control on the extension, and assign a CDC Profile to the extensions on which you
want to apply this feature.

To configure Call Duration Control Profiles,

• First, decide the types of calls - Outgoing, Incoming and Internal - on which CDC is to be enabled.

• Make a list of numbers on which CDC is to be applied, and a list of numbers on which CDC is not to be
applied.

• Make a list of extensions on which CDC is to be applied and the CDC Profile number you want to assign to
these extensions.

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click Call Duration Control link under Advanced Settings.

398 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The CDC Profile 1 opens on this page.

• Enable Apply CDC to Internal Calls, if CDC is to be applied on internal calls. Default: Disabled.

• Enable Apply CDC for Incoming Calls received from trunks, if CDC is to be applied on incoming
external calls. Default: Disabled.

• Enable Apply CDC for Outgoing Calls, if CDC is to be applied to outgoing external calls. Default:
Disabled.

• If required, change the CDC Timer to the desired duration. The range of the timer is 0001 to 9999
seconds. Default: 160 seconds.

• To have calls disconnected on the expiry of the CDC Timer, enable Disconnect Call after CDC Timer
check box. Default: Disabled.

• In the Apply CDC for calls matching with numbers column, enter the numbers on which CDC should be
applied. You may refer to the list you prepared.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 399

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • In the Do Not Apply CDC for calls matching with numbers column, enter the numbers on which CDC
should not be applied. You must configure this list with numbers which you want to be exempt from CDC.

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save changes.

• To configure another CDC Profile, click the Profile number tab, and follow the same steps described above
to configure this profile.

• Now assign the CDC Profile to the extensions. For instructions see “SLT Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”,
“SIP Extensions”, under Basic Settings.

• Log out of Jeeves or continue configuration tasks, as required.

400 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Duration Display

What's this?
By invoking Call Duration Display, extension users can view the duration of the current call instantly.

Needless to say, only DKP and Extended IP Phone users can view Call Duration Display. The system displays the
duration of the current call on the LCD display of the phone.

The current call may be incoming or outgoing, internal or external call.

How it works
• The DKP/Extended IP Phone user goes OFF-Hook

• Dials an external number.

• The remote party answers the call.

• The dialed external number with duration (5-digits in the format of MM:SS) is displayed on the LCD of the
phone, when the call is answered.

6 1 6 A M I T PAT E L 02:52
F ri 22 JAN 12:19

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 401

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Forward

What's this?
During a typical workday, it is common for people in an organization to move from one place to another. For
instance, a manager might go on the production floor or remain in the conference room for a few hours; a field
engineer may spend half of the day on site. So, they need to be able to attend their calls even when they are not
present at their usual workplace. The 'Call Forward' feature of ETERNITY ensures this.

Using this feature, calls landing on an extension can be forwarded to another extension, external number, Voice
Mail Group, or Department Group. This way, extension users can ensure that callers can reach them and that they
do not miss calls when they are not present at their extension.

The Call Forward feature of ETERNITY offers the following forwarding options:

• Unconditionally - calls are forwarded to the destination phone number automatically without waiting for a
response from the called party's phone.

• If Busy - calls are forwarded to the destination phone number only when the called party's phone is busy.

• If No Reply - calls are forwarded to the destination phone number only when the called party does not
answer the phone. Each extension can set a different time after which the call should be forwarded, in
case of no reply. The default time is 30 seconds for all extensions and can be changed by configuring the
Call Forward No-Reply Timer.

• If Busy or No Reply - calls are forwarded to the destination phone number when the called party's phone
is either busy or does not reply.

• Dual Ring - when calls are forwarded to another phone number. Both phones, i.e. the source phone
(whose calls are forwarded) as well as the destination phone (on which call is forwarded) will ring and the
user can answer from either extension.

Dual Ring is useful to users who may find themselves shuttling between two places frequently. As it is
cumbersome to forward the calls from one extension to another and cancel it repeatedly, users can set
Dual Ring, so they can attend to their calls at either place they are present.

How it works
A has set Call Forward to extension B unconditionally.

• The system forwards all calls for A to B, without checking for Busy Tone and without waiting for the Call
Forward No-Reply Timer to expire.

A has set Call Forward to external number on No-Reply.

• The system waits for the Call Forward No-Reply Timer to expire and forwards all external incoming calls to
the external number.

402 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A has set Call Forward to extension B on Busy.

• The system forwards the call for A to B on detecting Busy tone from A.

B belongs to a Department Group and has set Call Forward-If Busy to C within the Department Group.

• If the system detects Busy signal on B, it forwards the call for B to C in the Department Group.

• However, if the caller has called the Department Group instead of calling B directly, the call will land in the
sequence on all Department group extensions. When it is B's turn, the call will not be forwarded to C, B will
ring instead.

C belongs to a Department Group and has set Call Forward-No Reply to D within the Department Group.

• The system waits for the Call Forward No-Reply Timer to expire, and forwards the call for C to D in the
Department Group.

D has set Call Forward to Voice Mail on Busy or No Reply.

• Whenever there is a call for D, if the system does not detect a busy tone from D, it waits for the Call
Forward No-Reply timer to expire.

• The system forwards the call to the Voice Mail Group.

E has set Call Forward Dual Ring on extension F.

• When there is a call for E, the system rings on both E and the destination F.

• E can answer the call at E or at F.

Feature Interaction:
• Do Not Disturb (DND): When DND and Call Forward are set on an extension, DND is given priority.

• You can select the types of calls, i.e. internal calls only, or trunk calls, or both, to be forwarded to
external numbers. You can program the system to forward internal calls only, or trunk calls only or both
trunk calls and internal calls, to the external number. For this, the parameter when Call is forwarded
to an external number must be configured on the extensions.

• The system supports only single-point Call Forward, which means, if the destination extension is also
forwarded, the call will not follow the forwarding path. For example: Calls for extension A are set to be
forwarded to extension B. Call Forward is also set on extension B with C as the destination number.
Calls for A will land on B only and calls for B will land on C only.

• Only one Call Forward Type can be set from an extension. Every new Call Forward Type set overrides
the previous one.

• When the calls are forwarded the extension user gets the feature tone on lifting the handset to indicate
that Call Forward is set on the extension.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 403

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
To provide this feature to an extension, you need to do the following configuration:

• Enable Call Forward in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the Extensions. By default, Call Forward is enabled
in the Class of Service of all extensions of ETERNITY for the Day and Night.

• If required, change the duration of the Call Forward No-Reply Timer on the extension. By default the timer
is set to 30 seconds.

• Select the type of call—internal, trunk, all calls— to be forwarded when Call is forwarded to an external
number on the extension. By default, Forward Only Trunk Calls is selected.

For instructions on configuring Call Forward related parameters different extension types, see “SLT Extensions”,
“DKP Extensions”, “SIP Extensions” under Basic Settings.

How to use
Call Forward can be set/canceled by extension users who are allowed this feature. It can be set/canceled by an
extension user for another extension (refer “Call Forward-Remote” to know more).

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set Call Forward,

• Press the 'Call Forward' key.

OR

• Dial 13.
• Scroll to select the desired Call Forward Type.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• Enter destination Phone Number/Voice Mail/ Department Group Number.
• You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
• Go Idle.

To set Call Forward-Dual Ring,

• First, set the desired Call Forward type.

• Press the 'Call Forward' key.
OR
• Dial 13.
• Scroll to select Dual Ring.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• Select Dual Ring ON
• Press ‘Enter’ key.
• You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
• Go Idle.

• If the call is to be forwarded to an extension, dial the extension number.

• If the call is to be forwarded to an external number, dial Trunk Access Code, then the external phone
number and terminate the command with #*.

404 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • For users world wide, Trunk Access Code (TAC) for dialing external numbers are: 0, 5, 61, 62, 63,
64.

• For users in USA, TAC for dialing external numbers are: 9, 5, 81, 82, 83, 84.

• If call is to be forwarded on voice mail, dial the Access Code for the Voice Mail. The default Access
Code is 3931. If this code has been changed and use the new code to dial the VMS.

To cancel Call Forward,

• Press 'Call Forward' Key again.

OR

• Dial 13.
• Select 'Cancel'.
• You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
• Replace Handset on the cradle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.

For SLT Users

To set Call Forward,

• Lift the handset.

• Dial 131 for Call Forward - All Calls
• Dial 132 for Call Forward - If Busy
• Dial 133 for Call Forward -If No Reply
• Dial 134 for Call Forward -If Busy or No Reply
• Dial destination Phone Number/Voice Mail/Department Number.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

To set Call Forward-Dual Ring,

• Set the desired Call Forward type.
• Dial 136-1 for Call Forward -Dual Ring

To cancel Call Forward,

• Lift the handset.

• Dial 130.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.

To disable Dual Ring,

• Lift the handset.
• Dial 136.
• Dial 0.
• Replace Handset.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 405

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Forward-Scheduled

What's this?
Extension users may want their calls to be automatically forwarded to a desired destination number during working
hours or non-working hours. To cite an example, a Support Technician spends working hours on the field and
wants all incoming calls on his extension in the office to be forwarded to his cell phone during working hours. During
non-working hours, he wants call calls to be forwarded to his voice mail.

Remembering to set and cancel Call Forward and changing the destination number for each Time Zone, i.e.
working hours and non-working hours every day proves to be cumbersome for such extension users.

In addition to “Call Forward”, ETERNITY supports Call Forward - Scheduled, which allows extension users to set
call forward for the desired Time Zones at one time, and the system automatically forwards the calls to the
destination defined for each Time Zone.

How it works
Call Forward-Scheduled supports all the forwarding options as Call Forward: Unconditionally, If Busy, If No Reply, If
Busy or No Reply, Dual Ring.

Any of these options can be set for the Time Zones: working hours and non-working hours.

The destination for Call Forward-Scheduled can be an internal (extension) number or an external number.

Both 'Call Forward' and Call Forward-Scheduled can be set on the same extension. In this case, priority is given to
'Call Forward' over Call Forward-Scheduled.

The logic for forwarding calls to the destination number remains the same as described in the topic “Call Forward”,
illustrated in the following example.

• Extension user A sets Call Forward-Unconditionally to extension B for Non-working hours.

• When there is a call on extension A, the system first checks if there is any 'Call Forward' type (i.e.,
Unconditional, Busy, No Reply, Busy/No Reply, Call Follow Me) set on extension A.

• If 'Call Forward' is set on extension A, the system will follow the logic described in 'How it works' under the
topic “Call Forward”.

• If no 'Call Forward' is set on extension A, the system will check if Call Forward-Scheduled is set on A.

• Since Call Forward-Scheduled is set on extension A, the system will compare the Time Zone for which the
Call Forward is scheduled with the current Time Zone of extension A.

• If the current Time Zone of extension A is the same as the Time Zone set for Call Forward Scheduled, i.e.
non-working hours, the call will be forwarded to extension B as per the call forward type set.

• As the Call Forward Type set by A is Unconditional, the system will forward the call to B, without checking
for the Busy Tone and without waiting for the Call Forward No-Reply Timer to expire.

406 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If the current Time Zone of extension A is not the same as Time Zone set for Call Forward-Scheduled, the
call will not be forwarded. The system will consider that no call forward has been set.

• Call Forward - Scheduled can be set simultaneously for more than one Time Zone from the same
extension. For example, extension A can set Call Forward-Scheduled for working hours, then again set
Call Forward-Scheduled for non-working hours.

• A different Call Forward Type can be set for a different Time Zone. For example, extension A can set
Call Forward -Unconditional for non-working hours, and Call Forward -Busy for working hours. Also, a
different destination number can be set for forwarding calls in each Time Zone. For example, extension
A can set Call Forward-Unconditional for non-working hours to a mobile number and set extension B as
destination number for working hours.

• When more than one Call Forward type is set on the same extension for the same Time Zone, the
latest Call Forward type set for the Time Zone will override the previous Call Forward type set for that
Time Zone. For example, extension A sets Call Forward -Busy for working hours, then sets Call
Forward Busy or No Reply for working hours, the latter will override the former. The system will
consider the latest, i.e. Busy or No Reply as the Call Forward type for forwarding calls during working
hours.

• Call Forward-Scheduled can be cancelled individually for a desired Time Zone or all at once for all
Time Zones.

• Call Forward-Scheduled can be set by extension users as well as for extension users from the System
Administrator mode.

• It is also possible to select the types of calls, i.e. internal calls only, or trunk calls, or both, to be
forwarded to external numbers. You can program the system to forward internal calls only, or trunk
calls only or both trunk calls and internal calls to the external number. For this, the Call Forward option
If call is forwarded to an external number must be configured on the extensions that want to use Call
Forward-Scheduled.

How to configure
The configuration of this feature involves the same parameters as in “Call Forward”.

• Call Forward must be enabled in the Class of Service (Cost) of the extensions to which this feature is to be
allowed.

• If Call Forward No-Reply is to be set, if required, the Call Forward No-Reply Timer may be configured.

• You may select the types of calls—internal, trunks, all calls—to be forwarded to the external number by
configuring the option Call Forward option If call is forwarded to an external number on the extensions.

• Extensions that are to be allowed to set Call Forward-Scheduled for other extensions must be allowed
either the feature 'SA Mode’ or ‘SA Extension' in their Class of Service. Refer the topic “Call Forward-
Remote”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 407

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use
Call Forward-Scheduled can be set/canceled by users for their own extension, or for any other extension from the
System Administrator mode.

• The destination number for forwarding calls can be a maximum of 24 digits. Terminate the command
with #* if destination number has fewer than 24 digits.

• If the destination number is an external number, enter the Trunk Access Code followed by the
destination number.

Setting Call Forward-Scheduled for Extensions Users

The Operator or any extension user having access to System Administrator mode can set or cancel Call Forward-
Scheduled for other extension users using Jives or by dialing SA commands from a telephone.

Setting Call Forward-Scheduled using Jives

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Administrator.

• Click the Extension link.

• The Extension numbers appear on the tabs on the right pane, starting with SLT extensions.

• To select a particular extension number or type, click on the tab.To select a particular extension number or
type, click on the tab.

408 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To set call forward for working hours, click Call Forward - Day Time to expand.

• Select the type of Call Forward you want to set for the extension for the Day Time, i.e. working hours:

• To forward calls to voice mail, select the radio button Forward Calls to Voice Mail and the type of call
forward from the drop down list. Default: Unconditionally.

• To forward calls of this extension to another extension, select Forward Calls to Phone radio button
and the type of call forward for this option from the drop down list. Default: Unconditionally.

Enter the extension number to which calls must be forwarded in the empty field provided for this option.

• To forward calls of this extension to an external number, select Forward Calls to External Number
radio button, and select the type of call forward for this option from the drop down list. Default:
Unconditionally.

Enter the external number to which calls must be forwarded in the empty field provided for this option.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 409

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Call Forward button to set Call Forward -Remote.

The label of the Call Forward button changes color and the message “Call Forward is set” appears.

• Click the Dual Ring button to set Call-Forward Remote with Dual Ring.
The label of the Dual Ring button changes color and the message “Dual ring is On” appears.

• To set call forward for non-working hours, click Call Forward - Night Time to expand.

• Follow the same instructions as above for setting Call Forward Scheduled for the Day Time.

• To set Call Forward - Day Time on another extension, click the extension number tab, and follow the same
instructions as above.

410 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting Call Forward-Scheduled using a Telephone
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users

To set Call Forward-Scheduled:

• Press DSS key assigned to Call Forward-Scheduled - Remote.

OR

• Dial 1072-223.
• Enter extension number (from which calls are to be forwarded)
• Scroll to the desired Time Zone.
• Press Enter key to select Time Zone.
• Scroll to the desired Call Forward type for the selected Time Zone.
• Press Enter key to select Call Forward type.
• Enter Destination Number on prompt.
• You get confirmation tone and message showing extension to which Call Forward is set.

To cancel Call Forward-Scheduled for a Time Zone:

• Press DSS key assigned to Call Forward-Scheduled - Remote.

OR

• Dial 1072-223
• Enter extension number (for which it is to be canceled)
• Scroll to the desired Time Zone.
• Press Enter key to select Time Zone.
• Scroll to select Cancel.
• Press Enter key.
• You get confirmation tone and message.

To cancel Call Forward-Scheduled in all Time Zones:

• Press DSS key assigned to Call Forward-Scheduled - Remote.

OR

• Dial 1072-223
• Enter extension number (for which it is to be canceled)
• Scroll to 'Cancel Call Forward'.
• Press Enter key.
• You get confirmation tone and message.

For SLT Users

To set CF-Scheduled for the Day:

• Lift handset.
• Enter SA Mode.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-1-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Unconditional.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-2-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-3-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -No Reply.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 411

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-4-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy/No Reply.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-5-1 for CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-5-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled.
• Exit SA mode
• Replace handset.

To set Call Forward-Scheduled for the Night:

• Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-1-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Unconditional.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-2-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-3-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -No Reply.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-4-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy/No Reply.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-5-1 for CF-Scheduled-Dual Ring.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-5-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled-Dual Ring.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled.
• Replace handset.

To cancel Call Forward-Scheduled for all Time Zones:

• Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension Number-0
• Replace handset.

Setting Call Forward-Scheduled by Extension Users

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set Call Forward-Scheduled:

• Press DSS key assigned to Call Forward-Scheduled.

OR

• Dial 1175.
• Scroll to the desired Time Zone.
• Press Enter key to select Time Zone.
• Scroll to the desired Call Forward type for the selected Time Zone.
• Press Enter key to select Call Forward type.
• Enter Destination Number on prompt.
• You get confirmation tone and message showing extension to which Call Forward is set.

To cancel Call Forward-Scheduled for a Time Zone:

• Press DSS key assigned to Call Forward-Scheduled.

OR

• Dial 1175.
• Scroll to the desired Time Zone.
• Press Enter key to select Time Zone.
• Scroll to select Cancel.

412 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Press Enter key.
• You get confirmation tone and message.

To cancel Call Forward-Scheduled in all Time Zones:

• Press DSS key assigned to Call Forward-Scheduled.

OR

• Dial 1175.
• Scroll to 'Cancel Call Forward'.
• Press Enter key.
• You get confirmation tone and message.

For SLT Users

To set/cancel CF-Scheduled for the Day:

• Lift handset.
• Dial 1175-1-1-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled-Unconditional.
• Dial 1175-1-2-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy.
• Dial 1175-1-3-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -No Reply.
• Dial 1175-1-4-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled-Busy/No Reply.
• Dial 1175-1-5-1 for CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1175-1-5-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1175-1-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled for the Day.
• Replace handset.

To set/cancel CF-Scheduled for the Night:

• Lift handset.
• Dial 1175-3-1-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Unconditional.
• Dial 1175-3-2-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy.
• Dial 1175-3-3-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -No Reply.
• Dial 1175-3-4-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy/No Reply.
• Dial 1175-3-5-1 for CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1175-3-5-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1175-3-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled for the Night.
• Replace handset.

To cancel CF-Scheduled for all Time Zones:

• Lift handset.
• Dial 1175-0.
• Replace handset.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 413

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Forward-Remote

What's this?
An extension user can set Call Forward for another ('remote') extension from his/her own extension. Thus, Call
Forward set for an extension from another extension is called 'Call Forward-Remote'.

This feature can be used by the Operator or the Receptionist to forward the calls for the Manager(s) and other
extension users to the destinations where they will be available.

• Call Forward-Remote is possible only from the System Administration (SA) mode.

How it works
This feature works in the same way as Call Forward. The only difference is that it is set by one extension user for
another extension.

For example:

• A and B are extension users.

• A needs to forward calls for B's extension to another extension 'C' or an external number or a Voice Mail
Group or a Department Number.

• A dials the Call Forward-Remote feature code followed by B's extension number, the destination number
where the calls for B should land.

• The system routes all incoming calls for B to the destination number.

How to configure
As Call Forward-Remote can be invoked only from the SA mode, either the feature 'SA Mode' or 'SA Extension'
must be enabled in the “Class of Service (COS)” of extensions that are to be allowed this feature.

The feature 'SA Mode' requires a password to be dialed. Users must be provided a password to use this
feature from their extensions. The feature 'SA Extension' allows an extension user to enter into SA mode,
without a password.

By default, all extensions are allowed SA Mode in their Class of Service. So, all extensions can access Call
Forward Remote, provided they have the SA password.

You may decide which extensions should be allowed Call Forward-Remote feature. Generally, only few extensions
are allowed this feature.

For instructions on configuring SA Mode and SA Extension in the Class of Service of different extension types, see
“SLT Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”, “SIP Extensions” under Basic Settings.

414 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use

Using Call Forward - Remote from Jeeves

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Administrator.

• Click the Extension link.

• The Extension numbers appear on the tabs on the right pane, starting with SLT extensions.

• To select a particular extension number or type, click on the tab. To select a particular extension number
or type, click on the tab.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 415

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Call Forward to expand.

• Select the type of Call Forward you want to set for the extension:

• To forward calls to voice mail, select the radio button Forward Calls to Voice Mail and the type of call
forward from the drop down list. Default: Unconditionally.

• To forward calls of this extension to another extension, select Forward Calls to Phone radio button
and the type of call forward for this option from the drop down list. Default: Unconditionally.

Enter the extension number to which calls must be forwarded in the empty field provided for this option.

• To forward calls of this extension to an external number, select Forward Calls to External Number
radio button, and select the type of call forward for this option from the drop down list. Default:
Unconditionally.

Enter the external number to which calls must be forwarded in the empty field provided for this option.

416 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Call Forward button to set Call Forward -Remote.

The label of the Call Forward button changes color and the message “Call Forward is set” appears.

• Click the Dual Ring button to set Call-Forward Remote with Dual Ring.
The label of the Dual Ring button changes color and the message “Dual ring is On” appears.

• To set Call Forward on another extension, click the extension number tab, and follow the same instructions
as above.

• You can also forward the calls of all extensions at one go to the same destination. To do this,

• Click Call Forward-All Extensions link.

• Select the Forward Calls of all Extensions radio button and select the Call Forward type from the drop
down list.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 417

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • In the to Extension field, enter the Call Forward destination number.

• Click Submit to save.

• To cancel, click the Cancel Call Forward of All extensions link

• Click Submit to save.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

Using Call Forward - Remote from a Telephone

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set Call Forward-Remote:

• Press the DSS Key assigned to 'Call Forward-Remote'.

OR

• Dial 1072-006.
• Enter the Destination Phone Number.
• Scroll to select the desired Call Forward Type:
• All Calls.
• If Busy.
• If No Reply.
• If Busy or No Reply.
• Dual Ring.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• Enter Destination Phone Number18/Voice Mail19/Department Group.
• You get a confirmation tone and a text message for the Call Forward type set.
• Go Idle.

To cancel Call Forward set for an extension,

• Press the DSS Key assigned to 'Call Forward-Remote'.

OR

• Dial 1072-006.
• Enter Extension Number.
• Scroll to select 'Cancel'.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get a confirmation tone and text message for Call Forward canceled.
• Go Idle.

18. If call is to be forwarded to an extension of the ETERNITY, dial the extension number. If call is to be forwarded on an external num-
ber, dial Trunk Access Code, then dial the external phone number and terminate the command with #*.

For users world wide, Trunk Access Code (TAC) for dialing external numbers are: 0, 5, 61, 62, 63, 64. For users in USA, TAC for
dialing external numbers are: 9, 5, 81, 82, 83, 84.

19. If call is to be forwarded on voice mail, dial the Access Code for the Voice Mail group. The default Access Code is 393121.

418 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For SLT Users
To set Call Forward-Remote:

• Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-006.
• Enter Extension Number.
• Dial 1 for All Calls
• Dial 2 for If Busy
• Dial 3 for If No Reply
• Dial 4 for If Busy or No Reply
• Dial 5 for Dual Ring
• Dial destination Phone Number/Voice Mail.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

To cancel Call Forward Remote:

• Lift the handset.

• Dial 1072-006.
• Dial the Extension Number.
• Dial 0.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 419

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Hold

What's this?
Call Hold enables you to put an on-going conversation (with an internal or external number) on hold, and call
another person or receive a call from another person. You can retrieve the call you put on hold, after the
conversation with the other party has ended or in the middle of the conversation with the other party.

Call Hold is a feature of the DKP and the Extended IP Phone. ETERNITY NE enables two types of Call Hold on the
DKP: Exclusive Hold and Global Hold.

Exclusive Hold
The call placed on Exclusive hold can be retrieved only from the DKP/Extended IP Phone which put it on hold. The
call remains connected to the DKP/Extended IP Phone which placed it on hold.

When a call is put on Exclusive hold, the ETERNITY NE starts the Call Park Timer and Call Park Release Timer.

The call remains on hold for the duration of the Call Park Timer (programmable; default: 45 seconds). If this call is
not retrieved before the Call Park Timer expires, the call is parked in the Personal Orbit for the duration of the Call
Park Release Timer (programmable; default: 3 minutes). If the DKP/Extended IP Phone becomes idle within this
Timer, the call is returned to the DKP/Extended IP Phone and the phone gets Ring Back Tone.

If the DKP/Extended IP Phone is busy, the system waits for the duration of the Call Park Release Timer for the
DKP/Extended IP Phone to go idle or retrieve the call. If the DKP/Extended IP Phone goes idle within this Timer,
the call is returned to the DKP/Extended IP Phone and the phone gets Ring Back Tone.

The call is disconnected if the DKP/Extended IP PHone is still not free or does not retrieve the call before the Call
Park Release Timer expires.

A call placed on Exclusive Hold can be retrieved in the following ways:

• Pressing the Hold key again (when the DKP/Extended IP Phone is idle).

• Pressing the Key of the Call Appearance of the call put on hold (before it gets parked).

• Pressing DSS key assigned to the Trunk/extension you put on hold.

• Answering the call, when it returns at the end of the Call Park Timer.

Global Hold
The call placed on Global hold can be picked up from any DKP/Extended IP PHone extension of ETERNITY. The
call remains connected in the system. The call remains on hold for the duration of the Call Hold Retrieval Timer
(programmable; default: 60 seconds). If this call is not retrieved before the expiry of the Timer, the call is returned to
the DKP/Extended IP Phone which put it on hold.

To be able to place calls on Global Hold, you must enable 'Global Hold' in the System Parameters of ETERNITY.
The DKP/Extended IP Phone (which picks up the call) must have a DSS Key to access the Trunk or the Extension
which is put on hold.

420 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When Global Hold is enabled in the System Parameters, all Depths/Extended IP Phones connected to the
ETERNITY NE can pick up calls put on hold by another DKP/Extended IP Phone by:

• Pressing DSS key assigned to the Trunk put on Global Hold.

• Pressing the DSS key assigned to the extension put on Global Hold.

The call on Global Hold must be picked up before the Call Hold Retrieval Timer expires.

ETERNITY NE provides the flexibility to use Exclusive Hold and Global Hold at the same time. You can put
calls on Exclusive Hold even when Global Hold is enabled in the system.

ETERNITY NE does not support Global Hold on SIP Trunks.

How to configure
For this feature to work,

• Call Hold must be enabled in the “Class of Service (COS)”of the DKPs and Extended IP Phones you want
to allow this feature.

Call Hold is a part of the ‘Basic Features’ allowed to all extensions by default in their class of Service. So,
all extensions of ETERNITY NE can use this feature.

• Global Hold must be enabled in the “System Parameters” if you want Calls on Hold to be picked up by any
DKP/Extended IP Phone extension.

• DSS Keys must be configured for Trunks and Extensions on the DKPs and Extended IP Phones, which
are allowed to retrieve calls on Global Hold. See “Phone Key Settings” under “DKP Extensions” for
instructions. Also see, “Matrix Extended IP Phone Key Settings” under “SIP Extensions”

• If required, you may change the duration of these timers:

• Call Hold Retrieval Timer
• Call Park Timer
• Call Park Release Timer
For instructions, see “System Timers and Counts”

How to use

Exclusive Hold
To put a call on Exclusive Hold, when Global Hold is disabled:

• You are in speech with on a Trunk/with an extension.

• Press Hold key, go idle.
• Call with Trunk/extension is put on 'Exclusive Hold'.

To retrieve the call:

• press Call Appearance key of your phone

• press DSS Key of the Trunk/extension you put on hold from your phone.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 421

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To put a call on Exclusive Hold, when Global Hold is enabled:

• You are in speech with on a Trunk/with an extension.

• Press Hold key twice in quick succession within 1 second.
• Go idle.
• Call with Trunk/extension is put on 'Exclusive Hold'.

To retrieve the call:

• press Call Appearance key of your phone.

• press DSS Key of the Trunk/extension you put on hold from your phone.

Global Hold
To put a call on Global Hold:

• You are in speech with on a Trunk/with an extension.

• To put on Global Hold, press 'Hold' key.
• Go idle.

To retrieve a call on Global Hold:

• From any DKP or Extended IP Phone,

• Press the DSS Key of the Trunk/extension put on Global hold, which is blinking slowly Blue.

422 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Logs

What's this?
ETERNITY stores the details of 20 each, of the following types of calls:

• Missed calls: incoming calls that were not answered by extension users.
• Answered calls: incoming calls answered by extension users.
• Dialed calls: calls made by extension users.

The call history of each of the above types of calls is stored by Name, Number, and Date-Time of the Call.

If there is no name in the CLI of the above types of calls, the system stores and displays the Number and the Date-
Time. In case there is no number in the CLI, the system will display the Port number on/from which the call was
received/made.

The Call Logs contain details of both internal as well as external calls made or received by the extension users.

The Call Logs feature is supported on DKP extensions only.

Using call logs you can:

• view call history: you can see the calls you missed, answered or dialed.
• make calls: you can call any number that you have missed, answered, or dialed.
• edit the numbers: you can change or modify the number in the call log. This is useful when the CLI
received and stored in the call log is not in the same format that is to be used to make calls.
• save the numbers: you can store the external numbers in your call logs in the “Personal Directory" and
use them for “Personal Abbreviated Dialing”.

The maximum number of calls that can be stored under each Call Log type is 20. The logs will be cleared
automatically using the First-In, First-Out method, i.e. the latest call detail will replace the record of the oldest call
detail.

Given the limited Call Log capacity, the system allows you to choose if you want internal calls to be displayed or not
in the Missed, Answered and Dialed Call Logs, and accordingly stores the internal calls in the logs.

The system stores each Missed, Answered and Dialed call individually even if the same number is received
multiple times.

How to configure
This feature does not require any specific configuration, except:

• Selecting whether internal calls should be logged in the Missed, Answered and Dialed Call Logs. This can
be done on the '“System Parameters”' page under Advanced Settings.

• Programming of a DSS key for the Call Logs feature.See “Phone Key Settings” under “DKP Extensions”
for instructions. Also see, “Matrix Extended IP Phone Key Settings” under “SIP Extensions”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 423

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring Internal Call Logging using Jeeves
• Login as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the link System Parameters to open the page.

• You may enable any or all of the following flags by clicking on the respective check box:
• Log Internal Calls in Missed Calls
• Log Internal Calls in Answered Calls
• Log Internal Calls in Dialed Calls

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save your settings.

• Log out of Jeeves or continue, as required.

How to use
The Call Logs feature allows you to view calls and edit numbers, make calls to any number logged, and store
numbers.

Viewing Call Logs on DKP

There are two ways to view call logs on the DKP:

• From the Phone Menu

• Using the Feature Key assigned to Call Logs.

424 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If you are using a DSS Key for the Call Logs feature, whenever there is a missed call, the LED of the DSS
key will glow. If you press the Call Logs key, the system will display the last missed call details.

To view Call Logs on DKP from Phone Menu:

• Press Enter key when the phone is idle.
• Place your cursor on Call Logs option, press Enter key.
• Scroll with the Up/Down Navigation Key to reach the desired Call Log: Missed, Answered, Dialed.
• Press Enter key to select the desired Call Log.
• The phone will display the call log details by: <Name> <Date> <HH:MM>
• Press Enter key.
• The phone will display the Number: <XXXXXXXXXXX>
• To view another call log, scroll with the Back Navigation key to return to the previous option.
• You may exit the Phone Menu by going ON-Hook or pressing the Cancel key.

• If there is no name in the CLI, the Call Log will only display the number.
• If you press the 'Enter' key, the system will dial out the number you just viewed.

To view Call Logs on DKP using DSS Key:

• Press DSS Key programmed for Call Logs, when the phone is idle.
• Scroll to select the desired Call Log Call Log: Missed, Answered, Dialed.
• Follow the same steps as described for viewing Call Log entries using the Phone Menu.

OR

• Press the DSS Key assigned the Call Logs feature, when it glows.
• The phone will display the call log details of the last missed call by: <Name> <Date> <HH:MM> (only if
name is received).
• Press Enter key.
• The phone will display the Number: <XXXXXXXXXXX>
• You may exit the Phone Menu by going OFF-Hook or pressing the Cancel key20.
• You may also edit or store the number.
• You may scroll with the < Back navigation key to view the other call logs.
• The LED of the Call Logs DSS key will be turned off once you have viewed the missed call.

Editing Numbers in Call Logs

• Go to Call Logs from the Phone Menu or by pressing Call Logs DSS Key. (see instructions given above).
• Scroll with the Up/Down Navigation Key to reach the desired Call Log: Missed, Answered, Dialed.
• Press Enter key to select the desired Call Log.
• The phone will display the call log details by: <Name> <Date> <HH:MM>
• Press Enter key.
• The phone will display the Number: <XXXXXXXXXXX>
• To edit the number, move the cursor with the Front and Back navigation key.
• Place the cursor under the digit you want to delete.
• Press 'Transfer' key to delete a digit.
• To insert a digit, place the cursor where you want to insert the digit, and enter the digit using the dial pad.
The digit will be inserted in the number string accordingly.
• Repeat the same to delete/insert another digit.
• After editing the number, you may store it in the Personal Directory or dial the edited number by pressing
the Enter key.

20. This key is available on EON48. This key must be programmed on EON42.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 425

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The original number (you now changed) will remain unaffected in the Log. However, if you make a call to
the new number (you changed), it will be logged in the “Dialed” call log and the Last Number Redial list.

Making calls using Call Logs

• Go to Call Logs from the Phone Menu or by pressing Call Logs DSS Key.
• Scroll with the Up/Down Navigation Key to reach the desired Call Log: Missed, Answered, Dialed.
• Press Enter key to select the desired Call Log.
• The phone will display the call log details by: <Name> <Date> <HH:MM>
• Press Enter key.
• The phone will display the Number: <XXXXXXXXXXX>
• Press Enter key.
• The system will dial out the selected number using the Outgoing Trunks assigned for dialing ‘0’.
• The dialed number will be logged in the "Dialed" call log and the Last Number Redial List.

Storing numbers of Call Logs in Personal Memory of the DKP

To store any external call record (trunk call) from Received, Missed and Dialed call logs to Personal Directory,

• Scroll to the desired call log.

• Press Enter key to view the complete number.
• Edit the number (following instructions given above), if required.
• Press 'v' (Down Navigation key).
• You will get the prompt: "Enter Name"21.
• Enter the name of the contact.
• Press Enter key.
• You will get the confirmation message: "Stored at Memory: <XXX>".

• When you store the number in the Personal Directory, the system will automatically assign Trunk
Access Code "0".

• If all 25 Location Index Numbers of the Personal Directory are already programmed, the message
"Memory Full" will appear on your phone's display and you will get an Error Tone. Refer the topic
“Abbreviated Dialing” to know more.

21. Only if there is a free Memory Index in the Personal Directory.

426 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Park

What is this?
Call Park allows you to place a call on hold, so it can be retrieved from the same or another extension of the
system.

A call is 'parked' when the extension user temporarily places the call into a location in the system called 'Orbit'. The
user can attend to other calls. The parked call can be retrieved on completion of the current call by dialing the Orbit
number.

Call Parking is useful in offices housed in different parts of a building or multi-storied offices. It is useful in situations
like:

• the person who picked up the call is not the desired called party or the desired party is at an unknown
location. The person who picked up the call can then either go to find the desired called party or call other
numbers to find him/her. When found, the desired called party can pick up the call from the same or any
extension by dialing the Orbit number.

• the person who picked up the call may have to go to another part of the office to look up a file or consult a
colleague. The person can park the call and continue the conversation from the other part of the office.

The ETERNITY offers two types of Call Park facility:

• Call Park-General Orbit: The extension user can park calls in any of the 8 'general' Orbits, which are like
fictional extensions located in the system. The calls parked in the General Orbit can be picked up from any
extension by dialing the General Orbit Number. At a time, only one call can be parked in each General
Orbit.

• Call Park-Personal Orbit: Each telephone instrument (EON or SLT) connected as extension has one
Personal Orbit. Calls parked in personal orbit can be picked up only from where the call is parked. So, no
other person can pick up this call. Multiple calls can be parked in the Personal Orbit at a time.

Extension users can park the call either in the General Orbit or the Personal Orbit by dialing an Orbit Number from
1 to 9, where:

• 1 is the Personal Orbit Number.

• 2-9 is the General Orbit Numbers.

After parking a call, the extension user can continue to make and answer other calls and use other system features.

How it works
A and B are extension users. C, D and E are callers.

Parking Calls in General Orbit

• C calls B.
• A picks up the call.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 427

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • As B is not present at his extension, A parks the call in General Orbit Number 2 by dialing the Access
Code.
• C is played on-hold music.
• A tries to find B (by either calling several numbers or by going in person or sending someone).
• The parked call remains in orbit for the duration of the Call Park Timer, which is set to 45 seconds by
default.
• A finds B.
• B retrieves the call from another extension by dialing the feature access code for retrieving Call Park and
Orbit number 2.
• If A cannot locate B or if B cannot attend the call, A can also retrieve the call from his extension.

However,
• If neither A nor B retrieves the parked call within the Call Park Timer, the system will hunt for the extension
that parked the call (A) on the expiry of the Call Park Timer.

• Meanwhile, if A is busy, the system again keeps the call parked in orbit number 2 for the period of the Call
Park Timer. This process continues for the duration of the Call Park Release Timer, which is set to 3
minutes by default.

• If A is free, the system will ring on A's phone. A gets connected to C again.

• If A does not retrieve the parked call till the end of the Call Park Release Timer, C gets disconnected.

Parking Calls in Personal Orbit

Parking calls in the Personal Orbit works the same way as in General Orbit. The only difference is that A can park
multiple calls by dialing the Personal Orbit Number. But calls can be retrieved from A's phone only.

When there are multiple calls to be retrieved from the Personal Orbit, they are retrieved one by one, without
following any particular sequence like FIFO or LIFO.

To be able to use 'Call Park', this feature must be enabled in the COS of the requesting extension.
However, for retrieving parked calls, the system does not check COS. So any extension can retrieve
parked calls.

How to configure
To be able to use this feature, you must do the following configuration:

• Enable Call Park in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the extensions which you want to allow this feature.
For instructions see “SLT Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”, “SIP Extensions” under Basic Settings.

• If required, change the value of the Call Park Timer and the Call Park Release Timer to the desired
duration. See “System Timers and Counts” for instructions.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To park a call:

• You are in speech with extension/external caller.

428 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Press DSS Key assigned to 'Call Park' function. The LED of the key flickers.
OR
• Dial Flash-115
• Enter Orbit Number (1-9)
(Personal Orbit:1; General: 2-9).

To retrieve a parked call:

• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Call Park' again. The LED of the key is turned off.
OR
• Dial Flash-116
• Enter Orbit Number where you parked the call (1-9)
(Personal Orbit:1; General: 2-9).
• You are in speech with the extension/external caller.

For SLT Users

To park a call:

• You are in speech with extension/external caller.

• Dial Flash-115-Orbit Number
(Personal Orbit:1; General: 2-9).
• Call is parked.

To retrieve a parked call:

• Lift the handset.

• Dial Flash-116-Orbit Number
(Personal Orbit:1; General: 2-9).
• You are in speech with the extension/external caller.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 429

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Pickup

What's this?
Call Pickup allows extension users to answer calls ringing on other extensions from their own extension; without
physically going to the ringing extensions.

Extension users can 'pick-up' both internal and trunk calls ringing on other extensions.

As extension users can answer calls of their colleagues or co-workers without physically going to their extensions,
this feature ensures that all incoming calls are answered.

Eternity offers two types of Call Pickup:

• Call Pick Up-Group - extensions are assigned to Pick-Up Groups. Any extension in a Pick-Up Group can
answer calls ringing on other extensions within the same group only.

• Call Pickup Selective - calls ringing on any extension of the system can be answered.

How it works

Call Pickup Group

• Extensions must be assigned to Call Pickup Groups. The extensions in a Call Pickup group may be SLT,
DKP and SIP Extensions.

• As many as 8 such groups may be formed.

• Each group is assigned a number 01 to 08.

• For example, extensions 201, 201, 203, and 303, 304, 305 are assigned to Pick-Up Group number 03.

• When an extension in this group rings, any extension in the group 03 can pick up the call by dialing ‘4’ the
(default) feature access code for "Call Pickup Group".

• The ringing extension should be in the same Pick-Up Group.

Call Pickup Selective

• Extensions need not be in Call Pickup Groups.

• Whenever an extension in the system rings, the call can be picked up by any extension of the system by
dialing the feature access code and the number of the ringing extension.

When more than one extension in a Pick-Up Group are ringing, you can choose which one to answer first,
using Call Pickup Selective.

430 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Feature Interactions:

• Call States: Call Pickup will fail if the ringing extension goes into idle state just when you are dialing the
pick-up access code.

• Auto Call Back: Call Pickup will fail if the call ringing on the extension is an Auto Call Back request.

• Alarms: Call Pickup will fail if the call ringing on the extension is an Alarm Call.

How to configure

Creating Call Pickup Groups

On a sheet of paper, list the extensions that are to be grouped into a Call Pickup Group. Make as many Call Pickup
Groups as required. Assign each group a number.

Call Pickup
SLT Extensions DKP Extensions SIP Extensions
Group Number

01 201, 202, 203 301 303, 304, 305

02 204, 205, 206 302 306, 308, 309

03 207, 208, 209, 210 310, 311

08

The numbering of Call Pickup Groups must start from 01 and end at 08.

Configuring Extensions in Call Pickup Groups

For this feature to function, go to Basic Settings of Jeeves,

• Configure “Call Pickup Group”. You may refer to the sheet of paper you prepared.

• For each SLT/DKP/SIP extension assigned to a CPU Group, make sure Call Pickup is enabled in the
“Class of Service (COS)” of the extensions for the Day and Night. Default: Enabled. See “Basic Settings”
for instructions on configuring COS of different Extension types: SLT, DKP, SIP.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To pick up a ringing extension in your Group:

• Press DSS Key assigned to Call Pickup Group.

OR

• Dial 4.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 431

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Talk.
• Go idle.

To pick up any one of several ringing extensions ringing or the extension that is not in your group:

• Press DSS Key assigned to Call Pickup Selective.

OR

• Dial 12.
• Dial number of the Extension you want to pick up.
• Talk.
• Go idle.

For SLT Users

To pick up a ringing extension in your Group:

• Lift the handset.

• Dial 4.
• Talk.
• Replace handset.

To pick up any one of several ringing extensions ringing or the extension that is not in your group:

• Lift the handset.

• Dial 12.
• Dial number of the Extension you want to pick up.
• Talk.
• Replace handset.

432 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Progress Tones

What's this?
Call Progress Tones (CPT) are audible tones sent from switching systems such as PSTN or PBX to calling parties
to show the status of phone calls, like dial tone, error tone, ringing error in number dialed, ringing called party, busy
line, etc.

Each CPT has a distinctive tone frequency and cadence assigned to it, for which some standards have been
established by the International Telecommunication Union (ITU).

On the basis of specific frequency, modulating frequency and cadence, the CPTs generated by ETERNITY NE are
categorized as:

CPT Event Sound Duration Timer

Dial Tone 1 Played on lifting the Toooooooooooo Played for 7 seconds. Dial Tone Timer
handset. After which Error Tone
starts

Dial Tone 2 Played on lifting the Toooooooooooo Played for 7 seconds. Dial Tone Timer
handset, when 'Store After which Error Tone
and Forward Dialinga' is starts
done.

Ring Back Tone Played when the Turroo... Turrroo Played for 45 seconds Ring Back Tone
internal number you Timer
have dialed is free.

Busy Tone High pitch beeps with Tooooooo......... Played for 7 seconds. Busy Tone Timer
(Engaged Tone) equal ON and OFF Toooooooo
periods, played when
the dialed extension is
busy. Busy tone
continues for 7
seconds. This Busy
Tone Timer is
programmable.

Error Tone Fast beeps, played on a Too…Too…Too Played for 30 seconds Error Tone Timer
(Congestion/ wrong operation being …Too
Refusal Tone as performed or a feature
per ITU invoked without access.

Internal Call Short beep followed by Beep.……….… Played for duration of Interrupt Request
Waiting Tone longer OFF duration Beep the Interrupt Request Timer, Barge-In
(Intrusion Tone repeated every second; Timer or the Barge-In Timer
as per ITU) played to the busy Timer.
extension when another
extension attempts
Interrupt Request/
Barge-In

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 433

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CPT Event Sound Duration Timer

External Call Two ticks followed by a Beep...Beep… Played for the duration Transfer-On Busy
Waiting Tone longer OFF time of ……......Beep... of the Transfer-On Busy Timer.
(Call Waiting approx. 3 seconds; Beep Timer.
Tone as per ITU) played to a busy
extension when there is
a new incoming Trunk
call.

Confirmation Continuous, fast beeps, Beep... Beep... Played for 7 seconds. Confirmation Tone
Tone played to confirm Beep Timer
(Acceptance successful use of
Tone as per ITU) features.

Feature Tone Short beep followed by Beep................. Played until user goes
a longer off duration Beep ON-Hook or dials a
repeated every second; feature code.
played when dialing
feature access codes

Programming Short beep followed by Beep................. Played until user goes Programming Tone
Tone a longer off duration Beep ON-Hook or dials a Timer
repeated every second; command.
played to prompt
entering of fresh
commands during
programming.

Programming Continuous, fast beeps; Beep... Beep... Played for 3 seconds. Programming
Confirmation played to indicate that Beep Confirmation Timer
Tone system has received a
valid command and is
processing it.

Programming Fast beeps, played on a Too…Too…Too Played for 3 seconds. Programming Error
Error Tone wrong programming …Too Tone Timer
command being dialed.

a. In Store and Forward dialing, the digits are first stored in a memory location and then these are dialed on the trunk.
For example: When Least Cost Routing (LCR) is enabled, the system will store the dialed digits first, check the trunk
through which the call is to be routed and then dials the number on the appropriate trunk.

Tone standards vary with the country of application. For example, as per ITU standard, the Dial Tone for India
consists of 400Hz modulated by 25Hz, whereas it is 350+440Hz, without modulation, for USA/Canada. Further,
many countries use different frequencies and cadences for the same tone. For example, in the US, five different
frequency and cadence are used for Dial Tone.

ETERNITY offers the flexibility of setting the Call Progress Tone Generation (CPTG) type to match the country-
specific CPT standards established by ITU.

India being the default 'Region' for ETERNITY, the CTPG for India is set as default in the system.

434 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How it works
At the time of installation, when you select the Region (according to the geographical location of the site where the
system is installed) and default the system, ETERNITY sets the country-specific CPTG type defined for the
selected 'Region'.

For countries that use different frequencies and cadences for the same tone, e.g. USA, only one
frequency/cadence among the group is considered. See Table "Default CPTG Type".

How to configure
Configuration of Call Progress Tones involves three parameters: CPTG Type (Region), CPT related Timers, and
Dial Tone Type.

The country-specific CPTG type is set automatically by the system when the 'Region' is selected. However, if
required, you may change the CTPG type set by the system. To do this,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click Advanced Settings link.

• Click the Regional Settings link.

• Click the link Call Progress Tones to open the page.

• Select the desired Region from the drop down list.

• Select the desired Dial Tone Type as Type 1 or Type 2 from the combo box.

• Click Submit to save changes.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 435

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To change CPT-related Timers

• Click the System Timers and Counts link to open the page.

• Go to Call Progress Tones.

• Change the values of the CPT-related Timers as desired.

• Click Submit to save changes.

CPTG Region Codes

CPTG Dial tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Ring Back Tone Busy Tone
Region Region Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence
Code Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq.
(sec) (sec) (sec) (sec)
1 Region1 440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 350+440 0.4on 0.2off 440 0.75on 0.75off
0.4on 2.0off
2 Region2 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400 0.6on 0.2off 400 0.5on 0.5off
0.2on 2.0off
3 Region3 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 2.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
4 Argentina 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0 off 425 0.3on 0.2off
5 Australia 425*25 Continuous 425*25 Continuous 400*25 .4on .2off 425 0.375on
.4on 2.0off 0.375off
6 Brazil 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0 off 425 0.25on 0.25off
7 Canada 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 2.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
8 China 450 Continuous 450 Continuous 450 1.0on 4.0off 450 0.35 on
0.36off
9 Egypt 425*50 Continuous 425*50 Continuous 425*50 2.0on 1.0off 425*50 1.0on 4.0off
10 France 440 Continuous 440 Continuous 440 1.5on 3.5off 440 0.5on 0.5off

436 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CPTG Dial tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Ring Back Tone Busy Tone
Region Region Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence
Code Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq.
(sec) (sec) (sec) (sec)
11 Germany 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.48on 0.48off
12 Greece 425 0.2on 0.3off 425 0.2on 0.3off 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.3on 0.3off
0.7on 0.8off 0.7on 0.8off
13 India1 400*25 Continuous 400*25 Continuous 400*25 .4on .2off 400 0.75on 0.75off
.4on 2.0off
14 Indonesia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
15 Iran 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
16 Iraq 400 0.4on 0.2off 400 0.4on 0.2off 400 Continuous 400 1.0on 1.0off
0.4on 1.5off 0.4on 1.5off
17 Israel 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400 1.0on 3.0off 400 0.5on 0.5off
18 Italy1 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
19 Japan 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400*25 1.0on 2.0off 400 .5on .5off
20 Kenya 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 0.67on 425 0.2on 0.6off
3.0off 1.5on 0.2on 0.6off
5.0off
21 Korea 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 1.0on 2.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
22 Malaysia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 0.4on 0.2off 425 0.5on 0.5off
0.4on 2.0off
23 Mexico 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.25on 0.25off
24 New 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400+450 0.4on 0.2off 400 0.5on 0.5off
Zealand 0.4on 2.0off
25 Phillippines 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425+480 1.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
26 Poland 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
27 Portugal 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 5.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
28 Russia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 0.8on 3.2off 425 0.4on 0.4off
29 Saudi 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.2on 4.6off 425 0.5on 0.5off
Arabia
30 Singapore 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425*24 0.4on 0.2off 425 .75on .75off
0.4on 2.0off
31 South 400*33 Continuous 400*33 Continuous 400*33 0.4on 0.2off 400 .5on .5off
Africa 0.4on 2.0off
32 Spain 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.5on 3.0off 425 0.2on 0.2off
33 Thailand 400*50 Continuous 400*50 Continuous 400 1.0on 4.0off 400 0.5on 0.5off
34 Turkey 450 Continuous 450 Continuous 450 2.0on 4.0off 450 0.5on 0.5off
35 UAE 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 400+450 0.4on 0.2off 400 0.375on
0.4on 2.0off 0.375off
36 UK 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 400+450 0.4on 0.2off 400 0.375on
0.4on 2.0off 0.375off
37 USA 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 2.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
38 Italy2 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400 1.0on 2.0off 400 0.5on 0.5off
39 Belgium 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 425 1.0on 3.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
0.25off
40 India2 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 350+440 0.4on 0.2off 400 0.75on 0.75off
0.4on 2.0off

CPTG Error Tone Confirmation Tone Feature Tone CCWT ICWT

Region Region Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence
Code Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq.
(sec) (sec) (sec) (sec) (sec)
1 Region1 440 0.25on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 350+440 0.1on 440 0.1on
0.25 off 0.1off 440 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.1on
2.7off

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 437

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CPTG Error Tone Confirmation Tone Feature Tone CCWT ICWT
Region Region Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence
Code Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq.
(sec) (sec) (sec) (sec) (sec)
2 Region2 400 0.25on 400 0.1on 400 1.5on 400 0.2on 400 0.2on
0.25 off 0.1off 0.1off 4.8off 4.8off
3 Region3 440 0.25on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 440+480 0.1on 440 0.1on
0.25 off 0.1off 440 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.1on
2.7off
4 Argentina 425 0.3on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.3on 425 0.1on
0.4off 0.1off 0.9off 10.0off 2.9off
5 Australia 425 0.375on 425*25 0.1on 425* 0.1on 425 0.2on 425 Continuous
0.375off 0.1off 25 0.9off 0.2off
0.2on
4.4off
6 Brazil 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.05on 425 0.1on
0.25 off 0.1off 0.9off 1.0off 2.9off
7 Canada 480+ 0.25on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 440 0.3on 480+ 0.5on
620 0.25off 0.1off 440 0.9off 10.0off 620 0.5off
8 China 450 0.7on 450 0.1on 450 0.1on 450 0.4 on 450 0.2on
0.7off 0.1off 0.9off 4.0off 0.2off
0.2on
0.6off
9 Egypt 450 0.5on 425*50 0.1on 425* 0.1on 425*50 0.1on 450 0.5on
0.5off 0.1off 50 0.9off 0.1off 0.5off
0.1on
2.7off
10 France 440 0.25on 440 0.1on 440 0.1on 440 0.3on 440 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 10.0off 2.9off
11 Germany 425 0.24on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.2on .2off 425 0.1on
0.24off 0.1off 0.9off .2on 5.0off 2.9off
12 Greece 425 0.15on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.3on 425 0.15on
0.15off 0.1off 0.9off 10.0off 0.25off
0.3on 0.15on
10.0off 1.45off
13 India1 400 0.25on 400 1.0on 400* 0.1on 400 0.2on 400 0.15on
0.25off 4.0off 25 0.9off 0.1off 4.85off
0.2on
7.5off
14 Indonesia 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.15on 425 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 0.15off 2.9off
0.15on
10.0off
15 Iran 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.2on 425 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 0.2off 2.9off
0.2on
10.0off
16 Iraq 400 0.25on 400 0.1on 400 0.1on 400 0.1on 400 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.1on
2.7off
17 Israel 400 0.25on 400 0.17on 400 0.1on 400 0.5on 400 0.1on
0.25off 0.14off 0.9off 10.0off 2.9off
0.34on
5.0off
18 Italy1 425 0.2on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.4on 425 0.1on
0.2off 0.1off 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.25on
0.1off
0.15on
5.0off

438 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CPTG Error Tone Confirmation Tone Feature Tone CCWT ICWT
Region Region Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence
Code Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq.
(sec) (sec) (sec) (sec) (sec)
19 Japan 400 0.25on 400 0.1on 400 0.1on 400*25 0.5on 400* 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 2.0off 25 2.9off
0.05on
0.45off
0.05on
3.45off
20 Kenya 425 0.2on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on
0.6off 0.1off 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.1on
2.7off
21 Korea 480+ 0.3on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 350+440 0.25on 350+ 0.1on
620 0.2off 0.1off 440 0.9off 0.25off 440 2.9off
0.25on
3.25off
22 Malaysia 425 2.5on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.2on 425 0.1on
0.5off 0.1off 0.9off 0.2off 2.9off
0.2on
5.0off
23 Mexico 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.1on
2.7off
24 New 400 0.25on 400 0.1on 400 0.1on 400 0.2on 425 0.1on
Zealand 0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 3.0off 2.9off
0.2on
5.0off
25 Phillippines 480+ 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 440 0.3on 440 0.1on
620 0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 10.0off 2.9off
26 Poland 425 0.5on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.15on 425 0.1on
0.5off 0.1off 0.9off 0.15off 2.9off
0.15on
4.0off
27 Portugal 450 0.33on 425 1.0on 425 0.1on 425 0.2on 425 0.2on
1.0off 0.2off 0.9off 0.2off 1.4off
0.2on
5.0off
28 Russia 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 950 0.333on 425 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 1.0off 2.9off
29 Saudi 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.15on 425 0.1on
Arabia 0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 0.2off 2.9off
0.15on
10.0off
30 Singapore 425 0.25on 425 0.125on 425 0.1on 425 0.3on 425 0.25on
0.25off 0.125off 0.9off 0.2off 2.0off
0.3on
3.2off
31 South 400 0.25on 400*33 0.1on 400* 0.1on 400*33 0.4on 400 0.15on
Africa 0.25off 0.1off 33 0.9off 4.0off 0.25off
0.15on
1.45off
32 Spain 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.175on 425 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 0.175off 2.9off
0.175on
3.5off
33 Thailand 400 0.3on 400*50 0.1on 400* 0.1on 400 0.1on 400 0.1on
0.3off 0.1off 50 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.1on
2.7off

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 439

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CPTG Error Tone Confirmation Tone Feature Tone CCWT ICWT
Region Region Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence
Code Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq.
(sec) (sec) (sec) (sec) (sec)
34 Turkey 450 0.2on 450 0.04on 450 0.1on 450 .2on .6off 450 0.1on
0.2off 0.04off 0.9off .2on 8.0off 2.9off
.6on .2off
35 UAE 400 0.4on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on
0.35off 0.1off 440 0.9off 0.1off 440 2.9off
0.225on 0.1on
0.525off 2.7off
36 UK 400 0.4on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 350+440 0.1on 400 0.2on
0.35off 0.1off 440 0.9off 0.1off 4.8off
0.225on 0.1on
0.525off 2.7off
37 USA 480+ 0.25on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 440 0.3on 480+ 0.5on
620 0.25off 0.1off 440 0.9off 10.0off 620 0.5off
38 Italy2 400 0.25on 400 0.1on 400 1.75on 400 0.2on 400 0.2on
0.25 off 0.1off 0.1off 2.5off 0.2off
0.2on
2.5off
39 Belgium 425 0.167on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 1400 0.175on 440 0.1on
0.167 off 0.1off 0.9off 0.175off 2.9off
0.175on
3.5off
40 India2 400 0.25on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.5on
0.25 off 0.1off 440 0.9off 0.1off 440 0.5off
0.1on 1.0on
2.7off 5.0off

The meaning of frequency notation is as follows:

• f1*f2: f1 is modulated by f2.
• f1+f2: The juxtaposition of two frequencies f1 and f2 without modulation.

440 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default CPTG Type applied to each 'Region' supported by ETERNITY

How to use
It is important that users of ETERNITYNE also get acquainted with the different Call Progress Tones played by the
system, so that they understand the meaning of the terms used for various tones. Therefore, ETERNITY makes it
possible for users to listen to the various Call Progress Tones.

Demonstration of Tones
It is possible to demonstrate Call Progress Tones to users by dialing the SE commands from a DKP or an SLT.

By default, the system will play each tone as demonstration for 30 seconds. The duration of demonstration can be
changed by setting the 'Tone Demo Timer' to match user preference.

To demonstrate call progress tones:

• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 441

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dial command 3541-Code.
Where,
Code is
01 Dial Tone 1
02 Dial Tone 2
03 Ring Back Tone
04 Busy Tone
05 Error Tone
06 Confirmation Tone
07 Feature Tone
08 Routing Tone
09 Programming Tone
10 Intrusion Tone (ICWT)
11 External Call Waiting Tone (CCWT)

• Exit SE mode.

442 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Restriction based on IP Address

What's this?
When the WAN port of ETERNITY NE is connected to a public IP network, it is may be necessary to restrict traffic
to and from a particular IP address only.

With the feature 'Call Restriction based on IP Address', ETERNITY makes it possible to entertain requests on its
WAN port for predefined IP Addresses only,

How it works
For this feature to work,

• the IP Address based call traffic restriction flag must be enabled.

• the "White List IP Address" list, i.e. a list of IP Addresses and their respective Subnet Masks from where
the traffic is to be allowed, must be configured.

• With flag enabled and the table configured, traffic coming from all IP Addresses, other than those
programmed in the White List, will be blocked.

• If the flag "IP Address based call traffic restriction" is enabled, but the White List IP Address Table is
blank, all incoming traffic will be rejected and it will not be possible to make VoIP calls to ETERNTY NE.

• Call Restriction will be applied also on all the SIP Trunks.

How to configure
• Create a White List Table. Make a three column table on a sheet of paper.

Index IP Address Subnet Mask

Make a list of IP Addresses from which you want to allow traffic. You are allowed to program a maximum of
5 IP Addresses. For each IP Address enter the corresponding Subnet Mask.

• With the White List Tables ready, follow these steps:

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 443

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Advanced Settings link to expand.

• Click the VoIP Configuration link under Advanced Settings.

• Click White List IP Address sub-link to open the page.

• The White List IP Address page will open.

• Select the Enable IP Address based call traffic restriction check box to enable this feature.

444 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Enter the IP Address you want to allow and the corresponding Subnet Mask in the table. You may refer to
the table you prepared on paper.

• Click Submit to save your entries.

• You may logout of Jeeves.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 445

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Taping

What's this?
Call Taping allows extension users to record the telephone conversations they have with other extensions or
external numbers, without the opposite party coming to know about it.

This feature is useful for keeping records of important conversations. For this feature to work, the system must
have the Voice Mail System present.

You can tape:

• Incoming and outgoing external calls.

• Incoming and outgoing internal calls.

Calls are taped in a common mailbox assigned to this feature. Extension users with access to the mailbox can
retrieve and listen to the recorded conversations.

To be able to record external incoming and outgoing calls, a list of phone numbers (both incoming and outgoing)
must be programmed in the Call Taping Profile. This Profile is assigned to the extensions on which Call Taping is to
be used.

Incoming calls without Calling Line Identification (CLI) can also be taped.

To be able to record internal calls, the Call Taping for Internal Calls must be enabled on the extension.

• Use this feature in accordance with the local privacy laws.

• Matrix Comsat is not responsible for any mis-/abuse of this feature by users.

How it works
• A and B are extensions. Both have Call Taping parameters configured in the Call Taping Profile assigned
to them.

• C and D are external parties.

• E is the mailbox extension.

A calls C

• The system matches the dialed number with the numbers configured in the Tape Outgoing calls made to
numbers in the Call Taping Profile assigned to A.

• The system finds a match. When speech is established, the system starts recording the conversation
between A and C automatically in Be's mailbox.

• Call Taping Beeps will be played to A and C, if this feature is enabled.

446 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 D calls B

• The system matches the incoming number with the numbers configured in the Tape Incoming Calls
received from numbers in the Call Taping Profile assigned to B.

• On finding a match, system records the speech between D and B in E's mailbox.

• Call Taping Beeps will be played to D and B only if this feature is enabled.

• If an incoming call does not have any CLI, the system checks the flag ‘Tape Incoming Calls received
without CLI' in the Call Taping profile assigned to the extension.

• If the flag is enabled, all calls without CLI are taped.

A calls B

• The system checks if the Tape Internal Calls is enabled in the Call Taping Profile assigned to A.

• If the flag is enabled, the system records the speech between A and B in E's mailbox.

• Call Taping Beeps will be played to A and B only if this feature is enabled.

• If the flag is disabled, the speech between A and B will not be recorded.

• The same is done when B calls A. The speech will be recorded in E's mailbox.

To listen to the conversation, A and B must have access to the mailbox of E.

Feature Interaction:

• Conversation Recording: If Call Taping and “Conversation Recording” both are enabled for an
extension, then priority is given to Conversation Recording.

How to configure
To provide this feature to extensions,

• Call Taping Profile must be configured. A Call Taping Profile consists of the following parameters:

• List of Incoming and Outgoing phone numbers for which the system should initiate Call Taping.
• Internal Call taping flag.
• Flag for taping Incoming Calls received without CLI.

You can configure four different Profiles and assign different profiles to different extensions.

• Call Taping Profile must be assigned to the extensions which are to be provided this feature.

• A mailbox must be assigned for Call Taping.

• If required, you may disable the Beeps played when Call Taping starts.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 447

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To configure Call Taping Profile,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click Call Taping link under Advanced Settings.

• Call Taping Profile 1 appears on this page.

• In the Tape Incoming Calls received from following numbers column, enter the phone numbers of
external callers whose speech you want to tape.

• In the Tape Outgoing Calls made to following numbers column, enter the phone numbers of external
parties dialed by extension users whose speech you want to tape.

• To tape calls between extensions, select the Tape Internal Calls check box. Default: Disabled.

• To tape incoming calls received without a CLI, select the Tape Incoming calls received without CLI
check box. Default: Disabled.

• Click Submit to save entries.

448 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To configure another Call Taping Profile, click the desired Profile number tab. Follow the same instructions
as above to configure the Call Taping Profile.

• Now, assign the Call Taping Profile(s) you configured to the desired extension types. For instructions on
configuring Call Taping on different extension types, see “SLT Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”, “SIP
Extensions” under Basic Settings.

• To assign a mailbox for Call Taping, click the System Parameters link. The System Parameters page
opens.

• On this page, under System Parameters, go to Mailbox for Call Taping, select the Extension Type—SLT,
DKP, SIP—whose mailbox you want to use for Call Taping from the drop down list, and enter the Port
Number of this extension. For example, if you want to select the mailbox of the phone connected to SLT
Extension Port 4, enter 4 in this field.

For SLT extensions, the valid Port numbers are 1 to 14. For DKP extensions, the valid Port numbers are 1
and 2. For SIP Extensions, the valid Port numbers are 1 to 16.

• If required, you may disable the Beeps played when Call Taping starts by clearing the Play Beep when
Call Taping/ Conversation Recording starts check box on this page.

• Click Submit to save changes.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 449

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use
This feature works automatically on extensions which have the related Call Taping parameters configured.

Call Taping conversations are recorded in a single, common mailbox. These can be accessed directly by the
Mailbox Owner (user of the extension to which this common mailbox is assigned). Other extension users can also
access this common mailbox by calling the Voice Mail System.

Instructions for accessing the mailbox are provided separately for these two groups of users.

For the Mailbox Owner

If you are an EON/Extended IP Phone user

• Press Voice Mail Key.

OR

• Dial 393122-Your Mailbox Password23

• Follow Voice Mail Prompts to listen to new messages.

If you are an SLT user

• Lift the handset.

• Dial 3931-Your Mailbox Password
• Follow Voice Mail Prompts to listen to new messages.
• Replace handset.

For Other Extension Users

• Press Voice Mail Key.
OR
• Dial 3931 (default Voice Mail Access Code).
• Dial 0 to go to Home Position (default Access Code).
• Dial 8 (default Access Code).
• Dial the number of the extension to which the common mailbox has been assigned.
• Enter the password for the common mailbox24.
• Follow Voice Mail Prompts to listen to new messages. Follow the prompts to listen to old messages.
• Replace handset, after you have finished listening to the messages.

If the common mailbox is password protected, make sure that you provide the password to all extension
users who are to be provided access to this mailbox.

The above instructions contain the default access codes. If these have been changed and use the current
access codes.

22. This is the default Voice mail Feature Access Code. If this has been changed and use the new code.
23. Only if the mailbox is password protected, you will be prompted to enter the password.
24. See previous note.

450 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Toggle

What's this?
Call Toggle allows you to have two simultaneous telephone conversations, talking to two persons alternately.

Call Toggle is also referred to as Hold-Consult or Call Splitting. You can toggle between:

• Two internal calls (i.e. two extensions).

• An internal Call and an External Call (extension and trunk).

• Two external calls (two trunks).

How it works
• A, B, and C are extensions.

• D and E are trunks.

Toggling between two internal calls

• A is in speech with B.

• A wants to talk to C.

• A presses Flash and dials the number of C.

• A gets Ring Back Tone and B is put on hold.

• C answers the call. A is in speech with C.

• A dials Flash-1 to toggle from C to B.

• C put on hold. A is in speech with B.

• A can toggle back to C by dialing Flash-1.

Toggling between internal call and external call

• A is in speech with B.

• A wants to talk to D.

• A presses Flash and dials the external number of D.

• A gets Ring Back Tone and B is put on hold.

• D answers the call. A is in speech with D.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 451

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • A dials Flash-1 to toggle from D to B.

• D put on hold and played music. A is in speech with B.

• A can toggle back to D by dialing Flash-1.

Toggling between two external calls

• A is in speech with D.

• A wants to talk to E.

• A presses Flash and dials the external number of E.

• A gets Ring Back Tone and D is put on hold. D gets music on hold.

• E answers the call. D cannot hear the conversation between A and E.

• A dials Flash-1 to toggle from E to D.

• E is put on hold and played music on hold. A is in speech with D.

• A can toggle back to E by dialing Flash-1.

• The party put on hold during Call Toggle cannot hear the conversation between the other two parties.

• You can also toggle between an incoming internal/external call (indicated by call waiting tone) and an
internal/external call you are currently in speech with.

• You can also answer an incoming 'Interrupt Request' call and toggle between the interrupting extension
and the extension you were in speech.

• You can convert a Call Toggle into a three-party conference by dialing Flash-0.

• You can transfer the call you are currently in speech with to another extension.

• You can park the call you are currently in speech with.

How to configure
Call Toggle is a “Class of Service (COS)” dependant feature. By default, Call Toggle is included in the ‘Basic
Features’ allowed to all extensions of ETERNITY. You cannot disable this feature selectively in the COS of
extensions, without disabling the entire set of Basic Features.

No other configuration is required for this feature, except for programming a DSS key for Call Toggle, if required, on
the DKP and Extended IP Phone extensions. See Phone Key Settings under “DKP Extensions” and Phone Key
Settings under “Matrix Extended IP Phone Key Settings” in SIP Extensions.

452 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

Call Toggle between two internal calls:

• Speech with extension 1

• Press Hold.
• Dial another extension number
• Speech with extension 2.
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Toggle.

OR

• Dial Hold-1.
• Speech with extension 1.
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Toggle again

OR

• Dial Hold-1.
• Speech with extension 2.

Call Toggle between an Internal Call and an External Call:

• Speech with extension

• Press Hold.
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• Dial the external number.
• Speech with external party.
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Toggle.

OR

• Dial Hold-1.
• Speech with extension.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Call Toggle

OR

• Dial Hold-1.
• Speech with external party.

Call Toggle between two External Calls:

• Speech with external party 1 on trunk 1.

• Press Hold.
• Dial #
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• Dial the external number.
• Speech with external party 2 on trunk 2.
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Toggle.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 453

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OR

• Dial Hold-1.
• Speech with external party 1 on trunk 1.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Call Toggle again.

OR

• Dial Hold-1 again.

• Speech with external party 2 on trunk 2.

For SLT Users

Call Toggle between two internal calls:

• Speech with extension 1

• Press Flash.
• Dial another extension number
• Speech with extension 2.
• Dial Flash-1.
• Speech with extension 1.
• Dial Flash-1.
• Speech with extension 2.

Call Toggle between an Internal Call and an External Call:

• Speech with extension

• Press Flash.
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• Dial the external number.
• Speech with external party.
• Dial Flash-1.
• Speech with extension.
• Dial Flash-1.
• Speech with external party.

Call Toggle between two External Calls:

• Speech with external party 1 on trunk 1.

• Press Flash.
• Dial #
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• Dial the external number.
• Speech with external party 2 on trunk 2.
• Dial Flash-1.
• Speech with external party 1 on trunk 1.
• Dial Flash-1 again.
• Speech with external party 2 on trunk 2.

454 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Transfer

What is this?
Call Transfer enables you to relocate an existing call from an extension or trunk to another extension or to an
external number. Calls can be transferred after notifying the other extension/external number about the impending
transfer or calls can be transferred directly without notification.

The types of Call Transfer ETERNITY offers are:

• Call Transfer – Screened: The Operator puts the caller on hold, dials the desired party's extension, and
informs the desired party of the impending transfer. If the desired party chooses to accept the call, the call
is transferred.

• Call Transfer – While Ringing: The Operator puts the caller on hold, dials the desired party's number and
transfers the call when the desired party's extension starts ringing.

This feature is used when there are several other calls to be attended and the Operator cannot wait for the
desired party to answer.

• Call Transfer – On Busy: The Operator puts the caller on hold, dials the desired party's number and
transfers the call even when the desired party is busy in speech with another person. The busy extension
gets intrusion tone and can choose to answer the intruding (transferred) call.

• Call Transfer – Trunk-to-Trunk: An external call is transferred on to another trunk line. The Operator puts
the external caller on hold, dials the desired party's external number, and transfers the call after or without
notifying the desired party of the impending transfer.

Trunk-to-Trunk call transfer may be used to transfer incoming calls for out-of-office extension users to their
cell phones, or to connect personnel at remote or distant locations. For instance, an out-of-office executive
who does not have long distance dialing permission can call the office and request the operator to connect
him to the desired party on a trunk line.

• Blind Transfer to VMS: The Operator puts the caller on hold, dials the feature access code for Blind
Transfer to VMS, dials the desired party's number, and transfers the call. The call is transferred to the
mailbox assigned to the desired party. The caller may leave a message in the mailbox.

Call Transfer is not exclusively an Operator feature, though it is used mostly by Operators. Calls can be
transferred by any extension to another extension or external number, if Basic Features are allowed in
Class of Service of the transferring extension.

How it works
A and B are extension users.
C is an external caller.
D is an external number.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 455

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Transfer from Trunk/Extension to Extension
Three scenarios are possible:

1. Screened Transfer:

• C calls a Trunk of ETERNITY.

• The Operator answers the call.
• Operator puts C on hold.
• Operator dials B's extension.
• When B answers the call, the Operator informs B about the call.
• If B accepts the call, the Operator transfers the call to B.
• Now, B and C are in speech.

• If B does not accept the call, Operator may dial Flash to retrieve the call and speak to C.

• The Operator can also abort call transfer while B's phone is ringing by dialing Flash. The Operator gets
connected to C.

2. Transfer While Ringing:

• C calls a Trunk of ETERNITY.

• The Operator answers the call.
• The Operator puts C on hold and dials B's extension.
• The Operator transfers the call when B's phone starts ringing.
• If B answers the call, B gets connected to C.
• If B does not answer the call at the end of the Transfer-While Ringing Timer (programmable; default: 30
seconds), the call is returned to the Operator. C gets Ring Back Tone.
• The Operator answers the call and is in speech with C.
• However, if the Operator is busy at the time of call return, the system waits for the Operator to become
free. When the Operator is free, C gets Ring Back Tone.
• The Operator answers the call and is in speech with C.

3. Transfer On Busy:

• C calls a Trunk of ETERNITY.

• The Operator answers the call.
• The Operator puts C on hold and dials B's extension.
• The Operator gets busy tone from B's extension. B is busy with A
• The Operator transfers the call to B on Busy tone.
• B gets intrusion beeps. The beeps are played for the duration of the Transfer on Busy Timer
(programmable; default: 30 seconds)
• B may dial Flash to answer the call. A is put on hold.
• B is now connected to C.

• If B does not answer the intrusion beeps at the end of the Transfer on Busy Timer, the call is returned
to the Operator. C gets ring back tone.

• If the Operator too is busy at the time of call return, C gets busy tone.

456 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Transfer - Trunk to Trunk
• C calls a Trunk of the ETERNITY.
• The Operator answers the call.
• B is out of office, but is available at external number D.
• The Operator puts C on hold by dialing Flash.
• The Operator dials trunk access code and calls the external number D.
• The Operator may:
Wait for D to answer the call, transfer the call if D accepts the call. (screened transfer)

OR

Transfer the call as soon as D's phone starts ringing. (transfer while ringing)
• C and D are now in speech for the duration of the Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer25.
• A warning tone is given at the end of the Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity timer (programmable; default: 90
seconds). On expiry of this timer, the call is disconnected.
• To extend the call, either C or D must dial any digit in tone (DTMF), except '##'.

Dialing ‘##’ to extend the (Trunk to Trunk Transfer) call will result in Call Disconnection.

In the case of Trunk-to-Trunk transfer, both parties in speech on trunk lines must be informed that their call
would be disconnected at the end of the Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer and that they must dial any digit,
except ‘##” to extend the call.

Call Transfer - Blind Transfer to VMS

• C calls a Trunk of ETERNITY. C wants to talk to A.
• The Operator attends the call.
• The Operator puts C on hold.
• The Operator dials Feature Access Code for Blind Transfer to VMS and A's extension number.
• The system hunts for the mailbox assigned to A's extension.
• When the mailbox is found, the Operator gets confirmation tone. C gets connected to A's mailbox.
• C gets voice prompts. C may follow the prompts to leave a message.

• If A does not have a mailbox assigned, the Operator will get an error tone while transferring the call.

• The Operator may retrieve C's call by pressing Hold/Flash/Call Appearance key.

Feature Interactions:

• CLIP and Caller ID Presentation while Transfer: ETERNITY provides the flexibility to display either the
extension number that is transferring the call or the held party's number, i.e. the number of the party that is
about to be transferred. Refer “Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)”.

• Privacy: Call Transfer-On Busy will not work if the busy extension has Call Privacy from intrusion Tone in
its Class of Service.

• DND: Call Transfer will not work if the destination extension has set DND.

25. The process of Trunk-to-Trunk transfer takes place outside of the PBX. So, the PBX will not know which of the two trunks have
gone ON-Hook. Hence the Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer. The call is automatically disconnected when this timer expires.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 457

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
To be able to use Call Transfer,

• This feature must be enabled in the Class of Service of the extension(s). Call Transfer included in the
'Basic Features' allowed to all extensions of ETERNITY NE. So, all extensions of ETERNITY can use this
feature.

You cannot disable 'Call Transfer' selectively without disabling the entire set of 'Basic Features'. See
“Class of Service (COS)” and to know more.

• You may change the default values of the following timers related to Call Transfered, if required:

• Transfer While Ringing Timer: It is the time for which the system rings the extension. By default it is
set to 30 seconds. At the end of the timer the call is returned to the transferring extension.

• Transfer on Busy Timer: It is the time for which the system waits for the busy extension to respond to
the intrusion tone. By default the timer is set to 30 seconds. At the end of the timer the call is returned
to the transferring extension.

• Trunk to Trunk Inactivity Timer: This is the time duration after which the system disconnects the call
transferred from one trunk line to another. By default it is set to 90 seconds. At the end of the timer the
call is disconnected, if either party does not dial digits to extend the call. This Timer is relevant for
analog trunks, i.e. CO Trunk-to-CO Trunk calls only.

To change the values of these timers, see “System Timers and Counts” for instructions.

To be able to use Blind Transfer to VMS,

• The Voice Mail System must be present in ETERNITY.

• The extensions must be assigned a personal mailbox in their Voice Mail Settings. The option Assign
Personal Mailbox must be enabled in the Voice Mail Settings of the extension.

• See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring the Voice Mail Settings of the different Extension types:
“SLT Extensions”, “DKP Extensions” and “SIP Extensions”

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

Extension to Extension Transfer:

• Speech with extension.

• Press DSS Key assigned to desired party extension.
OR

• Press Hold and dial desired party's extension number.

• Press 'Transfer' Key.

OR
• Go ON-Hook.

458 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Extension to Trunk:

• Speech with extension.

• Press DSS Key assigned to Trunk.
• Dial External Number (transfer target)
• Press 'Transfer' Key.

OR

• Press Hold.
• Dial-Trunk Access Code26- External Number and go ON-Hook.

Trunk to Extension Transfer:

• Speech with Trunk.

• Press DSS Key assigned to desired party extension and Press 'Transfer Key'.

OR

• Press Hold and dial desired party's extension number and Go-ON Hook.

Trunk to Trunk Transfer:

• Speech with Trunk.

• Press Hold-#.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Trunk.
• Dial External Number.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Trunk-Trunk Transfer.

OR

• Dial Hold-#-Trunk Access Code-External Number-Hold-#.

• Speech with the External Number.
• Dial Hold-#.

Blind Transfer to VMS:

• Speech with extension.

• Press Hold.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Blind Transfer to VMS.

OR

• Dial 1078.
• Dial desired party's extension number.
• Go Idle.

26. Trunk Access Code: users worldwide may dial a code from 0, 5, 61, 62, 63, and 64. Users in USA may dial a code from 0, 9, 81, 82,
83, and 84.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 459

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For SLT Users
Extension to Extension Transfer:

• Speech with extension.

• Press Flash.
• Dial desired party's extension number.
• Replace handset.

Extension to Trunk:

• Speech with extension.

• Press Flash.
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• Dial External Number.
• Replace handset.

Trunk to Extension Transfer:

• Speech with Trunk.

• Press Flash.
• Dial desired party's extension number.
• Replace handset.

Trunk to Trunk Transfer:

• Speech with Trunk.

• Dial Flash-#.
• Dial Trunk Access Code
• Dial External Number.
• Speech with the External Number.
• Dial Flash-#.

Blind Transfer to VMS

• Speech with Trunk/extension.

• Press Flash.
• Dial 1078.
• Dial desired party's extension number.
• Replace handset.

460 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)

What's this?
The ETERNITY provides the facility of detecting the caller's number and presenting it on the display of the called
extension phone. This feature is called Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP).

The calling number can be presented on DKP and Extended IP Phones. The calling number can also be presented
on SLTs that support CLI protocols.

The signaling protocols for CLI supported by ETERNITY are: DTMF, FSK V.23, and FSK-Bellcore.

These protocols are supported on trunks as well as extensions. Any type of trunk line and supporting DTMF or FSK
signaling can be interfaced with the ETERNITY.

Similarly, any type of telephone instrument supporting DTMF or FSK signaling protocol can be connected to the
SLT port.

How it works
When CLIP is enabled on a trunk,

• ETERNITY senses the digits/codes sent by the network.

• It sends this information to the landing extension/Operator along with the ringing signal.

• In case of, Internal calls the calling extension's name and number both are presented to the called
extension.

• In the case of External calls, only the number will be displayed on the landing/Operator extension.

• When the landing extension/Operator transfers the incoming call to an extension, putting the external
caller on hold, the system sends this information to the extension to which the call is transferred.

• During the transfer, the number of the landing extension/Operator will be displayed on the transfer
destination extension.

• On successful call transfer, the caller's number will be displayed on the transfer destination extension.

In the case of Call Transfer, the system also provides the option of displaying to the transfer target extension either
the number of the Transferring Party or the number of the Party put on hold to be transferred, while the call is being
transferred. This feature is called Caller ID Presentation on Call Transfer.

It is also possible to remove and replace the '+' character received as CLI on telephones that do not support CLIP
starting with this character.

For example, the mobile network sends the calling party number with '+' as the prefix. If the telephone connected as
extension does not support this, it will not present the CLI of the caller. To overcome this, ETERNITY NE provides
you the option of replacing '+' with an appropriate number string which these telephones can display.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 461

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CLIP and Caller ID Presentation on Call Transfer will work only if CLIR is not enabled on the extension that
has transferred the call. Refer the topic “Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR)”.

How to configure
The functioning of this feature is controlled by two parameters: CLIP Type and Caller ID on Call Transfer.

If you want to replace '+' characters received as CLI on telephones that do not support CLI prefixed with this
character, you may configure the Replace ‘+’ from CLI option in the “System Parameters”.

If SLTs supporting CLI are connected to the ETERNITY, you must select a signaling protocol for CLI for the SLT
extensions. TMF is selected as CLIP Type for all SLT extensions.

To select CLIP type for SLT extensions,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Basic Settings link.

• Click the SLT Extensions link. The page of the first SLT extension opens. Click more.

• Click Hardware Settings to expand.

462 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • As Caller ID Presentation Type, select the CLIP Type supported by the SLT from the combo box: DTMF,
FSK V.23, FSK-Bellcore. Default: DTMF.

• Click Submit to save changes.

• Now, click Caller ID on Transfer to expand.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 463

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select the desired option for displaying Caller ID to this extension when a call is being transferred to this
extension:

• Display number of Transferring Extension when call is transferred on this Extension

• Display number of Party kept on Hold when call is transferred on this Extension

By default, the Caller ID of the Party kept on Hold is selected.

• Click Submit to save.

• To configure CLIP Type and Caller ID on Call Transfer on another SLT extension, click the desired
extension number tab and follow the instructions as above.

To replace '+' characters received as CLI on telephones that do not support CLI prefixed with this character,

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the System Parameters link under Advanced Settings.

• On this page, under System Parameters, select the Replace '+' from CLI check box.

• In the Replace '+' from CLI with the number string field, enter the desired number string that the system
should replace the ‘+’ in the string with.

• Click Submit to save your settings.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

464 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR)

What's this?
The ETERNITY allows extension users to suppress their identity, i.e. extension number and name, when they call
other extensions. This feature is called Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR).

Extensions that have 'CLIR Override' facility can view the CLI of those that have suppressed it with CLIR.

This is a feature of the PBX and not the PSTN. It is applicable for internal calls only.

Needless to say, this feature will work only on the proprietary digital key phone EON and SLTs that support Caller
Line Identification (CLI).

How it works
• Extension A has CLIR enabled.
• Extension B does not have CLIR Override enabled.
• Extension C has CLIR Override enabled.
• When A calls B, B cannot view the extension name and number of A.
• When A calls C, C can view A's extension name and number.

Now,
• Extension D calls extension E.
• A picks up the call.
• D will be able to view A's name and extension only if it has CLIR Override enabled and is a digital key
phone, EON.

CLIP and Caller ID Presentation while Transfer: Both these features will not work if CLIR is enabled.

How to configure
'CLIR' and 'CLIR Override' are Class-of-Service-dependant features. Extensions that are to be allowed these
features, must have them enabled in their “Class of Service (COS)”.

By default, both these features are disabled on all extensions of ETERNITY. Thus, none of the extensions of the
ETERNITY can suppress their CLI or force any other extension to display its CLI.

Decide which extensions should be allowed CLIR and which should be allowed CLIR Override and accordingly
configure their COS. See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring COS of the different Extension types: SLT,
DKP, SIP.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 465

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To enable CLIR

• Press DSS Key assigned to CLIR27.

OR

• Dial 1031 to enable CLIR.

• You get confirmatory tone and message on the phone's display.
• Go idle.

To disable CLIR:

• Press DSS Key assigned to CLIR again28.

OR

• Dial 1030.
• You get confirmatory tone and message on the phone's display.
• Go idle.

For SLT Users

To enable CLIR:

• Lift handset.
• Dial 103-1.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

To disable CLIR:

• Lift handset.
• Dial 103-0.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

27. You are recommended to assign a DSS Key with LED to this feature. When the assigned DSS key is pressed, it will glow red indi-
cating that CLIR is enabled.
28. If a DSS key with LED has been assigned, when you press the key again, the LED will be turned off indicating CLIR is now
canceled.

466 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cancel All Extension Features

What's this?
For each feature of the ETERNITY NE that an extension user has set/enabled on the extension, the system
provides access code for cancellation of the feature.

However, there is also a single master command for extension users with which all features that are set on an
extension can be canceled.

When the extension user dials 'Cancel All Extension Features' command, the following features, if set, are
cancelled from the extensions:

• Alarms
• Auto Answer
• Auto Call Back
• Auto Redial
• Background Music
• Call Follow-Me
• Call Forward
• Do Not Disturb
• Hot Line
• Hot Outward Dialing
• Trunk Reservation
• Walk-In Class of Service

Auto Redial, Background Music, Call Forward and Call Follow-Me, Do Not Disturb, Hotline and Trunk
Reservation are Class of Service dependent features. These features can be set/canceled from an
extension only if these are included in its “Class of Service (COS)”.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Cancel All Features' (if programmed).

OR

• Dial 1051.
• You get confirmation tone and confirmatory message on your phone display.
• Go idle.

For SLT Users

• Lift handset.
• Dial 1051.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 467

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Class of Service (COS)

What's this?
Class of Service (CoS) defines the permission an extension will have on a PBX. It defines the set features of the
PBX that the extension is to be allowed access to.

Feature requirements vary among users and with time. Certain groups of extension users may have a need for
voice mail, while another group may need the ability to forward calls to a cell phone, and still others may have no
need to make calls outside the office.

Similarly, certain features that are required during working hours may not be required during non-working hours.

ETERNITY NE offers the flexibility to allow or deny extension users access to features of the PBX, on the basis of
their requirement and according to time of the day. For users, access to various features from their extensions is
their Class of Service (Cost).

How it works
Each extension port of the PBX has an associated CoS for the Day and Night, that indicates which features of the
PBX the port is allowed to access during working hours and during non-working hours.

A feature can be allowed or denied to an extension by enabling or disabling it in the CoS of that extension.

The CoS of all extensions may be uniform, or different CoS can be assigned to different extensions, according to
the time of the day. Doing so, each extension can access a different set of features during the Day (working hours)
and at Night (non-working hours).

Basic Features
A set of features including Internal Call, Call Hold, Call Toggle, Call Transfer, Department Call, Operator Access,
Redial, and Call Mute defined as Basic Features and allowed in the CoS of all extensions.

It is not possible to enable or disable selectively any of the features included in "Basic Features".

How to configure
The table below presents the list of features supported on the extensions for the Day and Night.

Default CoS

Allowed During
Feature
Day Night

Account Code  

Auto Call Back-Busy  

Auto Call Back-No Reply  

Auto Redial

468 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Allowed During
Feature
Day Night

Auto Redial Priority

Barge-In

Basic Featuresa  

Call Forward  

Call Park  

Call Pickup  

Call Recording

CLIR

CLIR Override

CO Call Waiting

Conference  

Continued Dialing  

Department Group - Call Forward  

DISA

Do Not Disturb  

Do Not Disturb - Override

Door Phone Settings  

DOP Turn ON/Turn OFF  

Dynamic Lock  

Dynamic Lock Timer

Forced Answer

Forced Release

General Mailbox Access  

Global Directory Part-1  

Global Directory Part-2

Global Directory Part-3

Global Directory Programming

Hot Desk

Hotline

Interrupt Request  

Live Call Screening  

Live Call Supervision

Message Wait (Set/Cancel)  

Paging  

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 469

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Allowed During
Feature
Day Night

Privacy from DID

Privacy from Interrupt Request, Barge-In and DND-Override

Privacy from Raid

Raid

Return Call to Original Caller (RCOC)  

Room Monitor

SA Extension

SA Mode  

Selective Port Access

Trunk Reservation

Trunk-Trunk Transfer  

a. Basic Features includes: Internal Call, Call Hold, Call Toggle, Call Transfer, De-
partment Call, Operator Access, Redial, Mute.

Assigning CoS to Extensions

• Take a pen and a paper pad.

• Prepare a list of SLT, DKP, SIP extensions by their names/numbers.

• Read the list of features supported on the extensions (see above Table 'Default CoS Groups for
Features').

• Against each extension name/number on the list, write the features needed for the Day and Night. You will
notice that the features needed by many extensions are identical.

• List the common features to be allowed to and features to be denied to all SLT, DKP, SIP extensions.

• Are there any other features, in addition to those on the common list, which you want to allow to select
extensions?

• If yes, extend the common list you prepared by adding the features to be allowed to the select extensions.

• Now, to configure the CoS features to be allowed or denied to extensions, go to “Basic Settings” of Jeeves,

• Click the extension settings link for SLT, DKP, SIP Extension.

470 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select the desired extension number.

The default CoS group features appear under Class of Service.

• Click More button on the page to view all CoS features.

The check boxes of features that are allowed for the Day and Night are selected.
The default CoS fulfills the requirements of most extension users. Check if the default CoS features
you want to allow are enabled and features you want to deny are disabled

• To allow a feature for the Day/Night, select its corresponding check box.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 471

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To deny a feature for the Day/Night, clear its check box.

• Click Submit to save changes.

Finally, test the CoS you configured for each extension by invoking the features from each extension.

472 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CLI Based Routing

What is this?
ETERNITY offers the facility to detect the calling party's number and name. This is known as Calling Line
Identification.

On the basis of CLI, it is possible to land calls from a particular telephone number on a particular extension or group
of extensions. This is known as CLI Based Routing.

How it works
A, B, C are extensions. D and E are external callers.
Calls made by D are to be landed on A
Calls made by E are to be landed on B and C.
The CLI of D and E and their corresponding landing destinations should be programmed in the CLI Based Routing
Table.

• D calls on a trunk of ETERNITY.

• The system checks the numbers programmed in the CLI Based Routing table.
• D's number is found in the CLI Based Routing Table.
• The system checks the destination number programmed against D's CLI.
• A's number is found as the destination extension.
• The system lands the call on A.

If D's number is not programmed in the CLI Based Routing Table, the call will be routed according to the incoming
call routing configured for the trunk.

How to configure
For this feature to work, the CLI Based Routing Table must be configured with the numbers of the calling parties
and the numbers of the corresponding destination extensions.

You can program up to 400 numbers in the CLI Routing Table. Each calling party number in the CLI table is stored
against an index from 001 to 400.

• On a sheet of paper, draw a three-column table, as illustrated below.

Calling Party Route to

Index Name
Number (Destination Extension)

001 2640459 Midships 201

002 022281110001 Jet Set 205

: :

010 2640075 Bacchus 303

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 473

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Enter the telephone numbers of the calling parties in the Calling Party Number column. In the 'Name'
column, enter the names for identifying the Calling Party numbers. When the system places the call on the
destination extension, both the number and the name will be presented in the CLI.

For each Calling Party Number, select the corresponding landing destination. The landing destination may
be an SLT, DKP, SIP or Virtual extension.

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the CLI Based Routing link to open the page.

• Each number is to be stored at a Location Index numbered from 001 to 400.

There are 100 entries on each page. To go to the next 100 Index, click the numbered links at the top of the
CLI table (101-200, 201-300, 301-400).

• Refer to the table you created on paper, and configure the following parameters.

474 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • In the Number field, enter the number of the calling party, not exceeding 16 digits. You can also enter '+' in
the number string.

• In the Name field, enter the name of the calling party. You can enter a maximum of 8 characters in this
field.

• In the Route to field, select the landing destination extension number, which may be SLT, DKP, SIP or
Virtual extension.

• Click Submit to save changes.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 475

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Closed User Group (CUG)

What’s this?
A Closed User Group is a network of PBXs to provide seamless connectivity. The PBXs connected in the network
behave as a single unit. Extension users of one PBX can reach the extension users of the other PBX without dialing
any access code, as if they were dialing extension numbers of their own PBX.

You can connect ETERNITY NE and other PBX(s) to over Analog trunks as well as over the IP Network.

How it works
Let us understand this application with the help of this illustration:

CO CO
Location A Location B
CO1 CO1

CO2 SLT1

SLT1 CO2
201
SLT2 SLT2 301
202 ETERNITY
PBX A
SLT3
SLT3 302

203 115.118.161.165
SLT4 121.124.130.110
SLT4 303
Ethernet Ethernet
IP
Menu Sat 01 05: 30

204 WAN
DKP1 WAN SLT5
FwdBus
y FwdNRCan
cel Mute Con
f erenc
e Trans
f er

304
DND VoiceMail Names Red
i al Rejec
t Hold

1 2 abc 3 def

4 ghi 5 k
jl 6 mno
CLI R
7 pqrs 8 t uv 9 wxyz
CA4
il e CA3
Hot n
* 0 #

SI P2 CA2
SI P1 CA1

Broadband Broadband
Router/Modem Router/Modem

Here,

• ETERNITY is installed at Location A and is networked with PBX A at Location B.

• To create a CUG over Analog Trunks,

• the CO port of ETERNITY NE is connected to the SLT (FXS) port of PBX A.
• the CO port (FXO) of PBX A is connected to an SLT port of ETERNITY.

• To create a CUG over IP Network, both ETERNITY NE and PBX A may be connected directly to the
Public network, in Peer-to-Peer mode.

• The Extension Numbers of ETERNITY NE and PBX A must be unique.

• Seamless connectivity can be provided to the extension users at both locations with suitable configuration
of ETERNITY NE and PBX A.

476 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • At Location A, you need to configure the Closed User Group Table in ETERNITY NE:

The CUG Table stores up to 8 entries. You must configure the following parameters in the table:

• Route Code: The Route Code is the truncated number string for the extension numbers of the other
PBX. The truncated number string must start with the starting digit of the extension numbers. In this
case, all extension numbers of PBX A start with ‘3’, so you can configure the Route Code as a single
digit, ‘3’.

• Strip Digit Count: This parameter is not relevant for this application. Keep the Strip Digit Count as ‘0’.

• Self Route: This flag is not relevant for this application; keep it disabled.

• Dialed Digit Count: This is the digit length of the extension numbers of PBX A29. Here all extension
numbers of PBX A have three digits, the Dialed Digit Count should be configured as ‘3’.

• Route using Trunks: This is the number of the Tie Trunk that the system should use for routing the
dialed number string that matches with the Route Code and Dialed Digit Count.

It the CUG is connected over Analog Trunks, you must select the CO Trunk you have connected to
the SLT (FXS) port of PBX A.

If the CUG is connected over IP network, you must select the SIP Trunk which you have used for this
application.

The CUG Table you configure on ETERNITY NE would look like this:

Strip Dialed
Route Index Route Code Digit Self Route Digit LCR Route using Trunks
Count Count

1 3 0 Disabled 3 Off CO2

• At Location B, you may do a suitable configuration of the PBX. If the PBX at Location B were ETERNITY,
the CUG Table you configure would look like this:

Strip Dialed
Route Index Route Code Digit Self Route Digit LCR Route using Trunks
Count Count

1 2 0 Disabled 3 Off CO2

29. When digits are dialed on a trunk, the system waits for the Inter Digit Wait Timer after the last digit is dialed. The Dialed Digit Count
helps avoid the delay caused by the Inter Digit Wait Timer. When you configure the digit length, the system will match the dialed
number string with the digit length you have configured and will route the number without waiting for the Inter Digit Wait Timer, if a
match is found.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 477

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • With the necessary configuration done at both locations, when an extension user 201 of ETERNITY at
Location A dials extension 301 of PBX A, the system checks the CUG table to match the dialed digits with
the Route Code and the Dialed Digit Count. As a match is found, it selects the Tie Trunk defined for routing
the Route Code, i.e. CO1.

If the CUG is connected over IP network, you must also configure the SIP Trunk as Peer-to-Peer trunk
and configure the Peer-to-Peer Table. See “Peer-to-Peer Calling” for instructions.

How to configure
To configure Closed User Group,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the Closed User Group link. The Closed User Group Table page opens.

• In the Route Code field, enter the extension numbers of the other PBX in the CUG. Instead of entire
number strings, you can configure a single digit, the starting digit of the extension numbers as Route Code.
A maximum of 16 digits can be configured as Route Code. Default: Blank.

• Keep the Strip Digit Count as ‘0’. Default: 0

• Keep the Self Route flag disabled. Default: Disabled.

• Keep the LCR flag disabled. Default: Disabled.

478 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When there are trunks connected directly to the network and you want to allow extension users to access
these trunks without dialing the Trunk Access Codes for these trunks, enable LCR to select the lowest cost
trunk from these trunks.

• In the Dialed Digit Count field, enter the digit length of the extension numbers of the other PBX in the
CUG. The digit length may be up to 99. Default: 99.

• Double click the Route using Trunks field. A multiple selection box opens.

• On the left, the trunks appear with their names (if configured in “Naming Trunks”) and port numbers in a
sequence, starting with CO trunks, followed by Mobile trunks and SIP trunks.

If you have not assigned any names to the trunks, they will appear with their default names (CO, MOB,
SIP) and port numbers.

If you have enabled On-Site Configuration, only those trunks that are connected will appear in the box.

• To select a trunk, place your cursor on the desired trunk, and click the Select>> button.
Or
• Press the ctrl key and click the left mouse button to select multiple trunks.

• You may change the sequence of the trunks you selected, if required, using the Up and Down arrow
buttons on the right display box.

• You can also delete trunks from the ones you have selected.

• You may enable Rotation, if you have selected more than one trunk. Default: Disabled.

When you enable Rotation, each new outgoing call is routed through the subsequent trunk in the
group30. This ensures equal distribution of outgoing call traffic on all trunks.

30. The first call through the first trunk, the second through the second, the third through the third trunk, and so forth. Thus each new
call is routed through the trunk next to the one that routed the previous outgoing call.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 479

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When Rotation is OFF, calls are routed through the first trunk in the group. If this trunk is busy, the call
is routed to the next trunk in the group.

Rotation has no relevance if only one member trunk is selected.

• Click OK. The multiple selection box closes.

• All the trunks appear in the field Route using Trunks, in the sequence you selected, separated by
commas.

• Click Submit button to save your entries.

• You may log out of Jeeves

480 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CO Call Waiting

What's this?
The CO Call Waiting feature gives indication to the extension user about another waiting call on a Trunk, when this
extension is in speech.

This is a “Class of Service (COS)” dependent feature. Only those extensions which have this feature enabled in the
COS allowed to them, will be given incoming call waiting indication on the trunk.

How it works
• A and B are extensions.
• CO Call Waiting feature is enabled in the Class of Service of B but not on A.
• There is an incoming call on a trunk for B.
• B is busy on a call with A.
• ETERNITY plays Beeps to B to indicate the call waiting.
• To answer the waiting call, B may dial Flash or press the HOLD key.
• B will be connected to the caller.
• A will be put on hold.
• When there is an incoming call on a trunk for A, but A is busy on another call, A will not be provided any
indication of the waiting call.

How to configure
For CO Call Waiting to work on an extension, it must be enabled in the Class of Service allowed to that extension.
By default, CO Call Waiting is disabled in the Class of Service of all Extension types: SLT, DKP, SIP. You may
enable this feature on extensions which you want to provide CO Call Waiting indication.

For instructions, see “Class of Service (COS)”, and the description for configuring the different Extension types
under “Basic Settings”.

Keep this feature disabled, if you want to provide Privacy from Trunk Call intrusion beeps to an extension type. See
“Privacy” to know more.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 481

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Conference Dial-In

What’s this?
In a Dial-In, users can schedule a conference by dialing a conference number and a password and inform other
participants about the conference. The other participants can dial in to the on-going conference call to join the
conference.

Extension users can also schedule and join a Dial-In Conference from a remote location using “Direct Inward
System Access (DISA)”.

Conference Dial-In is useful for businesses to conduct client meetings or sales presentations, project meetings and
updates, regular team meetings, and communication to coworkers who operate in different locations. Besides
increased convenience, this feature allows workers to be more productive by saving time and cost of travel for out-
of-office meetings.

The ETERNITY NE supports up to 6 participants in a Dial-In Conference. At a time, two simultaneous Dial-In
conferences can be held.

How it works
A, B and C are extension users. C is at a remote location.
D, E and F are external callers.

Scheduling a Dial-In Conference

• A schedules a Dial-In Conference for 4.30 pm.
• A dials the code for scheduling the conference, the conference number and the password.
• The conference number is a single digit: 1 or 2. The password is a four digit number string.
• A informs B, C, D, E and F about the conference and provides them conference number, e.g. '1' and the
password, '4040'.

• If C wants to schedule a conference, C must log into his extension from DISA mode.

• The conference password cannot be 1111.

• The Conference Number must correspond with the number of simultaneous Dial-In Conferences
supported by the ETERNITY, in this case: 1 and 2. If a user dials a conference number other than this,
system will play an Error Tone.

Initiating and Joining a Dial-In Conference

Only extension users can initiate or join a conference.

External participants must be included in the conference by extension users.

482 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • At the scheduled time, 4.30 pm, A initiates the conference by dialing the conference number and the
password, e.g.: '1' and '4040'.

• B joins the conference by dialing the conference number and password.

• C joins the conference from DISA mode.

• The conference starts.

• When a new party joins the conference, the system plays beeps to the existing users, to inform them of
the new inclusion.

• Beeps are programmable. You can disable or enable beeps during conference.

Including a Party in an on-going Dial-In Conference

Any extension user in a Dial-In Conference can include any other extension user or external party in the conference
by dialing the Conference Include feature code.

• A, B or C can include external parties D, E and F in the conference

Removing a Participant from an on-going Dial-In Conference

Any participant, who has a DKP or Extended IP Phone can remove another participant from the Dial-In conference.

Withdrawing from a Dial-In Conference

• Participants in a conference can exclude themselves by dialing a feature code.

• If the conference has been initiated from the DISA mode, the caller (remote user) must dial the code for
withdrawing from the conference.

• If a participant goes ON-Hook, without dialing the feature code for withdrawing from a Multi-party
Conference, the participant will be included in the conference again, when the participant dials the
Conference Inclusion feature code (191). To avoid this, participants must dial the feature code for
Withdrawing from conference.

• If all participants of a Dial-In Conference have withdrawn from the conference, one-by-one, but none of
them have dialed the feature command to terminate the conference (190), the system will start the
'Release Conference if idle for more than (Minutes) Timer'. This Timer is programmable, and by default
it is set to 002 Minutes. On the expiry of this Timer, the system will free the resource occupied by the
conference on the conferencing circuit. However, any participant can join the conference before the
Conference Release Timer expires.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 483

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Canceling a Conference
If any of the extension users A, B or C wants to cancel the conference, they can do so by dialing the appropriate
feature code 190, the Conference Number and the Conference Password.

When an extension user cancels a conference, the system disconnects all the participants from the
conference, but does not free the resource occupied by the conference. To free the resource occupied by
the conference, you must release the conference (see Releasing a Dial-In Conference).

Releasing a Dial-In Conference

A Dial-In Conference can be released by dialing the feature code 196. On dialing this code, the system will free the
resource occupied by the conference in the conferencing circuit.

A Dial-In Conference can be canceled from SA mode also. This is useful when the participants forget the
password and cannot join the conference or cannot initiate the conference.

How to configure
For this feature to work,

• the feature 'Conference' must be enabled in the“Class of Service (COS)” of the extensions. By default, this
feature is enabled on all extensions, so all extensions can use this feature. See “SLT Extensions”, “DKP
Extensions”, “SIP Extensions” under “Basic Settings”.


The feature 'Conference' in the Class of Service also includes 3-Party and Multi-party Conference.
Extensions that are denied 'Conference' in their Class of Service will not be allowed Dial-In as well as 3-
Party and Multi-party Conference.

• If desired, you may also change default value of the Release Conference if Idle for more than (min) Timer.
See “System Timers and Counts”.

• If extension users are to be allowed to initiate or join the Multi-party Conference from a remote location,
“Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” must be enabled on the trunk on which they call.

How to use

For EON and Extended IP Phone Users

To Schedule a Dial-In Conference:
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 194.
• Enter Conference Number on the prompt.
• Enter Conference Password on the prompt.
• You get confirmation tone and the message 'Conf <number> Scheduled' on your phone's display.
• Go ON-Hook.

484 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Call all participants and inform them of the time of the Dial-In conference, the Conference Number and
Password.

To initiate or join the Dial-In Conference:

• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 195.
• Enter the Conference Number on the prompt.
• Enter the Conference Password on the prompt. If you enter the wrong password, you get the message
'Check Conf P/w' on your phone's display.
• Conference is initiated.
• You will hear speech if any other participant has joined it. You will hear silence if no other participant has
joined it.
• If you hear silence, wait for others to join in.
OR
• Include the other participants in the conference, if you initiated the conference.

To include a party in the conference:

• After initiating the conference or while you are all in speech, go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• You get dial tone.
• Dial the desired number to be included in the conference. You get Ring Back Tone.
• When you are in speech with the party, dial Hold-191. You get confirmation tone. The party is included in
the conference.
• Dial 191 again. You are included in the conference.

To remove a participant from the conference:

• While you are all in speech, go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• You get dial tone.
• Dial 192.
• The numbers of the participants appear on your phone's display.
• Scroll to select the participant you want to remove.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get confirmation tone. The extension user is now excluded from the conference.

To withdraw from a Dial-In Conference:

• Go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 193

To cancel a Conference:
• While you are all in speech, go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 190.

To release a Dial-In Conference:

• While you are all in speech, go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook, dial 196.
• Enter the Conference Number.
• Enter the Conference Password.
• You get confirmation, the conference is released.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 485

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To release a Dial-In Conference from SA Mode:
• Enter SA mode from a DKP/SLT/Extended IP Phone.
• Dial 1072-026-Conference Number-Conference Password.
• You get confirmation, the conference is released.

You can also release a Dial-In Conference from SA Mode using Jeeves. To do this,
• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Administrator.

• Click the Dial In Conference - Cancel link.

• Enter the conference number (1 or 2) which you want to cancel in the Cancel Dial-In Conference
Number field.

• Click Submit button.

• Log out of Jeeves.

For Extension Users at a Remote Location

To schedule a Dial-In Conference from the remote location,

• Dial a DISA enabled Trunk
• Dial DISA Login Code 1079-Extension Number-User Password, if PIN Authentication is required.
• After DISA Login beeps, dial 194-Conference Number-Conference Password.

To initiate or join a Dial-In Conference,

• After DISA Login beeps, dial 195-Conference Number-Conference Password.

To go ON-Hook during Conference,

• Dial #0

To go OFF-Hook during Conference,

• Dial #1

To include a party midway of the Conference,

• Dial #0 to go ON-Hook.

486 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dial #1 to go OFF-Hook.
• You get dial tone.
• Dial the extension number to be included in the conference. You get Ring Back Tone.
• When you are in speech with the extension user, dial #2.
• You get feature tone, and the extension user is played music on hold.
• Dial 191-191. Both of you are now included in the conference.

To withdraw yourself from the Conference,

• Dial #0 to go ON-Hook.
• Dial 193 to withdraw from the conference.
• Dial #0#9 to end DISA session.


When you enter DISA mode, you get beeps, dial digits before the DISA Inactivity Timer elapses.

Never dial 'Flash' when in DISA mode, you will get disconnected.

Keep dialing any digit to continue the conference.

See “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” to know more.

For SLT Users

The instructions are the same as for EON and Extended IP Phone users, except you will not get any confirmatory
or prompts as text messages on your phone.

• Lift the handset.

• You get dial tone.

To schedule a conference
• Dial 194-Conference Number-Conference Password.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace Handset.
• Inform all intended participants about the time, conference number and password.

To initiate or join the conference

• Dial 195-Conference Number-Conference Password.
• Talk if you hear speech or wait for others to join in.
OR
• Include any participant in the conference.

To include a participant in the conference

• After initiating the conference, or when in speech,
• Go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial number of the participant.
• Talk.
• Dial Flash-191.

To withdraw from a Dial-In Conference:

• Go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 193

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 487

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To cancel a Conference:
• While you are all in speech, go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 190.

To release a Dial-In Conference:

• While you are all in speech, go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook, dial 196.
• Enter the Conference Number.
• Enter the Conference Password.
• You get confirmation, the conference is released.

488 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Conference-3 Party

What's this?
ETERNITY offers three types of conference calls: Conference-3 Party, “Conference Dial-In”, and “Conference-
Multiparty”.

Conference-3 Party (also referred to as Three-Way Calling) is a telephone call, in which the calling party can have
two other persons participate in the call.

A 3-Party Conference is initiated by dialing the number of the first person one wishes to talk to. The first person is
informed about the conference and put on hold. The number of the second person one wishes to talk to is dialed.
When the second person answers, s/he is informed about the conference. Three-way speech is established by
pressing Flash-0.

An already connected two-way speech can be converted into a conference by adding a second person, without
disconnecting the call with the first person.

Thus, a 3-Party Conference may be planned or conducted on the spur of the moment.

A 3-Party Conference can be conducted with extensions of ETERNITY and between extensions and external
numbers.

It is also possible to conduct an Unsupervised 3-Party Conference, wherein the operator connects two trunks
through the system and withdraws from the three-way speech.

ETERNITY NE supports two simultaneous 3-Party Conferences.

How it works
A, B, C are extensions.
D and E are external numbers.

3-Party Conference between extensions

• A is in speech with B.
• A and B want to include C in their conversation.
• A puts B on hold. A gets feature tone. B gets on-hold music.
• A dials C's extension number. A gets ring back tone.
• A is in speech with C. B cannot hear their conversation.
• A dials Flash-0 to enable three-way speech.
• A, B, and C are now in speech.

• Any of them can disconnect to withdraw from the conference.

• If C disconnects, A and B will be in two-way speech.
• A and B can carry on the conversation or can have a conference with another trunk (external number) or
with another extension.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 489

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3-Party Conference between two extensions and a trunk
• A is in speech with B.
• A and B want to include D in their conversation.
• A puts B on hold. A gets feature tone. B gets on-hold music.
• A grabs a Trunk and dials D's extension number. A gets ring back tone.
• A is in speech with D. B cannot hear their conversation.
• A dials Flash-0 to enable three-way speech.
• A, B, and D are now in speech.

• Any of them can disconnect to withdraw from the conference.

• If B disconnects, A and D will be in two-way speech.
• A can now conduct a conference with another extension or trunk.

3-Party Conference between an extension and two trunks

• A is in speech with D.
• A and D want to include E in their conversation.
• A puts D on hold. A gets feature tone. D gets on-hold music.
• A grabs a Trunk and dials E's number.
• A is in speech with E. D cannot hear their conversation.
• A dials Flash-0 to enable three-way speech.
• A, D, and E are now in speech.

• Any of them can disconnect to withdraw from the conference.

• To conduct Unsupervised 3-Party Conference, A dials Flash-#.
• D and E are now in two-way speech.

How to configure
For this feature to work, the feature 'Conference' must be enabled in the Class of Service group of the extensions
that are to be allowed this feature. By default, all extensions of ETERNITY are allowed this feature in their COS and
can make Conference calls. If you want allow this feature to certain extensions only, see “Basic Settings” for
instructions on configuring “Class of Service (COS)” for the different Extension types: SLT, DKP, SIP.

If extension users at remote locations are to be allowed to initiate the 3-party conference, “Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)” or “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” must be enabled on the trunk on which their call lands.

The feature 'Conference' in the Class of Service also includes Dial-In and Multi-party Conference.
Extensions that are denied 'Conference' in their Class of Service will not be allowed all three types of
conferences: 3-Party, Dial-In and Multi-party Conference.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Speech with Party 1 on trunk/extension.
• Press Hold. You get Feature tone. Party 1 put on hold.
• Dial the number of Party 2.

490 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If Party 2 is a trunk,

• Dial #
• Dial 0 to grab a trunk. You get Trunk dial tone.
• Dial telephone number of Party 2. You get ring back tone.
• Speech with Party 2.

Now,
• Press DSS key assigned to 'Conference'.

OR

Press Hold and dial 0

• Three-way speech is established.

To conduct Unsupervised 3-Party Conference:

• When in three-way speech with Party 1 on Trunk 1 and Party 2 on Trunk 2,

• Press Hold.
• Dial #.
• Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 in speech. You are out of the conversation.

For SLT Users

• Speech with Party 1 on trunk/extension.
• Dial Flash. You get Feature tone. Party 1 put on hold.
• Dial the number of Party 2.

If Party 2 is a trunk,

• Dial #
• Dial 0 to grab a trunk. You get Trunk dial tone.
• Dial telephone number of Party 2. You get ring back tone.
• Speech with Party 2.
• Dial Flash-0
• Three-way speech is established.

To conduct Unsupervised 3-Party Conference:

• When in three-way speech with Party 1 on Trunk 1 and Party 2 on Trunk 2,

• Dial Flash-#.
• Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 in speech. You are out of the conversation.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 491

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Conference-Multiparty

What’s this?
Like the Dial-In Conference, a Multi-party conference allows speech between more than three participants.

The key difference between Dial-In and Multi-party conference is that in a Dial-In conference participants can
include themselves in the conference by dialing into it without assistance, whereas in a Multi-party Conference the
party initiating the conference must include the participants by dialing their numbers and the Multi-party Conference
feature code.

A Multiparty conference may be

• between extensions
• between extensions and trunks, i.e. external numbers.

Extension users can initiate multiparty conference from a remote location using “Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)”.

ETERNITY NE supports 6 participants in a Multi-party Conference. The system supports 2 simultaneous Multi-
party Conferences.

How it works
A, B, C, and D are extension users.
E and F are external numbers.

A decides to hold a teleconference with B, C, D, E and F.

Initiating a Multiparty Conference

• A dials B's number and informs B about the conference call.
• A dials flash to put B on hold. B gets on-hold music.
• A dials conference inclusion code and gets confirmation tone.
• B is included in the conference.
• A goes ON-Hook and then OFF-Hook or waits for end of confirmation tone.
• A dials C's number and informs C about the conference.
• A dials flash to put C on hold. C gets on-hold music.
• A dials conference inclusion code and gets confirmation tone.
• C is included in the conference.

• A repeats the above steps to include D, E and F in the conference.

• Having included the last participant, F, A dials conference inclusion code again.
• A is included in the conference.
• All participants can now converse.

492 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Removing a participant from a Multiparty Conference
Any participant, who has a DKP or Extended IP Phone can remove another participant from the conference.

To remove E from the conference,

• A goes ON-Hook, then goes OFF-Hook.
• A dials the feature code to remove party from the conference.
• A selects E from the list of participants that appear A’s DKP/Extended IP Phone and presses Enter Key.
• E is disconnected.

Withdrawing from a Multiparty Conference

Participants in a conference can exclude themselves by dialing a feature code.

If the conference has been initiated from the DISA mode, the caller (remote user) must dial the code for
withdrawing from the conference.


If participant goes ON-Hook, without dialing the feature code for withdrawing from a Multi-party
Conference, the participant will be included in the conference again, when the participant dials the
Conference inclusion feature code (191). To avoid this, participants must dial the feature code for
Withdrawing from conference.


If all participants of a Multi-party Conference have withdrawn from the conference, one-by-one, but the
none of them have dialed the feature command to terminate the conference (190), the system will start the
'Release Conference if idle for more than (Minutes) Timer'. This Timer is programmable, and by default it is
set to 002 Minutes. On the expiry of this Timer, the system will free the resource occupied by the
conference on the conferencing circuit.

Canceling a Conference
Any participant in a conference can dial the Cancel conference code (190) to end the conference, all participants
will get Error Tone and the system resource occupied by the conference will be freed.

How to configure
For this feature to work,

• the feature 'Conference' must be enabled in the“Class of Service (COS)” of the extensions. By default, this
feature is enabled on all extensions, so all extensions can use this feature. See “SLT Extensions”, “DKP
Extensions”, “SIP Extensions” under “Basic Settings”.


The feature 'Conference' in the Class of Service also includes 3-Party and Multi-party Conference.
Extensions that are denied 'Conference' in their Class of Service will not be allowed Multi-party as well as
3-Party and Dial-In Conference.

• If desired, you may also change default value of the Release Conference if Idle for more than (min) Timer.
See “System Timers and Counts”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 493

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If extension users are to be allowed to initiate or join the Multi-party Conference from a remote location, “Direct
Inward System Access (DISA)” must be enabled on the trunk on which they call.

How to use

For EON and Extended IP Phone Users

To initiate multiparty conference:

• Dial the number of party 1.

• When you are in speech with party 1, dial Hold-191.
• Party 1 is included in the conference. You get confirmation tone.
• Dial number of party 2.
• When you are in speech with party 2, dial Hold-191.
• Party 2 is included in the conference. You get confirmation tone.
• Dial the number of party 3.
• When you are in speech with Party 3, dial Hold-191
• Repeat these steps to include as many parties as desired (max. 6).
• Press the DSS key assigned to 'Multiparty Conference'.
OR
• Dial 191
• You get included in the conference.

To cancel a Multiparty Conference:

• Go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook
• Dial 190.

To remove a party from Conference:

• Go ON-Hook, while in active conference.
• Go OFF-Hook
• Dial 192.
• Scroll to select the Party to be removed.
• Press Enter key.

To withdraw from Conference:

• Go ON-Hook
• Go OFF-Hook
• Dial 193.

For SLT Users

• Lift handset.
• Dial number of party 1.
• Speech with party 1.
• Dial Flash-191.
• Dial number of party 2.
• Dial Flash 191.
• Repeat the steps to include the desired number of parties (max. 6).
• Dial 191.
• You get included in the conference.

494 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To cancel Conference:
• Go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook
• Dial 190.

To withdraw from the Conference:

• Go ON-Hook, while in conference.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 193

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 495

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Conflict Dialing

What's this?
You may recall that “Access Codes” are dialed at different call phases. No two Access Codes must be the same in
the same call phase.

For example, the same access code cannot be used for two different features like Call Forward and Redial, since
both these features are invoked in the 'Dial' phase. Similarly, Station and Logical Group Codes too must be unique
and should not match with any of the features invoked in the 'Dial' phase.

However, ETERNITY allows overlaps within Feature Codes and Station Codes (Extension Numbers). One Feature
Access Code can be a part of (subset) another code, e.g. 4, 41, 412, etc.; extension numbers can be 201, 2011 etc.

So, when such overlapping access codes are dialed, the system matches the first digit. On finding more than one
Access code starting with the same digit, the system will not know how to interpret the instruction and act
accordingly.

Conflict Dialing feature resolves this. When an access code that is a subset of any other access code is dialed, the
system waits for some time for the extension user to dial the next digit. If the user does not dial any digit within that
time, the system interprets it as the smaller Access Code, and invokes the associated feature.

The time for which the system waits for the next digit to be dialed before resolving the Access Codes is called
"Conflict Dialing Timer". This timer is set to 2 seconds and is programmable.

Refer the topics “Access Codes” to know more.

How it works
You may set,

• The Access code of Call Pick Up as '4'.

• The Access code for Alarms as '41'.
• The Access code for Department Group 01 as '412'.

• Extension user A dials '4'.

• The system finds three access codes starting with '4' (4, 41, 412).
• So, it waits for 2 seconds, which is the default duration of the Conflict Dialing Timer, for the next digit to be
dialed.
• If A does not dial any other digit before the Timer expires, the system interprets the code as '4' and invokes
Call Pick-Up.

• If A dials '1' before the Timer elapses,

• The system interprets it as '41'.
• The system detects another access code starting with '41'.
• So it waits for 2 seconds again for the next digit to be dialed.

• If A does not dial any other digit before the Timer elapses, the system interprets the code as '41' and
invokes the Alarm feature.
• If A dials '2' before the Timer elapses,

496 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The system interprets the code as '412' and invokes Department Call to Group 01, provided there are
no other access codes like 4121, 4123, etc.

• If such access codes exist, the system again waits for the duration of the Conflict Dialing Timer for another
digit to be dialed.

• Thus, only when the conflict in the access codes is resolved will the system respond accordingly.

How to configure
The working of this feature is controlled by the Conflict Dialing Timer, which is set by default to 2 seconds and can
be changed as desired.

If the duration of the Conflict Dialing Timer is long, it may cause delay in the system's response to the
feature. If the duration is less, the system may misinterpret the access codes. Ensure that the value of the
Timer is programmed optimally (i.e. at least the default value).

To change the Conflict Dialing Wait Timer,

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link to expand.

• Click the System Timers and Counts link.

• Scroll to Other Features. Set the Conflict Dialing Timer to the desired value.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 497

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save changes.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

498 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Conversation Recording

What's this?
Conversation Recording allows extension users to record their talk with other extension users or external parties,
after or without informing the opposite party.

This feature can be used to record verbal agreements, important discussions, instructions, interviews, client
requirements, take or place orders, etc.

For this feature to work, the Voice Mail System must be present in the system and extensions must have a mailbox
assigned to them for recording conversations.

• Use this feature in accordance with the local privacy laws.

• Matrix Comsec is not responsible for any mis-/abuse of this feature by users.

How it works
A and B are extensions. Both are assigned a mailbox each.
C and D are external parties.

• A calls C.
• C answers the call.
• A dials the command for Conversation Recording in mid-speech.
• C is put on hold.
• The system sends a string of digits to the Voice Mail System to initiate Conversation Recording.
• A and C are in speech again.
• The conversation recording starts in A's mailbox. The system plays beeps, if Conversation Recording
Beeps are enabled.
• A or C disconnects the call.
• Conversation recording ends.
• A can listen to the recorded conversation by invoking the voice mail feature.

The same is repeated when B calls A. As both have mailboxes assigned, both can record the conversation.

How to configure
To provide this feature to extensions,

• Conversation Recording must be enabled in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the extensions to which this
feature is to be allowed. By default, none of the extensions have this feature in their COS. Decide which

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 499

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 extensions should be allowed Conversation Recording and enable the Call Recording feature in their
COS.

For instructions on configuring Conversation Recording related parameters different extension types, see
“SLT Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”, “SIP Extensions” under Basic Settings.

• Extensions that are to be allowed Conversation Recording must also have a mailbox. By default all
extensions are assigned a mailbox in their Voice Mail Settings.

If required, you may disable the Beeps played when Conversation Recording starts. Decide whether you want
Beeps to be played and accordingly enable/disable the Play Beep when Call Taping/ Conversation Recording
starts in the “System Parameters” under Advanced Settings.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To record a conversation:

• You are in speech with another extension/external number.

• Press DSS Key assigned to Conversation Recording (if programmed).

OR

Press Hold and Dial 1095.

• You get Feature tone

• Speech with party reestablished.
• Recording starts.
• Go ON-Hook, after conversation ends.

To listen to a recorded conversation:

• Press Voice Mail Key.

OR

500 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dial 393131

• Follow Voice Mail Prompts.

• Go Idle.

Conversations are recorded as New Messages. So, follow the voice mail prompts for listening to new
messages.

For SLT Users

To record a conversation:

• You are in speech with another extension/external number.

• Dial Flash-1095
• You get Feature tone
• Speech with party reestablished.
• Recording starts.
• Replace handset when conversation ends.

To listen to a recorded conversation:

• Lift the handset

• Dial 3931
• Follow Voice Mail Prompts.
• Replace handset.

31. This is the default Voice mail Feature Access Code. If this has been changed, use the new code.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 501

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Customer Name

What's this?
Customer Name is the name of the organization/enterprise that has deployed ETERNITY NE. As the User, you can
program the name of your company/organization in the system.

When Customer Name is programmed in the system, this name will appear as header on the various System
Reports generated and printed by the ETERNITY like SMDR Incoming, Outgoing and Internal Call Reports, Alarm
Status reports, etc.

The Customer Name may consist of a maximum of 80 alphanumeric characters, including punctuation marks. So,
you can add a contact address to the Customer Name.

How to configure
Customer Name can be programmed at the time of installation on the “Pre-requisites” page under Basic Settings,
or any time thereafter on the “System Parameters” page under Advanced Settings.

You can also change or correct the Customer Name you have assigned any time.

If you have not assigned the customer Name to the system,

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link to expand.

502 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the System Parameters link.

• Enter the name (and address, if desired) of the organization/enterprise in the Customer Name field. For
example: Prudent Investment, 701 Sunshine Boulevard, Bannerghatta, Bangalore.

• Click Submit to save.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 503

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Day Night Mode

What's this?
Certain features of the ETERNITY NE like Operator, Class of Service, Toll Control, Direct Inward Dialing (DID),
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), etc., require extensions and trunks to behave differently according to the
working hours and non-working hours, which are referred to as Time Zones.

These Time Zone-dependant features and facilities are operated automatically according to the Time Tables
programmed in the system. In a Time Table, the Time Zones—Working Hours, Non-Working Hours—are defined
for the entire week. Time Table is assigned to trunks, extensions and other time-zone dependant features. The
system executes the Time-Zone dependent features and facilities automatically according to the Time Table.

To know more refer the topic “Time Tables”.

Day/Night Mode allows you to manually change the Time Zone of the system at any point in time, by issuing a
command. For example, the office is to be closed on account of an unplanned holiday or emergency. So, the Time
Zones of all extensions and trunks must be set to Non-working hours to route outgoing calls and land incoming
calls from/to the appropriate destination. You can set the ETERNITY to Night Mode until the office remains closed
and set it back to operate as per the Time Table, when work is resumed.

To cite another example, the office must work for extended hours. You can set the ETERNITY NE to Day Mode and
set it back to operate as per the Time Table.

When you set the system in Day/Night Mode, the system overrides the Time Tables assigned to Trunks,
Extensions and Operator. According to the mode you selected, it applies Working Hours/Non-Working Hours to run
all the Time-Zone dependent features of the system.

When the system is set to Day Mode, it applies Working Hours as the Time Zone for all extensions, trunks and time
zone dependant features and facilities. When the system is set to Night Mode, it applies Non-Working Hours as the
Time Zone on Time-Zone dependent features of the system.

Thus, Day/Night Mode forces the system to work in a particular Time Zone, until it is changed again, manually.

How to configure
Day/Night mode can be set by the System Engineer (SE mode) as well as by the System Administrator (SA Mode).

To set the system in Day/Night mode from the System Engineer mode,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.

• Click Advanced Settings links to expand.

504 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the System Parameters link to open the page.

• In the Day Night Mode combo box,

• Set System in Day Mode (Working Hrs)

• Set System in Night Mode (Non-Working Hrs)

• Operate System as per Timetable assignment (default).

• Click Submit to save settings.

• Log out of Jeeves or continue, as desired.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 505

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting Day/Night Mode from SA mode using Jeeves
• Log in as System Administrator.

• Click Day/Night Mode to open the page.

• Select the desired option:

• Set System in Day Mode (Working Hrs)

• Set System in Night Mode (Non-Working Hrs)

• Operate System as per Timetable assignment (default).

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page.

• Log out of Jeeves or continue, as desired.

Setting Day/Night Mode from SA mode using a Telephone

• Enter SA mode from an SLT/DKP/Extended IP Phone.

• Dial 1072-018-Code
Where,
Code is from 1 to 3
1 is for Day Mode
2 is for Night Mode
3 is for Operate system as per Time Table.

• Exit SA mode.

506 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If you are setting Day/Night Mode from a DKP/Extended IP Phone using a DSS key, refer the LED indication in
table below.

LED Indication on DSS Key assigned to Day/Night Mode

Event Color Cadence

Day Mode Set Blue Continuous ON

Night Mode Set Red Continuous ON

System set to work as per Time Table -- OFF

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 507

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Daylight Saving Time (DST)

What's this?
Daylight Saving Time (DST) is the practice of advancing clocks so that afternoons have more daylight and
mornings have less. Typically clocks are adjusted forward one hour near the start of spring and are adjusted
backward in autumn.

Many countries of the world use DST, though the start and end dates of DST vary with location and year. Even
within countries, uniform DST may not be observed. For example the states of Arizona and Hawaii do not observe
DST. Certain countries may observe DST in certain years, for instance Guatemala, while in most countries of Asia
and Africa, and in certain countries of South America, DST is not observed at all.

When ETERNITY is installed in a country/region where DST is used, it is necessary to synchronize the Real Time
Clock of ETERNITY NE with the local time.

So, if you are installing ETERNITY in a country where DST is used, find out the DST convention currently in use in
that country, and adjust DST accordingly.

How it works
The forward and backward adjustment of clocks can be Scheduled or Manual.

• Scheduled DST Adjustment: The Real Time Clock of the ETERNITY is advanced and set backward
automatically according to the DST convention of the country/region where the ETERNITY is installed.

Scheduled DST Adjustment is useful in countries/regions where DST Time is fixed, e.g. Europe, USA and
Canada without yearly variations.

The table below gives describes the DST conventions followed in the different countries for which
ETERNITY will automatically adjust DST.

The DST Type is to be selected according to the country/region where the system is installed.

When DST Mode is set to 'Scheduled' and the DST Type is selected, the system will automatically adjust
DST at the preset dates and time for the country/region where the system is installed.

For example, if ETERNITY is installed Spain, the DST Type 01 applicable to this country should be
programmed as Scheduled DST. The system will automatically advance the clock on the last Sunday of
March at 01.59.03:00 am every year (the start date of DST) and set the clock backward on the last Sunday
of October at 02.59.02:00 am of the same year.

• Manual DST Adjustment: The Real Time Clock of the ETERNITY is advanced and set backward
manually according to the DST convention of the country/region where the ETERNITY is installed.

Manual DST Adjustment is to be used in regions/countries that have no fixed DST Convention and where
yearly variations in DST practices are likely.

When DST Mode is set as 'Manual', you must program the start and the end time, i.e. the time at which the
clock is to be advanced and the time at which the clock is to be delayed.

508 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 There are two ways to adjust DST manually:

1. The 'Day of Month' method, which specifies a day of the month DST will start or end. For example:
starting on the 2nd Sunday of March and ending on 1st Sunday of November.

2. The 'Date and Month' method, which specifies a date of the month that DST will start or end. For
example: starting on March 11 and ending on November 4.

DST is not applicable in certain regions/countries, like Asia and South America. In such cases, the DST
Mode is to be 'Disabled'.

How to configure
• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click Advanced Settings link to expand.

• Click the Regional Settings link.

• Click DST Parameters link to open the page.

• Set the DST Mode to Manual or Scheduled as per your requirement.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 509

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Scheduled DST Adjustment
• If you have selected 'Scheduled' DST mode, in the Region combo box, select the country/region where
your system is installed.

• Click Submit to save your DST setting.

• If you do not find your region on this list, you are recommended to set DST Mode to Manual and adjust
DST manually.

Manual DST Adjustment

• If you have selected Manual DST Mode, program the Forward and Backward Time Adjustments under
'Manual Time Adjustments'.

• Go to the option Forward Time Adjustments to advance the time when DST starts.

510 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select the desired Type of forward time adjustment:

• Day-Month Wise to specify the day of the month DST will start.

OR

• Date-Month Wise to specify the date of the month DST will start.

If you select Day-Month Wise option, the Date-Month Wise option will be disabled, and vice versa.

Day-Month Wise
• If you select the Day-Month Wise option, you should now select the desired options in each of the combo
boxes:

• Ordinal number: In the first combo box, select the Ordinal number of the day of the month, i.e. the 1st,
2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th day, when DST begins.

• Day: In the second combo box, select the day of the month - Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,
Thursday, Friday, Saturday - when DST begins.

• Month: In the third combo box, select the month when DST beings (January-December).

• Change Time From: In this combo box, select the time when DST will begin to change. The time mode
is 24 hours, with options from 00 to 23 hours and 00 to 59 minutes.

• To: In this combo box, select the time to which the DST is advanced. The time mode is 24 hours, with
options from 00 to 23 hours and 00 to 59 minutes.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 511

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Date-Month Wise
• If you select the Date-Month Wise option, you should now select the desired options in each of the
following combo boxes:

• Date: The date on which DST begins (1-31).

• Month: The name of the month when DST begins (January-December).

• Change Time From: The time when DST will begin to change. The time mode is 24 hours, with
options from 00 to 23 hours and 00 to 59 minutes.

• To: The time to which the DST is advanced. The time mode is 24 hours, with options from 00 to 23
hours and 00 to 59 minutes.

• Now, go to the option 'Backward Time Adjustments' to set the time back (i.e. end DST and begin standard
time).

• Follow the same steps described above to set the day/date, month, hours and minutes except, here you
must set these parameters according to the time when DST ends.

• Click Submit to save your DST settings.

• ETERNITY NE gives you the flexibility to set the 'Forward DST Adjustment' according to Date-Month,
while the Backward DST Adjustment according to Day-Month. Similarly, the reverse is also possible,
i.e. Forward DST may be set according to Day-Month, while the Backward DST may be set as Date-
Month. This is flexibility is particularly useful for setting DST of countries where the start of DST is
defined by date and month, e.g. First of April, but the end of DST is defined by Day and Month, e.g. the
last Sunday of October (as observed in Cuba).

512 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • When the DST of a particular country starts or ends on the Last Sunday or any other day, e.g. the last
Tuesday, last Friday of the month, always set the Ordinal Number as '5th'.

• Wherever time adjustments are made at 00:00 hours, use the previous date and set DST start time (i.e.
"from" time) at 23:59 hrs.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 513

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Settings

What's this?
ETERNITY is supplied with preset values for system and feature settings, as which may be altered and customized
by users to match their requirements and preferences. The factory-set values for system and feature settings that
are automatically assigned by the system are referred to as Default Settings or standard settings.

Every programmable parameter in the system has factory-set default values, which may be changed or customized
by the users to match their requirements and preferences.

How it works
The default settings are to be loaded or restored in the following situations:

1. Installing the Eternity in a country other than India.

ETERNITY provides default settings to match country/region-specific requirements of users worldwide.

The default settings are set to match user requirements of India.

So, users must select the appropriate Region for the country/region in which the system is installed.

After selecting the 'Region', users must default the system.

The system will load the default settings for the country/geographical region where the system is installed.

The system is designed to work efficiently with the default settings. So, if the country/region-specific
default settings match their requirements, users may not even need to alter or customize the values of
various parameters,

They may work with default settings for the most part, customizing only some of the parameters to match
their specific requirements.

The country-specific default settings of various parameters that will be loaded on changing the 'Region' are
presented in the table below. For default values of Trunk Access Codes, Emergency Numbers, Distinctive
Rings, for various countries refer the respective topics.
Default
Default Default Default
Country Country DST Distinctive Abbr.
Time DST CPTG DKP Opr TAC
Code Name Schedule Ring Dialing
Zone Mode Language
Type
001 Afghanistan GMT+04:30 English
002 Algeria GMT+01:00 English
003 Antigua and GMT-04:00 English
Barbuda
004 Argentina GMT-03:00 04 Spanish
005 Australia GMT+08:00 Scheduled 2 05 English 9
(Perth)
006 Australia GMT+09:30 Scheduled 2 05 English 9
(Note2)
(Adelaide)

514 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default
Default Default Default
Country Country DST Distinctive Abbr.
Time DST CPTG DKP Opr TAC
Code Name Schedule Ring Dialing
Zone Mode Language
Type
007 Australia GMT+10:00 05 English 9
(Brisbane,
Canberra,
Melbourne,
Sydney)
008 Austria GMT+01:00 Scheduled 1 German 9
009 Bahamas GMT-05:00 English 9
010 Bahrain GMT+03:00 Scheduled 3 English 9
011 Bangladesh GMT+06:00 English
012 Belarus GMT+02:00 English
013 Belgium GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 French 0
014 Bhutan GMT+06:00 English
015 Bolivia GMT-04:00 Spanish
016 Bosnia and GMT+01:00 English
Herzegovina
017 Botswana GMT+02:00 English
018 Brunei GMT+08:00 English
019 Brazil GMT-02:00 06 Portugues 0
(Fernando De e
Noronha)
020 Brazil GMT-03:00 Scheduled 4 06 Portugues 0
(Brasilia, Rio e
de Janeiro,
Sao Paulo)
021 Brazil GMT-04:00 06 Portugues 0
(Manaus) e
022 Brazil (Acre) GMT-05:00 06 Portugues 0
e
023 Bulgaria GMT+02:00 English
024 Cambodia GMT+07:00 English
025 Cameroon GMT+01:00 English
026 Canada (St. GMT-03:30 Scheduled 5 03 English T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
John's)
027 Canada GMT-04:00 Scheduled 5 03 English T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Halifax)
028 Canada GMT-05:00 Scheduled 5 03 English T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Montreal,
Ottawa,
Toronto)
029 Canada GMT-06:00 Scheduled 5 03 English T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Winnipeg)
030 Canada GMT-07:00 Scheduled 5 03 English T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Calgary)
031 Canada GMT-08:00 Scheduled 5 03 English T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Vancouver)
032 Chile GMT-04:00 Scheduled 6 Spanish 0
033 China GMT+08:00 08 English 0
034 Colombia GMT-05:00 Spanish
035 Costa Rica GMT-06:00 Spanish
036 Croatia GMT+01:00 English
037 Cuba GMT-05:00 Scheduled 18 Spanish 0
038 Cyprus GMT+02:00 English
039 Czech GMT+01:00 English
Republic
040 Denmark GMT+01:00 Scheduled 7 English 0
041 Egypt GMT+02:00 Scheduled 11 09 English 9
042 Fiji GMT+12:00 English
043 Finland GMT+02:00 Scheduled 8 English 9

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 515

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default
Default Default Default
Country Country DST Distinctive Abbr.
Time DST CPTG DKP Opr TAC
Code Name Schedule Ring Dialing
Zone Mode Language
Type
044 France GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 10 French 9
045 Germany GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 11 German 9
046 Greece GMT+02:00 Scheduled 2 12 English 9
047 Guyana GMT-04:00 English
048 Hong Kong GMT+08:00 English 9
049 Hungary GMT+02:00 Scheduled 2 English 9
050 India GMT+05:30 01 English T1 9 69-T-XXX 8
051 Indonesia GMT+07:00 14 English
052 Iran GMT+03:30 15 English 9
053 Iraq GMT+03:00 Scheduled 9 16 English 9
054 Ireland GMT Scheduled 7 English 9
055 Israel GMT+02:00 17 English
056 Italy GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 18 Italian 9
057 Japan GMT+09:00 19 English
058 Jordan GMT+02:00 English
059 Kazakhstan GMT+06:00 English
060 Kenya GMT+03:00 20 English
061 Korea - North GMT+09:00 21 English
062 Korea - South GMT+09:00 English
063 Kuwait GMT+03:00 English
064 Kyrgyzstan GMT+06:00 Scheduled 10 English 9
065 Lebanon GMT+02:00 Scheduled 12 English 9
066 Libya GMT+02:00 English
067 Malaysia GMT+08:00 22 English 0 6
(Note1)
068 Maldives GMT+05:00 English
069 Mauritius GMT+04:00 English
070 Mexico GMT-06:00 Scheduled 3 03 Spanish T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Mexico City)
071 Mexico GMT-07:00 Scheduled 3 03 Spanish T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Chihuahua)
072 Mexico GMT-08:00 Scheduled 3 03 Spanish T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Tijuana)
073 Mongolia GMT+08:00 English
074 Mozambique GMT+02:00 Portugues
e
075 Myanmar GMT+06:30 English
076 Namibia GMT+01:00 Scheduled 13 03 English T3 9 89-T-XXX 6
077 Nepal GMT+05:45 English
078 Netherlands GMT+01:00 English
079 New Zealand GMT+12:00 Scheduled 14 24 English 9
080 Nigeria GMT+01:00 English
081 Norway GMT+01:00 Scheduled 15 English 9
082 Oman GMT+04:00 English
083 Pakistan GMT+05:00 English
084 Paraguay GMT-04:00 Scheduled 16 Spanish 9
085 Peru GMT-05:00 Spanish
086 Philippines GMT+08:00 25 English
087 Poland GMT+01:00 Scheduled 1 26 English 9
088 Portugal GMT Scheduled 7 27 Portugues 9
e
089 Qatar GMT+03:00 English
090 Romania GMT+02:00 English

516 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default
Default Default Default
Country Country DST Distinctive Abbr.
Time DST CPTG DKP Opr TAC
Code Name Schedule Ring Dialing
Zone Mode Language
Type
091 Russia GMT+03:00 Scheduled 1 28 English 9
(Moscow, St.
Petersburg)
092 Russia GMT+06:00 Scheduled 1 28 English 9
(Novosibirsk)
093 Russia GMT+10:00 Scheduled 1 28 English 9
(Vladivostok)
094 Singapore GMT+08:00 30 English 9
095 Slovakia GMT+01:00 English
096 South Africa GMT+02:00 31 English
097 Spain GMT+01:00 Scheduled 1 32 Spanish 9
098 Sri Lanka GMT+05:30 English
099 Sudan GMT+03:00 English
100 Sweden GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 English 9
101 Switzerland GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 German 9
102 Syria GMT+02:00 Scheduled 17 English 9
103 Taiwan GMT+08:00 English 0
104 Tajikistan GMT+05:00 English
105 Thailand GMT+07:00 33 English
106 Turkey GMT+02:00 34 English 9
107 Uganda GMT+03:00 English
108 Ukraine GMT+02:00 English
109 United Arab GMT+04:00 35 English 9
Emirates
110 United GMT Scheduled 7 02 English T2 9 69-T-XXX 8
Kingdom
111 United States GMT-05:00 Scheduled 3 02 English T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
(Atlanta,
Augusta,
Boston,
Charlotte,
Columbus,
Detroit,
Indiapolis,
Miami, NY,
Philadelphia,
Washington)
112 United States GMT-06:00 Scheduled 3 02 English T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
(Chicago,
Dallas, Des
Moines,
Memphis,
Minneapolis,
New Orleans,
Oklahoma,
Omaha, St.
Louis)
113 United States GMT-07:00 Scheduled 3 02 English T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
(Albuquerque,
Boise,
Cheyenne,
Denver, Salt
Lake City)
114 United States GMT-08:00 Scheduled 3 02 English T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
(Las Vegas,
Los Angeles,
Phoenix, San
Francisco,
Seattle)

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 517

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default
Default Default Default
Country Country DST Distinctive Abbr.
Time DST CPTG DKP Opr TAC
Code Name Schedule Ring Dialing
Zone Mode Language
Type
115 United States GMT-09:00 Scheduled 3 02 English T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
(Juneau)
116 United States GMT-10:00 02 English T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
(Hawaii)
117 Uzbekistan GMT+05:00 English
118 Venezuela GMT-04:30 Spanish
119 Vietnam GMT+07:00 English
120 Yemen GMT+03:00 English
121 Yugoslavia GMT+02:00 English
122 Zambia GMT+02:00 English
123 Zimbabwe GMT+02:00 English

2. Malfunctioning of the System.

When there is a system malfunction, possibly caused by a configuration error that you are unable to
diagnose, you may restore default settings.

Restoring Default Settings

Default settings can be loaded or restored from the SE mode (software default).

To be able to do this, you must have the "SE password".

Whenever you restore the default settings in the system, all the programmable parameters except Network
Port Parameters32 and the Region will be set back to their default values.

You cannot default Region; you can only select a region to load the country-specific default settings and
default the system.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click Advanced Settings.

32. The IP Address, Subnet Mask, Primary DNS, Secondary DNS, Host Name, Domain Name, DHCP Server Address.

518 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the link Default the System.

• You will be prompted whether you want to default the system.

• Click OK.

• Enter Reverse SE Password on the prompt.

• The SE password you enter must be the current password. E.g.: if it is 1234, enter 4321 and click OK.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 519

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The system will restart and load the default settings. It takes 50 seconds to load default settings. The
system counting down the seconds will appear on your screen.

• You are returned to the Login page of Jeeves.

• You may now enter SE mode again.

• The names programmed for the Extensions will disappear and the default extension numbers assigned to
the extensions will appear.

Without the SE Password, you cannot restore default values via the software. If you forget the SE
Password, you must resort to hardware default of the SE-Programming Password first.

520 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Department Call

What's this?
Department Call enables you to group together extensions of a particular department so that callers can reach
anyone in the department by dialing a common access code assigned to the department.

Calls made to such groups of extensions are called Department Calls and the access code used to make
department calls is called Department Number.

This feature is useful in situations where any member of a department may interact with callers, as for instance in a
information counter, a customer care cell, a technical support team, etc.

Callers can also reach individual extensions in a Department group by dialing the extension number.

ETERNITY NE supports the formation of 5 Department groups. The member extensions of a department group
may be single line telephones (SLT), digital key phones (DKP) and SIP extensions.

Each Department Group can also be assigned a mailbox for voice mail, which any member extension can access.

Each Department Group can forward its calls to an extension or to its voice mail, or to another Department Group.

How it works
Extensions A, B, C, D are grouped as a Department with the access code 391.

Internal Calls
• Extension E dials 391 to call the Department.
• The system checks E's Class of Service for the Department Call feature.
• The feature is enabled. The system checks if Rotation is enabled for the extensions in the Department.
• If the Rotation flag is enabled. The system lands the call on the extension which is set to ring first.
• Extension A, configured as the first landing destination rings for the duration of the Ring Timer
(configurable; default: 15 seconds).
• A answers the call. Speech established between A and E.

• If A does not answer, the system hunts for the next extension in the group to land the call, B.
• B starts ringing for the duration of the Ring Timer.
• If Continuous Ring is enabled on A, A will continue to ring even as B is ringing.
• If B does not answer the call at the end of the timer, the system hunts for the next extension, C.
• If B has Continuous Ring enabled, B will continue to ring even as C is ringing.
• If the call is not answered even after hunting the last extension, the system will loop back and start from
the first extension once again.

External Calls
Department Calls can be made using Direct Inward Dialing (DID). For example, a company may use DID to have
callers who want information only to dial the Information Department instead of waiting for the Operator.

• An external caller places a call to Department 391 using DID.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 521

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The system checks if Rotation is enabled in the group of extensions in the Department.
• As the Rotation flag is enabled, and the first call was landed on A, the system lands the call on the next
extension B.
• Extension B rings for the duration of the Ring Timer (configurable; default: 15 seconds). If the Continuous
Ring flag is enabled for B, it will continue to ring, even as the system hunts for another extension in the
group to land the call.

• A third call internal/external made to Department 391.

• The same process as described above will be repeated.
• But the system will land the call on extension C first, because Rotation flag is enabled for this group of
extensions.
• The subsequent incoming calls will land on the extension which is next to the one that received the last
call. So the next call to the Department will land on extension D, the one thereafter on A, and so forth.

Thus for each call, the system will hunt for a landing extension as per the Rotation set for the deparment extension
group. The extensions will ring for the duration of the Ring Timer, either continuously or one-by-one (as per the
Continuous Flag configured), and according to the sequence in which the extensions in the group are arranged.

Rotation ensures equal distribution of call traffic. If Rotation is disabled, the fresh call will always land on first
extension of the Department group.

Voice Mail
If your system has the Voice mail module, a Department Group can be assigned a common mailbox for Voice mail,
called the Department Group Mailbox. You can assign Department Group Mailbox to selected extensions or to all
extensions in the Department.

To take the example of Extensions A, B, C, D with the Department Access Code 391 further,

• Extensions A, B, C and D are all members of Department Group 1 with the Access Code 391.

• Department Group Mailbox is assigned to all the four extensions.

• When there is a new message in the Group Mailbox, all four extensions - A, B, C, D - will get the Message
Wait Notification.

• The message wait notification may be a Stuttered Dial Tone or a Voice Message when the extension user
goes OFF-Hook, or blinking of the LED Lamp on the extension, or a Ring.33

• To the first extension that answers the notification call, for example, Extension A, the Voice mail System
informs about the new message(s) waiting in the Department Group Mailbox and in the Personal Mailbox.
"You have <x> new Message in your Personal Mail Box. You have <y> new Messages in your Department
Group Mail Box."

• If there is no new message in both mailboxes, the VMS will play the message: "You have Zero new
Message."

• If there is a new message in the Department Group Mailbox, but none in the Personal Mailbox, the
VMS will play the message:"You have <x> new Message in your Department Group Mailbox."
• If there is no new message in the Department Group Mailbox, but new message in the Personal
Mailbox, the VMS will play the message: "You have <x> new Message in your Personal Mailbox."

33. This will depend on the type of Message Wait Notification configured for the extension in its Voice mail Settings.

522 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The VMS prompts Extension A to access the Group mailbox: "To go to Personal Mailbox, press 1. To go to
Department Group Mailbox, press 2."

• The user of Extension A presses 2 and is taken to the Department Group Mailbox. The VMS plays the
following prompts:
• “To listen to New Messages, press 1.”
• “To listen to old messages, press 2.”
• “To send a message, press 3.”
• “To change your mailbox name, press 4.”
• “For message redirection, press 5.”
• “To go to Home Position, press 0.”

• Extension A presses 1.
• VMS plays the new messages.
• After playing the new messages, the VMS cancels Message Wait Notification set for extensions B, C and
D.

Call Forward
Just as calls can be forwarded to a Department Group, a Department Group can also forward its calls to:
• an extension.
• its own Department Group Mailbox.
• another Department Group.

ETERNITY supports the following Call Forward options for Department Groups:

• Call Forward - unconditionally: calls are forwarded to the destination number, without checking the
status or waiting for a response from the Department Group.

• Call Forward- if Busy: calls are placed on the Department Group as per the Rotation configured for it and
are forwarded to the set destination, only when all the member extensions of the Department Group are
found to be busy.

• Call Forward- if No Reply: when a call is made to the Department group, ETERNITY NE will place the
call as per the Rotation configured for the Department Group for the duration of the 'Call Forward No Reply
Timer for Department’ (30 seconds). If none of the member extensions answers the call before the expiry
of this timer, the call is forwarded to the destination.

• Call Forward - if Busy/No Reply: calls made to the Department Group will be routed to the destination, if
all members of the Department Group are busy or when none of the the member extensions answered the
call within the Call Forward No Reply Timer for the Department.

For Department Groups, ETERNITY NE does not support Call Forward to an external destination number.

• Call Forward to an external destination number, and Call Forward - Dual Ring are not supported for
Department Groups.

• Member extensions of a Department Group can set Call Forward on their extensions. However, Call
Forward set for the Department Group will have precedence over Call Forward set by individual
member extensions.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 523

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Again, taking the above example of Department Group 1 further, here’s how call forward will work:

• Extensions A, B, C, D of Department Group 1 are allowed Call Forward Department Group in their Class of
Service.

• Any of them can set Call Forward for Department Group 1. Extensions A, B, C and D can also set Call
Forward on their own extensions.

• When any extension or an external caller (also using Direct Inward Dialing or Direct Inward System
Access) dials the Access Code 391 to call Department Group1, ETERNITY NE will check the Call Forward
option set for the Department Group and route the call accordingly.

• If Call Forward - unconditionally is set, the call will be routed to the destination number, regardless of Call
Forward set by any of the member extensions.

• If Call Forward - Busy is set, and the first extension in the Department Group is busy, the system will hunt
for the next free extension in the group. It will continue to hunt for a free extension. If all extensions in the
group are busy, the call will be forwarded to the destination number.

Call Forward unconditional, busy, or busy/No reply set by any member extension will not work.

• If Call Forward - No Reply is set, the system will start the Call Forward No Reply Timer Department Group
and place the call as per the Rotation set for the Department Group. If the call is not answered by any of
the extensions before the timer expires, the call will be forwarded to the destination number.

If a member extension that is offered the call has set Call Forward-Unconditional, and the Call Forward No
Reply Timer Department Group has not exipred, the call forward set by the extension will be applied. If the
timer expires, the Call Forward No Reply set for the Department Group will be applied.

If a member extension that is offered the call has set Call Forward-No Reply, or No-Reply/Busy, the Call
Forward No Reply Timer (for individual extension) will start simultaneously with the Call Forward No-Reply
Timer Department Group. If the No Reply Timer for the extension expires first, the call will be forwarded to
the destination set for the extension. If the No Reply Timer of the Department Group expires first, before
the call is answered, the call will be forwarded to the destination set for the Department Group.

How to configure
The functioning of this feature requires you to do the following:
• create Deparment groups.
• select member extensions for the Department groups
• assign appropriate access codes to the Department groups.
• enable 'Department Call' in the Class of Service extensions that are to be allowed to make Department
calls.

If you want to provide voice mail facility to the Department Group, you must
• assign a Mailbox to the Deparment Group.
• allow member extensions access to the Department Group Mailbox.

If you want to enable Call Forward to the Department Group, you must
• enable 'Department Group Call Forward' in the Class of Service (CoS) of the member extensions.

524 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Creating Department Groups
• On a sheet of paper, draw a five-column table.

• Decide the number of department groups you want to create, for instance: 4 groups.

• Group all the extensions you want to put in each department group. You cannot group more than 16
extensions in a single department group.

• Decide in what sequence the extensions in each group should ring, i.e. which extensions should ring first,
second, third, and so forth.

• Decide the access code you want to assign to each department group.

• Your table may look like this:

Extensions to be included as members

Department Access Code
Group Index to be assigned SIP
SLT DKP
Extension

1 391 201, 202, 203 301, 302 303

2 392 204, 205, 206 301 304, 305

5 395 208, 209, 210 318

The access codes for the department groups and extensions in this table are default access codes.

• Now, with this information ready, you may configure the department groups using Jeeves.

Enabling Department Call in Class of Service

The 'Department Call' feature is included in the the ‘Basic Features’ allowed to all extensions of ETERNITY NE in
their COS for Day and Night. So, all extensions can make Department calls. You cannot deny this feature to any
extension, without denying the entire set of Basic Features.

By default, ‘Department Group Call Forward’ is enabled for day and night time in the COS of all extensions of
ETERNITY NE. So, all extensions of ETERNITY can set Call Forward Department Group.

If you wish to allow this feature to member extensions only, retain this feature in the COS group of member
extensions only, and disable this feature in the COS group of all other extensions. For instructions see “SLT
Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”, “SIP Extensions” under Basic Settings. See the topic “Class of Service (COS)”.

Configuring Department Groups using Jeeves

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click Advanced Settings link.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 525

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the link Department Groups.

• Assign an Access Code to the department group against the Department Group Number.

By default, the Access Codes assigned to Department groups are from 391 to 395.

If you decide not to use the default access codes, make sure that the access code you assign to each
department group is unique, and does not match with any SLT, DKP, SIP, Door Phone, DOP access code
or any feature access code of the Dial Phase. Refer the topic “Access Codes” to know more.

526 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Now, double click the field Select Extensions for Department Group.

A multiple selection box opens. Select the extensions you want to include in this Department group from
the list box on the left. Configure Ring Time, Rotation, as desired.

• Configure Ring Timer(s). This timer defines the time for which the extension, on which the call lands,
should ring. Default: 15 seconds.

• Select the check box Continuous Ring, if you want the extension to ring continuously until the call is
answered. The first extension will continue to ring even as the system hunts for other extensions in the
routing group to land the call. If the call still remains unanswered, the system will return the call to the first
extension once again. This flag is of no relevance, if you have selected only one member extension in the
department group.

• Select the check box Rotation, if you want to enable rotation of calls in the department group having
multiple member extensions. When enabled, each fresh call will land on the extension which is next to the
one that received the last call. This ensures equal distribution of incoming calls to all the destinations within
the group.

Rotation has no relevance if the department group has only one member extension.

• Repeat the same steps to configure another Department Group number.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 527

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Submit to save your settings.

Example:

The Customer Care Department of a company has four extensions: 201, 202, 301 and 302, which needs to be
grouped for Department Calls.

Extensions 201 and 202 are SLTs. Extensions 301 and 302 are DKPs.

Requirement: The company wants the following:

1. Call traffic should be distributed equally on all four extensions.
2. Ring sequence should be 201, 202, 301, and 302 (first to last).
3. First 201 should ring for 20 seconds.
4. If no reply, 201 should continue to ring and 202 should ring for 10 seconds.
5. If still no reply, 201 should continue to ring and 301 should ring for 15 seconds.
6. If still no reply, 201 should continue to ring and 302 should ring for 20 seconds.
7. 51 should be the access code for this department group.

Solution: Select a group e.g. 1, and configure as follows:

1. Enter 51 as access code.
2. 201 as member 01, with member type SLT.
3. 202 as member 02, with member type SLT.
4. 301 as member 03, with member type DKP
5. 302 as member 04, with member type DKP.
6. Set ‘member type’ of the rest to 'None'.

1. Enable the 'Rotation Flag' on routing group number 01 to distribute call traffic.
2. Enable the 'Continuous Ring Flag' for member 01 (201) and set the 'Ring Timer' to '20 seconds.
3. Set the Ring Timer of member 02 (202) to 10 seconds. Disable 'Continuous Ring' flag.
4. Retain the Ring Timer of member 03 (301) as default 15 seconds. Disable 'Continuous Ring' flag.

528 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Set the Ring Timer of member 04 (302) to 20 seconds. Disable 'Continuous Ring' flag.

6. Click OK, the window closes.

7. The Department Group you created appears.

8. Remember to click Submit to save your settings.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 529

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Voice mail for Department Group
• To assign a Mailbox to a department group, click the Advanced button.

• Configure the following voice mail parameters:

• Mailbox: Select this checkbox to assign a mailbox to a Department Group. By default, no mailbox is
provided.

• Mailbox Size (min): Define the size of the mailbox to any desired value from 001 to 999 minutes. The
default Mailbox Size is 5 minutes.

• Maximum Message Length (sec): Define the length of each message (in seconds) callers are to be
allowed to record in the Department Group mailbox. Change the maximum message length to any
desired value between 001 to 999 seconds.

By default, maximum message length is 15 seconds.

• New Message Delivery option in Mailbox Full condition: When the Department Group mailbox is
full, you may select one of the following options for delivery of new messages:

• Do not offer to leave message: The VMS will not allow the caller to record a message by declining
delivery of the message.

• Deliver to General mailbox: Select this option if you want the VMS to record the message of the
callers in the General mailbox. The General mailbox is a shared mailbox between extension users.

Only extension users who have General Mailbox in their “Class of Service (COS)” are allowed to
access it.

When you select this option, make sure that General Mailbox is enabled in the Class of Service of
the member extensions of the Department Groups. Refer “Class of Service (COS)” for instructions.

• Overwrite old messages: Select this option if you want the VMS to overwrite the existing
messages to record the new messages. The VMS starts overwriting the oldest message message
first.

By default, Deliver to General mailbox is selected.

• Play message details after delivery of message: After the extension user has listened to a message
in the mailbox, you can have the VMS can play message details such as Date and Time when the
message was recorded, the caller’s number34, and the extension number dialed by the caller35 to the
extension user.

You may select one of the following options:

• Never: The VMS will not play message details to the mailbox owner after playing the message.

• Always: The VMS will play message details to the maibox owner after playing each message.

• On Demand:The VMS will play message details to the mailbox owner only when the mailbox owner
requests it. On completion of each message, the VMS will prompt the extension user to press a digit

34. The number of person who left the message in the mailbox.
35. The number of the extension user for whom the message is intended.

530 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 for date and time stamp. When the mailbox owner presses the digit, the VMS will play the message
details.

By default, On Demand is selected.

• Voice Mail Auto Attendant Features: This parameter is applicable only if you are using the VMS Auto
Attendant for “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)”.

• Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile: Select a profile for the Department Group. The Auto Attendant
profile determines the greetings and welcome message to be played to mailbox owners when they
reach the home node. It also determines whether or not the user should be taken to the root node
directly.

• Abbreviated Name: When the VMS is used as Auto Attendant for Direct Inward Dialing, the callers
can be prompted to Dial by Name of the desired party instead of the extension number.

To allow callers to reach the Department group using Dial By Name, abbreviate the Department
Group’s name to the first three letters and enter it in this field.

• Announce Name: If you want the VMS to announce the Department group’s name when
transferring the call to the extension, select the checkbox to enable Announce Name. By default,
Announce Name is disabled.

If you enable Announce Name, make sure you record the Department group’s name on the VMS.
See “Recording Station Names” for instructions.

• Call Transfer Type: Select the desired method for transferring the call answered by the VMS Auto
Attendant to the extension. You may select any of the following methods of call transfer for the Day
(working hours) and the Night (non-working hours):

• Transfer to Mailbox: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant will
check if the extension number has a mailbox assigned and transfer the call to the mailbox of the
extension.

• Transfer immediately: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant
will transfer the call on the extension without checking its status.

• Transfer when Extension rings: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto
Attendant will wait for the extension to start ringing and then transfer the call.

• Transfer when Extension answers: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS
Auto Attendant will transfer the call when the extension answers (goes OFF-Hook).

• Transfer when Extension permits: The VMS Auto Attendant prompts the caller to record his/
her name, puts the caller on hold and places the call on the desired extension. If the extension is
free and answers the call, the VMS announces the caller’s name to the extension user and
prompts the extension user to choose whether or not to speak to the caller. If the extension user
chooses to talk, the VMS transfers the call. If the extension user chooses not to talk, the VMS
transfers the call to the mailbox of the extension user and asks the caller to leave a message.

By default, Wait for Answer is selected as Call Transfer method for all time zones.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 531

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Assign the Department Group Mailbox to member extensions within the group. To do this, go to the Voice
mail Settings of the extension type.

• From the combo box Specify Department Group, select the access code of the Department Group
whose group mailbox you want to allow access to by the extension.

• Click Submit to save changes.

How to use

Making a Department Call

Making a department call is the same as calling another extension.

For EON and Extended IP Phone Users

• Press DSS Key assigned to the desired Department Group.
OR
• Dial the desired Department Group Number (default: 391-395).
• You get Ring Back Tone as the call lands on an extension within the department group.
• Talk when the call is answered.
• Go Idle.

For SLT Users

• Lift handset
• Dial the desired Department Group Number (default: 391-395).

532 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • You get Ring Back Tone as the call lands on an extension within the department group.
• Talk when the call is answered.
• Replace handset.

Accessing Department Group Voice mail

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

When LED of Voice mail Key is turned on to indicate new message,

• Press Voice Mail key.

• VMS informs you about new message(s) in your Department Group mailbox and Personal Mailbox.
• Follow Voice Mail prompts to access Department Group mailbox.
• Press 2 to go to Department Group mailbox.
• Press 1 to listen to new messages.
• Go ON-Hook or follow voice prompts for the desired option.

For SLT Users

New messages in your mailbox will be notified according to the type of Message Wait Notification set on your
extension phone.

When the LED Lamp of the Message Waiting Key glows,

OR
When your phone plays Message Wait Ring36,
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 3931.
• Follow voice prompts.
• Press 2 for Department Group mailbox.
• Press 1 to listen to new messages.
• Replace handset after listening to messages. Or you may follow voice prompts.

If you hear Stuttered Dial Tone/Voice Message when you go OFF-Hook,

• Dial 3931.
• Follow voice prompts.
• Press 2 for Department Group mailbox.
• Press 1 to listen to new messages.
• Replace handset after listening to messages or follow voice prompts to continue.

Setting Call Forward for Department Group

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Press DSS Key assigned to the Call Forward Department Group.

OR

• Dial 1175 (users worldwide). Users in the Phillipines, dial 1105.

• Enter the Access Code of the Department Group whose calls are to be forwarded.
• Scroll to select Call Forward Type from the following options:

36. Refer “Distinctive Rings” for description.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 533

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Cancel Call Forward
• Forward Unconditionally
• Forward when Busy
• Forward when No Reply
• Forward when Busy/No Reply
• Press Enter key.
• Enter Destination number (extension number or voice mail)
• You get confirmation tone and message on your phone’s LCD.
• Go Idle.

For SLT Users

• Lift handset.
• Dial 1175 (users worldwide). Users in the Phillipines, dial 1105.
• Dial the Access Code of the Department Group whose calls are to be forwarded.
• Dial Call Forward Type:
• 1 for Forward Unconditionally
• 2 for Forward when Busy
• 3 for Forward when No Reply
• 4 for Forward when Busy/No Reply
• Dial 0 to Cancel Call Forward
• Dial Destination number (number of the desired extension or voice mail)
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

534 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dial By Name

What's this?
Dial By Name enables extension users to call another extension or an external party by dialing the name of the
person, instead of dialing their telephone number.

This feature is accessible only to extension users of the proprietary digital key phone, EON and the Extended IP
phone.

With Dial By Name, extension users need not remember the desired party's telephone number or short codes, i.e.
“Abbreviated Dialing” codes.

For each extension, the database for names used in Dial by Name is drawn from:

• the Personal Directory, which is assigned to each extension, wherein up to 25 external party numbers
along with their names may stored. The system uses the Personal Directory to dial external parties by their
names. See “Abbreviated Dialing” to know more.

• Global Directory, which is assigned to the extension in its “Class of Service (COS)”. The Global Directory
is a system-wide list of external party numbers and names. Upto 999 numbers can be stored in this
directory, and parts of the Global Directory (Part 1, 2, 3) can be assigned to each extension in its Class of
Service. See “Abbreviated Dialing” to know more.

• Names of Extensions, which are names of users. Their names are assigned to SLT, DKP and SIP
extensions to identify the extension users. Names of Extensions are necessary for making internal calls
using the Dial By Name feature.

How it works
• Press the 'Names' key.
• The prompt <Name : > appears on the phone display.
• Enter the name of the desired party37.
• For example, you wants to call Midas Biz, enter the letter 'M' using the keypad.
• The system displays in alphabetical order, all names starting with 'M'. These numbers are drawn from the
Personal and Global Directories assigned to your extension and the Extension Names programmed in the
system.
• Scroll the list using the Up/Down navigation keys to reach the desired contact's name.

OR

Instead of scrolling the entire list, you can enter more than one initial letter of the contact's name. The
search is narrowed down to more accurate matches. The phone displays the matching entries in the
directory.

• Select the desired name by pressing 'Enter' Key.

• The system dials out the number stored under the selected name. The number is displayed on the your
phone.

37. The process of entering the names is the same as when writing text messages (SMS) from a cell phone. The keys must be
pressed multiple times in quick succession to enter the desired alphabet.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 535

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
For this feature to work, the following must programmed:

• DSS Key: A direct station selection (DSS) key must be programmed for the Dial by Name feature. Without
the DSS Key this feature will not be accessible.

Both EON48 and SETU VP248, the Extended IP Phone, have the DSS Key labeled as 'Names'.

• Global Directory: The names of the external parties must be programmed against their respective
telephone numbers in the directory. Refer the topic “Abbreviated Dialing” for instructions on programming
the Global Directories.

• Personal Directory: The names of the external parties must be programmed against their respective
telephone numbers in the Personal Directory. Refer the topic “Abbreviated Dialing” for instructions on
programming the Personal Directories.

The Personal Directory must be assigned to the Extensions.

• Extension Names: Extensions may be SLTs, DKPs, SIP extensions. Refer “Extension Numbering Plan”
under Basic Settings for instructions on assigning names to extensions.

• Class of Service: Dial By Name is allowed to all DKP and Extended IP Phone users. However, the use of
this feature is related to the following features, which must be enabled in the Class of Service of the DKP
and SIP extension users:

• 'Internal Calls'- This is to be enabled so that the extension can call other extensions.
• Global Directory Part 1
• Global Directory Part 2
• Global Directory Part 3.

Global Directory Part 1 is assigned to all extension by default.

If you want the names to be drawn from Global Directory Part 2 and Part 3, provided these are
programmed, you must enable these two directories in the COS of the DKP and SIP extensions. See
“Class of Service (COS)” for instructions.

The system will display the names exactly as they have been programmed in the Personal and Global
Directories.

How to use

For EON48 and Extended IP Phone Users Only

• Press 'Names' key.
• You get the prompt: 'Name'.
• Enter the initial letters for the contact's name.
• The matich entries will appear on your phone’s display38.
• Scroll with the Up/Down navigation keys to reach the desired contact's name on the list.
• Press 'Enter' key to select the name.

38. The number of matching entries that will appear at a time on your phone's display will vary according to your phone's LCD display
capacity.

536 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The system displays the number being dialed out.
• You get Ring Back Tone or Busy Tone.

Entered the wrong alphabet?

• Go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Press the 'Names' key again.
• Enter the name/initial letters of the contact's name.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 537

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dial Plan

What's this?
ETERNITY NE provides Dial Plan to support On-hook Dialing on the Matrix Extended IP Phones.

Extended IP Phone users can make calls and access features, without going Off-hook from the handset, headset
or speaker.

How it works
When you are using the Matrix Extended IP Phone, you must configure the Dial Plan. During auto-configuration of
the Extended IP Phone, the ETERNITY NE assigns the Dial Plan to the phone.

The Dial Plan table stores up to 100 entries, which are stored against Index 001 to 100. Index001 is reserved for
'No Match Found'.

For each number string you configure in the Dial Plan, you must also define the digit length as Maximum Digits.
The Maximum Digits defines the number of digits to be dialed by the extension user for the phone to consider it as
end-of-dialing.

When the Extended IP Phone user dials digits, the phone compares the dialed number string with the entries in the
Dial Plan using the best match found logic.

When a match is found for the number, the phone waits for the duration of the Inter Digit Wait Timer to receive the
maximum digits defined for this number. When the maximum digits are received39, the phone considers it as end-
of-dialing and forwards the digits to the ETERNITY NE.

The default Dial Plan contains:

• all Access Codes in the 'Dial' state (First Digit and Maximum Digits). See "Access Codes" to know more.
• all Extension Numbers (First Digit and Maximum Digits).
• all Emergency Numbers as per configured in the Emergency Number Table.

Default Dial Plan

Index Number Maximum Digit

001 No Match Found 01

002 1#91 04

003 1#92 04

004 0 01

005 1 02

006 10 03

007 11 03

008 16 03

39. The phone will not wait for the Inter Digit Wait Timer to expire.

538 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Number Maximum Digit

009 105 04

010 107 04

011 109 04

012 117 04

013 2 04

014 3 04

015 38 02

016 4 01

017 5 01

018 6 02

019 7 01

020 8 01

021 9 01

022 * 01

023 24

:: 24

:: 24

100 24

The Dial Plan is not updated automatically when Access Codes or Extension numbers are changed. You must
update the Dial Plan if you change the Access Codes or Extension Numbers.

How to configure
• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link to expand links.

• Scroll the Advanced Settings links to reach VoIP Configuration.

• Click the VoIP Configuration link.

• Click Dial Plan to open the page.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 539

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Now, configure the Dial Plan, as required.

• In the Number field, enter Access Codes in the Dial state and extension numbers. A maximum of 24
digits can be entered.

• In the Maximum Digits field, define the maximum number of digits that the phone should wait to
receive before considering it as end-of-dialing and forward the dialed string to the ETERNITY NE. A
maximum of 24 digits can be entered in this field.

• Click Submit to save entries.

540 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dialed Number Directory

What's this?
Dialed Number Directory is a Digital Key Phone/Extended IP Phone feature.

It is the list of numbers dialed out from the DKP/Extended IP Phone, similar to the call history of recently dialed calls
on a cell phone.

ETERNITY retains up to 16 numbers dialed out from a DKP/Extended IP Phone in a directory.

These numbers may have been dialed out using features like Abbreviated Dialing, Quick Dial, Redial, Walk-In
Class of Service, or may be a simple outgoing call made by directly dialing the external number.

How it works
• When a DKP/Extended IP Phone extension user makes an outgoing external call, the number is stored in
the Redial Number List.

• The list has a capacity of storing a maximum of 16 recently dialed numbers.

• The list is updated using the First-In First-Out logic, whereby the earliest dialed number is replaced with
the most recently dialed number.

• To use this feature, the DKP/Extended IP Phone user must invoke the “Last Number Redial” feature.

• Doing so, the Redial Number List will appear on the phone display.

• The user may now navigate the list, select the number to be dialed out.

• The system will dial out the selected number using the same Outgoing Trunk used to place this call earlier.

• If the number had been dialed earlier using Abbreviated Dialing, the system will check for Toll Control
when dialing out the number again from the dialed number directory40.

How to configure
No specific programming required.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users Only!

• Press DSS Key assigned to Redial function.
OR
Dial 7

40. Recall that the system does not check for Toll Control when Abbreviated Dialing is used.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 541

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The list of last dialed calls appear on your phone's display.
• Scroll with up/down navigation key to reach the desired number.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• The desired number is dialed out and appears on your phone's display.
• You get ring back tone.
• Talk when speech is established.
• Go ON-Hook after the conversation has ended.

542 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Digest Authentication

What's this?
Digest Authentication is a challenge-based authentication service of SIP to authenticate the identity of the
originator of SIP request in the INVITE message. The recipient of the request can ascertain whether or not the
originator of the request is authorised to make the request. When the digest credentials of the originator—User
Name and Password—in the INVITE message are authenticated and accepted by the recipient, the originator and
the recipient are connected.

ETERNITY NE supports Digest Authentication. You may use Digest Authentication to

• restrict access to ETERNITY NE to specific callers.
• prevent unwanted or malicious calls.

How it works
The Digest Authentication feature works on the basis of the Digest Authentication Table, in which the credentials,
namely the User Name and Passwords of trusted/authorised calling party SIP devices are stored. You must
configure this table. The Digest Authentication Table is common for all SIP trunks on which this feature is enabled.

When you enable this feature on a SIP trunk, for all incoming calls (SIP requests),

• ETERNITY NE will challenge the identity of the calling party, i.e. the SIP device initiating the request to
send its digest credentials.

• When the calling party sends its credentials, ETERNITY NE authenticates the credentials by matching it
with its Digest Authentication Table.

• If a match is found, the calling party will be authenticated and the call will be allowed on the SIP trunk.

• If no match is found, ETERNITY NE will consider it as invalid authentication information and reject the call.

How to configure
To use this feature,
• make a list of devices whose incoming calls (SIP requests) you want to allow after authentication.
• enable Digest Authentication on the desired SIP Trunk
• configure the Digest Authentication Table.

To configure Digest Authentication Table,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link to expand.

• Click the VoIP Configuration link.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 543

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Digest Authentication Table link.
The Digest Authentication Table page opens.

• In the User ID field, enter the User ID to be authenticated. The User ID must be within 40 characters.

• In the Password field, enter the corresponding Password. The Password must be within 16 characters.

• Click Submit to save entries.

544 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Digital Key Phone-Operation

EON - the Proprietary Digital Key Phone

Matrix offers 'EON', the proprietary digital key phone (DKP). It is a powerful extension, supporting a host of phone
and PBX features, as listed below.

DKP Features
• Status of other ports (Tri-colour LED indication)
• Programmable Direct Station Selection (DSS) Keys and Feature keys
• LCD notification messages
• Ringer Tune selection
• Adjustable Speech level
• Adjustable Ringer Volume
• Adjustable Backlight and Contrast levels
• Hands-free operation - Speaker key and headset connectivity.
• Call Logs - last 20 Missed, Answered and Dialed Calls.
• Message Paging
• Menu based operation of PBX features
• Multiple Language support.

PBX Features
Listed below are the features of ETERNITY that require a Digital Key Phone:

• Abbreviated Dialing
• Auto Answer
• Background Music
• Call Chaining
• Call Cost Display
• Call Duration Display
• Call Mute
• Dialed Number Directory
• Directory Dialing by Name
• Dynamic Lock
• Forced Answer
• Keypad Lock
• Live Call Screening
• Message Paging
• Off-Hook Alert
• Room Monitor
• Text Message Reply
• Time Zone Display
• User Status (Presence)

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 545

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Models of EON at a Glance

Model
Feature
EON48S EON48P EON48DS EON48DP
Total number of keys 48 48 48 48
Number of programmable keys 29 29 29 29
Capsense keys Yes Yes Yes Yes
LCD display capacity 2 lines x 24 6 lines x 24 2 lines x 24 6 lines x 24
characters characters characters characters
Touch Keys No No No No
Touch screen operation No No No No
LCD with backlight Yes Yes Yes Yes
Headset Interface Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ringer Lamp (LED) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Speaker Phone Full duplex Full duplex Full duplex Full duplex

EON48

EON48S/EON48D-S

2 lines and 24 characters LCD display, full duplex, capsense feature keys

546 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 EON48P/EON48D-P

6 lines and 24 characters LCD display, full duplex, capsense feature keys.

LCD Display
The LCD display of EON48P/48D-P/48S/48D-S is backlit and can be tilted at a convenient angle for a clear view of
the text/characters displayed.
The LCD backlight can be turned on and off as well as adjusted for contrast and brightness from the "Phone
Settings" of the DKP Phone Menu.

Ringer LED
The Ringer LED indicates incoming internal and external calls. The LED Cadence will match with the Ring
Cadence of the incoming internal/external call.

The Ringer LED changes colour according to the type of call, as described in the table below.

Type of Call Ringer LED Colour

Internal Call Red

External Call Blue

Alarm Red + Blue (Violet)

Auto Redial Call Blue

Auto Call Back Call Red

Priority Red

Programming mode Red

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 547

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Navigation Keys
These are 5 capsense keys. The functions of each are described briefly below.

• Enter Key: To enter the Menu; when the phone is in the idle state (without any incoming or outgoing call
being made), if you tap the 'Enter' key, you will enter into the 'Menu'.

Enter key is also used to make a selection from the Menu/sub-menu options or to complete an action.

• Up Key: To scroll upwards while navigating the Menu/sub-menu.

• Down Key: To scroll downwards while navigating the Menu/sub-menu.

• Forward Key: To move forward when dialing a number.

• Back Key: To move backwards when dialing a number; to go back one level in the Menu.

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Keys

These are a set of 28 programmable keys assigned to Extensions and Trunks and important or frequently
accessed features of ETERNITY.

Refer the topic “DSS Keys” for instructions on programming these keys.

DSS Key LEDs

Each DSS key is equipped with an LED which glows to indicate the status of the Trunk/Extension or Feature
assigned to it.

• Status of Extensions and Trunks: The LED of DSS keys assigned to Extensions/Trunks glow in three
colours to indicate status of the call event on the Extensions/Trunks and on the DKP.
Thus, the status of the DKP user's own Extension as well as that of the other Extensions (i.e. DKPs and
SLTs) and the status of Trunk lines are indicated by the LED of the DSS keys assigned to those
Extensions and Trunks on the DKP.

The following table shows the relationship between the colour of the LED and various events:

LED LED Mode

Colour Continuously ON Slow Blink Fast Blink

Blue The key assigned to the The key assigned to the The key assigned to the
Extension you are in speech Extension you have kept on Extension you are calling or
with. hold. from which you are being
called.

Red The key assigned to the The key assigned to the The key assigned to the
Extension that is now busy Extension which has put Extension/Trunk that is called
with another Extension/ another Extension/Trunk on or being called by another.
Trunk. hold.

Violet You are talking on a Trunk You have held a Trunk You have an incoming call on
(external call) (external call) the Trunk (external call)

548 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Blue indicates the state of the extension/trunk you access. For example, when you make a call to
another Extension 203, the LED of the DSS key assigned to Extension 203 blinks Blue to indicate
ringing at the Extension. If you have successfully established speech with Extension 203 the LED
glows Blue continuously.

• Red indicates the state of other Extensions/Trunks. For example, if the LED of the DSS key assigned
to Extension 201 is glowing Red continuously, it means Extension 201 is busy with another Extension
or Trunk.

• Violet indicates the state of the trunk you are in speech with. For example, when you are in speech on
an outgoing call on Trunk 1 the LED of the DSS Key assigned to Trunk 1 will be continuously ON.
When you put the call on hold, the LED will blink slowly.

The LEDs of DSS Keys that are designated as Call Appearance (CA) Keys will function as follows:

LED LED Mode

Colour Continuously ON Slow Blink Fast Blink

Blue When you are in speech with When you have put an When any Extension is calling
an extension (internal call) extension on hold (internal (internal call)
call)

Violet When you are in speech with When you have put a Trunk When any Trunk is calling
Trunk (external call) on hold (external call) (external call)

• Status of Features: The LED of a DSS key is activated when the feature assigned to this key is used.

The LED of DSS keys assigned to Extensions/Trunks glow in a single colour - Red - to indicate status
of the call event on the Extensions/Trunks and on the DKP.

• Not all features require LED indication. Hence the LED on a DSS Key is activated only if the feature
assigned to that key requires LED.

• For example, Call Pick-Up; this feature does not require an LED. So when a DSS key is assigned to
this feature, the LED of the key remains inactive, when Call Pick-Up is accessed.

• A feature like Auto Redial requires an LED to show that it has been set or canceled. So, the LED of the
DSS key to which the Auto Redial feature has been assigned will glow Red, when Auto-Redial is set,
and the LED is turned off when the feature is canceled.

• Thus the LEDs of the DSS keys function only if the LED is relevant for the feature/ function assigned to
the keys, and otherwise remain inactive for example, Raid, Interrupt Request, Barge-In, Last Caller
Recall.

Dial Pad
The dial pad consists of 12 fixed keys for the digits 0, 1-9, and the characters * and #. The dial pad is used for
dialing numbers of extensions, external parties, and for dialing the programming and feature access codes.

Speaker Key
The speaker key sets the phone in 'Speaker mode' for hands-free operation. The Speaker key is programmable,
you can program any other feature/function on this key.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 549

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Speaker Key LED
The Speaker Key on EON48P/48D-P/48S/48D-S is equipped with a single colour LED which glows Blue when
pressed for the speaker mode and is turned off, when you exit the speaker mode.

Since key is programmable, the LED indication pattern will be according to the feature/function you assign to this
key. For example, if you assign an extension to this key, the LED of the key will function as a tri-colour LED to show
status of the Extension. If you assign a feature that does not require any LED activity, like Call Pick-Up, the LED of
this key will remain inactive.

Volume Keys
• "+" (plus): This is the increase key, to raise the volume of speech while talking and to decrease the Ringer
volume, when the phone is ringing.

• "-" (minus): This is the decrease key, to lower the volume of speech while talking and to decrease the
Ringer volume when the phone is ringing.

Headset Connectivity
The EON48P/48D-P/48S/48D-S provides two Headset interfaces: a 2.5mm Audio Jack and an RJ11 connector at
the bottom of the phone body.

So you can use any stereo headset of standard make with a 2.5 mm single connector or a stereo headset with an
RJ11 connector.

You can also program any of the DSS keys to function as the Headset key. Refer the topic “DSS Keys” for
instructions.

Key Maps
As EON48P/48D-P/48S/48D-S may be the extension of the Operator(s) and Executives in an enterprise to meet
the varied requirements of each user group, these key maps can be customized to match the exact requirement of
individual users. Refer the topic “DSS Keys” for instructions on customizing the Key Maps.

Phone Menu
You can access the following PBX and phone features from the Menu of EON48P/48D-P/48S/48D-S:

Menu option Description

Call Logs To view call history of internal and external Missed, Answered and Dialed calls.

You can also edit numbers in the call logs and store them in the Personal Directory.

Call Forward To set and cancel Call Forward-Busy, Call-Forward No Reply, Call-Forward-
Unconditional, and Follow Me.

Dynamic Lock To change the Toll Control level of the phone.

User Status To set User Present or User Absent.

Keypad Lock To lock the keypad of the phone.

550 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Menu option Description

Do Not Disturb To set/cancel Do Not Disturb on the phone, i.e. block incoming internal and external
calls.

Call Cost Display To view the cost of calls made from the phone.

Hotline To set/cancel Hotline and Delayed Hotline.

Alarm To set/cancel Personalized and Automated Alarms.

Change User To change User Password (required for using certain features like Call Follow Me,
Password Dynamic Lock, DISA, Walk-In Class of Service, User Absent/Present, Hot Desk) and for
customizing Phone Settings.

Phone Settings To customize settings of the phone such as Speech and Ringer Controls, LCD Display
settings (Brightness and Contrast, Backlight ON/OFF), Headset Connectivity, Call
Answering Mode (manual/auto answer).

Navigating the Phone Menu

To navigate the menu,

• Tap on Enter key when the phone is idle.

• Scroll by tapping the Up/Down Navigation Key to reach the desired Menu option.
• Tap on Enter key to select the desired Menu option.
• Scroll by tapping on the Up/Down Navigation Key to reach the desired sub-menu option.
• Tap on Enter key to select the desired sub-menu option.

To exit menu,

• Press Cancel key.

Or
• Go ON-Hook.

Second Call Indication

When you are in an on-going conversation and there is a second incoming call, EON48P/48D-P/48S/48D-S will
indicate the second incoming call by playing the Call Waiting Tone and displaying the Caller ID of extension/trunk
on the LCD. If you are in the handset or headset mode, an audible Ring indicating an incoming call will be played
on the speaker of the phone.

Operating EON48
Please refer the User Card for EON48 for instructions on operating the features of ETERNITY using EON.

EONSOFT
The EONSOFT is a PC-based Digital Key Phone. Based on a graphic user Interface (GUI), the EONSOFT offers all
the features of EON48, making it a substitute for the Digital Key Phone. Its integration with the ETERNITY obviates
the need for a separate telephone instrument.

The EONSOFT can be installed on any personal computer with Windows or NT operating system.
Two PC-based DSS64 Consoles are available to be used with the EONSOFT. You can use either one or both
DSS64 Consoles.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 551

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The EONSOFT occupies only a single port, even when both PC-based DSS64 Consoles are used. Thus it supports
all the features of the Digital Key Phone and the DSS64 Console on a single window.

DKP Port
The DKP port connects EONSOFT to the DKP port of ETERNITY's DKP card.

Handset Port:
The Handset port connects the Receiver of the phone, to be used for speech. The EONSOFT has the provision for
attaching a Handset. A handset with spring cord is supplied by Matrix and is to be connected to the handset jack
(RJ12) on the Dongle.

Headset connectivity
EONSOFT supports headset connectivity, providing a MIC and a Speaker interface. Any stereo Headset of
standard make, with dual connectors can be connected to the MIC and the Speaker on the Dongle.

The headset connection allows speech in hands-free mode. The headset with either RJ11 or CASIO jack both are
supported by EONSOFT.

COM Port
The COM port connects EONSOFT to a computer (COM Port).

After EONSOFT has been successfully installed on a computer and the DKP parameters have been configured,
each time you open EONSOFT, the display and keypad of the phone will appear on your computer screen.

552 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The illustration below shows EONSOFT with two DSS64 Consoles attached to it.

Phone Display
The EONSOFT has a 2-line and 24-character display. In the ON-Hook or idle condition, the first line displays the
Extension Number and the Extension name. The second line displays the Day, Date and Time.

When there is an incoming call, the calling party's number is displayed on Line 2 of the LCD41.

The LCD messages for various call events (dial, transfer, forward, hold, etc.), for prompts, alerts, confirmation,
errors, text messages, are displayed.

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Keys

These are a set of 25 keys programmable keys, allowing you to assign Extensions, Trunks or Features to them, so
that you can access any of these by pressing the respective key.

Refer the topic “DSS Keys” for instructions on assigning extensions, trunks, features to keys.

DSS Key LEDs

The DSS keys change colour to indicate the status of the Trunk/Extension or Feature assigned to them.

41. Only if the Extension, to which EONSOFT is connected, has been allowed CLIP facility in its Class of Service.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 553

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The following table shows the relationship between the colour of the LED and various events:

LED LED Mode

Colour Continuously ON Slow Blink Fast Blink

Green The key assigned to the The key assigned to the The key assigned to the
Extension you are in Extension you have kept on Extension you are calling or from
speech with. hold. which you are being called.

Red The key assigned to the The key assigned to the The key assigned to the
Extension that is now Extension which has put Extension/Trunk that is called or
busy with another another Extension/Trunk on being called by another.
Extension/Trunk. hold.

Orange You are talking on a You have held a Trunk You have an incoming call on the
Trunk (external call) (external call) Trunk (external call)

• Green indicates the state of the extension/trunk you access. For example, when you make a call to
another extension 203, the LED of the DSS key assigned to Extension 203 blinks Green to indicate
ringing at the extension. If you have successfully established speech with Extension 203 the LED glows
Green continuously.

• Red indicates the state of other Extensions/Trunks. For example, if the LED of the DSS key assigned
to Extension 201 is glowing Red continuously, it means Extension 201 is busy with another Extension
or Trunk.

• Orange indicates the state of the trunk you are in speech with. For example, when you are in speech
on an outgoing call on Trunk 1 the LED of the DSS Key assigned to Trunk 1 will be continuously ON.
When you put the call on hold, the LED will blink slowly.

The LEDs of DSS Keys that are designated as Call Appearance (CA) Keys will function as follows:

LED LED Mode

Colour Continuously ON Slow Blink Fast Blink

Green When you are in speech When you have put a When any Extension is
with a Extension (internal Extension on hold (internal calling (internal call)
call) call)

Orange When you are in speech When you have put a Trunk When any Trunk is calling
with Trunk (external call) on hold (external call) (external call)

• Status of Features: The LED of a DSS key is activated when the feature assigned to this key is used.

The LED of DSS keys assigned to Extensions/Trunks glow in a single colour - Red - to indicate status
of the call event on the Extensions/Trunks and on the DKP.

• Not all features require LED indication. Hence the LED on a DSS Key is activated only if the feature
assigned to that key requires LED.

• For example, Call Pickup; this feature does not require an LED. So when a DSS key is assigned to this
feature, the LED of the key remains inactive, when Call Pickup feature is used.

554 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • A feature like Auto Redial requires an LED to show that it has been set or canceled. So, the LED of the
DSS key to which the Auto Redial feature has been assigned will glow Red, when Auto-Redial is set,
and the LED is turned off when the feature is canceled.

• Thus the LEDs of the DSS keys function only if the LED is relevant for the feature/ function assigned to
the keys, and otherwise remain inactive.

• The LEDs of DSS keys to which features like Raid, Interrupt Request, Barge-In, Last Caller Recall are
assigned, will not glow.

Dial Pad
The dial pad consists of 12 keys (non-programmable), which include the digit keys for 0, 1-9, and character keys for
* and #.

Function Keys
These are non-programmable keys on the keypad of EONSOFT which have fixed functions.

• Redial: This key is used for redialing the last external number.

• Func Key: This key is used for accessing the Phone menu.

• Adr: This key is used for accessing the Address Book. The EONSOFT provides the facility of an Address
Book that is integrated with the Standard Windows Address Book, for storing the numbers and addresses
of contacts. So, when a call is to be made, you can select and dial the desired number from the directory.

• Spd Key: This key is used to dial by name.

• Flash: This key is used as 'Flash' key.

• Xfr: This key is used for transferring calls to another destination

• Hold: This key is used for putting the caller on hold. This key is also used to make a selection in the Phone
Menu.

• OFF-Hook: This key is used for going OFF-Hook. It simulates lifting of the handset, pressing of the
speaker key to make or receive calls.
• ON-Hook: This key is used for going ON-Hook. It simulates replacing of the handset, pressing of the
speaker key to disconnect.

Volume Control Keys

The  and  keys are used for increasing or decreasing the phone volume. Volume can be increased by clicking on
 and decreased by clicking on .

Navigation Keys
The following keys are used for navigating the phone menu:

• 'Func' key: This key is used for entering the Phone menu and to go back one level in the menu.

• Up and Down keys: The  and  keys function as the Up and Down keys to scroll the Menu and sub-
menu options. You can scroll up down the menu by clicking on  and scroll up the menu by clicking on .

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 555

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • 'Hold' key: This key is used to make a selection in the Menu.

Speaker key
The 'Spk' key sets the phone in 'Speaker mode' for hands-free operation. The Speaker key is programmable; you
can program any other feature/function on this key.

Shortcut keys
You can use the Keyboard of the computer to operate EONSOFT, with the help of "shortcut keys'. The following
table describes the functions performed when shortcut keys on the keyboard are pressed:

Short Cut Key Label Description

F1 Help

F2 Windows Address Book

F3 Spd

F4 Func

F5 Space Bar - Hook

F6 Alt+Enter - Hold

F7 Xfr

F8 Spk

Esc ON-Hook

. (dot/period) Flash

 (Up Arrow Key) Volume key. To increase volume of ringer and speech

 (Down Arrow Key) Volume key. To decrease volume of ringer and speech

Ctrl+C To open COM Port Settings Dialog Box

Ctrl+T To open Trunk Access Code Dialog Box

Tab  (Tab Forward) Forward shifting of selection

Tab  (Tab
Backward shifting of selection
Backward)

Shift + Enter  To press the button with selection

Num Pad Dial out a number

Key Maps
EONSOFT can function as an extension for the Operator, Executive, and Hotel Attendant, also Guest (though
unlikely to be used by guests).

Phone Menu
The menu is the same as EON48.

556 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Navigating the Phone Menu
To navigate the menu,

• Click 'Func' key when the phone is idle.

• Scroll by clicking on the Up/Down Key to reach the desired Menu option.
• Click 'Hold' key to select the desired Menu option.
• Scroll by clicking the Up/Down Key to reach the desired sub-menu option.
• Click 'Hold' key to select the desired sub-menu option.

To exit menu,

• Press the 'Func' key repeatedly to go back one level in the menu, till you reach 'Menu'.

Or

• Press Cancel key, if programmed.

If you want to use the Keyboard, press the Shortcut key for the desired function.

Tool Tips
You can program labels and tool tips for the DSS keys, which are displayed to the user on mouse over. You can
program the function of each key as Tool Tip, to help user in intuitive operation of EONSOFT.

To program a tool tip,

• right click the desired DSS key.

• The dialog box will show the Key Number.
• Enter the label for the key.
• Enter the Tool Tip for the key.
• Click OK.
• Repeat the same steps to program Tool Tip on another key.
• Each time you move the mouse on the key, the Tool Tip you programmed for this key will be displayed.

Call Indication
Incoming Calls are indicated by:

• Popping up of the EONSOFT window, when the window is minimized.

• Flashing of the Title Bar of the EONSOFT window, when the window is maximized.

In order for the EONSOFT window to pop up, you must have enabled the 'PopUp When Ring' option. When
this option is enabled and the EONSOFT window is minimized a new incoming call causes the window to pop
up to its full size notifying the user about the new call. When this option is enabled and the EONSOFT window
is maximized, a new incoming call is indicated by the flashing of the Title bar of the window.

When the 'PopUp When Ring' option is disabled and the EONSOFT window is minimized, a new incoming call
is indicated by the flashing of the EONSOFT Title at the bottom bar of the computer screen.

By default, the 'PopUp When Ring' option is enabled.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 557

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Second Call Indication
When you are in speech with someone, and there is a second incoming call, EONSOFT will indicate the second
incoming call, as a waiting call by playing an audible Ring.

To answer the second incoming call, you may put the current call on hold.

Operating EONSOFT
EONSOFT can be operated using the keyboard and the mouse.

Making calls
To make calls,

• Click the desired digits on the dial pad.

• The number will be dialed out.
• Talk.
• Click ON-Hook key to disconnect.

To make calls from Headset mode,

• Click OFF-Hook key.

• Click the desired digits on the dial pad.
• The number will be dialed out.

To make calls from Speaker mode,

• Click Spk key.

• Click the desired digits on the dial pad.
• The number will be dialed out.

• A headset must be connected and 'Headset Connected?' must be set to Yes in the Phone Settings of
the DKP.

• If you are using the keyboard instead of the mouse, press the appropriate Shortcut Keys listed above
and use the Number pad on the keyboard to dial digits.

Receiving calls
• When window pops up to indicate a call,
• Click Spk key or the OFF-Hook Key.
• Talk.
• Click ON-Hook key to disconnect.

558 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Digital Output Port (DOP)

What's this?
The ETERNITY NE provides a Digital Output Port (DOP) for connecting a Door Lock release relay to be used in
conjunction with the Door Phone connected to the system.

The Door Lock connected to the DOP can be opened by dialing the related Feature Command from the System
Administrator mode.

ETERNITY NE remembers the state of DOP the during power failure. If a power failure occurs while the
Door Lock device is being operated, the system will remember the last state (in this case, ON) and switch
ON the DOP when power is restored.

How to connect a Door Lock to the DOP

Refer the topic “Door Phone” for instructions on connecting a Door Lock to the DOP.

Do not connect devices that do not conform to the specifications of the DOP!

How to configure
When you connect a Door Lock to the DOP, configure DOP.

• Open Jeeves and log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link, scroll to System Parameters and click the link.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 559

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Digital Output Port (DOP) to expand.

• Set the Normal Contact Type for the DOP to Normally Open.

• Click Submit.

• Make sure the option Use Door Lock is enabled in the related set of “Door Phone” parameters in “Basic
Settings”.

• You may set the time for which the Door Lock should remain by configuring the option Open Door for in
the“Door Phone” parameters in “Basic Settings”.

How to use
The DOP will open and close door lock release device connected to it on the basis of the Open Door For timer or
on dialing the Feature Access Code for opening the Door. This feature command overrides the timer.

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To open the Door:

• Press DSS key assigned to the DOP (if configured).

OR
• Dial 1072-020
• You get the message 'Door Opened for 005 Sec’42 on your phone's display and a confirmation tone.
• Go idle.

For SLT Users

To turn DOP ON:

• Lift the handset.

• Dial 1072-020.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.

42. This is the default duration of this Timer. Your phone will display the time you have set.

560 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

What’s this?
Direct Inward Dialing (DID), an auto attendant feature, allows external callers to reach an extension directly without
the intervention of the Operator.

When DID is enabled on a trunk, whenever an external call lands on that trunk, the Built-In Auto Attendant or the
Voice Mail Auto Attendant (if Voice Mail module is installed) of ETERNITY NE, greets the caller and prompts the
the caller to dial the desired extension number. The call is then transferred to the extension number dialed by the
caller.

ETERNITY NE also offers Delayed DID, whereby incoming calls to Extensions defined as the landing destinations,
can be answered by the Built-In or the Voice Mail Auto Attendant, if none of the landing extensions answers the call
within a certain time period.

DID can be used by regular callers who know extension numbers to reach the desired extensions without Operator
assistance. Thus, DID reduces call traffic on the Operator extension, call set-up and transfer time for the callers. It
is useful especially during non-working hours and holidays, and projects a professional image of the organization.


Delayed DID works only when you have selected Operator or Extensions as the the landing destination
for incoming calls on the trunk.

DID will not work, when the dialed extension has Privacy from DID enabled in its Class of Service. So, if
you want to prevent direct access to certain extensions by external callers, enable Privacy from DID in
their Class of Service. See “Privacy”.

How it works
DID can be configured on all trunk types—CO, Mobile, SIP—for the Day (working hours) and Night (non-working
hours).

When configuring DID on a trunk, you may select either the Built-In Auto Attendant or the Voice Mail Auto Attendant
as the destination for incoming calls.

DID with Built-In Auto Attendant

When the Built-In Auto Attendant of ETERNITY NE is selected as the destination for incoming calls on a trunk, this
is how DID will work:

• A call lands on a Trunk.

• The system waits for the period of the DID Answer Wait Timer (default: 05 seconds) to answer the call.
The caller gets Ring Back Tone from the CO network during this period.

• The system greets the caller with the pre-recorded voice message called the DID Welcome Greeting for
the current time zone. A Voice Module must be assigned for the DID Welcome Greeting.

• The DID Welcome Greeting message is played once.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 561

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If no voice module is assigned as Welcome Greeting, the system will play music on hold after answering
the call until the end of the DID Music Timer (default: 5 seconds) to expire.

• On the completion of the Welcome Greeting or music-on-hold at the end of the DID Music Timer, the
system plays the DID Dial Message to prompt the caller to dial the desired extension number.

The DID Dial Message is played once and the caller gets Beeps. The system waits for the DID Beeps
Timer (default: 10 seconds) to expire.

• If the caller does not dial any number before the DID Beeps Timer expires, the system plays the DID Call
Transfer to Operator message and transfers the call to the Operator.

The system waits for the duration of the DID Inactivity Timer (default: 60 seconds) for the Operator to
answer the call. If there is no answer at the end of this timer, the system releases the trunk.

If the caller fails to dial digits, you can have the call disconnected instead of routing it to the Operator. For
this, you need to enable the Disconnect DID call, when caller does not dial any digit flag in the System
Parameters. When this flag is enabled, the system will play the DID No Dial Voice message to the caller. If
the caller fails to dial a digit within the DID Beeps Timer, the system will disconnect the call.

• If the caller dials the extension number, the system checks if the number is valid.

If the dialed digits are invalid, the system plays Wrong Dial voice message to the caller. This message is
played once. The system waits for the duration for the DID Error Tone Timer (default: 5 seconds).

If Wrong Dial Voice Message is not programmed, the system plays Error Tone to the caller for the duration
of the DID Error Tone Timer, followed by the DID Dial Prompt.

• If the number dialed by the caller is valid, the system checks if the dialed extension is free.

• If the dialed extension is busy, the system plays the DID Busy Message to the caller. The message is
played once.

• If no DID Busy Message is programmed, caller will hear Busy Tone, played for duration of the DID Busy
Tone Timer (default: 15 seconds), followed by the DID Dial Prompt.

To have the call disconnected if the dialed extension is busy, you may enable the Disconnect DID Call,
when dialed number is busy flag in the System Parameters.

• The dialed extension is free. The system calls the extension and plays DID Ring Back Tone Message (if
programmed) or Ring Back Tone to the caller. This message is played until the dialed extension is ringing.

• The system waits for the period of the DID Ring Timer for the dialed extension to answer the call.

• When the dialed extension answers the call, the caller gets connected to the extension.

If the dialed extension does not answer before the expiry of the DID Ring Timer, the system prompts the
caller to dial again with the DID Dial Prompt message to the caller.

• The system diverts the call to the Operator. When the call is transferred to the Operator, the system plays
the DID Call Transfer to Operator voice message (if programmed) or plays Ring Back Tone to the caller.

562 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If there is no reply from the dialed extension, you can have the call disconnected instead of routing it to the
Operator by enabling the Disconnect DID call, when dialed number is not responding flag in the
System Parameters.

DID with Voice Mail Auto Attendant

When the Voice Mail Auto Attendant of ETERNITY NE is selected as the destination for incoming calls on a trunk,
this is how DID will work:

• A call lands on a CO Trunk.

• The Voice Mail System (VMS) installed in the ETERNITY NE answers the call.

• The VMS greets the caller with the Welcome messag and the Greeting Message selected for the current
time zone (working hours and non-working hours).

• The VMS plays prompts to the caller to process the call further according to the Voice Mail Auto Attendant
Profile you assigned to the trunk.

Delayed DID
You can use Delayed DID to have incoming calls not answered by the landing destination(s)—Operator or
Extensions—within a certain time period, to be handled either by the Built-In or the Voice Mail Auto Attendant.

When you use Delayed DID,

• As a call lands on a trunk, the system checks the Incoming Call Route configured for the current time zone
for the trunk.

• On finding Operator or Extensions as the landing destination, the system rings on the destination
extension(s) for the duration of time defined for ringing the extension (default: 10 seconds).

• If no reply is received from the extensions, the system routes the call to the auto attendant you selected:
Built-In or Voice Mail Auto Attendant.

• The call is processed further by the auto attendant you selected.

How to configure
To use the Voice Mail Auto Attendant on trunks, do the following:

1. make a list of the trunks by their port type (“CO Trunks”, “Mobile Trunks”, “SIP Trunks”) and port number
on which you want to use the Voice Mail Auto Attendant.

2. configure Welcome and Greeting messages. You may either use the default, pre-recorded welcome
messages of the VMS, or record in WAV format, the custom welcome messages that meet your
requirements. See “Recording Voice Messages”

3. configure “Graphs and Nodes”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 563

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. configure Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile. You may configure a different profiles for different trunk
types.

5. select the option Voice Mail Auto Attendant to Route Incoming Calls during the Day and the Night on
the desired trunks. For instructions see “CO Trunks”, “Mobile Trunks” and “SIP Trunks”

6. for each trunk port, configure Voice Mail Auto Attendant; select the Voice Mail Auto Attendant Profile
number.

To use the Built-In Auto Attendant on trunks, do the following:

1. make a list of the trunks by their port type (CO, Mobile, SIP) and port number on which you want to use the
Built-In Auto Attendant.

2. select the option ‘Built-In Auto Attendant’ to Route Incoming Calls during the Day and the Night on the
desired CO, SIP, Mobile trunks.

3. assign Voice Modules for DID Messages. To play to callers pre-recorded voice messages as DID
greetings and voice prompts at each stage of the DID call, you need to assign Voice Modules for the
following DID Messages:

• DID Welcome Greeting: played to callers when answering the DID call. Different welcome greetings
can be programmed for Working Hours and Non-working Hours. The DID Welcome Greeting message
is played once.

• DID Dial Prompt: played after the Welcome greeting message to prompt the caller to dial the desired
extension number. This message is played once.

• DID Ring Back Tone: played after the caller has dialed the number and the system is ringing the
dialed extension. This message is played continuously as the dialed extension rings.

• DID Wrong Dial message: played when the caller dials a wrong number or the number dialed by the
caller does not match with any extension number of ETERNITY NE. This message is played once.

• DID Destination Busy: played when the dialed extension is busy. This message is played once.

• DID Destination No Reply: played when the dialed extension does not respond. This message is
played once.

• DID No Dial: played when the caller has not dialed any number. This message is played once.

• DID Call Transfer to Operator: played to the caller when the call is being transferred to the Operator.
This message is played once.

Pre-recorded DID voice messages are provided in WAV format on the CD-ROM provided to you with
the ETERNITY NE.

564 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The default Voice Module numbers assigned to DID messages and the messages recorded on each
module are:

Voice Module
Voice Message Application Voice Message
Number

02 Morning Greeting Good Morning!

(DID/Trunk Auto Answer)

03 Afternoon Greeting Good Afternoon!

(DID/Trunk Auto Answer

04 Evening Greeting Good Evening!

(DID/Trunk Auto Answer)

05 DID Welcome Greeting for Day Time Welcome!

(Working Hours)

06 DID Welcome Greeting for Night time Welcome! I am sorry, we are closed.
(Non-working and Break hours)

07 DID - Dial prompt Please dial the desired number.

08 DID - No Dial message Sorry! You have not dialed any number.

09 DID - Wrong Dial message Sorry! The number is not valid.

10 DID - Destination Busy message The person you dialed is busy.

11 DID - Destination Ringing message The number you have dialed is ringing.
(Ring Back Tone)

12 DID - Destination No Reply message The person you dialed is not responding.

13 DID Call Transfer to Operator message Please hold, transferring your call to the
Operator.

You may customize these DID voice messages by recording messages of your choice and assigning
them to the voice modules. For instructions on recording messages on the voice modules and
assigning voice modules, see “Voice Message Applications”.

If you do not use any of the above voice modules, the system will play the Call Progress Tone for each call
state.

4. configure the following DID related Timers, as required:

• DID Inactivity Timer (default: 60 seconds)
• DID Answer Wait Timer (default: 5 seconds)
• DID Music Timer (default:5 seconds)
• DID Beeps Timer (default: 10 seconds)
• DID Ring Timer (default: 30 seconds)
• DID Busy Tone Timer (default: 15 seconds)
• DID Error Tone Timer (default: 5 seconds)

See “System Timers and Counts” for instructions.

5. configure the following DID related flags, as required:

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 565

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Disconnect DID Call, when dialed number is busy: when this flag is enabled, if the dialed extension
is found busy, the system will disconnect the DID call instead of routing it to the Operator. Default:
disabled.

• Disconnect DID call, when dialed number is not responding: when this flag is enabled the system,
if there is no reply from the landing destination extension(s), the system will disconnect the DID call
instead of routing it to the Operator. Default: disabled.

• Disconnect DID call, when caller does not dial any digit: when this flag is enabled, if the caller fails
to dial a digit within the DID Beeps Timer, the system will disconnect the DID call instead of routing it to
the Operator. Default: disabled.

See “System Parameters” for instructions.

566 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

What’s this?
With Direct Inward System Access (DISA) remote users can access and use the system's features and facilities
using Trunks, on which this feature is enabled.

Using DISA, remote users can:

• call any extension.
• make external calls.
• use features and facilities of the system.
• configure features and facilities of the system and administer the system.

All these can be done as if being done from a local extension of the ETERNITY NE.

DISA Variants

ETERNITY NE offers three types of DISA, each with a different method of authentication and level of access:

PIN Authentication - Multiple Calls

Callers can access an extension of ETERNITY NE by dialing the DISA Login Code consisting of:
• the DISA Feature Access Code.
• the extension number they want to access.
• the User Password of that extension.

The callers are authenticated and allowed to use the extension on which they are logged in.

The callers must dial special digits or codes to go On-hook, Off-hook. They are allowed to make as many trunk
calls and internal calls as long as they are logged into the DISA mode.

To end the DISA login session, callers must dial the Termination code or disconnect from the remote end.

Callers can access an extension to use DISA PIN Authentication-Multiple Calls only if the extension has DISA
feature enabled in its Class of Services.

DISA with CLI Authentication - Multiple Calls

The system authenticates the caller by matching the caller’s CLI with the entries of the DISA-CLI Authentication
Table and logs in the caller into the extension configured as ‘Auto Login’ extension for the CLI.

Callers are not required to dial any DISA Login Code or any password.

When the caller is authenticated on the basis of CLI, the system plays the ('internal' system) Dial Tone.

The callers must dial special digits or codes to go On-hook, Off-hook. They are allowed to make as many trunk
calls and internal calls as long as they are logged into the DISA mode.

To end the DISA login session, caller must dial the Termination code or disconnect from the remote end.

For this type of DISA, the DISA CLI Authentication Table must be configured first.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 567

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DISA with CLI Authentication - One Call
This type of DISA is similar to the previous one. The system authenticates callers by matching the callers’ CLI it
with the entries of the DISA-CLI Authentication Table and logs in the callers into the extension designated as ‘Auto
Login’ extension for the CLI.

When the caller is authenticated on the basis of CLI, the system gives the caller direct access to the Outgoing
Trunks selected for dialing ‘0’. It plays the dial tone.

Callers are allowed to make a single external call. The system ends the DISA session on the completion of the call
by the caller or by the other remote party

For this type of DISA, the DISA CLI Authentication Table must be configured first.

To make another call, the caller must enter the DISA mode again, by calling the ETERNITY NE from the remote
location.

This feature allows access to system resources to remote users, and therefore has serious implications for
your system's security. Protect your system from unauthorised access and misuse.

How it works
For this feature to work, you must enable the desired DISA variant on the desired trunks: CO, Mobile, SIP.

• A call lands on a DISA enabled Trunk.

• The system checks if a DISA variant is enabled on the trunk for the current time, i.e. Day or Night.

• If a DISA variant is enabled on the trunk, the system processes the call according to the DISA variant
enabled on the trunk.

• If DISA with PIN Authentication - Multiple Calls is enabled,

• The system plays Welcome Greeting message to the caller43.

• The caller must dial the DISA Login Code consisting of:
• the DISA Feature Access Code.
• the number of the extension the caller wants to access.
• the user password of the extension.

• On successful login, the system starts the DISA Idle State Timer (configurable; default: 20 seconds).
The system waits for the caller to go Off-hook44.

• When the caller goes Off-hook by dialing the Off-hook code #1, the system plays the internal dial tone
and waits for the caller to dial digits.

• If the caller dials an external number using a CO trunk, the system starts the DISA Inactivity Timer
(configurable; default: 2 minutes).

43. If no voice message is recorded, the system plays music-on-hold to the caller.
44. If the caller does not go Off-hook within this timer, the system releases the call.

568 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The system waits for the caller to dial digits within the DISA Inactivity Timer.

• The system reloads this timer each time it receives digits from the caller. If the caller fails to dial any
digit within this timer, the system plays beeps for the duration of the DISA Warning Beeps Timer (fixed;
15 seconds). If no digit is received at the end of the Warning Beeps, the system terminates the DISA
session. If digits are recieved before the end of the Warning Beeps, the system reloads the DISA
Inactivity Timer.

• The caller can make as many trunk calls and internal calls.

• The caller can terminate the DISA login session either by disconnecting from the remote end or by
dialing the Termination Code #9.

• If DISA with CLI Authentication - Multiple Calls is enabled,

• The system compares the CLI of the caller with the Calling Party Numbers configured in the CLI
Authentication Table.

• If the CLI matches with any of the Calling Party Numbers in the Table, the system provides access to
the extension configured as Auto Login extension for this Calling Party Number in the Table45.

• The caller gets logged into the Auto Login extension and gets the dial tone of ETERNITY NE.

• Now, the caller dials codes for On-hook #0, Off-hook #1 to make as many trunk and internal calls as
desired.

• If the caller dials an external number using a CO trunk, the system starts the DISA Inactivity Timer
(configurable; default: 2 minutes).

• The system waits for the caller to dial digits within the DISA Inactivity Timer.

• The system reloads this timer each time it receives digits from the caller. If the caller fails to dial any
digit within this timer, the system plays beeps for the duration of the DISA Warning Beeps Timer (fixed;
15 seconds). If no digit is received at the end of the Warning Beeps, the system terminates the DISA
session. If digits are recieved before the end of the Warning Beeps, the system reloads the DISA
Inactivity Timer.

• If DISA with CLI Authentication - One Call is enabled,

• The system compares the CLI of the caller with the Calling Party Numbers configured in the CLI
Authentication Table.

• If the CLI matches with any of the Calling Party Numbers in the Table, the system provides access to
the extension configured as Auto Login extension for this Calling Party Number in the Table46.

• The caller gets logged into the Auto Login extension and gets dial tone of the outgoing trunks selected
for dialing ‘0’.

45. If no match is found for the CLI of the caller in the Table, the call will be routed as per the Incoming Call Route configured in ETER-
NITY NE.
46. same as previous note.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 569

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If the caller dials an external number using a CO trunk, the system starts the DISA Inactivity Timer
(configurable; default: 2 minutes).

• The system waits for the caller to dial digits within the DISA Inactivity Timer. If the caller fails to dial any
digit within this timer, the system plays beeps for the duration of the DISA Warning Beeps Timer (fixed;
15 seconds). If no digit is received at the end of the Warning Beeps, the system terminates the DISA
session. If digits are recieved before the end of the Warning Beeps, the system reloads the DISA
Inactivity Timer.

• After the external call is completed, i.e. the caller disconnects from the remote end or the other remote
called party has disconnected, the caller is logged out.

• To make another external call, the caller must call the DISA enabled trunk of ETERNITY NE again.

• In all the variants of DISA, the caller can use all the features allowed in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the
extension the caller is logged into (using PIN Authentication or CLI Authentication).

• DISA Inactivity Timer is not applicable for SIP and Mobile trunks.

• DISA calls in the SMDR report are marked as "O" in the remarks column. See “Station Message Detail
Recording–Report”.

• If DISA is disabled, ETERNITY NE will route the call by DID logic, if DID is enabled. If DISA and DID
both are disabled, the incoming call will be routed as per the Incoming Call Route logic. To know more,
see “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)”.

How to configure
To provide DISA to remote users you need to do the following configuration:

• Select the DISA variant for the Trunks in the Route Incoming Calls option on the trunk port parameters.
See “CO Trunks”, “Mobile Trunks”, and “SIP Trunks” under Basic Settings for instructions.

• Enable DISA in the“Class of Service (COS)” of the extensions which you want to allow callers to access
using DISA. See “SLT Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”, “SIP Extensions” under Basic Settings for
instructions on configuring Class of Service for the different Extension types.

• Change the User Password of the DISA extensions, if you selected DISA PIN Authentication-Multiple
Calls,If you selected DISA PIN Authentication-Multiple Calls on a trunk. The default User Password (1111)
will not work. See “User Password” and “System Security” for more information and instructions.

• Configure the related timers, DISA Idle State Timer and DISA Inactivity Timer, if required. See “System
Timers and Counts” for instructions.

• If you have selected the DISA CLI Authentication-Multiple Calls or CLI Authentication-One Call on a trunk,
you must configure the CLI Authentication Table.

570 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To configure the DISA CLI Authentication Table,

• Make a list of remote users and their numbers whom you want to allow DISA.

• For each remote user’s number on your list, write the Extension number of the ETERNITY NE you want to
allow this extension user to log in.

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the DISA - CLI Authentication link. The CLI Authentication Table page opens.

• You can configure as many as 999 numbers in this table, by clicking the tabs of the index on the top of the
table.

• Refer to the list of remote user numbers and the corresponding ETERNITY extension numbers you made.

• In the Calling Party’s Number column, enter the number of the remote users whom you want to allow
access to DISA using CLI Authentication. The system will match the CLI of the callers with the numbers
you store here.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 571

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • For each Calling Party Number, in the Auto Login as field, select the extension you want to allow access
to after the Calling Party Number is authenticated.

• Click Submit button to save your entries.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

How to use
If you are a Remote user, to be able to use DISA, you must know:

• the number of the Trunk on which DISA is enabled and the variant of DISA enabled on this trunk.

• the number of the extension and the user password which you want to access, if using DISA with PIN
Authentication.

• the duration of the DISA related Timers: DISA Idle State and DISA Inactivity Timer, so that you may dial
digits accordingly, without delay.

• the special digits to be dialed during a DISA login session.

Dialing Special Digits

After successful login, you will be required to go on-hook, go off-hook, use 'flash', use 'pause' or dial characters like
A, B, C, D, from your remote device to use the features and facilities of ETERNITY.

However, ETERNITY will not be able to understand the conventional way of dialing 'flash' key or going on-hook with
momentary make/break of loop current. Therefore, ETERNITY supports specific codes, which it can interpret if
these are received during DISA session.

When you are in DISA mode, use the following codes to indicate an activity:

Special Digit/activity Code to be dialed

on-hook #0

off-hook #1

Flash #2

Pause #3

A #4

B #5

C #6

D #7

+ #8

To Terminate the DISA #9

# ##

572 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Special Digit/activity Code to be dialed

End of String #*

To use DISA,

• Dial the number of the Trunk on which DISA is enabled for the current time zone, i.e. Day or Night.
• ETERNITY answers the call. You will get music or DID Voice Message, if configured.

If DISA PIN Authentication-Multiple Calls is enabled,

• You will get beeps at the end of music/DID Voice Message.
• Dial DISA Login Code 1079 during the beeps.
• Dial the extension number. You will get beeps.
• Dial the User Password for the extension during the beeps.
• You get dial tone on successful login.
• Dial the special digits #1 to go Off-hook, #0 to go On-hook, and make your calls like any local extension.
For example, making an external call, dial Trunk Access Code '0' to grab a trunk and dial the number.
• To terminate DISA session dial #9 or disconnect the call from your (remote) end.

If DISA CLI Authentication-Multiple Calls is enabled,

• You will get system dial tone at the end of music/DID Voice Message.
• Dial the special digits #1 to go Off-hook, #0 to go On-hook, and make your calls like any local extension.
• To terminate DISA session dial #9 or disconnect the call from your (remote) end.

If DISA CLI Authentication - One Call is enabled,

• You will get Trunk dial tone at the end of music/DID Voice Message.
• Dial the external number, without the Trunk Access Code.
• The DISA session will be terminated when you or the remote called party disconnects.
• To make another call, you must number of the DISA enabled trunk again.

The following features of ETERNITY NE are not supported in DISA mode:

• Auto Call Back
• Auto Redial
• Call Park
• Call Chaining
• Self Ring Test
• Trunk Reservation.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 573

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Direct Station Selection Console

The DSS Console is a two-wire digital terminal to be used as an add-on module for the digital key phone, EON, as
an extension of its key map.

The DSS Console provides you quick access to Extensions, Trunks, Features/Functions of the ETERNITY NE, all
at the touch of a single key, making your call operations easier.

While the DSS Console is more commonly used by the Operator/receptionist in an organization, it meant for use by
anyone who needs to access the many features of the ETERNITY NE at a single touch of a button.

The Matrix DSS Console is available as DSS64 (64 keys).

The DSS Console extends the existing key map of the DKP. When DSS64 is attached to EON48, you have in all 93
DSS keys (29 DSS keys of EON48 and 64 DSS keys of DSS64).

A DSS Console occupies a Digital Key Phone Port. So, you can use only one DKP if you want to use a DSS
Console with it.

The DSS Console can be attached with the ETERNITY NE in the same way as the DKP, EON, and is programmed
as an attachment of the DKP.

You can program Extension numbers or features/functions on the keys on the DSS Console in the same way as
you would program the DSS keys of EON, so that they can be accessed simply by pressing a single key.

LED
Each DSS Console key is equipped with an LED which glows in single (Red) or in tri-color (Green, Red, Orange)
depending on the function assigned to it.

When an extension or Trunk is assigned to a DSS Console key, the LED functions as a tri-color LED to show the
status of the extension/trunk (whether ringing, busy, in speech, on hold).

574 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When a Feature is assigned a DSS Console key, it functions as a single color LED to indicate whether the Feature
has been accessed or activated (set or canceled).

The LED color and cadence of the DSS Console keys is the same as that of the DSS keys of EON. Refer the topic
“Digital Key Phone-Operation” to know more.

Not all Features/Functions of ETERNITY require an LED. So, the LED of the DSS keys function only if the feature/
function assigned to these keys require LED indication.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 575

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Distinctive Rings

What's this?
Distinctive Rings are ringing patterns used for distinguishing between different types of call events. With Distinctive
Rings, it is possible to use ring cadence of user's choice for each of these call events. For instance, Triple ring can
be set for 'Priority Internal Calls' and long rings can be set for 'Alarm Calls'.

A set of ring types is called Distinctive Ring type. The default Distinctive Ring Types are:

Call Event Ring Type set 1 (T1) Ring Type set 2 (T2) Ring Type set 3 (T3)

Internal Call Short Very Slow Double Double

Trunk Call Double Long Slow Long Slow

Auto Call Back Short Long Short Long Short Long

Auto Redial Very Long Slow Very Long Slow Very Long Slow

Alarm Call Long Fast Long Fast Long Fast

Emergency Long Fast Long Fast Long Fast

Operator Alarm Long Fast Long Fast Long Fast

Message Wait Short Fast Short Fast Short Fast

Programming
Continuous Continuous Continuous
Ring

Self Ring Short Long Short Long Short Long

Priority Triple Triple Triple

Call Supervision Continuous Continuous Continuous

Door Phone Triple Triple Triple

Presence Continuous Continuous Continuous

These ring types have the following ring cadence:

Ring Pattern Cadence (in milliseconds)

Short Fast 750-750

Short Long 500-1500

Short Very Slow 750-2250

Long Fast 1500-500

Long Slow 1000-4000

Very Long Slow 2000-4000

Double 400-200-400-2000

400-200-400-200-400-
Triple
2000

576 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Ring cadence is not programmable.

How it works
At the time of installation, when the System Engineer selects the “Region” (as per the geographical location of the
system), ETERNITYNE loads the country-specific Distinctive Ring Type defined for the selected Region.

Refer the topic “Default Settings” for the default Distinctive Ring Type applied to your country/region.

Demonstration of rings
It is possible to demonstrate Ring Types to users by dialing the SE commands from EON/Extended IP Phone or an
SLT.

By default, the system will play each Ring Type as demonstration for 30 seconds. The duration of demonstration
can be changed by setting the 'Tone Demo Timer' to match user preference.

How to configure
The country-specific Distinctive Ring Pattern is set automatically by the system when you select the Region Code
and issue command to default the system. However, if required, you may change the default Ring Pattern loaded
by the system.

To configure Distinctive Rings,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click Advanced Settings link.

• Click the System Parameters link to open the page.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 577

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • On the System Parameters page, click Distinctive Rings to expand.

• Select the desired Ring Type for each call event/feature that you want to customize.

• Click Submit to save changes.

• To change Demonstration Timer, click the System Timers and Counts link under Advanced Settings.

578 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Scroll to Call Progress Tones.

• Set the Tone Demo Timer to the desired duration, e.g. 045 seconds.

• Click Submit to save changes.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

How to use
Users of ETERNITY may be acquainted with the different Distinctive Rings played by the system so that they can
associate the terms used to describe the rings with the sound emitted by the system for each ring.

Ring Types can be demonstrated to extension users by dialing the SE commands from EON, the Matrix Extended
IP Phone or an SLT.

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Enter SE mode.

• Dial command 4003-Ring Pattern

Where,
Ring Pattern is

01 for Continuous
02 for Short Fast

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 579

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 03 for Short Long
04 for Short Very Slow
05 for Long Fast
06 for Long Slow
07 for Very Long Slow
08 for Double
09 for Triple

• After dialing the desired Ring Pattern Code,

• Press 'Enter' key.

• You get the prompt 'Go Idle for Ring' on your phone display.

• Go Idle.

• The Ring Pattern you selected will be played.

• You may repeat the SE commands to demonstrate another Ring Pattern.

• Exit SE mode.

For SLT Users

• Enter SE mode.

• Dial command 4003-Ring Pattern

Where,
Ring Pattern is

01 for Continuous
02 for Short Fast
03 for Short Long
04 for Short Very Slow
05 for Long Fast
06 for Long Slow
07 for Very Long Slow
08 for Double
09 for Triple

• Go Idle, after dialing the desired Ring Pattern Code.

• The Ring Pattern you selected will be played.

• You may repeat the SE commands to demonstrate another Ring Pattern.

• Exit SE mode.

580 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Do Not Disturb (DND)

What's this?
Extension users may wish to restrict calls to their extensions in order to work uninterrupted by frequent phone calls.
The feature, Do Not Disturb, enables users accomplish this.

This feature is useful to extension users who are in the middle of a meeting or any important work that requires their
undivided attention.

DND can be set and canceled by

• Extension users
• Operator for extension users, referred to as DND-Remote.

Doing so, calls from other extensions will be barred. However, the extension user would continue to receive:
• all the external calls transferred by the Operator/any other phone, DID Calls and DDI Calls.
• Alarm calls.
• Reminder calls.
• Auto Call Back calls.

Also, the extension user can:

• use all the features of the PBX.
• make Outgoing calls and
• make Internal calls to other extensions.

DND has three supplementary features: “DND-Override”, “DND Text Message” and “Voice Message for DND
Notification”.

DND-Override
As the feature title suggests, 'DND-Override' allows the caller to land on the called extension, despite DND set on
the extension.

DND-Override will not work if the called extension has 'Privacy from DND-Override' enabled in its Class of Service.

DND Text Message

A DND Message can be a short Text Message such as 'In a Meeting', 'In a conference', 'On vacation', that a user
can set when enabling DND on his/her phone.

When setting DND (also DND-Remote), the extension user/Operator can select an appropriate text message to be
displayed to the calling extension.

This DND text message is displayed on the calling extension, but only if the calling extension is the proprietary
digital key phone, EON.

The ETERNITY supports 9 different DND Text Messages, which can be changed as per user requirement by the
System Engineer. Users can select and set on their phones any of the DND messages programmed by the System
Engineer.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 581

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Voice Message for DND Notification
Using this feature, a pre-recorded Voice Message can be played to the caller informing him/her about the DND set
on the called extension. For example, "The dialed extension has activated Do Not Disturb".

Voice Message Notification for DND is particularly useful when the extension phone on which DND is set is an SLT.

When DND is set on an extension of ETERNITY, callers who try to reach that extension are played an error tone.
Callers who are using EON are displayed the DND Text Message set by the called extension, and thus come to
know the cause of the error tone. Such a facility is not available to callers who are using SLTs, who can hear only
the error tone and have no way of knowing the cause of the error tone.

Hence, the feature Voice Message for DND Notification, whereby a pre-recorded Voice Message notifies calling
extensions of the DND set on the called extension.

To play to the callers pre-recorded voice messages as DND Notification, you must record and assign a Voice
Module.

How it works
A, B and C are extension users.
B has EON, while C has an SLT.
B has DND-Override in his Class of Service, C does not have this feature.
DND Text messages as well as Voice Message Notification for DND have been programmed by the System
Engineer.

• A has set DND on his extension with the DND Text message 'In Meeting'47.
• B calls A.
• As B has DND-Override, the Voice Message for DND Notification is played to B once, and the DND
message 'In Meeting' set by A appears on B's phone display. B gets routing Beeps.
• To exercise DND-Override, B must dial '4' the feature access code for 'DND-Override' during either during
the Voice Message or during the routing Beeps.
• B gets Ring Back Tone, if A's extension is free.
• B gets Busy Tone, if A's extension is busy.
• However, if A has Privacy from DND Override, B will get error tone and the DND message set by A
appears on B's phone.

If B fails to dial the DND-Override code before the end of the routing beeps, error tone will be played to
him.

Now, to take another example,

• C calls A.
• As C has an SLT, C will get only the Error tone.
• But as Voice Message for DND Notification is programmed in the system, C will be played the pre-
recorded message once.
• Since C is not allowed 'DND-Override' in his Class of Service, he cannot exercise this feature during the
Voice Message.
• At the end of the voice message, C will be played error tone.

47. While DND and DND Text Message can be set from any phone, DND Text Message can be viewed on EON and the Extended IP
Phone only.

582 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
For this feature to work,

• DND, DND-Override and Privacy from DND-Override must be enabled in the Class of Service (COS) of
the extension(s) that are to be allowed this feature.

By default, all extension port types have DND enabled for the Day and Night in their Class of Service. So,
all extensions of ETERNITY can set and cancel DND.

DND-Override and Privacy from DND-Override are disabled in the CoS of all extensions by default. So,
none of the extensions can use DND-Override, or be exempt from DND.

While it makes sense to offer all extensions DND, providing DND-Override and Privacy from DND also to
all extensions will not serve the purpose of DND.

Decide which extensions are to be allowed 'DND', which are to be allowed 'DND-Override', and which are
to be allowed 'Privacy from DND-Override'. Generally, DND-Override is allowed to the Operator extension.
It may be allowed to extensions of persons in senior positions in the organization. Similarly, Privacy from
DND-Override may be allowed to persons in senior positions in the organization.

If you want to allow DND only to selected extensions, disable this feature in the CoS of all other extensions
other than these extensions.

Similarly, if 'DND-Override' is to be to be allowed to the Operator and a few other extensions, enable this
feature in the CoS of the Operator and other extensions.

If 'Privacy from DND-Override' is to be allowed to certain extensions only, enable this feature in the CoS of
these extensions.

For instructions on configuring DND in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the extensions which you want to
allow this feature, see “SLT Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”, “SIP Extensions” under Basic Settings.

• You may configure the DND Text Messages, see “System Parameters” for instructions.

• You may also configure the Voice Message for DND Notification, as per user requirements.

To be able to play a voice message to callers for DND notification, you must first record a Voice Module
with the desired message.

ETERNITY NE supports 16 Voice Modules of 16 seconds duration each.

Record a Voice Module with the message "The dialed extension has activated Do Not Disturb"
(recommended).

Assign the Voice Module to the Voice Message Application defined for 'DND Notification'.

See the topic “Voice Message Applications” for instructions.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 583

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use

DND set/canceled by Extension Users

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set DND:

• Press the DSS Key assigned the 'DND' feature.

OR

• Dial 18
• Scroll to select from any of the DND messages that appears on the phone's display:

• Do Not Disturb
• Unavailable
• In Meeting
• In Conference
• Try on Mobile
• On Vacation
• On Business Trip
• Out of Office
• With a Guest

• Press 'Enter' key.

• You get a text message 'DND Set' on the phone's display and confirmation tone.
• Go Idle.

To cancel DND:

• Press DND Key again.

OR

• Dial 18-0
• You get a text message 'DND Cancelled' on the phone's display and confirmation tone.

For SLT Users

To set DND:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 18-1 for 'Do Not Disturb'
• Dial 18-2 for 'Unavailable'
• Dial 18-3 for 'In Meeting'
• Dial 18-4 for 'In Conference'
• Dial 18-5 for 'Try on Mobile'
• Dial 18-6 for 'On Vacation'
• Dial 18-7 for 'On Business Trip'
• Dial 18-8 for 'Out of Office'
• Dial 18-9 for 'With a Guest'
• Replace handset.

To cancel DND:

584 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Lift handset.
• Dial 18-0
• Replace handset.

DND-Remote

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set DND for an extension user:

• Press the DSS Key assigned to DND-Remote.

OR
Dial 1072-001.
• Enter the extension number1.
• Scroll to select the desired DND message from the list that appears on your phone display.

• Do Not Disturb
• Unavailable
• In Meeting
• In Conference
• Try on Mobile
• On Vacation
• On Business Trip
• Out of Office
• With a Guest

• Press 'Enter' key.

• You get a text message 'DND Set on <Extension Number>' and confirmation tone.
• Go Idle.

To cancel DND-Remote,

• Press the key assigned Remote-DND function.

OR
Dial 1072-001.
• Enter the Extension Number.
• Scroll to select the message 'Cancel DND'.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get a text message 'DND Canceled on <Extension number>' and confirmation tone.
• Go Idle.

For SLT Users

To set DND for an extension user:

• Lift the handset.

• Dial 1072-001. You get feature tone.
• Dial Extension number. You get feature tone.
• Dial 1 for 'Do Not Disturb'
• Dial 2 for 'Unavailable'
• Dial 3 for 'In Meeting'

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 585

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dial 4 for 'In Conference'
• Dial 5 for 'Try on Mobile'
• Dial 6 for 'On Vacation'
• Dial 7 for 'On Business Trip'
• Dial 8 for 'Out of Office'
• Dial 9 for 'With a Guest'
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

To cancel DND set for an extension user:

• Pick up the handset.

• Dial 1072-001. You get feature tone.
• Dial Extension Number. You get feature tone.
• Dial '0' to cancel DND.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

DND-Override

For EON and SLT Users

• Dial an extension number.
• You get routing beeps and a DND Notification message, if programmed (and a DND Text message, if
using EON)
• Dial '4', the DND-Override Code, during the message or the routing beeps.
• The called extension will start ringing.
• You will get Ring Back tone.
• If the dialed phone is busy, you will get busy tone.

586 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Door Phone

What's this?
A Door Phone is typically used for monitoring an entrance door. It is installed in place of the Doorbell.

The door phone is similar to any ordinary phone; except it does not have a hook-switch or a dial pad. Usually, it is a
weather tight box, equipped with a button like a doorbell, which visitors press.

When visitors press the Door Phone Call Button, the phone programmed to receive the call (landing destination)
rings. The user of the called phone can answer the door phone call by simply lifting the handset and talk to the
visitor at the door. The user of the called phone can have the door opened for the visitor by either physically
appearing at the door or operating a door lock release device.

The Door Phone feature of the ETERNITY NE allows users to operate the door phone from a remote location (off-
premises) by having their calls routed to an external number.

The Door Phone feature of the ETERNITY NE is very convenient to have at:

• Delivery entrances: It is not necessary to have company personnel monitor delivery entrances. They can
just answer the Door Phone instead.

• Clinics, Pharmacies, Apothecary, Druggist/Chemist Medicine Dispensaries: Where patients need to

be attended to and medicines must be dispensed round the clock to patients/prescription holders, doctors/
pharmacists can use the door phone feature to let in patients/prescription holders, even during non-
working hours, and when they are absent.

It is also possible for the doctor/pharmacist to have calls of the door phone landed on their mobile number
or any other fixed line external number, and open their clinic/pharmacy from their current (remote) location
to let the patient in.

• Residences and Apartment entrances: The identity of the visitors can be screened before letting them
in. The occupants of the house can greet their guests/relatives and let them enter the house also in their
absence by answering the door phone from their current (remote) location and opening the door for the
guests.

Matrix does not supply Door Phones. Any standard 4-wire Door Phone can be connected to the door
phone port of ETERNITY NE.

How it works

The Pre-requisites
• A four-wire Door Phone connected to the Door Phone Port of the ETERNITY NE.

• A Door Lock Release device connected to the Digital Output Port (DOP) of the ETERNITY NE, if a Door
Lock Release is to be used in conjunction with the Door Phone.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 587

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Process
• When a visitor arrives at the entrance and presses the door phone button, the system senses the doorbell
and places the call on the phone programmed as the landing destination. The destination phone may be
extension(s) of the ETERNITY NE or an external fixed line or mobile number.

When the landing destination for the Door Phone Call is an extension of ETERNITY NE,

• The system plays a distinct Ring Type on the extension to indicate to the extension user(s) that it is a door
phone call. The Ring Type is programmable; by default Triple Ring is set as ring type.

• The visitor is played Ring Back Tone while the destination extension rings for the duration configured as
‘Ring Door Phone call for’ parameter in the Door Phone settings (default: 30 seconds)48.

If the destination extension does not answer the call within this time period, the Door Phone call is dropped
and the Door Phone goes idle.

• When the destination extension answers the call, the Door Phone circuit is activated and two-way speech
is established between the visitor and the extension user.

• The extension user ascertains identity of the visitor.

• The extension user may now either physically appear at the door to open it, or dial the Open Door Lock
Code (default: 1173) from the current extension.

• When a Door Lock is used to open the door,

• the extension user puts the call on hold, music-on-hold is played to the visitor.
• the extension user dials the Feature Access Code to 'Open the Door' (default: 1173).
• the Door Lock is opened for the duration of the Timer 'Open Door for’ (default: 5 seconds)49,50,
configured in the Door Phone settings.
• as soon as this Access Code is dialed, speech is reestablished with the visitor.
• the extension user invites the visitor to enter the building.
• The Door Lock closes on the expiry of the ‘Open Door for’ timer.

• The Door Phone goes idle only when the extension user goes ON-Hook.

• The extension user can open the Door Lock also by dialing the feature command to operate the DOP.
For this, however, the extension must have the facility ‘DOP Turn ON/Turn OFF' in its “Class of Service
(COS)”. Refer the topic “Digital Output Port (DOP)” for operation instructions.

• It is possible for the any extension of the ETERNITY NE to establish speech with the Door Phone even
when it is idle, by dialing the unique access code assigned to the Door Phone.

When the landing destination for the Door Phone Call is an external number,

• When the visitor presses the Door Phone button, the ETERNITY NE makes a call to the pre-programmed
external number, which may be a fixed line or a mobile number.

48. The ‘Ring Door Phone Call For’ timer determines the time for which the landing destination shall ring for the door phone call. This
Timer is necessary because often visitors may press the door phone switch as they would do a door bell, for one or two seconds
only, whereas the call must remain present for a longer period of time for it to be answered.
49. This is the time for which the door will remain open.
50. An error tone will be played to the extension user for the duration of the error tone timer, if a DOP has not been assigned to the
Door phone port.

588 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The ETERNITY connects the Door Phone to the Trunk Port on the basis of the Outgoing Trunk(s)
assigned for the external number. When connected to the Trunk Port, the Door Phone receives Call
Progress Tones of the CO Network.

• When the external number answers the call, speech is established between the visitor and the external
number.

• The called party on the external number ascertains the identity of the visitor.

• To open the door from the remote location,

• the called party on the external number puts the visitor on hold by dialing '#2'. The system plays music-
on-hold to the visitor.
• the called party on the external number dials the Feature Access Code for 'Open the Door' (default:
1173)51.
• the Door Lock is opened for the duration of the Timer 'Open Door for’, (default: 5 seconds)52,53.
• as soon as this Access Code is dialed, speech is reestablished with the visitor.
• the visitor is invited to enter the building.
• the called party on the external number disconnects the call54; the Door Phone goes idle.

This way, it becomes possible to answer the door bell call from a remote location and open the door lock
from the remote location.

• The Door Lock can be opened by the called party on the external number also by dialing the command
for operating the DOP to which the Door Lock is connected, instead of dialing the 'Open the Door'
access code. Refer the topic “Digital Output Port (DOP)” for operation instructions.

• The called party on the external number can also call the Door Phone using Direct Inward System
Access (DISA).

• It is also possible for the called party on the external number to make multiple calls, while putting the
visitor at the Door Phone on hold. For this, the party must be logged in the “Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)” mode.

• The Door Phone feature of the ETERNITY NE offers the flexibility of selecting the Routing Mode for Door
Phone calls. The system supports two Door Phone Call Routing Modes:

• At Wish: Whenever you want to route the Door Phone Calls, you can alternately select the landing
destination, i.e., select a group of extensions at one time, an external number (the programmed fixed
line or mobile number) the next time, as required. The extension user can change the Call Routing
Mode, i.e. the landing extension or external number, as and when required.

• Scheduled: You can program the system to route Door Phone Calls automatically to the landing
destination phone according to the time of the day: Day (working hours) or Night (non-working hours).
For example, you can have Door Phone calls during the Day landed on the extension(s) of the
ETERNITY NE, and Door Phone calls during the Night on an external number. It is also possible to
assign different groups of extensions for Day and Night time.

51. This access code is to be dialed only when in speech with the visitor. If this access code is dialed when there is no speech, an error
tone will be played to the extension user for the duration of the Error Tone Timer.
52. This is the time for which the door will remain open.
53. An error tone will be played to the extension user for the duration of the error tone timer, if a DOP has not been assigned to the
Door phone port.
54. If the trunk used for placing this call is a Two-Wire Trunk, dial #0 to disconnect the call.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 589

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For this, a Time Table must be assigned to the Door Phone Port, defining the working days and
working hours. Destination Extensions must be defined for the Day and for Night. Similarly, if external
number is selected as landing destination for the Day or Night, the number must be configured.
ETERNITY NE will follow the Time Table you have set and route the calls according to the current time
of the day to the destination phone (extensions/external number) configured for the time of the day.

• The landing destination - Extension Group and the External Number - can be configured only by the
System Engineer (SE).

• The Routing Mode for Door Phone Calls, 'Scheduled' or 'At Wish' mode can be set by the System
Engineer as well as the extension users (User Mode). However, extension users must have the feature
“Door Phone Settings” enabled in their '“Class of Service (COS)”. With this feature included in their
Class of Service, the extension users can switch between At Wish and Scheduled modes by dialing the
Feature Command.

• The Time Table, the landing Extensions, and the External Number for routing the Door Phone Calls
can be programmed by the System Engineer only.

• The Outgoing Trunks selected for routing door phone calls to an external number will be common for
both Scheduled and At Wish modes.

How to install Door Phones

For step-by-step installation of a Door Phone, connecting it to the Door Phone Port of the ETERNITY NE,
connecting Door Lock release device, refer the topic “Connecting Door Phone”.

How to configure
For the Door Phone feature to work,

• Configure the related set of “Door Phone” parameters in “Basic Settings”.

• Allow 'Door Phone Settings' in the '“Class of Service (COS)” of extensions defined as the landing
destination for Door Phone calls. By default, it is enabled on all extension types, SLT, DKP and SIP
extensions.

• If a Door Lock is installed in conjunction with the Door Phone, enable the feature 'DOP Turn ON/OFF' in
the “Class of Service (COS)” of extension that are to be allowed to open the Door Lock. By default, it is
enabled on all extension types, SLT, DKP and SIP extensions.

How to use
To select a Call Routing Mode55:

Users world wide:

• Dial 1171-Access Code of the Door Phone-1 for Scheduled.
• Dial 1171-Access Code of the Door Phone-2 for At Wish.

Users in the Philippines:

55. Manually by the user of the extension configured as the landing destination for the Door Phone calls.

590 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dial 1101-Access Code of the Door Phone-1 for Scheduled.
• Dial 1101-Access Code of the Door Phone-2 for At Wish.

To select a Call Routing Destination for At Wish Mode:

Users worldwide:
• Dial 1172-Access Code of the Door Phone-1 to route calls to an extension.
• Dial 1172-Access Code of the Door Phone-2 to route calls to an external number.

Users in the Philippines:

• Dial 1102-Access Code of the Door Phone-1 to route calls to an extension.
• Dial 1102-Access Code of the Door Phone-2 to route calls to an external number.

To open the Door Lock:

Users worldwide:
• Put the Door Phone call on Hold.
• Dial 1173

Users in the Philippines:

• Put the Door Phone call on Hold
• Dial 1103

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 591

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dynamic Lock

What's this?
Dynamic Lock allows extension users to change the Toll Control Levels (Calling Permissions) of their extensions on
their own by dialing a code.

The System Administrator/Operator can also change the Toll Control Levels of extensions using Dynamic Lock.

With this feature, extension users can prevent misuse of outgoing call facility from their extensions, especially in
their absence.

There are four types of Toll Control Levels, starting from Level 0 to Level 3 that can be set for extension phones.

For each Toll Control Level from 0 to 3, a 'Call Privilege’56 is to be assigned and corresponding number strings to
be allowed and number strings to be denied for each Call Privilege are to be configured.

• Toll Control - Level 0 is Time Zone based, wherein the Call Privilege Type must be defined for the Day
(working hours) and the Night (non-working hours). For instance, you may define 'All Calls' as Call
Privilege for the Day, and 'No Calls' as Call Privilege for the Night.

By default, Call Privilege 'All Calls' is selected for the Day and Night.

• Toll Control - Level 1 is not based on Time Zones. By default, the Call Privilege Type for this level is
'Local Calls'.

• Toll Control - Level 2 is not based on Time Zones. By default, the Call Privilege type set for this level is
'National Calls'.

• Toll Control - Level 3 is not based on Time Zones. By default, Call Privilege 'No Calls' is selected for this
level.

The Call Privilege for each of the above Toll Control Levels can be redefined according to user
requirements.

For example, Toll Control Level 3 can be redefined for allowing all types of calls by selecting 'All Calls' as
Call Privilege Type for Calls allowed for Lock Level 3. Similarly, you can configure Level 0 to allow Local
Calls and configure the Local Number strings in the list of Local Numbers.

Refer the feature description for “Toll Control” to know more.

Extension users who are allowed the Dynamic Lock feature in their Class of Service, can set the Toll
Control Level in two ways:

• Manually: the extension users change the Toll Control Level of the extension whenever they wants by
dialing the feature access code.

For example, an extension user having Toll Control Level 2 (default: National calls) can restrict long
distance dialing on the extension by setting the Toll Control Level to 1 (default: Local calls) before

56. The Call Privilege types are: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National Calls, Limited Calls, All Calls.

592 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 leaving the workplace. On return, the user can restore the previous Toll Control Level, by setting it back
to Level 2.

Thus the extension user sets Dynamic Lock s/he manually selects the desired Toll Control Level for
his/her extension and restores the original Toll Control Level assigned to the extension.

• Automatically: the extension user changes the Toll Control Level of the extension using the Dynamic
Lock Timer. The user sets the Timer to the desired number of minutes. On the expiry of this Timer, the
system restores the original Toll Control Level assigned to the extension.

For example, an organization has defined Toll Control Level 0 as Local Calls, and Level 3 as All Calls.
An extension user of this organization is assigned Level 0. When this extension user wants to make
international calls, the user sets the Dynamic Lock Timer and selects Toll Control Level 3. At the end of
the timer, Level 3 gets locked and Toll Control Level 0 is reapplied on the extension phone.

• The changing of Toll Control level requires the extension user to dial the four-digit User Password. The
system will not accept the default User Password (1111). The extension user must first change the
default User Password.

• The Dynamic Lock Timer can be set to a maximum of 99 minutes.

• The Dynamic Lock Timer must be set to '00' when using Manual Dynamic Lock.

How it works

The Pre-requisites
• The Calls allowed for Lock Levels 0 (allowed for Day and Night), Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 are
configured in the Toll Control applied on the extension.

• Dynamic Lock is allowed to the extension in its Class of Service.

The Process

For Dynamic Lock - Manual

• The user of extension A sets the Dynamic Lock manually by entering the User Password and selecting the
desired Toll Control Level.

OR

• The Operator sets Dynamic Lock manually for an extension by entering the extension number and
selecting the Toll Control Level.

For Dynamic Lock - Automatic

• The user of extension A sets the Dynamic Lock by entering the User Password, selecting the desired Toll
Control Level, and setting the Dynamic Lock Timer.

OR

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 593

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The Operator sets Dynamic Lock for an extension by entering the extension number, selecting the Toll
Control Level, and setting the Dynamic Lock Timer.

• Now, whenever a call is made from extension A, the system checks the Toll Control Level assigned to the
extension.

• The system then checks the associated Lists of allowed and denied numbers.

• If the Toll Control Level is 0, then Toll control is time zone based, i.e. Day and Night. The outgoing call
is allowed/denied as per the Call Privilege and the corresponding Allowed and Denied Number List
programmed for that time of the day by the System Engineer.

• If the Toll Control Level is 1, 2, 3 the outgoing call is allowed/denied as per the Call Privilege and the
corresponding number list programmed for each level.

• If Dynamic Lock - Automatic has been set by user/Operator, the system waits for the duration of the
Dynamic Lock Timer set for the extension. At the end of each outgoing call made during the period of this
Timer, the system will restart the Timer again. The system will change the Toll Control back to the pervious
Level when no outgoing call is made till the expiry of this Timer.

• If Dynamic Lock - Automatic has been set by user/Operator, and an internal call is made during the period
of the Dynamic Lock Timer, the system will check for the 'Decrement Dynamic Lock Timer for Internal
Calls' feature in the Class of Service of allowed to the extension.

If this feature is enabled, the system will start the decrement of the Dynamic Lock Timer. The system will
change the Toll Control back to the previous level on the expiry of this Timer. However, if the 'Decrement
Dynamic Lock Timer' feature is disabled in the Class of Service, the system will reset the Toll Control as
described in the previous step.

• If Dynamic Lock - Manual has been set, the extension user/Operator must set the Toll Control Level back
to the previous Level.

Feature Interactions
• Redial and Auto Redial: The system will check for Toll Control Level when an extension, on which
Dynamic Lock is set, attempts Redial or Auto Redial.

• Emergency Number Dialing: All extensions will be able to dial Emergency numbers always, regardless
of the Toll Control set on them.

ETERNITY NE provides for a separate configuration of Emergency Numbers, which remain unaffected by
Dynamic Lock set on the phones. Refer the topic “Emergency Dialing” to know more about this feature.

How to configure
For this feature to work, it must be enabled in the Class of Service of the extensions; Toll Control Level must be
configured on the extension.

By default, Dynamic Lock enabled on all extension types during the Day and the Night. So, all extensions of
ETERNITY NE can set Dynamic Lock.

The 'Dynamic Lock Timer' is disabled in the Class of Service of all extension types.

594 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To allow the extension to use Automatic Dynamic Lock, you must enable this timer in the Class of Service. See
“Class of Service (COS)” for instructions.

To configure Toll Control Levels on the extension, refer the topic “Toll Control” for instructions.

How to use
Extension users can set Dynamic Lock—Manual and Automatic—by themselves or have it set by the Operator or
any other extension user for their extension.

The extension user/Operator must first change the Dynamic Lock Level and set the Dynamic Lock Timer.

To set Dynamic Lock-Manual, the extension user/Operation must set the Dynamic Lock Timer to 00.

• When the Dynamic Lock-Manual is set (Timer set to 00), the extension user/Operator must dial the
feature access code to restore the previous Toll Control Level.

• When Dynamic Lock-Automatic is set (Timer set to desired number of minutes), the system will restore
the previous Toll Control Level at the end of the Timer.

The extension users must change the default User Password to be able to set the Dynamic Lock on their extension.
Refer the topic “User Password” for instructions on changing the password.

Changing Dynamic Lock by Extension Users

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set Dynamic Lock Level:

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 595

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Press DSS Key assigned to Dynamic Lock.

OR

• Dial 141.

OR

• Enter Phone Menu by pressing 'Enter' key.

• You get the prompt: <Enter User Password>.
• Enter your User Password.
• Select the desired Toll Control Level:

• Toll Control Level 0

• Toll Control Level 1
• Toll Control Level 2
• Toll Control Level 3

• Press Enter key.

• You get the text message 'OK!' and a confirmation tone.
Change your User Password first, before you use this feature. If you are still working with the default User
Password, the system will prompt you to 'Change User Password' when you attempt to set Dynamic Lock.

To set Dynamic Lock-Manual:

• Press DSS Key assigned to Dynamic Lock.

OR

• Dial 142.

OR

• Enter Phone Menu by pressing 'Enter' key.

• You get the prompt <Enter User Password>
• Enter your User Password.
• You get the prompt: <Lock Timer = XX Minutes>.
• Enter 00
• You get the Text message <Lock Timer = 00 Minutes> and confirmation tone.

To set Dynamic Lock-Automatic:

• Press DSS Key assigned to Dynamic Lock.

OR

• Dial 142.

OR

• Enter Phone Menu by pressing 'Enter' key.

• You get the prompt <Enter User Password>

596 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Enter your User Password.
• You get the prompt: <Lock Timer = XX Minutes>.
• Enter the desired number of minutes (max. 99 minutes).
• You get the Text message <Lock Timer = xx Minutes> and confirmation tone.

For SLT Users

To set Dynamic Lock Level:

• Lift the handset.

• Dial 141-User Password-Toll Control Level.
• Dial 0 Level 0.
• Dial 1 for Level 1.
• Dial 2 for Level 2.
• Dial 3 Level 3.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

To set Dynamic Lock-Manual:

• Lift the handset.

• Dial 142-User Password-00.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

To set Dynamic Lock-Automatic:

• Lift the handset.

• Dial 142-User Password-Minutes (max. 99 minutes)
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

Changing Toll Control Level for an Extension

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set Dynamic Lock Level:

• Press DSS key assigned to Dynamic Lock.

OR

• Dial 1072-00257.

OR

• Enter Phone Menu.

• Enter the Extension Number for which you want to set Dynamic Lock.
• Select the option 'Change Toll Ctrl. Level'

57. The feature 'SA Extension' must be enabled in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the extension from which this code is being dialed.
If the feature ‘SA Mode’ is enabled in the Class of Service of this extension, the extension user will be prompted for the SA pass-
word.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 597

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Press Enter key.
• Scroll to select the desired Toll Control Level:
• Toll Control Level 0
• Toll Control Level 1
• Toll Control Level 2
• Toll Control Level 3

• Press 'Enter' key.

• You get confirmation message and tone.

To set Dynamic Lock-Manual:

• Press DSS key assigned to Dynamic Lock.

OR

• Dial 1072-002.

OR

• Enter Phone Menu.

• Enter the extension number for which you want to set Dynamic Lock.
• Select the option 'Change Lock Timer'.
• You get the following prompt: 'XX Minutes'.
• Enter 00
• You get the text message <Lock Timer = 00 Minutes> and confirmation tone.

To set Dynamic Lock-Automatic:

• Press DSS key assigned to Dynamic Lock.

OR

• Dial 1072-002.

OR

• Enter Phone Menu.

• You get a text message 'Enter Room/Phone Number'.
• Enter the extension number for which you want to set Dynamic Lock.
• Select the option 'Change Lock Timer'.
• You get the following prompt: 'XX Minutes'.
• Enter the desired number of minutes (max. 99)
• You get the text message <Lock Timer = xx Minutes> and confirmation tone.

For SLT Users

To change Dynamic Lock Level:

• Pick up the handset.

• Dial 1072-002, you get feature tone.
• Dial Extension Number, you get feature tone.
• Dial 1, the code for 'Change Toll Control Level'.
• Dial 0 for Level 0

598 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dial 1 for Level 1
• Dial 2 for Level 2
• Dial 3 for Level 3
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the Handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.

To set Dynamic Lock-Manual:

• Pick up the handset.

• Dial 1072-002, you get feature tone.
• Dial Extension Number, you get feature tone.
• Dial 2, the code for 'Change Lock Timer'.
• Dial 00.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the Handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.

To set Dynamic Lock-Automatic:

• Pick up the handset.

• Dial 1072-002, you get feature tone.
• Dial Extension Number, you get feature tone.
• Dial 2, the code for 'Change Lock Timer'.
• Dial the number of Minutes you want to set the Timer.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the Handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 599

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emergency Detection and Reporting

What’s this?
When an emergency call is made from an extension, the system dials out the number using any of the free trunks
selected for routing Emergency Numbers. Since the number is dialed out by the PBX, the Emergency Service that
attends to the call will be able to locate the PBX, but not the extension that made the call.

Similarly, the Operator too has no way of knowing which of the extensions made the call, thus, making it difficult to
quickly reach and provide help to the extension that made the emergency call.

With the Emergency Detection and Reporting feature, the Operator can know from which extension the emergency
call is being made. Whenever an Emergency call is made by an extension user, the system detects and reports it to
the Operator extension.

How it works
When an extension of ETERNITY NE makes an emergency call,

• the system hunts for the outgoing trunks selected for routing emergency numbers, and dials out the
number from a free trunk.

• simultaneously, the system informs the Operator by ringing on the Operator extension(s) for the duration of
the Alarm Ring Timer (configurable; default: 45 seconds).

• If Operator is a DKP or Extended IP Phone, it will ring continuously, and an emergency message will be
displayed on the LCD.

Mon 20 JAN 10:38

303 Re cepti on 2
203 Emer gency

The emergency message shows the number of the extension which has made the emergency call, in this
case, extension 203.

600 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
To be able to use this feature, the Emergency Dialing Reporting flag must be enabled in the “System
Parameters”. By default, this flag is enabled.

Also see the topics “Emergency Dialing” and “Emergency Numbers”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 601

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emergency Dialing

What's this?
The ETERNITY NE supports dialing of Emergency number immediately without any blocking.

When an extension user dials an Emergency number, the system will hunt for a free trunk from the outgoing trunks
selected for the emergency number. See “Emergency Numbers”.

The system will not apply any of the following on the extension dialing the Emergency number:
• Toll Control (Allowed Denied Numbers, Dynamic Lock)
• Call Budget (even when call budget is consumed)
• Call Duration Control
• Automatic Number Translation

The system will allow the extension to dial the Emergency number even in the following conditions:
• the extension is in Off-Hook state.
• the extension is in Standby Mode.
• the extension has grabbed the trunk line (using Trunk access code or selective access)
• the call state is in any state: Busy, Error, Confirmation.
• SIM card is not present in the Mobile port.
• Mobile port is not registered with the network.
• SIM PIN is not valid.
• the keypad of the extension phone is locked.

Emergency Number will always be out dialed through the outgoing trunks you selected for dialing these numbers,
except when you have grabbed a trunk using Selective trunk access code/Selective Trunk Access DSS key. In
which case, the number will be dialed only from the trunk you have grabbed.

Emergency Number will not be out dialed in the following cases:

• If the trunk port from which number is to be routed (CO, Mobile, SIP) is disabled.
• If the hardware related to dialing of Emergency number is not present.
• If the Emergency number is dialed from the SE Programming mode.


Emergency dialing will not work if Mains Power to the ETERNITY NE fails.

How to configure
The Emergency numbers are fixed as per the Region where ETERNITY NE is installed. See the topic “Emergency
Numbers” under Basic Settings for instructions on configuring Emergency Numbers.

How to use
To dial an Emergency number,

• Go Off-Hook
• Dial the Emergency Number
OR

602 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dial Trunk Access Code-Emergency Number

For example:
Dial 0-112

• Wherever the Trunk Access Code conflicts with the Emergency Number, the emergency number
should be dialed after dialing the Trunk Access Code.

• Let us take the example of Australia, where the emergency number is 000 and the trunk access code is
0. Now, when an extension user of ETERNITY located in Australia dials ‘0’ of the emergency number,
the system will consider it as trunk access code and will apply the trunk access code logic.

• Therefore, in such cases, the extension user must first dial the Trunk Access Code and then the
Emergency Number. In this case, the extension user must dial 0-000 for emergency number dialing, so
that the system will not wait for the Conflict Timer to apply the Trunk access code logic.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 603

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Flashing on Trunks

What’s this?
Public exchanges support features like call waiting, call forward, etc. To be able to use these features, users need
to dial certain codes during speech. 

When a PBX is connected between the user and the central office, the codes for dialing the features of the central
office may clash with the codes for accessing the features of the PBX, making it difficult for users to access the
features of the central office while in speech.

To overcome this, ETERNITY NE supports Flashing on Trunks, which informs the system of the dialing of codes on
trunks by extension users.

How to configure
To be able to use this feature, Flashing on Trunks must be allowed to the extension in its “Class of Service (COS)”.
For instructions see “SLT Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”, “SIP Extensions” under Basic Settings.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

When in speech on a trunk,

• Press the DSS Key assigned to Flashing on Trunks.

OR
Press Hold key.
• Dial *
• Dial the PSTN Code.

For SLT Users

When in speech on a trunk,

• Press Flash
• Dial *.
• Dial PSTN Code.

604 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Follow Me

What’s this?
Using this feature, you can make your calls follow you wherever you go. You can receive your calls on another
extension, whenever you want.

How it works
• A’s extension number is 201.
• B’s extension number is 203.
• A is currently at B’s extension.
• A wants to receive calls from extension 201 on extension 203.
• A sets Call Follow Me on extension 203.
• All calls landing on A’s extension 201 will be forwarded to extension 203.
• When A returns to extension 201, A cancels Call Follow Me.

• The extensions dial tone changes to feature tone if its calls are forwarded.

• Multiple users can use ‘Follow Me’ from the same extension.

• Follow Me can be overwritten. Extension A sets Follow-Me on extension B. After a period of time; goes
to extension C. A can receive calls on extension C by setting Follow Me on extension C. Follow Me set
by A on extension B will be cancelled.

• Follow Me cannot be chained. If extension A sets Follow Me to extension B. And extension B sets
Follow Me on extension C, Follow Me of extension A is automatically cancelled.

• DND is given priority over Call Follow Me feature.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 605

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
To be able to use Follow Me, extension users must have Call Forward feature enabled in their “Class of Service
(COS)” for the Day and Night time, as required. See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring the different
extension port types. “Class of Service (COS)”

How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set Follow Me from another extension,

• Press Forward key of the other extension.

OR
Dial 135.
• Enter your extension number.
• Enter your user password.

To cancel Follow me, from your extension,

• Press Forward key of your extension phone.

• Select ‘Cancel’
OR
Dial 130.

For SLT Users

To set follow me from another extension,

• Lift the handset of the other extension.

• Dial 135
• Dial your extension number.
• Dial your user password.
• Replace handset.

606 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To cancel Follow me,

• Lift the handset of your extension.

• Dial 130
• Replace handset.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 607

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Forced Answer

What’s this?
Extension users can force other extension users to answer their calls when there is no response from the called
extensions.

How it works
Forced Answer can be requested from an SLT, a DKP and from the Extended IP Phone (calling extension).
However, the called extension (being forced to answer) must be either a DKP or an Extended IP Phone.

• Extension A (SLT) calls extension B (DKP).

• B’s extension phone is ringing, but B does not answer.
• A dials Forced Answer feature code.
• B’s extension phone’s speaker goes OFF-Hook.
• A may now talk to B.


Forced Answer can be used when the called extension is busy, but has free call loops (call appearances)
for calls to land. For example:
• Extension A (SLT) calls extension B (DKP).
• B is in speech with extension C, but there is a call appearance free on B’s DKP.
• Since B’s DKP has a free call appearance, A’s call lands on B.
• B’s extension starts ringing.
• A dials Forced Answer code during ring back tone.
• Extension C is put on hold.
• A is in speech with B.
• A may now talk to B.
• When A disconnects the call, B is now in speech with C.

How to configure
To be able to use Forced Answer, extension users must have this feature enabled in their “Class of Service (COS)”
for the Day and Night time, as required. See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring the different extension
port types.

608 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To use forced answer on an extension:

• Dial the desired extension number.
• Press the DSS Key assigned to Forced Answer on Ring Back tone.
OR
Dial 5 on Ring Back Tone.
• The Ring Back Tone stops.
• The called extension’s speaker goes OFF-Hook and the speaker key LED glows.
• You are in speech with the called party.
• You may talk.

For SLT Users

To use forced answer on an extension:

• Dial the desired extension number.

• Dial 5 on Busy tone.
• The Ring Back Tone stops.
• The called extension’s speaker goes OFF-Hook and the speaker key LED glows.
• You are in speech with the called party.
• You may talk.

You can also dial ‘5’, the feature code for Forced Answer, immediately after dialing the desired extension
number, instead of dialing it during Ring Back Tone. This way, you can talk to the desired extension user
without waiting for the called extension user to answer your call.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 609

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Forced Call Disconnection

What’s this?
Forced Call Disconnection enables extension users to disconnect a busy extension or a trunk at will, and free the
system resources (access to extension and trunk) for themselves.

How it works
Forced Call Disconnection of an Extension:
• A, B and C are extensions.
• A and B are in speech.
• C calls B and finds it busy.
• C uses Forced Call Disconnection by dialing the feature command.
• C gets confirmation tone, while A and B get error tone.

Forced Call Disconnection of a Trunk:

• A and B are extensions. C is the external party.
• A is in speech with C on Trunk 1.
• B tries to grab Trunk 1 and gets busy tone.
• B uses Forced Call Disconnection by dialing the feature command.
• B gets confirmation tone. A gets disconnected and gets error tone.
• B must grab Trunk 1 again to get the dial tone of the network.

To be able to use Forced Call Disconnection, the extension user must have a higher “Priority” than the
extension user whom he/she tries to forcibly disconnect.

You are advised to restrict access to this feature only to important extension users. Extension Users who
are allowed this feature are advised to use it judiciously.

610 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
To be able to use Forced Call Disconnection, extension users must have

• Forced Release feature enabled in their “Class of Service (COS)” for the Day and Night time, as required.

• Higher “Priority” assigned than other extensions.

See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring the different extension port types.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 611

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To forcibly disconnect a busy extension/trunk:

• Press the DSS Key assigned to Forced Call Disconnection on Busy tone.

OR

Dial #* on Busy tone.

• You get confirmation tone.
• You may now dial the extension number/grab the trunk.

For SLT Users

To forcibly disconnect a busy extension/trunk:

• Dial #* on Busy tone.

• You get confirmation tone.
• You may now dial the extension number/grab the trunk.

612 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Help Desk

What’s this?
An organization may have a Centralised Information Office which provides information related to different
departments such as HR, IT, or General information. For each department in the organization, an extension number
can be defined as a Help Desk.

How it works

• Extension 202 is defined as Help Desk for HR policies and general rules.
• Extension 216 calls the Help Desk extension 202.
• If the Help Desk extension is busy, an Auto Callback request is set automatically on the Help Desk
extension.
• As soon as the Help Desk extension is free, the system will serve the auto callback request.
• The Help Desk extension calls back extension 216.

Also see “Auto Call Back (ACB)”

How to configure
To enable Help Desk feature on any extension,

• Click Basic Settings.

• Click the link of the desired extension port type: SLT, DKP, SIP to which you want apply this feature.

• Select the extension number to which you want to apply this feature, by clicking the tab.
The selected extension tab opens.

• Click the More button to view all parameters on this page.

• Click the More...link on the extension page.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 613

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Scroll to Help Desk.

• Select the Assign Help Desk function to this Extension check box.
The selected extension will be designated as Help Desk.

• Click Submit.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

614 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hot Desking

What’s this?
Hot Desking enables extension users to use all the properties of their own extension from another extension.

Hot Desking is useful for people who are often away from their own desks and must work from another. Hot
Desking allows them to use all the features and facilities of their own extension from another.

How it works
This feature is supported on DKP and SLT extensions only.

Hot Desking is possible only between SLT-SLT and DKP-DP extensions.

The User Password of both extensions involved in Hot Desking must not be 1111.

Hot Desking can be performed only when both the extensions are idle.

To perform Hot Desking two extensions are required:

• The Host Extension - the extension whose user performs the Hot Desking.
• The Hot Desk Extension - the extension on which Hot Desking is performed.

• When Hot Desk is performed from the Hot Desking extension, all the properties of the Host Extension are
copied to the Hot Desk Extension.

• On the Host Extension, the user cannot perform any activity except Cancel Hot Desking.

• You must cancel Hot Desk from both the Hot Desk Extension and the Host Extension.

• After cancelling Hot Desk, the Host Extension and the Hot Desk Extension acquire their original properties.

How to configure
For this feature to work, the feature 'Hot Desk' must be enabled in the“Class of Service (COS)” of the Host
Extension and the Hot Desk Extension. By default, this feature is disabled on all extensions, so none of the
extensions can use this feature. To enable this feature in the COS of the extensions, see “SLT Extensions”, “DKP
Extensions”, “SIP Extensions” under “Basic Settings”.

How to use

For EON users

To perform Hot Desk:
• Go to the EON48 extension (Hot Desk Extension) with which you want to swap your EON48 extension
(Host Extension) properties.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Hot Desk.
OR

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 615

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dial 1091
• Enter Host Extension number
• Enter Host Extension User Password
• Go ON-Hook.


The User password of both the extensions involved cannot be default password.

To cancel Hot Desk:

• On the Host Extension, press DSS Key assigned to Hot Desk.

OR
• Dial 1091
• Enter Hot Desk Extension number
• Enter Hot Desk Extension User Password
• Go ON-Hook.

• On the Hot Desk Extension, press DSS Key assigned to Hot Desk.
OR
• Dial 1091
• Enter own extension number (Hot Desk Extension Number)
• Enter own extension User Password
• You get confirmation, Hot Desk cleared
• Go ON-Hook.

For SLT Users

To perform Hot Desk:

• Go to the SLT extension (Hot Desk Extension) with which you want to swap your SLT extension (Host
Extension) properties.
• Lift the handset of the Hot Desk extension.
• Dial 1091
• Dial Host Extension number
• Dial Host Extension User Password
• Replace handset.

To cancel Hot Desk:

• On the Host Extension, dial 1091

• Dial Hot Desk Extension number
• Dial Hot Desk Extension User Password
• Go ON-Hook.

• On the Hot Desk Extension, dial 1091

• Dial own extension number (Hot Desk Extension Number)
• Dial own extension User Password
• You get confirmation, Hot Desk cleared
• Go ON-Hook.

616 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hotline

What’s this?
This features eliminates repeated dialing of numbers from an extension. Hotline can be set for: Internal Extension
Numbers, Department Groups, External Numbers, Outgoing Trunks.

How it works
• Holtine can be set from any SLT, DPK or Extended IP Phone.

• Select the type of Hotline as per your requirement: Internal Extension Numbers, Department Groups,
External Numbers, Outgoing Trunks.

• Configure the Hotline Timer. To provide immediate Hotline, set Hotline Timer to 00 and for Delayed Hotline
configure a value for the Timer as per your requirement.

C, the Sales Manager has to frequently dial the number of the B, Sr. Co-ordinator-Sales. C sets Hotline for
B’s number and also configures the Hotline Timer as 5 seconds.

• C goes OFF-Hook
• ETERNITY NE give dials tone and waits for 5 seconds
• If no digit is dialed within the expiry of this time by A, B’s number will be dialed out automatically.
• B in speech with A.

• To provide immediate Hotline, set Hotline Timer to 00 seconds, then as soon a C goes OFF-Hook, B’s
number will be dialed out.

How to configure
To be able to use Hotline, extension users must have this feature enabled in their “Class of Service (COS)” for the
Day and Night time, as required. See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring the different extension port
types.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 617

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to Use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set Hotline on an Extension / Department Group,

• Press DSS key assigned to Hotline
• Scroll to select ‘Set Hotline Station (extension) / Department’, press enter key
• Enter Extension / Department Group Number
OR
• Dial 151-Extension Number / Department Group Number

To set Hot Outward Dialing (For Trunk),

• Press DSS key assigned to Hotline
• Scroll to select ‘Set Hotline Outgoing Trunk’, press enter key
• Enter TAC
OR
• Dial 152-TAC

To set Hot Outward Dialing with Number,

• Press DSS key assigned to Hotline
• Scroll to select ‘Set Hotline Outgoing Trunk: Ext Num’, press enter key
• Enter TAC
• Enter External Number #*
OR
• Dial 153-TAC-External Number#*

To set Hotline Timer,

• Press DSS key assigned to Hotline
• Scroll to select ‘Set Hotline Timer’, press enter key
• Enter Hotline Timer:000-255 seconds
OR
• Dial 154-seconds (000-255)

To Cancel Hotline / Hot Outward Dialing,

• Press DSS key assigned to Hotline
• Scroll to select ‘Cancel Hotline’, press enter key
OR
• Dial 150

For SLT Users

To set Hotline on an Extension / Department Group,
• Dial 151-Extension Number / Department Group Number

To set Hot Outward Dialing (For Trunk),

• Dial 152-TAC

To set Hot Outward Dialing with Number,

• Dial 153-TAC-External Number#*

618 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To set Hotline Timer,
• Dial 154-seconds (000-255)

To Cancel Hotline / Hot Outward Dialing,

• Dial 150

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 619

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Incoming CLI Modification

What’s this?
For PBX users in countries, where the Calling Line Identification (CLI) received must be suitably modified before it
can be used to dial out the number, ETERNITY offers the feature ‘Incoming CLI Modification’.

The Incoming CLI received with the Country or Area Code, or both. However, the dialing pattern of the public
network may require the received CLI to be prefixed with additional digits, to dial out the same number. Or the
dialing pattern of the public network may require the CLI to be stripped off the prefixed digits to dial out the same
number.

With the feature ‘Incoming CLI Modification’ programmed, the ETERNITY detects whether the incoming CLI is a
local number, a national, or an international number. It modifies the incoming CLI accordingly, by adding or stripping
off the prefixed digits so that the number can be dialed out as per the dialing pattern supported by the public
network.

The modified CLI is presented to the extension phones and is stored in the “Call Logs”, and SMDR (see “Station
Message Detail Recording (SMDR)”). Extension users can call a number in the Call Logs without having to modify
the CLI manually.

How it works
• Incoming CLI Modification parameters must be programmed in the system considering the dialing pattern
supported by the local public network.
• Accordingly, ETERNITY matches the CLI received with the programmed parameters.
• It detects whether it is an international, national or local number.
• It modifies the CLI according as per the Modification parameters programmed.
• It presents the modified CLI to the extension; stores the modified CLI in the SMDR and in the Call Logs of
the extension, provided it is a digital key phone.
• When the received CLI is dialed out by the extension user from Call Log, ETERNITY dials out the same
number.

How to configure
For this feature to work, you must configure Incoming CLI Nomalization in the “System Parameters” of
ETERNITY NE. To do this,

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the System Parameters link to open the page.

• On the System Parameters page, click Incoming CLI Nomalization to expand.

620 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Now, program these parameters:

• Enable Incoming CLI Nomalization: Enable this flag if you want to use the Incoming CLI Modification
feature. By default, this flag is disabled.

If you receive CLI in dialable format, there is no need to use this feature. In such case, keep the flag
disabled. You do not need to program any of the CLI Nomalization parameters.

• Country Code: Enter the Country Code of the country where ETERNITY is installed. The Country Code
helps ETERNITY detect whether the Incoming CLI received is a national or an international number. Do
not enter any prefix for the Country Code. For example, if your ETERNITY is installed in USA, enter only ‘1’
as the Country Code. Do not enter ‘+’ or “00’ as prefix to the country code ‘1’. By default the Country Code
is ‘91’ (India).

• Area Code: Enter the Area Code of the place where the ETERNITY is installed. The Area Code helps
ETERNITY detect whether the Incoming CLI received is a local number. Do not enter any prefix for the
Area Code. For example, if you want to enter Area Code for Mumbai, enter only ‘22’. Do not enter the
prefix ‘0’ to the area code. By default, Area Code is ‘265’ (Vadodara city).

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 621

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • International Prefix: Enter the digits that are required as Prefix for dialing International Numbers. The
prefix may be upto 5 digits, with numbers from 00000 to 99999. By default, ‘00’ is set as the prefix for
dialing International numbers.

• National Prefix: Enter the digits that are required as Prefix for dialing long distance, National (within the
country) numbers. The prefix may be upto 5 digits, with numbers from 00000 to 99999. By default, ‘0’ is set
as prefix for dialing national numbers.

• Area Code required to make local calls?: Depending on the dialing pattern of your local public
telephone network, you may choose from the following options:

• No: select this option if your public telephone network does not require the dialing of Area Code for
local numbers.

• Yes: select this option if your public telephone network requires you to dial the Area Code for local
numbers.

• Yes, with Prefix Digit: select this option if you public telephone network requires you to dial Area Code
with a particular Prefix for local numbers. If you select this option, you must also program the Prefix
digits for the Area Code.

By default, the option, ‘No’ (Area Code not required) is selected.

• Prefix Area Code: If you have enabled Area Code required to make local calls? with Prefix Digit, in
the previous parameter, enter the prefix digits for the area code for local calls in this field.

• Click Submit to save changes.

622 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Interrupt Request (IR)

What’s this?
Interrupt Request allows you to break into an on-going conversation after intimating the extension user about the
interruption.

In case of an urgent trunk call the operator can put the call on hold, interrupt the busy extension user to inform
about the urgent call and then transfer the urgent call.

How it works
• A, B and C are users of the system.

• A and B are talking to each other.

• C calls A.

• C gets busy tone.

• C dials Interrupt Request feature code.

• C gets Ring Back tone (RBT) and A gets beeps indicating him about a new call. If A dials Flash to answer
C’s call before the expiry of the Interrupt Request Timer, A will be in speech with C. B is put on hold and
will get music on hold.

• If A does not dial Flash before expiry of the timer, C’s call will be disconnected.

• After the conversation between C and A is over and C goes on-hook, speech between B and A will be re-
established.

Feature Interactions
• Call States:

• Interrupt Request works only if the dialed extension is busy. The dialed extension may be busy with
another extension or trunk (external number).

• Interrupt Request works only if the user about to be interrupted in is in a two-way normal speech with
another user or external party.

• It will not work if the busy signal is due to the user being OFF-Hook, or in the middle of dialing, or
accessing a feature of the PBX.

• “Call Toggle”: Once A and C comes in speech with each other, A can toggle between B and C using Call
Toggle feature.

• Privacy against Interrupt Request: If the feature 'Privacy against Interrupt Request is enabled for an
extension, it cannot be interrupted.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 623

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • “Priority”: No Interaction with Interrupt Request. If 'A' has lower priority than 'B' but has Interrupt Request
enabled; A can interrupt B.

How to configure
To be able to use Interrupt Request, extension users must have this feature enabled in their “Class of Service
(COS)” for the Day and Night time, as required.

See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring the different extension port types.

Interrupt Request Timer

Interrupt Request Timer is the time for which the extension on which interrupt request is made gets the beeps. By
default the Timer is set to 45 seconds. Default: 045 seconds, Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.

Changing Interrupt Request Timer using Jives

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click Advanced Settings link.

• Click the link System Timers and Counts.

624 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Scroll to reach Other Features and go to the parameter Interrupt Request Timer

• Set the desired value for the Timer.

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save changes.

• Log out of Jeeves or continue, as required.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

When dialed extension is busy,

• Press DSS Key assigned to Interrupt Request

OR
• Dial 3 on Busy Tone

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 625

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Last Caller Recall

What’s this?
ETERNITY offers a facility—Last Caller Recall— to trace the extension that last made the call to your extension.

How it works

• B’s extension number is 201.

• B wants to know who made the last call to extension 201.

• B dials Last Caller Recall feature access code (Default:1092).

• The extension that last called 201 rings.

• When the called extension answers, speech is established between B and the called extension user.

How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
• Lift Handset
• Press DSS Key assigned to Last Caller Recall.
OR
• Go OFF-Hook
• Dial 1092
The system dials out the extension number that last called your extension.

626 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Last Number Redial

What’s this?
This feature redials the last external number string dialed from the extension.

How it works
• Extension A dials the feature access code for ‘Redial’.

• If Extension A is an SLT, the system dials the last external number dialed from Extension A using the same
trunk access code used for dialing that number.

• If Extension A is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone, all external numbers dialed by Extension A are
displayed on the phone’s LCD.

• Extension A may select the number to be dialed out. The system will dial out this number using the same
trunk access code used for dialing this number.

• If Extension A has ‘Dynamic Lock’ set and uses Redial feature, the system will check for Toll Control as
per the Lock Level set for Extension A before dialing out the number.

How to configure
No particular configuration is required for this feature to work. Redial is included in the Basic Features allowed to all
extensions by default in their “Class of Service (COS)”. So, all extensions can use the Redial feature.

How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
• Press Redial Key.
Or
• Dial 7
A List of external numbers last dialed will appear on your phone’s display.
• Scroll to select the desired number.
• Press Enter key.
• The system dials out the external number.

For SLT Users

• Lift Handset
• Dial 7
• The system dials out the external number last dialed from your extension.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 627

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Least Cost Routing (LCR)

Least Cost Routing (also referred to as Automatic Route Selection) is an expense control feature of ETERNITY NE.

Least Cost Routing (LCR) is useful when there are different trunk lines for making outgoing calls, and the service
providers of these trunks offer different tariffs for calls made to certain locations or numbers or during a particular
time of the day.

When a call is made from an extension of the ETERNITY NE, LCR recognizes where the call is going to. It selects
the lowest cost trunk from among all the trunks allotted to that extension to make outgoing calls, depending upon
how the LCR is configured.

The system can be configured to select the most cost effective trunk for the time of the day when the call is made
from the extension, or to select the most cost effective trunk for the destination number dialed from the extension,
or to select the most cost effective trunk considering both time of the day and destination number.

Accordingly, ETERNITY supports four types of LCR, which can be configured:

1. Time-based LCR: This type of LCR may be used when you have trunk lines of more than one service
provider, and each offers a different tariff according to the time of the day.

For example, Service Provider 1 offers a lower tariff for calls made between 9am to 8pm, while Service
Provider 2 offers a lower tariff for calls made between 8pm to 9am.

When Time-based LCR is configured, the system uses the Online-dialing logic, whereby digits dialed by
the user are directly passed on to the trunk.

2. Number-based LCR: This type of LCR may be used when you have trunk lines of more than one service
provider, and each offers different tariffs according to the area or distance, or phone numbers dialed. For
instance, Service Provider 1 provides lower calling rates for calls made from City A to City B, than Service
Provider 2 and Service Provider 3.

3. Time- and Number-based LCR: This type of LCR is a combination of number and time based LCR, i.e.
the service providers offer different tariffs according to the time of the day as well as area/distance.

For example, Service Provider 1 offers lower rates for calls made from City A to City B during peak hours
9am to 8pm, as compared to Service Provider 2, whereas Service Provider 2 offers lower rates for calls
made from City A to City B during off peak hours (8pm to 9 am).

When Time+Number-based LCR is configured, the system uses Store and Forward dialing logic, whereby
digits dialed by the user are first stored at a memory location in the system, and then dialed out on the
lowest cost trunk.

4. Service Provider-based LCR: This type of LCR may be used when the same Service Providers offer
different rates for calls made to numbers within their own network and for calls made to numbers of
another Service Provider's network. For example, Service Provider 1 offers lower rates to call a Service
Provider1 number in City A and in City B, than for calling numbers of Service Provider 2 in the same cities.

This type of LCR may also be used when the same Service Providers apply different charges for different
subscriber services provided by them. For example, Service Provider 1 offers both Fixed Line as well as
Mobile services and applies different charges for fixed line and Mobile services.

628 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When Service Provider-based LCR is configured, whenever a number is dialed out, the system ignores the
area code, checks the number in the 'Service Provider-based LCR table', and routes the call according to
the lowest cost trunk configured for that number.

ETERNITY also supports LCR based on Carrier Pre-Selection. This type of LCR is useful where there exist
different service providers for local and long distance calls. Refer the topic “Least Cost Routing - Carrier
Pre-Selection” to know more.

Cost Factor
For LCR to work, all trunks that are allotted to extensions for making outgoing calls, must first be assigned a Cost
Factor, starting from 01 to 10.

By default all trunks are assigned Cost Factor number 01.

After assigning Cost Factor to Trunks, you must configure the Type of LCR to be used on CO, Mobile and SIP
Trunks.

Assigning Cost Factor to Trunks

• On a sheet of paper, make a list of all the trunks assigned to extensions for making outgoing calls.

• Make a table of the trunk types and assign a cost factor to each trunk type, as shown below.

Trunk Type and Number Service Provider Cost Factor

CO1 BSNL 01

CO2 BSNL 02

Mobile 1 Reliance 03

Mobile 2 BSNL 04

SIP 1 Pulver.com 05

SIP 2 VoipTalk.com 06

• Configure the Cost Factor number you assigned to the Trunk types in their respective trunk parameters.

• For instance, assign Cost Factor 01 to CO1 and Cost Factor 02 to CO2. Similarly, assign Cost Factor 03
to Mobile Trunk 1, Cost factor 04 to Mobile Trunk 2, Cost Factor 05 to SIP trunk 1.

• For configuration instructions, refer the topics “CO Trunks”, “Mobile Trunks” and “SIP Trunks”.

Configuring Time-based LCR

• You can configure Time-based LCR for as many as 8 different Time Zones.

• On a sheet of paper, make a table for Time-based LCR.

• Define the Time Zone, i.e. the start and end time, when the LCR should be applied for the outgoing calls.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 629

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • For each Time Zone that you define, select the Trunk with the lowest cost as your first preference, i.e.
Preference 1. Select the trunk of your second, third and fourth preference (in order of increasing cost.
When the trunk you selected as first preference is busy, the system will route the call through the next
trunk you have set that is free.

• Refer to the table you prepared for assigning Cost Factor to trunks.

• For example, you want calls made during 9am to 8pm to be routed through BSNL trunks (CO1 and CO2).
If these trunks are busy, you want the system to route calls through the BSNL mobile trunk. When this line
is busy, you want the system to attempt to route calls through the line of Reliance.

• You want calls made between 8pm to 9am to be routed through BSNL CO1 trunk only.

• At Time Zone Index 1, define the Time Zone start and end time in 24 Hours:Minutes format, enter the Cost
Factor you assigned to CO1 (01) and CO2 (02) as Preference 1 and Preference 2 respectively. Enter the
cost factor you assigned to and as Preference 3 and Preference 4 respectively.

Time Zone Cost Factor

Time Zone
Index Start Time End Time Preference Preference Preference Preference
(HH:MM) (HH:MM) 1 2 3 4

1 09:00 20:00 01 02 04 03

2 20:01 08:59 01 01 01 01

• Similarly, at Time Zone Index 2, define the Time Zone in 24 Hours:Minutes format. Enter the Cost factor
you assigned to CO1, i.e. 01 as Preference 1, 2, 3, and 4. When calls are made during this time period,
they will be routed through CO1 only.

• If you have finished defining Time Zones and the preferred trunks for the time zones, configure the Time-
based LCR using Jeeves.

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the Least Cost Routing (LCR) link.

630 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Time-based sub-link to open the page.

• Enter the values of the Time-based LCR you prepared on the sheet of paper in the appropriate fields.

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save your settings.

• Log out of Jeeves or continue with configuration tasks, as required.

Configuring Number-based LCR

• You can configure Number-based LCR for as many as 99 different Numbers, which are stored against
Index numbers from 01 to 99.

• On a sheet of paper, make a table for Number-based LCR.

• Enter each of the number strings at an Index number from 01 to 99. A Number string may be a complete
telephone number, a truncated phone number or an area code.

• For each number string you enter, select the Trunk with the lowest cost as your first preference, i.e.
Preference 1. Select the trunk of your second, third and fourth preference (in order of increasing cost.
When the trunk you selected as first preference is busy, the system will route the call through the next
trunk you have set that is free.

• Refer to the table you prepared for assigning Cost Factor to trunks.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 631

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For example, you want all mobile numbers to be routed through the Mobile Trunk ports, all local numbers
to be routed through the CO Trunk ports.

All mobile numbers start with the number '9', which is prefixed with a '0' when making long distance mobile
calls, so enter '9' and '09' as the number strings. For '9' as well as '09', select the Mobile trunk(s) through
which the calls should be made in order of preference.

Similarly, all local numbers start with 2, so enter this number in the number string column, and select the
CO trunk in the order of preference. As in this example, you have only two CO trunks, so you may keep the
same two trunks as your preference.

Cost Factor
Index Number
Preference 1 Preference 2 Preference 3 Preference 4

1 9 04 03 01 02

2 09 04 04 03 03

3 2 01 02 01 02

99

• If you have finished entering the number strings, and selecting the preferred trunks for the numbers,
configure the Number-based LCR using Jeeves.

Configuring Number-based LCR using Jeeves

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the Least Cost Routing (LCR) link.

632 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Number-based sub-link to open the page.

• Enter the values of the Number-based LCR you prepared on the sheet of paper in the appropriate fields.

• Click Submit to save your settings.

Configuring Time and Number-based LCR

• This is a combination of the Time Zone-based and Number-based LCR. You may use this feature if your
service providers offer lower call rates for calls made to certain numbers during a certain time of the day.

• On a sheet of paper, make a table for Time and Number-based LCR.

• Define the Time Zone(s) when the service providers offer lower tariff. You can define up to 8 time zones.

• For each Time Zone you define, specify the Number strings on which lower tariff is applied during that
Time Zone.

• For each Number string you enter for a particular time zone, assign Cost Factor. Select the trunk with the
lowest cost as your first preference. Select trunks of your second, third and fourth preference (in order of
increasing cost). Refer to the table you prepared for assigning Cost Factor.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 633

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • You can enter upto to 99 different number strings, which are stored at Index numbers from 01 to 99. The
Number strings may be complete telephone numbers, truncated phone numbers or area codes.

When the trunk you selected as first preference is busy, the system will route the call through the next
trunk you set as preference if it is free.

For example, service provider of CO1 and CO2 (assigned Cost Factor 01 and 02) offers the lowest rate for
calls made to Area Code 022 between 8am to 12pm, followed by service providers of Mobile Trunk 2
(assigned cost factor 04) and Mobile Trunk 1 (assigned cost factor 03).

• Define Time Zone 1 Start and End time as 08 to 12:00 hours

• Enter area code 022 as Number string at Number Index 1

• Assign Cost Factor preference for the number string in this sequence: 01, 02, 04, 03

Number Index

Time Start and 1 2 3 4 : 99

zone End Time
Number Number Number Number Number Number
Index (HH:MM)
String (CF String (CF String (CF String (CF String (CF String (CF
Preference) Preference) Preference) Preference) Preference) Preference)

08:00 to 022 (01, 011 (01, 02, 080 (01,

1 : :
12:00 02, 04, 03) 04, 05) 02, 05, 06)

12:00 to 022 (04,

2
18:00 03, 02, 01)

09:00 to 022 (03, 080 (03,

3
20:00 05, 06, 04) 05, 06, 04)

• If you have finished defining the time zones, entering the number strings, and selecting the preferred
trunks for the number strings, configure the Number and Time-based LCR using Jeeves or a Telephone.

Configuring Time+Number-based LCR using Jeeves

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the Least Cost Routing (LCR) link.

634 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the link Time+Number-based link to open the page.

• Enter the values of the Time+Number-based LCR you prepared on the sheet of paper in the appropriate
fields.

• Click Submit to save your settings.

• You may log out or continue.

Configuring Service Provider-based LCR

• In Service Provider-based LCR, whenever a number is dialed out, the system ignores the area code, and
starts checking the numbers in the 'Service Provider-based LCR table' and routes the call according to the
lowest cost trunk configured for that number. For this, you must configure the two parameters Area Code
and Ignore Digit Count in the Area Code Table.

• On a sheet of paper make a table for Service Provider-based LCR.

Index Area Ignore Cost Factor

Number
No. Code Digit Count Preference 1 Preference 2 Preference 3 Preference 4

01 3 080 3 05 06 01 02

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 635

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Ignore Cost Factor
Number
No. Code Digit Count Preference 1 Preference 2 Preference 3 Preference 4

02 6 022 3 01 01 02 04

: : :

99 2 03852 5 01 02 01 02

• As you can see, the Service Provider-based LCR Table is similar to the Number-based LCR table.

• You can configure as many as 99 different numbers which are stored against Index numbers from 01 to
10.

• The number strings may be the complete telephone number, a truncated phone number or the first digit of
the phone number.

• For each number string that you enter against an Index number, you must also specify the Area Code and
the Ignore Digit Count.

• The Ignore Digit Count is the number of digits in the area code that the system should ignore before
checking the Service Provider-based LCR table. For each area code that you enter, the corresponding
Ignore Digit Count will be the number of digits in the area code. For example, the area code for the number
starting with '3' is 080, which consists of 3 digits. So, the Ignore Digit Count for the number/area code 080
will be 3.

• For each number string and area code that you enter, assign the Trunk of the service provider who offers
the lowest tariff to that number/area code. Refer the table you prepared for assigning Cost Factor to trunks.

• If you have finished entering the number strings, their corresponding area codes and the Ignore Digit
Count, and the preferred trunks, configure Service Provider-based LCR using Jeeves.

Configuring Service Provider-based LCR using Jeeves

• Open Jeeves.

Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• To configure Area Code and Ignore Digit Count, click the link Call Cost Calculation.

636 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Area Code Table link to open the page.

Each area code is stored at an index number.

• Enter the Area Codes and the corresponding Ignore Digit Counts from the sheet you prepared for Service
Provider based-LCR. You may also enter the respective name for each area code, if desired.

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save your changes.

• Now, click the link Least Cost Routing (LCR). The LCR options will appear below this link.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 637

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Service Provider Based link to open the page.

• Enter the values of the Service Provider-based LCR you prepared on the sheet of paper in the appropriate
fields.

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save your settings.

Configuring LCR Type on Trunks

After assigning Cost Factor to Trunks and configuring the LCR Type - Time-based, Number-based, Time and
Number-based, Service Provider-based - you must now apply the desired LCR Type on the Outgoing Trunks
selected for the extension types: SLT, DKP, SIP.

• Under “Basic Settings”, open the link to the Extension type:

• “SLT Extensions”
• “DKP Extensions”
• “SIP Extensions”

• Select the desired Extension number, for example SLT 201.

638 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Configure the option Select Trunks for Outgoing Calls for the Extensions.

• For the trunks you selected for Dialing the Trunk Access Codes 0, 61, 62, 63 and 64, select the desired
LCR Type from the combo box: Time-based, Number-based, Time+Number based, Service Provider-
based (Cost Factor).

Since you have already configured the LCR Type, you do not need to configure the LCR settings further on
this page.

• Click Submit to save your settings.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 639

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Least Cost Routing - Carrier Pre-Selection

What’s this?
This type of Least Cost Routing is used in countries where the same service provider offers local call and long
distance calling services. These service providers allow subscribers to select the service provider or Carrier for long
distance calling.

For example,

Service
Provider B

Subscriber Service Service

PBX Provider A Provider C

Service
Provider D

A subscriber of Service Provider A must grab trunk lines of Service Provider A to call other subscribers in the local
area.

However, when the subscriber of Service Provider A wants to make a long distance call, the subscriber must dial a
prefix to select the a carrier (trunk) of the desired long distance, Service Provider B, C and D. Thus, the subscriber
accesses a secondary service provider by dialing a short code or prefix to for long distance calling.

This feature works on the basis of “Automatic Number Translation”. Using Automatic Number Translation,
ETERNITY NE adds the code of the appropriate secondary Service Provider to the number string dialed by the
extension user to route the call to the desired secondary Service Provider.

How to configure
To use this feature, you must do the following:

• Enable Automatic Number Translation feature on the trunk—CO, Mobile or SIP—of your Primary Service
Provider.

• Select an Automatic Number Translation Table Number from 1 to 8 for the trunk.

• Configure the Automatic Number Translation Table. In the Automatic Number Translation Table, in the
Dialed Number String column, enter the long distance numbers that extension users will dial. In the
Substitute Number String column, enter the Prefixes of the Secondary Service Providers which should be
added to the dialed numbers. For example, the code ‘961’ for Service Provider B must be prefixed to the
number ‘2630555’ dialed by extension users, you must enter ‘2630555’ in the Dialed Number String
column and ‘9612630555’ in the Substitute Number String column.

See “Basic Settings” for instructions for configuring Automatic Number Translation on the different Trunk Port
types. See also, feature description for “Automatic Number Translation”.

640 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 License Management

What's this?
Certain features of ETERNITY NE require the purchase of a license. When you buy ETERNITY NE, you get a
unique license number for your product and a set of 'license-free' features are loaded in the system. Described
below are the features that require license.

SIP Extensions
ETERNITY NE supports up to 16 SIP Extensions. You can register SIP enabled devices like an IP Phone, a Soft
phone, Analog Telephone Adapter, as SIP extension of ETERNITY NE.

ETERNITY NE provides eight SIP extensions license-free. If you want to register more than eight SIP extensions,
you need to purchase a license.

Voice Mail System

ETERNITY NE offers a Voice Mail System (VMS) module with multi-level Auto Attendant features. The VMS
module is supplied with a Pen Drive and a License Key which you must activate.

How to activate your License

If you are installing the Voice Mail System or want to connect more than 8 SIP Extensions, you would require a
valid License Key, which you must activate in the system.

Instructions for Matrix Channel Partners

Your license voucher may be a paper or a PDF (protected) file.

You may activate your License Online. For this, keep the following items ready:
• The License Voucher containing the 16-digit PIN.
• A valid, unique User ID and Password from the Matrix License Support Centre.
• Access to Internet.
• Current License Key of the system.

To activate the License Key online,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click License Management link.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 641

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The License Management page opens.

• Note down the current License Key on this page.

You may view the features and functions that are currently available to you under Service Profile.

• Keep your Current License Key and the License Voucher ready.

• Open a new window on your browser.

• Enter http://115.118.161.162:81/matrixlicense in the address bar of the new window.

642 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Login to Access page will open.

• Enter your User Name and Password provided by Matrix and click the Login button.

On successful login, the License Activation page will open.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 643

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • As Product Family, select the option ETERNITY.

• In the field Current License Key, type the current product license key you noted from the License
Management page of Jeeves.

• Click View button.

644 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The page will show the current License Profile on ETERNITY. Click the Next button to continue.

The License Activation page opens.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 645

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 In the License PIN field on this page, enter the License PIN from the Voucher.

• Click Details. The details appear in the fields Product Family, Product Name, Product Variant.

646 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Next button. Your Current License Profile and your New License Profile will appear on this page.

• Click the Activate button and wait for a few seconds, as the activation is initiated.

On successful activation, the confirmation message will appear on your screen along with the activation
date and time.

You will also be sent a confirmation mail to your e-mail ID (registered with Matrix).

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 647

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 You may Save, Print, or Email this information for your records, by clicking the relevant button on the
bottom of the page.

• Note down the New License Key generated on this page.

• Go back to the Jeeves window (or log in as System Engineer again, if your session has ended).

• Open the License Management page under Advanced Settings.

• Enter the new License Key generated in the field Enter License Key.

• Click Submit button.

The Service Profile on this page will be updated according to the license.

648 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When you activate the Voice Mail System key, it will appear on your Service Profile.

When you activate your IP8 License to enable 8 IP Users, it will appear on your Service Profile

• To log off, click the Logout button.

If you are unable to use Online Activation of the License Key or have no internet access, contact the Matrix
License Support Centre for assistance in generating the new License key.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 649

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instructions for Customers
To activate your License, you would need the License Voucher containing the 16-digit License PIN. Contact your
Dealer/Distributor in this regard. Your License Voucher may be a paper or a protected PDF file.

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the License Management link. The License Management page opens.

• Note down the current License Key on this page.

You may view the features and functions that are currently available to you under Service Profile.

• Send your Current License Key and the License PIN (on the Voucher) to the Matrix License Support
Centre.

• You will receive a new License Key.

• Open Jeeves again.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the License Management link under Advanced Settings.

• Enter the New License Key you obtained from Matrix in the field Enter License Key.

• Click the Submit button.

650 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Service Profile on this page will be updated accordingly.

• To log off, click Logout.


When the system is defaulted or upgraded, the current License key and Service Profile will be saved.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 651

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Live Call Screening

What’s this?
Live Call Screening enables extension users to screen callers before attending their calls on their extensions.

How it works
To be able to use this feature,

• the Voice Mail System must be present in the ETERNITY NE.

• the extension users who are to be provided this feature must have a Personal Mailbox assigned, and have
this feature allowed to them in their Class of Service.
• the extension users who want to use this feature must set Call Forward to Voice Mail System set on their
extension.
• the extension on which this feature is used must be a DKP or an Extended IP Phone.

With the above pre-requisites fulfilled, this is how Live Call Supervision will work:

• Extension A has activated Live Call Supervision.

• B calls A, and is transferred to A’s mailbox (as Call Forward to Voice Mail System is set).

• The VMS Auto Attendant offers B the option to leave a message in the mailbox of extension A.

• As B starts to record a message in A’s mailbox, the speaker of the DKP/Extended IP Phone of A gets
turned ON for the duration of the Live Call Screening Timer (configurable; default: 10 seconds).

• A hears the message being recorded in the mailbox.

• If A wants to answer the call, A can go Off-Hook. A gets connected to the caller and the system stops
recording the message in the mailbox.

• If A does not answer the call, the speaker is turned Off automatically on the expiry of the Live Call
Screening Timer.

• Also, after listening to some part of the message, if A finds that the call is not important, A can ignore the
caller by dialing any digit. When A dials any digit, the speaker of the DKP/Extended IP Phone is turned
OFF, but the message recording in the mailbox continues.

LCS works only if your extension is idle.

652 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How it configure
To be able to use Live Call Screening, extension users must have:

• A mailbox assigned to them, in their Voice Mail Settings.

• Live Call Screening enabled in their “Class of Service (COS)” for the Day and Night time, as required.

See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring the Voice Mail Settings and Class of Service of different
extension port types: “SLT Extensions”, “DKP Extensions”, “SIP Extensions”.

If required, you may also change the duration of the Live Call Screening Timer. See “System Timers and Counts”
for instructions.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 653

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users only

To activate Live Call Screening,

• Press DSS key assigned to Live Call Screening.

OR
• Dial 1094-1

To answer a caller who is recording a message in your mailbox,

• Go Off-Hook by pressing the speaker key or lifting the handset.
• Speak to the caller.

To ignore the message of the caller,

• dial any digit.

To deactivate Live Call Screening,

• Press DSS key assigned to Live Call Screening, again.
OR
• Dial 1094-0

654 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Live Call Supervision

What’s this?
Using Live Call Supervision, any extension can know the last external number dialed by another extension, even
when that extension is in speech with an external party.

This feature is useful for supervisors who want to know where their subordinates are calling.

This feature is supported on DKP and Extended IP Phone extensions, and on SLT extension which have CLI
phone.

How it works
• A is the supervisor of B.

• A wants to know where B is calling, B can use Live Call Supervision.

• When B dials an external number it is stored in the system’s memory.

• When A requests Live Call Supervision for B’s extension, the system retrieves the last external number
dialed by B and presents it on the display of A’s phone.

• If the last number dialed by B is an internal number, A will get error tone, as the system supports live call
supervision of external calls only.

Live Call Supervision can be used also when the extension being supervised is in speech with an external
party.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 655

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
To be able to use Live Call Supervision, extension users must have this feature enabled in their “Class of Service
(COS)” for the Day and Night time, as required.

See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring the different extension port types: “SLT Extensions”, “DKP
Extensions”, “SIP Extensions”.

How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Press DSS key assigned to Live Call Supervision

OR
• Dial 1098
• Enter the Extension number to be supervised

For SLT Users

• Dial 1098-Extension number to be supervised.

656 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Logical Partition

What's this?
Logical Partitioning is used to restrict the flow of call traffic between Public and Private networks and between
Public Switched networks and VoIP networks.

This feature may be used in countries where such restrictions are mandated by telecom regulations. For example,
in certain countries, calls from VoIP to Public Networks (CO, PSTN, Public Land Mobile Network) are not allowed.

Local telecom regulations may either disallow termination of lines from both networks on the same equipment or
may allow lines from both networks to be terminated on the same equipment, provided the equipment is designed
to restrict flow of call traffic from these networks. For example, the Telecom Regulatory Authority of India allows
termination of lines of the PSTN and VoIP Networks in the same equipment, only if these lines are logically
partitioned. Termination of lines from both these networks in the same equipment without a logical partition
constitutes an offence in India.

ETERNITY NE supports Logical Partitioning for this purpose. You can allow or restrict calls between networks by
applying Logical Partitioning on the system.

How to configure
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link to expand.

• Scroll to Logical Partition under Advanced Settings.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 657

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Logical Partition link to open the page.

Now, allow or restrict the calls between the different Trunk Port types.

658 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Submit to save changes.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

• By default for countries other than UK, USA and Italy calls within and between all types of trunks are
restricted. In other words, trunk to trunk calls are not allowed.

• In UK, USA and Italy calls within all types of trunks, including VoIP are allowed.

• When call permission is restricted between trunks and/or between a type of trunk to VoIP, the following
feature interactions will apply:

• Call Transfer: Trunk to Trunk Transfer between restricted categories of trunk will not be allowed. If
the user attempts trunk-to-trunk transfer between restricted trunks, Error Tone will be played.

• Raid: If a user using DISA attempts to Raid a conversation of an extension with a trunk to which call
permission is restricted, the Raid attempt will fail and the user will get an Error Tone.

• Conference: An extension user will not be able to include restricted trunks in a 3 party or multi-
party conference. An Error Tone will be played when s/he attempts it.

• Dial-In Conference: Participation in a Dial-In Conference from trunks with restricted call permission
is not allowed.

• External Call Forward: In the case of DID, DISA or when transferring a trunk call to an extension,
if the extension has set call forward to an external number, the system will allow the call only if the
call permission between the source and destination trunk is allowed. Otherwise, Call Forwarding
will not be applied.

• Hotline: When a user has logged into DISA and the extension being used for the DISA login has
the Hotline - Trunk or Hot outward dialing (HOD) feature enabled, the system will allow the call
between the source trunk (from where the DISA login is made) and the destination trunk (which is
used as Hotline Trunk) only if calling is permitted between them. Otherwise an Error Tone will be
played to the DISA caller on the expiry of the Hotline Timer.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 659

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Macros

What’s this?
Extension users often have to dial access codes for specific functions like dialing a feature code, making an internal
call, making an external call, etc.

ETERNITY NE supports Macros, using which, you can abbreviate long number strings for regularly used functions
in to macros and assign them to a DSS key on a DKP/Extended IP Phone extension.

You can also assign Macros on SLTs that have special keys.

How it works
• Extension 201, frequently sets Call Forward-All Calls to an external number 26550333.

• To do this, each time, Extension 201 must dial 131-Trunk Access Code-26550333-#*.

• Instead of having to dial this lengthy number string, a Macro can be created for Call Forward-All Calls to
External number.

• If Extension 201 is an Extended SIP Phone or a DKP, the Macro can be assigned to a DSS key on the
phone.

• Instead of dialing this number string, the user of Extension 201 can simply press the DSS key on which this
Macro is assigned.

• Thus when the DSS key on which a Macro is assigned is pressed, the corresponding access code is
executed.

• The system sets call forward to the external number automatically.

ETERNITY also supports Macros for SLT which have special keys. When each of these keys is pressed, a special
number string, which you can program is dialed.

For example, an SLT instrument has 5 special purpose keys. When these keys are pressed, the strings *50, *51,
*52, *53, *54 programmed on these keys are dialed out.

You can create Macros for the strings dialed out using the special keys, whereby the string dialed by each of these
special keys is associated with a particular function. For example, the special key for dialing *50 is associated with
Call Forward -All Calls to an external number. So, when the extension user presses *50, the system receives this
string and takes appropriate action, i.e. interprets it as call forward to the external number, and sets call forward.

Thus, each time the extension user presses the special key *50, the system considers that the extension user has
dialed 131-Trunk Access Code-26550333-#*.

660 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
You can create as many as 25 Macros.

To configure Macros,

• Open Jives.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the Macros link under Advanced Settings.

The Macros page opens. Each macro is stored against an index number.

• When creating a Macro for a DKP/Extended IP Phone,

• In the Number String field, enter the strings the system should consider as command when the DSS
Key on the DKP/Extended IP Phone.

• Click Submit to save.

• Now, assign this Macro to a DSS Key on the DKP/Extended IP Phone.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 661

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • When you assign a Macro to a DSS Key on a DKP or Extended IP Phone,
• you must select Macro as Function Type
• As Offset, you must select the Macro Index number (1-25) at which the number string is stored. In
this example, it would be Macro Index 1.

For detailed instructions on assigning a keyboard macro to a DSS key, see “Phone Key Settings” under
“DKP Extensions” for instructions. Also see, “Matrix Extended IP Phone Key Settings” under “SIP
Extensions”

• When creating a Macro for a special Key on an SLT,

• In the Number String field, enter the strings the system should consider as command when the special
key on the SLT is pressed.

• In the Access Codes field, enter the strings sent by the SLT on pressing the special function key.

For example, if the SLT sends the string ‘*53’ to the ETERNITY NE when the function key for Alarms is
pressed, enter the string 163 (the feature access code for Voice-guided Alarms) in the Number String
field, and enter the string *53 in the corresponding Access code field.

The Access Code that you assign here in Macros must not conflict with any other Access Codes in the
Dial Phase. See “Access Codes”.

• Click Submit to save.

• Log out of Jives.

662 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Meet Me Paging

What’s this?
Using Meet Me Paging, extension users can announce the name of the person they want to talk to on the Page
zone. The called person can respond to the announcement, by dialing, from any extension, the Meet Me Paging
code and the extension number of the caller.

When making a Meet Me Paging call, extension users can announce the extension number from where they are
calling, so that the called person knows which extension number to dial.

This feature is of great use to Operators. Using this feature, the Operator can put an important call on hold and
track the extension user who is not at the desk using Meet Me Paging. Once the person is located and calls the
Operator, the Operator can transfer the call to the person at the current location.

How it works
• The Operator receives a call for B.
• Operator calls B’s extension, but B is not at the desk.
• Operator uses Paging and makes the announcement for B, asking B to call the Operator.
• B is near extension 201. B dials Meet Me Paging Code and dials the extension number of the Operator.
• B is in speech with the Operator.

How to configure
To be able to use Meet Me Paging, extension users must have the feature“Paging” in their Class of Service.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 663

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

If you are the Caller (the paging party)

• Press the DSS key assigned to Paging.

OR
• Dial 1074
• Dial Page Zone Number
• Start announcement

If you are the Called Party (for whom the message has been announced):
• Lift the handset.
• Press the DSS key assigned to Meet Me Paging.
OR
• Dial 1093
• Dial the number of the paging extension.
• Speak with the paging extension user.

For SLT Users

If you are the Caller (the paging party)

• Lift the handset.

• Dial 1074 - Page Zone Number
• Start announcement

If you are the Called Party (for whom the message has been announced):

• Lift the handset.

• Dial 1093 - Paging Extension Number.
• Speak with the paging extension user.

664 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Message Wait

What’s this?
The Message Wait feature of ETERNITY NE enables extension users/Operator to set Message Wait on other
extensions to deliver important messages.

If the extension user has a mailbox assigned, the Message Wait feature indicates to the extension user, the arrival
of new messages in the user’s mailbox.

Thus, Message Wait can be set by extension users as well as by the Voice Mail System.

How it works

Message Wait set by Extensions/Operator

The Operator/any extension user can set Message Wait on another extension.

• The Operator calls Extension A.

• Extension A is not at the desk to attend the call.

• The Operator has an important message to communicate, so the Operator sets Message Wait on
Extension A, using the Message Wait key (if configured) or by dialing the feature access code.

• Extension B tries to reach Extension A, and sets Message Wait on Extension A, using the Message Wait
key (if configured) or by dialing the feature access code.

• Message Wait will be indicated to Extension A according to the Type of Message Wait Notification set for
Extension A. This may be in the form of a Stuttered Dial Tone, a Voice Message, Ring, or LED Lamp.

• If Extension A is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone and has DSS key assigned for Retrieve New Message,
the LED of this key will glow to indicate new message wait.

• Now, Extension A can dial the feature access code to retrieve Message Wait, or press the Retrieve
Message Wait Key, if assigned.

• The system will call the extension that first set Message Wait on Extension A. In this case, the Operator. If
the Operator is busy, the system will place the call on Extension B. The system will try to call the
extensions that set Message Wait until the call is answered.

• The extension that set Message Wait on A gets the CLI of A as Message Wait. A can now deliver the
message.

• The LED of the Retrieve Message Wait key, if assigned, on Extension A will be turned off after all message
wait set by other extensions on Extension A have been served.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 665

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Message Wait set by the Voice Mail System
The Voice Mail System (VMS) sets Message Wait on the extension, whenever a new message arrives in its
personal Mailbox.

• Extension A is assigned a Personal Mailbox.

• There is a new message in A’s Mailbox. The VMS indicates this to Extension A as per the Type of
Message Wait Notification set for Extension A. This may be in the form of a Stuttered Dial Tone, a Voice
Message, Ring or LED Lamp.

• If Extension A is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone, the Voice Mail key on the phone will also glow to
indicate the arrival of a new message.

• If the Retrieve Message Wait key is assigned on the DKP/Extended IP Phone of Extension A, the LED of
this key will also glow simultaneously to indicate arrival of the new voice mail.

• To listen to the new message, Extension A can

• press the Voice Mail key
or
• the Retrieve New Message key (if assigned)
or
• dial the feature access code for Retrieve New Message.

The VMS answers the call. After Extension A has listened to the new message(s), the LED of the Voice
Mail key is turned off.

The LED of the Retrieve Message Wait key, if assigned, will also be turned off.

Voice Mail has priority over extension Message Wait set by extensions. If an extension has both
Message Wait and new Voice mail, and when the extension presses the Retrieve Message Wait key or
dials the feature access code to Retrieve Message Wait, the call will be placed first to the Voice Mail
System. When the extension user presses the Retrieve Message Wait key again, the call will be placed to
the extension that set Message Wait.

Types of Message Wait Notification

The system gives Message Wait indication to extensions according to the type of Message Wait Notification
selected for the extension. The types of Message Wait Notification offered by ETERNITY NE are:

Stuttered Dial Tone/Voice Message

• When the extension user goes OFF-Hook, the user will hear a voice message, if a pre-recorded Voice
Module has been assigned for Message Wait Notification. If no voice module is recorded and assigned,
the extension user will hear a stuttered dial tone instead.

• If you want voice message to be played as message wait notification, record and assign a Voice Module.
Refer “Voice Message Applications” for instructions.

ETERNITY can play only 4 Voice Modules simultaneously. The Voice Module for Message Wait
Notification will not be played if there are already 4 being played simultaneously. In which case, Stuttered
Dial Tone will be played for Message Wait Notification, when the extension user goes OFF-Hook.

666 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 LED Lamp
• When the extension user has an SLT with 'Message Wait' lamp, you can set this type of Message Wait
Notification. The lamp will blink continuously when Message Wait is set. The lamp will be turned off when
the extension user has retrieved all the waiting messages.

Ring
• When a new Message Wait is set on the extension, the system will play Message Wait Ring (Short, Fast)
on the extension. See “Distinctive Rings”.

• The extension will ring for the duration of the Message Wait Ring Timer (configurable; default: 30
seconds). If the call is not answered within this timer, the system will ring on the extension again for as
many times as the Message Wait Ring Count (configurable; default: 10 times), and at the interval set as
the Message Wait Ring Timer Interval (configurable; default: 30 minutes).

• When the extension user answers the call, the user gets connected to the VMS or the extension that set
Message Wait.

How to configure

To provide this feature to extensions, you must do the following configuration on the extensions:

• Enable the Message Wait feature in the “Class of Service (COS)” of extensions. This allows the extensions
to set and cancel Message Wait on other extensions. Only those extensions that have this feature in their
COS can set or cancel Message Wait on other extensions. See “Basic Settings” for instructions on
configuring the COS of different Extension types: SLT, DKP, SIP. By default, this feature is enabled in the
COS of all extension types for the Day and Night.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 667

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select the desired Voice mail/Message Wait Notification Type for each extension in its Voice mail
Settings. See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring the different Extension types: SLT, DKP, SIP.

• If you selected Voice Message as Voice mail/Message Wait Notification Type for an extension, you must
also record the desired Voice Message in a Voice Module and assign it to the Message Wait application.
See “Voice Message Applications” for instructions.

• If you selected Ring as Voice mail/Message Wait Notification Type for an extension, you may configure
the following Ring Parameters:
• Message Wait Ring Timer (default: 30 seconds)
• Message Wait Ring Count (default: 10 attempts)
• Message Wait Ring Timer Interval (default: 30 minutes).
See “System Timers and Counts” for instructions.

668 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • You may also configure the features ‘Message Wait’ and ‘Retrieve Message Wait’ on DKP and Extended
IP Phone extensions. For instructions, see Phone Key Settings under “DKP Extensions” and Phone Key
Settings under “Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings – Location 1” in SIP Extensions.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phones

To set Message Wait

• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Message Wait'.

OR
• Dial 1076
• Dial the extension number on which you want to set Message Wait.
• Select the option ‘Set Message Wait’
• Press Enter Key.

To cancel Message Wait

• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Message Wait'.
OR
• Dial 1076
• Dial the extension number on which you want to cancel Message Wait.
• Select the option ‘Cancel Message Wait’
• Press Enter Key.

To retrieve Message Wait

• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Retrieve Message Wait' or the Voice mail Key when the LED glows.
OR
• Dial 1077

For SLT

To set Message Wait:

• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1076
• Dial extension number on which you want to set Message Wait.
• Dial 1
• Replace the handset.

To cancel Message Wait:

• Pick up the handset.

• Dial 1076
• Dial extension number on which you want to cancel Message Wait.
• Dial 0
• Replace the handset.

To Retrieve Message Wait

• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1077

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 669

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mobility Extension

What's this?
ETERNITY NE offers mobility to its extension users whose nature of work keeps them away from their desks
frequently and for longer durations.

Using mobility extensions, the extension users of ETERNITY NE can make and receive their calls from their current
(remote) location, placing calls through the system, and can access the system just as any other normal extension
of the ETERNITY.

How it works
ETERNITY supports two types of users:

• Station Users: they are extension users of ETERNITY NE to whom a dedicated physical extension is
provided on their desks.

• Virtual Users: they are extension users of ETERNITYNE who share a physical extension, or may not
have any physical extension allotted to them.

The facility of Mobility Extension is provided to both virtual and normal extension users using the features
“Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” and “Call Forward”.

How to configure
To provide Mobility Extension to users, the follow the steps described below.

• List out the Extension Users and Virtual Users and configure them first.

• Make sure that extensions which are to be provided Mobility Extensions have the features Call Forward
and DISA enabled in their “Class of Service (COS)”.

• Make a list of External numbers to which the Mobility Extension users will forward their calls. Configure
these numbers in the 'Allowed List' of Local, Regional, National and International Numbers, as appropriate.

• The Toll Control assigned to the extension will be applied when a call is forwarded to an external number.
Make sure that the extensions which are to be provided Mobility Extension have the required “Toll Control”
level for Call Forward to the External Numbers (the numbers you have programmed in the Allowed List).
Toll Control level is to be programmed on the Mobility Extensions.

• Configure the parameter 'External Call Forward for' on the Mobility Extensions. This parameter defines the
types of calls for which the External Call Forwarding is to be applied. Select any one of the options, Internal
Calls Only, Trunk Calls Only, Internal + Trunk Calls as required.

• Program the parameter 'DISA' on the trunk lines on which Mobility Extensions users are to be provided
access to. Make sure you select the option 'CLI Auth. Multiple Calls' in the 'DISA' parameter of the trunk
port.

670 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Make a list of numbers which the Mobility Extension users will use to access the ETERNITY from DISA
mode. Program this list of numbers in the "DISA-CLI Authentication Table".

Program this list of numbers in the 'Calling Number' field of the Authentication Table. Program the 'Port
Type' and 'Port Number' of the Extension assigned to Mobility Extension Users in the 'Auto Login As' field
for the respective 'Calling Number' field. Refer the topic “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” to know
more.

How to use
The Mobility Extension Users of ETERNITY NE can use its features from a remote location as described below.

Receiving calls
To receive calls, the Mobility Extension User must set Call Forward on his extension with an external number
(mobile number, landline number, etc.) as the destination number.

To make calls ring on the extension and the external number simultaneously, the Mobility Extension Users must
activate the Call Forward-Dual Ring feature on their extensions.

The Mobility Extension Users can also choose where they want to receive the calls during a particular time of the
day. For example, they can receive calls during a particular time of the day, i.e. Time Zone on their external number
and have their calls received by their Voice mail or the Operator or any other number during another Time Zone. To
do this, they must set “Call Forward-Scheduled" on their extension. Dual Ring can also be set for Call Forward-
Scheduled.

Making calls
The Mobility Extension User should make a call on the DISA enabled trunk of ETERNITY from the external number
and the system will provide the dial tone to the user after authenticating the external number with the help of the
DISA-CLI Authentication table.

On getting the dial tone, the Mobility Extension User can make internal as well as external calls as per the “Toll
Control” and “Class of Service (COS)” assigned to his Extension.

The Mobility Extension User can also dial codes of the Personal directory and Global directory numbers to use the
feature Abbreviated Dialing.

Accessing Features
Mobility Extension Users can access the system features by dialing specific codes after making calls on the DISA
enabled trunk of ETERNITY, or after answering the calls received on their external number.

These codes are listed below.

Activity Code to be dialed

On-Hook #0

Off-Hook #1

Flash #2

Pause #3

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 671

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Activity Code to be dialed

Terminate the call #9

Described below are instructions for Mobility Extension users on using different call management features.

Call Hold
To put a call on hold,

• When in speech with Party A, Mobility Extension User dials #2.

• The call with Party A is put on Hold.
• Press Flash (#2) to retrieve the held call and talk to Party A again.

Call Transfer
To conduct a screened Call Transfer,

• When in speech with Party A, Mobility Extension User dials #2.

• The Call of Party A is put on Hold.
• Mobility Extension User gets Feature Tone.
• Dial Trunk Access Code (TAC) followed by the number of Party B. [To make external call]

OR

• Dial Internal extension number [to make call on an extension]

• When in speech, dial #0 to go on hook.
• Party A and Party B will get connected.

To perform Call Transfer-While Ringing,

• Mobility Extension User is in speech with Party A.

• During speech, Mobility Extension User dials #2.
• The Call of Party A is put on Hold.
• Mobility Extension User will get Feature Tone.
• Dial TAC - number of Party B. [To make external call]

OR

• Dial Internal extension number [to make call on extension]

• Dial #0 on receiving Ring Back Tone (RBT).

To perform Call Transfer-On Busy Extension,

• Mobility Extension User is in speech with Party A.

• During speech, Mobility Extension User dials #2.
• The Call of Party A is put on Hold.
• Mobility Extension User will get Feature Tone.
• Dial number of Extension user.
• Dial #0 on receiving Busy Tone.

672 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To perform a Call Transfer-Trunk-to-Trunk,

• Mobility Extension User is in speech with Party A.

• During speech, Mobility Extension User dials #2-##.
• The Call of Party A is put on Hold.
• Mobility Extension User will get Feature Tone.
• Dial Trunk Access Code to grab the Trunk
• After receiving the Dial Tone of the trunk, dial number of Party B.
• After Party B answers the call, dial #2-##.
• Party A will get connected with Party B.

Making a Second Call

To make a second call by putting the current call on hold,

• Mobility Extension User is in speech with Party A.

• During speech, Mobility Extension User dials #2.
• The call of Party A is put on hold.
• Mobility Extension will get Feature Tone.
• To make an external call: dial TAC - number of Party B.

OR

• To make an internal call: dial extension number.

Call Toggle (Call Splitting)

To toggle between two calls,

• Mobility Extension User is in speech with Party A.

• During speech, Mobility Extension User dials #2.
• The call of Party A is put on hold.
• Mobility Extension will get Feature Tone.
• Dial number of Party B.
• Make speech with Party B.
• Dial #2-1 to put Party B in hold and speech with Party A.
• Again dial #2-1 to put Party A in hold and speech with Party B.

Call Pickup
To pick up the call of same Call Pickup-Group,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After receiving dial tone, dial 4.
• The call ringing on the extension of the same Call Pick up-Group will get connected with Mobility Extension
User.

To pick up the call of a selected extension,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After receiving dial tone, dial 12-Extension Number.
• The call ringing on the dialed extension of will get connected with Mobility Extension User.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 673

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3-Party Conference
To conduct a 3-Party Conference,

• Make the first call.

• Dial #2.
• Make the second call.
• Dial #2-0 to establish conference.

Multiparty Conference
To create a Multiparty Conference,

• Mobility Extension User is in speech with Party A.

• Dial #2 from Mobility Extension user.
• Dial 191.
• Dial number of Party B.
• After speech, dial #2.
• Dial 191.
• Dial number of Party C.
• After speech, dial #2.
• Dial 191.
• Dial number of Party D.
• After speech, dial #2.
• Dial 191.
• All Parties will get connected with each other.

To terminate the Multiparty Conference,

• When in the middle of a Multiparty Conference,

• Dial #0 to go On-Hook.
• Dial #1 to go Off-Hook.
• Dial 190 after getting Dial Tone.

When Dialed Extension is busy

To make a call on an internal extension which is busy,

• During busy tone

• Dial 3 for interrupt request.
• Dial 4 to Barge-In
• Dial 5 to Raid.

Call Forward-Unconditional
To set Call Forward-Unconditionally,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After getting Dial Tone, dial 131-Extension/Department Group/VMS.
• The system will give confirmation tone.

674 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To set Call Forward-Unconditionally on external number,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After getting Dial Tone, dial 131-TAC-external number.
• The system will give confirmation tone.

Call Forward-Busy
To set Call Forward-Busy,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After getting Dial Tone, dial 132-Extension/Department Group/VMS.
• The system will give confirmation tone.

To set Call Forward-Busy on external number,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After getting Dial Tone, dial 132-TAC-external number.
• The system will give confirmation tone.

Call Forward-No Reply

To set Call Forward-No Reply,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After getting Dial Tone, dial 133-Extension/Department Group/VMS.
• The system will give confirmation tone.

To set Call Forward-No Reply on external number,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After getting Dial Tone, dial 133-TAC-external number.
• The system will give confirmation tone.

Call Forward-Busy/No Reply

To set Call Forward-Busy/No Reply,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After the Dial Tone, dial 134-Extension/Department Group/VMS.
• The system will give confirmation tone.

To set Call Forward-Busy/No Reply on external number,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After the Dial Tone, dial 134-TAC-external number.
• The system will give confirmation tone.

To cancel Call Forward,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After the Dial Tone, dial 130.
• The system will give confirmation tone.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 675

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Forward-Dual Ring
To set Call Forward-Dual Ring,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After the Dial Tone, dial 136-1.
• The system will give confirmation tone.

To cancel Call Forward-Dual Ring,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After the Dial Tone, dial 136-1.
• The system will give confirmation tone.

Call Forward-Scheduled
To set/cancel Call Forward-Scheduled,

• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.

• After the Dial Tone, dial 1175-Time Zone-Call Forward Type-Number.
• The system will give confirmation tone.

• Mobility Extension users can have Call Forward and Call Forward-Scheduled set on their extension by
the Operator or by another extension user.

• Using “Call Forward-Remote” and by setting “Call Forward-Scheduled” from the SA mode (using SA
commands or Jeeves), the extension user/Operator can set Call Forward and Call Forward-Scheduled
for any Mobility extension user. Refer the respective topics to know more.

676 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Music on Hold (MOH)

What’s this?
The music played to extension users and external callers who are put on hold is called Music on Hold (MoH).

How it works
A Voice Module assigned the Music on Hold application serves as the source of music for this feature. By default,
Voice Module 1 is assigned for Music on Hold.

When a caller is put on hold, ETERNITY NE plays the music recorded in Voice Module 1.

You can play a voice message of your choice instead of music to the callers. The message may contain any
promotional information about your company or services provided by your organization, etc.

Music-on-Hold will also be played to an extension, when the option Route to Operator is selected as the
Alarm Notification Type for the extension, and the Operator extension is busy, when the extension goes
Off-hook to answer the alarm call.

How to configure
You can record a piece of music or a message of maximum 16 seconds duration and assign it to Voice Module 01,
which is reserved for Music-on-Hold.

Refer the topic “Voice Message Applications” for instructions on recording and assigning voice modules.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 677

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Multi-Stage Dialing

What's this?
The Multi-Stage Dialing feature of ETERNITY is typically used in applications like Calling Card, where extension
users are required to dial digits in stages when making a call using the calling card.

The Multi-Stage feature enables extension users to directly dial the number they want to call, and the system dials
out the number at different stages of the call by suitably modifying the number.

How it works
A typical example of Multi-Stage Dialing is the use of prepaid Calling Cards. Here, the person using a calling card
must dial a fixed number string before dialing the actual number. When using a calling card,

• Users must first dial the number of the Calling Card server, for example: 1602233 (7 digits).

• After the call is answered by the Calling Card server, users must dial the PIN provided by the calling card
service provider, for example 1132121234.

• After dialing the PIN number, users can dial the number they want to call, for example 0014125126508.

Thus, when using a calling card, users must dial a very lengthy number string, each time they need to make a call
using the calling card.

The use of Multi-Stage Dialing saves the time and effort of dialing out lengthy digits in stages.

The Multi-Stage Dialing makes use of the “Automatic Number Translation” table. This table must be configured on
the trunk from which extension users will use to make calls using Calling Cards.

To take the above example further,

• Extension users are to be allowed to make international calls using Calling Card from the trunk CO1.
“Automatic Number Translation” table must be configured on CO1 trunk.

• The Automatic Number Translation table consist of Dialed Number Strings and Substitute Number strings.

• In the Dialed Number String, you must configure ‘00’, the prefix for international numbers.

• In the Substitute you must configure the Calling Card server number and the PIN Number.

• As the system must wait for the Calling Card server to answer before dialing the PIN, you must configure
Wait for Answer between the Calling Card server number and the PIN number.

You must insert a delay by configuring the Pause Timer after the PIN number and the destination number,
i.e. the prefix ‘00’.

678 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The Automatic Number Translation table would look like this:

Index Dialed Number String Substitute Number String

1 00 1602233W1132121234P00

32

• When the Automatic Number Translation table is configured, the Extension user can simply dial the Trunk
Access code and the destination number: 0/5/61/62/63/64 - 0014125126508.

• The system matches the dialed number with the Dialed Number String of the ANT table, the number
matches with the entry ‘00’ stored in the table.

• The system dials the Substitute Number string 1602233. It waits for the calling card server to answer the
call.

• When the call is matured, i.e. the calling card server has answered the call, the system dials the PIN
number 1132121234 and waits for the Pause Timer before dialing the destination ‘00’.

Thus, the extension user directly dials only the desired destination number, the system substitutes this
number by adding the Calling Card server number and PIN number and dials these numbers in two stages.

How to configure
To be able to use Multi-Stage Dialing, you must configure the following:

• Automatic Number Translation table on the trunk you want to use this feature. For instructions on
configuring ANT on different Trunk types, see “CO Trunks”, “Mobile Trunks”, “SIP Trunks” under Basic
Settings.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 679

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Configure the DTMF Out Dial on the Trunk. Set the DTMF ON Time, the DTMF Inter-Digit-Pause and the
Pause Time to the required values.

For instructions on configuring DTMF Out Dial on different Trunk types, see “CO Trunks”, “Mobile Trunks”,
“SIP Trunks” under Basic Settings.

• If required you may configure the Call Proceeding Tone for Multi-stage Dialing as Network tone,
Pseudo Tone, or Silent. For instructions, see “System Parameters”.

680 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mute

What’s this?
This feature helps the extension user to disconnect the speech transmission path in the middle of a conversation.
The extension user can still listen to the opposite party because the receiving path remains connected. Mute is
useful when you want to consult someone in the middle of a conversation, but do not want the opposite party to
listen to your discussion. You can Mute a call before making a call or during speech.

How it works
• A is in speech with B.
• A wants to consult to C in the room, but does not want B to hear their conversation.
• A presses the Mute Key.
• The transmit speech path from A to B is disconnected. The receive path remains connected.
• So, A will be able to hear B, but B will not be able to hear the conversation between A and C.
• When A has finished consulting C, to resume speech with B, A presses the Mute key again.
• The transmit speech path from A to B is restored. A and B are in speech again.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To mute a call before making the call:
• Press the Mute key
The LED of the key glows.
• Dial a number on confirmation tone.
OR
• Dial 1052
• Dial desired number

To mute a call during speech:

• Press the Mute key to silence outgoing speech
OR
• Press Hold Key
• Dial 1052

To resume outgoing speech:

• Press Mute key.
The LED of the key is turned off.
OR
• Press Hold Key
• Dial 1052

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 681

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For SLT Users

To mute a call before making the call:

• Dial 1052
• Dial desired number

To mute a call during speech:

• Press Flash Key
• Dial 1052

To resume outgoing speech:

• Press Flash Key
• Dial 1052

682 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Number Patterns

This parameter is related to the features “Toll Control” and the “Dynamic Lock”. Toll Control allows you to define a
particular calling permission for each extension, referred to as 'Call Privilege'. A Call Privilege allows the extension
to call certain areas and restricts it from calling others. The extension can also be restricted from the dialing of
specific telephone numbers.

The ETERNITY NE supports the following types of Call Privileges:

• No Calls
• Local Calls
• Regional Calls
• National Calls
• All Calls
• Limited Calls

If you want to use Toll Control, define the Local, Regional, National, and any other specific number strings which
the system should allow to be dialed and restrict from being dialed. For this, you need to configure the Number
Patterns, for Local, Regional, National and Limited Calls.

• The Call Privileges 'No Calls' and All Calls’ do not require any number pattern to be configured.

• The Call Privilege Type 'Limited Calls' allows the dialing of specific telephone numbers only.

To configure Number patterns,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the Number Patterns link under Advanced Settings.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 683

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Local Calls
• Click the Local tab.

• Define Local Calls number strings. You may enter up to 999 local numbers.

• In the column Allowed Numbers, enter the number strings to be allowed to be dialed out by the system.

You may enter only the first digit of the number string, or a part of the string, or the complete number string.

Each number string you enter must not exceed 16 characters.

• In the column Denied Numbers, enter the number strings which you want to restrict from being dialed out.

• Click Submit.

• Enter as many local numbers as you want by clicking the Index number links 001-250, 251-500, 500-750,
751-999.

Click Submit to save.

684 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Regional Calls
• Click the Regional tab.

• Enter the Allowed Numbers and Denied Numbers in their respective columns.

• Click Submit.

• Enter as many Regional numbers as you want by clicking the links 001-250, 251-500, 500-750, 751-999.

• Click Submit to save.

National Calls
• Click the National tab.

• Enter the Allowed Numbers and Denied Numbers in their respective columns.

• Click Submit.

• Enter as many National numbers as you want by clicking the Index number links 001-250, 251-500, 500-
750, 751-999.

• Click Submit to save.

Limited Calls

The Call Privilege Type 'Limited Calls' allows the dialing of specific telephone numbers, which may be local,
regional, national or international numbers.

• Click Limited 1 tab.

• Enter the Allowed Numbers and Denied Numbers in their respective columns.

• Click Submit to save.

• Enter as many Regional, National numbers as you want, by clicking the Index number links 001-250, 251-
500, 500-750, 751-999.

Click Submit to save.

• To configure another Limited Number List, click the tab Limited 2, Limited 3 and follow the same
instructions as above.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 685

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OFF-Hook Alert

What's this?
When the handset of an extension is not placed correctly, it will not be possible for the Operator or any other
extension to call the extension. Also, incoming calls will not reach the extension, Alarms and Reminders cannot be
placed on that extension.

To avoid this inconvenience, the ETERNITY NE supports the feature 'OFF-Hook Alert', whereby the system detects
and informs the Operator of the extension phone that remains OFF-Hook accidentally.

How it works
To give the Operator an OFF-Hook Alert,

• ETERNITYNE places a call on the Operator's phone.

• It displays a text message on the Operator's phone" "Hang up <extension number>

• When the Operator answers the call, s/he is played a confirmation tone, the text message remains on the
display.

• The Operator can inform the extension user to place the handset of the phone correctly.

• If the extension phone is an SLT, OFF-Hook Alert will be given to the Operator phone only. (The Operator
phone must be a DKP or the Extended IP Phone).

• If the extension phone is a DKP/Extended IP Phone, OFF-Hook Alert will be give to both, the Operator
phone and the extension phone.

• If the extension phone that is OFF-Hook is DKP/Extended IP Phone, the ETERNITY NE will activate 'OFF-
Hook Alert' on the extension phone, by playing the Error Tone continuously, on speaker to draw the
attention of the extension user.

• While the Error Tone for OFF-Hook Alert is being played on the extension phone, if the user presses the
Speaker Key, the Error Tone will continue to be played on the handset until it is replaced correctly.

How to configure
For this feature to work, the OFF-Hook Alert to Operator flag must be enabled in the “System Parameters”.

To do this,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

686 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the System Parameters sub-link to open the page.

• Go to the parameter Give OFF-Hook Alert to Operator, select the check box to enable the flag.

• Click Submit to save the change.

• Log out of Jeeves or continue with configuring, as required.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 687

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Paging

What's this?
Paging allows you to make announcements to a group of extension users by simply lifting the handset of your
extension phone and dialing a code.

This feature is useful when you want to call several people at once, for example, to inform them about a meeting
you have scheduled. If the persons you want to call have Digital Key Phones (DKP) extensions or the Matrix
Extended IP Phone, or any Open SIP Phone as their extensions, you can use paging instead of calling them up
one by one.

• You can start paging from SLT, DKP or any SIP Extension. However, Paging is possible only on DKP
and SIP Extensions, which may be Extended IP Phones or Open SIP Phones. The Open SIP Phones
on which you are paging must support Call-Info or Alert-Info header for Paging.

• The DKP/SIP extensions being paged can only hear the person who is paging as the speakerphone
mic is not activated on the DKP/IP Phone.

How it works

The Pre-requisites
• Page Zones must be created. You can create 12 different Page Zones.

• The DKP and SIP extensions which are to be paged must be included in the Page Zones. You can create
12 different Page Zones. Each Page Zone accommodates up to 16 DKP and SIP extensions.

• Paging must be enabled in the Class of Service allowed to the DKP, SLT, SIP extension from which this
feature is to be used.

The Process
• A DKP/SLT/SIP extension user having Paging in the Class of Service, dials the Access code for Paging
and the Number of the Page Zone to which s/he wants to make the announcement.

• The system checks hunts DKPs and IP Phones in the Page Zone Number which are free and activates the
speakerphones of these DKPs/SIP Phones in the Page Zone number.

• The calling DKP/SLT/SIP extension user makes his/her announcement.

• All DKP and SIP extensions in the Page Zone can hear the announcement. But they cannot speak to the
calling DKP/SLT/SIP extension user, as the mic of their speakerphones is not activated.

• The calling DKP/SLT/SIP extension goes ON-Hook after the announcement.

• The system deactivates the speakerphones of the DKP/SIP extensions.

688 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
For this feature to work, you must create Page Zones and enable this feature in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the
extensions which are to be allowed to page other extensions.

Creating Page Zones

Decide how many Page Zones you want to create. You can create 12 different Page Zones. You can include upto
16 DKP and SIP extensions in each Page Zone.

For each Page Zone number, decide and assign the DKP and SIP extensions.

On a sheet of paper create a two-column table for each page zone, as shown below. Write the numbers of the DKP
and SIP extensions you want to include in the page zone in the member column.

Page Zone 1

Index Member

1 DKP-1 (301)

2 DKP-2 (302)

3 SIP Ext.-1 (303)

16

Page Zone 2

Index Member

1 DKP-1 (301)

2 SIP Ext-2 (304)

3 SIP Ext.-4 (305)

4 SIP Ext.-5 (306)

16

Now, program Page Zones using Jeeves.

To configure Page Zones,

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click Advanced Settings link to expand.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 689

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the link Page Zones to open the page.

• The Page zone tabs from 1 to 12 appear on this page.

• Configure Page Zone 1.

• Refer to the Page Zones you created on paper.

• For each Index number, select a Member extension. Select the extension number you want to include in
this Page Zone. Default: None.

• Click Submit to save your Page Zone settings.

• To configure another Page Zone, click the Page Zone number tab.

• In the new Page Zone, select the member extensions.

• Click Submit to save.

• If you have finished configuring Page Zones, you may log out.

690 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring Paging in Class of Service
By default, Paging is enabled in the Class of Service for the Day and Night. So, all extensions of ETERNITY NE
can page.

How to use
It is possible to page from a DKP, SLT, and SIP Extensions.

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Press DSS Key assigned to Paging.
OR
• Dial 1074
• Enter Page Zone Number on the prompt on your phone's display.
• On the prompt ‘Start Paging <Page Zone Number>’, make your announcement.
• Go ON-Hook at the end of your announcement.

For SLT Users

• Lift the handset.
• You get dial tone.
• Dial 1074-Page Zone Number.
• Start your announcement.
• Replace the handset after completing your announcement.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 691

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Peer-to-Peer Calling

What’s this?
Making an IP call without the intervention of a proxy server is called Peer-to-Peer Calling. As Peer-to-Peer calling
does not require a proxy server, voice communication using this application can be done virtually free of cost. The
major cost savings offered by this application makes it a very attractive mode of inter-branch or intra-office voice
communication.

How it works
Let us understand how to use Peer-to-Peer Calling with the following illustration:

Location A Location B
201
SIP1
301
SIP2
202
SIP3 115.118.161.165 121.124.130.110 302
203 Ethernet
WAN IP WAN
303
Broadband Broadband
204 Router/Modem Router/Modem

304
ETERNITY PBX A
205
305
Menu Sat 01 05: 30

206 FwdBus
y FwdNR Can
cel Mute Con
f erenc
e Trans
f er

306
DND VoiceMail Names Red
i al Rejetc Hold

1 2 abc 3 def

4 ghi 5 k
jl 6 mno

CLI R 7 pqr s 8 t uv 9wxyz

CA4
Hot n
il e CA3 * 0 #

SI P2 CA2
SI P1 CA1

• Two offices are directly connected over the IP network.

• ETERNITY is installed at Location A.

• The PBX at Location B may also be ETERNITY.

• Peer-to-Peer calls can be made between the two locations with suitable configuration of ETERNITY and
the PBX.

• At Location A, you need to do the following configuration in ETERNITY NE:

• Select a SIP trunk to be used for this application and enable it. For example, SIP1.

• Set the SIP Trunk Mode of this trunk to Peer-to-Peer.

• Keep the SIP ID field of the SIP trunk blank.

• Set the Treat Incoming Peer-to-Peer call as option on the SIP trunk to Station.

• Set the Send CLI option on the SIP trunk as Calling Party Wise.

• You may also configure the Closed User Group (CUG) Table to avoid dialing the Trunk Access Code
for the outgoing SIP Trunk, i.e. SIP 1.

692 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The CUG Table stores up to 8 entries. Each entry consists of the parameters Route Code, Strip Digit,
Self Route, Dialed Digits, LCR and Route using Trunks.

At Location A, you may configure the CUG table as follows:

• In the Route Code field, enter the extension numbers of the PBX at Location B. Instead of entire
number strings, you can configure a single digit, the starting digit of the extension numbers as
Route Code. In this case, you may configure Route Code as ‘3’, as all extensions at Location B start
with ‘3’.

• Keep the Strip Digit Count as ‘0’.

• Keep the Self Route flag disabled.

• In the Dialed Digit Count field, enter the digit length of the extension numbers at Location B. In this
case, ‘3’.

• In the Route using Trunks field, select the SIP trunk number to be used for routing the Peer-to-
Peer calls. In this case, SIP 1.

The CUG Table you configure on ETERNITY would look like this:

Strip Dialed
Route Index Route Code Digit Self Route Digit LCR Route using Trunks
Count Count

1 3 0 Disabled 3 Off SIP 1

• Now, configure the Peer-to-Peer Table.

The Peer-to-Peer table stores up to 1000 entries. Each entry consists of the parameters Number,
Domain Address and Name.

At location A, you would have to configure the Peer-to-Peer table as follows:

• In the Number column of the Peer-to-Peer table, enter the digit you configured as Route Code in
the CUG Table for calling the extension numbers of the PBX at Location B. In this case ‘3’.

• For the numbers you entered, in the Domain Address field in the table, enter the IP Address of the
WAN Port of the PBX at Location B.

• For the numbers you entered, in the Name field in the table, enter any desired name you want to
assign as an identification or tag.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 693

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Peer-to-Peer table you configure on ETERNITY would look like this:

Index Number Domain Address Name

001 No Match Found

Prudent
002 3 121.124.130.110
Mumbai

003

• At Location B, you may do a suitable configuration of the PBX.

• With the necessary configuration done at both locations, when an extension user 201 of ETERNITY at
Location A dials 301, the number of an extension of PBX A, the system checks the CUG table to match the
dialed digits with the Route Code and the Dialed Digit Count. As a match is found, it selects the SIP trunk
defined for routing the Route Code, i.e. SIP 1.

• As SIP 1 is set to Peer-to-Peer mode, the system checks the Peer-to-Peer Table configured. It finds a
match for the digit ‘3’ and places the call to the IP Address 121.124.130.1 configured for this number.

How to configure
For instructions on configuring the SIP Trunk parameters for the Peer-to-Peer application—SIP Trunk Mode, Peer-
to-Peer Table, SIP ID, Treat incoming Peer-to-Peer calls as Station, Send CLI—see “SIP Trunks”.

For instructions on configuring the CUG Table, see “Closed User Group (CUG)”.

To configure the Peer-to-Peer Table,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Scroll to VoIP Configuration under Advanced Settings.

• Click the VoIP Configuration link to expand.

694 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Peer-to-Peer Table sub-link. The Peer-to-Peer Table page opens.

• In the Number field, enter the number string—prefix or entire number—that will be dialed. In this case,
it would be the Route Code in the CUG Table for calling the remote extension numbers. The number
string must not exceed 24 characters. Default: Blank.

• In the Domain Address field, enter the domain name or IP Address to where the call is to be placed.
The Address may consists of up 40 characters (maximum). Default: Blank.

The Domain Address can also be in the form of Address: Port number.

• In the Name field, enter a name to identify the number string you configured. It may be the name of
your contact or any name you wish to assign to the number string. The name may consist of 24
characters (maximum). Default: Blank.

The name you configure here will not be used in SIP signaling.

• Click Submit to save your entries.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 695

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Presence

What's this?
Extension users may want to indicate their availability to callers from other extensions.

For example, an extension user may want to leave his desk for an indefinite period, but does not want to use Call
Forward or set Do Not Disturb. He wants to indicate to callers about his absence. Similarly, extension users who
are present at their desk may want to hide their presence from other users; or they may want to show their current
activity to the other extension users like they are Busy, or are away from their desks, or on the phone with someone
on another call, etc.

With the Presence feature of ETERNITY NE, extension users, including the Operator, can 'publish' their presence
to callers from other extensions. By doing so, they can indicate to the other extensions about their availability.

In the same way, the Presence feature allows extension users to view the 'Presence' status (availability) of the
extensions that they want to call, before making the call or when their call is not answered.

How it works

Publishing Presence
Any SLT, DKP, SIP Extension User can 'publish' their presence by setting any of the messages listed in the
following on their phone, by dialing the access code for this feature.

SIP Extension users who want to publish their presence have two options:
• Using the PUBLISH feature supported by the SIP Client.
• Using the feature access code for Publish Presence supported by ETERNITY NE.

The first option requires the parameter 'PUBLISH' to be enabled in the SIP Extension Settings. Refer
“Configuring SIP Extensions”. By default, this parameter is disabled.

Publishing Presence Messages

0. Absent: When an extension user sets 'Absent' as the message, all incoming internal as well as external
calls will be blocked from landing on his/her extension.

When any other DKP extension user calls this extension, the text message 'User Absent' will appear on
the caller's phone display.

If the extension phone that has set 'Absent' is a DKP, the letter 'A' appears on the phone's display to
indicate absence.

The letter 'A' disappears when the extension user sets a presence message other than 'Absent'.

As 'Absent blocks incoming external as well as internal calls, it can be used as an extension of the “Do Not
Disturb (DND)” feature, which blocks only internal incoming calls.

696 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • When an SLT extension user calls the extension which has set 'Absent', an error tone will be played.
However, it is possible for the SLT extension user to find out the presence status of the called
extension. Refer “Viewing Presence” later in this topic.

• External callers who call the extension, on which 'Absent' is set, will get an error tone only.

• Outgoing calls can be made from the extension which has set 'Absent'. Only incoming calls are
restricted.

• If more than one extension is configured as "Operator" (routing group), incoming calls will be blocked
only on the Operator extension which has set User Absent.

1. Present:

When an extension user sets 'Present', all incoming calls will be received as normal on this extension.

If previously set as 'Absent', when a DKP extension user sets 'Present' the letter 'A' will disappear from the
phone's display.

When any other DKP extension user calls this extension, the name of the extension user will be displayed
on the caller's phone display, when the called extension is ringing.

2. Auto Detect: When an extension user sets 'Auto Detect', the system will detect the state of the phone;
depending on the call state, it will publish the presence message to the other extensions. Three types
Publish Presence messages are possible, with Auto Detect:

a. Idle: When the system detects the extension phone to be ON-Hook, it indicates the status of the phone
to other extensions 'idle'.

b. On the Phone: When the system detects the phone to be OFF-Hook, or in speech with another party
or if it detects an incoming call placed on the phone, it will indicate to the other extensions that this
extension user is 'On the Phone' with another party.

c. DND Text message: When the system detects that the extension phone has Do Not Disturb (DND) set
on it with a DND Text message, it will display to the calling extension, the DND message set by the
called party (this may be the default DND message or the DND Text message set by the called
extension).

3. Away: When an extension user sets 'Away', the system will display this message to the other extensions.

4. On the Phone: When an extension user sets 'On the Phone', the system will display this message to the
other extensions.

5. Do Not Disturb: The extension user can set this message to be published to other extensions, if s/he
wants to work uninterrupted.

Unlike the DND Feature, the extension user who has set this message will continue to receive calls both
internal as well as external calls, as the system considers this extension as 'present'.

6. I am Mobile: The extension user can set this message to be displayed to other extensions, when s/he is
not at the desk.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 697

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7. In Meeting: The extension user can set this message to be displayed to the callers, if s/he is busy in a
discussion or meeting.

8. Out for Meal: The extension user can set this message to be displayed to other extensions when going on
a lunch break.

9. Out of Office: The extension user can set this message to be displayed to the callers when s/he leaves
the office temporarily.

When an extension user sets any Publish Presence message other than 'Absent', the system will consider
the user as 'Present'. All incoming and outgoing calls will be allowed on this extension.

It is possible to program another message in place of Publish Presence messages listed from 6 to 9: I am
Mobile, In a Meeting, Out for Meal, Out of Office.

Publish Presence messages can be set or changed for any extension from the System Administrator (SA)
mode.

Viewing Presence
• Extension users can know the status of another extension user before calling or when the extension user
does not answer the call.

• Generally, when DKP extension users call another extension, the name of the called extension is
displayed on the calling DKP extension. Now, if the flag 'Display User Status during Call' is enabled in the
System Parameters, when DKP extension users call another extension, the calling DKP extensions will be
displayed the 'presence' status message published by the called extension58.

• SLT extension users, whose phone is equipped with a CLI display, can see the status of another extension
by dialing a feature access code, then going ON-Hook. The system will ring back the SLT and send the
Presence status of the desired extension as CLI.

• SIP extension users can use the Presence feature of ETERNITY to view the presence status of other
extensions. For this, they must dial the feature access code and the number of the desired extension.

• SIP extension users who want to view the status of other extensions using the feature supported by their
SIP Client, must have 'Presence Subscription' enabled in their SIP Extension Settings. Refer “Configuring
SIP Extensions”.

How to configure
This feature involves the configuration of the following parameters:

• 'Display User Status during Call' flag: DKP extension users will be able to view the presence status for
the called extension only if this flag is enabled in the System Parameters.

• PUBLISH: SIP extension users who want to publish their presence using the feature supported by their
SIP client will be able to publish their presence status only if this feature is enabled in their SIP Extension
Settings. This parameter is not necessary, if they want to publish presence using the feature of ETERNITY.

58. DKP users can also dial a feature access code and the number of the extension to see the status of that extension on their DKP.
But this would not be required, if the 'Display User Status during Call' flag is enabled in the System Parameters.

698 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Presence Subscription: SIP extension users who want to view the presence of other extensions using
the feature supported by their SIP client must have this feature enabled in their SIP Extension Settings.
This parameter is not necessary, if they want to view presence using the feature of ETERNITY.

• Publish Messages: It is possible to customize the Publish Messages listed above from 6 to 9 viz.: 'I am
Mobile', 'In Meeting', 'Out for Meal', 'Out of Office'.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click Advanced Settings link to expand.

• Click System Parameters to open the page.

• Go to 'Display Presence Status during Call on DKP'. Click to enable the flag.

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 699

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Publish Message.

• You can change message number 6 to 9 as desired. The string may consist of a maximum of 16
characters.

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save your settings.

• Click the SIP Extensions link under Basic Settings.

700 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Now, go to the desired SIP Extension number for which you want to enable the features PUBLISH and
Presence Subscription.

• Click VoIP to expand options.

By default both the features PUBLISH and Presence Subscription are disabled. To enable these features,
select the Allow PUBLISH check box and the Allow Presence Subscription check box.

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save your settings.

• Log out of Jeeves or continue, as desired.

How to use
This feature requires you to dial your User Password. The default User Password 1111 is not accepted. Please
change the User Password first.

Publish Presence can be set for an extension also from the System Administrator mode.

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

Publishing Presence by Extension User

• Press DSS Key assigned to PUBLISH presence.

OR

• Dial 104
• Enter User Password on the prompt.
• Scroll to the desired Publish message from the menu:
• Absent
• Present
• Auto Detect
• Away
• On the Phone
• Do Not Disturb
• I am Mobile
• In Meeting
• Out for Meal
• Out of Office
• Press Enter key to select message.
• You get the confirmatory tone.

Publishing Presence from SA Mode

• Press DSS Key assigned to PUBLISH presence.

OR

• Dial 1072-014
• Enter Destination Number, i.e. the number of the extension Publish Presence is to be set.
• Scroll to the desired Publish message from the menu:

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 701

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Absent
• Present
• Auto Detect
• Away
• On the Phone
• Do Not Disturb
• I am Mobile
• In Meeting
• Out for Meal
• Out of Office
• Press Enter key to select message.
• You get the confirmatory tone.

To view Presence Status

• Press DSS Key assigned to Display Presence Status.

OR

• Dial 1097.
• Enter Extension number
• The status of the extension number you dialed will be displayed on your phone's LCD.
• Go ON-Hook.

For SLT Users

Publishing Presence by Extension User

• Lift the handset.
• Dial 104-Password-Index Number

Index No. Meaning

0 Absent

1 Present

2 Auto Detect

3 Away

4 On the Phone

5 Do Not Disturb

6 I am Mobile

7 In Meeting

8 Out for Meal

9 Out of Office

• Replace handset.

702 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Publishing Presence from SA Mode
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 1072-014-Extension Number-Index Number

Index No. Meaning

0 Absent

1 Present

2 Auto Detect

3 Away

4 On the Phone

5 Do Not Disturb

6 I am Mobile

7 In Meeting

8 Out for Meal

9 Out of Office

• Replace handset.

To view Presence Status

You can view Presence Status of another extension only if your SLT has a CLI display.

• Lift handset.
• Dial 1097-Extension Number.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Go ON-Hook during confirmation tone.
• Your phone will ring and the status of the extension number you dialed will be displayed on your phone as
CLI.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 703

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Priority

What’s this?
When ‘Priority’ is assigned to trunks, whenever there are incoming calls on multiple trunks at the same time, the call
on the trunk with higher priority will be answered by the landing destination extension/Operator first. When Priority
is assigned to Extensions, calls from extensions with higher priority will have precedence in landing on the
destination extension.

Higher Priority can be assigned to Extensions of important or higher ranking persons in an organization; for
example, calls from senior managers or top executives in an organization can be allowed to be answered first by
the destination extension. Higher Priority can be assigned to particular Trunks, so that when there are incoming
calls on different trunks at the same time, the call on the trunk with the higher priority gets answered first by the
destination extension. For instance, special or private trunk lines, trunk lines dedicated as help lines or emergency
trunks, or trunks designated as hotlines can be assigned greater priority.

How it works
Priority can be assigned to all Trunk types (Analog, Mobile, SIP) and Extension types (SLT, DKP, SIP).

To understand how this feature works, consider this illustration:

M e nu S at 0 1 0 5: 3 0

Priority: 9
Fwd Busy Fwd NR Cancel Mute Conf ee
rn c
e Tr ansfer

DN D Voi e
c Ma li Names Redi al Rej ect Hol d

1 2 3 de

ETERNITY
ab c f

4 gh i 5 j kl
6 m no

C LIR 7 pq r s 8 t uv
9 w xyz
C A4

H otli ne C A3
* 0 #

S IP 2 C A2
S IP 1 C A1

Analog Trunk 1 Priority: 5

CO1 (Calls Operator at 10:00:00)
CO Priority: 9 201
Incoming Call
at 10:00:10 Priority: 5
(Calls Operator at 10:00:05)
202
Mobile Trunk 1
Priority: 7 Priority: 7
(Calls Operator at 10:00:15)
M e nu S at 0 1 0 5: 3 0

Incoming Call
at 10:00:12 Mobile 1
GSM
Fwd Busy Fwd NR Cancel Mute Conf eren c
e Transfer

DN D Voi c
e Ma li Names
Redi al Rej ect Hol d

1 2 ab c 3 de f

4 gh i 5 j kl 6 m no

C LI R 7 pq r s 8 t uv 9 w xyz
C A4

H ot il ne C A3 * 0 #

S IP 2 C A2
S IP 1 C A1

Here,
• There are two incoming calls, one on the Analog Trunk 01 and the Mobile Trunk 1 at the same time.
• Analog Trunk 1 has priority, ‘9’, the Mobile Trunk 1 is assigned priority ‘7’.

• Three extensions, 201, 202 and 302 are calling the Operator. Extension 301 has priority ‘7’, while
extensions 201 and 202 have the same priority, ‘5’.

704 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Now, on the Operator, which is the landing destination, the incoming calls from the trunks and the
extensions will land in the following chronological order:

Caller Time of the Call Priority

SLT 201 10:00:00 5

SLT 202 10:00:05 5

Analog
10:00:10 9
Trunk 1

Mobile
10:00:12 7
Trunk 1

DKP 301 10:00:15 7

• These incoming calls, however, will appear on the Display of Operator’s phone (DKP or Extended IP
Phone) in the order of priority:
• Analog Trunk 1
• Mobile Trunk 1
• DKP 301
• SLT 201
• SLT 202

• Now, when the Operator goes Off-hook (pressing speaker key or picking up the handset), the call on
Analog Trunk 1 will be answered first, as Analog Trunk 1 has the highest priority.

• the Operator goes On-hook and then Off-hook, the call on Mobile Trunk 1 will be answered. Though
Mobile Trunk 1 and DKP 301 have the same priority, ‘7’, Mobile Trunk 1 will be answered first, following the
chronological order.

• When the Operator goes On-hook after answering the call on Mobile Trunk 1, the call from DKP 301 will be
placed on the Operator phone with a Priority Ring (configurable; default: Triple Ring).

• When the Operator goes Off-hook, the call from DKP 301 is answered.

• When the Operator goes On-hook and then Off-hook after answering the call from DKP 301, the call from
SLT 201 will get answered first, though both 201 and 202 have the same priority, ‘5’. In this case, Priority
Ring will not be played.

• Thus, calls from trunks and extensions are answered by the landing destination in the order of priority.
Where priority is the same, calls are answered in chronological order. Calls from extensions with higher
priority will be indicated by Priority Ring on the landing destination.


Priority is relevant only when there is more than one call on the destination.

You can assign Priority to SLT extensions. However, Priority is not relevant when the SLT is a landing
destination, because there cannot be more than one call ringing on an SLT extension at a time.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 705

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure

You can assign Priority to Trunks and Extension by configuring this parameter on the desired Trunk or Extension
port type under “Basic Settings”.

You can also configure, Priority Ring, if required. See “Distinctive Rings”

To select Priority for Trunks and Extensions,

• Open Jeeves.

• Click the Basic Settings link.

Selecting Priority for Trunks

• Click the link of the desired Trunk type:
• CO Trunks
• Mobile Trunks
• SIP Trunks

• When the page of the respective Trunk type opens, select the Trunk number on which you want to set
Priority.

• On this page, click the More link to view additional parameters on this page.

706 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select a Priority level from 1 to 9 for the Trunk. Default: 9 for all Trunk Types.

• Click Submit to save.

Selecting Priority for Extensions

• Under Basic Settings, click the link of the desired Extension type:
• SLT Extensions
• DKP Extensions
• SIP Extensions (for Extended IP Phone Settings)

• When the page of the respective Extension type opens, click the tab of the Extension number on which
you want to set Priority.

• On this page, click the More link to view additional parameters on this page.

• Select a Priority level from 1 to 9 for the Extension. Default: 5 for all Extensions. Extensions designated as
Operator can be assigned higher priority than other extensions.

• Click Submit to save.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 707

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Privacy

What’s this?
Extensions of ETERNITY NE can be protected from the intrusions by other extensions or from trunk calls by
activating Privacy.

How it works
Intrusions can occur on an extension when another extension invokes the following features:

• “DND-Override”
• “Interrupt Request (IR)”
• “Barge-In”
• “Raid”

Intrusions can also occur,

• When an external caller uses “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” to reach an extension.
• When there is a call from another trunk line when you are in speech.

To prevent such intrusions, ETERNITY NE enables you to set the following types of Privacy:

• Privacy from Interrupt Request, Barge-In, DND Override: This type of Privacy protects an extension
from intrusions by other extensions using Interrupt Request, Barge-In or DND Override.

For example: Extension A has Privacy from Interrupt Request, Barge-In and DND Override.

Extension A and B are in speech, Extension C attempts to intrude the conversation Interrupt Request or
Barge-In. Extension C’s call will be blocked and C will get error tone.

Now, Extension A has set DND and Extension B attempts to override it using DND Override. Since A has
Privacy from DND Override, B’s call will be blocked and B will get error tone.

• Privacy from Raid: This type of Privacy protects an extension from intrusions by other extensions using
Raid.

For example: This type of Privacy is set on Extension A. Extension A and B are in speech, Extension C
uses Raid to intrude the conversation. Extension C’s call will be blocked and C will get error tone.

• Privacy from Trunk call intrusion: This type of Privacy prevents the trunk landing destinations that are
busy from being intruded by another waiting call. For this type of Privacy to work, the feature “CO Call
Waiting”must be disabled on the extension.

For example: Extension A is the first landing destination for calls on Trunk 1. Extension A and B are in
speech. A new call lands on Trunk 1. If A has CO Call Waiting beeps disabled, A will not hear the intrusion
beeps. The system will land the call on the next landing destination for calls on Trunk 1.

708 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Privacy from DID call: This type of Privacy protects the extension from being accessed by external callers
using “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)”.

For example: This type of Privacy is set on Extension A. Extension A and B are in speech, external caller
C uses DID to call extension A. C’s call will be blocked and C will get error tone.

How to configure
To provide Privacy to extensions, you must enable this feature in their “Class of Service (COS)”, for the Day and
Night.

By default, Privacy from Raid is enabled in the Class of Service of all Extension types: SLT, DKP, SIP. So, none of
the extensions can raid the other. You may disable this feature on extension, which you want to protect from Raid.

By default, Privacy from Interrupt Request, Barge-In and DND Override are disabled in the Class of Service of all
Extension types. You may enable this feature on extensions which you want to protect from intrusions using any of
these features.

By default, Privacy from DID is disabled on all Extension types. You may enable this feature on extensions which
you do not want external callers to reach.

By default, Privacy from DID is disabled on all Extension types. You may enable this feature on extensions which
you do not want external callers to reach.

By default, CO Call Waiting is on all Extension types. You may keep this feature disabled on extensions which you
want to provide Privacy from Trunk Call intrusion beeps.

For instructions, see “Class of Service (COS)”, and the description for configuring the different Extension
types—SLT, DKP, SIP— under “Basic Settings”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 709

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Quick Dial

What’s this?
Quick Dial provides DKP and Extended IP phone users the facility of ‘One-touch’ dialing of numbers stored in their
Personal Directory and the Global Directory.

How it works
Quick Dial is based on “Abbreviated Dialing”.

To be able to Quick Dial a number,

• the number must exist in the Personal or Global Directory assigned to the extension.

• Personal and Global Directory dialing must be allowed in the Class of Service of the extension.

• On the DKP and Extended IP Phones, DSS keys must be configured with the Short Codes or Abbreviated
Numbers that are to be dialed out. These short codes are derived from the Index numbers of the Personal
Directory and the Memory Location Index of the Global Directory.

• You can Quick Dial a number simply by pressing the DSS key.

• The system locates the number to be dialed out in the Personal/Global Directory on the basis of the Index
Number/Memory Location Index configured on the DSS Key.

How to configure
See “Abbreviated Dialing” for instructions on configuring and assigning the Personal and Global Directories.

To assign the Short Codes or Abbreviated Numbers to be used for Quick Dial on DSS keys, for each DKP/
Extended IP Phone extension,

• List down the numbers from the Personal Directory and Global Directory to be used for Quick Dial.

• If the number is from the Personal Directory assigned to the extension, note the Index number at which it is
stored in the Personal Directory: 001 to 025.

• If the number is from the Global Directory assigned to the extension, note the Memory Location Index at
which it is stored in the Global Directory: 100 to 999.

• Now, configure the Quick Dial numbers on the DSS keys of the DKP and Extended IP Phone.

For detailed instructions on configuring DSS Keys on a Digital Key phone, see “Phone Key Settings” under
DKP Extensions.

For instructions on configuring Quick Dial on the Matrix Extended IP Phone, see “Matrix Extended IP
Phone Key Settings” under SIP Extensions.

710 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • On the desired key, select Quick Dial as Function Type.

• As Offset, select the Index Number against which the number is stored in the Personal/Global Directory.

How to use

For EON and Extended IP Phone Users only

• Press the DSS key assigned to the Quick Dial numbers.
• The number will be dialed out.
• Talk when the called party answers.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 711

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Raid

What’s this?
Raid allows you to interrupt a telephone conversation between two extension users, turning the conversation into a
three-way call.

You can use Raid to land in a conversation between two extension users, and between an extension user and an
external caller, with a warning—a beep—to the extension user. The extension user will hear a beep when you raid
and you will enter in to three-way speech with both parties.

You may also Raid a conversation without any warning by disabling the beep.

How it works
• A, B and C are extension users.

• A and B are in speech.

• C calls A.

• C gets busy tone.

• C dials the feature access code for Raid.

• Beep is played on A. Three-way speech is established between A, B and C.

• If any of these three parties disconnects, two-way speech is established between the remaining parties.

Feature Interactions
• Raid works only if the dialed extension is busy in two-way speech. The two-way speech may be with
another extension or with an external number on a trunk.

• You cannot Raid on Trunks, i.e. the external number which is in two-way speech with an extension. In this
case, C can raid the conversation between A and B, but not between A and another external number.

• Raid will not work if Privacy against Raid is enabled in the Class of Service of the extension being raided.
In this case, if Extension A has Privacy against Raid in its Class of Service, C will not be able to Raid the
conversation between A and B.

• The extension using Raid must have higher Priority assigned to it than the extension being raided. In this
case, C must have higher Priority than A to be able to invoke Raid.

Raid is a sensitive feature. You are advised to restrict access to this feature to select extension users.

712 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
To be able to use Raid, extension users must have this feature enabled in their “Class of Service (COS)”. See
“Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring the different Extension types: SLT, DKP, SIP.

By default, beep is played as a warning to the extension being raided. If required, you may disable the beep played
during Raid, by clearing the Play Beep when Raid/Conference/Dial-In Conference begins check box in the
System Parameters. See “System Parameters” for instructions.

How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

When dialed extension is busy,

• Press DSS Key assigned to Raid.
OR
• Dial 5 on Busy Tone.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 713

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For SLT Users

When dialed extension is busy,

• Dial 5 on Busy Tone.

714 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 RCOC (Return Call to Original Caller)

What’s this?
Generally, extensions users of the PBX are given a trunk access to make outgoing calls from their phones. It is also
common for a group of extensions to share the same trunks to make outgoing calls.

When an extension user of the PBX makes an outgoing call and the called party does not answer the call or is busy
on another line, it is possible for the called party to return the call (made by the extension user) on the basis of the
CLI number received.

However, when the called party returns the call, this incoming call mostly lands on the Operator extension, as
incoming calls are usually routed to the Operator.

Now, the Operator has no way of knowing which extension made the call. So the Operator cannot directly transfer
the call to that extension. Instead, the Operator must either ask the called party whom they wish to speak to and
transfer the call or put the called party on hold and find out the extension that made the call. This is an unwieldy
process for all concerned - the Operator, the called party and the extension user who originally made the call.

This can be overcome if the PBX is able to route the returned call to the original caller's extension.

ETERNITY makes this possible with the Return Call to Original Caller feature.

This feature is supported on Mobile ports and SIP Trunks.

RCOC is not supported when calls are made from Analog trunks due to the signaling limitations of Analog
trunks.

How it works

The Prerequisites
• RCOC must be enabled on the desired Trunk(s): Mobile and SIP.
• RCOC must be enabled in the Class of Service assigned to the (original caller) extension where the call is
to be returned.

The Process
• When an extension having RCOC feature in its Class of Service makes an out going call, the system
checks if RCOC is enabled on the trunk through which the outgoing call is routed.

• If RCOC is enabled on the trunk, the system stores the record of the outgoing call in an internal database
referred to as the RCOC Table.

• The system sets RCOC for the outgoing call in the following conditions, according to the Destination
Port59:

59. The Trunk from which the outgoing call is made.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 715

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If the Destination Port is a Mobile Port, RCOC is set when:
• called party is busy.
• called party is out of coverage/mobile is switched off.
• called party does not reply.
• called party rejects the call.
• caller (extension that made the call) goes ON-Hook before the called party answers the call.

• If the Destination Port is a SIP Trunk, RCOC is set when:

• called party is busy.
• called party does not answer the call.
• caller (extension that made the call) goes ON-Hook before the called party answers the call.

• When ETERNITY acts as Gateway,

• If the Originating Port is a trunk (CO, MOBILE, SIP), RCOC will be set, if it is enabled on Destination
Port.
• RCOC is set only if the Calling Party's Number is available.

• Whenever there is an incoming call on any trunk, the system matches the CLI of the incoming all with the
RCOC Table.

• If a matching record entry is found, the system routes the call to the original caller and clears the record
entry from the RCOC Table.

• The return call rings on the original caller's extension for the period of the Ring Back Tone Timer
(programmable; default 45 seconds). If the original caller does not answer the call within this Timer, the call
is routed to the Trunk Landing Group programmed for that trunk.

• If no match is found in the RCOC Table or the extension or the original caller is busy, the call will be routed
according to the incoming call logic programmed in the system.

Feature Interaction: RCOC and DISA CLI Authentication

• When DISA CLI Authentication (Multiple Calls or One Call) is enabled on a trunk, whenever there is an
incoming call on the trunk, the system will first check the DISA CLI Authentication Table.

• If a matching entry is found in the DISA CLI Authentication table, the system will give dial tone to the caller.

• The caller can now invoke RCOC feature by dialing ** (pressing Star key twice).

OR

• The caller can make calls to an extension or an external number or use a feature as required.

• If the caller invokes RCOC feature by dialing ** (pressing Star key twice), the system will check the RCOC
Table.

• If a matching record entry is found, the system routes the call to the original caller and clears the record
entry from the RCOC Table.

As RCOC is a “Class of Service (COS)” dependent feature, extensions that are not allowed this feature in
their COS cannot have their calls returned; even if this feature is enabled on the Trunk they used to make
the call.

• ETERNITY can keep a record of 255 entries in the RCOC Table.

716 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The record of the outgoing call is stored in the RCOC Table, only if the same record does not already exist
in the database.

• Each entry is kept for the duration of the RCOC Record Delete Timer (programmable; default: 999
minutes). Whenever a record is stored in the RCOC database, the Record Delete Timer for that entry is
activated. On the expiry of the Timer, the entry is deleted by the system.

• Each record is deleted from the database either after the call is returned or on expiry of the Record Delete
Timer.

• The RCOC database remains unaffected during power outages.

• In case of Call Transfer, RCOC will be set for the extension which made the call on the trunk.

• The Ring Back Tone Timer is common to all internal calls; calls made from one extension will ring on the
destination extension till the end of this timer. Change in the Ring Back Tone Timer for RCOC returned
calls on original caller's extension will also be applied on Ring Back Tone Timer for all internal calls. So,
program this Timer taking this into consideration.

• Persons using DISA must be informed about RCOC feature access code ** and how to use this feature
when in DISA mode.

How to configure
For this feature to work, it must be enabled on the Trunk and in the Class of Service of the extensions. If desired,
the related Timers, i.e., the RCOC Record Delete Timer and the Ring Back Tone Timer may also be changed.

Enabling RCOC on Trunk

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the trunk parameters of the trunk type on which you want to enable this feature, namely:

• SIP

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 717

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Mobile Port Parameters

• The page containing the trunk parameters will open.

• Select the check box of 'Return Call to Original Caller (RCOC)' on the page to enable this feature on the
desired trunk port.

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save changes.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

Enabling RCOC in Class of Service

By default the 'RCOC' feature is enabled in the “Class of Service (COS)” of all extensions of ETERNITY NE. So, all
extensions of ETERNITY NE are by default allowed this feature.

718 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Real Time Clock (RTC)

What’s this?
Certain features of ETERNITY NE like Alarms, SMDR, depend on the Date and Time of the system to function
accurately.

ETERNITY NE has its own Real Time Clock (RTC) to store date and time. When you select the Region, The RTC
parameters will be set automatically.

However, the RTC can drift over a long period. So, you may check and reset the RTC values at regular intervals to
correct this drift.

How to configure
1. Log in to Jeeves, refer

2. Click the Advanced Settings link

3. Click Real Time Clock sub-link. The Real Time Clock page opens.

4. Set the following parameters to the desired values:

• Date Format: Select the format to display the Date as DD-MM-YYYY (Day Month Year) or MM-DD-
YYYY (Month Day Year).

• Current Date: Enter the current Date in DD-MM-YYYY format.

• Current Time: Enter the current Time in HH-MM-SS format.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 719

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Time Zone: By default the Time Zone applicable for your country is selected. If required you may
select a different Time Zone from the list box.

5. Click Submit to save your settings.

720 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Reminder

What's this?
Reminders are a variation of the “Alarms” feature, requiring the Date and Time to be set for each Reminder call.

Reminder calls are useful for extension users who wish to be reminded of important tasks or appointments.

For Reminder calls, date and time are set in the following format:

Date is set, according to Date Format you selected in the “Real Time Clock (RTC)” parameters, as:

• Day-Month-Year (DD:MM:YYYY)

Or

• Month-Date-Year (MM:DD:YYYY).

• Reminders can be set and canceled by:

• the Operator from the Operator phone and from Jeeves.
• extension users from their phones.

• Multiple Reminders can be set for an extension by the Operator and/or by the extension user.

• The mechanism for serving Reminders calls can be configured as 'Personalized' or 'Automated'.

• Reminders can be voice-guided, if the ETERNITY NE has a Voice Mail System (VMS) module installed in
it.

• ETERNITY NE can register as many as 48 Reminders set by the Operator and extension users.

How it works

Personalized Reminder
When the Reminder call serving mechanism is configured as 'Personalized',

• The Operator Phone rings first60, displaying the number of the extension to which the reminder call is to be
served.

• When the Operator answers this call, a call is placed on the extension on which the reminder call is set.

• The extension phone rings for the duration of the Alarm Ring Timer.

• When the extension user answers the call, the Operator greets the extension user with the reminder
message.

60. The Operator phone rings for the duration of the Alarm Ring Timer. If the Operator does not answer the call, the ETERNITY will
make two more Alarm Attempts at an Alarm Attempt Interval of 5 minutes to call the Operator.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 721

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If the extension user does not answer the call till the Alarm Ring Timer has elapsed, the Operator phone
will display a text message notifying 'No Reply' from the extension. The Reminder is now considered as
served.

• If the extension is busy61, the Operator phone will display a text message notifying that the extension
number is 'Busy'.

• The Operator can now choose to

• inform the extension user about the Reminder in person or send someone to do it.

OR

• try the busy extension again.

OR

• set “Auto Call Back (ACB)”.


Personal Reminders will work even if the extension user has set DND or Call Forward.

Automated Reminder
When the Alarm serving mechanism is configured as 'Automated',

• The extension phone rings at the set time till the end of the Alarm Ring Timer. If the extension phone is a
DKP or the Matrix Extended IP Phone, Reminder message will appear on its display.

• When the extension user answers the call, s/he may be played music-on-hold, or a pre-recorded voice
message, or be connected to the Voice Mail, or routed to the Operator, depending upon the Alarm
Notification Type you have configured for the extension.

• If the extension user does not answer the reminder call, the ETERNITY NE makes two more attempts (in
all, 3 attempts) at an interval of 5 minutes between each attempt, to call the extension.

• If all Reminder call attempts go unanswered, the ETERNITY NE places the call on the Operator Phone.
The Operator Phone rings till the end of the Alarm Ring Timer. The Operator Phone displays the number of
the extension with the message 'No Reply'. The Reminder call is now considered as served.

• If the extension phone is busy, the ETERNITY NE will continue to make the Reminder call Attempts at the
Alarm Interval programmed. When all Alarm Attempts go unanswered, ETERNITY NE will place a call on
the Operator phone. The Operator Phone will display the number of the extension phone with the message
'Busy'.

61. An improperly placed receiver may also be the cause for the busy tone on the extension phone. In that case, the system will notify
the Operator Phone with the 'OFF-Hook Alert'.

722 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Snooze
The Snooze function can be added to Automated Reminders to ensure that the extension user answers the call.
Snooze is a system-wide feature; when set, this function will be added to all Automated Reminder calls.

When Snooze is activated,

• The extension phone rings for the Number of Alarm Attempt configured, at the set Alarm Attempt
Interval.

• The extension stops ringing when the user answers the call and dials 0 to acknowledge the Reminder
call. This reminder call Acknowledgement Code 0 is non-configurable.

• Reminder can be set for Operator phones also.

• Reminder settings will be retained in the system during power down and system upgrades.

• When multiple reminder requests have been set by an extension user, the extension user cannot
selectively cancel a particular reminder request. Only the Operator can selectively cancel Reminders
set for an extension user from the System Administrator pages of Jeeves.

• It is not possible to modify—change the date and time—of a reminder request. So, you may cancel the
Reminder request and set a new one.

Reminder Status Report

The Operator can know the status of Reminders—details of Reminders that have not been served—on the
Reminder page of Jeeves, from the System Administrator (SA) mode.

The status of Reminders set by Operator as well as extension users appears on this page, with details of time
(hours and minutes), and serving mechanism (personalized, automated).

The Operator can view the Reminder report whenever required and can also print this report.

How to configure
The configuration of Reminders is the same as Alarms.

To configure Reminders feature, do the following:

• Select the Alarm Notification Type for the extensions.

• Configure, as required, the Alarm Call related parameters: Alarm Ring Timer, Number of Attempts,
Alarm Attempt Interval, Configurable Alarm Type and Configurable Alarm Category, and Snooze.

• Configure Macros, if the SLT extension has special function keys, and you want to a function key for the
Reminder feature.

See the topic “How to configure” under “Alarms”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 723

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use
Reminders can be set by the extension users by themselves. The extension users can also ask the Operator to set
the Reminder for them.

If the Voice Mail System (VMS) is installed in the ETERNITY NE, it can offer voice-guided Reminders to extension
users and the Operator.

Voice-guided reminders lead users through a menu, helping them set the alarm in a step-by-step manner.

Voice-Guided Reminders set/canceled by Operator

The Operator can set voice-guided Reminders for extension users

For EON & Extended IP Phones

• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Remote Voice-Guided Reminder' function.
OR
• Dial 1072-035
• Follow Voice Mail System Prompts to set/cancel Reminder.

For SLT

• Pick up the handset.

• Dial 1072-035
• Follow Voice Mail System Prompts to set/cancel Reminder.
• Replace handset.

Voice-Guided Reminder set/canceled by Extension Users

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Press the key assigned to Voice-guided 'Reminder' function.
OR
• Dial 164
• Follow Voice Mail System prompts.

For SLT Users

• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 164
• Follow Voice Mail System Prompts.
• Replace handset.

If the SLT of the extension user has a special Reminder function key, s/he can set the alarm using this key.

For SLT with 'Reminders' Key

• Press 'Reminders' key. (The label on the SLT key may differ from model to model)
• Follow the Voice Mail System prompts to set/cancel reminders.

724 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • SLTs with special function keys will work only if the corresponding Macros are programmed by the
System Engineer.

• Without the Voice Mail System installed, the extension user having SLT with the special Reminder
function key will not be able to set/cancel Reminders. This extension user can set/cancel Reminders
only by dialing the feature access code for voice-guided Reminders.

Non-Voice Guided Reminders set/canceled by Operator

For EON & Extended IP Phones

To set Reminder for the extension user,

• Press the key assigned the 'Remote Reminder' function.

OR
• Dial 1072-033
• Enter the Extension Number.
• Enter Date and Time in the format:
DD: MM: YYYY: HH: MM

OR

MM: DD: YYYY: HH: MM (users in USA)

• Select 'Personalized' or 'Automated'.

• Press 'Enter' key to set Reminder.
• You get a confirmation tone and message.

To cancel Reminder set for the extension user,

• Press key assigned for ‘Remote Reminder’ function.

OR
• Dial 1072-033
• Enter Extension Number.
• Select 'Cancel All'.
• Press 'Enter' Key.
For SLT

To set Reminder for an extension,

• Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-033
• Dial Extension Number.
• Dial Date and Time in the format:
DDMMYYYYHHMM
OR
• MMDDYYYYHHMM (users in USA)
• Dial 1 for Personalized, Dial 2 for Automated.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

To cancel Reminder set for an extension,

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 725

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-033
• Dial Extension Number.
• Dial #
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

To cancel reminder calls selectively, go to 'Reminder Status' page from the System Administrator of
Jeeves.

Non-Voice Guided Reminders set/cancel by Extension Users

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set Reminder:

• Press the 'Reminder' key.

OR
• Dial 162
• Enter Date and Time in the format
DD:MM:YYYY:HH:MM
OR
MM:DD:YYYY:HH:MM (users in USA)
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
• Go Idle.

To cancel Reminder:
• Press 'Reminder' Key again.
OR
• Dial 162
• Select 'Cancel All'.
• Press Enter Key.

For SLT Users

To set Reminder,

• Lift handset.
• Dial 162
• Dial Date and Time in the format
DDMMYYYYHHMM
OR
MMDDYYYYHHMM (users in USA)
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

To cancel Reminder,

• Pick up the handset.

• Dial 162

726 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dial #
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

Viewing and Printing Reminder Status

The Operator can view the status of Reminders that are yet to be served from the System Administrator pages of
Jeeves. To view Reminder Status,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Administrator.

• Click the Reports link.

• Click the Reminders link under Reports.

The unserved Reminders appear on the page.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 727

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To cancel any of the unserved Reminders,

• Select the Cancel Reminder check box of the extension number for which you want to cancel the
reminder.

• click the Cancel Selected Reminders button at the bottom of the page.

• To print this page, click the Print button.

• Click Close to exit the page.

• Click Logout to exit SA mode.

728 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Room Monitor

What’s this?
This feature enables the DKP Extension users to listen to the conversations taking place in another location where
a DKP Extension is present.

Room Monitor can be used to monitor activities on the Shop Floor / Manufacturing area, without physically being
present there.

• Use this feature in accordance with the local privacy laws.

• Matrix Comsec is not responsible for any mis-/abuse of this feature by users.

How it works
• B is a supervisor in a Chemical Manufacturing Company.

• B’s room in on the second floor. The manufacturing area is on the ground floor.

• To keep track of the activities in the plant on the ground floor, B can activate Room Monitor. For this,
another DKP must be present where the activities are to be monitored.

• When B activates Room Monitor, the speaker of the DKP on the ground floor goes OFF-Hook. B can now
hear to all the sounds taking place in the ground floor.

Feature Interaction
• Call States:

• Room Monitor can be enabled from both-SLT and DKP, but the destination extension in the cabin for
Room Monitor must be a DKP.

• This feature will work when the DKP is idle.

• Microphone of the destination DKP is activated when the caller uses Room Monitor. But, the speaker is
not activated.

• One-way speech is established. The caller is able to the conversation taking place in room where
Room Monitor has been activated, but no one in the room will know that the monitoring is being done.

• Room Monitoring is terminated when the caller disconnects or the called party lifts the handset to dial
or the called party gets a call from any other extension.

• “Priority”: Room Monitor feature can be used by an extension whose priority is higher than the extension,
which has to be monitored.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 729

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
To be able to use Room Monitor, extension users must have this feature enabled in their “Class of Service (COS)”
for the Day and or Night time (depending on their requirement). See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring
the different extension port types: SLT, DKP, SIP.

How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To enable Room Monitor on an extension,

• Press the DSS Key assigned to Room Monitor.
• Dial Extension Number to be monitored.
OR
• Dial 1073-Extension Number to be monitored.

For SLT Users

• Dial 1073-Extension Number to be monitored.

730 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Selective Port Access

What’s this?
ETERNITY NE supports different extension and trunk port types. In the Selective Port Access feature, each port
type is assigned a Port Access Code. Extension users can access a particular port by dialing the Port Access Code
assigned to the Port and its Port Number.

How it works
• Extension user A wants to access a particular Mobile port, Mobile Port 1 to make a call. Extension A must
dial the Selective Port Access Feature Code, followed by the Port Type Code for Mobile ports and then dial
the Port Number.

• By default, the following access codes are assigned to each Port Type:

Port Type
Port Type Port Number
Code

SLT 01 001 to 014

DKP 02 001 to 002

CO 03 001 to 006

Mobile 25 01 to 02

SIP Trunk 26 01 to 04

SIP Extension 34 001 to 016

Here, Extension A must dial 69-25-01, where 69 is the feature code for Selective Trunk Access, 25 is the
port access code for the Mobile Port, and 01 is the number of the Mobile Port which A wants to access.

Similarly, if Extension A wants to access SIP Extension 10, A must dial 69-34-010.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 731

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
To be able to use Selective Port Access, extension users must have this feature enabled in their “Class of Service
(COS)” for the Day and Night time, as required. See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring COS for the
different extension port types.

How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To enable Selective Port Access on an extension,

• Press DSS key assigned to Selective Port Access code
OR
• Dial 69-Port Type-Port Number
• Dial 89-Port Type-Port Number (for users in USA)

For SLT Users

• Dial 69-Port Type-Port Number
• Dial 89-Port Type-Port Number (for users in USA)

732 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SIM Card Balance and Recharging

What's this?
The ETERNITY supports Balance Inquiry and Recharging of the SIM Card installed in its Mobile Ports62.

How to use
To be able to use this feature, first get information about the following from your Network Operator:

• Balance Inquiry Number: This is the number provided by the Network Operator to the subscribers to
check Balance. Different Network Operators have different numbers. For example, the Balance Inquiry
number of Vodafone is *141#.

• Recharging Service Number: This is the number provided by the Network Operators to their subscribers
for Recharging Service. Different Network Operators have different numbers for Recharging Service. For
example, the Recharging Service Number of Vodafone is *140*.

Check your SIM balance from Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link to expand options.

• Click the Mobile Trunks link under Advanced Settings, click SIM Balance Recharge link.

62. ETERNITY NE supports Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD), the standard for transmitting information over CSM
signaling channels and a commonly used method to query the available balance and other similar information in pre-paid GSM
services.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 733

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The mobile port(s) you have configured will appear on this page, by the Name you assigned.

If you have not assigned any name to the mobile port, the Name field for that port will appear blank.

• Go to the Mobile Port on which you want to request SIM Balance/Recharge.

• Select the check box Balance Inquiry/Recharge to enable this feature.

Balance Inquiry
• To make Balance Inquiry,

• Click the radio button Request of Balance Inquiry, for all those Mobile Ports for which you want to request
Balance Inquiry.

• Enter the Balance Inquiry Number provided by the Network Operator whose SIM Card you have installed
in the Mobile Port.

A maximum of 8 digits are allowed. The valid digits for Balance Inquiry number are any digits from 0 to 9
and the characters * and #

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page.

Recharging the SIM

• To recharge the SIM,

• Click the Request button under ‘Recharge’.

• Enter the following information in the appropriate fields under 'Recharge' for the Mobile Ports:

• Number: Enter the Recharging Service Number provided by the Network Operator in this field.

A maximum of 8 digits are allowed. The valid digits for Recharging Service number are any digits from
0 to 9 and the characters * and #.

• PIN: Enter the PIN number which is printed on the Recharge Voucher/Coupon. Your Recharge PIN
number may consist of a maximum of 20 digits.

The valid digits for Balance Inquiry number are any digits from 0 to 9 and the characters * and #.

Make sure you enter the digits and characters of the Recharge PIN number exactly as given on the
Recharge Voucher/Coupon.

• For each port that you send a Balance Inquiry/Recharge Request, you will get this USSD-Reply: "Please
wait, processing the request. Refresh the page to see the current status."

• Click Refresh at the bottom of the page.

• The response received from the GSM network (including possible error messages) will be displayed under
'USSD-Reply'. When the USSD Reply is received from the network, it will appear with the Date and Time
stamp of ETERNITY in this field.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

734 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • For each Mobile Port (SIM Card) at a time you can either request Balance Inquiry or Recharge the SIM
Card. When you select the radio button of Balance Inquiry of Mobile Port 1, 'Recharge' will be disabled
for Mobile Port 1. And when you select the radio button of Recharge, 'Balance Inquiry' will be disabled
for Mobile Port 1.

However, you can send Balance Inquiry/Recharge request for both the SIM cards present in the
system.

• During Balance Inquiry/Recharge-Request, the status of the Mobile port will be 'busy'. It will become
idle only after the USSD response is received from the Mobile network.

• The ETERNITY NE will clear the USSD Reply after system restart. So, each time you open the 'SIM
Balance and Recharge' page after system restart, the USSD Reply box will be blank.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 735

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Self Ring Test

What’s this?
You can use Self Ring Test to check the functioning of your own extension phone. Self Ring Test allows you to call
your own extension. You can check the ringing volume of your extension phone.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Go OFF-Hook.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Self Ring Test.
OR
• Dial 1057.
• Go ON-Hook.
• Your phone rings.
• Go OFF-Hook to stop the ring.
• Go ON-Hook.

For SLT Users

• Lift the receiver.
• Dial 1057.
• Replace receiver.
• Your phone rings.
• Lift the receiver to stop the ring.
• Replace the receiver.

736 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Static Routing Table

What's this?
Static Routing Table is required when you have more than one router (gateway) in your network and you want
ETERNITY NE to send packets to multiple routers/gateways for different types of calls.

Static Routing Table helps route calls between point to point sites (connected through Multi Protocol Label
Switching-MPLS, Frame Relay, etc.) and to public internet at the same time.

How it works
For example, two Local Area Networks, Network A and Network B, are connected through Frame Relay/ Multi
Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) network to give access to local resources and also to make Peer-to-Peer calls.

59.162.252.82

SIP Proxy

A B
192.168.1.0/24 192.168.2.0/24
Public
IP

Frame Relay/MPLS

192.168.1.1

ETERNITY ETERNITY

ETERNITY NE is connected at both sites behind a router.

These sites are also connected to public IP network to:

• give internet access to local hosts.
• access DID service provided by ITSPs to make PSTN/ GSM calls over IP network.

Network A and Network B are in different subnets.

The Static Routing Table makes it possible to route different types of outgoing calls—Peer to Peer or Proxy—made
to different subnets through different Gateways.

The Static Routing Table defines the appropriate Gateway Address (or Router’s LAN Address) where the IP
packets are to be sent.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 737

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 In the Static Routing Table, you must configure:
• The address of the final Destination where the packets are to be sent.
• The Subnet Mask to be applied on the final destination address.
• The Gateway Address where the IP packets are to be sent.

When ETERNITY NE sends packets, if the final destination IP Address and ETERNITY NE are not in the same
Subnet, the system will check the Static Routing Table.

If a perfect match is found, ETERNITY NE will start sending the IP packets to the corresponding Gateway Address
configured in the table.

If no match is found, ETERNITY NE will send the IP Packets to the Default Gateway Address (Network
Connection Type) you configured in “Network Parameters” the page.

The Static Routing Table is common for all SIP Trunks.

How to configure
The Static Routing Table must be configured at each location where ETERNITY NE is installed.

To configure the Static Routing Table,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link to expand.

• Scroll the advanced settings to reach Network Parameters.

• Click the Network Parameters link.

• Click the Static Routing Table link. The Static Routing Table page opens.

738 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Static Routing Table allows you to configure up to 8 entries. Each entry is stored against an Index
number.
For each entry, you must configure the following fields:

• Destination Address: This is the address of the final destination where the call is to be made. This
can be a device IP Address or Network Address.

• Subnet Mask: This is the mask to be applied on destination address.

• Gateway Address: This is the IP address of the node where the IP packets are to be sent. Generally,
it is the IP address of the LAN interface of the Router.

The Gateway Address must be in the same subnet as ETERNITY NE.

• Click Submit to save your entries.

To take the above example further, the Static Routing Table of ETERNITY NE at Location A should be
configured as:

Index Destination Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address

1 192.168.2.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.1

• The Destination Address 192.168.2.0 specifies the network address of Location B.

• The Subnet Mask is the mask to be applied on the Destination address.

• The Gateway Address 192.168.1.1 specifies the LAN address of the Router A which connects location
A and location B.

The IP address of the LAN interface of the router which connects Location A to the public internet
should be configured as Default Gateway in the Network Parameters of ETERNITY NE in location A.

With the Static Routing Table configured thus, all calls made by ETERNITY NE to 192.168.2.0/ 24 will
be routed through the router which connects Location A to Location B. Whereas, all calls made by
ETERNITY NE to address other than 192.168.2.0/ 24 will be routed through the Default Gateway.

Similarly, configure the Static Routing Table in ETERNITY NE at location B to enable calling from
Location B to Location A.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 739

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

What’s this?
The ETERNITY NE can record the details of Internal, Incoming and Outgoing calls made from/to all the extensions.
This feature is called Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR).

ETERNITY NE has a total SMDR buffer capacity of 12000 calls. It stores:

• 6000 outgoing calls.
• 5000 incoming calls.
• 1000 internal calls.

You can store SMDR; obtain SMDR as a Report whenever you want or obtain it Online, immediately after the call
has been made or received. You can also use SMDR to calculate the cost of the calls.

To be able to use SMDR, you must configure:

• SMDR - Storage: These parameters enable the storing of the Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls and
Internal calls using filters. See “Station Message Detail Recording–Storage”.

• SMDR - Report: These parameters enable you to obtain offline Report of the records of Incoming,
Outgoing, and Internal calls. See “Station Message Detail Recording–Report”.

• SMDR - Online: These parameters enable you to obtain Online report of Incoming, Outgoing and
Internal calls. With Online SMDR you can obtain details of each call immediately after the call has been
made or received, also set the call record format you want for Incoming calls.

• SMDR - Posting: These parameters enable you to interface third-party call accounting software (CAS)
with ETERNITY for call cost calculation. You can select the protocol supported by the call accounting
software and further customize the handshaking parameters and call record formats. To know more
see “Station Message Detail Recording–Posting”.

740 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Station Message Detail Recording–Storage

What's this?
ETERNITY stores SMDR of Incoming calls, Outgoing Calls and Internal Calls. The call records are stored in the
SMDR buffer. For this, SMDR storage for these types of calls must be enable, and if required further filters can be
set.

ETERNITY NE can store 6000 outgoing calls, 5000 incoming calls, and 1000 internal calls in the SMDR buffer.
Once the SMDR buffer is full, the next call is stored in place of the oldest call in the SMDR buffer, using the First In
First Out (FIFO) logic.

The buffer can be cleared at any time from the System Administrator mode.

The SMDR buffer data is maintained even during power failures. However it is advisable to take frequent printouts
of the calls to avoid accidental loss of the data. See “Station Message Detail Recording–Backup”.

How to configure
To enable storage of SMDR of Outgoing, Incoming and Internal Calls, you must enable this feature in the system
and set the storage filters as per your requirement. To do this,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Scroll to and click the SMDR link under Advanced Settings.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 741

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Storage Filters.

• To configure storage filters for outgoing calls, click SMDR Storage - Outgoing Calls to expand,

• Select the Store Outgoing Calls check box to enable storage of outgoing calls as per the filters you
set. If outgoing call storage is disabled, no outgoing call will be stored.

• If you want outgoing calls that exceed as certain duration to be stored, set the filter Store Calls with
speech duration more than (sec) to the desired duration. All outgoing calls with duration greater than
this value, will be stored.

• If you want outgoing calls exceeding certain metering units to be stored, set the filter Store Calls with
metering units more than (units) to the desired value. All outgoing calls that have metering units
greater than this value will be stored.

• Outgoing calls made by an extension user can be transferred to another extension. In such cases, you
may enable Call Splitting if you want to charge the amount to each extension according to the duration
of speech that each extension was involved in the call.

• If Call Splitting is disabled, you have the option of charging the call amount either to the extension that
originally made the call, i.e. the Originating Extension, or to the extension that was last in speech on the
call, i.e. the Terminating Extension.

742 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 In the When Call Splitting is OFF, charge calls to field, select the desired extension you want to
charge the call to as Originating Extension or Terminating Extension.

• As the SMDR Outgoing call storage buffer is limited, you may limit the storage of calls to a certain
numbers only by configuring Store Calls made to numbers matching with.

You may configure as many as 250 numbers. The system will store records of outgoing calls made to
these numbers only.

ETERNITY uses the best match logic for storing these numbers. For example, if you configure 0 here,
the system will store all outgoing calls made to numbers starting with 0.

• Click Submit to save your Outgoing call storage filter settings.

• To configure storage filters for incoming calls, click SMDR Storage - Incoming Calls to expand,

• Select the Store Incoming Calls check box to enable storage of incoming calls as per the filters you
set. If incoming call storage is disabled, no incoming call will be stored.

• If you want incoming calls that exceed as certain duration to be stored, set the filter Store Calls with
speech duration more than (sec) to the desired duration. All calls with duration greater than this
value, will be stored.

• If you want incoming calls that remain unanswered for certain duration to be stored, set the filter Store
Calls remaining un-answered for more than (sec) to the desired duration. All calls with duration
greater than this value, will be stored.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 743

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If you want incoming calls that were kept on hold for a certain duration to be stored, set the filter Store
Calls kept on hold for more than (sec) to the desired duration.

• If you want all calls, except calls received using DID to be stored, select the Store Normal (non-DID)
Calls check box.

• If you want DID calls to be stored, select the Store DID Calls check box.

• If you want all calls, except calls received using DID, that remained unanswered to be stored, select the
Store Normal (non-DID) Unanswered Calls check box.

• If you want all calls received using DID that remained unanswered to be stored, select the Store
Unanswered DID Calls check box.

• If you want calls made using DISA, select the Store DISA Calls check box.

• Click Submit to save Incoming Call storage filters.

• To configure storage filters for internal calls, click SMDR Storage - Internal Calls to expand,

• Select the Store Internal Calls check box to enable storage of internal calls as per the filters you set.

• To store internal calls that exceed as certain duration, set the filter Store Calls with speech duration
more than (sec) to the desired duration. All internal calls with duration greater than this value, will be
stored.

• Click Submit to save Incoming Call storage filters.

744 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use

The SMDR stored in the buffer can be cleared at any time from the System Administrator mode, using Jeeves or by
dialing SA commands from an extension phone.

To delete SMDR records using Jeeves,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Administrator.

• Click SMDR Management to expand.

• Click SMDR - Delete Call Record to open the page.

• To delete all records in the internal SMDR buffer, select Delete all Internal Calls check box.

• To delete all records in the Incoming SMDR buffer, select the Delete All Incoming Calls check box.

• If you want to delete all records in the Outgoing SMDR buffer, select the radio button Delete All OG Calls.

• You can also delete records of outgoing calls selectively, i.e. delete only records of outgoing calls made by
a particular extension or a range of extensions, or calls made between a certain period.

• To delete records of outgoing calls selectively, select the radio button Delete Selective OG Calls.

• To delete calls made by a particular extension or a range of extensions, select the Delete OG Calls
made by Stations button.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 745

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • In the first edit box, enter the number of the first extension in the range. In the second box, enter the
number of the last extension in the range. If you want to delete the records of a particular extension,
enter the same extension number in both fields.

• To delete the records of outgoing calls made on a particular date or during a certain period, select the
Delete calls made between radio button. Select the start and end Date, Month and Year for this
period. If you want to delete the records of a particular date, enter the same date as start and end.

• Click Submit to save.

• The SMDR buffer will be cleared according to the settings you enabled on this page.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

To delete SMDR records from an extension phone,

• Enter SA mode from a DKP/SLT/Extended IP Phone.

To delete all Incoming calls:

• Dial 1072-180-Reverse SA Password

To delete all Internal calls:

• Dial 1072-150-Reverse SA Password

To delete all Outgoing calls:

• Dial 1072-133-Reverse SA Password

To delete calls made by a particular extension or range of extensions:

• Dial 1072-131-Extension Number-Extension Number

To delete calls made by on a particular date or a between a certain time period:

• 1072-132-DD-MM-YYYY-DD-MM-YYYY (The format of the date depends on the Date Format of the
system)

• Exit SA mode.

746 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Station Message Detail Recording–Online

What's this?
The ETERNITY NE can generate report for the calls as and when the call is made, and send the report to the
printer or a computer.

Matrix ETERNITY NE supports Syslog Client for SMDR. The Syslog Client enables the system to send call records
in syslog format to the remote ‘Syslog Server’. You can view the call records on the remote server. ETERNITY NE
supports SMDR only on TCP.

SMDR generated as and when calls are made or received is called SMDR Online report. In the SMDR Online
report

• Each Internal call is stored with the following fields:

• Extension that made the call.

• Extension to which the call was made.
• Date and time when the call was made.
• Duration of the call in seconds.

• Each Incoming call is stored with the following fields:

• The Trunk on which the call is received.

• Extension number which answered the call.
• Date and time when the call was received.
• Hold, speech, ring duration of the call in seconds.

• Each Outgoing call is stored with the following fields:

• Extension who made the call.

• Trunk line port used for the call.
• Number dialed.
• Date and time when the call matured.
• Duration of the call in seconds.
• Call Units.
• Call Maturity Type.
• Call Type (Normal, DISA, ECF etc.).

How to configure
To get the Online report you must do the following:

• Enable SMDR Storage in the SMDR buffer. See “Station Message Detail Recording–Storage”.

• Assign the Syslog Server IP address as Destination address for Incoming, Outgoing and Internal calls. The
Online report is sent to this address as soon as the incoming call is completed.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 747

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • You may also change the default format for the SMDR Online report for incoming calls, like column
position and field length for calling number, speech duration, type of call etc., as required. For this you
need to configure the settings of SMDR Incoming Online Record Format.

To configure SMDR Online,

• Open Jeeves.
• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the SMDR link to expand.

• Click the SMDR Online sub-link.

• For SMDR - Outgoing Call Online,

• Select the Destination Port.

748 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • In the Destination IP Address: Port field, enter the IP Address and the port of the remote Syslog
Server.

• For SMDR - Incoming Call Online,

• Select the Destination Port.

• In the Destination IP Address: Port field, enter the IP Address and the port of the remote Syslog
Server.

• For SMDR - Internal Call Online,

• Select the Destination Port.

• In the Destination IP Address: Port field, enter the IP Address and the port of the remote Syslog
Server.

• To configure Call Record Format for Incoming Calls, click SMDR Incoming Online Call Record Format
to expand.

• Configure the following Call Record Format parameters as required.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 749

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For each parameter explained briefly below, you can define the column position, field length (i.e. the
number of digits), the alignment (whether left aligned or right), and the filler characters, wherever required.

• Serial Number: This is the serial number generated for each call record. Serial numbers are generated
from 000 to 999. When serial number '999' is reached, the numbers roll over to 000.

Serial Number starts from 1 and not 0.

When this field rolls over, it increments the increment counter.

• Increment Counter: It increments when the serial number counter rolls over. The Increment counter
starts from A, ending at Z, and then roll over back to A.

• Property Code: This is the property code, if required. This is may be an abbreviation of the property
name.

• Extension Number: This is the extension number that answered the call. You can define the column
position and the field length for the extension number.

• Trunk Number: This is the number of the trunk on which the call was received.

The Matrix Format occupies 5 character spaces.

Check-Inn Format occupies 4 character spaces.

The First Character in the Check-Inn Format is X (Fixed). The remaining three characters show the
software port number.

• Date: The date on which the call was received. The date fill flag is to be enabled.

• Filler Character field is applicable for Date, Month and Year, i.e. whether the single digit date is to be
printed as space-X or 0-X. For example, date = 1 is to be displayed as '1' or '01'.

• Where leading zeroes are not required, the date, month and year sub-fields are right aligned and the
spaces are filled with character 'space'.

• The Date field is not linked to the global flag of Date Format. The global Flag of Date format is used,
while using features or in configuration reports but not for SMDR Online. This is because the date
format used by the CAS is not the same as used by the users of the system.

• Time: The time when the call was received. The format of the time field and the time fill flag are to be
programmed.

• Filler Character field is applicable for Hours, Minutes and Seconds i.e. whether the single digit hour is
to be printed as space-X or 0-X. For example, hour = 1 is to be displayed as '1' or '01'.

• In case leading zeroes are not required, Date, Month and Year sub-fields are right aligned and the
spaces are filled with character 'space'.

• Answer Duration: The time after which the call was answered. Program the duration unit and the
duration fill flag.

750 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Hold Duration: The time for which the call was put on hold.

• Speech Duration: The time for which the call was in speech with the extension.


When Duration Unit = Minutes, the rounding off to the nearest whole number is done. For seconds <= 30,
Minute is not incremented. For seconds > 30, minute is incremented.

• Called Number: This is applicable only for calls received on SIP trunks. The number dialed by the
caller is referred to as Called Number.

• Calling Number: This is the number of the Caller.

• DID Digits: This is the number dialed by the caller using DID.

• Remarks: You may use this for indicating the Type of Call, for example, DID.

• Reset Serial Number to 001: The Serial number counter can be reset to 001 after 24 hours (from
00:00 HH:MM) or every 6 hours. By default, 'No Compulsory Reset' is selected, which means the serial
number counter will not be automatically reset.

• Reset Increment Counter: The Increment Counter can be reset to 001 after 24 hours (from 00:00
HH:MM) or every 6 hours. By default, 'No Compulsory Reset' is selected, which means the serial
number counter will not be automatically reset.

• Click Submit to save settings.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

How to use
You can start and stop SMDR Online report from the System Administrator mode using Jeeves or dialing SA
Commands from an extension phone.

To start/stop Online report using Jeeves,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Administrator.

• Click SMDR Management to expand.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 751

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click SMDR-Online link to open the page.

• To start SMDR Online for Outgoing Calls, Incoming Calls and Internal Calls, click the Start button.

752 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To stop SMDR Online for any of these call types, click Abort button.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

To generate SMDR Online report from an extension phone,

• Enter SA mode from a DKP/SLT/Extended IP Phone.

To start/stop Online report for Outgoing Calls:

• Dial 1072-101-1 to start

• Dial 1072-101-0 to stop

To start/stop Online report for Incoming Calls:

• Dial 1072-151-1 to start

• Dial 1072-151-0 to stop

To start/stop Online report for Internal Calls:

• Dial 1072-136-1 to start
• Dial 1072-136-0 to stop

• Exit SA mode.

You may print the Online report captured on the Syslog Server after suitable modification of the format.

The Incoming calls-Online report will look like this:

1 06001 305 16-02-11 16:47:19 4 0 U

2 06001 305 16-02-11 16:47:28 2 0 U
3 06001 305 16-02-11 16:47:34 2 0 U

The Internal calls-Online report will look like this:

IN 309 305 16-02-2011 16:49:20 3

IN 305 309 16-02-2011 16:49:30 2

The Outgoing calls-Online report will look like this:

6 305 06001 123523 16-02-2011 16:33:04 12 1 1.10 D

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 753

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Station Message Detail Recording–Report

What's this?
The ETERNITY can generate SMDR reports in two modes:
• Online: as and when a call is made or received (see “Station Message Detail Recording–Online”)
Or
• Offline: whenever required, the records of calls stored in the buffer can be printed.

Generation of call record reports offline, is called SMDR - Report.

You can generate SMDR Report, either

• Manually: The report is generated whenever you want.

Or
• as per Schedule: The report is generated on a preset Day, Date and Time.

ETERNITY allows you to set a variety of filters for printing SMDR Reports.

ETERNITY NE supports Syslog63 Client for SMDR. The Syslog Client enables the system to send call records in
syslog format to the remote ‘Syslog Server’. You can view the call records on the remote server and print.

ETERNITY NE supports SMDR only on TCP.

How to configure
To be able to generate SMDR -Report, you must do the following:

• Enable SMDR Storage in the SMDR buffer. See “Station Message Detail Recording–Storage”.

• Assign the Syslog Server IP address as Destination address for Incoming, Outgoing and Internal calls.

To configure SMDR Report,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the SMDR link to expand.

63. Syslog is one of the protocols used extensively for sending debug messages, and is defined in RFC 3164.

754 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the SMDR Reports sub-link.

• For SMDR - Outgoing Call Report,

• Select the Destination Port.

• In the Destination IP Address: Port field, enter the IP Address and the port of the remote Syslog
Server.

• For SMDR - Incoming Call Report,

• Select the Destination Port. Default: None.

• In the Destination IP Address: Port field, enter the IP Address and the port of the remote Syslog
Server.

• For SMDR - Internal Call Report,

• Select the Destination Port. Default: None.

• In the Destination IP Address: Port field, enter the IP Address and the port of the remote Syslog
Server.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 755

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Submit to save settings.

How to use
You can print SMDR Report whenever you want or schedule printing of the report from the System Administrator
mode using Jeeves or dialing SA Commands from an extension phone.

To Print SMDR-Report using Jeeves,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Administrator.

• Click SMDR Management to expand.

756 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Outgoing Calls
• To print Outgoing Calls with filters, click OG Call - Print Filters link.

Setting Print Filters

• Set the following filters as desired. You can print records of outgoing calls Originating and outgoing calls
Terminating on specific Extension numbers, and trunks: CO, Mobile, SIP.

You can also print outgoing calls made using Account Code, and Calls for Department Billing Groups.

To print outgoing calls made to certain numbers, enter the desired numbers in the Print Calls made to
numbers matching with fields.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 757

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To print outgoing calls made on a certain date or between a certain time period, set the filter Calls
made between. To print calls made on a particular date, select the same Date, Month and Year in both
fields.

• To print outgoing calls made at a particular time, set the Hours and Minutes in 24-hour format calI in the
filter Calls made between 00: 00 and 23:59.

• If you want outgoing calls that exceed as certain duration to be printed, set the filter Calls with
duration more than (sec) to the desired duration. All outgoing calls with duration greater than this
value, will be printed.

• If you want outgoing calls exceeding certain metering units to be printed, set the filter Calls with units
more than (units) to the desired value. All outgoing calls that have metering units greater than this
value will be stored.

• Click Submit to save.

Scheduled Report Generation

• To generate SMDR Report of outgoing calls on a particular day, day of the week, or day of the month,
set Scheduled Report Generation, as required.

• Click Submit to save.

Manual Report Generation

• You can print the SMDR Report of outgoing calls any time you want. To do this, click the Print Report
button.
• To stop printing, click Abort Print button.

758 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Incoming Calls
• To print Incoming Calls with filters, click the IC Call - Print Filters link.

Setting Print Filters

• Set the filters as desired. You can print records of incoming calls received on a specific extension or a
range of extensions and trunk ports: CO, Mobile, SIP.

You can also print incoming calls of different Call Types: Normal calls, calls received using DID, calls
that remained Unanswered, Unanswered DID calls, and calls made using DISA.

• To print incoming calls received from certain numbers, enter the CLI of these numbers in the Print
Calls received with numbers matching with fields.

• To print incoming calls received on a certain date or between a certain time period, set the filter Calls
received between. To print calls made on a particular date, select the same Date, Month and Year in
both fields.

• To print incoming calls received at a particular time, set the Hours and Minutes in 24-hour format calI in
the filter Calls received between 00: 00 and 23:59.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 759

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To print incoming calls that remained unanswered for more than a certain duration, set the filter Calls
remain unanswered for duration more than (sec).

• To print calls that were kept on hold for more than a certain duration, set the filter Calls kept on hold
with duration more than (seconds) to the desired value.

• To print calls with speech duration of a certain duration, set the filter Calls with speech duration more
than (seconds)

• Click Submit to save.

Scheduled Report Generation

• To generate SMDR Report of incoming calls on a particular day, day of the week, or day of the month, set
Scheduled Report Generation, as required.

• Click Submit to save.

760 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Manual Report Generation
• You can print the SMDR Report of incoming calls any time you want. To do this, click the Print Report
button.

• To stop printing, click Abort Print button.

Internal Calls
• To print Internal call Report with filters, click Internal Call - Print Filters link.

Setting Print Filters

• To print calls made by a particular extension or a range of extensions, set the filter Calls made by
Stations, by entering the extension numbers in the From and To fields.

If you want to print calls made by a particular extension only, enter the same extension number in both
From and To fields.

You can also print calls made and calls received by these extensions by selecting the Call Type.
• Select Both as Call Type, to print calls made and received by the extensions.
• Select Caller as Call Type, to print only those calls that were made by the extension.
• Select Receiver as Call Type, to print only those calls that were received by the extension.
• Select None, if you do not want to use the Call Type filter.

Scheduled Report Generation

• To generate SMDR Report of internal calls on a particular day, day of the week, or day of the month, set
Scheduled Report Generation, as required.

• Click Submit to save.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 761

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Manual Report Generation
• You can print the SMDR Report of internal calls any time you want. To do this, click the Print Report
button.

• To stop printing, click Abort Print button.

You may print the Online report captured on the Syslog Server after suitable modification of the format.

To generate SMDR-Report from an extension phone,

• Enter SA mode from an SLT/DKP/Extended IP phone.

Manual Report Generation

• Enter SA mode from an SLT/DKP/Extended IP phone.

To start/stop Report for Outgoing Calls:

• Dial 1072-121-1 to start

• Dial 1072-121-0 to stop

To start/stop Report for Incoming Calls:

• Dial 1072-171-1 to start

• Dial 1072-171-0 to stop

To start/stop Report for Internal Calls:

• Dial 1072-141-1 to start

• Dial 1072-141-0 to stop

• Exit SA mode.

Scheduled Report Generation

• Enter SA mode from an SLT/DKP/Extended IP phone.

To enable Scheduled Report for Outgoing Calls:

• Dial 1072-122-1 to enable Daily Scheduled Report.

• Dial 1072-122-2 to enable Weekly Scheduled Report.
• Dial 1072-122-3 to enable Monthly Scheduled Report.
• Dial 1072-122-0 to disable Scheduled Report.

To enable Scheduled Report for Incoming Calls:

• Dial 1072-172-1 to enable Daily Scheduled Report.

• Dial 1072-172-2 to enable Weekly Scheduled Report.
• Dial 1072-172-3 to enable Monthly Scheduled Report.

762 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dial 1072-172-0 to disable Scheduled Report.

To enable Scheduled Report for Internal Calls:

• Dial 1072-142-1 to enable Daily Scheduled Report.

• Dial 1072-142-2 to enable Weekly Scheduled Report.
• Dial 1072-142-3 to enable Monthly Scheduled Report.
• Dial 1072-142-0 to disable Scheduled Report.

• Exit SA mode.

Print Filter Settings - Outgoing Calls

To set Print Filters for Outgoing Calls,

• Enter SA mode from an SLT/DKP/Extended IP phone.

• Dial the Commands listed in the table for the desired filter.

Filter Commands Value

Calls originated on Stations 1072-102-Extension No.-Extension No. Extension No.: 201 - 318

Calls originated on CO 1072 - 183 - CO - CO CO: 01 - 06

Calls originated on Mobile 1072 - 187 - Mobile- Mobile Mobile: 01-02

Calls originated on SIP 1072 - 188 - SIP- SIP SIP: 303 - 318

Calls terminated on CO 1072-103-CO-CO CO: 01 - 06

Calls terminated on Mobile 1072-107-Mobile-Mobile Mobile: 01-02

Calls terminated on SIP 1072-108-SIP-SIP SIP: 303 - 318

Calls made using Account Code 1072-115-Account Code-Account Code Account Code: 0000 - 9999.

Calls for Department Billing 1072-109-Dept Group No.-Dept. Group Dept. Group: 01 - 05
Group No.

Calls made on or from date 1072-110-DD-MM-YYYY-DD-MM-YYYY DD: 01-31

between MM: 01-12
YYYY: 0000-9999

Calls made at or between time 1072-111-HH-MM-HH-MM HH: 00-23

MM: 00-59

Calls with duration more than 1072-113-Seconds Seconds: 000-999

Calls with metering units more 1072-114-Units Units: 0000-9999

than

Time for Scheduled report Daily 1072-123-HH-MM HH: 00-23

MM: 00-59

Time for Scheduled report 1072-124-Day-HH-MM Day: 1 - 7

Weekly HH: 00 - 23
MM: 00 - 59

Time for Scheduled report 1072-125-Date-HH-MM Date: 01 - 31

Monthly HH: 00 - 23
MM: 00 - 59

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 763

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Filter Commands Value

Set filters to Default 1072-120

• Exit SA mode.

Print Filter Settings - Incoming Calls

To set Print Filters for Outgoing Calls,

• Enter SA mode from an SLT/DKP/Extended IP phone.

• Dial the Commands listed in the table for the desired filter.

Filter Commands Values

Calls received on Stations 1072-160-Extension No.- Extension No.: 201 - 318

Extension No.

Calls received on CO Port 1072-161-CO-CO CO: 01 - 06

Calls received on Mobile Port 1072-165-Mobile-Mobile Mobile: 01-02

Calls received on SIP Trunk 1072-166-SIP-SIP SIP: 303 - 318

Print Normal Calls 1072-152-Flag Flag:

0 = Disable
1 = Enable

Print DID Calls 1072-153-Flag Flag:

0 = Disable
1 = Enable

Print Unanswered Calls 1072-154-Flag Flag:

0 = Disable
1 = Enable

Print DID Unanswered Calls 1072-155-Flag Flag:

0 = Disable
1 = Enable

Print DISA Calls 1072-156-Flag Flag:

0 = Disable
1 = Enable

Calls received between Date 1072-167-DD-MM-YYYY-DD-MM- DD: 01-31

YYYY MM: 01-12
YYYY: 0000-9999

Calls received between Time 1072-168-HH-MM-HH-MM HH: 00-23

MM: 00-59

Calls remain unanswered for 1072-158-Seconds Seconds: 000-999

duration more than

Calls kept on hold with duration 1072-159-Seconds Seconds: 000-999

more than

764 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Filter Commands Values

Calls with speech duration more 1072-157-Seconds Seconds: 000-999

than

Time for Scheduled report Daily 1072-173-HH-MM HH: 00-23

MM: 00-59

Time for Scheduled report 1072-174-Day-HH-MM Day: 1 - 7

Weekly HH: 00 - 23
MM: 00 - 59

Time for Scheduled report 1072-175-Date-HH-MM Date: 01 - 31

Monthly HH: 00 - 23
MM: 00 - 59

Set filters to Default 1072-170

• Exit SA mode.

Print Filter Settings - Internal Calls

To set Print Filters for Internal Calls,

• Enter SA mode from an SLT/DKP/Extended IP phone.

• Dial the Commands listed in the table for the desired filter.

Filter Command Values

Print Calls made by Stations 1072-137-Extension No.-Extension Extension No.: 201 - 318
Number No.-Call Type
Call Type: 1 - 3
1 = Receiver
2 = Caller
3 = Both

Calls with speech duration more 1072-138-Seconds Seconds: 000-999

than (seconds)

Time for Scheduled report Daily 1072-143-HH-MM HH: 00-23

MM: 00-59

Time for Scheduled report 1072-144-Day-HH-MM Day: 1 - 7

Weekly HH: 00 - 23
MM: 00 - 59

Time for Scheduled report 1072-145-Date-HH-MM Date: 01 - 31

Monthly HH: 00 - 23
MM: 00 - 59

• Exit SA mode.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 765

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The offline Report for Incoming Calls would look like this:

SMDR INCOMING CALLS REPORT AS ON 02-02-2011(Wed) AT09:10

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STN : 000000 To 999999 CO : 001 To 006 N : Y ANS DUR :000
DATE : 01-05-2011 To 31-01-2011 MOB : 001 To 002 D : Y HLD DUR :000
TIME : 00:00 To 23:59 SIP : 001 To 004 U : Y SPCH DUR :000
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SrN CallingNo TRK STN DATE TIME Ans Hld Spch R
Dur Dur Dur
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 03004 19-01-11 17:24:53 11 0 0 U
2 03001 19-01-11 18:23:13 47 0 0 U
3 03001 19-01-11 18:24:29 47 0 0 U
4 03001 201 19-01-11 18:27:07 9 0 5 N
5 03001 201 19-01-11 19:55:53 19 0 6 N
6 03001 201 19-01-11 20:09:11 11 0 6 N
7 03001 201 19-01-11 20:09:32 7 0 30 N
8 03002 21-01-11 12:12:43 23 0 0 U
9 03002 21-01-11 12:13:14 47 0 0 U
10 03001 303 21-01-11 12:11:33 124 0 5 D
11 03002 21-01-11 12:14:05 48 0 0 U
12 03001 19001 21-01-11 12:15:10 35 0 145 I
13 03001 303 21-01-11 17:16:08 120 0 5 D
14 03001 303 21-01-11 17:18:17 7 0 10 N
15 03001 303 21-01-11 17:21:50 12 0 0 U
16 03001 301 21-01-11 17:45:20 5 0 3 N
17 03001 29-01-11 14:47:10 6 0 0 DU
:
:
:
51 03006 3601 29-01-11 16:12:07 14 0 0U
52 03002 3601 29-01-11 16:15:33 17 0 0U
53 03003 3601 29-01-11 16:15:33 17 0 0U
54 03004 3601 29-01-11 16:15:33 17 0 0U
55 03005 3601 29-01-11 16:15:33 17 0 0U
56 03006 3601 29-01-11 16:15:33 17 0 0U
57 03001 3601 29-01-11 17:29:16 7 0 0U
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL CALLS :57
TOTAL ANS DUR : 1783 TOTAL HOLD DUR : 0 TOTAL SPCH DUR : 239
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R(CALL TYPE):N=Normal, D=DID, U:UnAns, DU=DID-UnAns, I=DISA, T=Transit
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eternity V10R04 Page : 2

766 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The offline report for Internal Calls would look like this:

SMDR INTERNAL CALLS REPORT AS ON 02-02-2011(Wed) AT 09:16

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SrN CALLING STATION CALLED STATION DATE TIME DUR
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 204 301 12-01-2011 15:49:05 47
2 302 301 12-01-2011 16:51:28 3
3 301 201 12-01-2011 16:52:11 63
4 302 301 12-01-2011 17:00:23 29
5 302 301 12-01-2011 17:01:19 24
6 201 301 12-01-2011 17:01:19 2
7 302 3931 12-01-2011 18:11:03 2
8 303 3931 12-01-2011 18:25:53 3
9 303 3931 12-01-2011 18:26:03 20
10 3931 201 12-01-2011 18:26:20 2
11 302 301 12-01-2011 18:38:48 56
12 302 201 12-01-2011 18:38:40 66
13 302 201 12-01-2011 18:40:06 112
14 302 301 12-01-2011 18:40:01 121
15 302 201 12-01-2011 18:42:13 48
16 302 301 12-01-2011 18:42:08 52
17 302 301 12-01-2011 18:43:06 58
18 301 302 12-01-2011 18:44:08 13
19 301 302 12-01-2011 18:44:24 36
20 301 201 12-01-2011 18:44:28 36
21 3931 302 13-01-2011 10:46:04 1
22 203 302 13-01-2011 10:59:38 5
23 203 302 13-01-2011 11:17:08 18
24 203 302 13-01-2011 11:18:16 2
25 302 203 13-01-2011 11:21:05 4
26 302 301 13-01-2011 11:27:38 20
27 201 303 13-01-2011 11:29:31 29
28 201 303 13-01-2011 11:30:26 17
29 201 301 13-01-2011 11:30:34 9
30 3931 303 13-01-2011 11:48:23 1
31 3931 302 13-01-2011 11:52:04 2
33 302 3931 13-01-2011 11:54:31 13
34 3931 303 13-01-2011 11:54:41 1
35 302 303 13-01-2011 11:54:43 15
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eternity V10R04 Page : 1

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 767

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The offline report for Outgoing Calls would look like this:

SMDR OUTGOING CALLS REPORT AS ON 02-02-2011(Wed) AT 09:14

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Originated on Terminated on
STN : 000000 To 999999 CO : 001 To 006 CO : 001 To 006
DATE : 01-05-2011 To 31-01-2011 MOB : 001 To 002 MOB : 001 To 002
TIME : 00:00 To 23:59 SIP : 001 To 004 SIP : 001 To 004
DEPT GROUP : 00 To 00
DUR(sec) : 000
UNITS : 0000
ACCOUNT No : 000 To 000
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SrN STN TRK CalledNo DATE TIME DUR UNIT AMOUNT R
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 3012 26001 3001 12-01-2011 11:45:04 8 1 1.10 I
2 3012 26001 3005 14-01-2011 09:39:13 9 1 1.10 I
3 3012 03001 3005 15-01-2011 17:35:33 27 1 1.10 D
4 3012 03002 112 17-01-2011 12:22:11 18 1 1.10 D
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL CALLS : 4
TOTAL DUR : 62 TOTAL UNITS : 4 TOTAL AMOUNT : 4.40
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TRK: 03=CO, 25=MOB, 26=SIP; STN: 01=SLT, 02=DKP, 34=SP, 36=VS
R (CALL TYPE): O = DISA, A = Auto Redial, E = External Forwarded, T = Transit
MATURITY: C = CPD, R = Reversal, D = Delay, I = Connect
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eternity V10R04 Page : 1

768 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Station Message Detail Recording–Posting

The Station Message Detail Record (SMDR)-Posting feature of ETERNITY NE is used for interfacing the system
with a third party Call Accounting Software (CAS).

When ETERNITY NE is interfaced with a third party Call Accounting Software (CAS) to determine the cost of the
call(s) made by the extension users, the system uses SMDR-Posting to send to CAS call record details, like
number to which the call was made by the extension user, number of the extension from which the call was made,
the date and time when the call was made, the duration of the call, metering pulses incurred for the call, etc. On
receipt of this information, the CAS calculates the cost of the call for billing.

As different CAS interfaces support different protocols, the ETERNITY NE offers the flexibility to send call detail
records using the protocol supported by CAS. ETERNITY NE supports as many as 15 different widely-used CAS
protocols such as, Holidex, Hobic, Micros A, Micros B, Comm One, Call-Inn, Bell-HOBIC, XIOX, RSI and others.
Each of these are described below.

Each posting protocol has its own handshaking protocol and call record format. You may configure any one of
these, depending upon the protocol supported by the CAS you have interfaced with ETERNITY NE. It is also
possible to customize the posting protocol to match the settings required by the CAS you have interfaced.

ETERNITY NE supports SMDR-Posting is on TCP/IP. The CAS is interfaced on the Ethernet port of the ETERNITY
NE. For every outgoing call, call detail record is posted on the Ethernet port.

SMDR-Posting sends outgoing call records only.

SMDR-Posting Protocols
The ETERNITY NE supports as many as 15 different posting protocols from the system to CAS. The flow of
messages between the ETERNITY NE and various protocols of CAS Interface is described in the following.

1. Holidex/HOBIS A
This protocol is used by Amstar, CLS, Compass, Compu-solve, Dehan, Encore, Fabco, HIS, Holidex, HRGAS,
InnSolutions, Inn-Star, Lodgemate, Logistix, Omron, Otto Clerk, Reserve 5, Resort Computer, RDP, Springer-
Miller Systems, Star and Stuart.

HOBIS B is used by EECO and New Systems Protocol for transfer of messages from the ETERNITY to CAS.

Case 1: Normal delivery of message to CAS

ETERNITY to CAS CAS to ETERNITY

ENQ >

< ACK

STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC >

< ACK

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 769

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Case 2: Busy Response from the CAS

ETERNITY to CAS CAS to ETERNITY

ENQ >

< NAK (CAS responds but cannot accept at this time)

The ETERNITY will retransmit an ENQ after 5 seconds until the CAS accepts the message or until 4 NAK
responses are received.

Case 3: No Response from CAS

ETERNITY to CAS CAS to ETERNITY

ENQ > (Wait for 5 seconds)

No Response

The ETERNITY will retransmit an ENQ after 5 seconds until CAS responds or until 4 Unsuccessful ENQ
responses have been sent.

Case 4: Negative Response to data transfer

ETERNITY to CAS CAS to ETERNITY

ENQ >

< ACK

STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC >

< NAK

ENQ > (Wait for 3 seconds)

STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC > (Maximum of 3 tries)

< ACK

The ETERNITY will make a maximum of 3 attempts to send the message. If the message is still not
transmitted successfully, it will drop the message and proceed to the transmission of the next message.

Case 5: No Response to data transfer

ETERNITY to CAS CAS to ETERNITY

ENQ >

< ACK

STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC > (Wait for 11 seconds)

No Response

ENQ >

< ACK

STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC > (Maximum of 3 tries)

770 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The ETERNITY NE will try to send the message for a maximum of 3 tries. If the message is not transmitted
successfully, the system will drop the message and proceed for the transmission of the next message. Also,
the system will print a System Fault event and the message.

Link Control Characters

Character
Control
Meaning ASCII
Char.
Value

ENQ Used to request the status of the CAS HEX 05

ACK Positive Acknowledgement by the CAS (Indicates successful reception of data by HEX 06
the CAS)

NAK Negative Acknowledgement by the CAS (Unsuccessful reception of data by the HEX 15
CAS)

STX This marks the beginning of the data transfer. It also starts the accumulation of the HEX 02
BCC

ETX This is the last data character. Marks the end of the data. It is immediately followed HEX 03
by the BCC.

BCC This is a 'block check character' used to verify the successful transfer of data Depends on
between the systems. BCC is calculated by processing through an accumulatory the data
by an Exclusive OR operation. The BCC process should start with the character
after the STX character.

2. HOBIS B
Handshaking Parameters for HOBIS B are as below:

Positive Response form the CAS

ETERNITY to CAS CAS to ETERNITY

<LF> -message-<CR>

ACK

Negative Response form the CAS

ETERNITY to CAS CAS to ETERNITY

<LF>-message-<CR>

NAK

<LF>-message-<CR>

NAK

<LF>-message-<CR>

NAK

<LF>-message-<CR>

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 771

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The ETERNITY NE will make 3 tries (default) to send the message for Data Transfer Retry Count - on
Negative Response. If the ACK is still not received from the CAS, the ETERNITY will proceed to the next
message.

No Response from the CAS

ETERNITY to CAS CAS to ETERNITY

<LF>-message-<CR> (wait for Response to Data Timeout

(sec), default 5 sec)

(no response)

After 3 seconds, (Data Transfer Retry Timer on No

Response), retransmit

<LF>-message-<CR> (wait for Response to Data Timeout

(sec), default 5 sec)

After 3 seconds (Data Transfer Retry Timer

on No Response), retransmit

<LF>-message-<CR> (wait for Response to Data Timeout

(sec), default 5 sec)

After 3 seconds (Data Transfer Retry Timer on No

Response), retransmit

<LF>-message-<CR> (wait for Response to Data Timeout

(sec), default 5 sec)

After sending the message the ETERNITY NE will wait for the response to Data Timeout time. If no response
is received from CAS for the sent message, the ETERNITY NE will log this message in the System Fault Log
and look for new message to be sent to CAS.

Link Control Characters

Control Char. Meaning Character ASCII Value

ACK Positive Acknowledgement from CAS HEX 06

NAK Negative Acknowledgement from CAS HEX 15

This marks the beginning of the message.

LF HEX 0A
Start of the Message (Line Feed)

CR End of the Message HEX 0D (Carriage Return)

3. Hobic
Protocol for transfer of messages from ETERNITY to CAS.

Case 1: Positive Response from the CAS

ETERNITY to CAS CAS to ETERNITY

SOM-(tex)-EOM >

< ACK

772 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Case 2: Negative Response from the CAS

SOM-(text)-EOM > (Wait for 3 seconds)

< NAK

SOM-(text)-EOM > (Wait for 3 seconds)

< NAK

SOM-(text)-EOM > (Wait for 3 seconds)

The ETERNITY will make a maximum of 3 attempts to send the message. If the message is still not
transmitted successfully, it will drop the message and proceed to the transmission of the next message.

Case 3: No Response from the CAS

SOM-(text)-EOM > (Wait for 5 seconds)

No Response

The ETERNITY will wait for 5 seconds to receive response from the CAS. If no response is received from the
CAS during this time period, it will drop the message and proceed to the transmission of the next message.

Link Control Characters

Control Char. Meaning Character ASCII

Value

ACK Positive Acknowledgement by the CAS HEX 06

(Indicates successful reception of data by the CAS)

NAK Negative Acknowledgement by the CAS HEX 15

(Unsuccessful reception of data by the CAS)

SOM This marks the beginning of the message. Start of Message. HEX 0A (Line Feed)

EOM End of Message. This marks the end of message. HEX 0D or 0A or 0C

(CR or LF or FF)

4. Micros A
Handshaking protocol for Micros A shall be as shown below:

Case 1: Positive Response from the CAS

ETERNITY CAS

Text Plus Carriage Return >

<y

The first field of Text is always 'ac01' which marks the start of text. However, this field is a part of message and
not a link control character.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 773

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Case 2: Negative Response from the CAS

ETERNITY CAS

Text Plus Carriage Return > (Wait for 3 seconds)

<n

Text Plus Carriage Return > (Wait for 3 seconds)

The ETERNITY will make a maximum of 2 attempts to send the message. If the message is still not
transmitted successfully, it will drop the message and proceed for the transmission of the next message.

Case 3: No Response from the CAS

ETERNITY CAS

Text plus Carriage Return > (Wait for 5 seconds)

No Response

The ETERNITY will wait for 5 seconds and if no response is received from the CAS, it will drop the message
and proceed to the transmission of the next message.

Link Control Characters

Control Character Meaning Character ASCII value

Positive Acknowledgement by the CAS

ACK HEX 79 (ASCII 'y')
(Indicates successful reception of data by the CAS)

Negative Acknowledgement by the CAS (Unsuccessful

NAK HEX 6E (ASCII 'n')
reception of data by the CAS)

5. Micros B
Handshaking protocol for Micros B is as shown below:

Case 1: Positive Response from the CAS

ETERNITY CAS

Text Plus Carriage Return >

< ACK

The first field of Text is always 'ac01' which marks the start of text. This field, however, is a part of the
message and not a link control character.

Case 2: Negative Response from the CAS

ETERNITY CAS

Text Plus Carriage Return > (Wait for 3 seconds)

< NAK

Text Plus Carriage Return > (Wait for 3 seconds)

774 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The ETERNITY will try to send the message for a maximum of 2 tries and if still the message is not
transmitted successfully, it will drop the message and proceed for the transmission of the next message. It will
also print a System Fault event and the message.

Case 3: No Response from the CAS

ETERNITY CAS

Text plus Carriage Return > (Wait for 5 seconds)

No Response

The ETERNITY will wait for 5 seconds and if no response is received from the CAS, it will drop the message
and proceed to transmit the next message.

Link Control Characters

Control Character Meaning Character value

ACK Positive Acknowledgement by the CAS HEX 06

(Indicates successful reception of data by the CAS)

NAK Negative Acknowledgement by the CAS HEX 15

(Unsuccessful reception of data by the CAS)

6. Comm One, Call-Inn

No handshaking is required when any of the above protocols is selected.

7. RSI-CMS
ETERNITY sends call detail record in the following format to the RSI-CMS call accounting interface.
STX-Message-EXT

Call accounting interface will not send any response, ACK/NAK, for the messages received.

Call Detail Record Formats

The Call Detail Record formats for various protocols are given below.

HOLIDEX:

Start
Field Filler/
Parameter Column Alignment Remarks
Length Character
Number

Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero Every 6 hours it is cleared to 001.

(Starting from mid-night 00:00:00)

Increment 04 01 NA NA Every 6 hours it is cleared to A.

Counter (Starting from mid-night 00:00:00)

Property Code 06 03 NA NA As per the Programmed String

Date 10 05 NA Zero MM/DD

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 775

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Start
Field Filler/
Parameter Column Alignment Remarks
Length Character
Number

Extension 16 05 RA Space --
Number

Time 22 05 NA Zero HH:MM

Duration 28 04 RA Zero Duration is in Minutes.

Currency 33 01 NA NA $
Symbol

Amount 34 06 RA Zero Format is DDD.CC

Called Number 41 12 LA Space Area code, Exchange code and

Subscriber Number separated by dash.
Space is sent in place of Area Code
and first dash if area code is not
present.

Call Type 54 1 NA NA As per the Call Type Indicator table

Indicator programmed by the SE. The SE should
program L = local, F=International and
Space shall be used for long distance.

Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --

Units 00 NA NA NA --

Location 00 NA NA NA --

Account Code 00 NA NA NA --

Prefix String 00 NA NA NA --
(ac01)

Remarks 00 NA NA NA --

• The Called Number will be left aligned.

• If the actual dialed number is less than the specified field width, the number will be sent as per the
programmed alignment.

• If the dialed number length is greater than the width of the dialed number field, the trailing number digits
will be removed. For example: if the number dialed is 15134036508 (11 digits) and the width of the
called number field is 8, then the first 8 digits will be sent.

HOBIS A:

Start Column Field Filler

Parameter Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character

Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero --

Increment 04 01 NA NA --
Counter

776 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Start Column Field Filler
Parameter Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character

Property Code 06 03 NA Space As per the Programmed String

Date 10 05 NA Zero Date Format is MM/DD

Station Number 17 04 RA Space --

Time 22 05 NA Zero Time Format is HH:MM

Duration 28 04 RA Zero In Minutes. Round up to the nearest

whole minute

Currency Symbol 33 01 NA NA $

Amount 34 06 RA Zero In DDD.CC

Called Number 41 12 LA Space Continuous number. Not separated

by dashes.

Call Type 54 01 NA NA By default, since the table is blank,

Indicator this field shall be blank. The SE is
expected to program the call
indicator fields as per his
requirement.

Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --

Units 00 NA NA NA --

Location 00 NA NA NA --

Account Code 00 NA NA NA --

Prefix String 00 NA NA NA --
(ac01)

Remarks 00 NA NA NA --

NA = Not Applicable, RA = Right Aligned, LA = Left Aligned.

HOBIS B:
Same as HOBIS A, except the handshaking parameters.

HOBIC:

Start Column Field Filler

Parameter Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character

Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero Every 6 hours it is cleared to 001.

(Starting from mid-night 00:00:00)

Increment 04 01 NA NA Every 6 hours it is cleared to A.

Counter (Starting from mid-night 00:00:00)

Property Code 06 03 NA NA As per the Programmed String

Date 10 05 NA Zero MM/DD

Station Number 16 05 RA Space --

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 777

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Start Column Field Filler
Parameter Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character

Time 22 05 NA Zero HH:MM

Duration 28 04 RA Zero Duration is in Minutes.

Currency Symbol 33 01 NA NA $

Amount 34 06 RA Zero Format is DDD.CC

Called Number 41 15 LA Space Area code, Exchange code and

Subscriber Number separated by
dash. Space is sent in place of Area
Code and first dash if area code is
not present.

Call Type 57 1 NA NA As per the Call Type Indicator table

Indicator programmed by the SE. The SE
should program L = local,
F=International and Space shall be
used for long distance.

Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --

Units 00 NA NA NA --

Location 00 NA NA NA --

Account Code 00 NA NA NA --

Prefix String 00 NA NA NA --
(ac01)

Remarks 00 NA NA NA --

By default the link control character EOM will be Carriage Return (CR - HEX 0D), Line Feed (LF - HEX 0A)
and Form Feed (FF - HEX 0C)

BELL HOBIC:

Start Column Field Filler

Parameter Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character

Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero The Serial number wraps to

001 every midnight.

Increment Counter 04 01 NA NA The Increment Counter

wraps to 001 every midnight.

Property Code 06 03 NA NA As per the Programmed

String

Date 10 05 NA Zero MM/DD, Date on which call

is started

Station Number 16 05 LA Space --

Time 22 05 NA Zero HH:MM, Time on which call

is started

778 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Start Column Field Filler
Parameter Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character

Duration 28 04 RA Zero Duration is in Minutes,

(rounded to nearest minute)

Currency Symbol 33 01 NA NA $

Amount 34 06 NA Zero Format is DDD.CC

Called Number 41 08 RA Space Exchange code and

Subscriber Number
separated by dash.

No Area Code is
provided.

Call Type Indicator 50 1 NA NA As per the Call Type

Indicator table programmed
by the SE. The SE should
follow the recommendations
as given along with the
programming command.

Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --

Units 00 NA NA NA --

Location 00 NA NA NA --

Account Code 00 NA NA NA --

Prefix String (ac01) 00 NA NA NA --

Remarks 00 NA NA NA --

MICROS A:

Start Column
Parameter Field Length Alignment Fill Char. Remarks
Number

Serial Number 00 NA NA NA --

Increment Counter 00 NA NA NA --

Property Code 00 NA NA NA --

Station Number 06 04 RA Zero --

Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --

Date 00 NA NA NA --

Time 00 NA NA NA --

Duration 00 NA NA NA --

Units 00 NA NA NA --

Amount 11 06 RA Zero Format is DDDDCC

Currency Symbol 00 NA NA NA --

Call Type Indicator 00 00 NA NA --

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 779

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Start Column
Parameter Field Length Alignment Fill Char. Remarks
Number

Location 00 NA NA NA --

Called Number 18 12 RA Zero --

Account Code 00 NA NA NA --

Prefix String (ac01) 1 4 NA NA --

Remarks 00 NA NA NA --

MICROS B:
Same as MICROS A, except the handshaking parameters.

HILTON:

Field Start Column Field Alignment Filler Remarks

Number Length Character

Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero The Serial number wraps to 001

every midnight.

Increment 04 01 NA NA This field is not documented but is

Counter always supposed to be an A.

Property Code 06 03 NA NA As per the Programmed String

Date 10 05 NA Zero MM/DD, date on which session

started

Station Number 16 04 LA Space Whether this field is of four digits or

five digits is not documented. Hence,
it is assumed to be of four digits.

Time 21 05 NA Zero HH:MM, Time on which session

started

Duration 27 01 NA NA Duration is in Minutes. What happens

to bigger duration call is now known.
We can assume roll over. Round it to
the nearest minute.

Currency Symbol 29 01 NA NA $

Amount 30 06 RA Zero Format is DDD.CC

Called Number 37 12 RA Space Area Code, Exchange code and

Subscriber Number separated by
dash. IF no Area Code is available,
then space is used in place of Area
Code and first dash.

Call Type 00 NA NA NA As per the Call Type Indicator table

Indicator programmed by the SE. The SE
should follow the recommendations
as given along with the programming
command.

780 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Field Start Column Field Alignment Filler Remarks
Number Length Character

Location 00 NA NA NA --

Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --

Units 00 NA NA NA --

Account Code 00 NA NA NA --

Prefix String 00 NA NA NA --
(ac01)

Remarks 00 NA NA NA --

In this protocol, the ETX is at the column position 61; hence the ETERNITY will send blanks from column position
50 to 60.

XIOX:

Start Column Field Filler

Field Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character

Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero The Serial number wraps to 001

every midnight.

Increment 04 01 NA NA This field is initialized to B. This field

Counter can be programmed to any other
value. However, we shall not give this
programmable within the XIOX
protocol itself. If it is required by the
customer to start his field from say
'C', he shall have to use customized
option.

Property Code 06 03 NA NA As per the Programmed String

Date 10 05 NA Zero MM/DD

Station Number 16 04 LA Space Whether this field is of four digits or

five digits is not documented. Hence,
it is assumed to be of four digits.

Time 21 05 NA Zero HH:MM

Duration 27 04 NA NA Duration is in Minutes. What happens

to bigger duration call is now known.
We can assume roll over.

Currency Symbol 32 01 NA NA $

Amount 33 06 RA Zero Format is DDD.CC

Called Number 40 08 RA Space Exchange code and Subscriber

Number separated by dash. No Area
code is sent

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 781

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Start Column Field Filler
Field Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character

Call Type 49 01 NA NA As per the Call Type Indicator table

Indicator programmed by the SE. The SE
should follow the recommendations
as given along with the programming
command.

Location 00 NA NA NA --

Units 00 NA NA NA --

Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --

Account Code 00 NA NA NA --

Prefix String 00 NA NA NA --
(ac01)

Remarks 00 NA NA NA --

Comm One:

Filler Char.
Start Column Field Filler Char.
Parameter Format Alignment (Decimal
No. Length Required?
Value)

Serial Number 00 00 X X X X

Increment
00 01 X X X X
Counter

Property Code 00 00 X X X X

Station Number 06 04 Fixed LA Yes 032

Trunk Number 12 05 Matrix Format RA Yes 032

Date 37 08 MM/DD/YY RA Yes 032

Time 48 08 HH:MM:SS RA Yes 032

Duration 57 06 HHMMSS RA Yes 048

Units 00 00 X X X X

Amount 00 00 X X X X

Currency 00 00 X X X X

Call Type
00 00 X X X X
Indicator

Location 00 00 X X X X

Called Number 18 18 Continuous LA Yes 032

Account Code 01 03 Fixed RA Yes 048

Remarks 00 00 X X X X

782 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call-Inn:

Start Column Field Filler Char. Filler Char.

Parameter Format Alignment
No. Length Required? (Decimal Value)

Serial Number 00 00 X X X X

Increment
00 01 X X X X
Counter

Property Code 00 00 X X X X

Extension
06 04 Fixed LA Yes 032
Number

Trunk Number 00 NA X X X X

Date 37 08 MM/DD/YY RA Yes 032

Time 48 05 HH:MM RA Yes 032

Duration 57 08 HH:MM:SS RA Yes 048

Units 00 00 X X X X

Amount 00 00 X X X X

Currency 00 00 X X X X

Call Type
00 00 X X X X
Indicator

Location 00 00 X X X X

Called Number 18 18 Continuous LA Yes 032

Account Code 00 00 X X X X

Remarks 00 00 X X X X

RSI-CMS:

Start Column Field Filler Char. Filler Char.

Parameter Format Alignment
No. Length Required? (Decimal Value)

Serial Number 02 04 Fixed RA Yes 048

Increment Counter 00 00 X X X X

Property Code 00 00 X X X X

Extension Number 07 05 Fixed RA Yes 032

Trunk Number 13 05 Matrix Format RA Yes 032

DD/MM/
Date 38 10 RA Yes 032
YYYY

Time 49 08 HH:MM:SS RA Yes 032

Duration 58 05 Minutes RA Yes 048

Units 00 00 X X X X

Amount 00 00 X X X X

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 783

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Start Column Field Filler Char. Filler Char.
Parameter Format Alignment
No. Length Required? (Decimal Value)

Currency 00 00 X X X X

Call Type Indicator 00 00 X X X X

Location 00 00 X X X X

Called Number 19 18 Continuous LA Yes 032

Account Code 64 03 Fixed RA Yes 048

Remarks 00 00 X X X X

Customized SMDR-Posting Protocol

You can use customize the SMDR Posting Protocol to match the settings required by the CAS you have interfaced.
When you use Customized SMDR-Posting Protocol, you can customize the Call Detail Record format to match
your requirement.

When the Call Detail Record format is customized, if there is a gap between two fields, these fields will be 'space'
(ASCII-32).

It is also possible to customize the posting protocol to match the settings required by the CAS you have interfaced.

Setting up CAS Interface

You will need the following the following functional components are required to make the interface work:

• A computer with a spare Ethernet port (not supplied by Matrix) Or any free Ethernet Port of the LAN Switch
on which the CAS server application software is running.

• The CAS Software (not supplied by Matrix).

• The ETERNITY NE.

Now, connect the Ethernet port ETERNITY NE to the computer (on which CAS server application is running) or to
one of the Ethernet ports of the LAN Switch, if the CAS server is in the same LAN.

How to configure
Configuring the SMDR-Posting feature involves the following steps:

• Enabling storage of SMDR for Outgoing (OG) Calls. By default, OG SMDR storage is enabled. Refer
“Station Message Detail Recording–Storage”.

• Selecting the appropriate SMDR-OG Posting Protocol to be used.

• Refining the Handshake parameters, if required.

• Refining Call Detail Record format, if required.

784 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Starting SMDR-Posting process.

To confugure SMDR Posting,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Scroll to SMDR under Advanced Settings and click the link.

Selecting SMDR-Posting Protocol for CAS

• Click the SMDR-Posting sub-link. The SMDR-Posting parameters page opens.

• On this page, click the SMDR-Posting to expand.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 785

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • In the SMDR-OG Posting Protocol (Handshaking and OG Call Record Format) drop down list, select the
appropriate protocol to be used. Default: Matrix.

• In the Destination Port, select Ethernet. This is Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE on which SMDR Posting
is set up. Default: None.

• In the Destination IP Address: Port field, enter the IP Address and port of the PC on which the CAS
server application software is running, i.e. where ETERNITY should post SMDR.

• In the Listening Port (of ETERNITY) for Posting field, enter the Port number at which ETERNITY must
listen for SMDR Posting. Default: 6000.

• To start SMDR posting, select Process as Start.

• Click Submit button to save settings.

Refining Handshake Parameters

You may need to refine some of the Handshake parameters of the selected SMDR-Posting protocol, i.e. change
the factory default values of the protocol, to match the software requirements of the CAS being used in the

786 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 organization. Refer the above table for default values of each protocol supported by supported by ETERNITY NE.
To refine Handshake Parameters,

• Click SMDR-Posting OG Handshaking Protocol option to expand.

• Configure the following parameters as required:

• Response to ENQ Timeout: The time for which the sender waits for a response to ENQ from the
receiver. Default: 03 seconds.

• ENQ Retry Count - on No Response (to ENQ): The number of times the sender should send ENQ
before dropping the process, in case response is not received for the last message sent.

• ENQ Retry Time - on No Response (to ENQ): The time after which the sender should sent the ENQ
again, in case the response is not received for the last message sent.

• ENQ Retry Count - on Negative Response (to ENQ): The number of times the sender should send
ENQ before dropping the process, in case of a negative response received for the last message sent.

• ENQ Retry Time - on Negative Response (to ENQ): The time after which the sender should sent the
ENQ again.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 787

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Response to Data Timeout: The time for which the sender waits for a response to data from the
receiver.

• Data Transfer Retry Count - on No Response (to Data Transfer): The number of times the sender
should send ENQ before dropping the process. This parameter is used when ACK is received against
ENQ and there is some problem while sending the data.

• Data Transfer Retry Time - on No Response (to Data Transfer): The time after which the sender
should send the ENQ again before dropping the process. This parameter is used when ACK is
received against ENQ and there is some problem in sending the data.

• Data Transfer Retry Count - on Negative Response (to Data Transfer): The number of times the
sender should send ENQ before dropping the process. This parameter is used when ACK is received
against ENQ and there is some problem in sending the data.

• Data Transfer Retry Time - on Negative Response (to Data Transfer): The time after which the
sender should sent the ENQ again before dropping the process. This parameter is used when ACK is
received against ENQ and there is some problem in sending the data.

• Use ENQ Character: This flag is to be enabled if the protocol uses ENQUIRE (ENQ) Signal.

• ENQ Character: The ASCII character (Single Character) used to send ENQUIRE (ENQ) signal to the
receiver.

• Acknowledgement (ACK) Character: The ASCII character (Single Character) used by the receiver to
acknowledge the receipt of the Link Control Character/Message Data.

• No Acknowledgement (NAK) Character: This parameter signifies the ASCII character (Single
Character) used by the receiver to dis-acknowledge the receipt of the Link Control Character/Message
Data.

• Start of Packet Character: A string of four ASCII characters used by the receiver to indicate Start of
Packet. Each ASCII character is from 000 to 252. Start of Packet may be of one character only, in
which case the string should be completed by programming remaining three characters with ASCII Null
Character (000).

• End of Packet Character: A string of four ASCII characters used by the receiver to indicate End of
Packet. Each ASCII character is from 000 to 252. End of Packet may be of one character only, in which
case, the string should be completed by programming the remaining three characters should be
programmed as ASCII Null (000).

• Use Byte Code Check (BCC): This flag is to be enabled when the protocol uses BCC Signal.

• Click Submit to save settings.

Refining Call Detail Record Format Parameters

The Call Detail Record (CDR) format for the selected SMDR-Posting protocol can also be refined to match the
software requirements of the CAS being used by the organization.

This may be required if you selected a 'customized' protocol. To refine Call Record Format,

• Click the option SMDR-Posting OG Online Call Record Format to expand.

788 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Call Detail Format for OG-SMDR Posting Protocols consists of the following parameters. For each
parameter explained briefly below, you can define the column position, field length (i.e. the number of
digits), the alignment (whether left aligned or right), and the filler characters, wherever required.

Refine the following format parameters according to the type of posting protocol you have selected and the
requirement of the CAS being used by the organization.

• Serial Number: This is the serial number generated for each call record. Serial numbers are generated
from 000 to 999. When serial number '999' is reached, the numbers roll over to 000.

Serial Number starts from 1 and not 0.

When this field rolls over, it increments the increment counter.

• Increment Counter: It increments when the serial number counter rolls over. The Increment counter
starts from A, ending at Z, and then roll over back to A.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 789

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Property Code: This is the property code required by the CAS used in the organization. It is a string of
alphanumeric characters and is to be terminated with #*. This field has a maximum of 128
alphanumeric characters.

You must program this string keeping in mind the field length used by the selected/customized posting
protocol.

The default value of the default Property Code String has been set as 'AAA', as at least two known
protocols use this field. You can set a different value here and the new value will appear in the CDR
record, irrespective of the protocol type selected.

If Bell Hobic or Hilton has been selected, you should program this field as 'AAA'. If Xiox protocol has been
selected, you should program this field as HTL. These values are not protocol dependent, but can be
configured by you.

• Extension Number: This is the extension number from which the call was made. You can define the
column position and the field length of the Extension number in the Call Detail Record.

• Trunk Number: This is the number of the trunk from which the call was made.

The Matrix Format occupies 5 character spaces.

Check-Inn Format occupies 4 character spaces.

The First Character in the Check-Inn Format is X (Fixed). The remaining three characters show the
software port number.

• Date: The date on which the call was made. The date fill flag is to be enabled.

• Filler Character field is applicable for Date, Month and Year, i.e. whether the single digit date is to be
printed as space-X or 0-X. For example, date = 1 is to be displayed as '1' or '01'.

• Where leading zeroes are not required, the date, month and year sub-fields are right aligned and the
spaces are filled with character 'space'.

• The Date field is not linked to the global flag of Date Format. The global Flag of Date format is used,
while using features or in configuration reports but not in CAS. This is because the date format used by
the CAS is not the same as used by the users of the system.

• Time: The time when the call was made. The format of the time field and the time fill flag are to be
programmed.

• Filler Character field is applicable for Hours, Minutes and Seconds i.e. whether the single digit hour is
to be printed as space-X or 0-X. For example, hour = 1 is to be displayed as '1' or '01'.

• In case leading zeroes are not required, Date, Month and Year sub-fields are right aligned and the
spaces are filled with character 'space'.

• Duration: The duration of each call. Program the duration unit and the duration fill flag.


When Duration Unit = Minutes, the rounding off to the nearest whole number is done. For seconds <= 30,
Minute is not incremented. For seconds > 30, minute is incremented.

790 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Units: The duration of the call interpreted in terms of units. The number of units depends on the Pulse
Rate. The number of units is derived from the Call Unit = Call duration in seconds/Pulse rate in
seconds.

• Amount: This is the Amount of the call. Program the amount format and the fill flag.

• Filler Character field is applicable for both the sub fields of Amount viz. Rupees/Paisa i.e. whether the
single digit Rupee is to be printed as space-X or 0-X. For example, Rupee = 1 is to be displayed as '1'
or '01'. Where leading zeroes are not required, the Rupee and Paisa are right aligned and the spaces
are filled with character 'space'.

• When Amount Format = Higher Currency, rounding to nearest whole number is done. For Lower
Currency <= 50, Higher Currency is not incremented and for Lower currency > 50, Higher Currency is
incremented.

• Currency: This is the symbol of the currency in which the Amount is charged. A maximum of 8 ASCII
Characters are allowed.

• Generally, Currency Symbol field prefixes to Amount field. Hence, to comply with various CDR formats,
it is recommended that the column position of Currency Symbol and Amount field should be
programmed properly.

• You can change the Currency Symbol used in the OG-SMDR Format.

• Call Type Indicator: This indicates the type of call made, i.e. whether local, national or international.
Define the Call Types in the “Call Type Indicator”.

• Location: This column indicates the location of the external number to which the call was made.

The system detects the location from the called location programmed in the Area and Country Code
Tables.

Called Location is programmed as one of the parameters of the Area Code Table and Country Code Table.
Depending upon the prefix dialed, the Location string is picked up from either Country Code table or Area
Code table.

Called Location is not displayed for Local Calls.

The Called Location parameter in the Country Code table and Area Code table is of 8 Characters.

If the number of characters in the field Called Location is more than Field length then the remaining
characters will not be printed (overlapped by next field).

If the number of characters in the field Called Location is less than Field length then the remaining
characters in the field Called Location will be filled by spaces.

• Called Number: This is the external number to which the call was made.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 791

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 One way to separate the called party number is by Area Code, Exchange code and Subscriber Number.
This is difficult in an Open numbering system, in which the field size of area code, exchange code are not
standard but vary from two digits to four digits (e.g. the Area code for 'Mumbai' is of 2 digits, whereas that
of 'Vadodara' is 3 digits).

In the Closed numbering system, the Area Code, Exchange Code and the Subscriber number are of fixed
length. In such case, including '-' in the called party number is not difficult. Hence, '-' is put in the called
party number. The called party number is assumed to be of 10 digits. The first '-' is placed after four digits,
counting from the right. The second '-'is placed after seven digits, counting from the right. If the dialed
number is a local number of 7 digits then the second '-'is not placed. Also, the remaining three digits are
not placed, but filled with character 'space'.

In this case, even if the call is made to a geographical area where open numbering system is followed, '-' is
placed in the same way.

• Account Code: This is the Account Code (Refer Note4) using which the call was made.

• Remarks: This column indicates the details of the call; whether it was a DISA call, DOSA call, Auto
Redial Call, type of call maturity.

Fixed Characters are used to indicate the type of call, call details, etc. The notations for the Remarks
field are:

D DISA Call

A Auto Redial Call

C CPD

K 12KHz/16KHz

R Reversal

D Delay

I Connect

• Reset Serial Number to 001: The Serial number counter can be reset to 001 after 24 hours (from
00:00 HH:MM) or every 6 hours. By default, 'No Compulsory Reset' is selected, which means the serial
number counter will not be automatically reset.

• Starting Character - Increment Counter: Specify the starting character of the increment counter as
the serial number rolls over, in this field.

• Reset Increment Counter: The Increment Counter can be reset to 001 after 24 hours (from 00:00
HH:MM) or every 6 hours. By default, 'No Compulsory Reset' is selected, which means the serial
number counter will not be automatically reset.

• Prefix String Required: This flag is to be programmed if the prefix string 0ac1 is to be sent when
interfacing with OG-SMDR Posting Protocol.

• Property Code: Enter the property code required by the CAS.

• Currency Symbol (Enter Decimal Value): Enter currency symbol to be used.

792 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Type Indicator
In the Call Record, you can also include the Type of Call: local, national, international, by configuring the Call Type
Indicator Table.

• Click the Call Type Indicator option to expand.

• In the Dialed Number String column, enter the number strings for each Call Type. You can enter the
prefix, e.g. 0 for long distance calls, 2 for local numbers, etc.

• For each Dialed Number String, define as Call Type Indicator, this is an abbreviation of the Call Type,
e.g.: LD for long distance, INTL for International, etc.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 793

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Number String is of a maximum 4-digits. The Text String is a string of 4 alphanumeric characters. Your
entries may look like these:

Call Type
Dialed Indicator
Number Index Meaning
Number String (Text
String)

01 0 LD Long Distance

02 95 IC Inter Circle

03 197 INFO Information

04 00 INTL International

: : : :

36 2 L Local

You may enter as many Call Types as supported by the Posting Protocol you have selected.

• Click Submit to save entries.

794 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Station Message Detail Recording–Backup

What's this?
Station Message Detail Records (SMDR), i.e. records of internal, incoming and outgoing calls made to/from
extensions of the ETERNITY are stored64 by the system in the 'SMDR Buffer'. The SMDR Incoming Call buffer has
a capacity of storing a maximum of 5000 incoming call records. The SMDR Internal Call buffer can store upto 1000
internal call records, while a maximum of 6000 outgoing call records can be stored in the SMDR Outgoing Call
buffer.

SMDR buffer data can be cleared by the System Engineer or System Administrator manually or the system clears
the data automatically when the SMDR buffer is full, by replacing the oldest call record with the latest (First In First
Out logic).

While the SMDR buffer data is maintained even during power failures, accidental data loss is not an uncommon
occurrence.

SMDR data may be lost when

• the Buffer is full.

• the files are accidentally deleted or corrupted.

• the system is being upgraded.

• the default settings are restored.

Therefore it is advisable to back up SMDR records to restore accidentally deleted, lost or corrupted files.

Back-up of SMDR records can be stored on a computer for retrieval later. The ETERNITY NE provides an
embedded FTP server to transfer SMDR call records on a computer.

You can copy the SMDR records folder using either Windows FTP or Mozilla Fire Fox.

Back Up SMDR using Windows FTP

• Click My Computer.

• Type the current IP Address of the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE in the Address bar as ftp://
192.168.1.101

64. ETERNITY will store SMDR only if the SMDR-Storage flag has been enabled. The call records are stored according to the Storage
filters set.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 795

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Go or Press Enter key on your keyboard.

• The Log on as window of the FTP server opens.

• In the Password field, enter the SE password (default 1234) and click the Log On button.

796 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The FTP window opens. All the Configuration folders appear in this window.

• Copy the smdr folder to another location on your computer.

• Close the FTP window.

Back Up SMDR using Mozilla Fire Fox

To use Fire Fox to back up SMDR Data,

• Make sure the FireFTP Add-on is installed in your browser.

• Open Jeeves on the browser and log in as System Engineer.

• Click the SMDR link under Advanced Settings.

• Click the Backup SMDR Data link under the SMDR link.

• Follow the same steps as described for accessing the FTP server in the topic “Upload configuration files
using Mozilla Firefox” under “Configuration Upload” (see Maintenance and Troubleshooting).

• Copy the smdr folder on the FTP to another location on your computer.

While uploading SMDR files on to ETERNITY, first, remove the current files in the system. Copy the new
files from computer (backup source) on to the system.


You can tag the back-up folders on the computer by date to store the records as archives.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 797

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Activity Log

What’s this?
The ETERNITY NE monitors all its activities and maintains records of these activities in the System Activity Log.

The System Activity Log has a buffer capacity of 250 records. The Activity Log stores records using the FIFO
method.

This log can be printed on a printer or downloaded on a computer in form of a report. The report can be printed or
downloaded in two modes:

• Online: The activity report is printed/downloaded as and when an activity occurs.

• Report (Offline): The activity report is printed/downloaded whenever desired. In the Offline mode, the last
250 activities recorded by the system are printed/downloaded.

The System Administrator can print/download System Activity Log, online or offline.

Matrix ETERNITY NE supports Syslog Client for System Activity Logs. The Syslog Client enables the system to
send activity logs in syslog format to the remote ‘Syslog Server’. You can view the logs on the remote server.

How it works
• The Syslog Server address must be assigned to which the system can send the activity log.

• If the System Administrator extension is a DKP or Extended IP Phone, a DSS Key can be assigned for
System Activity Log.

• Each activity is stored in the Activity Log in this format:

<DD-MM-YYYY> < HH:MM:SS> <Activity Text>

• Whenever an activity is recorded by the system, the DSS key, if assigned for this feature on the System
Administrator’s DKP/Extended IP Phone extension, is turned ON.

• The System Administrator can view the activity log by pressing the DSS key (if assigned). The DKP/
Extended IP Phone of the System Administrator will display the activity in this format:

DD-MM HH:MM <Activity Index>


Format of Date will be DD-MM or MM-DD as per Date Format selected in the Real Time Clock settings of
the system.

Index of the Type of Activities recorded in the System Activity Log

Index Activity

1 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS MATRIX ETERNITY VvRr Started

798 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Activity

2 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Default Configuration Loaded:

3 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Card Present: Slot=SS, Type: <ZZZZZ > Card VvRr

4 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SLT Normal : XXXX , Slot=SS, Port=PP

5 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS DKP Normal : XXXX , Slot=SS, Port=PP

8 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SMDR-IC buffer deletion : XXXX

9 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SMDR-OG buffer deletion : XXXX

10 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SMDR-Internal buffer deletion : XXXX

11 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SE Access From : XXXX

12 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SA Access From : XXXX

13 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Emergency Number Dialed : XXXX

16 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Reg Fail, Authenticacation PW Invalid, SIPTrk=TT

17 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Reg Fail, Config Parameters Invalid, SIPTrk=TT

18 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Stack Construct Authenticate Fail Slot=SS, Port=PP

19 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Stack Construct Fail - IP Address Invalid, Slot=SS

20 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Call Budget exhausted

23 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Personal Mailbox is full for Extension

24 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS VMS disk is full

25 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Restart due to change Network Para

26 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS "Restart due to change SIP Para

27 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS"Restart due to Master request

SS-Slot Number, PP -Port Number, TT -Trunk Number, XXXX -Station Number, v-Version for VvRr, r-
Revision for VvRr, ZZZZ = Card Type

How to configure
The two functional parts of system activity log are:Storage and Report Generation in the Online or Report
modes.To be able to use this feature, you must enable storage of Activity Logs, and assign the Syslog Server
address as Destination Port for the logs.

If the System Administrator phone is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone, you may assign a DSS key for System
Activity Log. For instructions, see Phone Key Settings under “DKP Extensions” and Phone Key Settings under
“Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings – Location 1” in SIP Extensions.

To configure System Activity Log settings,

• Open Jeeves

• Log in as System Engineer.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 799

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Scroll to the System Activity Log link under Advanced Settings and click this link.

• Enable System Activity Storage.

• To generate System Activity Log - Online, i.e. as and when the activity is recorded, select Destination
Port. Default: None.

• In the Destination IP Address: Port field, enter the IP Address and the port of the remote Syslog
Server.

• To generate System Activity Log - Report, i.e. offline, whenever desired, select Destination Port.
Default: None.

• In the Destination IP Address: Port field, enter the IP Address and the port of the remote Syslog
Server.

• Click Submit to save settings.

800 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 You can start and stop System Activity Log - Online and Report from the System Administrator mode using Jeeves
or dialing SA Commands from an extension phone.

To start/stop report generation using Jeeves,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Administrator.

• Click the System Activity Log link.

• To start System Activity Log - Online, click the Start button.

• To stop System Activity Log - Online, click the Abort button.

• To start System Activity Log - Report, click the Start button.

• To stop System Activity Log - Report, click the Abort button.

• To clear System Activity Logs from the buffer, click the Clear SAL button.

• You may log out of the System Administrator mode.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 801

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To generate Fault logs from an extension phone,

• Enter SA mode from a DKP/SLT/Extended IP Phone.

To start/stop Online log generation:

• Dial 1072-024-1 to start

• Dial 1072-024-0 to stop

To start/stop offline Report generation:

• Dial 1072-023-1 to start
• Dial 1072-023-0 to stop

To clear Fault Logs,

• Dial 1072-022-Reverse SA Password

• Exit SA mode.

You may print the logs captured on the Syslog Server after suitable modification of the format.

The Online System Activity Log report would look like this:

16-02-2011 16:51:48 DKP Normal : 301 , Slot=01, Port=01

The Offline System Activity Log report would look like this:

SYSTEM ACTIVITY LOG AS ON 16-02-2011(Wed) AT 16:16

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16-02-2011 03:24:59 DKP Normal : 302 , Slot=01, Port=02
16-02-2011 04:42:56 SE Access From : 301
16-02-2011 04:43:26 SE Access From : 301
16-02-2011 05:50:13 MATRIX ETERNITY V10R04 Started
16-02-2011 05:50:23 Card Present: Slot=01, Type: DKP2 V03R00
16-02-2011 05:50:23 Card Present: Slot=02, Type: CO6 SLT14 V03R00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eternity V10R04 Page : 1

802 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Activity Log Display

What’s this?
The ETERNITY provides a facility to display the last activity monitored by the system on the System Administrator’s
extension phone.

How to use
To be able to use this feature optimally, the System Administrator extension phone must be a DKP or an Extended
IP Phone, and a DSS Key must be assigned on the phone to System Activity Log Display. For instructions, see
Phone Key Settings under “DKP Extensions” and Phone Key Settings under “Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings
– Location 1” in SIP Extensions.

To view the System Activity Log from System Administrator Mode,

• Go Off-hook.
• Press the DSS key assigned to System Activity Log Display.
OR
• Dial 1072-009
• The last recorded Activity log appears on your phone’s display in this following format: Date-Time-Activity
Index
The Date and Time are in <DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:> format
The Activity Index is a two digit number from 01 to 27.

See System Activity Log Activity Index table in “System Activity Log”.

Format of either DD-MM or MM-DD will be as per date format set in the system. Refer chapter “Real Time
Clock (RTC)” for setting date format.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 803

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Fault Log

What’s this?
The ETERNITY maintains a log of all system faults. The system Fault Log has a buffer capacity of 100 records. The
Fault Log stores records using the FIFO method.

The System Fault log can be printed on a printer or downloaded on a computer in form of a report. The report can
be printed or downloaded by the System Administrator in two modes:

• Online: The fault report is printed/downloaded as and when a fault occurs.

• Report (Offline): The faulty report is printed/downloaded whenever desired. In the Report (Offline) mode,
the last 100 faults recorded by the system are printed/downloaded.

Matrix ETERNITY NE supports Syslog Client for System Fault Logs. The Syslog Client enables the system to send
fault logs in syslog format to the remote ‘Syslog Server’. You can view the logs on the remote server.

How it works
• A destination port for sending the report must be selected to which the system can send the log.

• If the System Administrator extension is a DKP or Extended IP Phone, a DSS Key can be assigned for
System Fault Log.

• Whenever a fault is detected, the LED of the Fault Log DSS key, if assigned, is turned ON.

• If more than one DKP/Extended IP extension is assigned Fault Log DSS Key, the LED of all keys will be
turned ON.

• The System Administrator must acknowledge the Fault indication by pressing the Fault Log key or by
dialing the Fault Log access code. The LED of the Fault Log key is turned OFF.

The following table summarizes the different activities that are logged into system fault log.

Event Index Event Description

1 Card Absent, Slot No.

2 DKP Absent, Flexible No. of the port, Slot No. <>, Port No<>

3 SLT Short, Flexible No. of the port, Slot No. <>, Port No <>

4 SLT Open, Flexible No. of the port, Slot No. <>, Port No. <>

8 Internal Communication failure

9 RTC Failure

10 VoIP LAN Lost, Slot No. <>, Port No. <> on DD-MM-YYYY at HH:MM:SS

11 VoPP Fail, Slot No. <XX>

12 Registration Timer Fail, SIP Trunk <XX>

804 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 
VOPP Fail: If VoPP fail message is logged, the ETERNITY VoIP module will not be functional.

Registration Timer Fail: The system may fail to load either the Re-registration Timer or the Registration
Retry Timer. In such a case the Proxy SIP trunk will remain un-registered and will not be functional.

The system will decode the registration status message received from ETERNITY VoIP module and, if it is
found to be a problem caused by Registration Timer Failure, this will be logged in the System Fault Log.

This can happen to one or more SIP trunks, while the other SIP Trunks functioning normally. You need to
restart the system to resolve the problem.

How to configure
To be able to use this feature, you must enable storage of Fault Logs, and assign a Destination Port for the Fault
Logs.

If the System Administrator phone is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone, you may assign a DSS key for System Fault
Logs. For instructions, see Phone Key Settings under “DKP Extensions” and Phone Key Settings under “Matrix
Extended IP Phone Settings – Location 1” in SIP Extensions.

To configure System Fault Log settings,

• Open Jeeves

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Scroll to the System Fault Log link under Advanced Settings and click this link.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 805

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Enable System Fault Log Storage.

• To generate System Fault Log - Online, i.e. as and when the fault occurs, select Destination Port.
Default: None.

• In the Destination IP Address: Port field, enter the IP Address and the port of the remote Syslog
Server.

• To generate System Fault Log - Report, i.e. offline, whenever desired, select Destination Port. Default:
None.

• In the Destination IP Address: Port field, enter the IP Address and the port of the remote Syslog
Server.

• Click Submit to save settings.

806 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use
You can start and stop System Fault Log - Online and Report from the System Administrator mode using Jeeves or
dialing SA Commands from an extension phone.

To start/stop report generation using Jeeves,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Administrator.

• Click the System Fault Log link.

• To start System Fault Log - Online, click the Start button.

• To stop System Fault Log - Online, click the Abort button.

• To start System Fault Log - Report, click the Start button.

• To stop System Fault Log - Report, click the Abort button.

• To clear System Fault Logs from the buffer, click the Clear SFL button.

• You may log out of the System Administrator mode.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 807

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To generate Fault logs from an extension phone,

• Enter SA mode from a DKP/SLT/Extended IP Phone.

To start/stop Online fault log generation:

• Dial 1072-028-1 to start

• Dial 1072-028-0 to stop

To start/stop offline Report generation:

• Dial 1072-027-1 to start
• Dial 1072-027-0 to stop

To clear Fault Logs,

• Dial

• Exit SA mode.

You may print the logs captured on the Syslog Server after suitable modification of the format.

The format of the standard system fault report looks as below:

Field Column Position

Blank 00

Date (As per Date format selected) 01

Time (HH:MM:SS) 12

Even Index No. (two characters) 21

Event Description 24

The Online log would look like this:

16-02-2011 16:51:41 DKP Absent : 301 , Slot=01, Port=01

The Offline Report would look like this:

SYSTEM FAULT LOG AS ON 16-02-2011(Wed) AT 16:17

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16-02-2011 16:14:39 DKP Absent : 302 , Slot=01, Port=02
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eternity V10R04 Page : 1

808 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Fault Log Display

What’s this?
The ETERNITY provides a facility to display the last fault monitored on the system on the System Administrator’s
extension phone.

How it works
To be able to use this feature optimally, the System Administrator extension phone must be a DKP or an Extended
IP Phone, and a DSS Key must be assigned on the phone to System Fault Log.

• When a fault occurs, the LED of the DSS Key assigned for the System Fault Log, glows.

• The System Administrator may press the DSS key or dial the System Fault Log feature access code to
acknowledge it.

• On pressing the DSS Key or dialing of the acknowledgment command, the LED of the Fault Log key is
turned OFF.

How to use

To view the System Fault Log from System Administrator Mode,

• Go Off-hook.
• Press the DSS key assigned to System Fault Log Display.
OR
• Dial 1072-010
• The Fault log appears on your phone’s display in this following format:Date-Time-Fault Index
The Date and Time are in <DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:> format
The Activity Index is a two digit number from 01 to 12.

See System Fault Log Activity Index table in “System Fault Log”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 809

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Parameters

What’s this?
System Parameters are general parameters, related to features and facilities that are applied system-wide, such as
customer name, Day-Night mode, storage of call logs, end of dialing, alarms, DID call disconnect options,
Presence, and DND messages. Each of these is described briefly here.

Customer Name
You can assign the name of the enterprise/organization that is using ETERNITY NE as the Customer Name. The
Customer Name may contain up to 80 characters. You may enter the address of organization/enterprise along with
the name.

The Customer Name you assign will appear on the various System Reports generated and printed by the
ETERNITY NE.

System Parameters
The System Parameters include the feature options:

• Global Hold: This parameter is related to the “Call Hold” feature of ETERNITY NE. Global Hold enables
you pick up a call that has been put on hold by any extension from a DKP extension of ETERNITY NE.

• Store Internal Calls in Missed Call Log: ETERNITY NE stores call logs of external calls only. You may
instruct the system to store internal calls in the Missed Call log by enabling this parameter. See “Call
Logs”.

• Store Internal Calls in Dialed Call Log:You may instruct the system to store internal calls in the Dialed
Call log by enabling this parameter. See “Call Logs”.

• Store Internal Calls in Answered Call Log: You may instruct the system to store internal calls in the
Answered Call log by enabling this parameter. See “Call Logs”.

• End of Dialing Digit: End of Dialing Digit is a single digit, on receipt of which, the system considers the
number string dialed by the extension users as the complete string. It does not wait for further digits to be
dialed, and dials out the number. The digits * (star) or # (hash/pound) are used to indicate end of dialing to
the system, as these are unique and distinguishable from the digits generally dialed by extensions (0, 1,
2... to 9). Default: #

• Give Off-hook Alert to Operator: When this flag is enabled, the system will detect extensions that are off-
hook and ring on the Operator extension to alert the Operator about the state of the phone. This alert is
useful for detecting whether the handset of extension phones are placed correctly. Read the feature
description for “OFF-Hook Alert” to know more.

• Day/Night Mode: Certain features of the ETERNITY NE require extensions and trunks to behave
differently according to the working hours and non-working hours, which are referred to as Time Zones.
The Time Zones, i.e. working hours, non-working hours, are defined for the entire week in a Time Table.
Time Table is assigned to trunks, extensions and other time-zone dependant features.

810 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 You can set the Time Zone of the system as Working-Hours or Non-Working hours any time you want by
setting the system in the Day Mode or the Night Mode, or let the system operate as per the Time Table
assigned. For more details see “Day Night Mode” and “Time Tables”

• Emergency Dialing Reporting: When this flag is enabled, the system detects the extension that has
made the emergency call and reports it to the Operator extension. Thus the Operator can know which
extension has made an emergency call. See “Emergency Detection and Reporting” to know more.

• Replace '+' from CLI: The GSM network presents the calling party number with prefix '+' to the called
party. ETERNITY NE allows you to remove '+' and replace it with an appropriate number string as required.
To do this, you must enable Replace '+' from CLI by selecting this check box.

You may also program the number string with which ‘+’ is to be replaced in the CLI in the Replace '+' from
CLI with the number string field. In this field, enter the number string with which you want to replace '+'
received as prefix of calling party number.

If you keep the number string field blank, ETERNITY NE will remove '+' sign from the CLI of calling party
and present the remaining digits on the CLI of the Called Party.

For example:
The number string +919327237228 is received as CLI.
If ‘00’ is configured as the replace string, the CLI number would become 00919327237228
If no replacement string is configured (i.e. left blank), the CLI number would be presented as
919327237228.

• Disconnect DID Call, when Dialed Number is Busy: when this flag is enabled, the DID call will be
disconnected if the landing extension(s) is busy. The DID call will not be routed to the Operator. Default:
disabled.

• Disconnect DID call, when Dialed Number is not Responding: when this flag is enabled the system
disconnects the DID call if there is no reply from the landing destination extension(s). The DID call will not
be routed to the Operator. Default: disabled.

• Disconnect DID call, when caller does not Dial any Digit: when this flag is enabled, the system will
disconnect the DID call if the caller fails to dial a digit within the First Digit Wait Timer. The DID call will not
be routed to the Operator. Default: disabled.

• Play Beep when Raid/Conference/Dial-in Conference begins: This is a common flag for three features
of ETERNITY NE: “Raid”, “Conference-Multiparty” and“Conference Dial-In”. When this flag is enabled,

• the system plays a warning beep to the extension which is being raided by another extension, before
establishing three-way speech.

• the system plays beeps to the other participants in a Dial-In Conference when a new participant joins in
(i.e. dials in to an on-going Dial-In Conference)

• the system plays beeps to the other participants connected in a Multi-Party Conference, when a new
participant is included.

If you disable this flag, no warning Beep will be played in Raid, the existing participants in a Dial-In or Multi-
party conference will not hear any beep tone indicating the addition of a new participant.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 811

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Play Beep when Call Taping and Conversation Recording Starts: This is a common flag for the
features “Call Taping” and “Conversation Recording”. When this flag is enabled, the system plays Beeps to
the extensions/calling party and extension before it starts taping the call in the common mailbox or
recording the conversation in the extension’s mailbox.

When this flag is disabled, no indication will be given to the opposite party when the call is being taped/
conversation is being recorded. Default: Enabled.

• Play Feature Tone in place of Dial Tone when Call Forward is Set: You can select whether the you
want the system to play Feature Tone instead of Dial Tone to the extensions when Call Forward is set on
these extensions. When this flag is disabled, the system will play dial tone to the extension on which Call
Forward is set, whenever the extension goes Off-hook. Default: Enabled.

• Call Proceeding Tone–Multistage Dialing: This flag is used in “Multi-Stage Dialing” where you need to
configure Pause and Wait for Answer in the Substitute Number string for the number string dialed by the
extension users.

When an extension user makes a call using a Calling Card, and the system dials out the number using the
Multi-Stage, the extension user will get Ring Back Tone twice: first after the system has dialed the Calling
Card Number, and again after the system has dialed out the destination number (called party number).
Thus the extension user will get Ring Back Tone, twice. To avoid this, you may configure the 'Call
Proceeding Tone' to be played by the system when using Multi-Stage Dialing.

You must configure the type of 'Call Proceeding Tone', according to your requirement; whether the
extension user should be connected to the speech path when the Calling Card number is out dialed or
when the called party number is out dialed. You can select any of the following Call Proceeding Tone
options, as per your requirement:

• Network Tone: If this option is selected, the extension user will get Ring Back Tone after dialing the
calling card number and again, after the system has dialed the called party number (when the system is
dialing out the number with Pause and Wait for Answer configured in the substitute number string).

• Pseudo Tone: If this option is selected, the extension user will get Feature Tone when the user has
completed dialing all the digits. At the end of the tone, the extension user gets connected to the called
party (destination number).

• Silent: If this option is selected, the extension user will get Silence (no tone), after the extension user
has completed dialing all digits. After dialing out the called party number in DTMF, the system will
connect the caller to the called party number (destination number).

• Companding Algorithm: The companding Algorithm —A law or law—is automatically selected when
you select “Region” for ETERNITY NE. However, if necessary, you may change the default companding
Algorithm that appears in this field. Select the companding Algorithm according to the Regulatory
Requirement of the country where ETERNITY NE is installed.

• Language of SE, SA Web Interface: The GUI of ETERNITY NE supports the languages English, Italian,
Spanish, French, German, and Portuguese. When you select “Region” for ETERNITY, one of these
languages will be applied as appropriate for the region you selected. For instance, if you selected India,
English will be applied. If you selected Spain, Spanish will be applied. If you selected a country where
none of these languages are the local language, English will be applied.

The language set by the system on Region selection will be applied on the pages of the GUI for every login
session. You can change the default language set on Region selection, by configuring this parameter.

812 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Mailbox for Call Taping: When “Call Taping” feature is applied on extensions, calls are taped in a
common mailbox assigned to this feature. Extension users with access to the mailbox can retrieve and
listen to the recorded conversations. This parameter requires you to define the Mailbox for Call Taping.
You may select the Extension Type—SLT, DKP, SIP—whose mailbox you want to use for Call Taping from
the drop down list, and enter the Port Number of this extension. For example, if you want to select the
mailbox of the phone connected to SLT Extension Port 4, enter 4 in this field.

• Display Presence Status during Call on DKP: If you want to allow DKP extension and Extended IP
extension users to view the presence status of the extension they are calling, you must enable this flag.
Default: Disabled.

Incoming CLI Nomalization

This parameter is useful in countries where the Calling Line Identification (CLI) received by the PBX extension
users must be suitably modified before it can be used to dial out the number. See “Incoming CLI Modification” to
know more. To use this feature, you must select the Enable Incoming CLI Nominalization check box.

ETERNITY supports the following options for CLI Nominalization:

• Country Code: This is the Country Code of the country where ETERNITY is installed. The Country Code
helps ETERNITY detect whether the Incoming CLI received is a national or an international number. Do
not enter any prefix for the Country Code. For example, if your ETERNITY is installed in USA, enter only ‘1’
as the Country Code. Do not enter ‘+’ or “00’ as prefix to the country code ‘1’. By default the Country Code
is ‘91’ (India).

• Area Code: This is the Area Code of the place where the ETERNITY is installed. The Area Code helps
ETERNITY detect whether the Incoming CLI received is a local number. Do not enter any prefix for the
Area Code. For example, if you want to enter Area Code for Mumbai, enter only ‘22’. Do not enter the
prefix ‘0’ to the area code. By default, Area Code is ‘265’ (Vadodara city).

• International Prefix: These are digits required as Prefix for dialing International Numbers. The prefix may
be up to 5 digits, with numbers from 00000 to 99999. By default, ‘00’ is set as the prefix for dialing
International numbers.

• National Prefix: These are digits required as Prefix for dialing long distance, National (within the country)
numbers. The prefix may be pot 5 digits, with numbers from 00000 to 99999. By default, ‘0’ is set as prefix
for dialing national numbers.

• Area Code required to make local calls?: Depending on the dialing pattern of your local public
telephone network, you may choose:

• No (Area Code not required), if your public telephone network does not require the dialing of Area Code
for local numbers.

• Yes (Area Code is required), if your public telephone network requires you to dial the Area Code for
local numbers.

• Yes, with Prefix, if your public telephone network requires you to dial Area Code with a particular Prefix
for local numbers. If you select this option, you must also enter the prefix digits for the area code for
local calls in the Prefix Area Code field.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 813

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DND Text Message
ETERNITY allows you to program pot 9 DND Text Messages, which extension users can select when setting DND
on their extensions. The DND text message they select is displayed to the calling extensions. See “Do Not Disturb
(DND)” to know more.

By default the following messages are configured as DND Text messages, you may customize these messages,
according to your requirement.

Message No. Message Text

1 Do Not Disturb

2 Unavailable

3 In Meeting

4 In Conference

5 Try on Mobile

6 On Vacation

7 On Business Trip

8 Out of Office

9 With a Guest

Publish Message
ETERNITY offers 10 different text Messages to Publish Presence, as listed in the table below. You can customize
message 6 to 9 to match your requirement.

Message No. Message Text

0 Absent

1 Present

2 Auto Detect

3 Away

4 On the Phone

5 Do Not Disturb

6 I am Mobile

7 In Meeting

8 Out for Meal

9 Out of Office

To know more about this feature, see “Presence”

814 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Digital Output Port (DOP)
ETERNITY NE supports a Digital Output Port for connecting a door lock relay device to be used in conjunction with
the Door Phone connected to the ETERNITY.

When you connect a Door Lock release device, you must set the Normal Contact Type of the DOP to Normally
Open. Default: Normally Open. See “Digital Output Port (DOP)”.

Alarms
When using the features “Alarms” and “Reminder”, you may need to configure the following parameters, related to
these features.

• Use Alarm with Snooze: When you use Snooze functionality with an Alarm, the system does not consider
an alarm call as answered until the extension user has dialed the acknowledgement code ‘0’ after going
Off-Hook. By default, Snooze is disabled.

• Voice guided Alarm Verification: When this flag is enabled, the system offers the extension users the
option of verifying the alarm they have set using voice-guidance. See “Alarms and Reminders” under
Voice Mail Features.

• Configurable Alarm Type (Once Only / Daily): With this feature, the system gives the Operator and
extension user the choice of setting 'Once Only' or 'Daily' Alarm calls, when they set an Alarm call request.
Clear this check box if you do not want to give a choice. If this option is disabled, the system will allow the
Operator and Users to set Once Only Alarms only. Default: Disabled.

• Configurable Alarm Category (Personalized / Automated): When this feature is enabled, the system
gives the Operator and extension user the choice of setting 'Personalized' or 'Automated' Alarm calls, after
they have configured the Alarm Type. Clear the check box if you do not want to give a choice. If this flag is
disabled, the users can set only Automated alarms.

• Alarm ring Timer (Sec): This is the duration for which the system rings the extension to serve an Alarm
call. By default, the Alarm Ring Timer is set to 45 seconds. The range of this timer is 001 to 255 seconds.
This timer also signifies the duration for which the Operator phone rings to notify that an Alarm call has not
been answered or the extension phone is busy.

• Number of Alarm Attempts: This is number of times the system attempts to place an Alarm call on the
extension phone before notifying the Operator that the call is not answered or the phone is busy. The
Number of Alarm Attempts can be set between 1 and 9. By default, the Number of Alarm Attempts is set to
'3'.

• Alarm Attempt Interval (min): This is the time period between each Alarm Call attempt. The Alarm
Attempt Interval can be set between 1 and 9. By default, the Alarm Attempt Interval is set to 5 minutes.

For more details see “Alarms”

Distinctive Rings
Distinctive Rings are ringing patterns used for distinguishing between different types of call events, like Internal
Calls, Trunk Calls, Auto Call Back, Auto Redial, Alarm, Emergency call, Priority, etc. If you want to customise the
Ringing pattern, for a call event, select the desired Ring Type. For more details see “Distinctive Rings”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 815

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To configure System Parameters,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Scroll to System Parameters under Advanced Settings and click the link.

• Click the desired parameter link to configure.

• Click Submit to save settings.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

816 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Security

What’s this?
Access to the Eternity is secured at three levels by way of a password:
• at the System Engineer Level with the System Engineer (SE) password.
• at System Administrator Level with the System Administrator (SA) password.
• at the User Level with the User Password.

The System Engineer and the System Administrator passwords secure the system settings from access and
alteration by unauthorized persons (anyone other than the System Engineer and the System Administrator), thus
preventing possible misuse of the features and facilities.

System Engineer (SE) Password

The SE password is 4-digit secret code, which may be a combination of any four digits, from 0 to 9. The default SE
Password is 1234, which can be changed from Jeeves as well as by dialing a command string.

• The SE password is stored in the CPU. If you forget the SE password, the only way to restore the
default SE password is to change the Jumper settings of the CPU card.

• You are advised to record and store the SE password at a safe place, where it can be accessed by you
(the System Engineer) to avoid the inconvenience of restoring the default SE password.

Changing SE Password using Jeeves

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click Advanced Settings to expand options.

• Click the link Password.

• Click the link SE Password.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 817

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Enter the Current SE password. If you have not changed the default SE password 1234, enter this code.

• Enter the New Password. It may be any combination of 4 digits. Valid digits: 0 to 9.

• Enter the new SE password again to Confirm New Password.

• Click Submit button to save your new password.

• You may log out of Jeeves

Forgot the SE Password?

If you have already changed the default SE-Password (1234) and are unable to recall or locate it, you must restore
the default SE password.

Restoring Default SE Password

Restoring the Default SE Password requires you to change the Jumper Settings on the CPU Card. To do this,

• Remove the top cover of the enclosure.

• Locate and change the position of the Jumper J2 from BC to AB.
• Replace the cover of the enclosure.
• Switch ON the system and wait for 15 seconds.
• Switch OFF the system and remove the enclosure cover.
• Change the Jumper position from AB to the original position BC.
• Replace the enclosure cover.
• Switch ON the system.

The default SE password will be restored to 1234. You can now enter the programming mode by dialing 1#91-
1234 (the default password). You can also change the SE password again using Jeeves or by dialing a
command as described above.

If you change the default SE password (1234) again after you have reset SE Password (by changing the
Jumper on the CPU card to AB position), the system will not store the new password, until you change the
Jumper back to the default BC position. So, make sure that you have recorded the new SE password in a
safe place, from where it can be retrieved. Change the Jumper back to the default BC position.

System Administrator (SA) Password

The SA password too is a 4-digit code, which may be any combination of four digits between 0-9. The default SA
password is 1111, which can be changed from the System Administrator mode of Jeeves.

Changing SA Password using Jeeves

• Log in as System Administrator.

818 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click SA Password.

• Enter Current Password. If you have not changed the default SA password 1111, enter this code.

• Enter New Password. It may be any combination of 4 digits. Valid digits 0 to 9.

• Re- enter New Password to confirm.

• Click Submit button to save your new SA password.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

Forgot the SA Password?

In case the System Administrator has forgotten the password, a new password can be issued by the System
Engineer only.

To issue a new SA Password from Jeeves,

• Log Jeeves as System Engineer.

• Click Advanced Settings to expand options.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 819

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the link Password.

• Click SA Password.

• Enter New Password. It may be any combination of 4 digits. Valid digits 0 to 9.

• Re-enter New Password to confirm.

• Click Submit to save new SA password.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

User Password
Extension Users can secure their respective extensions from unauthorized use with a password unique to each
extension. The User password too is a combination of any four digits, from 0 to 9. The default User Password is
1111, which each user can change from their respective extensions. Refer the topic “User Password” to know more.

Forgot the User Password?

If an extension user forgets the User Password, a new password can be issued to the extension user by the
System Administrator using Jeeves.

To issue a new User password using Jeeves,

• Log in as System Administrator.

• Click the link Extension on the left pane.

• Now, click the desired Extension number on the top bar. To scroll to the desired extension type and
number, click >>.

• The page of the desired extension will appear.

820 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Phone Properties.

• Enter the new User Password in the field Change User Password to. The User Password may be a
combination of 4 digits. Valid digits: 0 to 9.

• Click Submit button to save your new SA password.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

Additional Security to Extension Users

It is also possible to secure unattended extensions. This may be necessary when extension users forget to lock
their extensions and are away from their desks. In such situations, the System Administrator can protect the
extension from unauthorized access and use by:

a. locking the Keypad the extension phone. This is possible only on DKP and Extended IP Phones.

b. setting the User Status for the extension as “Absent”; possible on DKP, Extended IP Phones and SLT
extensions. Read the feature description User Absent/Present to know more.

The System Administrator can lock the keypad of DKP and Extended IP Phones, and set users of all extension
types as ‘Absent’ from Jeeves.

To secure an extension from Jeeves,

• Log in as System Administrator.

• Click the link Extension on the left pane.

• Now, click the desired Extension number on the top bar. To scroll to the desired extension type and
number, click >>.

• The page of the desired extension will appear.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 821

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Phone Properties.

• Set the user status for the parameter Presence by selecting the option Absent from the combo box. When
you want to change user status again to present, select Present.

• Select the option Lock for the parameter Keypad. This parameter will be configurable only if the selected
extension is a DKP. When you want to remove keypad lock, select Unlock.

• Click Submit button.

• Log out of Jeeves.

• Extension users can also set their status as 'Absent' or 'Present' from their respective extension
phones. Refer “User Absent/Present”.

• DKP extension users can also lock the keypad of their phones from the DKP Phone Menu. Refer
“Digital Key Phone-Operation” for instructions on navigating the phone menu.

• It is also possible to lock/unlock the DKP keypad and set the user extension status as 'Absent'/'Present'
from a remote location using “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)”.

822 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Timers and Counts

What’s this?
Several features of the ETERNITY NE are based on Timers and Counts. For example, how long and how many
times an extension should ring when Message Wait is set, or how long the Busy Tone, the Ring Back Tone, or the
Error Tone should be played to an extension. ETERNITY NE allows you to configure most of these Timers and
Counts to suit your requirement. Listed below are the Timers and Counts related to the various features and
facilities, along with a brief description and default value of each.

Auto Redial

Name Description Range Default

Auto Redial - Dial Tone The time for which the system waits to sense the 0 to 255 3 seconds
Wait Timer (sec.) dial tone from the CO Network.

Auto Redial - Ring Back The time for which system waits to sense the 0 to 255 60 seconds
Tone Wait Timer (sec.) Ring Back Tone from the CO Network after
dialing the requested number.

Auto Redial - Ring The time for which the extension that has 0 to 255 45 seconds
Timer (sec.) requested Auto Redial should ring.

Auto Redial - Normal The time interval between auto redial attempts 0 to 255 45 seconds
Timer (sec.) when Auto Redial ‘Normal’ is set.

Auto Redial - Normal The number of auto redial attempts the system will 0 to 255 5 tries
Count make when Auto Redial ‘Normal’ is set.

Auto Redial - Priority The time interval between auto redial attempts 0 to 255 10 seconds
Timer (sec.) when Auto Redial ‘Priority’ is set.

Auto Redial - Priority The number of auto redial attempts the system will 0 to 255 20 attempts
Count make when an extension having the feature Auto
Redial Priority in its Class of Service uses Auto
Redial ‘Priority’.

Call Progress Tones

Name Description Range Default

Dial Tone Timer (sec.) The time for which the system plays the Dial tone. 2 to 255 7 seconds

Ring Back Tone Timer The time for which the system plays the Ring Back 1 to 255 45 seconds
(sec.) Tone.

Busy Tone Timer (sec.) The time for which the system plays the Busy Tone. 1 to 255 7 seconds

Error Tone Timer (sec.) The time for which the system plays the Error Tone. 1 to 255 30 seconds

Feature Confirmation The time for which the system plays the 1 to 255 7 seconds
Tone Timer (sec.) Confirmation Tone when a feature is set or
canceled.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 823

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Name Description Range Default

Programming Tone The time for which the system plays the 2 to 255 15 seconds
Timer (sec.) Programming Tone when you successfully enter the
SE mode from a phone.

Programming Error The time for which the system plays the Error Tone 1 to 255 3 seconds
Tone Timer (sec.) when you have entered an invalid command string
while configuring a feature from a phone.

Programming The time for which the system plays the 1 to 255 3 seconds
Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone when a system command is
Timer (sec.) successfully executed when configuring the system
from a phone.

Tone Demo Timer (sec.) The time for which the system plays Call Progress 1 to 255 30 seconds
Tone when you are demonstrating the tone.

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Name Description Range Default

DID Inactivity Timer The time after which the system releases the 0 to 255 60 seconds
(sec.) trunk, if the caller has not dialed any digit, or
when a DID or Trunk Auto Answer call is not
answered by the landing destination.

DID Answer Wait Timer The time for which the system waits before 0 to 255 5 seconds
(sec.) answering a DID call.

DID Music Timer (sec.) The time for which the system plays music after 0 to 255 5seconds
answering the DID call.

DID Beeps Timer (sec.) The time for which the system plays beeps to the 0 to 255 10 seconds
caller to prompt the caller to dial the desired
extension number.

DID Ring Timer (sec.) The time for which the system rings on the 0 to 255 30 seconds
landing destination extension in a DID call.

DID Busy Tone Timer In a DID call, the time for which the system plays 0 to 255 15 seconds
(sec.) Busy Tone, if the dialed extension is busy.

DID Error Tone Timer In a DID call, the time for which the system plays 0 to 255 5 seconds
(sec.) Error Tone to the caller, if the caller has dialed an
invalid code.

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Name Description Range Default

DISA Idle State Timer In a DISA PIN Authentication call, the time for which 0 to 255 20 seconds
(sec.) the system waits for the caller to go Off-hook after
entering DISA. If the caller does not go Off-hook
within this timer, the system releases the call.

824 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Name Description Range Default

DISA Inactivity Timer In a DISA call, the time for which the system waits 0 to 255 2 minutes
(min.) for the caller to dial digits. If the caller does not dial
any digit within this timer, the system disconnects
the call. This timer is applicable only for Analog
Trunks.

Other Features

Name Description Range Default

Auto Call Back Ring The time for which the extension requesting the 1 to 255 30 seconds
Timer (sec.) Auto Call Back and the destination extension will
ring.

Interrupt Request Timer The time for which the extension on which the 1 to 255 45 seconds
(sec.) Interrupt Request is made will get the beeps.

Barge-In Timer (sec.) The time after which the extension that has 1 to 255 10 seconds
activated Barge-In gets connected to the
extension which is barged in.

Trunk Reservation The time for which a trunk remains reserved for 1 to 255 10 minutes
Timer (min.) the extension that has reserved the trunk.

Transfer while Ringing When an extension transfers a call to another 1 to 255 30 seconds
Timer (sec.) extension after it starts ringing, this is the time for
which the system will wait for the transfer target
extension to answer the call. If the transfer target
does not answer the call within this timer, the call
is returned to the transferror.

Transfer on Busy Timer When a call is transferred to a Busy extension, 1 to 255 30 seconds
(sec.) this is the time for which beeps are played on the
transfer target extension.

Trunk to Trunk Inactivity In a Trunk-to-Trunk call, this is the time for which 1 to 255 2 seconds
Timer (sec.) the system waits after call maturity for any digit to
be dialed. If no digit is dialed within this timer, the
system drops the call.

Call Park Timer (sec.) The time after which the call comes back to the 2 to 255 45 seconds
extension that has parked the call.

Call Park Release Timer The time after which the parked call gets 1 to 255 3 minutes
(min.) disconnected.

Live Call Screening The time for which the speaker of the DKP/ 1 to 255 10 seconds
(sec.) Extended IP Phone extension remains ON while
the message from the caller is being recorded.

Message Wait Ring It is the Number of times the extension should 0 to 255 10 attempts
Count ring after the Message Wait is set on an
extension. This count is applicable only when
‘Ring’ is selected as the Message Wait
Notification type for the extension.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 825

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Name Description Range Default

Message Wait Ring The time for which the extension rings to indicate 1 to 255 30 seconds
Timer (sec.) that Message Wait is set for the extension. This
timer is applicable only when ‘Ring’ is selected as
the Message Wait Notification type for the
extension.

Message Wait Ring The time after which the extension should ring 1 to 255 30 minutes
Interval Timer (min.) again to indicate Message Wait is set. This timer
is applicable only when ‘Ring’ is selected as the
Message Wait Notification type for the extension.

Conflict Dialing Timer The time for which the system waits for the 1 to 255 2 seconds
(sec.) extension user to dial the next digit to resolve
conflicting access codes dialed by the extension
user.

Extension - Inter Digit The time for which the system waits for the 2 to 255 7 seconds
Wait Timer (sec.) extension user to dial the next digit. On the expiry of
this timer, the system considers it as the end of
number dialing.

Trunk - First Digit Wait the time for which the system waits for the 1 to 255 25 seconds
Timer (sec.) extension user to dial the first digit, after grabbing
the trunk.

Trunk - Inter Digit Wait When an extension user has grabbed the trunk and 1 to 255 3 seconds
Timer (sec.) is dialing a number, the system waits for the Trunk-
Inter-Digit wait timer for the extension user to dial
the next digit. On the expiry of this timer, the system
considers it as end of number dialing and proceeds
with the call.

Call Hold Retrieval This is the time for which a call put on Global 1 to 999 60 seconds
Timer (sec.) Hold remains connected in the system. If the call
put on Global Hold is not retrieved within this
timer, the call is returned to the DKP/Extended IP
Phone which put it on hold.

RCOC Record Delete This is the time for which the record of the 1 to 999 999 seconds
Timer (min.) outgoing call is stored in the RCOC Table. The
timer is activated whenever a record is stored in
the RCOC table. At the end of this timer, the
system deletes this record from the table.

Release Conference if This is the time for which the system will wait for 1 to 255 2 minutes
Idle for more than (min.) participants of a Dial-In Conference to withdraw or
release themselves from the conference, one-by-
one. On the expiry of this timer, the system releases
the Dial-In Conference and frees the resource
occupied by this conference in the conferencing
circuit.

826 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
To configure Timers and Counts,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link to expand links.

• Scroll to System Timers and Counts under Advanced Settings.

• Click the System Timers and Counts link to open the page.

The Timers and Counts on this page are arranged by the name of the feature or function these are related
to.

• Change the value of the Timer or Count by entering the desired duration or count in the respective fields.

• Click Submit to save settings.

• You may log out.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 827

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Time Zone Display

What’s this?
The current time zone—Working Hours or Non-working Hours—is displayed on the LCD of the DKP and the
Extended IP Phone.

During Non-working hours the letter ‘N’ is displayed on the LCD of the DKP and the Extended IP Phone in the idle
state.

During working hours, in the idle state, the phone display will look like this:

Mon 20 DEC 16:58

303 Re cepti on 2

During Non-working hours, in the idle state, the phone display will look like this:

Mon 20 DEC 16:58 N

303 Re cepti on 2

During Non-working hours, in the idle state, if the extension user has set User Absent and activated Keypad Lock
on the phone, the phone display will look like this:

Mon 20 DEC 16:58 N AL

303 Re cepti on 2

828 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Toll Control

What's this?
Toll Control (or Toll Restriction) is an expense control feature of ETERNITY NE. It enables you to program the
system so that each extension has a designated calling permission referred to as 'Call Privilege'.

Each type Call Privilege allows the extension to call certain areas and restricts it from calling others. The extension
can also be restricted from the dialing of specific telephone numbers.

The ETERNITY NE supports the following types of Call Privileges:

• No Calls: Dialing of all external numbers is restricted. Only internal (extension-to-extension) calls are
allowed.

Only the numbers programmed in Global Directory Part I will be allowed to be dialed out, if the directory is
allowed in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the extension.

• Local Calls: Dialing of outgoing calls to Local area numbers, in addition to internal calls, is allowed. It is
possible to restrict calls to certain local numbers. To apply this Call Privilege, you must configure the list of
Local numbers.

• Regional Calls: Dialing of outgoing calls to regional numbers is allowed, in addition to internal and local
calls. It is possible to restrict calls to certain regions. To apply this Call Privilege type, you must configure
the list of Regional numbers.

• National Calls: Dialing of domestic, long-distance numbers within the country is allowed, in addition to
internal and regional calls. You can also restrict calls to certain parts of the country. To apply this Call
Privilege type, you must configure the list of National numbers.

• All Calls: Dialing of all types of numbers—local, regional, national, international—is allowed, without any
restriction.

• Limited Calls: Dialing of only specific Telephone numbers (regional, national or international) is allowed.
By applying this Call Privilege type, you can allow and restrict dialing of telephone numbers starting with a
particular digit, or a particular area code, or certain telephone numbers only. To apply this Call Privilege
type, you must program a list of the Limited numbers that are to be allowed and numbers that are to be
restricted. You can configure three such Limited number lists

Toll Control forms the basis of the features “Dynamic Lock” and “Call Budget”.

Using “Dynamic Lock”, extension users can change the Toll Control (Call Privilege) of their extensions on their own.
The Operator or System Administrator can also change the Toll Control of the extension using Dynamic Lock. To
support this feature, ETERNITY offers fours levels of Toll Control, from 0 to 3.

When the “Call Budget” feature is used on extensions, it becomes necessary to define the calling permission for
extensions that have consumed their allotted budget. To support this feature, ETERNITY offers Toll Control-Call
Budget Consumed.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 829

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Toll Control Levels
For each Toll Control Level from 0 to 3, a 'Call Privilege' is defined. The system applies the Toll Control Level (i.e.
the Call Privilege) set by the extension users themselves or set by the System Administrator/Operator for the
extensions using Dynamic Lock.

• Toll Control - Level 0 is Time Zone based, wherein you must define the Call Privilege Type for the Day
(working hours) and the Night (non-working hours). For instance, you may define 'International Calls' as
Call Privilege for the Day and 'No Calls' as Call Privilege for the Night.

By default, Call Privilege ‘All Calls’ is selected for the Day and Night.

• Toll Control - Level 1 is not based on Time Zones. By default, the Call Privilege Type for this level is
'Local Calls'.

• Toll Control - Level 2 is not based on Time Zones. By default, the Call Privilege type set for this level is
'National Calls'.

• Toll Control - Level 3 is not based on Time Zones. By default, Call Privilege 'No Calls' is selected for this
level.

• Toll Control - Call Budget Consumed is applied only if the “Call Budget” feature is enabled on the
extension.

ETERNITY NE offers you the flexibility to redefine the Call Privilege for each of the above Toll Control Levels
according to the requirements of the extension users.

How it works
• When a call is made, the ETERNITY NE checks the Toll Control Level assigned to the extension making
the call.

• The system checks the 'Call Privilege' programmed in the Toll Control Level of the extension.

• For each call privilege type detected, the system will check the following to determine if call is to be
allowed or denied, as summarized in the table below:

Type Call Privilege detected Logic will check

Local calls Local Number List configured.

Regional calls Regional Number List configured.

National calls National Number List configured.

Limited Calls Limited Calls Number List (List 1, 2 or 3) assigned to the extension

• The Local, Regional, National, and Limited Calls Number Lists consist of Allowed Numbers and Denied
Numbers.

830 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The system compares the each digit of the dialed number string with the number strings programmed as
Allowed and Denied numbers in the Lists of the Local/Regional/National/Limited Calls Number Lists, using
the following logic:

Allowed Number List Denied Number List Result

match found match found Call allowed

match found no match found Call allowed

no match found no match found Call allowed

no match found match found Call denied

• The call is allowed to be made, if the dialed number:

• matches with Allowed Number list and the Denied Number list.
• matches with Allowed Number list, but not with the Denied Number list.
• matches with neither the Allowed List nor the Denied List.

• The call is restricted, if the dialed number matches with the Denied Number list, but not with the Allowed
Number list.

How to configure
Decide the type of Call Privilege you wish to assign to each extension port type: SLT, DKP, SIP.

For Toll Control to work, you need to configure the lists of Local Numbers, Regional Numbers, National Numbers
and Limited Calls, according to the type of Call Privilege you to assign to the extensions. To do this,

• Make a two-column tables each for Local, Regional, National and Limited Call numbers on paper or using
a computer.

• On one column of each list, write down the numbers you want to permit as Allowed Numbers. On the other
column write down the numbers you want to restrict as Denied Numbers. Your table may look like these:

List of Local Numbers for Call Privilege - Local Calls

Allowed Denied
Sr. No.
Numbers Numbers

999

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 831

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 List of Regional Numbers for Call Privilege - Regional Calls

Allowed Denied
Sr. No.
Numbers Numbers

999

List of Limited numbers Call Privilege - Limited Calls 1

Allowed Denied
Sr. No.
Numbers Numbers

999

• Configure these lists on the “Number Patterns” page of Jeeves under Advanced Settings.

• Configure Toll Control levels for each extension port of ETERNITY NE. If you have not already assigned a
Toll Control level to the extension ports at the time of configuring them, you may do so now.

• Login as System Engineer.

• Click Basic Settings link.

• Click the link of the extension type, it may be:

• “SLT Extensions”
• “DKP Extensions”
• “SIP Extensions”

The page of the selected extension type opens.

832 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For example, if you selected SLT Extensions, the SLT Extensions page opens.

• To select an extension number on the page, select the Extension Number tab.

• Click Toll Control to expand.

• Click More button to expand all Toll Control parameters.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 833

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • In the Calls allowed during Day box, select the call privilege type for the Day time:
• All Calls
• Local Calls
• Regional Calls
• National Calls
• No Calls
• Limited Calls 1
• Limited Calls 2
• Limited Calls 3

• For the type of call privilege you selected, the number list configured in the “Number Patterns” page will be
automatically assigned.

If you have not configured number lists already, you may do so now:

• Click the arrow icon. The number list of the call privilege type you selected opens in a window.

834 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For instance, if you selected National Calls as Calls allowed during Day, when you click the settings
icon, the list for National numbers will open.

• In the Allowed Numbers column, enter the long distance numbers within the country that are to be
permitted.

You may enter only the first digit of the number string, or a part of the string, or the complete number string.

Each number string you enter must not exceed 16 characters.

In the Denied Numbers column, enter the long distance numbers that are to be restricted. The number
strings may be only the first digit of the string, a prefix, or the complete string, not exceeding 16 characters.

• Enter as many numbers as you want by clicking the Index number links 001-250, 251-500, 500-750, 751-
999.

• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save the entries.

• Close the window.

• In the Calls allowed during Night box, select the call privilege type for the Night time.

• To configure the number list for the selected call privilege type, click the settings icon. The number list of
the call privilege type you selected opens in a window.

Follow the same steps as described above to configure this table.

• Follow the same steps to select the call privilege type and configure the number list for
• Calls allowed for Lock Level 1
• Calls allowed for Lock Level 2
• Calls allowed for Lock Level 3

• You may log out of Jeeves.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 835

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Trunk Auto Answer

What’s this?
Trunk Auto Answer enables calls landing on a trunk to be answered automatically by greeting the caller with a voice
message before the call is actually handled.

Trunk Auto Answer is useful when you want callers to remain connected until one of the landing destinations
selected for incoming trunk calls becomes free to attend to the caller.

Trunk Auto Answer is useful in call centres, railway enquiry, banks, where callers need to be notified that they
would be attended shortly, so that they do not disconnect the call.

ETERNITY NE offers two types of Trunk Auto Answer:

• For all Calls: the system answers all incoming calls landing on the trunk line.

• When Busy: the system answers incoming calls on the trunk, only if the landing destinations are busy.

How it works
Trunk Auto Answer on a trunk works only when Operator or Extension/s is selected as the landing destination for
incoming calls for the Day and Night.

So, you can enable Trunk Auto Answer on a CO, Mobile or SIP trunk, only if you have selected Operator or
Extensions as the destination for incoming calls on that trunk.

ETERNITY NE handles incoming calls on the trunk according to the type of Trunk Auto Answer selected for the
trunk: For all Calls or When Busy

When Trunk Auto Answer–For all Calls is enabled on a CO, Mobile or SIP Trunk, for each incoming call on the
trunk,

• The System answers the with a Greeting message, known as the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting, and rings
the landing destination—Operator or Extensions—selected for the time of the day.

The system starts the DID Inactivity Timer (default: 60 seconds). The Trunk Auto Greeting message is
played once. You may assign a Trunk Auto Answer Greeting of your preference.

• If the landing destination does not answer before the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting message ends, the
system plays Trunk Auto Answer Ring Back Tone message to the caller.

The Ring Back Tone message is played repeatedly for the duration of the DID Inactivity Timer.

However, if no Trunk Auto Answer Ring Back Tone message is assigned, the system will plays Ring Back
Tone to the caller for the duration of this timer.

• If any of the landing destinations answers the call before the expiry of the DID Inactivity Timer, the system
stops the DID Inactivity Timer and the Ring Back Tone message, and connects the caller to the extension
that answered the call.

836 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If none of the landing extensions answers the call before the expiry of the DID Inactivity Timer, the system
plays the Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye message and releases the trunk port.

If no Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye message is assigned, the system plays the Busy Tone for the duration
of the Busy Tone Timer and releases the trunk port.

When Trunk Auto Answer–When Busy is enabled on a CO, Mobile or SIP Trunk, for each incoming call on the
trunk,

• The System answers the with the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting message and loads the DID Inactivity
Timer.

The Greeting message is played once.

• The System waits for any of the landing destinations (Operator or Extensions) selected for the time of the
day to be free.

• If no landing destination is free at the end of the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting message, the system plays
Ring Back Tone or Trunk Auto Answer Ring Back Tone message, if assigned, to the caller for the duration
of the DID Inactivity Timer.

• If any of the landing destinations is free before the expiry of the DID Inactivity Timer, the system places the
call on that destination.

• If none of the landing destinations is free at the end of the DID Inactivity Timer, the system plays the Trunk
Auto Answer Busy Bye message, if assigned, and releases the trunk port.

If the Busy Bye message is not assigned, the system will play the Busy Tone to the caller for the duration
of the Busy Tone Timer.

How to configure
For this feature to work, you must do the following:

1. Enable Trunk Auto Answer on the CO Trunk, Mobile, SIP trunk, as required.

• Under Basic Settings, open the links to the desired trunk port type.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 837

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select the desired Trunk port number.

• Open the Route Incoming Calls link on the page of the selected trunk number.

• If Operator or Extensions is selected as the destination to Route calls during the Day and to Route
calls During the Night, configure Trunk Auto Answer.

It is not mandatory to configure Trunk Auto Answer for both time zones. You may configure for any time
zone, according to your requirement.

838 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Select the Type of Trunk Auto Answer for the Day and for the Night as: For all Calls or When Busy.
You may select the same or different options for the Day and Night, according to your requirement.

• Select the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting message, the Trunk Auto Answer Ring Back Tone
Message, and the Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye Message for the Day and Night.

You may select different Greeting, Ring Back Tone and Busy Bye Message for each time zone.

For detailed instructions, see

• “CO Trunks”
• “Mobile Trunks”
• “SIP Trunks”

2. Configure the Trunk Auto Answer related Timers, if required. The following Timers are of relevance to the
Trunk Auto Answer Feature:
• The DID Inactivity Timer (default: 60 seconds)
• The Ring Back Tone Timer (default: 45 seconds)
• The Busy Tone Timer (default: 7 seconds)

• You may change the duration of these timers from the“System Timers and Counts” page under
Advanced Settings.

The Ring Back Timer and the Busy Tone Timer are also applicable for the Ring Back Tone and the Busy
Tone played for internal calls.

3. Record and assign Voice Modules for the following Voice Messages related to this feature:
• Trunk Auto Answer Greeting Message.
• Trunk Auto Answer Ring Back Tone Message
• Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye Message

For each of these messages, you can record four different messages.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 839

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 See the topic “Voice Message Applications” under Advanced Settings link for instructions on recording and
assigning voice modules to greeting messages.

If you do not want to use messages, you may select the options: Music-on-Hold or Do not Play any
message.

840 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Trunk Reservation

What’s this?
This feature enables any extension user to reserve a trunk for exclusive use, for a specific time period.

Trunk Reservation can be requested from an SLT extension, a DKP extension and from an Extended IP Phone
extension.

How it works
Let us understand this feature with the help of an example:

In an organization there are four CO trunk lines, CO 1, 2, 3 and 4, but all of these have full traffic throughout the
day.

Extension user A is a sales executive. To complete the sales target, A needs to make long-distance calls to
customers. Since there this full traffic on all the four trunks throughout the day, and these trunks are constantly
busy, A would need a dedicated trunk line to save time and complete the target.

So, A can reserve one of the four trunk lines for the desired duration. To do this,

• Extension A grabs a trunk by dialing the Trunk Access Code.

• The Trunk is busy.

• Extension A dials the feature access code for Trunk Reservation Access Code for the busy trunk.

• As soon as the trunk is free, A’s extension rings.

• A answers the call and gets connected to the trunk, and gets dial tone.

• A can now make as many calls as required.

• The trunk remains reserved for the duration of the Trunk Reservation Timer. This timer is configurable, and
by default is set to 10 minutes. A can have this Timer configured to the desired duration.

• All other extension users who try to access this trunk get error tone, even if this trunk is free.

• If A is finished with the calls before the expiry of the Trunk Reservation Timer, A has two options:
a) release the trunk manually, by cancelling Trunk Reservation.
or
b) wait for the expiry of Trunk Reservation Timer.

• Only when the trunk is released (by A or at the end of the Timer) will other users be able to access it.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 841

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
To be able to use Trunk Reservation, extension users must have this feature enabled in their “Class of Service
(COS)” for the Day and Night time, as required.

See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring Class of Service of different extension port types.

If you want to increase or decrease the duration of the Trunk Reservation Timer,

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link to expand.

• Click the System Timers and Counts to open the page.

842 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Scroll to reach Other Features

• Change the value of the Trunk Reservation Timer to the desired duration. Default: 010 Minutes. Valid
Range: 001 to 255 minutes.

• Click Submit to save.

How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To set Trunk Reservation, when Trunk you access is busy,

• Press DSS Key assigned to Trunk Reservation

OR

• Dial 6 on Busy Tone

To release a reserved Trunk, wait for the Timer to expire, or cancel Trunk Reservation, manually.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 843

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To cancel Trunk Reservation Manually,

• Press DSS Key assigned to Trunk Reservation.

OR

• Dial 102

For SLT Users

To set Trunk Reservation, when Trunk you access is busy,

• Lift handset.
• Dial 6 on Busy Tone.
• Replace handset.

To cancel Trunk Reservation Manually,

• Lift handset.
• Dial 102
• Replace handset.

844 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 User Absent/Present

What's this?
Extension users may sometimes want to leave their desks, and expecting to return soon, they may not have
forwarded their calls or set Do Not Disturb on their extensions. In such cases, incoming calls will continue to land on
the extension and go unanswered. The callers have no way of knowing that the extension user is not present at the
extension and may try the extension number repeatedly.

With the User Absent/Present feature of ETERNITY, extension users, including the Operator, can set 'User Absent'
when they leave their desks. By doing so, they can block all incoming external as well as internal calls from landing
on their extension. When they return to their desks, they can set 'User Present' and receive incoming calls again.

While Do Not Disturb blocks only internal calls, User Absent can be set when you want to block all
incoming calls (external as well as internal). Thus User Absent can be used as an extension of DND to also
block external calls.

There are more options for indicating availability to other extensions. Refer the topic “Presence” to know
more.

How it works
When an extension user of EON sets 'User Absent', the letter 'A' appears on the phone's display:

EON48P

Fri 29 JAN 16:58 A

617 Himanshu

The letter 'A' disappears when the extension user sets 'User Present'.

When an extension user of EON48/SETU VP248 calls the extension which has set 'User Absent', the text message
'User Absent' will appear on the caller's phone display.

When an SLT extension user calls the extension which has set 'User Absent', callers who dial this extension will get
an error tone.

External callers who call the extension, on which 'User Absent' is set, will get an error tone only.

• Outgoing calls can be made from the extension which has set 'User Absent'. Only incoming calls are
restricted.

• User Absent/Present can be set on an extension from the SA mode.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 845

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If more than one extension is configured as “Operator' (routing group), incoming calls will be blocked
only on the Operator extension which has set User Absent.

• User Password is required for this feature. The default User Password, 1111, will not work. Change the
User Password first.

How to use

For Extension Users

To set User Absent on your extension:
• Dial 104-User Password-0

To set User Present on your extension:

• Dial 104-User Password-1

For System Administrator

To set User Absent on an extension:
• Dial 1072-014-0

To set User Present on an extension:

• Dial 1072-014-1

The System Administrator can also set an extension as Absent/Present using Jeeves. For instructions, read
“Additional Security to Extension Users” under the topic System Security.

846 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 User Password

What’s this?
The User Password is a 4-digit code for extension users to protect their extension phones from unauthorized use.
The default User Password is 1111. It can be changed by the extension users from their phones to any desired
value, not exceeding 4 digits.

In case the extension user forgets the password, it can be cleared and restored to the default value 1111 by the
System Engineer (SE) or the System Administrator (SA). Refer the topic “System Security” for instructions.

The User Password is also required to access and use certain features of ETERNITY NE, which are listed below.
• Call Follow Me
• Dynamic Lock
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Walk-In Class of Service
• User Absent/Present
• Hot Desk
• Phone Settings of the DKP
• Personal Mailbox

The extension user must change the default password for all the above listed features except: Phone Settings,
Mailbox of Voicemail. Both these features allow the extension user to use the default User Password, whereas in
the case of others, the system will not allow feature access without changing the User Password.

In the case of Hot Desking, the default password will work only for one extension involved.

The User Password for an extension can be changed only from that extension phone only.

Since the Mailbox can be accessed using the default User Password, extension users who are assigned a
mailbox are recommended to change their User Password to prevent unauthorized access to their mailbox.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Press ‘Enter’ key to enter DKP menu.
• Scroll to Change User Password.
• Press ‘Enter’ key.
• You get the prompt: Enter Old User Password.
• Dial you current user password.
If the default password 1111 has not be changed, enter default password.
• You get the prompt: Enter New User Password.
• Dial your new user password, not exceeding 4-digits.
You get confirmation tone and the confirmatory message ‘User Password Changed’ on your phone
display.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 847

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For SLT Users
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 114
• Dial Current User Password (default password 1111 if not changed already).
• Dial New User Password.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.

848 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Virtual Extension

What’s this?
The Virtual Extension feature of ETERNITY NE enables multiple users to share one telephone instrument as their
extension, yet be considered as individual extensions by the system, with distinct extension properties and class of
service.

Such shared extensions are called Virtual Extensions, as their users do not have individual phones for their use.

Virtual extensions are useful in laboratories, common rooms, dormitories, shop floors, and wherever it is not
feasible to provide dedicated telephone instruments to individual extension users. Virtual extensions allow you
make optimum use of the existing phones without investing in new ones.

ETERNITY NE supports 20 Virtual Extensions.

How it works
The shared telephone instrument is called the Master Extension. A Master Extension can be an SLT, a DKP or the
Matrix Extended IP Phone.

• Virtual Extensions are assigned to the Master Extension. A Master Extension can have multiple Virtual
Extensions, but a Virtual Extension can have only one Master Extension.

• The Virtual Extension functions as any SLT, DKP or SIP extension of ETERNITY NE. It can be assigned all
features and facilities, like Class of Service, Toll Control, Call Forward, Voice Mail, just like any other
extension of ETERNITY NE.

• Incoming calls to a Virtual Extension will ring on the Master Extension.

• All incoming, outgoing, internal and external calls of the Virtual Extensions are recorded in the Station
Message Detail Records.

• To make outgoing calls, the Virtual Extension user must use the feature “Walk-In Class of Service”.

• The Virtual Extension user is logged out of the Master Extension according to the Walk Out mode
assigned to it: Walk out automatically on completion of call or Walk out on user request.

How to configure
To configure Virtual Extensions,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Scroll to Virtual Extensions under Advanced Settings and click the link.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 849

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Virtual Extensions page opens.

• Configure Virtual Extension 1.

• Click Access Code to expand.

• In the Access Code field, assign a number to the Extension.

• In the Name field, assign a name to the Extension for identification.

850 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Priority to expand. Select a Priority level from 1 to 9 which you want to assign to the Extension.

• Click Allow Features as per Extension to expand. Select the extension whose features and facilities you
want to assign to this Virtual Extension from the list.

• Click Landing Destination to expand. Select the Master Extension to which you want to assign this Virtual
Extension. Incoming calls for the Virtual Extension will land on this Master Extension, referred to as
Landing Destination.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 851

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click DDI Routing to expand.

• In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 1, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this Virtual
Extension from the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP with whom you have registered SIP Trunk 1.

• In the field DDI Number for SIP Trunk 2, enter the DDI number you want to assign to this Virtual
Extension from the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP of SIP Trunk 2.

• Similarly, in the fields DDI Number for SIP Trunk 3 and DDI Number for SIP Trunk 4 enter the DDI
numbers you want to assign to this Virtual Extension from the DDI numbers provided by the ITSP of
SIP Trunk 3 and 4 respectively.

• Click Submit to save settings.

• To configure another Virtual Extension, click the Virtual Ext. <number> tab. Follow the same instructions
as above to configure the extension.

How to use
For making outgoing calls users of Virtual Extensions must use “Walk-In Class of Service”.

852 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Voice Help

What’s this?
Voice Help is a recorded voice message that can be used for providing quick help or guidance to extension users.

You can use Voice Help to announce important phone numbers or access codes of frequently used features, and
similar functions. Extension users can access Voice Help by dialing its feature access code and listen to the
recorded help message.

How to configure
To configure Voice Help, first, you need to record a Voice Module with the desired help message, and then assign
the recorded Voice Module to the Voice Help application. For instructions, read the topic “Voice Message
Applications”.

The Voice Module on which you will record the message has a duration of 16 seconds (maximum). The length of
your help message must be within this limit, or the message will be truncated when you record.

How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To use Voice Help from an extension,

• Press the DSS key assigned to Voice Help

OR
• Dial 1090
• Listen to the help message.
• Press any key to stop

For SLT Users

To use Voice Help from an extension,

• Dial 1090
• Listen to message
• Press any key to stop.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 853

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Voice Message Applications

What’s this?
ETERNITY NE allows you to record different voice messages which can be played to callers/extension users for
specific situations. For example, if Trunk Auto Answer or Direct Inward Dialing are enabled on a trunk line, you can
configure the system to play Voice Messages to greet and guide callers. When a feature like Do Not Disturb is set
you can configure the system to play a DND notification to the callers. You can also configure the system to play
Voice Messages instead of Tones like the Error Tone, Busy Tone or Ring Back tone.

How it works
The voice messages are recorded in Voice Modules and the voice modules are assigned to the features/
applications for which they are to be used.

The ETERNITY NE supports 16 Voice Modules of a maximum duration of 16 seconds each. You can record a short
message of a maximum 16 seconds each or less in a Voice Module.

When the recorded voice modules are assigned to the features/applications, they are played to the callers/
extension users whenever the feature/application is activated.

Depending on the feature/application, the voice message recorded in the voice modules are played once or
continuously.

At a time, the system can play four voice modules simultaneously to external callers/extension users.

Voice messages can be used for different applications as described in the following.

DID Greeting Messages

On Trunk lines that have Direct Inward Dialing (DID) enabled, you can use recorded Voice Messages to guide
callers to reach the desired party/destination extension. The DID Greeting Messages can be played according to
the time of the day, i.e. working hours and non-working hours.

For example:

• DID Greeting message for working hours: "Welcome to Cotton Software".

• DID Greeting Message for non-working hours: "Welcome to Cotton Software. Sorry we are closed.

• DID Dial Message: "Please dial the extension number".

DID Guidance Messages

You can use voice messages to guide DID callers at various stages of the call: prompt them to dial a number, or
alert them when they dial a wrong or invalid number, or inform them when the dialed extension is busy or when
there is no response from the dialed extension.

854 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For example,

• DID Dial Message: "Please dial the Extension Number."

• DID Wrong Dial Message: "Sorry you have dialed an invalid number."

• DID Ring Back Tone (RBT) Message: "The number you dialed is ringing.”

• DID Busy Message: "The extension you have dialed is busy.”

• DID No-Reply Message: "The extension you dialed is not responding."

• DID No-Dial Message: "Sorry you have not dialed any number".

• DID Call Transfer Message: "Transferring the call to the Operator." This message is played when the
caller does not dial any number and the call is transferred to the Operator.

• DID Conference Number65 Message: "Please dial the Conference Number."

• DID Conference Password Message: "Please dial the Conference Password."

Voice Message for Features

• Alarms: A voice message is played to serve the alarm to the extension on which Alarm is set. With the
Voice Message for alarms, extension users can be greeted when they answer the alarm call.

For example, "Good Morning. This is your wake up call."

You are recommended to record the message "Please press 0 to acknowledge." in the voice module for
the Alarm/Reminder message, so that extension users can acknowledge Snooze calls. Refer the topics
“Alarms” and “Reminder” to know more.

• Security/Emergency Message: A voice message is played to the external number and to the operator
extension which answers the Emergency call.

• Voice Help: A voice message can be recorded for providing quick help or guidance to extension users.
You can use Voice Help to announce important phone numbers or access codes of frequently used
features, and similar functions.

• Music-on-Hold: Callers who are put on hold are usually played music as they wait. You can play a voice
message instead of music to the callers.

For example, "Your call is important to us. Please hold".

• Message Wait - Notification: A voice message can be played to extension users to inform them of the
new messages in their mailbox, when the extension users go off-hook.

For example, "You have a new message in your Mailbox".

65. Refer the description of the feature “Conference Dial-In”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 855

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Message Wait - No Message: A voice message can be played to extension users to inform them that
there are no new messages in their mailbox, when the extension users go off-hook.

For example, "You have no new messages".

• DND Notification: A voice message can be played to extension users who try to call an extension that has
set DND.

Voice Message for Dial Tone

Instead of the Dial Tone, you can play a voice message to prompt external callers and extension users to dial
numbers. The system plays the dial tone to the external callers/extension users for a fixed time interval known as
the Dial Tone Timer. If no number is dialed within this timer, the callers/extension users get Error Tone. Since
callers/extension users may not be aware of this timer, the Dial Tone Message can be used to prompt them to dial
the number.

For example, "Please dial the number".

When you record a message for the Dial Tone, make sure that the length of the message is shorter than
the duration of the Dial Tone Timer.

Voice Message for Ring Back Tone

When a caller dials an extension, if the extension is free, the caller gets a Ring Back Tone. Instead of the Ring Back
Tone, the caller can be played a message like: "The dialed extension is ringing.”

When you record the Ring Back Tone message, make sure that the length of the message is shorter than
the duration of the Ring Back Tone Timer.

Voice message for Busy Tone

When a caller dials an extension, if the extension is busy, the caller gets a busy tone. You can have the system play
a voice message instead of the busy tone, like: "The dialed extension is busy.”

When you record the Busy Tone message, make sure that the length of the message is shorter than the
duration of the Busy Tone Timer.

Voice message for Error Tone

When a caller/extension user performs a wrong operation or uses a feature without access, it is possible to play a
voice message of the Error Tone, such as: "Please check the number you have dialed".

Voice message for Confirmation Tone

The system confirms the successful operation of features with a confirmation tone, which can be replaced with a
voice message like: "The requested operation is performed successfully".

856 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Voice Message for DND Notification
When an extension user has set Do Not Disturb on the extension, a voice message can be played to callers to
inform them DND set on the extension. For example, "The dialed extension has set Do Not Disturb".

Voice Message Notification for DND is particularly useful when the extension phone on which DND is set is an SLT
and the callers too are using SLT.

Voice Message for Toll Control/CoS Violation

When an extension dials out a number, the system checks the Toll Control assigned to that extension. If the dialed
number does not match with the number strings configured for the Call Privilege type set for the Toll Control level
assigned to the extension, a voice message can be played: "Please check the number you have dialed.” or “This
facility is not available to you".

Similarly, a voice message can be played to the extension user who attempts to invoke a feature that is not
included in the Class of Service (COS) of the extension.

Voice Message for Trunk Auto Answer

Trunk Auto Answer enables calls landing on a trunk to be answered automatically by greeting the caller with a voice
message before the call is actually handled.

ETERNITY supports 4 Trunk Auto Answer messages.

Voice Guidance-Time Based Greetings

ETERNITY supports 3 time-based greetings: Morning, Afternoon, Evening greetings. Messages like "Good
Morning", "Good Afternoon", "Good Evening" can be recorded.

These time based greetings are played to callers before the DID Greetings Message on a DID enabled trunk. On
an Auto-Answer enabled trunk these messages are played before the Trunk Auto Answer greeting message.

The Time Based Greetings will be played during following time periods:

Voice Message Greeting Time during which Greeting will be played

Morning Greeting 00:00 to 11:59

Afternoon Greeting 12:00 to 14:59

Evening Greeting 15:00 to 23:59

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 857

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
By default, Voice Module Number 01 to 13 are assigned to certain applications like Music on Hold, DID and Trunk
Auto Answer Greeting and DID Guidance Messages. Each voice module also contains a pre-recorded voice
message (in WAV format) for the particular application to which the module is assigned. See the table for details.

Voice
Module Voice Message Application Voice Message
Number

01 Music-On-Hold

02 Morning Greeting Good Morning!

(DID/Trunk Auto Answer)

03 Afternoon Greeting Good Afternoon!

(DID/Trunk Auto Answer

04 Evening Greeting Good Evening!

(DID/Trunk Auto Answer)

05 DID Welcome Greeting for Day Time (Working Welcome!

Hours)

06 DID Welcome Greeting for Night time (Non-working Welcome! I am sorry, we are closed.
hours)

07 DID - Dial prompt Please dial the desired number.

08 DID - No Dial message Sorry! You have not dialed any number.

09 DID - Wrong Dial message Sorry! The number is not valid.

10 DID - Destination Busy message The person you dialed is busy.

11 DID - Destination Ringing message (Ring Back The number you have dialed is ringing.
Tone)

12 DID - Destination No Reply message The person you dialed is not responding.

13 DID Call Transfer to Operator message Please hold, transferring your call to the Operator.

14 Not assigned to any application Blank

15 Not assigned to any application Blank

16 Not assigned to any application Blank

If these default Voice Modules and Voice Messages serve your purpose, you may use them. No further
configuration is required, as these modules are loaded in the system by default.

However, if you want to use custom messages, you must first record the messages on voice modules.

For example, if you want to a different voice message for the DID Welcome Greeting for Night Time, record a
suitable message of you choice on Voice Module number 06.

If you want to use a voice Message for DND Notification, you may record a suitable message on a blank module
and assign this module to the DND Notification application.

You can reassign the default Voice Modules to other Voice Message Applications as required.
The same Voice Module can also be assigned to multiple Voice Message Applications.

858 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Recording Voice Messages
You can record Voice Messages on voice modules from:

• A telephone connected to the ETERNITY NE.

Or

• Any other source, and upload the audio files of the Voice messages on to the system configuration files,
using the embedded FTP server of ETERNITY NE.

Recording Voice Messages from a Phone

To record a Voice Message from a phone,

• Lift the handset.

• Enter SE mode from an extension phone of ETERNITY NE.

• Dial 2502-Voice Module Number

Where,
Voice Module is from 01 to 16.

• You will get a dial tone.

• At the end of the dial tone, start recording the message, by speaking into the mouthpiece of telephone
instrument.

• Limit your message to 16 seconds or less or the message will be truncated when played.

• Go ON-Hook on completion of the message.

To check or verify the Voice Message you recorded, dial (from SE Mode):

• 2503-Voice Module Number you recorded

• Listen to the message.

• Exit SE mode.

• Replace handset.

If you are not satisfied with the quality of the recording, you may repeat this procedure again.

Voice Module 01 is reserved for Music-on-Hold by default. You are advised not to assign this module to
any other Voice Message Application.

Recording Voice Messages from FTP

• Record your custom messages from any source.

• Make sure the audio files are recorded in .wav file format, with the attributes listed below:

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 859

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Bit Rate: 128 kbps
• Audio Sample Size: 16 bit
• Channels: 1 (mono)
• Audio Sample Rate: 8 KHz
• Audio Format: PCM

• The messages must not exceed 16 seconds.

• Copy the custom messages on to a computer to which ETERNITY NE is connected.

• Upload the voice messages from the embedded FTP server of ETERNITY NE.

To upload voice message from the embedded FTP server,

• Make sure FireFTP Add-on is installed in your Mozilla Firefox browser.

• Open Jeeves and log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Click the Voice Message Applications link to open the page.

The voice message applications that are assigned Voice Modules by default appear on this page.

• Click the Click here to Upload Voice Messages in Voice modules link.

860 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Enter your SE password.

• The FTP window opens, containing all the voice module folders. Each Voice Module Number has a
separate folder. The folder name indicates the Voice Module number.

• Click the folder to view the existing audio files in the folder.

• To upload a Voice Message on a Voice module, right click the desired Voice Module folder and select the
option Open Link in FireFTP from the right click menu.

• Log in to FireFTP with your SE password.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 861

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The FireFTP opens. Click Browse on the left window to select the path to the folder where you have saved
your Voice Prompt audio files on your computer.

• Browse for the folder where you have saved the Voice Modules, and click OK.

862 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The folders and files on the computer appear on the left. The FireFTP pane on the right displays the
existing file(s) in the Voice Module folder. Delete the existing audio file in the folder of the FireFTP.

• To copy the audio file from the location it is saved on the computer, select the file, and click the Upload
Arrow.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 863

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The file you selected appears on FireFTP window.

• Repeat the same to select the other audio files.

• Close the FTP window by clicking [x] of the FireFTP tab.

864 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Return to the Voice Message Applications page on Jeeves.

The voice message you assigned to the Voice Module will be uploaded.

• Now, assign the Voice Module Number to the desired Voice Message application.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 865

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For example, you have recorded Voice Module 14 as DND Notification Message. Enter this number
against the voice message application DND Notification.

You can assign the same Voice Module to more than one Voice Message Application.

• Click Submit.

• The Voice Module Number you assigned, and the duration of the Voice Message recorded in the module,
appear.

ETERNITY NE automatically detects and displays the duration of the voice message you recorded. So you
need not define the duration.

However, you may define the duration, if you want the recorded voice message to be played for a specific
duration. For example, the message you recorded in the voice module 14 for DND Notification is 16
seconds long, but you want to play only the message contents of the first 12 seconds, you can define the
duration of the message as 12 seconds.

• Click Logout to exit Jeeves.

If you do not have FireFTP Add-on in your browser, you may upload files using Windows FTP. Follow these steps:

• Click My Computer.

• Type the current IP Address of the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE in the Address bar as ftp://
192.168.1.101

• Click Go or Press Enter key on your keyboard.

866 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The Log on as window of the FTP server opens.

• In the Password field, enter the SE password (default 1234) and click the Log On button.

• All the Configuration folders appear in this window.

• Open the voicemodule folder. All the Voice Module folders appear in the window.

• Open the desired voice module folder and delete the existing audio file.

• Copy the new audio file you recorded from the location it is saved on the computer. Paste the file in the
Voice Message folder.

• Close the FTP window.

• Return to the Voice Message Applications page of Jeeves and assign the Voice Module Number to the
desired Voice Message Application.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 867

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Submit to save your settings.

• Click Logout to exit Jeeves.

868 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Walk-In Class of Service

What’s this?
Every extension of ETERNITY NE is allowed a distinct Class of Service and Toll Control defining its access to
features and its calling permission.

Extension users may be required to make calls from another extension, which does not have the same Class of
Service and Toll Control as their own extension.

With Walk-In Class of Service, all extension users of ETERNITY NE can make calls from any other extension of the
system as per the Class of Service and Toll Control of their own extension.

This feature is particularly useful to extension users who frequently move away from their desk. It allows them the
same level of feature access and Toll Control on the other extensions from which they make calls.

Extension users can 'Walk-In' in to any extension port—DKP, SLT and SIP.

ETERNITY NE offers two types of Walk-In:

• The extension user is automatically logged out from the extension into which the user has walked in after
the call made by the user is completed.

• The extension user remains 'walked-in' until the user dials the feature command for Walk-Out, or until a
second person walks in to the same extension port.

You can allow extension users either of the above types of Walk-In by configuring the Walk-Out Mode in their
extension port parameters, as:

• Walk out automatically on completion of call.

Or
• Walk out on user request.

Walk-In Class of Service is protected with the User Password.

To be able to use this feature, extension users must first change the default User Password 1111.

How it works
• Extension user A has a DKP with the number 301. A has long distance calling facility on the extension.

• Extension user B has an SLT with the number 201. B can make only local calls from the extension.

• Extension user A is at B's desk and needs to make a long distance call.

• Extension user A can walk into B's extension number 201 by dialing
• the feature code for 'Walk-In Class of Service'.
• the User Password (default password 1111 will not be accepted).

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 869

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • On successful Walk-In, the system applies the Class of Service and Toll Control of extension 301 on
extension 201.

• Extension user A can now dial the trunk access code and the external, long distance number.

• If Extension user A has 'Walk out automatically on completion of call' set as the Walk-Out Mode on
extension 301, A will be walked out when the current call ends or if A goes ON-Hook at any time after
walking in to extension 201.

• If Extension user A has 'Walk out on user request set as the Walk-Out Mode on extension 301, A can walk
out of 201 only by dialing the feature code for Walk-Out.

However, if Extension user A does not walk out by dialing the feature code, the system will walk out A only
when another extension user walks in to extension 201.

• Calls made by Extension user A from extension 201 using Walk-In will be calculated and charged to
extension 301.

• Call record details of calls made by Extension user A from extension 201 using Walk-In will be recorded in
the Station Message Detail Record of extension 301.

At a time, only one extension user can walk in to another extension.

How to configure
This feature is available to all extensions of ETERNITY NE. It does not require any other configuration except
selection of the Walk-Out Mode for the extension in its port parameters.

If you want to allow different walk-out modes to different extensions, then decide which of the extensions are to be
allowed 'Walk out automatically on completion of call' and which are to be allowed 'Walk out on user request'.

To select the Walk-Out Mode for extensions,

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Basic Settings link.

• Click the link of the extension type:

• “SLT Extensions”
• “DKP Extensions”
• “SIP Extensions”

870 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The page of the selected extension type opens.

• To select an extension number on the page, select the Extension Number tab.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 871

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click More button to expand parameter options for the selected Extension number.

• Click Walk-in/Walk-Out to expand.

• Select the walk-out mode, as required:

• Walk out automatically on completion of call.
• Walk out on user request.

• Click Submit to save settings.

872 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

To walk in to another extension:

• Press DSS Key assigned to Walk-In Class of Service (if programmed).

OR
• Dial 111
• Dial 1 on the prompt 'Walk-In' on your phone's display.
• On the prompt 'Walk in from which Station?', dial your extension number.
• On the prompt 'Enter your User Password', dial your User Password (default password will not be
accepted).
• You get the confirmation message 'Walked In Successfully' on your phone's display and confirmation tone.
• You can now make your call(s) by dialing the desired number during the confirmation tone or after you get
the dial tone.

To walk out by dialing a command from the extension you walked in:

• Press DSS Key assigned to Walk-In Class of Service.

OR
• Dial 111.
• Dial 0 on the prompt 'Walk-In' on your phone's display.
• You get the confirmation message 'Walked Out' on your phone's display and confirmation tone.

When your own extension has 'Walk out automatically on completion of call’ as the Walk-Out mode, you
will be walked out if you go ON-Hook before you make the call. You need to walk in again.

For SLT Users

To walk in to another extension:

• Lift handset.
• Dial 111-1
• Dial your extension number.
• Dial your User Password.
• You get a confirmation tone.
• You can make your call(s) now, during the confirmation tone or after you get the dial tone.

To walk out by dialing a command from the extension you walked in:
• Dial 111-0
• You get a confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 873

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 874 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 8 Voice Mail Features

Alarms and Reminders

What’s this?
The Voice Mail System of ETERNITY NE offers voice-guided Alarms and Reminders, which can be set by the
Operator as well as extension users.

How it works
Voice-guided Alarm and Reminder requests are served as per the date and time set by extension users. The
different ways in which Alarm or Reminder requests will be served are described in the following:

• Alarm with Snooze Off (Once Only)

• The VMS plays system greeting for the current time zone and the Extension Name followed by the
message "This is your Wake up Call. 'Music of 5 seconds." (Wake up Greeting.wav)

• Alarm with Snooze On (Once Only)

• The VMS plays system greeting as per time zone and the Extension Name followed by the message
"This is your Wake up Call. Please Press '0' to Acknowledge." (SWakeUpgreeting.wav)

• When user press '0', VMS prompts: "Your Alarm is Acknowledged." (Acknowledge.wav)

• Daily Alarm with Snooze Off

• The VMS plays system greeting as per the time zone and the Extension Name followed by the message
"This is your Daily Wake up Call." (DailyWake up Greeting.wav)

• Daily Alarm with Snooze On

• VMS plays system greeting as per time zone and the Extension Name followed by the message "This is
your Daily Wake up Call. For Acknowledge, Please Press '0'." (SWakeUpgreeting.wav)

• When user press '0', VMS prompts: "Your Alarm is Acknowledged." (Acknowledge.wav)

• Reminder with Snooze Off

• VMS plays system greeting as per time zone and the Extension Name followed by the message "This is
your Reminder call." (Reminder Greeting.wav)

• Reminder with Snooze On

• VMS plays system greeting as per time zone and the Extension Name followed by the message "This is
your Reminder Call. For Acknowledge, Please Press '0'." (SRemindergreeting.wav)

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 875

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • When user press '0', VMS prompts: "Your Reminder is Acknowledged." (AcknowledgeRem.wav)

How to configure
The VMS allows you to enable/disable the Alarm Verification for alarms and reminders, allowing extension users
who want to use alarms and reminders to confirm
• Time set for an alarm
• Date and time set as a reminder.

When Alarm Verification is disabled, the VMS will not confirm the alarm and reminder set by the extension user.

To configure Alarm Verification,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Open the System Parameters link under Advanced Settings.

• On the System Parameters page, click Alarm to expand.

• Select the Voice Guided Alarm Verification check box to enable Alarm Verification. Default: Disabled.

876 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click Submit to save changes.

• Log out of Jeeves.

How to use

Alarm set by Extension Users

• Pick up the handset of your telephone and dial 163  VMS prompts: "Enter the time, HH MM in twenty four
hour format66. To cancel all alarms, press '# (pound/hash)'." (EntertimeI.wav)

• If no time is entered, VMS prompts: "You have not entered any input" (NoInput.wav)

• If invalid time is entered, VMS prompts: "You have entered invalid input." (InvalidInput.wav)

• To set alarm, dial valid time  VMS prompts: "To set once, Press '1', To set Daily Press '2'."
(SetOnceDaily.wav)

Once Only

• Dial 1  VMS responds with: "You have set Wake up Alarm at …." (WakeupVeri.wav) followed by the
prompt: To Confirm67, Press 1, To Re-enter, Press 2." (AlarmConf.wav).

• Dial 1 to confirm the time set for alarm  VMS responds with: "Your Wake up Alarm is set."
(WakeupSet.wav) followed by the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• If alarm is not set, the VMS responds with: "Sorry! Your Wake Up Alarm cannot be set. Please call
Operator for further assistance." (AlarmNoset.wav). VMS further responds with: "Thanks for using this
Service." (Thankservice.wav)

Daily Alarm

• Dial 2  VMS responds with: "You have set Daily Wake up Alarm at …." (DailyWakeupVeri.wav) followed
by the prompt: "To Confirm, Press 1, To Re-enter, Press 2." (AlarmConf.wav)

• Dial 1 to confirm the time set for alarm  VMS responds with: "Your Daily Wake up Alarm is set."
(DailyWakeupSet.wav) followed by the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• If no alarm is set, the VMS responds with: "Sorry! Your Wake Up Alarm cannot be set. Please call
Operator for further assistance." (AlarmNoset.wav). The VMS further responds with: "Thanks for using
this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• Dial # (pound/hash) to cancel all alarms  VMS responds with: "Your all Wake up Alarm are cancelled."
(WakeupCancel.wav) followed by the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• If no alarms are set, the VMS responds with: "Sorry! There is no Alarm to cancel." (Alarmnocancel.wav)
followed by the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav).

66. The Date and time format depends on the Region/Country selected for the system.
67. This option will not be played if Alarm Verification is disabled in the System Parameters.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 877

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Alarm set by Operator

• Enter System Adminstrator Mode, dialing 1072.

• Dial 034  the VMS prompts: "Enter the Extension number for which you have to set or cancel Wake Up
Alarm." (RemoteExt.wav)

• Dial 1 to select the extension user for which the Alarm is to be set. VMS responds with: "Enter the time, HH
MM in twenty-four hour format. To cancel all alarms, press '#’ (pound/hash)'." (EntertimeI.wav)

• If no time is entered, the VMS prompts: "You have not entered any input" (NoInput.wav)

• If invalid time is entered, the VMS prompts: "You have entered invalid input." (InvalidInput.wav)

• To set alarm, dial valid time  VMS prompts: "To set once, Press '1', To set Daily Press '2'."
(SetOnceDaily.wav)

Once Only

• Dial 1  the VMS responds with: "To set it as Personal, Press 1. To set it as Automated, Press 2."
(Alarmmode.wav)

• Dial 1  VMS responds with: "You have set Personal Wake up alarm at…." (PerWakeupVeri.wav)
followed by the prompt: "To Confirm, Press 1, To Re-enter, Press 2." (AlarmConf.wav)

• Dial 1  VMS responds with: "Your Personal Wake up Alarm is set." (PerWakeupSet.wav) followed by
the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• If alarm is not set, the VMS responds with: "Sorry! Your Wakeup Alarm cannot be set. Please call
Operator for further assistance." (AlarmNoset.wav) VMS further responds with: "Thanks for using this
Service." (Thankservice.wav)
OR

• Dial 2  the VMS responds with: "You have set Automated Wake up alarm at…."
(AutoWakeupVeri.wav) followed by the prompt: "To Confirm, Press 1, To Re-enter, Press 2."
(AlarmConf.wav)

• Dial 1  the VMS responds with: "Your Automated Wake up Alarm is set." (PerWakeupSet.wav)
followed by the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• If alarm is not set, VMS responds with: "Sorry! Your Wakeup Alarm cannot be set. Please call
Operator for further assistance." (AlarmNoset.wav) VMS further responds with: "Thanks for using
this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

Daily Alarm

• Dial 2  VMS responds with: "To set it as Personal, Press 1. To set it as Automated, Press 2."
(Alarmmode.wav)

• Dial 1  VMS responds with: "You have set Daily Personal Wake up alarm at…."
(DailyPerWakeupVeri.wav) followed by the prompt: "To Confirm, Press 1, To Re-enter, Press 2."
(AlarmConf.wav)

878 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dial 1  VMS responds with: "Your Daily Personal Wake up Alarm is set." (PerWakeupSet.wav)
followed by the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• If the alarm is not set, the VMS responds with: "Sorry! Your Wakeup Alarm cannot be set. Please
call Operator for further assistance." (AlarmNoset.wav) VMS further responds with: "Thanks for
using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)
OR

• Dial 2  the VMS responds with: "You have set Daily Automated Wake up alarm at…."
(DailyAutoWakeupVeri.wav) followed by the prompt: "To Confirm, Press 1, To Re-enter, Press 2."
(AlarmConf.wav)

• Dial 1  VMS responds with: "Your Daily Automated Wake up Alarm is set." (DailyPerWakeupSet.wav)
followed by the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• If alarm is not set, VMS responds with: "Sorry! Your Wakeup Alarm cannot be set. Please call
Operator for further assistance." (AlarmNoset.wav) VMS further responds with: "Thanks for using this
Service." (Thankservice.wav)

Reminders set by Extension Users

• Pick up handset of your telephone and dial 164  VMS prompts: "Enter the Date in DD MM YYYY
format68. To Cancel all Reminders, Press '#’ (pound/hash)'. For example, To enter Date 17th March 2008,
Dial One Seven Zero Three Two Zero Zero Eight." (AlarmDateI.wav)

• If no date is entered then VMS prompts: "You have not entered any input" (NoInput.wav)

• If invalid date is entered then VMS prompts: "You have entered invalid input." (InvalidInput.wav)

• Dial valid Date  the VMS prompts: "Enter the time, HH MM in twenty four hour format." (Entertime2I.wav)

• If no time is entered, the VMS prompts: "You have not entered any input" (NoInput.wav)

• If invalid time is entered, the VMS prompts: "You have entered invalid input." (InvalidInput.wav)

• Dial valid time  VMS prompts: "You have set Reminder for..." (ReminderVeri.wav) followed by the
prompt: "To Confirm, Press 1, To Re-enter, Press 2." (AlarmConf.wav)

• Dial 1 to confirm the date and time set for Reminder  the VMS responds with: "Your Reminder is set."
(ReminderSet.wav) followed by the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• If Reminder is not set, the VMS responds with: "Sorry! Your Reminder cannot be set. Please call
Operator for further assistance." (ReminderNoset.wav) VMS further responds with: "Thanks for using
this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• Dial # (pound/hash) to cancel Reminder  the VMS responds with: "Your Reminder is cancelled."
(ReminderCancel.wav) followed by the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• If no reminder is set, the VMS responds with: "Sorry! There is no Reminder to cancel."
(Remindernocancel.wav) followed by the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

68. The date format in the prompt will be MM DD YYYY, if you selected USA as the Region/Country for your system.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 879

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Reminders set by Operator

• Enter System Administrator Mode, dialing 1072.

• Dial 1072 to enter SA mode followed by 035  VMS prompts: "Enter the Extension number for which you
have to set or cancel Reminder." (RemoteExtRem.wav)

• Dial 1 to select the station user for which the Reminder is to be set. VMS responds with: "Enter the Date in
DD MM YYYY format. To Cancel all Reminders, Press '# (pound/hash)'. For example, To enter Date 17th
March 2008, Dial One Seven Zero Three Two Zero Zero Eight." (AlarmDateI.wav)

• If no date is entered, the VMS prompts: "You have not entered any input" (NoInput.wav)

• If invalid date is entered then VMS prompts: "You have entered invalid input." (InvalidInput.wav)

• Dial valid date  VMS prompts: "Enter the time, HH MM in twenty-four hour format." (Entertime2I.wav)

• If no time is entered then VMS prompts: "You have not entered any input" (NoInput.wav)

• If invalid time is entered then VMS prompts: "You have entered invalid input." (InvalidInput.wav)

• Dial valid time  VMS prompts: "To set it as Personal, Press 1. To set it as Automated, Press 2."
(Alarmmode.wav)

• Dial 1  VMS responds with: "You have set Personal Reminder for…." (PerReminderVeri.wav)
followed by the prompt: "To Confirm69, Press 1, To Re-enter, Press 2." (AlarmConf.wav)

• Dial 1  VMS responds with: "Your Personal Reminder is set." (PerReminderSet.wav) followed by the
prompt: Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• If Reminder is not set, the VMS responds with: "Sorry! Your Reminder cannot be set. Please call
Operator for further assistance." (AlarmNoset.wav) VMS further responds with: "Thanks for using
this Service." (Thankservice.wav)
OR

• Dial 2  VMS responds with: "You have set Automated Reminder for…." (AutoReminderVeri.wav)
followed by the prompt: "To Confirm, Press 1, To Re-enter, Press 2." (AlarmConf.wav)

• Dial 1  VMS responds with: "Your Automated Reminder is set." (PerReminderSet.wav) followed by
the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• If Reminder is not set, VMS responds with: "Sorry! Your Reminder cannot be set. Please call
Operator for further assistance." (AlarmNoset.wav) VMS further responds with: "Thanks for using
this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• Dial # to cancel Reminder  VMS responds with: "Your Reminder is cancelled." (ReminderCancel.wav)
followed by the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

• If no reminder is set, VMS responds with: "Sorry! There is no Reminder to cancel."

(Remindernocancel.wav) followed by the prompt: "Thanks for using this Service." (Thankservice.wav)

69. This option will not be played, if Alarm Verification is disabled in the System parameters.

880 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Broadcast Message

What’s this?
Broadcasting Message allows you to send the same message to all extension users having voicemail, at the same
time. You can use Broadcast Message to make general announcements like hosting of an event, an unplanned day
off, and other such activities or events.

How to use
To Broadcast Message,

• Enter SA Mode.

• Dial 1072-301

• VMS prompts: "Record your message after the beep and press any digit to end". (Recmsg.wav)

• Speak to record your message after the beep, and press # (hash/pound) to end the message.

• VMS prompts: "To re-record the message press 1, to confirm press 2". (RecAgain.wav)

• Dial 2 to confirm  VMS responds with "Your message has been sent." (Msgsent.wav)

• If you press '1', the VMS prompts: "Record your message after the beep and press any digit to end"
(Recmsg.wav). Follow the prompts.

• If “Message Verification” is disabled, the VMS will not offer to verify and re-record your message. Your
message will be sent to all mailboxes and the VMS will respond with ‘Your message has been sent’
(Msgsent.wav).

The length of the message you want to broadcast must be equal to or less than the minimum of message
length programmed for the mailboxes, or your message will be truncated. For instance, if the Maximum
message length for a mailbox is configured as 15 seconds, maximum length of the message to be
broadcast must be less than or equal to 15 seconds. If the broadcast message exceeds this limit, the
system will play the first 15 seconds and truncate the remaining part of the message.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 881

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Transfer Types

What’s this?
The VMS Auto Attendant answers calls of external callers and extension users (referred to here as ‘callers’) and
transfers the call to the extensions according to the Call Transfer type set for the extension.

The VMS Auto Attendant offers the following types of Call Transfer, which can be set on the extensions for the Day
and Night:

• Transfer to Mailbox: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant checks if the
extension number has a mailbox assigned and transfer the call to the mailbox of the extension.

• Transfer immediately: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant transfers the
call on the extension without checking whether it is busy or free.

• Transfer when extension rings: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant
waits for the extension to start ringing and then transfer the call.

If the extension is busy the VMS Auto Attendant transfers the call to the mailbox of the extension, if
assigned. If no mailbox is assigned, the VMS Auto Attendant takes the caller back to the Home Node.

• Transfer when extension answers: When the caller dials the extension number, the VMS Auto Attendant
transfers the call when the extension answers (goes OFF-Hook).

If the extension does not answer70, the VMS Auto Attendant transfers the call to the mailbox of the
extension. If no mailbox is assigned to the extension, the VMS Auto Attendant takes the caller back to the
Home Node.

• Transfer when extension permits: The VMS Auto Attendant prompts the caller to record his/her name. It
puts the caller on hold and places the call on the desired extension. If the extension is free and answers
the call, the VMS announces the caller’s name to the extension user and prompts the extension user to
choose whether or not to speak to the caller. If the extension user chooses to talk, the VMS transfers the
call.

If the extension user chooses not to talk, the VMS transfers the call to the mailbox of the extension user
and asks the caller to leave a message.

If no mailbox is assigned to this extension user, the VMS Auto Attendant takes the caller back to the Home
Node.

70. The VMS will wait for the duration of the Wait for Answer Timer (default: 15 seconds; the timer is configurable). If the call is not
answered before this timer expires, it is treated as No Reply.

882 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to configure
Call Transfer Type must be configured in the Voice Mail Auto Attendant parameters on each extension.

To select Call Transfer Type in the Voice Mail Auto Attendant parameter on the extensions and Department
Groups, for instructions:

• See “Voice Mail Auto Attendant” under “SLT Extensions”.

• See “Voice Mail Auto Attendant” under “DKP Extensions”.

• See “Voice Mail Auto Attendant” under “SIP Extensions”.

For Department groups, see the feature description for “Department Call” for instructions.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 883

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dial by Extension Number

What’s this?
The VMS Auto Attendant allows external callers and extension users to reach directly the desired person in an
organization by dialing the extension number of that person at the home position.

How to use

External Callers
• The VMS Auto Attendant answers the call.

• The VMS greets the caller with the Greeting message followed by the Welcome Message: "Welcome!
Please dial the extension number Or to dial by name press 7. To leave message, press 6. To go to
operator, press 9. For more options, press 0. To disconnect, press #."

• The caller dials valid extension number  VMS transfers the call as per the Call Transfer Type selected for
the extension.

• If the extension number dialed by the caller is invalid, the VMS prompts: "The number is not valid."
(Invalno.wav) followed by the prompt: "Please dial the extension number or to dial by name press 7. To
leave message, press 6. To go to operator, press 9. For more options, press 0. To disconnect, press #".

• Dial valid extension number and talk.

Extension Users

• When you call the VMS by dialing 3931,

• The VMS takes you to your mailbox.

• Dial ‘0’ to reach the home node.

• VMS responds with a greeting followed by Welcome Message: "Welcome! Please dial the extension
number Or to dial by name press 7. To leave message, press 6. To go to operator, press 9. For more
options, press 0. To disconnect, press #.

• Dial valid extension number  VMS transfers the call as per the Call Transfer type selected for the dialed
extension number. Talk.

• If the extension number you dialed is invalid, the VMS prompts: "The number is not valid." (Invalno.wav)
followed by the prompt: "Please dial the extension number or to dial by name press 7. To leave
message, press 6. To go to operator, press 9. For more options, press 0. To disconnect, press #" .

• Dial valid extension number and talk.

884 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dial By Name

What’s this?
The VMS Auto Attendant allows external callers and extension users to reach the desired person in an organization
by dialing the name of that person. This feature useful when caller/extension user cannot recall the extension
number of the person they want to speak to.

How to configure
For this feature to work, each extension user’s name must be abbreviated and configured on the extension. It is
recommended that the extension users’ names be abbreviated to the first three letters of the name. As far as
possible, abbreviate names such that no two names are the same.

You must configure the Abbreviated Name in the Voice Mail Auto Attendant settings of the SLT, DKP, and SIP
extensions.

• To configure Abbreviated Name for SLT extensions, see “Voice Mail Auto Attendant” under “SLT
Extensions” for instructions.

• To configure Abbreviated Name for DKP extensions, see “Voice Mail Auto Attendant” under “DKP
Extensions” for instructions.

• To configure Abbreviated Name for SIP extensions, see “Voice Mail Auto Attendant” under “SIP
Extensions” for instructions.

How to use

External Callers
• The VMS Auto Attendant answers the call. The VMS greets the caller with the Greeting message followed
by the Welcome Message: "Welcome! Please dial the extension number Or to dial by name press 7. To
leave message, press 6. To go to operator, press 9. For more options, press 0. To disconnect, press #."

• The caller dial 7  VMS prompts: "Please enter first three letters of the name." (DialName.wav)

• The caller dials valid digits  VMS prompts: "To confirm press '1', to cancel press '2'." (Xfromot.wav)

• The caller dials 1  VMS transfers the call as per the transfer type of the selected station. Talk.

• If the caller dials invalid digits, the VMS prompts: "Sorry no match found." (Empty.wav) followed by the
prompt: "Welcome! Please dial the extension number Or to dial by name press 7. To leave message,
press 6. To go to operator, press 9. For more options, press 0. To disconnect, press #".

Extension Users
• When you call the VMS by dialing 3931,

• The VMS takes you to your mailbox.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 885

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dials ‘0’ to reach the home node.

• VMS responds with a greeting followed by Welcome Message: "Welcome! Please dial the extension
number Or to dial by name press 7. To leave message, press 6. To go to operator, press 9. For more
options, press 0. To disconnect, press #."

• Dial 7  VMS prompts: "Please enter first three letters of the name." (DialName.wav)

• Dial valid digits  VMS prompts: "To confirm press '1', to cancel press '2'." (Xfromot.wav)

• Dial 1  VMS transfers the call as per the transfer type of the selected extension. Talk.

• If the digits you dialed are invalid, VMS prompts: "Sorry no match found." (Empty.wav) followed by the
prompt: "Welcome! Please dial the extension number Or to dial by name press 7. To leave message,
press 6. To go to operator, press 9. For more options, press 0. To disconnect, press #".

• Dial 7 and follow the prompts.

Extension users can use Dial by Name also to reach another extension, if the called extesnion is busy or
does not reply.

886 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Email Based Notification

What’s this?
The VMS supports E-mail Based Notification to inform extension users about the arrival of new messages in their
mailbox. Extension users can also receive new messages as attachments to the email.

How to configure
To be able to use this feature, extension users must have Email-based notification enabled in Voice Mail Settings.

To provide extension users Email-based notification of new messages,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Basic Settings link.

• Click the link of the desired extension type:

• “SLT Extensions”
• “DKP Extensions”
• “SIP Extensions”

• The page of the selected extension type opens.

• On this page, select the extension number to which you want to provide this feature, by clicking the
extension number tab.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 887

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • On the extension page, click the Voice Mail Settings option to expand.

• Go to the option Voice Mail notification via E-mail.

• Select the desired notification option: Send without attachment or Send with attachment. Default:
Do not send.

• In the E-mail Address field, enter the email address of the extension user to which the notification for
new messages should be sent.

• Click Submit to save settings.

• To configure the same feature on another extension, click the desired extension number tab, and follow
the same steps as described above.

888 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Forwarding Messages

What’s this?
The VMS enables extension users to forward messages of their mailbox to other mailboxes.

How it works
The Forwarding Messages feature of the VMS offers to extension users the following options:
• forward messages after adding a comment.
• forward messages without adding comment.
• forwarding messages with Message Read Receipt request.

Before forwarding a message, the VMS asks the Sender, if the Sender needs a confirmation that the message has
been read by the Recipient.

If the Sender requests for 'Message Read Receipt', the VMS remembers stores this request. When the Recipient
reads the message, the VMS generates a file containing the first 5 seconds of the message that was sent by the
Sender and delivers it to the Sender's mailbox in the form of a new message with a prompt: "This message was
read by <Extension Name><5 seconds of the message sent>" with the Date and Time (if this is enabled in Play
Message Details) at which the message was read.

In case the message was not delivered to the Recipient, the VMS generates a file containing the first 5 seconds of
the message that was sent by the Sender and delivers it to the Sender's mailbox in the form of new message with
the prompt: "This message was not delivered to <Extension Name><5 seconds of the message>" with the Date
and Time (if enabled in Play Message Details).

How to use
• Call the VMS by dialing 3931.

• The VMS takes you to your mailbox.

• VMS responds with: "You have <n> new messages" followed by "Enter your mailbox password"
(Enterpwd.wav)

• Enter your mailbox password  VMS responds with: "You have 0/n new messages". (Nonewmsg.wav/
Newmsg.wav)

• The VMS prompts: "To listen to new messages press '1', to listen to old message press '2', to send a
message press '3', to change your mailbox settings press '4', to go to home position press '0'".
(Mmmm.wav)

• Dial 1 or Dial 2 and listen to the messages  VMS prompts: "To replay the message press '1', for Date
and Time stamp press '2', to delete the message press '3', to play the next message press '4', to forward
the message press '5', to save the message as new press '6', to go to previous menu press '0'."
(Mmsmo.wav)

• Dial 5  VMS prompts: "To forward the message without comment press '1', to forward the message with
comment press '2', to go to previous menu press '0'." (Fwdhow.wav)

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 889

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To forward message without comment dial '1'. The VMS prompts: "Enter the Destinations". (Msgdest.wav).

• Dial Destination number/Distribution list number to forward the message.

• VMS responds with "Your message has been sent". (Msgsent.wav)

OR

• To forward message with comment dial '2'. The VMS prompts: "Enter the Destinations". (Msgdest.wav)

• Dial Destinations/Distribution list number to forward the message.

• The VMS prompts: "Record your message after the beep and press any digit to end." (Recmsg.wav)

• Speak to record your comment and press # to end recording. VMS prompts: "To re-record the
message press '1', to confirm press '2'." (RecAgain.wav) Dial 2 to confirm.

• The VMS prompts: "To request read receipt press '1', to ignore read receipt press '2'." (Askcfrm.wav)

• Dial 1 or 2. VMS responds with "Your message has been sent". (Msgsent.wav)

Extension users must be careful in dialing destination numbers. If invalid destination is entered then the
VMS will clear all the entries and will ask the mailbox owner to re-enter all the destinations again.

A message can be forwarded to maximum 10 destinations. A destination can be an extension or a a

distribution list.

890 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 General Mailbox

What’s this?
A General mailbox is a shared mailbox between extension users. The General Mailbox is used for recording
messages when the mailbox of an extension is full.

How it works
The VMS offers the following options to extensions when their mailbox is full:
• Not offer the caller to record a message.
• Overwrite the existing messages in the mail box with the new message.
• Deliver the new message to the General Mailbox.

If you configure Delivery of new messages to General Mailbox on an extension, whenever the mailbox of the
extension is full, the VMS will offer the caller to record a message. This message will be recorded in the General
Mailbox.

The extension user, whose mail box is full, can listen to the new message by accessing the General Mailbox.

The extension user can access the General Mailbox, only if this feature is enabled in the Class of Service of the
extension.

How to configure
To offer extension users the facility of the General Mailbox when their mailbox is full, you must do the following:

• Configure the option When Mailbox is full in the Voicemail Settings of the extension.

For the option When Mailbox is full, select Deliver New Message in General Mailbox.

• Enable the feature General Mailbox in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the extension.

For instructions on configuring these parameters on the different extension types, see “SLT Extensions”, “DKP
Extensions”, “SIP Extensions” under “Basic Settings”.

How to use

For EON & Extended IP Phone Users

• Press DSS Key assigned to General Mailbox
OR
• Dial 1176.
• Follow VMS prompts.

For SLT Users

• Lift handset.
• Dial 1176.
• Follow VMS prompts.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 891

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Leaving a Message

What’s this?
The VMS allows,

• External callers to leave messages in the extension user’s mailbox.

• Extension users to leave message in the mailbox of other extensions.

To leave a message, the called extension must have a mailbox. The length of message recorded by the callers/
extension users must not exceed the message length set for the called extension’s mailbox. If the message
recorded by the callers/extension users exceeds the message length set for the called extension’s mailbox, the
VMS will stop recording the message after the time set and save the partially recorded message.

How to use

External Callers
• The VMS Auto Attendant answers the call. The VMS greets the caller with the Greeting message followed
by the Welcome Message: "Welcome! Please dial the extension number Or to dial by name press 7. To
leave message, press 6. To go to operator, press 9. For more options, press 0. To disconnect, press #."

• The caller dials 6 to leave message  VMS prompts: "Enter the Extension number for which you wish to
leave message." (LeavemsgE.wav)

• The caller dials the desired extension number  VMS prompts: "Record your message after the beep and
press # (hash/pound) to end. (Recmsg.wav)

• If no mailbox is assigned to the dialed extension number, the VMS prompts: "Mailbox not assigned. To
disconnect, press 1. To go to Home Position, Press 0." (NoMailbox.wav)

• The caller speaks to record the message and presses # to end recording. The VMS plays back the recorded
message and prompts: To re-record the message press 1, to confirm press 2." (RecAgain.wav)

• If Message Verification flag is disabled, the VMS does not playback the recorded message and prompts:
"Your message has been recorded" after caller press # to end message recording.

Extension Users
• When you call the VMS by dialing 3931,

• The VMS takes you to your mailbox.

• Dial ‘0’ to reach the home node.

• The VMS plays the Welcome Message: "Welcome! Please dial the extension number Or to dial by name
press 7. To leave message, press 6. To go to operator, press 9. For more options, press 0. To disconnect,
press #."

892 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dial 6 to leave message  VMS prompts: "Enter the Extension number for which you wish to leave
message." (LeavemsgE.wav)

• Dial the desired extension number  VMS prompts: "Record your message after the beep and press #
(hash/pound) to end. (Recmsg.wav)

• If no mailbox is assigned to the dialed extension number, the VMS prompts: "Mailbox not assigned. To
disconnect, press 1. To go to Home Position, Press 0." (NoMailbox.wav)

• Record your message and press # to end recording. The VMS plays back the recorded message and
prompts: To re-record the message press 1, to confirm press 2." (RecAgain.wav)

• If Message Verification is disabled, the VMS does not playback the recorded message and prompts:
"Your message has been recorded", “press # (hash/pound) to end’.

• If the extension you called is busy, you may leave a message for another extension:

It is mandatory for the caller/extension user to terminate the recording by dialing # (or the digit configured).
If recording of the message is terminated simply by going on-hook, the VMS will not terminate the recording
and the call will be disconnected only after time-out, i.e. the Maximum Message Length configured for the
extension.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 893

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Listening to Messages

What’s this?
When extension users access their mailbox, the VMS offers them the When callers/extension user leave messages
in the mailbox of extension users, n they are inaccessible or the user has forwarded his calls to the mailbox. User
should access their mailboxes to listen to the messages.

VMS offers two options:

• To listen to old messages.
• To listen to new messages.

Once the message is heard by the mailbox owner, VMS treats it as an old message and places it in the old
message list. VMS also gives a facility to save the heard message as a new one and every-time the mailbox is
accessed the VMS plays such 'save-as-new' message as a new message.

How to use
• Call the VMS by dialing 3931,

• The VMS takes you to your mailbox.

• VMS responds with: "You have <n> new messages" followed by the prompt: "Enter your mailbox
password". (Enterpwd.wav)

• Enter your mailbox password  VMS prompts: "You have n new/no new messages."

• VMS prompts: "To listen to new messages press '1', to listen to old messages press '2', to send a message
press '3', to change your mailbox settings press '4', to go to home position press '0'." (Mmmm.wav)

• Dial 1 to listen to new messages Or dial 2 to listen to old messages.

894 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mailbox Settings

What’s this?
The VMS allows extension users to change the settings of the following facilities of their mailbox:
• Record the Extension Name for their mailbox.
• Redirect Messages from their mailbox.
• Delete all old messages

How to use
• Call the VMS by dialing 3931,

• The VMS takes you to your mailbox.

• VMS responds with: "You have <n> new messages" followed by the prompt: "Enter your mailbox
password". (Enterpwd.wav)

• VMS prompts: "To listen to new messages press '1', to listen old message press '2', to send a message
press '3', to change your mailbox settings press '4', to go to home position press '0'." (Mmmm.wav)

• Dial 4 to go to Mailbox Settings.

• The VMS responds with: “For Mailbox Name, Press '1', For message redirection, Press '2', To delete all
old messages of your mailbox, press '3', to go to previous menu press '0'. (Chgmbset.wav)

To assign Name to your Mailbox:

• Dial 1  VMS prompts: "To record Name, press '1'. To play Name, press '2'. To go to Previous menu,
press '0'." (MailboxName.wav).

• Dial 1 to record name for mailbox  VMS prompts: "Record your name after the beep and press # (hash/
pound) to end." (Recname.wav)

Names for extensions can also be recorded from the System Administrator mode. See “Recording
Extension Names”.

To delete old Messages in your Mailbox:

• Dial 3  VMS prompts: “You are about to delete all old messages of your mailbox. To proceed press 1, to
cancel press 2.” (DelAllCnf.wav)

• Dial 1 to delete all old messages in your mailbox  VMS responds with: “Your old messages have been
deleted”. (DelAllDone.wav)

To redirect Messages in your Mailbox, see “Redirecting Messages”.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 895

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Message Notification

What’s this?
The Voice Mail System (VMS) sets Message Wait on the extension, whenever a new message arrives in its
personal Mailbox of the extension. The VMS indicates the new message to the extension as per the Type of
Message Wait Notification set for the extension. This may be in the form of a Stuttered Dial Tone, a Voice
Message, Ring or LED Lamp. See, “Message Wait set by the Voice Mail System” under “Message Wait” to know
more.

The Message Notification feature of the VMS is an extension of the Message Wait feature. When Message Wait
Notification for an extension is set as Ring, the VMS makes a Message Notification call to the extension.

How it works
• Extension A has Message Wait Notification type set as Ring.

• Whenever there is a new message in A’s mailbox, the system will play the Message Wait Ring (Short,
Fast) on extension A. See “Distinctive Rings”.

• Extension A will ring for the duration of the Message Wait Ring Timer (configurable; default: 30 seconds).

• When Extension A answers the call within this timer, Extension A gets connected to the VMS.

• The VMS answers the call and allows access to Extension A’s mailbox.

• If Extension A does not answer the Message Notification call within the Message Wait Timer, the system
will ring on the extension again for as many times as the Message Wait Ring Count (configurable; default:
10 times), and at the interval set as the Message Wait Ring Timer Interval (configurable; default: 30
minutes).

How to configure
To provide Message Notification Call to extensions, you must configure Ring as Voicemail/Message Wait
Notification Type for the extension. See “Basic Settings” for instructions on configuring the different Extension
types: SLT, DKP, SIP.

You may also configure the related Message Wait Timer, the Message Wait Ring Count and the Message Wait
Ring Interval, if required. See “System Timers and Counts” for instructions.

How to use
• Go Off-hook, when your extension rings to indicate Message Wait (short, fast ring),

• The VMS greets with the message:“This is your message notification call”.

• The VMS plays the message: "You have <n> new messages" followed by the prompt: "Enter your mailbox
password". (Enterpwd.wav)

• Dial your mailbox password, and follow VMS prompts.

896 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Message Verification

What’s this?
Message Verification enables extension users to check the message they have recorded before sending it to
someone.

Message Verification allows callers to check the message they have recorded in the mailbox of an extension user.

Thus Message Verification is used in the VMS features “Leaving a Message”, “Sending Messages”, and “Broadcast
Message”.

How it works
• For Message Verification to work, it must be enabled in the VMS.

• With Message Verification enabled, each time a caller or an extension user records a message, the VMS
offers to the caller/extension user the option verify the recorded message and re-record the message, if
they want.

• When the caller/extension user uses the option to verify and re-record the message, the VMS sends the
message to the mailbox of the receiver.

How to configure
By default, Message Verification is enabled in the VMS. So, callers and all extension users with voice mail facility
can verify the message they have recorded. If you want to disable this feature,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Advanced Settings link.

• Scroll to and click the VMS Configuration link under Advanced Settings.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 897

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the General Parameters sub-link.

• On this page, scroll to Message Play Options.

• By default, Message Verification is enabled. To disable Message Verification, clear the check box.

• Click Submit to save changes.

898 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Messages

What’s this?
The VMS enables extension users to send messages to other extensions that have a mailbox. An extension user
can send a message to as many as 10 destinations at a time. The extension user can send the message either to a
specific mailbox or to a Distribution List.

VMS also gives facility to the Sender of the message to request a read receipt of the message sent. When the
Recipient has read the message, the VMS generates a file containing the first 5 seconds of the message that was
sent and delivers it to the Sender's mailbox in the form of a new message with the Date and Time stamp (if enabled
in Play Message Details) and the prompt: "This message was read by <Extension Name> <5 seconds of message
sent>". If the Sender does not request ‘read receipt’, no such message is delivered to the Sender.

If the sent message is not delivered to the Recipient, the VMS generates a file containing the first 5 seconds of the
message that was sent by the Sender and delivers it to the Sender's mailbox in the form of a new message with the
prompt: "This message was not delivered to <Extension Name><5 seconds of the message>".

How to use
• Call the VMS by dialing 3931,

• The VMS takes you to your mailbox.

• VMS responds with: "You have <n> new messages" followed by the prompt: "Enter your mailbox
password". (Enterpwd.wav)

• Enter your mailbox password  VMS prompts: "You have n new/no new messages."

• VMS prompts: "To listen to new messages press '1', to listen to old messages press '2', to send a message
press '3', to change your mailbox settings press '4', to go to home position press '0'." (Mmmm.wav)

• Dial 3  VMS prompts: "Enter the destinations." (Msgdest.wav)

• Dial valid extension numbers/distribution list number  VMS prompts: "Record your message after the
beep and press # (hash/pound) to end".

• Speak to record the message and press # (hash/pound) to end. VMS plays back the recorded message
and prompts: "To request read receipt press '1', to ignore read receipt press '2'."

• If Message Verification flag is disabled then VMS will not playback the recorded message.

• Dial 1 to request read receipt of your message, else dial 2.

• VMS responds: "Your message has been sent." (Msgsent.wav)

• If the message could not be delivered to the destination you dialed, the VMS responds: "Sorry the
message cannot be sent." (Pending.wav)

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 899

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Extension users must be careful in dialing destination numbers. If invalid destination is entered then the
VMS will clear all the entries and will ask the mailbox owner to re-enter all the destinations again.

Once a valid destination number is entered and no more extensions are selected, the VMS
understands it to be the end of list and sends the message.

900 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Redirecting Messages

What’s this?
The VMS offers extension users to re-direct the messages in their mailbox to another mailbox. The feature can be
used by employees who are out of office or unable to access their mailbox. Using Redirect Messages, they can
ensure that important messages are attended to by their colleagues in their absence.

How to use
• Call the VMS by dialing 3931,

• The VMS takes you to your mailbox.

• VMS responds with: "You have <n> new messages" followed by the prompt: "Enter your mailbox
password". (Enterpwd.wav)

• Enter your mailbox password  VMS prompts: "You have n new/no new messages."

• VMS prompts: "To listen to new messages press '1', to listen to old messages press '2', to send a message
press '3', to change your mailbox settings press '4', to go to home position press '0'." (Mmmm.wav)

• Dial 4  VMS prompts: “For Mailbox Name, Press '1', For message redirection, Press '2', To delete all old
messages of your mailbox, press '3', to go to previous menu press '0'. (Chgmbset.wav)

• Dial 2  VMS prompts: "To set message redirection press '1', to cancel message redirection press '2', to
go to previous menu press '0'." (MbMsgRd.wav)

• Dial 1 to set message redirection  VMS prompts: "Enter the destination extension." (MsgRdHdl.wav)

• Dial valid destination extension  VMS responds: "Command has been executed." (Okcmd.wav)

• Dial 2 to cancel message redirection  VMS responds: "Command has been executed." (Okcmd.wav)

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 901

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 902 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 9 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting

Configuration Upload
ETERNITY NE provides you the facility to upgrade the system software at the click of a button. ETERNITY NE
supports an embedded FTP71 server which can be used for Uploading and Downloading Configuration Files.

Upload configuration files using Windows FTP

• Click My Computer.

• Type the current IP Address of the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE in the Address bar as ftp://
192.168.1.101

• Click Go or Press Enter key on your keyboard.

71. FTP or File Transfer Protocol is a standard Internet Protocol that is used to exchange files between computers on the IP network.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 903

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The Log on as window of the FTP server opens.

• In the Password field, enter the SE password (default 1234) and click the Log On button.

• All the Configuration folders appear in this window.

904 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Open the config folder. All the configuration files will be displayed (the extension of these files is cfg)

• You may either delete the existing files or copy these files to another location as backup.

• Now, copy the new configuration files in this folder.

• Close the FTP window.

• Restart the system after uploading the files. The new configuration will be applicable only after the system
restarts.

Upload configuration files using Mozilla Firefox

• Open the browser, Mozilla Firefox, on the computer connected to ETERNITY NE.

• Make sure FireFTP Add-on is installed in your browser.

• Open Jeeves on the browser, by typing the current IP Address of the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE.

• Enter the Password (default 1234).

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 905

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Click the Configuration Upload link.

• Enter the password.

• The configuration folders appear.

• Right click the first file, select the option Open link in FireFTP

906 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The FireFTP opens.

• Enter the SE password

• The folders and files on the computer appear on the left. The FireFTP pane on the right displays the
existing file(s) in the config folder. Delete the existing file in the config folder.

• Select the config files from the computer pane. Click the upload arrow to copy the file in config folder in the
FireFTP pane.

• Close the FireFTP tabs to return to Jeeves.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 907

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Restart the system after uploading the files. The new configurations will be applicable only after the system
restarts.

Before you upgrade the system firmware, you can save the existing application/configuration/driver/ web
pages folder and files as backup for retrieval, later. When required, you can copy and paste the same
folder back on the FTP server of ETERNITY NE.

908 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Firmware Upgrade

ETERNITY NE provides you the facility to upgrade the system software at the click of a button. ETERNITY NE
supports an embedded FTP72 server which can be used for Uploading and Downloading System files.

Upload firmware files using Windows FTP

• Click My Computer.

• Type the current IP Address of the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE in the Address bar as ftp://
192.168.1.101

• Click Go or Press Enter key on your keyboard.

• The Log on as window of the FTP server opens.

72. FTP or File Transfer Protocol is a standard Internet Protocol that is used to exchange files between computers on the IP network.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 909

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • In the Password field, enter the SE password (default 1234) and click the Log On button.

• All the Configuration folders will be displayed.

• Open the system folder. All the system files and web folder will be displayed.

• You may either delete the existing files/folder or copy these files/folder to another location (as backup).

• Now, copy the new system files in this folder.

• Close the FTP window.

• Restart the system after uploading the files.The new firmware will be applicable only after the system
restarts.

910 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Upload configuration files using Mozilla Firefox
• Open the browser, Mozilla Firefox, on the computer connected to ETERNITY NE.

• Make sure FireFTP Add-on is installed in your browser.

• Open Jeeves on the browser, by typing the current IP Address of the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY NE.

• Enter the Password (default 1234).

• Click the Firmware Upgrade link.

• Enter the password.

• The firmware related files appear.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 911

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Right click on the first file, select the Open link in FireFTP option

• The FireFTP opens.

• Enter the password

912 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The folders and files on the computer appear on the left. The FireFTP pane on the right displays the
existing file(s) in the system folder. Delete the existing file in the system folder.

• Select the system files from the computer pane. Click the upload arrow to copy the file in system folder in
the FireFTP pane.

• Close the FireFTP tab to return to Jeeves.

• Restart the system after uploading the files. The new firmware will be applicable only after the system
restarts.

Before you upgrade the system firmware, you can save the existing application/configuration/driver/ web
pages folder and files as backup for retrieval, later. When required, you can copy and paste the same
folder back on the FTP server of ETERNITY NE.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 913

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Debug

You can monitor the state of ports and IO operations, the Voice Mail System and the VoIP Ethernet port using
System Debug.

Matrix ETERNITY NE supports Syslog73 Client for debugging. The Syslog Client enables the system to send debug
messages in syslog format to the remote ‘Syslog Server’ on the IP network. You can view the system debug
messages on the remote server.

Each debug message includes the MAC Address of Ethernet port of ETERNITY NE which sends the debug
messages to the Syslog server.

To configure Debug Settings,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Administration link.

• Click the Maintenance link under Administration.

• Click the System Debug sub-link. The System Debug page opens.

73. Syslog is one of the protocols used extensively for sending debug messages, and is defined in RFC 3164.

914 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Debug Settings
• Select the Debug Port to which you want to send the debug. Default: Ethernet.

• In the Syslog Server IP Address: Port field, enter the server address and the port number. Default: port
number 514.

• Now select the events/processes which you want to debug:

• Port State
• I/O
• Configuration Transfer
• Error
• Communication Manager
• File Open/Read/Write
• VMS
• ACB
• Maturity/AOC
• Auto-upgradation/RCOC

VMS Debug
• In the Syslog Server IP Address: Port field, enter the server address and server port number where the
debug log is to be sent. Default: port number is 514.

• Select the application/processes you want to debug: VMS Application, SMTP, Configuration Transfer

VoIP Ethernet Port Debug

• Select the Enable Debug check box to send debug to the Syslog server.

• In the Syslog Server Address field, enter the server address and server port number where the debug log
is to be sent. Default: port number is 514.

• Select the desired Debug Level from the following supported by ETERNITY NE:
• Serial
• SIP
• CALL
• Registered User
• Registered Trunk
• BLF/MWI
• Media
• VoPP
• Call Advance
• Registered User Advance
• Registered Trunk Advance
• BLF/MWI Advance
• Media Advance
• Presence
• IM

The debug log will be generated for the options you selected. For example: if debug log of Call is required,
enable 'CALL' level and disable all other debug levels.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 915

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Port State Debug
• Select the Port Type you want to debug:
• SLT
• DKP
• CO
• Mobile
• SIP Trunk
• Door Phone

• In the Start Port field, enter the number of the selected Port Type from which the system should start
debugging.

• In the End Port field, enter the number of the selected Port Type after which the system should end
debugging.

If you want to debug a range of ports, configure the starting and ending port numbers in the Start Port and
End Port fields.

916 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To debug a single port, define the Start and End Port numbers as the same.

• In the Debug field, select Enable to start Port State debug.

I/O Debug
• Select the Port Type for which you want to debug I/O communication:
• DKP
• CO-SLT
• VoIP
• Mobile
• Door Phone
• VMS

• In the Start Port field, enter the number of the selected Port Type from which the system should start
debugging.

• In the End Port field, enter the number of the selected Port Type after which the system should end
debugging.

If you want to debug a range of ports, configure the starting and ending port numbers in the Start Port and
End Port fields.

To debug a single port, define the Start and End Port numbers as the same.

• In the Debug field, select Enable to start I/O debug.

• Click Submit button to save Debug settings.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 917

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 PCAP Trace

ETERNITY NE supports PCAP Trace, which you can use to detect and diagnose network related problems for the
Ethernet Port of ETERNITY.

Packets traveling over a network are captured and saved in the system. You can save these trace files (packets
captured by the system) on a computer and open these trace files using a graphical packet capture and protocol
analysis tool such as Wireshark or Ethereal.

PCAP Trace for the Ethernet Port allows a maximum of 1 MB of packets can be captured and stored in the
ETERNITY.

ETERNITY also supports Filters and 'Promiscuous' mode for capturing packets, which you can use to specify the
types of data packets to be captured.

How to use
To use PCAP Trace for the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY,

• Open Jeeves. Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.

• Click the Administrator link.

• Click the Maintenance link under Administrator.

• Click the link PCAP Trace to open the page.

• In the Filter Settings, decide the type of packets to be captured and set the Filter accordingly. The Filter
should be maximum 60 characters in length; all ASCII characters are allowed. By default, this field is
blank. So all packets will be captured.

Refer to the following examples to know how to set the Filters.

• To capture only SNMP traces:

• Filter Settings = port 161
Where, 161 is the SNMP Port number for which the traces are to be captured.

• To capture packets which are transmitted from the system i.e. from IP address 192.168.1.191:
• Filter Settings = src 192.168.1.191

• To capture packets which are received for the system i.e. to IP address 92.168.1.191:
• Filter Settings = dst 192.168.1.191

• To capture only packets which are received by the system having IP address 192.168.1.191:
• Filter Settings = src 192.168.1.191 or dst 192.168.1.191

• To capture packets which are transmitted from the system for particular port number only i.e. from IP
address 192.168.1.191 and port number 161:
• Filter Settings = src 192.168.1.191 and port 161

918 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Examples of Filter Setting Syntax:

Filter Type Filter Setting Logic

src port number src port 5060 Capture packets if the packet has
a source port value of 5060.

dst port number dst port 80 Capture packets if the packet has
a destination port value of 80.

port number port 5060 Capture packets if the packet has either source
or destination port value of 5060.

src host ip address src host 192.168.1.176 Capture packets if the source IP address
is 192.168.1.176

dst host ip address dst host 192.168.1.176 Capture packets if the destination IP address
is 192.168.1.176.

host ip address host 192.168.1.176 Capture packets if either source or destination IP address
is 192.168.1.176

Jeeves will throw up an alert message 'Invalid filter! Please enter valid filter' if you do not enter a valid filter.

It is not mandatory to set Filters. When the Filter Settings field is left blank, the system will capture all
packets.

• Select the Enable Promiscuous Mode check box, if you want specific data packets to be captured.

When you enable Promiscuous mode, the ETERNITY will capture all network traffic. However, this will
work only in a non-switched environment.

When Promiscuous Mode flag is disabled, the system will capture only traffic that is directly related to it.
Only traffic to, from or routed through the ETERNITY will be picked up by the PCAP Trace.


'Filter Settings' and 'Promiscuous Mode' (enabled) will not be cleared during power down.

• Press the Start button to begin the capturing of the packets.

• Press Stop button to stop the packet capturing.

OR

• Wait for the system to stop packet capturing. The system stops packet capturing once the maximum
allotted memory of 1 MB (RAM) is utilized.

• Under Status, the Number of Packets and bytes captured as per the filter setting will be displayed as
Packets Captured and Total Bytes respectively.

Capturing of packets will not stop if you open any other page of Jeeves. So, you may continue using
Jeeves for any other purpose while PCAP Trace is being used.

• When the packet capturing is stopped (by you or the system), click the Save Trace File button to
download the captured files from the system’s FTP server.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 919

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The FTP Login page will open. Enter the SE password. Save your trace file in the folder.

The current packets captured will not be deleted after you have saved the trace file. The current packets
will be deleted when you start the PCAP capture again.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

• Now, you can open the trace files using Wireshark or Ethereal or any other similar software which supports
opening of trace files.

920 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 10 System Status

System Details
• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Administration link.

• Click Status link.

• Click System Details link. The following details will be displayed.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 921

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Voice Mail Memory Status

You can view the memory status of the VMS as well as individual mailboxes. Checking the memory status of the
voice mail and individual mailboxes helps you to monitor usage of VMS and make optimal allocation of the VMS
resources.
To view Voice Mail Memory Status,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Administration link.

• Click Status link.

• Click the Memory Status link.

The status of the VMS Card memory appears on your screen.

Voice Mail Memory Status

• Total Memory of the VMS in MB and Minutes

• Total Memory Consumed by Prompts and Responses in MB and Minutes
• Total Memory Allotted to Mailboxes in MB and Minutes
• Total Memory Consumed by Voice Mail Users in MB Minutes

Mailbox Status

You can also view the status of individual mailboxes on this page under Mailbox Status.

922 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. To view status of individual mailboxes, in the Enter Extension Number to view Mailbox Status field,
enter the extension number whose mailbox status you wish to view.

2. Click OK

The page displays the following information about the mailbox:

• Extension Number: This is the extension number you selected for viewing mailbox status.

• Name: This is the name assigned to the extension.

• Allotted Voice Mail?: If mailbox is assigned to the extension, it displays Yes. If no mailbox is assigned
No will appear.

• Allotted Voice Mail Box Size (Minutes): The size of the mailbox in minutes assigned to the extension.

• Memory Consumed by Voice Mail User : The current status of the mailbox memory of the extension.

• New Voice Mail/Total Voice Mail: The number of new (unread) messages out of the total number of
messages in the mailbox.

3. You may log out of Jeeves.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 923

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mobile Status

To view Mobile Port Status,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Administration link.

• Click the Status link.

• Click the Mobile Status link.

The status of mobile port 1 (Mobile-1) appears on your screen.

• Port Status: This is the status of the connection - showing Initialization with the Network, Registering
with the Network, Idle or Busy state of the network. It also shows errors and alerts when SIM is absent,
the wrong SIM PIN has been entered, SIM PUK is required.

• IMEI: This is the unique identification number of (the GSM engine) each Mobile port.

924 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Firmware Version of Engine: This shows the firmware version of the mobile Engine.

• SIM ID: This is the Integrated Circuit Card ID (ICC-ID) of the SIM Card inserted in the Mobile port. Each
SIM is internationally identified by its ICC-ID. ICC-IDs are stored in the SIM Card and are also printed
on the SIM card body.

• IMSI: International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) is a unique number stored in the SIM card.

• Registered with Network: This shows the type of network with which the Mobile port is registered,
whether GSM, GSM Compact, 3G or UMTS.

• Network Operator Code: This is the MCC-MNC code of the network with which the mobile port is
registered.

• Network Operator Name: This is the name of the service provider/network operator with which the
Mobile Port is registered.

• Signal Strength (dBm): This is the signal strength in '-dBm' as received from the network with which
the Mobile port is registered.

• Bit Error Rate (BER): BER is Bit Error Rate which defines the quality of the channel.

• Cell ID: This is the 16-bit identifier that identifies the cell. The cell is the radio coverage area given by
one BTS (Base Transceiver Station).

• Location Area Code (LAC): The LA (Location Area) is a group of cells defined by the Operator. The
LAC (Location Area Code) uniquely identifies a LA within a PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network).

• Call Duration: This is the total call duration of matured outgoing calls74 on the Mobile port. This data is
used for calculating Answer Seizure Ratio (ASR) for the port. It is displayed in MMMMMM:SS format.

• Call Budget Type: This shows the Call Budget Type, i.e. whether Amount, Minutes or Number of
Calls, set on the Mobile port.

• Allotted Amount (Rs.) / Minutes/Calls: This shows the sum/number of minutes/number of calls
allotted as Call Budget on the Mobile port.

• Consumed Amount (Rs.) / Minutes/Calls: This shows the sum/number of minutes/number of calls of
the allotted Call Budget that has been used up on the Mobile port.

• Call Budget Reset Mode: This shows the whether manual or scheduled reset of the consumed call
budget is set on the Mobile port.

• Call Budget Reset Schedule (Date): This shows whether the consumed Call Budget on the Mobile
port is to be reset Daily or on a particular date of a month.

• Reset Consumed Amount/Minutes/Calls: This editable field allows the System Engineer to reset the
consumed Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Calls at any time, manually.

74. Matured calls are outgoing calls for which 'CONNECT' message was received from the network.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 925

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Dialed Calls: This is the total number of outgoing calls75 made from the Mobile port. This data is used
for calculating Answer Seizure Ratio (ASR) for the port.

• Successful Calls: This is the total number of matured outgoing calls made from the Mobile port. This
data is used for calculating Answer Seizure Ratio (ASR) and Average Call Duration for the port.

• ASR: This is the Answer Seizure Ratio (ASR) calculated by the system for the Mobile port, in terms of
percentage. ASR is the sum of all outgoing matured calls from the Mobile port, divided by the total
number of outgoing calls made from the Mobile port, multiplied by 100. The system calculates ASR
after the completion of the outgoing call.

• ACD: This is the Average Call Duration (ACD) of outgoing calls made from the Mobile port. It is an
indicator for monitoring the network condition. Decreasing ACD is indicative of trouble in the network
condition.

The system calculates ACD after the completion of the outgoing calls, by dividing the total call duration
by the number of outgoing matured calls.

• Reset ASR and ACD: This field allows the System Engineer to reset manually the ASR and the ACD
of the Mobile port.

The parameters Total Call duration, Number of matured calls, Total Number of OG Calls, ASR and
ACD are saved in the configuration, and are not reset on Power OFF condition. The system maintains
the statistics for the last 999 calls. When the total number of outgoing calls exceeds 999, the system
will stop calculating ACD and ASR and will display ASR and ACD calculated on the basis of the last
999 calls only.

Therefore, the System Engineer must manually reset ASR and ACD when the total number of calls
reaches 999. When you reset ASR and ACD the number of call matured and the number of calls dialled
is reset to 0.

ASR and ACD can be reset anytime, even when the total number of calls is less than 999.

When ACD is reset, only the 'Total Call Duration' maintained for the ACD calculation will be reset. The
'Total Call Duration' of the Call Budget, i.e. the consumed minutes maintained for the Call Budget on the
mobile port will remain unaffected.

• To view the status of mobile port 2, click the tab Mobile-2.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

75. The total number of outgoing calls made includes the number of times the ATD has been sent from the Mobile port to the network.

926 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 VoIP Status

To view VoIP Status,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Administration link.

• Click Status link.

• Click VoIP Status link.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 927

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SIP Trunk Status

To view SIP Trunk Status,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Administration link.

• Click the Status link.

• Click SIP Trunk Status link.

The status of SIP trunk 1 (SIP-1)appears on your screen.

• To view the status of SIP trunks 2, 3 and 4 click the tab SIP-2, SIP-3, SIP-4.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

928 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SIP Extension Status

To view SIP Extension Status,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Administration link.

• Click the Status link.

• Click SIP Extension Status link.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 929

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Network Status

To view Network port Status,

• Open Jeeves.

• Log in as System Engineer.

• Click the Administration link.

• Click the Status link.

• Click Network Status link.

• You may log out of Jeeves.

930 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix

Technical Specifications

TECHNOLOGY
PCM/TDM Digital Switching (100% Non-
Type of Switching
blocking)
Processor 32-bit RISC

SLT (ANALOG STATION)

Signaling Loop Start
Dialing DTMF and Pulse (10/20PPS)
Off Hook AC Impedance 600/900/Complex
Off Hook Current 45mA Max
Loop Limit 1800? Max (Excluding Telephone)
On Hook Voltage (Tip/Ring) 48V Nominal
DTMF Detection ITU-T Q.24
Return Loss >18dB
Longitudinal balance >50dB
Transmission Level Adjust Tx Gain: -10dB to 6dB, Rx Gain:-10dB to 6dB
Trapezoidal 60VRMS/25Hz and Sinusoidal
Ringing
52VRMS/25Hz
REN 3
CLI Presentation DTMF, FSK ITU-T V.23 and FSK Bellcore 202
Protection Over Voltage Secondary Protection
Physical Connector RJ11

CO (2-WIRE TRUNK)
Signaling Loop Start
Loop Limit 1200?
Off Hook AC Impedance 600/900/Complex
Pulse Dialing 10/20PPS
DTMF Dialing and Reception ITU-T Q.23 & Q.24
Return Loss >18dB
Longitudinal Balance >50dB

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 931

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CO (2-WIRE TRUNK)
Tx Gain: -15dB to +10 dB, Rx Gain:-15dB to
Transmission Level adjust
+10dB
CLI Reception DTMF, FSK ITU-T V.23 and FSK Bellcore 202
Call Maturity Delay and Polarity Reversal
Over Voltage and Over Current Secondary
Protection
Protection
Physical Connector RJ11

GSM
Quad-Band: GSM850,EGSM900, DCS1800,
Frequency Band (MHz)
PCS1900
Compliant ETSI GSM Phase 2/2+
SIM Card One SIM Per GSM Port
SIM Interface 1.8V, 3V
Class 4 (2W) at GSM850 MHz and EGSM900
Transmission Power MHz Band
Class 1 (1W) at DCS 1800 MHz and PCS1900
MHZ Band
RF Sensitivity Better than -106dBm
Protocol AT Command Interface
One Antenna per GSM Port, 1.8/3.0*dBi, 50?
External Antenna SMA (Male) Connector, Omni Directional with
Cable of 3 Meters Length

UMTS (3G)
Quad-Band: GSM850,EGSM900, DCS1800,
PCS1900
UMTS A Module: Tri-Band: WCDMA 850/1900/
Frequency Band (MHz)
2100
UMTS E Module: Tri-Band: WCDMA 900/1900/
2100
Compliant ETSI GSM Phase 2/2+
SIM Card One SIM Per UMTS (3G) Port
SIM Interface 1.8V, 3V
Class 4 (2W) at GSM850 MHz and EGSM900
MHz Band,
Class 1 (1W) at DCS 1800 MHZ and PCS1900
Transmission Power
MHz Band,
Class 3 (0.25W) at WCDMA 850/1900/2100 MHz
Band
Better than -106dBm at GSM850, EGSM900,
DCS1800 and PCS1900,
RF Sensitivity
Better than -108 dBm at WCDMA 850,
Better than -108 dBm at WCDMA 1900/2100
Protocol AT Command Interface

932 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UMTS (3G)
One Antenna per UMTS (3G)Port, 1.8/3.0*dBi,
External Antenna 50? SMA (Male) Connector, Omni Directional
with Cable of 3 Meters Length

VoIP
SIP v2, SIP over TCP, Symmetric RTP, RTCP,
VoIP Protocols
100rel/PRACK
Network Protocol IPv4,TCP,UDP, STUN,ARP,ICMP,PPP,DNS
Maximum 4 SIP Accounts Per System, Out
Bound Proxy Support, Display Name, User
SIP
Name, Password, URL, Proxy URL, Register
Interval
Line Echo Cancellation G.168 With 32/64/128ms Tail Length
Dynamic Jitter Buffer (Adaptive), Comfort Noise
Voice
Generation and Voice Activity Detection
NAT STUN and NAT Keep Alive
G.711 (A-law, µ-Law), G.723, G.729AB, GSM-FR
Voice CODECs
and iLBC
Fax T.38 Relay and Pass Through
Quality of Service SIP QoS and RTP QoS
MD5 Authentication for SIP, Password Protected
Security
Configuration by Admin and User
Ethernet (RJ45) Port, Auto MDIX (10/100 base
Data Network
T)

Auxiliary Ports
Power Relay, Resistive Load - 1.0A 24VDC,
Digital Output Port
Operation Time - 8ms (Max.), RJ45
Speaker Output - 1.41Vrms (Max.), Microphone
Door Phone Port
Input - 1.34Vrms (Max.), RJ45

LED Indications
Power 1 LED Single Color (GREEN)
System Status 1 LED Dual Color (RED/GREEN)

Power Supply
Input External Adaptor - 24VDC, 2A
Power Consumption (Typical) 15W

Environment
Operating Temperature -10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH, Non-Condensing
Storage Temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 933

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Environment
Storage Humidity 0-95% RH, Non-Condensing

Mechanical
Dimension (WxHxD)
Table Top, Wall Mount
19" Rack Mount
30x4.25x20cm (11.81"x1.67"x7.87")
48.3x4.25x20.2cm (19"x1.67x7.95")
Installation Wall Mount, Table-Top, 19" Rack Mount
* Depends on GSM/UMTS(3G) Frequency Band

System Resources

SPECIFICATIONS ETERNITY NE2 ETERNITY NE3 ETERNITY NE4 ETERNITY NE6

CO (CO) Lines 2 3 4 6
Single Line Telephones 4 6 10 14
Digital Key Phones 2 2 2 2
VoIP Trunks* 4 4 4 4
IP Extensions#* 16 16 16 16
GSM/UMTS(3G) Trunks* 2 2 2 2
Door Phone with Relay* 1 1 1 1
Voice Mail System* 4 Channels 4 Channels 4 Channels 4 Channels
Voice Modules 16 Modules of 16 Modules of 16 Modules of 16 Modules of
(for Auto-attendant, Voice Tones, 14 seconds 14 seconds 14 seconds 14 seconds
Voice Help) each each each each
Ethernet (RJ45) Port Auto MDIX (10/100 Base-T)

* Optional and Field Pluggable Module

#The VoIP Module comes with built-in 8 IP Users, an additional of 8 IP users can be availed with IP8 Users License

ETERNITY Paltforms

Product Name Description

2 CO Ports, 2 GSM/UMTS(3G) Ports, 2 Digital Extensions, 4 SLTs and Up to 16 IP
ETERNITY NE2
Extensions
3 CO Ports, 2 GSM/UMTS(3G) Ports, 2 Digital Extensions, 6 SLTs and Up to 16 IP
ETERNITY NE3
Extensions
4 CO Ports, 2 GSM/UMTS(3G) Ports, 2 Digital Extensions, 10 SLTs and Up to 16 IP
ETERNITY NE4
Extensions
6 CO Ports, 2 GSM/UMTS(3G) Ports, 2 Digital Extensions, 14 SLTs and Up to 16 IP
ETERNITY NE6
Extensions

934 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ETERNITY NE Optional Modules

ETERNITY NE GSM Module to insert 1 SIM card for Voice Telephony over GSM Networks
ETERNITY NE UMTS A Module to insert 1 SIM card for Voice Telephony over UMTS (3G) Networks
ETERNITY NE UMTS E Module to insert 1 SIM card for Voice Telephony over UMTS (3G) Networks
ETERNITY NE IP
Module to provide VoIP telephony with 4 SIP Trunk Connectivity
SERVER
Module to connect 4-Wire Door phone and Relay activated device (i.e. Door
ETERNITY NE 4WDP
Opener)
4 Channel Voice Mail to attend 4 Simultaneous Calls and Voice Mailboxes for
ETERNITY NE VMS
Individual Extensions

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 935

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Prompts

No. Filename Prompts/Responses

000 Extra0.wav Blank

001 Num0.wav Zero

002 Num1.wav One

003 Num2.wav Two

004 Num3.wav Three

005 Num4.wav Four

006 Num5.wav Five

007 Num6.wav Six

008 Num7.wav Seven

009 Num8.wav Eight

010 Num9.wav Nine

011 Num10.wav Ten

012 Num11.wav Eleven

013 Num12.wav Twelve

014 Num13.wav Thirteen

015 Num14.wav Fourteen

016 Num15.wav Fifteen

017 Num16.wav Sixteen

018 Num17.wav Seventeen

019 Num18.wav Eighteen

020 Num19.wav Nineteen

021 Num20.wav Twenty

022 Num21.wav Twenty One

023 Num22.wav Twenty Two

024 Num23.wav Twenty Three

025 Num24.wav Twenty Four

026 Num25.wav Twenty Five

027 Num26.wav Twenty Six

028 Num27.wav Twenty Seven

029 Num28.wav Twenty Eight

030 Num29.wav Twenty Nine

031 Num30.wav Thirty

032 Num31.wav Thirty One

936 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 No. Filename Prompts/Responses

033 Num40.wav Forty

034 Num50.wav Fifty

035 Num60.wav Sixty

036 Num70.wav Seventy

037 Num80.wav Eighty

038 Num90.wav Ninety

039 Num100.wav Hundred

040 Month1.wav January

041 Month2.wav February

042 Month3.wav March

043 Month4.wav April

044 Month5.wav May

045 Month6.wav June

046 Month7.wav July

047 Month8.wav August

048 Month9.wav September

049 Month10.wav October

050 Month11.wav November

051 Month12.wav December

052 N.wav This node does not have a Message

053 Invalno.wav The number is not valid

054 Pwdchg.wav Your password has been changed

055 Invalpwd.wav Invalid password

056 PreName.wav More than one match found. Matching names will be played one by one.
Press '1' after the name you wish to select., To skip to the next name press 2, to
go to home position press 0

057 Empty.wav Sorry, no match found

058 Plscont.wav Please continue

059 DialAgn.wav Invalid destination. Enter all the destinations again

060 Noextn.wav Destination not specified

061 Recmsg.wav Record your Message after the beep and press any digit to end

062 PlayMsg.wav The message you recorded is…

063 RecAgain.wav To re-record the message press1, to confirm press 2

064 PrgTime.wav Enter the time

065 RecdCncl.wav Sorry, your message cannot be delivered

066 Chkinwel.wav It is our pleasure receiving you. We will do our best to make your stay comfortable

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 937

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 No. Filename Prompts/Responses

067 Extstamp.wav Extension Number

068 Extra1.wav Blank

069 Extra2.wav Blank

070 Entextn.wav Blank

071 NoDISA.wav Blank

072 NoDISAStn.wav Blank

073 EntPwd.wav Blank

074 ConvBetn.wav Blank

075 And.wav Blank

076 Callnum.wav Blank

077 DeptOrStn.wav Blank

078 Extra11.wav Blank

079 Extra12.wav Blank

080 Enprgpwd.wav Enter the programming password

081 Entcmd.wav Enter the programming command

082 Invalcmd.wav The Programming command you entered is not valid

083 Okcmd.wav Command has been executed

084 Prnbusy.wav The communication port is busy

085 Prglockd.wav System is already in Programming mode

086 Num1000.wav Blank

087 LeavemsgI.wav Blank

088 Extra15.wav Blank

089 Extra16.wav Blank

090 Whichbox.wav Enter your extension number for mailbox management

091 DialName.wav Please enter first three letters of the name.

092 PreLeave.wav More than one match found. Matching names will be played one by one.
Press '1' after the name to leave a message. Press 2 to skip to next station name.
Press 0 to go to home position

093 Xfrornot.wav To confirm press 1, to cancel press 2

094 MatchFor.wav The name selected is…

095 PlsHold.wav Please hold

096 Xfrcalto.wav Please hold, transferring the call to

097 Opr.wav Operator

098 XfrCall.wav Please hold, transferring the call

099 Noreply.wav The person you are trying to reach is not available

100 Extbusy.wav The called person is busy

938 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 No. Filename Prompts/Responses

101 Recname.wav Record your name after the beep and press any digit to end

102 Callfrom.wav There is a call from

103 Takecall.wav Dial '1' to take the call, '2' and disconnect if you do not want to take the call

104 Noattnd.wav Sorry, the call couldn't be attended

105 LeavemsgG.wav Dial '1' to leave a message, '2' to disconnect, '0' to go to Home Position

106 Mblockd.wav Access denied because the mailbox is currently in use

107 Edestopn.wav Dial '1' to disconnect, '0' to go to Home position.

108 Thankyou.wav Thank you for your call

109 LeavemsgE.wav Enter the extension number for which you wish to leave message.

110 LeavemsgH.wav Enter the Room number or the Extension number for which you wish to leave
message

111 NoMailbox.wav Mailbox not assigned. To Disconnect, press '1'. To go to Home Position, Press '0'

112 Checkout.wav Sorry! The Guest has been checked out.

113 XferMailbox.wav Please hold, transferring the call to the mailbox.

114 Match.wav The Name is Selected

115 Msgfail.wav This message was not delivered

116 Msgread.wav This message was read

117 PerMB.wav Blank

118 DeptMB.wav Blank

119 Extra22.wav Blank

120 Enterpwd.wav Enter your mailbox password

121 Youhave.wav You have

122 Newmsg.wav New Message

123 Newmsgs.wav New Messages

124 Nonewmsg.wav You have 0 New messages

125 Mmmm.wav To listen to new message, press '1', to listen to old message press '2', to send a
message press '3', to change your mailbox settings press '4', to go to home
position press '0'

126 Msgrecon.wav This message was recorded on

127 Mmsmo.wav To replay the message press '1', for date and time stamp press '2', to delete the
message press '3', to play the next message press '4', to forward the message
press '5', to save the message as new press '6', to go to previous menu press '0'

128 Fwdhow.wav To forward the message without comment press '1', to forward the message with
comment press '2', to go to previous menu press '0'

129 Msgdest.wav Enter the destinations.

130 Askcfrm.wav To request read receipt press '1', to ignore read receipt press '2'.

131 Pending.wav Sorry, the message cannot be sent.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 939

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 No. Filename Prompts/Responses

132 Msgsent.wav Your message has been sent

133 Nooldmsg.wav You have no Old messages

134 PreEntry.wav More than one match found for the extension. Names will be played one by one.
Press '1' after the name to make selection, to skip to next name press '2', to go to
home position press '0'

135 Chgmbset.wav To change password, press 1. To change to auto mode, press '2'. To change to
manual mode, press '3'. For message notification, press '4'. For date-time stamp,
press '5'. For announce name, press '6'. For message redirection, press '7'. For
delivery option in mailbox full condition, press '8'. For Mailbox Name, press '9'. To
go to home position press '0'

136 Entnupwd.wav Enter your new mailbox password.

137 Cam.wav For morning zone settings press '1', for afternoon zone settings press '2', for
evening zone settings press '3', for non-working zone settings press '4', to go to
previous menu press '0'

138 CmbTt.wav For start time press '1', to change transfer type press '2', to record greeting press
'3', to play greeting press '4', to go to previous menu press '0'

139 Ttopt.wav To change your transfer type for none press '1', for blind press '2', for wait for ring
press '3', for wait for answer press '4', for screen press '5', to go to previous menu
press '0'

140 Cmm.wav To change transfer type press '1', to record greeting press '2', to play greeting
press '3', to go to previous menu press '0'

141 Nofclity.wav This facility is not provided to you

142 MbNotTyp.wav To cancel message notification press '1', to set immediate message notification
press '2', to set scheduled message notification press '3', to go to previous menu
press '0'

143 MbMsgNot.wav For message notification in morning zone press '1', for message notification in
afternoon zone press '2', for message notification in evening zone press '3', for
message notification in non-working zone press '4', to go to previous menu press
'0'

144 PrgPhone.wav Enter the phone number to which you wish to send message notification

145 SchMsgNot.wav For scheduled message notification 1 press '1', for scheduled message
notification 2 press '2', for scheduled message notification 3 press '3', to go to
previous menu press '0'

146 EntrTmPh.wav To enter time press '1', to enter phone number press '2', to go to previous menu
press '0'

147 MsgNtfy.wav Message notification

148 MbDtTmCh.wav To enable date-time stamp press '1', to disable date-time stamp press '2',to play
date-time stamp on-demand press '3', to go to previous menu press '0'

149 AnnName.wav To enable announce name press '1', to disable announce name press '2', to go to
previous menu press '0'

150 MbMsgRd.wav To set message redirection press '1', to cancel message redirection press '2', to
go to previous menu press '0'

151 MsgRdHdl.wav Enter the destination extension.

940 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 No. Filename Prompts/Responses

152 Mbfulstg.wav To refuse new messages press '1', to deliver new message to general mailbox
press '2', to overwrite old messages press '3', to go to previous menu press '0'

153 At.wav At

154 MsgreadBy.wav This message was read by

155 MsgfailTo.wav This message was not delivered to

156 MsgDelCn.wav Your message has been deleted

157 MsgSavCn.wav Your message has been saved as new

158 MailboxName.w To record Name, press '1'. To play Name, press '2'. To go to previous menu, press
av '0'

159 HoldMusic.wav <Hold Music>

160 Extra32.wav Blank

161 Beep.wav <Beep>

162 Brdcast.wav Blank

163 RecMsgStopCo Record your message after the beep and press
de.wav

164 RecMsgEnd.wa to end.

v

165 Pound.wav Pound

166 RecNameStopC Record your name after the beep and press
ode.wav

167 DelAllCnf.wav Blank

168 DelAllDone.wav Blank

169 LeavemsgU.wav Blank

170 MsgdestU.wav Blank

171 EntertimeI.wav Enter the time, HH:MM in Twenty four hour format. To cancel all alarms, press £.

172 EntertimeU.wav Enter the time, HH:MM in Twelve hour format. To cancel all Alarm, press £. For
am, press 1. For pm, press 2.

173 WakeupCancel. Your all Wake up Alarm are Cancelled.

wav

174 SetOnceDaily.w To set Once, Press '1'. To set Daily, Press '2'.
av

175 WakeupVeri.wa You have set Wake up Alarm at…

v

176 DailyWakeupVer You have set Daily Wake up Alarm at….

i.wav

177 WakeupSet.wav Your Wake up Alarm is set.

178 DailyWakeupSet Your Daily Wake up Alarm is set

.wav

179 Am.wav A.M.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 941

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 No. Filename Prompts/Responses

180 Pm.wav P.M.

181 AlarmConf.wav To Confirm, Press 1, To Re-enter, Press 2

182 Thankservice.w Thanks for using this service

av

183 NoInput.wav You have not entered any input

184 InvalidInput.wav You have entered Invalid input

185 AlarmDateI.wav Enter the Date in DD MM YYYY format. To Cancel all reminders, press £. For
example, to enter date 17th March 2008, Dial One Seven Zero Three Two Zero
Zero Eight

186 AlarmDateU.wa Enter the Date in DD MM YYYY format. To Cancel all reminders, press £. For
v example, to enter date March 17th 2008, Dial Zero Three One Seven Two Zero
Zero Eight

187 ReminderCancel Your Reminder is cancelled

.wav

188 ReminderVeri.w You have set Reminder for…

av

189 ReminderSet.wa Your Reminder is set.

v

190 Alarmnoset.wav Sorry! Your Wake Up Alarm cannot be set. Please call Operator for further
assistance

191 Remindernoset. Sorry! Your Reminder cannot be set. Please call Operator for further assistance
wav

192 RemoteExt.wav Enter the Extension number for which you have to set or cancel Wake Up Alarm

193 RemoteExtH.wa Enter the Room number for which you have to set or cancel Wake Up Alarm
v

194 PreEntry2.wav More than one match found. Names will be played one by one. Press '1' after the
name you want to select. Press '2' to Skip to next name

195 Extra41.wav Blank

196 PerWakeupVeri. You have set Personal Wake up Alarm at…

wav

197 AutoWakeupVer You have set Automated Wake up Alarm at…

i.wav

198 PerWakeupSet. Your Personal Wake up Alarm is set.

wav

199 AutoWakeupSet Your Automated Wake up Alarm is set.

.wav

200 DailyPerWakeup You have set Daily Personal Wake up Alarm at…
Set.wav

201 DailyAutoWakeu You have set Daily Automated Wake up Alarm at…
pVeri.wav

202 DailyPerWakeup Your Daily Personal Wake up Alarm is set.

Veri.wav

942 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 No. Filename Prompts/Responses

203 DailyAutoWakeu Your Daily Automated Wake up Alarm is set.

pSet.wav

204 PerReminderVer You have set Personal Reminder for…

i.wav

205 AutoReminderV You have set Automated Reminder for…

eri.wav

206 PerReminderSet Your Personal Reminder is set.

.wav

207 AutoReminderS Your Automated Reminder is set.

et.wav

208 Alarmmode.wav To set it as Personal, Press 1. To set it as Automated, Press 2.

209 Alarmnocancel. Sorry! There is no Alarm to Cancel.

wav

210 Remindernocan Sorry! There is no Reminder to Cancel.

cel.wav

211 WakeUpgreeting This is your Wake up Call. 'Music of 5 seconds'.

.wav

212 DailyWakeUpgr This is your Daily Wake up Call. 'Music of 5 seconds'.

eeting.wav

213 Remindergreetin This is your Reminder call. 'Music of 5 seconds'

g.wav

214 SWakeUpgreeti This is your Wake up Call. For Acknowledge, Please Press '0'. Music of 5 seconds
ng.wav

215 SDailyWakeUpg This is your Daily Wake up Call. For Acknowledge, Please Press '0'. Music of 5
reeting.wav seconds.

216 SRemindergreet This is your Reminder call. For Acknowledge, Please Press '0'. Music of 5
ing.wav seconds

217 Acknowledge.w Your Alarm is acknowledged.

av

218 Entertime2I.wav Enter the Time, HH MM in Twenty four hour format.

219 Entertime2U.wa Enter the Time, HH MM in Twelve hour format. For am, Press 1. For pm, Press 2.
v

220 RemoteExtRem. Enter the Extension number for which you have to set or cancel Reminder.
wav

221 RemoteExtHRe Enter the Room number for which you have to set or cancel Reminder
m.wav

222 RemAcknowled Your Reminder is acknowledged.

ge.wav

223 Extra36.wav Blank

224 Extra37.wav Blank

225 Extra38.wav Blank

226 Extra39.wav Blank

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 943

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 No. Filename Prompts/Responses

227 Extra40.wav Blank

228 Extra41.wav Blank

229 Extra42.wav Blank

230 Extra43.wav Blank

944 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Area Code Table: USA

Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

1 1201 NJ 2 0

2 1202 DC 2 0

3 1203 CT 2 0

4 1204 Manitoba 2 0

5 1205 AL 2 0

6 1206 WA 2 0

7 1207 NE 2 0

8 1208 ID 2 0

9 1209 CA 2 0

10 1210 TX 2 0

11 1212 NY 2 0

12 1213 CA 2 0

13 1214 TX 2 0

14 1215 PA 2 0

15 1216 OH 2 0

16 1217 IL 2 0

17 1218 MN 2 0

18 1219 IN 2 0

19 1224 IL 2 0

20 1225 LA 2 0

21 1226 Ontario 2 0

22 1228 MS 2 0

23 1229 GA 2 0

24 1231 MI 2 0

25 1234 OH 2 0

26 1239 FL 2 0

27 1240 MD 2 0

28 1242 Bahamas 2 0

29 1246 Barbados 2 0

30 1248 MI 2 0

31 1250 BC 2 0

32 1251 AL 2 0

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 945

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

33 1252 NC 2 0

34 1253 WA 2 0

35 1254 TX 2 0

36 1256 AL 2 0

37 1260 IN 2 0

38 1262 WI 2 0

39 1264 Anguilla 2 0

40 1267 PA 2 0

41 1268 Antigua 2 0

42 1269 MI 2 0

43 1270 KY 2 0

44 1276 VA 2 0

45 1281 TX 2 0

46 1284 BVI 2 0

47 1289 Ontario 2 0

48 1301 MD 2 0

49 1302 DE 2 0

50 1303 CO 2 0

51 1304 WV 2 0

52 1305 FL 2 0

53 1306 Saskatchewan 2 0

54 1307 WY 2 0

55 1308 NE 2 0

56 1309 IL 2 0

57 1310 CA 2 0

58 1312 IL 2 0

59 1313 MI 2 0

60 1314 MO 2 0

61 1315 NY 2 0

62 1316 KS 2 0

63 1317 IN 2 0

64 1318 LA 2 0

65 1319 IA 2 0

66 1320 MN 2 0

946 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

67 1321 FL 2 0

68 1323 CA 2 0

69 1325 TX 2 0

70 1330 OH 2 0

71 1331 IL 2 0

72 1334 AL 2 0

73 1336 NC 2 0

74 1337 LA 2 0

75 1339 MA 2 0

76 1340 USVI 2 0

77 1345 Cayman 2 0

78 1347 NY 2 0

79 1351 MA 2 0

80 1352 FL 2 0

81 1360 WA 2 0

82 1361 TX 2 0

83 1386 FL 2 0

84 1401 RI 2 0

85 1402 NE 2 0

86 1403 Alberta 2 0

87 1404 GA 2 0

88 1405 OK 2 0

89 1406 MT 2 0

90 1407 FL 2 0

91 1408 CA 2 0

92 1409 TX 2 0

93 1410 MD 2 0

94 1412 PA 2 0

95 1413 MA 2 0

96 1414 WI 2 0

97 1415 CA 2 0

98 1416 Ontario 2 0

99 1417 MO 2 0

100 1418 Quebec 2 0

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 947

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

101 1419 OH 2 0

102 1423 TN 2 0

103 1424 CA 2 0

104 1425 WA 2 0

105 1430 TX 2 0

106 1432 TX 2 0

107 1434 VA 2 0

108 1435 UT 2 0

109 1438 Quebec 2 0

110 1440 OH 2 0

111 1441 Bermuda 2 0

112 1443 MD 2 0

113 1450 Quebec 2 0

114 1456 NANParea 2 0

115 1469 TX 2 0

116 1473 Grenada 2 0

117 1478 GA 2 0

118 1479 AR 2 0

119 1480 AZ 2 0

120 1484 PA 2 0

121 1500 NANParea 2 0

122 1501 AR 2 0

123 1502 KY 2 0

124 1503 OR 2 0

125 1504 LA 2 0

126 1505 NM 2 0

127 1506 NewBrunswick 2 0

128 1507 MN 2 0

129 1508 MA 2 0

130 1509 WA 2 0

131 1510 CA 2 0

132 1512 TX 2 0

133 1513 OH 2 0

134 1514 Quebec 2 0

948 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

135 1515 IA 2 0

136 1516 NY 2 0

137 1517 MI 2 0

138 1518 NY 2 0

139 1519 Ontario 2 0

140 1520 AZ 2 0

141 1530 CA 2 0

142 1540 VA 2 0

143 1541 OR 2 0

144 1551 NJ 2 0

145 1559 CA 2 0

146 1561 FL 2 0

147 1562 CA 2 0

148 1563 IA 2 0

149 1567 OH 2 0

150 1570 PA 2 0

151 1571 VA 2 0

152 1573 MO 2 0

153 1574 IN 2 0

154 1575 NM 2 0

155 1580 OK 2 0

156 1585 NY 2 0

157 1586 MI 2 0

158 1600 Canada 2 0

159 1601 MS 2 0

160 1602 AZ 2 0

161 1603 NH 2 0

162 1604 BC 2 0

163 1605 SD 2 0

164 1606 KY 2 0

165 1607 NY 2 0

166 1608 WI 2 0

167 1609 NJ 2 0

168 1610 PA 2 0

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 949

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

169 1612 MN 2 0

170 1613 Ontario 2 0

171 1614 OH 2 0

172 1615 TN 2 0

173 1616 MI 2 0

174 1617 MA 2 0

175 1618 IL 2 0

176 1619 CA 2 0

177 1620 KS 2 0

178 1623 AZ 2 0

179 1626 CA 2 0

180 1630 IL 2 0

181 1631 NY 2 0

182 1636 MO 2 0

183 1641 IA 2 0

184 1646 NY 2 0

185 1647 Ontario 2 0

186 1649 T&CIsland 2 0

187 1650 CA 2 0

188 1651 MN 2 0

189 1660 MO 2 0

190 1661 CA 2 0

191 1662 MS 2 0

192 1664 Montsrat 2 0

193 1670 CNMI 2 0

194 1671 GU 2 0

195 1678 GA 2 0

196 1682 TX 2 0

197 1684 AS 2 0

198 1700 NANParea 2 0

199 1701 ND 2 0

200 1702 NV 2 0

201 1703 VA 2 0

202 1704 NC 2 0

950 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

203 1705 Ontario 2 0

204 1706 GA 2 0

205 1707 CA 2 0

206 1708 IL 2 0

207 1709 Newfoundland 2 0

208 1710 US 2 0

209 1712 IA 2 0

210 1713 TX 2 0

211 1714 CA 2 0

212 1715 WI 2 0

213 1716 NY 2 0

214 1717 PA 2 0

215 1718 NY 2 0

216 1719 CO 2 0

217 1720 CO 2 0

218 1724 PA 2 0

219 1727 FL 2 0

220 1731 TN 2 0

221 1732 NJ 2 0

222 1734 MI 2 0

223 1740 OH 2 0

224 1754 FL 2 0

225 1757 VA 2 0

226 1758 St.Lucia 2 0

227 1760 CA 2 0

228 1762 GA 2 0

229 1763 MN 2 0

230 1765 IN 2 0

231 1767 Dominica 2 0

232 1769 MS 2 0

233 1770 GA 2 0

234 1772 FL 2 0

235 1773 IL 2 0

236 1774 MA 2 0

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 951

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

237 1775 NV 2 0

238 1778 BC 2 0

239 1779 IL 2 0

240 1780 Alberta 2 0

241 1781 MA 2 0

242 1784 St. V&G 2 0

243 1785 KS 2 0

244 1786 FL 2 0

245 1787 PrtoRico 2 0

246 1800 NANParea 2 0

247 1801 UT 2 0

248 1802 VT 2 0

249 1803 SC 2 0

250 1804 VA 2 0

251 1805 CA 2 0

252 1806 TX 2 0

253 1807 Ontario 2 0

254 1808 HI 2 0

255 1809 DomRepub 2 0

256 1810 MI 2 0

257 1812 IN 2 0

258 1813 FL 2 0

259 1814 PA 2 0

260 1815 IL 2 0

261 1816 MO 2 0

262 1817 TX 2 0

263 1818 CA 2 0

264 1819 Quebec 2 0

265 1828 NC 2 0

266 1829 DomRepub 2 0

267 1830 TX 2 0

268 1831 CA 2 0

269 1832 TX 2 0

270 1843 SC 2 0

952 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

271 1845 NY 2 0

272 1847 IL 2 0

273 1848 NJ 2 0

274 1850 FL 2 0

275 1856 NJ 2 0

276 1857 MA 2 0

277 1858 CA 2 0

278 1859 KY 2 0

279 1860 CT 2 0

280 1862 NJ 2 0

281 1863 FL 2 0

282 1864 SC 2 0

283 1865 TN 2 0

284 1866 NANParea 2 0

285 1867 Yukon 2 0

286 1868 Tri&Tob 2 0

287 1869 St. K&N 2 0

288 1870 AR 2 0

289 1876 Jamaica 2 0

290 1877 NANParea 2 0

291 1878 PA 2 0

292 1888 NANParea 2 0

293 1900 NANParea 2 0

294 1901 TN 2 0

295 1902 N Scotia 2 0

296 1903 TX 2 0

297 1904 FL 2 0

298 1905 Ontario 2 0

299 1906 MI 2 0

300 1907 AK 2 0

301 1908 NJ 2 0

302 1909 CA 2 0

303 1910 NC 2 0

304 1912 GA 2 0

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 953

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

305 1913 KS 2 0

306 1914 NY 2 0

307 1915 TX 2 0

308 1916 CA 2 0

309 1917 NY 2 0

310 1918 OK 2 0

311 1919 NC 2 0

312 1920 WI 2 0

313 1925 CA 2 0

314 1928 AZ 2 0

315 1931 TN 2 0

316 1936 TX 2 0

317 1937 OH 2 0

318 1939 PrtoRico 2 0

319 1940 TX 2 0

320 1941 FL 2 0

321 1947 MI 2 0

322 1949 CA 2 0

323 1951 CA 2 0

324 1952 MN 2 0

325 1954 FL 2 0

326 1956 TX 2 0

327 1970 CO 2 0

328 1971 OR 2 0

329 1972 TX 2 0

330 1973 NJ 2 0

331 1978 MA 2 0

332 1979 TX 2 0

333 1980 NC 2 0

334 1985 LA 2 0

335 1989 MI 2 0

336 0117 Kazkstan 2

337 01120 Egypt 2

338 01127 South Africa 2

954 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

339 01130 Greece 2

340 01131 Netherlands 2

341 01132 Belgium 2

342 01133 France 2

343 01134 Spain 2

344 01136 Hungary 2

345 01139 VaticanCity 2

346 01140 Romania 2

347 01141 Switzerland 2

348 01143 Austria 2

349 01144 UK 2

350 01145 Denmark 2

351 01146 Sweden 2

352 01147 Norway 2

353 01148 Poland 2

354 01149 Germany 2

355 01151 Peru 2

356 01152 Mexico 2

357 01153 Cuba 2

358 01154 Argentine 2

359 01155 Brazil 2

360 01156 Chile 2

361 01157 Colombia 2

362 01158 Venezuela 2

363 01160 Malaysia 2

364 01161 Australia 2

365 01162 Indonesia 2

366 01163 Philippines 2

367 01164 NZ 2

368 01165 Singapore 2

369 01166 Thailand 2

370 01181 Japan 2

371 01182 Korea 2

372 01184 VietNam 2

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 955

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

373 01186 China 2

374 01190 Turkey 2

375 01191 India 2

376 01192 Pakistan 2

377 01193 Afghanistan 2

378 01194 Sri Lanka 2

379 01195 Myanmar 2

380 01198 Iran 2

381 011212 Morocco 2

382 011213 Algeria 2

383 011216 Tunisia 2

384 011218 Libya 2

385 011220 Gambia 2

386 011221 Senegal 2

387 011222 Mauritania 2

388 011223 Mali 2

389 011224 Guinea 2

390 011225 IvoryCoast 2

391 011226 BurkinaFaso 2

392 011227 Niger 2

393 011228 Togolese 2

394 011229 Benin 2

395 011230 Mauritius 2

396 011231 Liberia 2

397 011232 SierraLeone 2

398 011233 Ghana 2

399 011234 Nigeria 2

400 011235 Chad 2

401 011236 CenAfrica 2

402 011237 Cameroon 2

403 011238 CapeVerde 2

404 011239 SaoTome 2

405 011240 Equtl_Guinea 2

406 011241 Gabonese 2

956 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

407 011242 Congo 2

408 011243 CongoDem 2

409 011244 Angola 2

410 011245 GuineaBissa 2

411 011246 DiegoGarcia 2

412 011247 Ascension 2

413 011248 Seychelles 2

414 011249 Sudan 2

415 011250 Rwandese 2

416 011251 Ethiopia 2

417 011252 SomalianRep 2

418 011253 Djibouti 2

419 011254 Kenya 2

420 011255 Tanzania 2

421 011256 Uganda 2

422 011257 Burundi 2

423 011258 Mozambiqu 2

424 011260 Zambia 2

425 011261 Madagascar 2

426 011262 Reunion 2

427 011263 Zimbabwe 2

428 011264 Namibia 2

429 011265 Malawi 2

430 011266 Lesotho 2

431 011267 Botswana 2

432 011268 Swaziland 2

433 011269 Comoros 2

434 011290 StHelena 2

435 011291 Eritrea 2

436 011297 Aruba 2

437 011298 FaroeIsland 2

438 011299 Greenland 2

439 011350 Gibraltar 2

440 011351 Portugal 2

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 957

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

441 011352 Luxembourg 2

442 011353 Ireland 2

443 011354 Iceland 2

444 011355 Albania 2

445 011356 Malta 2

446 011357 Cyprus 2

447 011358 Finland 2

448 011359 Bulgaria 2

449 011370 Lithuania 2

450 011371 Latvia 2

451 011372 Estonia 2

452 011373 Moldova 2

453 011374 Armenia 2

454 011375 Belarus 2

455 011376 Andorra 2

456 011377 Monaco 2

457 011378 SanMarino 2

458 011379 VaticanCity 2

459 011380 Ukraine 2

460 011381 Yugoslavia 2

461 011385 Croatia 2

462 011386 Slovenia 2

463 011387 Bosnia 2

464 011389 Macedonia 2

465 011420 Czech Repub 2

466 011421 Slovakia 2

467 011423 Liechtensten 2

468 011500 Falkland 2

469 011501 Belize 2

470 011502 Guatemala 2

471 011503 El Salvador 2

472 011504 Honduras 2

473 011505 Nicaragua 2

474 011506 CostaRica 2

958 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

475 011507 Panama 2

476 011508 St.Pierre 2

477 011509 Haiti 2

478 011590 Guadeloupe 2

479 011591 Bolivia 2

480 011592 Guyana 2

481 011593 Ecuador 2

482 011594 FrenchGuiana 2

483 011595 Paraguay 2

484 011596 Martinique 2

485 011597 Suriname 2

486 011598 Uruguay 2

487 011599 NethAntilles 2

488 011670 East Timor 2

489 011672 Antarctic 2

490 011673 Brunei 2

491 011674 Nauru 2

492 011675 PapuaNewGuin 2

493 011676 Tonga 2

494 011677 SolomonIslnd 2

495 011678 Vanuatu 2

496 011679 Fiji 2

497 011680 Palau 2

498 011681 Wallis Island 2

499 011682 Cook Islands 2

500 011683 Niuel Island 2

501 011684 AmerSamoa 2

502 011685 WSamoa 2

503 011686 Kiribati 2

504 011687 NewCaledonia 2

505 011688 Tuvalu 2

506 011689 FrenchPolyne 2

507 011690 Tokelau 2

508 011691 Micronesia 2

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 959

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

509 011692 MarshalIslnd 2

510 011850 Korea North 2

511 011852 Hongkong 2

512 011853 Macau 2

513 011855 Cambodia 2

514 011856 Laos 2

515 011870 SatIndlOcn 2

516 011871 SatEastAtl 2

517 011872 SatPacific 2

518 011873 SatIndianOcn 2

519 011874 SatWestAtl 2

520 011880 Bangladesh 2

521 011960 Maldives 2

522 011961 Lebanon 2

523 011962 Jordan 2

524 011963 SyrianArab 2

525 011964 Iraq 2

526 011965 Kuwait 2

527 011966 SaudiArabia 2

528 011967 Yemen 2

529 011968 Oman 2

530 011971 UAE 2

531 011972 Israel 2

532 011973 Bahrain 2

533 011974 Qatar 2

534 011975 Bhutan 2

535 011976 Mongolia 2

536 011977 Nepal 2

537 011992 Tajikistan 2

538 011993 Turkmenistan 2

539 011994 Azerbaijani 2

540 011995 Georgia 2

541 011996 Kyrgyzstan 2

542 011998 Uzbekistan 2

960 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count

543 2

544 2

545 2

546 2

547 2

: 2

998 2

999 2

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 961

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Feature List

Abbreviated Dialing (Global &

Access Codes (Programmable) Account Codes
Personal)
Alarms (Time, Daily, Future Date &
Alarms - Multiple, Snooze Allowed and Denied Lists
Time, Remote)
Alternate Number Dialing Anonymous Call Rejection (SIP) Auto Call Back (Busy, No Reply)
Auto Redial Auto-Attendant Automatic Number Translation
Backup-System Configuration,
Barge-In Boss Ring
Software, SMDR
Call Back on Mobile Port Call Budget on Extensions Call Budget on Trunks
Call Chaining Call Cost Calculation Call Cost Display
Call Duration Control Call Follow Me Call Forking (SIP)
Call Forward (Busy, No Reply, Dual Call Logs – Missed, Received and Call Park (General and Personal
Ring and External Number) Dialed Orbit)
Call Progress Tones
Call Pick Up (Group, Selective) Call Toggle
(Programmable)
Call Transfer (Screened, On Busy, Caller ID Presentation and
Call Taping
While Ringing, Trunk to Trunk) Restriction
Closed User Group (With/Without
Caller ID based Routing Conference – 6 Participants
Exchange ID)
Conference Dial-in Conflict Dialing Conversation Recording
Daylight Saving Time (DST) Department/Group Call Dialed Number Directory
Digest Authentication (SIP) Direct Dialing-in (SIP) Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward System Access Direct Station Selection Console
Distinctive Rings
(DISA) (DSS Console)
Do-Not-Disturb (DND) Do-Not-Disturb (Remote) Door Phone (4-Wire) with Relay
Embedded SIP Registrar and Proxy
Dynamic DNS (DDNS) Dynamic Lock (Manual)
Servers
Emergency Calls Detection and
Emergency Number Dialing External Call Forward
Reporting
Fax over IP (T.38 Relay and Pass-
File Transfer Protocol Flexible Numbering (Up to 6 Digits)
Through)
Forced Answer Forced Call Disconnection Hold
Hot Desking Hot Outward Dialing Hotline
Hunting/User Groups Incoming Call Management Last Number Redial
Least Cost Routing (Time, Number, Live Call Screening (Voice Mail
Live Call Supervision
Time and Number) System)
Logical Partitioning Manual BTS Selection Maturity (Polarity Reversal, Delay)
Message Wait Indication (LED,
Meet Me Paging Shattered Dial tone, Voice Mobile Extension (CLI based DISA)
Message)
Mobile Twinning Multi-Stage Dialing Music-on-Hold
Name Programming (Extension,
NAT and STUN Network Selection (GSM)
Trunk)
OFF-Hook Alert (DKP, IP phone) Online SMDR Operator (Single, Multiple)
Paging (DKP and IP Phone) Peer-to-Peer Calling Priority (Intercom and Trunk)
Return Call to Original Caller
Raid Scheduled Call Forward
(RCOC)

962 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Selective Trunk Access SIM Balance Inquiry and Recharge SIP and RTP QoS (VoIP)
Call Accounting System Interface SMDR (Incoming, Outgoing and
Station In-Service/Out-Service
(SMDR Posting) Internal – 12000 calls)
SA and SE Mode System Fault Log System Security (Passwords)
Time Zone Display Trunk Auto Answer Trunk Reservation
Virtual Stations Voice Mail Integration Voice Mail to Email Notification
Voice Prompts for Tones Walk-in Class of Service Web based Programming

LICENSED FEATURES
IP USERS LICENSE IP8: License to enable 8 IP Users
VMS LICENSE License to enable Voice Mail System

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 963

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Features at a Glance

Abbreviated Dialing

Personal/Global Abbreviated Dialing 8-Location Code

Program Personal memory 1071-Location Code-Number-#*-TAC

Account Code

Account Code by Number 1058-Account Code

Account Code by Name 1059-Account Name

Alarms

Once Only Alarm 161-Hours-Minutes-1

Daily Alarms 161-Hours-Minutes-2

Cancel Once Only/Daily Alarm 161-#

Set/Cancel Voice Guided Alarm 163-Follow VMS Prompts

Auto Call Back

Auto Call Back-On Busy 2

Auto Call Back-On No Reply 2

Cancel Auto Call Back 102

Auto Redial

Auto Redial 17

Cancel Auto Redial 1070

Barge-In

Barge-In 4

Call Cost Display

Last Ten dialed numbers Cost display 1075

Call Chaining

Call Chaining 1050

964 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Forward

Call Forward-All Calls to Another Extension 131-Extension/Department Group/VMS

Call Forward-All Calls to External Extension 131-Trunk Access Code-Dest. Number-#*

Call Forward-If Busy 132-Extension/Department Group/VMS

Call Forward-If Busy-All Calls to External Number 132-Trunk Access Code-Dest. Number-#*

Call Forward-If No Reply 133-Extension/Department Group/VMS

Call Forward-If No Reply-All Calls to External Number 133-Trunk Access Code-Dest. Number-#*

Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply 134-Extension/Department Group/VMS

Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply-All to External

134-Trunk Access Code-Dest. Number-#*
Number

Call Forward-Dual Ring 1361

Disable Call Forward-Dual Ring 1360

Cancel Call Forward 130

Call Forward - Scheduled

Call Forward-Scheduled 1175-Time Zone

Call Hold

Put the caller on Hold Flash

Retrieve the caller Flash

Call Park

To Park a Call 115-Orbit Number

To Retrieve the Parked Call 116-Orbit Number

Call Pick Up

Call Pick Up-General 4

Call Pick Up-Selective 12-Extension

Call Toggle

Call Toggle (Toggle) Flash-1

Call Transfer

Call Transfer to Extension Speech with Extension-Flash-Extension (Transfer

Target)-OnHook

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 965

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Call Transfer to Extension (External Number) Speech with External Number-Flash-Extension
(Transfer Target)-OnHook

Call Transfer to Trunk (External) Speech with External Number -Flash-#-TAC-

External Number (Transfer Target)-Flash-#

Call Transfer to Trunk Speech with Extension -Flash-TAC-External

Number-Go OnHook

Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) Flash-1078-Extension

Calling Line Identification Restriction

Enable/disable CLIR 103

Cancel All Extension Features

Cancel all Extension features 1051

Conference 3-Party

Conference 3-Party Flash-0

Conference-Unsupervised Flash-#

Conference Dial-In

Schedule a Conference 194-Conference Number-Conference Password

Initiate a Conference 195-Conference Number-Conference Password

To include a Extension in a midway of conference 191

Cancel a Conference 196-Conference Number-Conference Password/

190

Conference Multiparty

Conference Multiparty Flash-191

To exclude a Extension from mid of conference 192

Terminate Conference 190

Conversation Recording

Conversation Recording Flash-1095

Department Call

Department Call Department Number (3901-3916)

966 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Direct Inward System Access

Enter DISA Mode 1079-Extension Number-User Password

Do Not Disturb

Set Do Not Disturb with Text Message 18-DND Message Number

Cancel Do Not Disturb 18-0

DND Override 4

Door Phone

Set Door Phone as Scheduled Mode 1171-Access Code of Door Phone-1

Set Door Phone as Manual Mode 1171-Access Code of Door Phone-2

Set Door Phone to route calls to an extension 1172-Access Code of Door Phone-1

Set Door Phone to route calls to an external number 1172-Access Code of Door Phone-2

To open the Door Lock 1173

Dynamic Lock

Set Dynamic Timer 142-User Password-Minutes

Change Toll Control Level 141-User Password-Level

Flashing on Trunks

Flashing on Trunks Flash-*

Floor Service

To access Floor Service 38

Follow Me

Set Call Follow Me 135-Extension-User Password

Cancel Call Follow Me 130

Forced Answer

Forced Answer 5

Forced Call Disconnection

Forced Call Disconnection #*

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 967

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 General Mailbox

To access General Mailbox 1176-Follow Voice Mail prompts

Hot Desking

Set Hot Desk 1091-Your Extension Number-User Password

Hotline

Set Hotline 151-Extension

Set Hotline Timer 154-Seconds

Hot Outward Dialing 152-Trunk Access Code

HOD with Number 153-Trunk Access Code-Number-#*

Cancel Hotline/HOD 150

Interrupt Request

Interrupt Request 3

Last Caller Recall

Last Caller Recall 1092

Last Number Redial

Last Number Redial 7

Live Call Screening

To Activate LCS 1094-1

To Deactivate LCS 1094-0

Live Call Supervision

Set Live Call Supervision 1098-Destination Extension

Meet Me Paging

Meet Me Paging-Caller 1093-Page Zone Number

Meet Me Paging-Called Party 1093-Extension Number of the Caller

968 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Message Wait

Message Wait Set/Cancel 1076-Extension-Code

Message Wait Retrieval 1077

Mute

Mute 1052

Operator

Call to Operator 9

Paging

Paging 1074-Page Zone Number

Presence

Publishing Presence by extension user 104-Password-Index No.

To view Presence Status 1097-Extension Number

Raid

Raid 5

RCOC

RCOC in DISA Mode ** on dial tone

Reminder

Set Reminder 162-DD-MM-YYYY-HH-MM

Cancel Reminder 162-#

Set/Cancel Voice Guided Reminder 164-Follow VMS Prompts

Room Monitor

Room Monitor 1073-Extension

Selective Port Access

Selective Port Access 69-Port Type-Port Number

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 969

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Self Ring Test

Self Ring Test 1057

System Administrator Mode

Enter System Administrator Mode 1#92-SA Password

Exit SA Mode 1#92

SA Command 1072

System Engineer Mode

Enter System Engineer Mode 1#91-SE Password

Exit SE Mode 00

Trunk Reservation

Reserve a Trunk 6

Cancel a Reserved Trunk 102

User Absent/Present

User Absent 104-User Password-0

User Present 104-User Password-1

User Password

Change User Password 114-Old User Password-New User Password

Voice Help

Voice Help 1090

Voice Mail

Voice Mail System 3931

Walk-In Class Of Service

To Walk-In 111-1-Extension Password

To Walk-Out 111-0

970 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Acronyms

ACB Auto Call Back

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

ANSI American National Standard Institute

ANT Automatic Number Translation

BCC Byte Check Code

BGM Background Music

BH Break Hours

BI Barge-In

BPS Bits per second

BSCs Base Station Controllers

BSS Base Station Subsystem

BTSs Base Transceivers Stations

CAS Channel Associated Signaling, Call Accounting Software

CCC Call Cost Calculation

CCWT External Call Waiting Tone

CD Carrier Detect

CDC Call Duration Control

CDR Call Detail Record

CLIP Calling Line Identification and Presentation

CLIR Calling Line Identity Restriction

CO Central Office

COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation

COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction

COS Class of Service

CPC Calling Party Control

CPD Call Progress Detection

CPTG Call Progress Tone (Generation)

CPU Call Pickup

CPW Custom Pulse Width

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CTS Clear to Send

CPE Customer Premise Equipment

CUG Closed User Group

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 971

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CVT Constant Voltage Transformer

DCD Data Carrier Detected

DCE Data Communication Equipment (Data circuit terminating equipment)

DDI Direct Dialing-In

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DID Direct Inward Dialing

DIP Digital Input Port

DISA Direct Inward System Access

DKP Digital Key Phone

DND Do Not Disturb

DNS Domain Name System

DOP Digital Output Port

DSR Data Signal Ready

DST Daylight Saving Time

DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency

DTR Data Terminal Ready

EID Exchange ID

ENQ Enquiry

ETX End of Text

FAS Frame alignment signal

FIFO First In First Out

FM Frequency Modulation

FSK Frequency Shift Keying

FTP File Transfer Protocol

GDT Gas Discharge Tube

GND Ground

GSM Global System for Mobile

GPRS General Purpose Radio Service

HDSL High Speed Digital Subscriber Line

HLR Home Location Register

IC Incoming call

ICWT Internal Call Waiting Tone

INEI International Mobile Equipment Identity

IP Internet Protocol

IR Interrupt

972 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ISP Internet Service Provider

ITU International Telecommunication Union

IVDT Integral Voice/Data Terminal

LA Left Align

LAN Local Area Network

LAN NIC Network Interface Card

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LCM Line Coding Mechanism

LCR Least Cost Routing

LCS Live Call Screening

LE Local Exchange

LED Light Emitting Diode

LIFO Last in First Out

LNR Last Number Redial

LOF Loss of Frame

LOS Loss of signal

LSR Least Cost Routing

MAC Media Access Control Address

MCC Mobile Country Code

MCI Malicious Call Identification

MDF Main Distribution Frame

MFA Multi-Frame Alignment

MNC Mobile Network Code

MOH Music on Hold

MOV Metal Oxide Varistor

MS Mobile Station

MSC Mobile Switching Center

MSN Multiple Subscribers Numbers

MTBF Mean Time between Failures

NH Non Working Hour

NPI Numbering Plan Identification, Number Planning Index

NSS Network and Switching Subsystem

NT1/2 Network Termination (Type 1/2)

OG Outgoing

OMC Operation Maintenance Centers

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 973

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OOF Out of Frame

OSI Open Systems Interconnect

OSS Operation Support Subsystem

PBX Private Branch Exchange

PC Personal Computer

PCM Primary Interface Compounding

PIN Personal Identification Number

PISN Private Integrated Service Network

PMS Property Management Software

POTS Plain Old Telephone Systems

PPDC Pre PSTN Digit Count

PPM Primary Protection Module

PPS Pulse per second

PS Power Supply

PSK Phase Shift Keying

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network

PUK Personal Unlock Key

QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

QSIG Q-Signaling

RA Right Align

RBT Ring Back Tone

RF Radio Frequency

RI Ring Indicator

RLSD Receive Line Signal Detector (also called Carrier Detect)

RTC Real Time Clock

RTS Request to Send

RXD Receive data

SA System Administrator

SAL System Activity Log

SE System Engineer

SEFS Severely Eroded Framed Seconds

SES Severely eroded seconds

SFL System Fault Log

SID Exchange Identity

SIP Session Initiated Protocol

974 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SIM Subscriber Identity Module

SLIC Subscriber Loop Integrated System

SLT 2 wire Analog Station, Single Line Telephone

SMDR Station Message Detail Recording

SMPS Switch Mode Power Supply

SP Service Provider

STX Start of Text

SPID Service Provider Identifier

TAC Trunk Access Code

TAG Trunk Access Group

TCM Trellis Coding Modulation

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

CO Two Wire Trunks, 2 wire Analog Trunk Card

UART Universal Asynchronous receiver/transmitter

UPS Un-interrupted Power Supply

VIC Voice Interface Card

VLR Visitor Location Register

VMS Voice Mail System

VMA Voice Message Application

WAN Wide Area Network

WH Working Hours

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 975

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warranty Statement

Matrix Comsec Pvt. Ltd. (Matrix) warrants to its consumer purchaser any of its products to be free of defects in
material, workmanship and performance for a period of 15 months from date of manufacturing or 12 months from
the date of installation which ever is earlier.

During this warranty period, Matrix will at its option, repair or replace the product at no additional charge if the
product is found to have manufacturing defect. Any replacement product or part(s) may be furnished on an
exchange basis, which shall be new or like-new, provided that it has functionality at least equal to that of the
product, being replaced. All replacement parts and products will be the property of Matrix. Parts repaired or
replaced will be under warranty throughout the remainder of the original warranty period only.

This limited warranty does not apply to:

1. Products that have been subjected to abuse, accident, natural disaster, misuse, modification, tampering,
faulty installation, lack of reasonable care, repair or service in any way that is not contemplated in the
documentation for the product or if the model or serial number has been altered, tampered with, defaced or
removed.

2. Products which have been damaged by lightning storms, water or power surges or which have been
neglected, altered, used for a purpose other than the one for which they were manufactured, repaired by
customer or any party without Matrix’s written authorization or used in any manner inconsistent with
Matrix’s instructions.

3. Products received improperly packed or physically damaged.

4. Products damaged due to operation of product outside the products’ specifications or use without
designated protections.

Warranty valid only if:

• Primary protection on all the ports provided.

• Mains supply is within limit and protected.

• Environment conditions are maintained as per the product specifications.

Warranty Card:
• When the product is installed, please return the warranty card with:

• Date, signature and stamp of the customer

• Date, signature and stamp of the channel partner

• Matrix assumes that the customer agrees with the warranty terms even when the warranty card is not
signed and returned as suggested.

The Purchaser shall have to bear shipping charges for sending product to Matrix for testing/rectification. The
product shall be shipped to the Purchaser at no-charge if the material is found to be under warranty. The Purchaser
shall have to either insure the product or assume liability for loss or damage during transit.

Matrix reserves the right to waive off or make any changes in its warranty policy without giving any notice.

976 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If Matrix is unable to repair or replace, as applicable, a defective product which is covered by Matrix warranty,
Matrix shall, within a reasonable time after being notified of the defect, refund the purchase price of the product
provided the consumer/purchaser returns the product to Matrix.

In no event will Matrix be liable for any damages including lost profits, lost business, lost savings, downtime or
delay, labor, repair or material cost, injury to person, property or other incidental or consequential damages arising
out of use of or inability to use such product, even if Matrix has been advised of the possibility of such damages or
losses or for any claim by any other party.

Except for the obligations specifically set forth in this Warranty Policy Statement, in no event shall Matrix be liable
for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract or any other legal
theory and where advised of the possibility of such damages.

Neither Matrix nor any of its distributors, dealers or sub-dealers makes any other warranty of any kind, whether
expressed or implied, with respect to Matrix products. Matrix and its distributors, dealers or sub-dealers specifically
disclaim the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

This warranty is not transferable and applies only to the original consumer purchaser of the Product. Warranty shall
be void if the warranty card is not completed and registered with Matrix within 30 days of installation.

All legal course of action subjected to Vadodara (Gujarat, India) Jurisdiction only.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 977

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Open Source Licensing Terms and Conditions
• The firmware of this product also includes some of the Open-Source software released under GNU
General Public License (GPL) Version 2. Terms of this license is printed in full below.

• The source of the open source software used in this product is available on CD, upon written request from:

R&D Team
Matrix Comsec Pvt Ltd
394, Makarpura GIDC,
Vadodara - 390 010
Gujarat
India.
Customer shall bear the shipping and handling charges.

GNU NENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,

51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not

price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid

anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether

gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
rights.

978 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
authors' reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software

patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and

modification follow.

GNU NENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains

a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not

covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's

source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 979

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices

stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.

b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.

c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively

when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
the Program is not required to print an announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If

identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest

your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program

with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.

3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable

source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three

years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your

980 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,

c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer

to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
received the program in object code or executable form with such
an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
special exception, the source code distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
itself accompanies the executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering

access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program

except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
parties remain in full compliance.

5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Program or works based on it.

6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
this License.

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 981

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under

any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any

patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to

be a consequence of the rest of this License.

8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in

certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program

specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.

982 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARNE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY

FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
NERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUNE THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING

WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMANES,
INCLUDING ANY NENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMANES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMANES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest

possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.

To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest

to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify

it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,

but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of

Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 983

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this

when it starts in an interactive mode:

Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author

Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.

The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts
of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called
something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or
menu items--whatever suits your program.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program

`Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989

Ty Coon, President of Vice

This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
Public License instead of this License.

984 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Matrix ETERNITY NE System Manual 985

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 www.matrixtelecom.hu
Version 1, February 2011

Magyarországon a Matrix Telecom Ltd. képviselete,

Matrix termékek importőre, kizárólagos forgalmazója:

1095 Budapest, Mester u. 34.

Telefon: *218-5542, 215-9771, 215-7550, 216-7017, 216-7018
Fax: 218-5542 Mobil: 30 940-1970, 20 949-2688
E-mail: [email protected] Web: www.delton.hu

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine